JP2021037340A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: A distribution member 31983 is disposed on a rear side (on the right side in Figure 178 (a)) from a first winning port 64. Therefore, game balls are displaced in a front-rear direction (in a left-right direction in Figure 178 (a)) during a period from the entrance to the first winning port 64 to the arrival at the distribution member 31983. Consequently, a player who is viewing game balls on the front side of a game board 13 moving in a downward direction (in the downward direction in Figure 178 (a)) or moving in the left-right direction (in a perpendicular direction to the paper in Figure 178 (a)) is caused to view the displacement of the game balls in a different direction (in the front-rear direction) from before. In this way, amusement of games can be improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 178

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is known a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side (Patent Document 1). ).

JP-A-2017-148189

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is insufficient.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 distributes the ball entry port into which the game ball is inserted and the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side. A member is provided, and the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game ball that has entered the ball entry port in a state after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the one side is said. A configuration that acts on the game ball before it is distributed to the other side by the distribution member, and a ball that enters the ball entrance in a state after the distribution member distributes the game ball to the other side. The configuration is different from the configuration in which the game ball acts on the game ball until it is distributed to the one side by the distribution member.

The game machine according to claim 3 is the game machine according to claim 2, and includes a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port to the distribution member, and the direction of rotation of the distribution member. In the visual view, the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side, and the swing is located at a position biased from the lower side in the vertical direction of the exit of the guidance passage to the other side. The branch member is arranged.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, damage can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is sectional drawing of the window part movable unit in line XX of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member showing the toothed state of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a top view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base member. It is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a light guide member, a plate-shaped displacement member, and a hollow member in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of the 2nd operation unit. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rotational displacement of a large receiving part. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the LXXII-LXXII line of FIG. 58. (A) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit and the specific winning opening unit in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the sorting unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit according to the eighth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the front unit on the CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the front unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a side view of the first side surface base in the arrow CLIa direction view of FIG. 149, (b) is a side view of the first side surface base in the arrow CLIb direction view of FIG. 149, and (c) is a side view of the first side surface base. , FIG. 149 is a side view of the second side surface base in the arrow CLIc direction view of FIG. 149, and FIG. 149 is a side view of the second side surface base in the arrow CLId direction view of FIG. 149. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CLIIIa-CLIIa line of FIG. 147 (a). It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in line CLIII-CLIII of FIG. 152 (a). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, (b) is a top view of the passage unit, (c) is a side view of the passage unit, and (d) is a view of FIG. 154 (a). It is sectional drawing of the passage unit in the CLIVd-CLIVd line. (A) is a perspective front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLVIII-CLVIII line of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the closed state of a wing member, and (b) shows the open state of a wing member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the closed state of the wing member, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit in the closed state of the wing member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the open state of the wing member, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit in the open state of the wing member. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the state which the distribution member was arranged in the 1st position, (b) is the distribution member. Is illustrated in the second position. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line of FIG. 161 and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line of FIG. 162 (a). It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in 19th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 20th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 21st Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 22nd Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 23rd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 24th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in (a), the state which the distribution member was arranged at the 1st position is illustrated. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 25th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 26th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 27th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 28th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 29th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 31st Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 32nd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 33rd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), a state in which the distribution member is displaced forward while maintaining the posture (angle) arranged at the first position inside the bearing portion described later is illustrated, (c). Shows a state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 34th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 35th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 36th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 37th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 38th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in (a), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the 1st position is illustrated. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit according to the 39th embodiment, and shows a state in which the distribution member is arranged at the first position corresponding to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 40th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). (A) is a side view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side.

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the wing member 945 (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. Long time is set. When the wing member 945 is in the open state (open state), the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the wing member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the wing member is hit once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the 945 is opened than during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit. At least one may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit is not performed, only the hit probability of the second symbol. May be changed so as to increase compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in operation (open).

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the feather member 945 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball to the second winning opening 140 may be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 for each hit. If the player is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 140 may be configured to be five.

A wing member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. The wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), And the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a feather member as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the wing member attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the wing member, Launch the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, you will get many chances of a big hit lottery and become a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. , A ball is launched so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called "right-handed"), and the wing member is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the wing member is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, pair of left and right window movable units 150, balls ejected from the game area It is configured by assembling a ball flow unit 290 or the like that can flow down, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of plywood in which veneer plates are overlapped, and the base plate 60 is arranged so that the player does not see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. It is formed so as to be shieldable at 60.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 is drilled for passing electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67, in addition to a through hole for disposing the variable display device unit 80 at a substantially central position. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through holes 60a to be provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b recessed so as to be recessed with the front end portion of the operation unit 300. The lower left and right sides are provided with a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) light transmission holes 60c formed in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position where the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side can pass through, and the effect of the game board 13 is improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passing hole 60c, the flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 formed of a light transmissive resin material are arranged, and the outer side 94 of the flowing bottom constituent members 91 and 92 is the light passing hole. The flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner of lining the 60c.

The left and right flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 have a substantially symmetrical shape except that the covering plate FB is arranged on the front side of the right flow bottom constituent member 92. The member 91 will be described in detail, and the description of the flow bottom component member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the flow bottom component member 91, a plate-shaped portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60 is formed in a strip-shaped portion having a width equivalent to that of the inner rail 61, and the game area Is partitioned, and the game is partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, the outer portion 94 which is the outer portion (front view outer portion) of the game area partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, and the strip-shaped portion 93. It includes an inner portion 95 which is an inner portion (inner portion in front view) of the region.

As described above, the outer portion 94 is outside the gaming area, and is therefore configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consider the influence on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

Further, as a result of designing the outer portion 94 to be thin, even if the wall thickness of the inner portion 95 is reduced, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95, so that the rigidity of the base plate 60 is increased. Can be used to suppress the displacement (deformation in the thickness direction) of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction. Further, by designing the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to be thin, the front-rear width of the game area can be sufficiently secured.

In this way, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the function required for the inner portion 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to see through the outer portion 94.

In the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the back surface side through the wall thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) as in the present embodiment and arranging the light emitting means on the back side thereof, the base plate 60 is composed of a wooden plate member, and the base plate 60 is formed. The brightness visually recognizable through the can be easily changed.

For example, when forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized so as to be continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions in a front view, it is arranged on an illuminated substrate 777 arranged on the back side of the outer portion 94. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 with a plurality of types and changing the brightness of the outer portion 94, the appearance of the same decorative pattern can be changed with a plurality of types.

Further, for example, a decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

The mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode is not limited at all. For example, a member typified by an illumination plate, which is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle of light irradiation, may be used. Further, for example, a member designed to change the visually recognized pattern by changing the emission color may be used on the premise that the pattern is drawn in a plurality of colors and a plurality of colors of the emitted light are prepared. ..

The inner portion 95 is arranged inside the game area as described above. If the inner portion 95 is displaced (deformed), it may affect the ball flowing down the game area. However, in the present embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95. (Because the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side with respect to the strip 93 in the front view), the rigidity of the base plate 60 is used to displace the inner part 95 (because the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side). Deformation) can be prevented. As a result, the flow of the sphere can be stabilized.

A general winning opening 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95, the general winning opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow bottom component member 91 is the front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed by fixing it from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window movable unit 150 is arranged at the left and right upper corners of the center frame 86. Are arranged.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 7, the lower part of the game board 13 is not shown, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and shown in a front perspective.

The window movable unit 150 is a displacement member 151 that is rotatable and displaceable and is configured to be visible to the player in the window inside the center frame 86, and is disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. It is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force for driving 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape in the front-rear direction, and is arranged at both tip portions of a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end portion formed near a bent portion and the bifurcated portion 152, and the back surface side is opened. It is provided with a tip portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) and an overhanging portion 154 protruding in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip portion 153 is fastened to an effect portion 153a formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side and arranged so that the player can see it, and to the open portion side of the effect portion 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped portion 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped portion and has a shape in which the opposite side of the directing portion 153a is narrower than that of the directing portion 153a side.

The effect portion 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner side surface, and can diffuse the light emitted from the back surface side to the inside of the open portion, so that the light actually emitted is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated to the light, the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a from the front side can visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale).

The overhanging portion 154 is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a projecting from the center frame 86 side in a displaceable range in both directions in the rotational direction. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable at an angle (an angle of less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the overhanging portion 154.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 is a metal whose contact member 161 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7) and one end (front end) is connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to each other. A transmission shaft rod portion 162 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment), a driven member 163 connected to the other end (rear side end) of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and a transmission shaft rod portion. A known E-ring 164 fitted to both ends of 162 from the radial direction and a transmission shaft rod portion 162 are configured to be axially supportable, and the entire support case 170 is arranged in a case shape and inside the support case 170. It is provided with an illuminated substrate 180 to be installed.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a columnar member having a perfect circular outer shape in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the middle abdomen, and is cut into a plane shape from a predetermined radial direction at both ends. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. By fitting the both end portions with the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, the contact member 161, the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and the driven member 163 are relative to each other. It is connected so that it cannot rotate (integrally).

The abutting member 161 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 161a through which an insertion hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. The arm portion 161c extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially U-shaped front view is provided.

The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 163a through which the inserted hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. The arm portion 163c, which extends straight toward the outside of the base end portion 161a and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, is provided.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB1 is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engaging with the elastic claw 163d.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB1 are provided at both ends of the arm portion 163c in the radial direction, and the rail portions can guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. It is formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pushed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is placed on the back side wall of the rail portion. The slide is restricted by hitting, and at that position, the elastic claw 163d is released from being pushed down by the metal plate member MB1 (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is made of metal. Engage so as to restrict the withdrawal of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 is arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B, the middle member 170M which is arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B and has a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and the middle member 170M thereof. It is provided with a front member 170F which is provided and has a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) plate-shaped members are laminated in the front-rear direction and fastened and fixed.

The illumination board 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape in front view according to the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect. It includes a light emitting means 181, a connector 182 arranged as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 formed in an illuminated substrate 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 is a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 and a weak light emitting means arranged outside the light transmitting hole 177 (arranged to face the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F) in a front view. 181b and the like.

The through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction of inclination. As a result, it is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is formed in a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is tilted (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not tilted (in the front-rear direction), so that it is compared with the case of assembling in the same direction. Assembling defects (not assembled or loosened) are likely to occur, but in the present embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined. It is possible to take a large margin of the through hole 183 along the direction of inclination, and it is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting columnar portion 172.

The illuminated substrate 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M. At this time, the illuminated substrate 180 is in a posture in which the front surface of the plate faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward on the front side). Will be done. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 in line XX of FIG. For ease of understanding, the rear member 170B is not shown, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is shown by an imaginary line. The XX rays are arranged so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding cylindrical portion 172. In the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

The mode of the wall-shaped portion on the front side of the middle member 170M differs between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. That is, the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces the horizontal direction), and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD is an inclined wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces downward on the front side). Is configured as.

With respect to the wall-shaped portions having different normals, the illuminated substrate 180 is supported so that the back surface of the plate is in a posture along the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD (a posture in which the normals are inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting columnar portions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion. It is provided with 172 and a wiring through hole 173 drilled in the front-rear direction in an arrangement surrounding the connector 182 at the left and right outer (left) corners.

The projecting frame portion 171 comes into contact with the outer frame portion of the front member 170F in the front-rear direction to seal the periphery of the illuminated substrate 180. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized from between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, and it is possible to prevent light leakage from occurring from the same position.

The projecting columnar portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 183 of the illuminated substrate 180. The back surface of the illuminated substrate 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 arranged in the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is higher than the seating portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 arranged in the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined posture can be stably supported, and a gap can be secured between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the illuminated substrate 180.

The protruding tip of the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protrusion length becomes shorter toward the lower side) according to the posture of the illuminated substrate 180. .. As a result, it is possible to impart not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illumination board 180. Since the posture of the lighting board 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the lighting board 180 via the electrical wiring, the posture of the lighting board 180 can be stably supported without fastening and fixing the lighting board 180. can do.

The front member 170F is formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-transmitting resin material so that the back side surface is substantially parallel to the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A left-right view L that connects a plurality of light transmission holes 177, a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the back surface side, and a frame portion forming the back surface of the plate and the outer periphery. It is provided with a character-shaped L-shaped support portion 179.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 in a front view. As a result, the mode in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181 are visually recognized from the front side of the front member 170F changes. That is, the inside of the light transmitting hole 177 can be visually recognized as if it emits stronger light than the other parts.

A plurality of the projecting columnar portions 178 are formed with substantially the same projecting length. As a result, the illumination substrate 180 in the inclined posture is surface-supported at a plurality of positions while making the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination substrate 180 uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

That is, since the illuminated substrate 180 is in an inclined posture in which the front surface of the board faces downward on the front side, it is preferable to support the illuminated substrate 180 from the front side in order to maintain that posture, but a large-area support portion is provided at one place. When the illuminated substrate 180 is supported, the area in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged tends to be limited. When the area of the support portion is reduced by giving priority to the distributable area of the light emitting means 181, the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 collapses and the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illuminated substrate 180 is the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180. There was a risk that variations would easily occur in the range, and unevenness in the light emission mode would easily occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter projecting columnar portions 178 having the same projecting height are provided so that the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 can be supported at a plurality of points at the same time. Therefore, a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 for supporting the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged at a plurality of small gap positions generated between the adjacent light emitting means 181. As a result, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 is arranged to face the upper surface and the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179, which is arranged to face the front surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 180, supports and prevents the illuminated substrate 180 from tipping forward due to its own weight.

Further, the rear portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 and the illumination substrate 180 which are arranged to face the upper surface of the plate of the illumination substrate 180 are usually arranged with a gap, so that the illumination substrate 180 is loosely supported while being loosely supported. The vertical displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be minimized.

A support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is also formed on the front side of the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD of the middle member 170M (formed at two positions on the left and right), and is formed on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 180. And, it is arranged to face the back surface and functions to suppress the displacement of the illumination substrate 180. That is, in the present embodiment, the L-shaped support portions arranged above and below the illuminated substrate 180 are configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is stably supported by being sandwiched and supported by the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illuminated substrate 180 are fastened and fixed to form a single rigid body, the illuminated substrate 180 may vibrate under the influence of the vibration generated in the middle member 170M. , It is a measure in consideration of it.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illumination board 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if the middle member 170M or the front member 170F vibrates, It is possible to independently maintain the arrangement of the illumination substrate 180.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 arranged on the back side of the middle member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the middle member 170M, but in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 has an upper side wall shape. It is arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the illuminated substrate 180 with a gap generated on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 180 via the small-diameter projecting columnar portion 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the projecting columnar portion 172. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the illuminated substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being directly transmitted from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as the vibration source to the illuminated substrate 180.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 formed in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. It includes a lower regulating portion 175 that is disposed and an upper regulating portion 176 that is disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the magnetic force (electromagnetic force). The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and upwardly displaced. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is displaced between the ascending position where the metal plate member MB1 is arranged as a result of being increased by the electromagnetic force and the descending position where the metal plate member MB1 is arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and being lowered by its own weight. The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are rotationally displaced. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

FIG. 11A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11B is a front view of the window movable unit 150. Further, FIG. 12A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12B is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

In addition, in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state in the lowered position) is shown in FIG. In (a) and 12 (b), a state (a state of an ascending position) in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by an electromagnetic force generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) and 12 (a), the rear member 170B is omitted for ease of understanding, and in FIGS. 11 (b) and 12 (b), the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is omitted. The shape of the open portion on the back side is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 12A, the driven member 163 abuts on the cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower regulating portion 175 at the descending position, and the descending displacement is regulated to ascend. At the position, it comes into contact with the cushion portion 176a attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating portion 176, and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The materials of the cushion portions 175a and 176a are not limited in any way. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as a melamine resin, a polyurethane or an epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the cushion portions 175a and 176a may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

Here, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with reference to the transmission shaft rod portion 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is a load generated mainly by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. Can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 175 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (the position substantially at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating portion 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the arrangement of the upper regulating member 176 is arranged as the driven member 163. There are few advantages related to the position of the center of gravity of. In the present embodiment, the upper regulation member 176 is arranged to face the rotational tip of the driven member 163 to reduce the load transmitted to the upper regulation member 176 via the driven member 163.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is long) is transmitted via the driven member 163. Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulation member 176 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion). It is made shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and stably generate the load transmission at the rotating tip.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 bounces after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulation portion 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface receiving the load can be increased, and the cover can be covered. The pressure (stress) generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the weight of the driving member 163 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the driven member 163 while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a via the driven member 163 when the displacement is performed in both the upper and lower directions.

Below the upper regulating portion 176, a protruding portion 176b is formed so as to project in a curved shape on the back surface side of the middle member 170M. The projecting portion 176b is arranged so as to face the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the driven member 163 is suppressed in contact with the driven member 163 in a small area. Guide the rotation of.

As shown in FIGS. 11B and 12B, the tip portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 in front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect unit 153a allows the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a to visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale). While the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, the change in the light emitting mode of the effect unit 153a can be suppressed even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced.

In other words, the light visually recognized through the production unit 153a can be visually recognized by the player as if it is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the production unit 153a, so that the LED or the like can be seen inside the production unit 153a. The light emitting means of the above is arranged, and it is possible to give the illusion that the light emitting means is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect unit 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illuminated substrate 180 is arranged while adopting the illuminated substrate 180 having a fixed arrangement. It can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a also arranged on the illumination substrate 180 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, a single electric circuit with a fixed arrangement can be used to create a light-emitting effect that tends to be achieved by adopting multiple illuminated substrates, with the first substrate in a fixed arrangement and the second substrate being displaceable. It can be realized by using a decorative substrate. As a result, the number of illuminated substrates can be reduced while achieving the same effect.

It will be described back to FIG. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a box-shaped back case 310 whose front side is open from the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

The back case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit 300 is arranged in the internal space of the rear case 310 with the first operation unit 400 in which the movable device is displaceably arranged in a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. The left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above and the like and the second operation unit 700 arranged under the opening 311a are respectively housed, and this is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is arranged at a position above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is arranged at a position below the opening 311a on the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310, respectively. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are mounted on the rear case 310.

The back case 310 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 312, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 313 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with the fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting recess 60b may be used, or the fitting gap may be increased in consideration of workability during assembly. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape). Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is also rectangular correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310, and the formation of the support plate portion 313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood on which veneer boards are overlapped as in the present embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. Is invisible, so that the entire back surface side of the area where the base plate 60 of the game board 13 can be opened (concave from the side surface) is effective as an effect area for arranging the movable members so as to be visible.

On the other hand, at the portion where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in the front view. The area that can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the fact that many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can see the ball fired in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a position other than the range where the launched ball can be visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball preventing member 68 in the gaming area. Introduced in, and thereafter configured to flow down the game area. In the ball game, the part that is considered to attract the most attention is the part through which the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 sandwiched between them). ) Is usually low in attention.

Therefore, as a range that the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left parts based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right parts based on the upward convex arc. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and the game board 13 is made of a veneer board that does not easily transmit light in the first place. In addition, the outer edge member 73 is formed from the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized via the block-shaped member 74 or the block-shaped member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged in the places where the attention is low or invisible. In fact, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portion 313 is formed near the corner portion of the back case 310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62. Will be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the locations with low visibility (low production ability) in the first place, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole is increased. While achieving the effect of securing, it is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, the range in which the ball does not flow down is the lower left and upper left. It can be easily arranged in the portion and the upper right portion.

The substantially lower half of the outer wall portion 312 on the right side is provided with a notch portion 312a that is notched (notched is formed) toward the back surface side. The cutout portion 312a is cut out below the strip-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in the front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a gap is provided between the cutout portion 312a and the game board 13. Form.

By forming the notch portion 312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch 312a can function as a wiring thread through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring interferes with other components as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Further, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space having a configuration required for the variable winning device 65. The configuration required for the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which a sphere flows, a substrate that accompanies a light emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a sphere, and other structures. Is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily made visible to the player as light having a blurred outline. In other words, as compared with the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). Therefore, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board 13 depends on the shape of the back case 310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect.

Further, as compared with the case where the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as the LED is arranged so as to be exposed to the outside of the operation unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, the electric wiring is operated through the notch 312a. A configuration like the present embodiment in which the unit 300 is exposed to the outside can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electric wiring so that it can be taken out of the operation unit 300 without turning it to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED.

The formation length (vertical length) of the notch portion 312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion 312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening and fixing with the game board 13 is omitted on the right side portion of the rear case 310. Therefore, when considering the rigidity on the right side portion of the game board 13, the rigidity of the operating unit 300 is relied on. Can't.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. Hereinafter, the metal plate-shaped member 75 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown as a single unit, and the other members arranged on the game board 13 are not shown.

The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, has an arc wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and has an arc shape on the inner side surface, and a thin wall shape extending downward from the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. A vertical wall portion 73b and an inclined wall portion 73c formed having an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left are provided. In this way, by forming the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 is compared with the case where the outer edge member 73 is formed of a plurality of members that are vertically divided. The man-hours for assembling to the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b is formed by bending a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion and bending in a U-shape in the vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion. A columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side at a joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and being attached to and fastened to the columnar projecting portion 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4, which is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-shaped member 75, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 form the metal plate-shaped member 75. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being generated.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent back to the left at the main body plate portion 75a formed without creases in the longitudinal direction and the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a while being folded back in the lateral direction. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction. A through hole 75d and an insertion hole 75e in which a fastening screw is inserted into a plate portion provided on the plate portion on which the through hole 75d is formed and stepped toward the front side are provided.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the long direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b which is easily curved in the long direction.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size capable of inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 through the seam penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a columnar protrusion is provided. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip portion thereof engages with the game board 13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the game board 13 will be described.

The game board 13 accepts a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed so as to accept the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and a cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f, which are formed as recesses as possible recesses, are provided.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, respectively. And positioned. That is, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b by itself, and the vertical wall portion 73b does not need to be sufficiently rigid. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Further, since the deformation of the game board 13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 The shape can be maintained.

It will be described back to FIG. 5 and FIG. The first operation unit 400 is arranged on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 of the operation unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to the position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the display of the third symbol display device 81. It is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. The details of the first operation unit 400 will be described below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. FIG. 16 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 17 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81. 3 The overhanging state of overhanging (descending) toward the symbol display device 81 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the back case 310 is not symmetrically formed. In particular, regarding the upper side wall (ceiling surface), the right side of the front view is lower than the left side of the front view due to the relationship with the shape of the tank 130 of the payout unit 93 (see FIG. 3). That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, the upper side wall of the back case 310 is arranged at a position where the right side is lower than the left side in order to secure the arrangement area. It is installed (arranged along the wall model line UL).

As described above, inside the rear case 310, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is a margin in the ceiling height). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring An auxiliary device that does not directly affect the appearance of the production such as SP1 (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) is arranged on the left side.

As a result, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be arranged by effectively utilizing the recess (gap portion) generated by the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310, and the lower edge of the first operation unit 400 has a symmetrical shape. However, since it can be moved to the upper side as much as possible, it is possible to easily secure a large vertical dimension of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the shapes of the pinnate member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400, in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, in accordance with the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310. The shape of the side that faces the upper wall of the rear case 310 is designed. That is, the pinnate member 460 on the left side is designed to project toward the upper wall side of the back case 310 as compared with the pinnate member 460 on the right side.

The pinnate member 460 is configured to be united by changing the state of the first operation unit 400 from the retracted state to the overhanging state and to be visually recognized integrally, and is designed to have a symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are formed in an asymmetrical shape.

In the present embodiment, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the asymmetrical portion of the pinnate member 460 (the upper side that abuts when united) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), so that the left and right wings It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the shape member 460 is formed in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21 are rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. 18 and 20 show the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 show the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates and moves via a plurality of gears interposed between the drive motor MT1, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 made of metal that is arranged at substantially the center position on the left and right and is vertically expandable and contractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 that is arranged on the left and right opposite sides of the arm member 414. Rail.

The elevating plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is relatively displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and rotates symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. A plurality of displaced pinnate members 460 are displaced.

Therefore, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement mode in which raising and lowering and rotation are combined with the driving of the drive motor MT1. As a result, although the single drive motor MT1 is used, the constituent members can be displaced in a plurality of directions, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper end position portion of the arcuate gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to project upward from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430. To. In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is overhanging.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 to the overhanging state, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates from the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state. The arcuate gear portion 444b (see FIG. 27), which overhangs upward, is displaced downward with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the position where the arcuate gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude (protrude) from the elevating plate 430 at a position shielded by the base plate 60 in terms of arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 is not shielded by the base plate 60. By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so as to hide the overhanging portion on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until it is displaced to, the auxiliary arm member 444 is always concealed on the back side of the elevating plate 430. The degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 can be improved as compared with the case.

For example, since the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 can be arranged on the lower side, it is possible to easily avoid interference between the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 and the outer wall portion 312 on the upper part of the back case 310 (FIG. 16).

Further, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, a rack gear-like portion (a portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is maintained on the third symbol display device 81 side while being overhanging. It is possible to secure a sufficient overhang length of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side while avoiding the above.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the elevating plate 430 is displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430. The relative displacement member 442 can be displaced vertically, but in this case, it is necessary to always dispose the fixed rack gear-shaped portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which most of the elevating plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 like the elevating plate 430 of the present embodiment is diverted, the fixed rack gear-shaped portion is used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401. It was necessary to form the third symbol display device 81 so as to project from the side.

Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by a fixed rack gear-like portion, which causes a problem that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates, and the rack gear on the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400. For the purpose of hiding the shaped portion, there is a possibility that the design freedom of the evacuation plate 430 may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is adopted instead of the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, it is hidden on the back side thereof according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430. ) Auxiliary arm member 444 can be arranged. Therefore, while avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped portion is maintained overhanging on the third symbol display device 81 side, the overhang length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is sufficiently sufficient. Can be secured.

22 (a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 (b) shows the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 460 showing the meshing state of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. It is a front perspective view of the member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a), 23, 24 and 25, the first operating unit 400 is formed of a resin material in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and the bottom of the back case 310 (see FIG. 16). A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate 401 fastened and fixed to the wall 311 and a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate 401, and connected to the tip of an arm member 414 of the transmission unit 410. A back arrangement plate 420 composed of a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged on the same plane including the connecting plate portion 421 to be formed, and the back arrangement plate 420 arranged on the front side of the back arrangement plate 420, and the back arrangement plate 420 is fastened and fixed. The elevating plate 430 and the synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 are provided (see FIGS. 23 and 25).

In addition, the first operation unit 400 is rotatably supported by a plate-shaped support plate portion 450 that is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the support plate portion 450, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. A pair of left and right pinnate members 460 that are rotationally displaced by a load given by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the pinnate member 460 are provided (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (FIG. 22). b) and FIG. 24).

The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft strut portion 402 that pivotally supports the transmission gear 412, a terminal support portion 403 that is arranged at the lower right portion thereof and supports the terminal gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 arranged in the center of the left and right and fixed on the back side so that the front side can be displaced vertically, and a long opening on the right side of the metal rail 405. The elongated hole portion 406, the lid portion 407 that covers the region formed from the light-transmitting resin material into a plate shape and formed the elongated hole portion 406 from the back surface side, and the detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state. To be equipped.

The end support portion 403 includes a shaft strut portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft strut portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b projecting along a circle centered on the shaft strut portion 403a, and an annular protrusion thereof. A stopper portion 403c is provided so as to project to the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion portion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the region where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaches the back side of the elongated hole portion 406 is the elongated hole. It is guided to the front side through the part 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid portion 407 and the back surface side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 projects to the back surface side, and during the assembly work, between the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 13) of the rear case 310 and the main body plate portion 401. There is a risk of being pinched by. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid portion 407, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. Can be done.

As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by a shaft strut portion 402. The terminal gear 413 that is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and the arm member 414 that is pivotally supported by the arm support portion 404 so that the posture can be changed with the rotation of the terminal gear 413. Be prepared.

The end gear 413 has a gap between the annular protrusion 413a, which is projected toward the back side in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b, and the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stoppered portion 413b that is projected in a fan shape like the stopper portion 403c, a cylindrical overhanging portion 413c that projects cylindrically to the front side at an eccentric position away from the shaft strut portion 403a, and the front surface of the gear portion. It is provided with a detected portion 413d extending in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the side.

The annular protrusion 413a is arranged so that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b, and the annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the annular protrusion 403b and the stoppered portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail for guiding the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stoppered portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stoppered portion 413b interferes with the stopper portion 403c in the direction of rotation thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is limited by the size of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b in the circumferential direction. That is, the end gear 413 is rotationally displaced at a rotational angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the angle obtained by subtracting the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 from 360 degrees) is calculated. The shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b may be designed at bisected angles. As a result, it is possible to prevent one of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, so that the useful life of the first operating unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to a resin end gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip portion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected unit 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. When the detected unit 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the first operation unit. It can be determined that 400 is in the retracted state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, a plate-shaped portion 414b extending radially from the front side portion of the annular portion 414a, and a plate-shaped portion 414b thereof. An intermediate plate portion 414c that is arranged in parallel with respect to the portion 414b and is connected to an extended end portion of the plate-shaped portion 414b, and an elongated hole portion that is bored in the intermediate plate portion 414c in an elongated hole shape. The tip plate portion 414e which is arranged by translating the 414d and the intermediate plate portion 414c toward the back side and is connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and the front side from the extended tip of the tip plate portion 414e. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 414f that projects into a columnar shape.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate portion 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f, and the connecting plate portion 421 of the back arrangement plate 420 cannot be removed. It is connected and supported by the overhanging portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operation unit 400. In FIG. 26, the second intermediate position of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1, the fixed pulley to which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1, and the drive motor MT1 thereof. The illustration of the base plate to which is fastened and fixed is omitted.

According to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, by forming the arm member 414 in a shape that is bent back and forth, interference with other members can be functionally avoided. This will be described below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged on the front side of the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the limitation of the front-rear position of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (the portion opposite to the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Then, the front-rear position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c arranged at a position opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1 is arranged on the back side as compared with the plate-shaped portion 414b. As a result, the front-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 on the root side of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. It is possible to prevent the load transmission efficiency from being lowered due to the deformation of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c.

Further, since it is due to the relationship with the terminal gear 413 at the front-rear position of the intermediate plate portion 414c, the portion not related to the termination gear 413 (the portion opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the termination gear 413) The front-rear position can be designed arbitrarily.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e arranged at a position opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413 is arranged on the back side as compared with the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e can be secured. Therefore, the back arrangement plate 420 and the rear arrangement plate 420 arranged at a position on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e and the back side of the elevating plate 430. It is possible to easily secure the front-rear dimensions of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set for the purpose of avoiding interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by forming the arm member 414 in a stepwise bending manner, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from being locally (one point) concentrated (the stress concentration can be relaxed), and the arm member can be relaxed. The durability of 414 can be improved.

Further, by forming the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a cohesive gap on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other member for securing the gap. Therefore, it is possible to crawl the electric wiring (electrical wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) or dispose of an additional effect member (illumination board or the like) by utilizing the gap.

Further, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 arranged so as to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is unintentionally sandwiched or rotated by the pinnate member 460. It is configured to be able to prevent being bitten into the gear tooth portion of the gear 441 or the relative displacement member 442. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 is first guided from the main body plate portion 401 side through the elongated hole portion 406 to the auxiliary arm member 444. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is passed through the extension portion 444c by being inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448.

Inside the extension portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. After that, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided from the base end side portion 444a to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, and is an L-shaped region partitioned by a frame portion and a closing plate 428 projecting to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425. To reach the through hole 427.

The frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 is provided with an abbreviated portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over substantially half a circumference centering on the insertion hole 425a. The omitted portion 425b can provide an angle at which the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the block plate 428 at 180 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is bent in the vicinity of the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated.

The electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front-rear direction by passing through the through hole 427 to the front side, and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430. It is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of the 450 with a binding band or the like, and is connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board of the light emitting effect device LA1.

As described above, since the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the constituent members (auxiliary arm member 444 and the back surface arrangement plate 420) in most of the path, the electric wiring is the path as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 collides with other movable members and receives a load as compared with the case where it is exposed (exposed) in most cases.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that is slidably displaced are separated. That is, it is limited to the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by the sliding displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or bending of the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the relationship between the deformation of the electric wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 can be determined. By disconnecting, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from becoming large.

It will be described back to FIG. 22A, FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. The rear arrangement plate 420 is provided on the plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, and the elevating plate 430 that is arranged on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421. An L-shaped plate that is fastened and fixed and the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed to the accommodating plate portion 425 and the accommodating plate portion 425 that is fastened and fixed to partially close the back side portion of the accommodating plate portion 425. It is provided with a closed plate 428 having a shape.

The connecting plate portion 421 has an insertion elongated hole 422 formed in the main body plate portion in a long hole shape long in the left-right direction so that the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f can be inserted, and the front side and below the insertion elongated hole 422. A support box portion 423 formed in a box shape with an open upper side is provided.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion slot 422, the rigidity of the accommodating plate portion 425 can be reinforced by using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box portion 423 is arranged to face the support wall portion 426 on the left and right, and when the support wall portion 426 is greatly bent to the left and deformed and comes into contact with the support box portion 423, the deformation is caused by the support box. It can be suppressed by the rigidity of the portion 423.

The accommodating plate portion 425 has a support wall portion 426 projecting to the front side in a straight plate shape along the vertical direction at the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a penetration formed on the front side of the closing plate 428. It is provided with a hole 427.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter through which a connector arranged at the end of the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts on the frame portion projecting in a frame shape on the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, and partitions the area between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. It is composed. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only inside the frame portion of the accommodating plate portion 425 (front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side of the frame portion).

A deformed hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that the temporary fastening portion 425c, which is a portion protruding in a U shape on the back surface side at the position on the through hole 427 side of the omitted portion 425b, can be visually recognized from the rear view. To.

The deformed hole 428a is composed of a horizontally long shape portion having a left-right width slightly longer than the width of the temporary fastening portion 425c and a vertically long shape portion provided intersecting the horizontally long shape portion in order to secure an area through which a binding band can pass. It is formed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion for the binding band. By temporarily fixing the electric wiring DH1 with a binding band, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. In this case, by tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 side can be brought closer to the closing plate 428 side, so that the insertion hole 425a of the accommodating plate portion 425 is centered. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the semicircular plate portion and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the accommodating plate portion 425, so that the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the closing plate 428.

As a result, the position of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 is fixed (that is, the electrical wiring), that is, the temporary fastening position of the electrical wiring DH1 is the position between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. The base end side portion of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first part to displace the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the elevating plate 430 when traveling along the path of the electric wiring DH1 from the light emitting effect device LA1 to which one end of the DH1 is connected. The binding band can be replaced without removing the closing plate 428 while temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 at the location overlapping the path to 444a). Therefore, the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintainability of the binding band related to the electric wiring DH1 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, where the electric wiring DH1 crawls on the front side of the closing plate 428 along the shape of the closing plate 428, the closing plate 428 has an L-shaped rear view, so that the electric wiring DH1 is closed. The front side of the plate 428 is curved along a first plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, while it is curved along a second plane orthogonal to the left-right direction (a plane orthogonal to the first plane) near the through hole 427. become. As a result, the holding force for holding the electric wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420, a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of parts related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440, and an electric wiring DH1. A tubular portion 433 formed so as to be insertable, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a plurality of fastening portions formed on the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference between the members. A coping portion 435 and a decorative portion 436 having a substantially symmetrical pattern on the front surface of the plate are provided.

The fastening portion 431 includes at least a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a arranged at the lower end of the elevating plate 430 and supporting the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (slide rack). Although the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, a female screw shape is formed from the tip thereof, and a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the accommodating plate portion 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed in. To. That is, it is also used as a portion related to fastening and fixing the back surface arrangement plate 420 and a portion related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

The tubular portion 433 extends to the back surface side through a gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its rear end side abuts on the front surface of the accommodating plate portion 425. The inside of the tubular portion 433 is continuously connected. The electrical wiring DH1 is inserted back and forth through this continuously connected portion.

As the coping unit 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, the raised fastening portions arranged vertically), the main body plate portion is used. An arc-shaped gear portion recessed in a wall portion formed in a wall shape so as to protect the notch portion 435a cut out from the lower edge upward and the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 above the axis. An example is a recessed portion 435b or the like formed so as to avoid interference with the 444b.

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back side of the pinnate member 460 so that a series of patterns can be visually recognized in cooperation with the pinnate member 460 as the pinnate member 460 is displaced. It will be described later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 has a pair of rotary gears 441 that mesh with each other, a relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the rotary gears 441 and is formed so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction, and an elongated hole in the relative displacement member 442. An auxiliary arm member 444 having a pair of elongated holes 443 drilled in a shape, a rotary gear tooth that meshes with the other of the rotary gear 441, and an end that is fastened and fixed to the rotary tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back side. A part side plate 448 is provided.

A gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted through the elongated hole 443. By arranging the longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the elongated direction of the elongated hole 443 substantially in parallel, the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced as compared with the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be combined with each other. The frictional resistance generated between them can be reduced.

The auxiliary arm member 444 is an arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the ring-shaped base end side portion 444a pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432 and the base end side portion 444a. It is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape arranged at the gear portion 444b, the extension portion 444c extending in the radial direction of the ring shape from the base end side portion 444a, and the extension tip portion of the extension portion 444c. It is provided with a tubular member 444d which is a portion and is configured such that the open portion inside the cylinder is continuously connected to the open portion of the extension portion 444c.

The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a into which a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a is inserted in a state of being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. Movement to the back side is restricted by the accommodating plate portion 425. That is, the base end side portion 444a is pivotally supported so as to face the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 from the front and rear so as not to fall off.

The extension portion 444c is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and extends from one side in the lateral direction to the other side on the back side portion, and the short side of the electric wiring DH1 with the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the directional dimension (width dimension) is provided. The retaining portion 444c1 has a role of preventing the electric wiring DH1 disposed inside the extension portion 444c from coming off after the electric wiring DH1 is passed between the extension portion 444c and the other side in the lateral direction. have.

The mode of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1 may be configured to be shorter than the lateral dimension (width dimension) of the electric wiring DH1. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electric wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electric wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the vertical displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be minimized. It will be described later with reference to 30.

The tubular member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the lateral dimension of the elongated hole portion 406, and is inserted through the elongated hole portion 406 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the elongated hole portion 406. It enables the sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along the above.

A through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted is formed in the end side plate 448, and the electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a is a tubular portion 444d inserted through the elongated hole portion 406. It passes through the inside, passes through the inside of the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the base end side portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate portion 425. Then, it is guided to the front side through the through hole 427 and the tubular portion 433.

Since the electric wiring DH1 is passed through in this way, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is formed larger than the outer shape of the connector connected to the end portion of the electric wiring DH1. In other words, the through hole 448a is formed in a size that allows the connector to be inserted.

The through hole 448a is formed not only in the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also in a deformed shape including a region eccentric to the outside of the diameter, and in particular, a large opening is formed on the extension portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electric wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extension portion 444c side, so that the electric wiring DH1 is largely arranged with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes. It is possible to avoid changing (rambling).

In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the extension portion 444c side on the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. With this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right side, so that the lateral displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced to the left and right when the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is caused by changing the direction of the through hole 448a. It can function to be mitigated. Therefore, the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448, so that the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 is shortened. At the same time, the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from the end side plate 448 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, in the same way that the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced, the support plate portion 450 that is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 that is fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced. To do.

The support plate portion 450 is a plate-shaped member in which the light emitting effect device LA1 which is formed in a disk shape and has a light emitting substrate arranged on the back side is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a fastening screw inserted into the elevating plate 430. A pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which the fastening screws 451 that are screwed in and the fastening screws that are internally fitted into the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460 and inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed in. A pair of left and right through holes 453 are formed on the lower side of the fastening shaft support portion 452, and a support portion 454 that hooks and supports the upper projecting piece LA1b of the light emitting effect device LA1.

The light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions LA1a into which fastening screws to be inserted into the support plate portion 450 are screwed in at the lower portion, and a pair of projecting pieces projecting from the upper portion so as to be inserted into the support portion 454. It is provided with LA1b. In this way, the lower part of the light emitting effect device LA1 is supported by fastening and fixing, and the upper part is supported by engagement, so that sufficient support strength is secured and the shadow of the fastening screw is cast on the upper back side of the illuminated substrate. It can be avoided to occur.

The front surface of the light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where it is visually recognized without being hidden by the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (FIG. 34). reference).

In the present embodiment, the shape of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is a shape imitating a shellfish (for example, a scallop), and the shape of the light emitting effect device LA1 arranged between them is like a pearl. It is formed from a visible front view substantially circular shape. That is, by integrally visualizing the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470, it is possible to construct an appearance reminiscent of a series of concepts of "pearls arranged inside an open shell". ..

The pinnate member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and is centered on a tubular portion 461 rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452 and the tubular portion 461 thereof. An arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape and meshed with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and an extension portion 463 thereof. Forming parts 464L, 464R formed on the extended end side and formed so that light can be strongly reflected by applying a plating to the front part of the plate, and an arc-shaped gear along an arc having a diameter smaller than that of the arc-shaped gear 462. A downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extended end portion in which the flange portion 466 extends in the external direction. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 467 that projects from the to the back side in a columnar shape.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed in an arc having the same diameter that meshes with each other at an intermediate position between the pair of tubular portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) pinnate members 460 that rotate due to the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extension portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is recessed only on the right side. The recessed portion 463a is a shaped portion for facilitating interference with the electrical wiring that passes through the tubular portion 433 and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 and are configured as a series of substantially semicircular (approximately semi-elliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17), while the first operation. In the retracted state of the unit 400, it is arranged separately on the left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, the left forming portion 464L is formed so as to project in the rotational direction as compared with the right forming portion 464R in the shape of the upper side that abuts at the time of coalescence. By being done, it is formed large. In other words, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is arranged on the right side (see FIG. 17).

The shapes of the upper end portions of the pinnate members 464L and 464R, which are arranged to face each other, differ depending on the distance from the tubular portion 461. That is, the side close to the tubular portion 461 (the side close to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) is the pinnate member 464L, 464R so that the pinnate members 464L, 464R can overlap each other in the front view when they are closest to each other. The shape is such that the interference portion 464a is provided so as to be displaced in the rotation axis direction.

In the present embodiment, the side close to the tubular portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. Since the above-mentioned interference portion 464a can prevent a cut in the contact surface S1 of the pinnate members 464L and 464R when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other, the decorative pattern can be provided to the player. It can be visually recognized without any discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the tubular portion 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the rotation shafts of the pinnate members 464L and 464R can be stopped by abutting. The shape is such that the contact surface is arranged at a position that matches in the direction.

By providing the portion where the load generated by the contact of the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of stopping is provided at the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the moment of force is the longest, the pinnate members 464L and 464R are provided by the contact. The load generated in can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the pinnate members 464L and 464R with the distance from the tubular portion 461, the player feels uncomfortable with a series of decorative patterns formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. It is possible to minimize the load that may occur on the pinnate members 464L and 464R when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other.

The flange portion 466 is also used for suppressing the positional deviation of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and for partitioning the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with the fixed transmission plate 490 and being caught, resulting in excessive resistance.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted through the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and the ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted through the overhanging tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed at the overhanging tip portion, and a fastening screw having an umbrella portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is screwed in while being inserted into the collar C1. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 so as not to fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-shaped members that are rotatably supported, and has a supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed tubular shape and a through hole 453 that is inserted through the supported portion 471 and cannot rotate. A metal insertion metal rod 472 fitted to the metal rod 472 and a gear portion 473 having gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472 which is non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472. And.

A female screw is formed in the radial direction on the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472, and a through hole through which a screwing portion of a fastening screw screwed into the female screw can be inserted at a corresponding position of the supported portion 471. Is formed. By inserting the insertion metal rod 472 into the supported portion 471 and then screwing the fastening screw into the female screw through the through hole, it is possible to prevent the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported portion 471.

The gear portion 473 is rotatably supported around the through hole 453 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453. Since the gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (see FIG. 22B), the gear portion 473 rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460.

The fixed transmission plate 490 is provided at a plate-shaped portion to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 formed as a long hole curved in the plate-shaped portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-shaped portion. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a metal rod-shaped member that is non-rotatably supported and projects to the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 includes a vertical direction portion 491a formed along the vertical direction and a bending changing portion 491b formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the vertical direction portion 491a. By partitioning the elongated hole portion 491 in this way, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 that accompanies it are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The connection and fixing of the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 is the same as the connection mode of the insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 471 described above. This makes it possible to prevent the metal rod 492 from falling off from the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28, 29 and 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( The first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 in which the elevating plate 430 is lowered from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical displacement dimension (see FIG. 16) is shown in FIG. The second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 facing the vehicle and the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 are shown in FIG. 30, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the posture of the terminal gear 413 is determined by the detected unit 413d entering the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. In the present embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, overhanging state) are only the displacement amount preset from the retracted state. It is a state after displacement and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member). The radial direction of rotation of 414) is orthogonal. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is arranged outside the arc MXS circumscribing the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 from interfering with each other during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so that the elongated hole portion 406 can be slidably moved, it is not non-resistive and is caused by the contact friction generated between the tubular portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, by the action of this operation resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

As shown in FIG. 28, the elevating plate 430 is downwardly displaced due to the rotational displacement of the arm member 414, and the relative displacement member 442 is moved up and down with the rotation of the rotary gear 441 that meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly. The plate is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of.

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the pinnate member 460 has the same posture as the posture in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing at which the pinnate member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) until the pinnate member 460 starts rotating, so that the pinnate member 460 rotates. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a defect that collides with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when it is displaced.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the pinnate member 460 is rotationally displaced after being lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed so that the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 does not deviate in height from side to side. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the pinnate member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can be realized by diverting the operation conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. As a result, the cost required for the design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 414 hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state projects above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends, as shown in FIG. 28. Displace like.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pinnate member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the pinnate member 460 is not only as an effect means for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the surface side to execute the effect of enlivening the game, but also the arm member 414 for drive transmission is referred to as the elevating plate 430. It also functions as a joint concealment means.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the wing-shaped member 460 on the side on which the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting the driving force is arranged is compared with the forming portion 464R of the wing-shaped member 460 on the opposite side. Since the shape is large, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

Similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, from the configuration, the arm member 414 projects above the elevating plate 430 in the second intermediate state, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 projects above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to project above the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when the forming portion 464R having a shape smaller than that of the forming portion 464L (the amount of protrusion of the elevating plate 430 upward at the same point is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L) is used, there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. 444 can be hidden from the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 is in a posture in which the elongated direction faces the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the load applied to the elevating plate 430 from the arm member 414 to the right tends to be large, but in opposition to this, at the same timing. When the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the elevating plate 430, the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the tubular portion 444d (FIG. 25) is arranged at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430. While suppressing it, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction due to the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is defined only as a guideline position, and the design of the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 is whether or not interference occurs when the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked. It is done by dynamically examining whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the termination gear 413 rotates with the position where the stoppered portion 413b of the termination gear 413 comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as the end point. As a control, the drive motor MT1 is driven so that the end gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where the stoppered portion 413b comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c. As a result, it is possible to structurally prevent the end gear 413 from over-rotating while preventing the stoppered portion 413b and the stopper portion 403c from being damaged at an early stage.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction (arm) of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414. The radial direction of rotation of the member 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, it is possible to prevent not only the displacement in the gravity direction but also the upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the overhanging state to the retracted state side.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing up and being displaced after reaching the overhanging state, so that the elevating plate 430 on the downstream side as a driving force transmission path can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, pinnate member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the pinnate member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so that the elongated hole portion 406 can be slidably moved, it is not non-resistive and is caused by the contact friction generated between the tubular portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, by the action of this operation resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, the posture of the elevating plate 430 becomes unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405, even though the driving force by the drive motor MT1 and the urging force by the coil spring SP1 are generated only on the left and right sides (left side). Can be avoided.

Here, as described above, as long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 is minimized. Explain what you can do.

When the path of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting effect device LA1 side, the path is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches the auxiliary arm member 444, and the path becomes variable for the first time with the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is fixed while the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is displaced by expansion and contraction. it can.

At the position protruding from the through hole 448a to the back surface side, the electric wiring DH1 is displaced in the left-right direction due to the displacement of the end side plate 448 in the left-right direction. As described above, the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 is limited to the displacement of the end side plate 448. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured and the necessary amount is required. After calculating the extra length of the electric wiring DH1 and adding the extra length to the electric wiring DH1 in the path from the fixed position of the electric wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electric wiring DH1 loosened), the electric wiring DH1 Is fixed to the main body plate portion 401.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448, and in addition, the amount of displacement that causes expansion and contraction can be limited to the elevating plate 430. It can be suppressed to less than half of the amount of vertical displacement of.

Further, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 makes it possible to reduce the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448. The length can be shortened.

31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are front views of the first operation unit 400. 31 to 34 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 31 shows the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 32 shows the first operating unit 400. 33 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 34 shows the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge portion of the pinnate member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly downwardly displaced, the posture of the pinnate member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the player can visually recognize the first operation unit 400, which enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the pinnate member 460 does not change as compared with the retracted state shown in FIG. 31, while the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are the same as the elevating plate 430 descends. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward with a displacement amount exceeding the downward displacement amount.

Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the single elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced with respect to the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430, but also the elevating plate. Since it is possible to visually recognize how the decorative portion 493, which is displaced by a vertical displacement amount different from the vertical displacement amount of 430, is vertically displaced, the effect of effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative portion 493 increases as compared with the first intermediate state, and in addition, the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 changes posture.

In FIG. 34, a state in which the pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other at opposite positions is shown. The pinnate member 460 is visually recognized as if it is a single substantially semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members, and the contact surface S1 is made of metal. The rail 405 is formed at a position shifted to the right from the left-right center position where the rail 405 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is formed in advance on the forming portion 464R side as compared with the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is displaced from the left and right center. It is configured in.

Since the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged at positions shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the forming portions 464L, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 464R has a left-right asymmetrical shape. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the left-right asymmetry of the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Further, since the contact surface S1 is deviated from the metal rail 405 in the front view, even if the pinnate member 460 bounces off due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is generated again, the rail member is formed from the gap. It is possible to prevent the 405 from being visually recognized, and the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401 can be visually recognized.

As a result, the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visually recognized from the gap. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is arranged at a position deviated from the left-right center position generally assumed by the player as a break between the pair of movable members that abut and separate from each other on the left and right. That is, the contact surface S1 that does not create a gap at the position (center position on the left and right) that the player visually recognizes while anticipating that a gap will occur, and that may generate a gap at a position deviated from that location. By arranging the gaps, even if a gap is generated, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the pinnate member 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operation unit 400, the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the pinnate member 460, and the player can see the whole picture. The structure is difficult to grasp.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 arranged under the pinnate member 460 is visible, and the outer shape is the pinnate member 460. It is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (shape of "shell" in this embodiment) that the pair of pinnate members 460 visually recognize in the overhanged state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge portion. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining the pair of feather-shaped members 460, and the player can visually recognize them.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement process until a series of decorative shapes are formed by the displacement of the pinnate member 460 is not a single process. That is, as the first displacement process, there is a process in which the pair of pinnate members 460 as one configuration of the series of decorative shapes are displaced and coalesced in a manner close to each other to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as a process of the second displacement, the pinnate member 460 and the decorative portion 436 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes overlap each other in the front-rear view in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and overhang. A process of forming a series of decorative shapes can be mentioned by displacing the pinnate member 460 in the direction in which the overlapping allowance becomes smaller as the state approaches (the direction in which the pinnate member 460 separates from the decorative portion 436).

By these different processes, while the displacement of the pinnate member 460 itself is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the pinnate member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, while suppressing the shape of the pinnate member 460 that is individually displaced to a small size, a series of decorative shapes formed by being united in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 is largely configured in comparison with the size thereof. can do.

35, 36, 37 and 38 are rear views of the support plate portion 450, the pinnate member 460, the auxiliary member 470 and the fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 35 shows the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 36 shows the first operating unit 400. The first intermediate state of the above is illustrated in FIG. 37, the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 38, the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c dispersedly arranged along an arc shape are formed on the back side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks to the back side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the pinnate member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back surface side of the through hole LA1c. Can be reflected to the front side with.

The rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Since the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in particular detail.

From the retracted state shown in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 36, the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction). Since the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the pinnate member 460 from being rotationally displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

In the present embodiment, individual members for urging the pinnate member 460 to the retracted state side are not prepared, but the center of gravity is arranged on the left and right outside the rotation axis due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R. It is maintained in a retracted position due to its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, when the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the curvature changing portion 491b, a load is generated in the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the left-right direction, and the pinnate member 460 starts rotational displacement. Explaining from the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the pinnate member 460 on the left side via the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and then to the pinnate member 460 on the right side. Be transmitted. That is, the left pinnate member 460 is on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path as compared with the right pinnate member 460.

In the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left pinnate member 460, which is considered to be the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be sequentially arranged so as to be lighter toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path. As a result, good transmission of the driving force can be achieved, and it is possible to prevent each component member from rebounding and being displaced after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the tubular portion 433 as the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in the weight of the forming portions 464L and 464R. More specifically, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact of the opposing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R. The positions of the formed portions 464L and 464R after displacement may change slightly due to an error, aged deformation of the elongated hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460, and the like.

In this case, the change in the position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the extension portion 463 of the pinnate member 460 is arranged below the tubular portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, the recessed portion 463a is provided so that the tubular portion 433 and the extending portion 463 do not overlap with each other. As a result, even if a displacement that is unintentionally pushed down occurs in the forming portion 464L, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 and the forming portion 464L interfere with each other can be reduced.

Further, since it is assumed that the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced, the design can be made at a position where the tubular portion 433 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other in the rear view (see FIG. 38). As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the forming range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower portion of the tubular portion 433 can be particularly opened. As a result, it is possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electric wiring DH1 that tends to hang down due to its own weight and the extension portion 463 inside the tubular portion 433.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from getting too close to the forming portion 464 side, whereby the recessed portion 463a is placed on the back side of the auxiliary member 470 in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400. The recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially concealed by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, in any state from the retracted state to the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470. Therefore, the extending portion 463 of the pair of left and right pinnate members 460 and the lower edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R can be easily visually recognized symmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward from the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. Along with the transmission of the driving force, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is hung on the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 461. However, assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 It is configured so that it does not displace at a constant velocity (it is configured so that the angular velocity changes).

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the tubular portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curvature changing portion 491b is an elongated hole extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). In this case, the downward displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 increases the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the velocity (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, it is possible to configure a powerful effect of displacing and coalescing at a high speed as compared with a configuration in which a pair of pinnate members 460 decelerate during displacement.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the pinnate member 460 immediately before the pair of pinnate members 460 are brought into close proximity to each other. There is a possibility that the pair of pinnate members 460 will rebound greatly due to the impact of the impact, and the effect of the present embodiment of combining the pair of pinnate members 460 to visually recognize a series of decorative patterns may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curvature changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the pinnate member 460 (the pinnate member 460 on the left side) provided with the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). It is formed as an elongated hole extending in the upwardly sloping direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the amount of upward displacement of the curvature changing portion 491b with respect to the elongated hole parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) at the location where the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is arranged (hereinafter, also referred to as "upward correction amount"). It corresponds to.

When the curvature changing portion 491b is configured as an elongated hole extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the rotation axis side as in the present embodiment, the degree to which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is displaced downward (a pair of pinnate members 460 are formed). The closer to the coalesced state), the larger the above upward correction amount. Therefore, the degree (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 changes downward.

Therefore, the speed increase can be moderately suppressed as compared with the configuration exemplified in the brake structure that maintains the same friction state. The actual displacement speed of the pinnate member 460 will be described later.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operation unit 400. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39 (c), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the pinnate member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, while the terminal gear 413 rotates at a constant velocity, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not result in a constant velocity rotation, and the elevation displacement of the elevating plate 430 does not become a constant velocity displacement.

That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant velocity rotation) and the control mode of the elevating plate 430 (non-constant velocity displacement), and the elevating plate 430 in the driving force transmission path. The displacement mode on the downstream side is affected by this displacement. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant velocity, it is difficult to displace the constituent members arranged on the downstream side in the transmission path at a constant velocity.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is still large. Since it depends on the elevating displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, the displacement is not constant velocity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined in the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the elevating displacement (vertical displacement) of the elevating plate 430. The configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same manner as the conversion to.

That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, the horizontal axis of FIG. 39 (a)). (Conversion formula for converting numerical values to numerical values on the vertical axis) is applied in reverse to convert the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By doing so, the displacement of the displacement mode can be partially offset, and the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement mode of the rotary gear 441 can be approximated.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 begins to deviate from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is around 90 degrees and 140 degrees (see FIG. 39 (a)). The rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is suppressed from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 over the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 from 30 degrees to 170 degrees (see FIG. 39 (b)).

As a result, for example, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed by rotating the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413 at a constant speed (see FIG. 39B), so that the relative displacement member 442 can be rotated at a constant speed. Can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed.

As a result, the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the displacement mode that the first operation unit 400 wants to execute as a drive effect to be visually recognized by the player can be calculated backward. The speed of the drive motor MT1 can be easily set.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence of the configuration in which the advantageous effect is generated only on the driving device side in the driving force transmission path on the tip side of the transmission path. Here, with reference to the elevating plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side will be described as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side will be described as the tip end side of the transmission path.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, so that the arm member 414 can be started and stopped quickly. However, on the tip side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state becomes extremely small, so that the displacement tends to be slow. was there.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 is set before the arm member 414 reaches the displacement end. It can be dealt with by changing the speed to or controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the deceleration of the arm member 414 occurs (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for the displacement of the tip side of the transmission path becomes small, and the width of the displacement mode is narrowed. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, so that the same period occurs immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operation unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 (and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 arranged on the downstream side thereof) arranged on the tip end side of the transmission path while maximizing the rotation angle of the arm member 414). It is possible to avoid slowing down the displacement of.

What is visible to the player is the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the rotational angular velocities of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the end gear 413 is rotated at a constant velocity tend to increase (constant velocity or higher) until immediately before the stop, and immediately before the stop. , The speed is reduced according to the shape of the curvature changing portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491 described above.

As a result, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more rapid than in the case where the displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430. Therefore, a powerful displacement can be realized and the effect of the effect can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while the rotational angular velocities tend to increase (the pinnate members 460 are united), the pinnate member 460 is provided with a section for decelerating immediately before the pinnate member 460. It is possible to suppress the rebound displacement after coalescence.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 that is displaced on the downstream side thereof, and the fixed transmission plate 490. , The displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be different.

In particular, the displacement mode once changed can be changed to the return side again while going downstream along the transmission path of the driving force. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are displaced in synchronization, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

The case of displacement from the retracted state to the overhanging state has been described as a control mode of the drive motor MT1, but the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to invert at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reverse-controlled so that the first operation unit 400 reciprocates (repeatedly reciprocates) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending, the elevating plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state before the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, so that the player can visually recognize the evacuation plate 430. The displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be limited to the vertical displacement, and the rotational displacement can be eliminated.

Even if the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are displaced relative to the elevating plate 430 in the vertical direction, so that the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, a state in which the game board 13 is removed from the operation unit 300 and arranged on the front side is shown, and the upper part of the action unit 300 and the game board 13 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 40, the outer shape of the transparent cover member 790 arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the configuration below the transparent cover member 790. Is visually illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for the game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The upper surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operation unit 700 are visibly arranged in the light guide member 714. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60.

FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a light guide member 714 in which a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and an illumination member arranged in the left-right direction. It includes a substrate 777.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide the irradiation light emitted from below, and the irradiation light is transmitted from the upper end portion. The illumination substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED that can irradiate the front side with light. In this way, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714, and can emit light to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777.

43 and 44 are an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is shown in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is shown in a directional view looking up from below. Further, in FIG. 45, the projecting holding portion 724 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, the second operation unit 700 is a base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 40) and from above the base member 701. A plate-shaped displacement member that is sandwiched between a cover member 720 that is covered and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and the cover member 720 and the base member 701, and is pivotally supported so that it can be rotationally displaced (rotatably displaced at a rotational angle of about 6 degrees). 730 and a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) hollow members 740, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and are configured to be vertically displaceable, and more than the hollow members 740. A plurality of variable decorative members 750 (three in this embodiment) placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side and capable of being displaced up and down at least, and arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701, respectively. However, a pair of drive units 760 and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40), which have a structure substantially line-symmetrical with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and are configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Be prepared.

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member having a shape that covers the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any of the constituent members of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back surface side, a part of the light emitted directly above from the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 can be refracted toward the back surface side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so that even when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light is guided. Changes in the lighting state of the optical member 714 (including changes in light and darkness, vibration of light, and displacement of the hollow member 740) can be easily noticed.

In addition, in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, and FIG. 45, the illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 701 includes a plate-shaped member 702 formed so as to have sufficient strength, an illuminated substrate 705 to be fastened and fixed to face the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 702, and the like. A partition member 708 that is arranged to face the upper surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 705 and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702, and a member that covers the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from resin. A plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 714 mounted on the member 712 and the thin film cover member 712 in contact with each other, and a plate-shaped member covered from above the light guide member 714. The light guide member 714 is provided with a displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the ascending and horizontal displacement of the light guide member 714.

The plate-shaped member 702 is formed in pairs on the left and right side portions of the plate-shaped member 702 and the engaging portion 702a formed so as to be engaged with the hook-shaped portion 721c of the cover member 720. A fastening screw can be screwed into a receiving recess 702b that is recessed so that the 731 can be pivotally supported, a regulating protrusion 702c that is projected upward from the front side edge and is formed so that the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be regulated. A plurality of fastening portions 703a formed in the above, and a plurality of columnar protruding portions 703b formed in a columnar shape extending upward beyond the fastening portion 703a so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the protruding tip portion. , A plurality of through holes 704 bored in the vertical direction are provided.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing fastening screws to be inserted into the illuminated substrate 705, and are formed at three locations, the center on the left and right and both ends on the left and right. A protruding pin for positioning is installed side by side.

By arranging the illumination board 705 so that the protrusion pin is inserted into the through hole formed in the illumination board 705 corresponding to the protrusion pin for positioning, the fastening screw is inserted into the illumination board 705. Since the through hole to be bored and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected to each other, the illuminated substrate 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702 by screwing the fastening screw through the through hole.

The columnar projecting portion 703b is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted in the order of the displacement regulating member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 708 is screwed in, and the base end side is formed to be inclined in a trapezoidal shape. This makes it easier to place the illumination board 705 in an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 is formed with a size capable of passing a connector (not shown) arranged on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 705 and electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illuminated substrate 705, and does not project above the illuminated substrate 705. As a result, the entire upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705 can be utilized as a dispositionable region of the light emitting means 706 such as an LED.

The illuminated substrate 705 is an open portion formed so as to leave a slight gap between the plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs and the like and the columnar projecting portion 703b in the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43). It is equipped with 707.

The light emitting means 706 includes a plurality of individual light emitting means 706a (eight in the present embodiment) arranged along a straight line facing the left-right direction, and a plurality of overall light emitting means 706 arranged at positions different from the individual light emitting means 706a. The means 706b is provided.

The opening portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b, and the projecting end position of the columnar projecting portion 703b is set above the position where the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illuminated substrate 705 is downwardly displaced to the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the open portion 707 advances along the columnar projecting portion 703b.

In the present embodiment, since the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a circular shape with a top view and a front view table shape that narrows toward the upper side, the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed. The sides are tilted in the vertical direction. When the illuminated substrate 705 is displaced downward, if the position is largely displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the position arranged in the assembled state, the position is along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b. Since the misalignment of the illuminated substrate 705 can be corrected, the illuminated substrate 705 can be easily arranged at a target position.

The partition member 708 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of light-transmitting holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a and a columnar protrusion. A plurality of through holes 710a formed with an inner diameter capable of inserting the tip portion of the installation portion 703b, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed in, and fastening thereof. A plurality of receiving portions 710c are provided so as to be recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to receive the protrusion pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at a position deviated from the portion 710b in the front-rear direction.

The translucent hole 709 is formed in the front and rear with a long crystal-shaped (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) cross section, and the long direction thereof faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. That is, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light-transmitting hole 709 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the elongated direction is toward the front and toward the center of the left and right. It is said to be in the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the translucent hole 709 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a colorless and transparent resin member in the form of a thin film having low rigidity, is formed so that the central portion is raised, the lower surface side is open, and the thin film cover member 712 is vertically bored at the left and right end portions of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through holes 712a, a plurality of medium through holes 712b bored up and down inside the outer through holes 712a in the left-right direction, and vertically displaced with respect to the inner through holes 712b. It is provided with a plurality of small through holes 712c to be drilled.

The large through hole 712a is formed to have a diameter longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) that protrudes in an annular shape from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 to surround the insertion hole 716a. Since the projecting portion 716e projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 projects with a projecting length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, a load (fastening) at the time of assembly is applied to the edge portion of the large through hole 712a. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of load).

One of the middle through holes 712b is arranged at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b at the center position on the front side, and the other is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through hole 712c is arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and is projected from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 and is a partition member. The protrusion pin 716b received by the receiving portion 710c of the 708 is formed to have a size that allows it to be inserted.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, the displacement regulating member 716 is placed on the partition member 708, and then the fastening screws are screwed into various places to fasten and fix the members. Since the projecting pin 716b is inserted into the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 710c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 are aligned with the partition member 708 in the state before the fastening screw is screwed in. It can be easily (simultaneously) performed, and then the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

The light guide member 714 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material into a bottomed tubular shape having a bottom at the top, and the outer shape of the top view is formed into a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 714a is provided, an overhanging edge portion 714b projecting from the lower edge thereof to the left and right and forward, and an inclined surface portion 714c at the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a that inclines downward toward the front side.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body 714a is textured, when the light emitted from the single individual light emitting means 706a, traveling inside the light guide member 714 and reaching the upper end is visually recognized by the player. , It is possible to visually recognize that the light is emitted on the surface instead of the point light emission.

On the other hand, in the main body portion 714a, a smooth surface is formed without embossing on a portion (intermediate portion or the like) other than the upper outer surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and the light is totally reflected by the smooth surface to be totally reflected on the main body 714a. Since it can be easily directed to the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a, the energy loss of light at the intermediate position of the main body portion 714a can be reduced.

The long direction in the top view of the main body 714a of each light guide member 714 follows the setting in the long direction of the translucent hole 709 described above. That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide member 714 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front side toward the left and right center. It is said to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the light guide member 714 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end portion in the long direction (the portion close to the player as the portion that irradiates the light to the player side) in the top view of the light guide member 714 is the center in the long direction. It is possible to face the player side (front side, left and right center) as compared with the position. That is, it is possible to make the player feel that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is gathered toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed with a constant vertical thickness and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and orientation of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c frontally receives light incident from below the light guide member 714. It functions to emit light toward the side, but details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is provided from a plurality of insertion holes 716a through which fastening screws can be inserted and projecting from the lower surface. A plurality of protruding pins 716b, a plurality of receiving cylinders 716c formed in a tubular shape penetrating vertically at positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and an enlarged inner shape of the lower edge of the receiving cylinder 716c. It is provided with a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are recessed in a stepped manner so as to allow the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714 to be received.

The inner shape of the receiving cylinder portion 716c is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, since the recessed depth of the recessed portion 716d is the same as the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), The overhanging edge portion 714b can be stably supported by the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 (the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) so as to sandwich the overhanging edge portion 714b.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed overhanging on the left and right and the front side, and the formation on the back side is omitted. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 is also recessed on the left and right and the front side, and the recessing on the back surface side is omitted. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the opposite directions.

That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is to be assembled, the concave portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b are misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is provided on the concave portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the overhanging edge portion 714b projects from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. A gap corresponding to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is created between the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716, making it difficult to fasten and fix the thin film cover member (or an automatic machine for assembly). Can be noticed that the light guide member 714 is oriented upside down.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the overhanging edge portion 714b is sandwiched between the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 712 in the vertical direction, whereby the position and orientation of the light guide member 714 are stable. Is fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the illuminated substrate 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b, placed at the fastening position, and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702. Next, each constituent member is arranged in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716 above the illuminated substrate 705.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-shaped member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the protrusion pin 716b is passed through the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712c. The displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Further, by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716. In this way, since the constituent members are relatively positioned before the fastening screw is screwed in, the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

Finally, each component can be fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 716a and screwing it into the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projecting portion 703b. According to the present embodiment, after each component arranged above the illumination board 705 is placed at an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, thereby simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the screwing process of the fastening screw (use of an automatic machine for screw turning).

In the present embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be pulled out at the stage where the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protrusion 703b, but the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the fastening portion 710b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is mounted on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially identified with the configuration in which the light guide member 714 is mounted on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714. By supporting the light guide member 714, the support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, it is possible to prevent light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708. Can be planned.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The cover member 720 is a member formed of a colored (blue in the present embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base member 701. The cover member 720 is arranged on the peripheral edge of the lower surface and is connected to the base member 701. A plurality of coupling portions 721 used for coupling, a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a rear side thereof. A plurality of front through holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a set of left and right through holes on the front side of the through hole 722, and rear left and right outer portions of the rear through hole 722. It is provided with a plurality of projecting holding portions 724 projecting downward from the left and right inner portions on the front side.

The joint portion 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a in which fastening screws are inserted from above, and a plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws inserted from below are screwed into the base member 701. A plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the back surface portion and engaged with the base member 701 are provided.

The vertical and vertical positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are different between the four locations closer to the center and the four locations closer to the left and right. In this embodiment, the one closer to the center is formed higher. This is due to the design of the upper surface shape of the cover member 720. That is, in order to give the upper surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect, the upper and lower edges of the rear through hole 722 are vertically curved so that the portion near the center appears to be raised. Has been adjusted.

The protrusion length of the protrusion holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially cancel the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722. That is, the protrusion holding portion 724 arranged closer to the center adjusts the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 equally on the left and right by making the protrusion length longer. Since the protruding pressing portion 724 on the front side and the protruding pressing portion 724 on the back side are both arranged at positions where they overlap with the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 in the vertical direction, the hollow member 740 Even if the posture is lost, it is possible to prevent the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 from falling off from the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In the present embodiment, the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding pressing portion 724 on the back side is arranged lower than the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding pressing portion 724 on the front side. As a result, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the projecting pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the backward tilted posture. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player who sees the hollow member 740 when looking down from the front side to see the shape and pattern of the tubular main body 741 of the hollow member 740 on the front side.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of shafted support parts 731 that project coaxially from both left and right ends in a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are bored in the vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and shafted support parts 731. A pair of loaded portions 733 that extend to the front side in a plate shape and receive a push-up load from below, and a plurality of light guides that are bored in the vertical direction with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted. The insertion hole 734, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 arranged in pairs on the diagonal line of the light guide insertion hole 734 and projecting in a ring shape in the top view, and the center of the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 in the top view. It is provided with a plurality of large receiving portions 736 that are arranged at positions and project from the top view ring shape.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The load-bearing portion 733 is arranged on the front side of the rotation shaft passing through the center of the shaft-bearing support portion 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to each of the left and right, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the mode of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, or the load at short time intervals. Is given or a continuous load is given, etc.), and the axial displacement is rotationally displaced around the shafted branch 731 in a different manner, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in the front and rear in a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially turtle shell shape), and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. ..

That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front side toward the center of the left and right. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the hollow member 740, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to guide the light guide. The relationship of the insertion hole 734 with respect to the long direction (the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the angle formed by the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side), the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 The posture of the hollow member 740 in (see FIG. 40) can be changed.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the hollow member 740 is closer to the center, and the longer direction is closer to the left-right center toward the front side as it is closer to the left and right ends. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the elongated direction of the hollow member 740 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and formed in a bottomed tubular shape having a circular cross section, and the front small receiving portion 735a is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. It is provided with a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in a bottomed tubular shape.

In the present embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the diameter of the cross section of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is designed to be 3 [mm], the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is designed to be 4.8 [mm], and the rear small is designed. The diameter of the inner cylinder of the receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, as for the gap size generated in the opposite direction between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743, the gap size between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 is larger than that of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. It is smaller than the clearance dimension with the portion 743.

As a result, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported by allowing rattling can be ordered. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a can be more likely to occur than the rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b.

In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily displaced in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. The direction of displacement of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later, can be adjusted so as to spread outward to the left and right toward the back surface side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the variable decorative member 750, and is arranged on both the left and right sides as compared with the large receiving portion 736 arranged on the center line CL1. The portion 736 is formed so that the distance from the rotation axis passing through the center of the shafted support portion 731 is longer and the vertical position is different, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four members having the same shape arranged side by side on the left side and four members having the same shape arranged side by side on the right side are symmetrically formed. The hollow member 740 will be described in detail, and the hollow member 740 arranged on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714, so that the light leaking from the front, back, left and right of the light guide member 714 is not visually recognized (difficult) by the player. However, it is a member configured so that the player's line of sight can be gathered at the upper tip of the light guide member 714, which makes it easy to visually recognize the light. A tubular main body portion 741 in which a frame is designed and formed in a tubular shape that is open vertically, and a flat plate extending portion 742 that extends in a flat plate shape in the front-rear and left-right directions from the lower edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741. A pair of projecting columnar portions 743 projecting downward from the lower surface of the plate extending portion 742 of the flat plate extending portion 742.

The outer shape of the tubular main body 741 in the upper view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 in the upper view, while the outer shape of the flat plate extending portion 742 in the upper view is the cover member. It is formed so as to be larger than the top view inside shape of the rear through hole 722 of the 720. That is, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is pulled out upward of the cover member 720 while being vertically displaceable while being inserted through the rear through hole 722. Is regulated.

The upper edge of the tubular main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. As a result, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. On the other hand, most of the light going upward on the back side is blocked by the tubular main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be satisfactorily delivered to the eyes of the player, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from being deteriorated due to the loss.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion where the ascending displacement is restricted by the projecting holding portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the projecting holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting columnar portion 743 on the back surface side, and restricts the hollow member 740 from being displaced ascending. By forming the projecting holding portion 724 and the projecting columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions in this way, even when the hollow member 740 changes its posture, the projecting columnar portion 743 is a plate-shaped displacement member. Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from coming off from the small receiving portion 735, the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The projecting columnar portion 743 has a projecting tip formed in a hemispherical shape and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (See FIG. 40), it is accepted by the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of projecting columnar portions 743 and the tubular main body portion 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetric. This makes it possible to change the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 when assembled upside down. , It is possible to prevent erroneous installation. Since the four hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right sides are formed in a symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 assembled on the left side from the center position on the left and right sides from being assembled on the right side. (It is possible to prevent erroneous installation).

Here, the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the center of the rotation axis facing the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar portion 743 is mainly displaced vertically by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49 (a), 49 (b) and 49 (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. FIG. 49 (a) shows the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, FIG. 49 (b) shows the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and FIG. 49 (c) shows. The upper end posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown in the figure. The horizontal posture corresponds to a posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 2.1 degrees about the reference O1 from the lower terminal posture, and the upper terminal posture is a plate-shaped displacement member from the horizontal posture. The 730 corresponds to a posture in which the reference O1 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 4 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture (lower end posture (initial posture)). ), The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, by recessing the rear small receiving portion 735b deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, the support position of the front small receiving portion 735a in the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( The vertical displacement between the support position (bottom) and the rear small receiving portion 735b (bottom) is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the posture of the hollow member 740 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture) from becoming a forward leaning posture. Further, the hollow member 740 is configured so that the surfaces of the support positions (bottoms) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even when is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 is set closer to the front (initial position) before the operation of the drive unit 760. Can be maintained stably.

As shown in FIG. 49B, in the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 both in the front and rear directions. .. Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be randomly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the process of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 being displaced to the upper end posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed toward the back side. Be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with respect to the upper end posture (near the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is centered on the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. Is easy to rotate and displace. That is, the displacement mode that tends to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which is a reference for small vibration.

A light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the tubular main body portion 741, and a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 are supported by being received by the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, first, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced about the reference O1 which is a straight line (straight line facing the left-right direction) connecting the shaft-bearing support portions 731, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (left-right direction). Instead, it will be displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1. Along with this, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also promoted to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is not only displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1 but also displaced in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) as the degree of inclination changes. Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. The displacement or posture change of the 740 in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side (center side) close to the center line CL1. The change in the degree of inclination is different from the change in the degree of inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side far from the center line CL1 (left and right outside). In the present embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the left and right sides having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. Is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). As a result, the amount of change in posture of the hollow member 740 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a certain manner can be changed depending on whether it is near or far from the center line CL1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress the resistance of the hollow member 740 at the time of displacement, there is a gap between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714. The shape and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed.

Here, the design gap is different between the long direction of the light guide member 714 in the top view and the direction orthogonal to the long direction. That is, the gap in the long direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the long direction.

Therefore, as the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the long direction becomes larger (the one arranged on the left and right outer sides), the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 become larger. The gap in the front-rear direction between them will be narrowed.

Therefore, when the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-rear direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides are pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or large damage. It may be easily loaded and damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of shielding the portion other than the tip portion of the light guide member 714 by the hollow member 740 and gathering the line of sight of the player at the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right center sides. It is configured as follows.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are located on the left and right center sides. It is arranged so that the distance between the front side small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the arranged small receiving portion 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the amount of front-rear displacement of the hollow member 740 that is pushed and displaced rearward is arranged on the left and right center sides. It can be geometrically defined so that the members arranged on the left and right outer sides are slightly smaller than the members arranged on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is formed substantially evenly in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel in the horizontal direction. It is provided so as not to fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 even if it moves.

Therefore, in the state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced, the displacement is suppressed to be less than the clearance dimension between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

Since the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the top view, the center of the small receiving portion 735 and the hollow It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while being aligned with the center of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the member 740.

At least, the arrangement of the protruding columnar portion 743 with respect to the small receiving portion 735 changes in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743. Changes can occur.

A mode for pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front side portion of the inner surface of the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large) is the protruding columnar portion 743. It starts to come into contact with the front side surface and is pushed toward the back side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, a gap is maintained between the front portion of the inner surface of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the front portion of the protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction about the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. It is configured to be able to cope with a change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 in the top view due to the displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 to the back surface side, and the rear small receiving portion receives a rattling that allows rotational displacement around the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the projecting columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide with each other during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated with the 714 can be suppressed to a small value, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from being cracked or chipped.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The variable decorative member 750 is a bifurcated support member 751 supported between the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a decorative member 756 fastened and fixed to the bifurcated support member 751 and arranged above the cover member 720. And.

The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting downward from the lower surface of the central portion of the plate-shaped body portion formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and both left and right end portions of the plate-shaped body portion. A pair of tubular protrusions 753 (different lengths) that are projected upward from the center, and a plate-shaped extension that extends from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. It is equipped with 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed so as to be inserted into the front through hole 723, and the bifurcated support member 751 is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through hole 723, while the large receiving portion 736 is a shafted support portion. Rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of 731. Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, the projecting tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. it can.

The plate-shaped extending portion 754 acts to arrange the position of the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the back side of the center of the columnar projecting portion 752. That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stable by its own weight can be set as the backward leaning posture. As a result, the contact position between the columnar projecting portion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since it can be moved toward the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 near the start of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be increased.

The decorative member 756 includes a pair of projecting leg portions 757 that project downward corresponding to the tubular projecting portion 753, and a female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg portion 757. The projecting leg portion 757 is inserted inside the tubular projecting portion 753.

The plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the tubular projecting portion 753. The bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 757 are fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the tubular projecting portion 753 to project. The fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. When assembling the cover member 720 to the base member 701, a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above with the hook-shaped portion 721c engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back surface side of the plate-shaped member 702. After fastening and fixing the insertion cover member 720 and the base member 701, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 721b by turning it upside down.

As a result, a plurality of members are non-fixedly arranged between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and fastening screws are screwed into a plurality of locations from the lower surface, but each component member is in the middle of assembly. Can be prevented from falling off from between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is arranged below the base member 701, and the fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix the drive unit 760. In the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the traveling direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, so that the second operating unit 700 is attached to the rear case 310. It is difficult to pull out the fastening screw in the housed state. Therefore, when the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently taken out from the rear case 310.

Further, on the back side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 is formed in which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screw is inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operating unit 700. Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at the stage, the operator can be made aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being forgotten to be assembled.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, the drive unit 760 arranged on the right side in the front view is shown. Although the drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, the components are symmetrical. Therefore, the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail, and the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 is made of a load member 761 that can apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and a metal (brass in this embodiment) that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761. A shaft rod portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape, a support case 763 to which the shaft rod portion 762 is fixed and the entire structure is formed in a case shape, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 arranged inside the support case 763, and a support. It includes a front lid member 770 arranged on the front side of the case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763, and an illuminated substrate 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770.

The load member 761 is formed of a resin material, and extends outward from a base end portion 761a in which a through hole through which a shaft rod portion 762 is inserted is formed and the base end portion 761a, and is abbreviated. A rod-shaped extension portion 761b that is bent and formed in a U-shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c that is formed in a rod shape that bends upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, and a rod-shaped extension portion 761c. Centering on the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d protruding from the extending tip of the extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 of the front lid member 770 formed in an arc shape and an opposed curved portion 761e arranged to face each other.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB2 is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b by engaging with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both sides of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b in the longitudinal direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (Only the back side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB2 along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. As a result, the slide is restricted, and at that position, the push-down of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw is the metal plate member MB2. Engage to regulate the retreat to the back side of the.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 has a projecting frame portion 771 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protrusions projecting inside the projecting frame portion 771 in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side. From the cylindrical portion 772, the wiring through recess 773 recessed so that the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 777 at the lower edge portion or the connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring can be passed, and the back surface of the plate. It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 projecting in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762.

The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to face the periphery of the illuminated substrate 777, and is a portion that prevents the illuminated substrate 777 from being loaded from the vertical and horizontal directions.

The projecting columnar portion 772 includes a front-view gourd-shaped seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 779 of the illuminated substrate 777. By assembling, the back surface of the illuminated substrate 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided in the seat portion, and the illuminated substrate 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion.

The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect, and a plurality of through holes 779 formed in the illuminated substrate 777 for assembly. And.

The through holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment) as a pair of circular through holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 772.

In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is, it corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the illuminated substrate 777 are configured as a single rigid body. Therefore, the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can easily vibrate the illuminated substrate 777, and the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 vibrates the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778. Can be configured.

In this embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is arranged between the load member 761 displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, it is possible to prevent excessive transmission of vibration.

The width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is to be vibrated or the light axis is maintained without being vibrated. In the former case, the width dimension may be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 includes a lower regulation portion 764 arranged below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, an upper regulation portion 765 arranged on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and a rear case 310. It is provided with a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) is screwed.

The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51 (a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and upwardly displaced.

That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the ascending position arranged as a result of rising by the electromagnetic force and the descending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and descending by its own weight. , The plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives the load from the load member 761 is displaced in the rotation direction about the shafted support portion 731. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which a current is not passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 761 is arranged in a descending position by its own weight. In FIG. 51 (b), a current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current and the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the load member 761 abuts on the lower regulating portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the shaft rod portion 762) with respect to the shaft rod portion 762, and the effect caused by this will be described. ..

First, since the load applied to the lower regulation portion 764 via the load member 761 is a load generated mainly by the own weight of the load member 761, the load member 761 is stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. can do. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the position of the center of gravity is substantially the center position of the member, but the load member 761 is a rod-shaped extension portion. Since the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend bifurcated from the extension tip side of the 761b, the center of gravity is located closer to the extension tip side than the substantially central position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. ..

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower regulation portion 764 is arranged on the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b as a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761. ..

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Therefore, the arrangement of the upper regulating portion 765 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761. There are few advantages associated with location. In the present embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by arranging the upper regulation portion 765 facing the rotating tip of the load member 761.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is more distant from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (the position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulation member 765 occurs at the rotating tip portion of the load member 761, so in the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip portion of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is configured to project toward the outer diameter side of a circle centered on the shaft rod portion 762, and the overhanging portion 761d abuts on the upper regulation member 765. As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and stably generate the load transmission on the rotation tip side.

In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 but is configured to be pulled up by an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core arranged in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured to pull up the load member 761 by attracting the metal plate member MB2.

According to this configuration, as compared with the configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by a member that moves by electromagnetic force, the load member 761 is overloaded (locally) even when the load member 761 is displaced by the load applied to the load member 761. Since the load is unlikely to occur, it is possible to easily prevent the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being damaged. As a result, the useful life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended even if the load member 761 is configured to receive a fluctuating load as in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the load member 761, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (predetermined on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state of receiving an attractive force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (rising position). While making contact at a plurality of points on a flat surface), a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (the part containing the coil), and the above-mentioned surface contact surface is provided. The upper regulating portion 765 and the overhanging portion 761d are configured to come into contact with each other on a surface parallel to the surface.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is applied to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 to prevent the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being overloaded. It can be dispersed and received on the lower edge portion or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid a large local load.

At the raised position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. It may be configured to be provided so that the load from the load member 761 is received only by the upper regulating portion 765. In this case, since the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be blocked, the durability of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load is likely to be concentrated on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken). Even in this case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one point. ..

Further, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 contacts the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points, so that a detection sensor is separately configured so that this contact can be detected. Therefore, the breakage (breakage) of the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 rebounds after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the arrangement and orientation of the upper regulation unit 765 can be designed only in consideration of the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 (the straight line passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762 and the width of the upper regulation unit 765). The angle with the straight line along the direction can be designed to be small).

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulation portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulation portion 764 and the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the lower regulation portion 764 has a lower regulation portion 764. The direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed as compared with the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line (force decomposition). As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764.

Moreover, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a long width dimension (width along the radial direction), a wide area of the surface receiving the load can be secured, and the load due to the load of the load member 761 causes the load member 761 to have a large area. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulation portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulation unit 764 and the upper regulation unit 765 via the load member 761 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions. It can be suppressed.

The materials of the upper regulation unit 765 and the lower regulation unit 764 are not limited in any way. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as a melamine resin, a polyurethane or an epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the materials of the upper regulation portion 765 and the lower regulation portion 764 may be made of the same material or may be different.

For example, when the upper regulating portion 765 is provided with a function of suppressing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 can receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the ascending position. As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent frictional resistance as well as damping property may be adopted.

In this case, the load member 761 is displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction) by the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761, only in a state where the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other. It can be easily prevented.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposed curved portion 761e is displaced on the back surface side of the curved projecting portion 774. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side and the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, so that the resistance to the rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposed curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above the portion. In the present embodiment, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is arranged in the secured space.

The vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposed curved portion 761e that is formed to be curved, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is extended straight in front view. That is, the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view in a state where the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from bending and deforming to the left and right due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the tip of the load member 761 is displaced upward and displaced while being slightly displaced to the left and right. Even with the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be pushed up stably. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the support mode will be described later.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is formed in a rod shape that extends straight in the vertical direction in the front view, but is in the middle position (axis) so that the upper end portion is arranged on the front side rather than the lower end portion in the side view. It is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left position of the rod portion 762).

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 can be moved toward the back side below the vicinity of the shaft rod portion 762, and the arrangement area of the members arranged on the front side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illumination board 777 can be moved to the back side, by separating the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illumination board 777, the light emitting means 778 irradiates the bottom surface of the flow. The light visually recognized through the members 91 and 92 can be easily recognized as a wide light. In other words, instead of the point emission that is visually recognized by the size of the outer shape of the LED, the surface emission that the light reaches in a circle around the optical axis and shines in a plane can be easily recognized.

Further, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed by bending back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, an overload is locally generated when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if it occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the flexibility of the load member 761 different in the front-rear and left-right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. The effect of being able to do it can be achieved.

When the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position, the upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761. Is supported more stably.

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the base end portion 761a to the overhanging portion 761d are still stably supported. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from rubbing against other members to damage the member or to require an extra driving force for driving the load member 761.

<Action of the second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700, since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right, the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly. And the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 are also configured to be different. In the following, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be described.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. FIG. 52 shows a state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 53, only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 is arranged in the lowered position, and the right drive is driven. The load member 761 of the unit 760 is shown in a state of being displaced upward from the lowering position to the rising position, and FIG. 54 is shown in a state of both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 being arranged in the rising position. ..

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state (non-excited state) in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained by the contact with the base member 701. Posture).

The state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which a current is controlled to flow through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side) (one-side excitation state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pushed up by the load member 761 on the right side, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in an intermediate posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal posture in the intermediate posture.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In the present embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in the shape of a small-diameter rod and bent in the front-rear direction, and is easily bent in the lateral direction (front-back direction), and is formed on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and above the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is formed with strength (rigidity) that allows it to bend and deform due to its own weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied in the direction including the front-rear component at the contact position with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily bent and deformed, and the load can be released by this bending deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to the state in which the load member 761 is bent and deformed.

The difference in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the rising direction between the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, the difference in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be designed. The elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be the same on the left and right, or may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (FIG. 50) is in the state opposite to that shown in FIG. 53. Even if a current is passed through (see) and no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on the right side, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the same as the posture shown in FIG. 53. Therefore, in the following, the state shown in FIG. 53 is referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and the description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of its own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced to half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the load member 761 on the left side being arranged in the raised position as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load member due to the load applied via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is used. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. is there.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so that the load member The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the deflection deformation of the 761 is small (a state in which the deflection deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is excited, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the load member 761 on one side. Focus on. Since the deflection deformation generated in the load member 761 is increased by this load, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed by the amount of the deflection deformation even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. In the state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulation protrusion 702c (initial posture, shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 55 (a)), from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The extending normal line abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the extending direction of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, the bending deformation generated in the load member 761 can be suppressed to a small extent. .. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the lower side in the front direction on the lower side in the front direction than the reference O1. It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending to.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)) where the amount of deflection deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed toward the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The applied load comprises a frontal component and a downward component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the front, the load including the front component and the downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. To do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). The rate of being done gradually increases).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the easiness of bending and deforming of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes with the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. That is, in the posture in which the load starts to be applied from the load member 761 to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)), the load member 761 is subjected to a rear load in a direction in which bending and deformation are unlikely to occur, and from the horizontal posture, the load is generated. A load in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to bend and deform than in the direction of the rear load (a downward load or a front load) is generated.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761 and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c) and the load are applied. Depending on the design of the part 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to bend (the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted, so that the second operation when the drive unit 760 is driven. The operation mode of the unit 700 can be designed differently.

In the present embodiment, since the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is formed to extend upward while projecting to the front side, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be bent and deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is flexed and deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of its own weight transmitted through the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be started to be used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 from the stage before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture.

In this way, the load is configured so that the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761. Even if the member 761 is over-displaced or under-displaced, the fluctuation that occurs in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be reduced.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 directly affect the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are precisely designed so as not to cause a deviation, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required at both the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage of the member, so that the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 is flexed and deformed, even if there is a slight difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 or the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761, it is designed to be offset by the flexure deformation of the load member 761. By doing so, it is possible to stabilize the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, the accuracy of the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage required for stabilizing the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed to a low level, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

This is not limited to the load member 761 alone, but the same can be said for the displacement of the left and right load members 761 combined. That is, when the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are formed to have symmetrical shapes as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load members 761 and the upper end portion of the load member 761 are formed by the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761.

As a result, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized in the intermediate posture regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state.

Further, the direction of bending caused in the load member 761 by the load applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 can be limited to the front side. This direction coincides with the direction of the displacement in the front-rear direction set in the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c with respect to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. As a result, the load that causes the load member 761 to bend and deform can be configured to face in a direction away from the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the influence of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 on the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Can be made smaller. In other words, the influence on the load member 761 can be suppressed in the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.

That is, rubbing or deformation that occurs in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion portion 774 and the opposed curved portion 761e, etc.). Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the mode of bending deformation of the load member 761. Therefore, the structure of the load member 761 and the design of the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the premise that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. Can be easy.

In addition, the direction of bending of the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (the same portion can be prevented from bending toward the front side or bending toward the back side depending on the situation. ) Therefore, the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761 can be related one-to-one, and the durability of the load member 761 is compared with the case where the load member 761 can be bent in both front and rear directions. The sex can be improved.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the raised position. (See FIG. 51 (b)).

Therefore, as described above, the front-rear displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 due to the bending deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c occurs between the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed by friction.

Therefore, even when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in the excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the excited state). A control mode in which the load member 761 is repeatedly switched between the non-excited state) and the load member 761 can be suppressed from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole.

This can be satisfactorily realized by a configuration in which the load member 761 is supported not only by the shaft rod portion 762 but also by the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 as in the present embodiment. More specifically, it is not a mode in which the load member 761 is placed between the descending position and the ascending position to receive the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the plate-shaped displacement with the load member 761 fixed in the ascending position. It is satisfactorily feasible because it is in a mode of receiving a load from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b on the shaft rod portion 762 side are provided with respect to the front-rear component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. However, if the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or misaligned in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a gap is created between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. there is a possibility.

When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance for effectively generating the electromagnetic force, the electromagnetic force suddenly weakens, and it becomes difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the raised position. As a countermeasure, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b or increase the resistance between the shaft rod portion 762 and the load member 761, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavier. The size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased, and in the latter case, the driving force for rotating the load member 761 is excessively required, which is not preferable because the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably placed not only at the shaft rod portion 762 but also at the left and right ends of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress the torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b as compared with the case where it is supported on one of the left and right sides, the axial displacement of the load member 761 is caused by the frictional resistance generated between the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole when controlling the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c to repeatedly bend and release without causing an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from being twisted and deformed.

It will be described back to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state (excitation state) in which a current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the load members 733 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are pushed up by the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in the upper terminal posture. .. In the present embodiment, in the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced from the intermediate posture by about 2.7 degrees (about 6.1 degrees from the lower terminal posture and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. By doing so, the deflection generated in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In FIG. 54, for convenience, the deflection of the left and right load members 761 is shown as being so small that it cannot be discriminated. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in the present embodiment, by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed in a plurality of ways (at least three ways). You can switch with.

In order to switch the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. 54, the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is maintained while the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is maintained. Since the SOL2 may be excited, the posture can be easily switched smoothly.

56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b) show an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a figure. In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on the left side, and the middle timing chart shows the electromagnetic solenoid on the right side. The conduction state of the SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In addition, due to the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing of conducting electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs), but in FIGS. 56 and 57, for the purpose of facilitating understanding. For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown to be displaced at the same time as the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56B is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is such that the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched, and the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The switching mode is the same as the repeating mode.

As described above, the patterns of switching the states described above in FIGS. 52 to 54 are not one, but are generated in a plurality of patterns by different combinations of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since the posture switching pattern of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 occurs in a plurality of ways, the displacement pattern of the hollow member 740 that rides on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (see FIG. 43). Can be configured in a plurality of ways, but the details will be described later.

In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a), and 57 (b), for convenience, the short-term conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown to be constant. , This is just an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set separately, or may be configured to be gradually lengthened or gradually shortened, and can be set arbitrarily.

Further, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be generated instantaneously (pulse-like), while the conduction length is lengthened. , The posture change can be maintained with sufficient length. Further, by shortening the conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is vibrating.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operation unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape in a top view. In the following, the portion on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the portion on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 59, 60, 61 and 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). Is illustrated, FIG. 60 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture, FIG. 61 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and FIG. 62 shows a plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of shafted support portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is shown as the reference O1. Reference O1 is shown in the following drawings with the same meaning. In FIGS. 59 to 62, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right at the center in the left and right direction is shown.

The variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 59, 60 and 61, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 61 and 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced (backward) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750, and the load in the front-rear direction is applied. Transmission occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is a small change in the posture from the initial posture of the first stage (the plate-shaped displacement member 730) mainly occurring in the vertical direction. Stage, FIG. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, FIG. 61, FIG. 62) and. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction).

Here, the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state. Therefore, by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) 750. The displacement mode of can be switched with a plurality of variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion forming the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are not in a relationship of sandwiching the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of a load is suppressed and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. Can be done.

63, 64, 65 and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 63, 64, 65 and 66, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 63, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 64, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 65, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 66, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown. In FIGS. 63 to 66, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 on the right side at the center in the left-right direction is shown.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are arranged at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and away from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction as compared with the large receiving portions 736a in the center of the left and right.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (on both the left and right sides) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 63, 64 and 65, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 65 and 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750 (although it is retracted). ), The load transmission in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of the relationship of pushing further.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed of the load in the vertical direction, and when comparing only the vertical components of the displacement, the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the horizontal direction is used. The displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of.

In this way, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center of the left-right direction) due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured so that the direction is different for each step, whereas the displacement on both sides in the left-right direction is variable. The displacement of the decorative member 750 occurs mainly in the vertical direction. Thereby, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be changed depending on the degree of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely secured, as shown in FIG. 66, the bifurcated support that occurred when paying attention to the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion forming the front through hole 723 disappears, and the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through hole 723 at the front and rear positions as it is. It has a dimensional relationship that cuts into the tubular part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 is translated to the back side by contacting the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front side through hole 723 is shown. It is illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Given. As a result, the holding force of the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Therefore, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. Therefore, the appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 after the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture can be changed.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is configured to allow a slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right.

As described above, the vertical displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 due to the change in posture is larger in the variable decorative members 750 on the left and right sides than in the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While it is easy for the player's attention to be focused on the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper terminal position, the player's attention is focused on the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right. It can be made easier to collect.

Therefore, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end posture or the posture change is repeated so as not to hold (stop) in the upper end posture. It is possible to easily attract the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper end posture, the player is placed on the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right. It is possible to easily gather the line of sight of.

As a result, when there is a specific light guide member 714 that the player wants to pay particular attention to among the plurality of light guide members 714, the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 can easily attract the player's line of sight. By controlling the drive unit 760 to be driven by (controlling the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714 in relation to the drive mode of the drive unit 760), the line of sight of the player can be changed to the specific light guide member 714. Can be collected in.

FIG. 67 is a schematic view schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, the directional view of the reference O1 is shown, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper terminal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is arranged above the front side of the reference O1, the displacement in the front-rear direction is larger than the displacement in the vertical direction at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged directly in front of the reference O1 (because they are arranged on the horizontal line), at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. , The vertical displacement is larger than the front-back displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 with respect to the center of the reference O1, the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b are different. Can be done. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be different between the members arranged in the center on the left and right and the members arranged on the left and right outside.

68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 68, 69, 70 and 71, the displacements of the second operation unit 700 are shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 69, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 70, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 71, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 68 to 71, a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction is shown. As described above, until the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 70), the front portion of the inner surface of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 do not come into contact with each other, and the hollow member 740 The displacement of is mainly the vertical displacement.

On the other hand, the inner side surface front portion of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 abut between the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end posture, and the hollow member 740 after the abutment. Is pushed toward the back surface side with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this way, it is possible to provide a time difference between the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the action of changing the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture), the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side is the width LH1a, whereas the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the upper side. The width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side in the terminal posture changes to the width LH1b (LH1a> LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back surface side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, it is possible to change the balance between the amount of light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light radiated to the back surface side as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is directed toward the player as compared with the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). Since the light is weakened, the light guide member 714 can be easily viewed (easily seen), and the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger in the same comparison, so that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 is increased. Can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the line of sight can be drawn to the light guide member 714.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705 as described above, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in the present embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705, and the dimension of the gap is the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illuminated substrate 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed toward the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but the other light guide member 714 (when focusing on one individual light emitting means 706a, the true light is true. It is configured to prevent heading toward the light guide member 714) other than the light guide member 714 arranged above. That is, since the base end side of the light guide members 714 is separated by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and heading toward another light guide member 714 (FIG. 72). See enlarged view).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is formed to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a from reaching the other light guide member 714.

Therefore, when the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different from each other, the light reaches the other light guide member 714 and the appearance of the other light guide member 714 is changed. It is possible to avoid affecting it. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or being visually recognized through the light guide member 714 in a state where the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a is mixed. ..

When the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illumination substrate 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the entire light emitting means 706b and visually recognized by the player. Can be done.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is displaced in a different manner by differently driving the drive units 760 (see FIGS. 56 and 57) arranged below the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. To do.

For example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as the first displacement mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reciprocally displaced between the lower end posture and the intermediate posture by repeatedly operating one drive unit 760. Can be made to. Further, as a second displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to move the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the intermediate posture and the upper terminal posture. Can be reciprocally displaced with.

Further, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as the first stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state to cause the plate-shaped displacement. The member 730 can be stopped in an intermediate posture. Further, as a second stopping mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in the upper terminal posture by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state and then maintaining the other drive unit 760 in an excited state. Can be done.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the left and right drive units 760 are not structurally different, and the load applied to the load member 761 by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when only one drive unit 760 is excited. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the bending caused by the load member 761 (see FIG. 55 (a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Instead, it can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 on the side that maintains the excited state and the drive unit 760 on the side that repeatedly operates are used. The degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 can be adjusted (adjusted) by alternately switching according to the number of operations or switching every period. As a result, the replacement timing of the left and right drive units 760 can be adjusted, and as a result, the useful life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time.

The degree of bending of the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the load member 761 is bent regardless of the magnitude of the bending. That is, a configuration that can make a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the drive units 760 and driving and controlling both of them is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly arranged at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 from the player's point of view through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is arbitrarily set. For example, the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a, and the driving unit 760. It may be controlled so as to correspond with the control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination substrate 705.

For example, as an association with the control mode of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning opening 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is lit according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. It may be controlled so that a plurality of game balls enter the second winning opening 140, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side is turned on according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. ..

In this case, by confirming the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls. Then, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the first displacement mode described above, while being more advantageous to the player than entering the first winning opening 64. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 140, which is often the case, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the second displacement mode described above, so that the game can be played due to the difference in the displacement mode of the second operation unit 700. It is possible to easily make the player know whether the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be drive-controlled in relation to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is the upper limit value, the winning ball is obtained, but the player cannot obtain the opportunity of fluctuation. If the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed. Because it can be done, it can attract the attention of the player. Therefore, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value), the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value) for the player. ) Can be easily noticed.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705, the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a You may associate it.

In this case, for example, the number of balls expected to be entered when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round) may be associated with the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. It may be associated with the fact that a game ball having a larger number of balls enters the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning).

As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and that a game ball having an unexpected number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a. It can be grasped by the player.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the attractive force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described, but the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the attractive force acts in the horizontal direction. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the energization is released and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 has a contact member 2190 that is coaxially supported with the auxiliary device 160 and is arranged so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and an urging spring SP21 that urges the contact member 2190. And.

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163 so that the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight in a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. (See FIG. 73 (b)).

The contact member 2190 includes a cushion portion 175a that is arranged so as to be in contact with the driven member 163, and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction of pushing the rotating member 2191 back to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 side.

Displacement modes of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by an electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and via the state shown in FIG. 73B, the rotating member 2191 opposes the urging force of the urging spring SP21. Is rotationally displaced. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced by itself until the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) as a boundary.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73B, the driven member 163 can be oscillated and displaced by a fluctuating urging force. Thereby, the variation of the displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant velocity. It is provided with a transmission means 3410 (for example, a rack and pinion transmission mechanism (not shown)) that transmits the driving force so as to perform the displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment. In FIGS. 74 to 77, the state in which the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward is illustrated in chronological order.

78 (a) to 78 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operation unit 3400. In FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78 (c), the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. ..

In the first operation unit 3400, an L-shaped elongated hole portion 3406 (a shape in which rectangles whose long sides are orthogonal to each other are integrated) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed with an opening having a size such that the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the tubular portion 444d is arranged at the upper end position of the long opening in the vertical direction of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the long opening is displaced downward in the vertical direction by the displacement up to FIG. 75. To do. That is, since the left-right position of the tubular portion 444d does not change in the displacements from FIGS. 74 to 75, the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. And can be configured.

By forming a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 is blocked. However, this role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to this embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 is improved). be able to).

Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved while maintaining the effect that the operation start timings of the elevating plate 430 and the pinnate member 460 can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, the transmission means 3410 facilitates the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 by a constant velocity linear motion (see FIG. 78 (a)). In this case, the synchronization described above in the first embodiment is performed. If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is diverted as it is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

More specifically, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of change in angle with respect to the amount of displacement of the base end side portion 444a becomes small).

Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 cannot be displaced at a substantially constant velocity with respect to the elevating plate 430. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, meshes with the upper right rotary gear 441, and is connected to the relative displacement member 442. An armed rotary gear 3441 with an extension is provided. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially canceled, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, it is not the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in response to (proportional to) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a, but the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a. By converting the amount of change in angle with respect to the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm into the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion, the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion. , The difference in displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (offset).

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be brought closer to the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 may be configured to pass through the rotation axis of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and be guided to the relative displacement member 442. That is, by continuously forming the path of the electric wiring DH1 in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430, the rotary gear 3441 with the arm, and the relative displacement member 442, the electric wiring accompanying the displacement of the first operation unit 3400. It is possible to avoid a large fluctuation in the path length of the DH1.

In this case, since the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative portion 493, it is easy to dispose an illuminated substrate in the decorative portion 493 and execute a light emitting effect by a light emitting means such as an LED. Can be done.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operation unit 700 is not arranged has been described, but the second operation unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. The detection device 4780 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are not shown except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which a current is not passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4761 is arranged in a descending position by its own weight. In FIG. 79 (b), a current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current and the load member 4761 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the load member 4761 abuts on the lower regulating portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

The load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, except that the overhanging portion 761d is changed to the thick overhanging portion 4761f and the thin overhanging portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that projects from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b with a wall thickness (front-rear width) equivalent to that of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the ascending position, it comes into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 and corresponds to the portion that receives and stops the load.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g projects from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, which is a plate-shaped thin-walled (shorter front-rear width) than the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. It is a part. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is configured to come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 in the same way as the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f in the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the raised position, and is compared with the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. Since it is thin, it is preferentially damaged as compared with the thick overhanging portion 4761f due to the accumulation of fatigue caused by repeatedly exciting the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are It is not necessary that they are formed flush with each other, and it is sufficient that at least the upper surface is flush with each other, and the position of the lower surface can be arbitrarily set. For example, by shortening the vertical width of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g as compared with the vertical width of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, the number of times of repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged can be reduced. The period until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged can be adjusted.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged in the printed circuit board 4781 so that the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g can be inserted and removed in the detection groove.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g blocks the detection light at the lowered position of the load member 4761 (see FIG. 79 (a)), and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 is thin-walled at the raised position of the load member 4761. The protrusion 4761 g is arranged above so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79 (b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be described. Normally, the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, so that it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This confirmation is performed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4), and when it is determined that the malfunction is occurring, an alarm is generated or an error is displayed on the display device, thereby causing the player or the player to perform the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700. It can be made easier for the hall clerk to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged (broken) and dropped, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g and the load member 4761 do not operate synchronously, so that the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection of the detection sensor 4782 are detected. The result does not correspond. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other, an alarm is generated on the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error is displayed on the display device to overhang the wall. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the hall clerk to notice that the portion 4761 g is damaged (broken).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used by both the position detecting means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and the damage detecting means for detecting the breakage (breakage) of the load member 4761. ..

According to the present embodiment, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f can be brought into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 to stop the load member 4761 at the raised position. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and put it in the maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, which gives the player an unexpected disadvantage. It can be avoided.

In this way, among the parts that come into contact with the upper regulation portion 765, a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) is provided, and the breakage (break) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, whereby the thick overhanging portion 4761f is damaged. The load member can be replaced before the fatigue accumulates to the extent that it breaks.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, the case of bending and deforming in relation to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c itself has been described, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment applies a load to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c. The deflection adjusting device 5780 for adjusting the deflection deformation is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

80 (a) and 80 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. The deflection adjusting device 5780 is a box-shaped foundation member 5781 having a built-in metal coil and an iron rod supported by the foundation member 5781 so as to be able to move forward and backward in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to project above the foundation member 5781. It is provided with an adjusting member 5782 to be formed.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-sided excitation state, the load member 761 is less flexed and deformed by driving the deflection adjusting device 5780 (deflection deformation is about half). State changes to). In other words, in the first embodiment, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper terminal posture by putting the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 in an excited state (both). ing.

That is, with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 in a one-sided excitation state (see FIG. 80 (a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjusting device 5780 moves around the adjusting member 5782. By energizing the metal coil in a winding state to form an electromagnet and driving the adjusting member 5782 upward, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the bending of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is applied. It can be applied to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c (see FIG. 80 (b)).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side and the adjusting device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side in a coordinated manner. The displacement member 730 can be maintained in the lower end posture (initial posture), the middle posture, and the upper end posture.

As a result, the arrangement of the drive means can be solidified as compared with the case where the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 need to be arranged in pairs on the left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be fixed, it is possible to avoid that the area required as the path for passing the wiring is dispersed in various places (for example, left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that in FIG. 82, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper surface of FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface side (in front of the paper surface in FIG. 83B) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 is other than the passage path of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a). It is possible to prevent the space from passing through the through hole 60a.

A part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. Will be done. A detailed description of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 via the displacement member 966. Be connected. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945 that are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by notching on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87 (b)). b) Opposite to the specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, the second winning opening 140, which is formed through above the specific winning opening 65a, and the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the side edge.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Will be done. Further, since the first through hole 941a1 is formed by reducing the diameter from the front side to the back side as described above, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back surface of the back surface base 941 is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. As a result, the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, since the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side as described above, the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the back base 941 in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the notch bottom portion (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () A game ball that has not flowed into any of them can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87B)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) and is formed in a cup shape, and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (Fig. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back surface side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be erected so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the flowing region from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide unit 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally to the outside of the back base 941. As a result, the game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60 can be re-collised, and the flow direction of the game ball can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is the throwing unit described later. It comes into contact with the edge of the inflow port 982d of the 970. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g to the first throwing portion 942 g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball to be thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the second winning opening 140).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper surface)) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87)) at the edge portion thereof. (B) A second throwing portion 942c protruding from the paper surface front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface of the front side wall portion 941b comes into contact with the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by bending at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140 in a substantially L-shape in the rear view. The size of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the opposing surfaces in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is formed by notching the protruding tip portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B)). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side of FIG. 87 (b))) from the gaming area side of the rear base 941 to the opposite side to the gaming area. The first shaft hole 941d which is recessed in two places in a circular shape, and the two first openings 941e which are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941. The protruding portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Formed with and.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and are extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening in the opposite direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 via the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the standing portion 942f.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b). ) A second guide wall 942d projecting upward) is provided.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, when the displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 are separated from each other. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The back base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of the specified winning opening 65a in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side via the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side (U-shaped open side) of the second receiving portion 943c. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other, which will be described later. it can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c is a first concave portion recessed in a circular shape from the throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). It includes 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87B) of the pair of feather members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end faces are brought into contact with each other. .. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the facing space of the pair of feather members 945 can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the ball throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back surface of the back base 941. It is projected to the side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. You can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite to the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screws inserted in the second through hole 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 in between in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate in a state where the wing member 945 can rotate. Can be placed between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the displacement member 966 is arranged at the tip thereof via the first opening 941e of the rear base 941. The size is set so as to project to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the back base 941. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position in the front view. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), and in the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. To be equipped.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing in the width direction and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a long rectangular shape in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). It is provided with a contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface on which the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, comes into contact. In the displacement member 966, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and being slidably displaced.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface on which the side surface of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is in contact with the bulging portion 965e1. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 in a closed state (see FIG. 91) by abutting the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3 and sliding displacement. Can be done.

Next, the connection state of the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In FIGS. 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side) and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in an open state. The upper inner surface 966a3 that abuts on the 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in the closed state, and the lateral side of the displacement member 966 from the lateral side (left-right direction in FIG. 91) to the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined to.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed vertically, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism consists of a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 through which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 966 is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (the other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases by the amount of the weight of the displacement member 966 being added, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state is started to be driven and displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the protrusions 945b are located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing members 945. Be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. As a result, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (own weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be regulated by the contact of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member 945 when it is in the closed state. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is moved from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 92). As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963 formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the 963s, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are pivotally supported and connected to the connecting member 964. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in the direction facing the outside of the facing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). It is provided with a through hole 962 da that penetrates toward it.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Is formed in. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the lining portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the lining portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the tip end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in the front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in the front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the opposite direction of the pair of first guide walls 942 b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93A) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 966 can be arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposite direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the projecting portion 962g is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the dimension of the projecting portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the erecting portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when arranging the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the protruding portions 962g and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape covering the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the side of the first accommodating portion 962 from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations. The engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, the protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)). ) Is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

The protruding portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. As a result, the screw inserted through the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off to the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side opposite to the main body 961a of the shaft 961b. A ring portion 961c arranged at the end of the ring portion 961c and a coil spring SP1 arranged between the ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are provided.

The main body 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound spirally a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). (See) Formed with an upright portion 964b that bends to the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. It includes a first recessed portion 964c to be formed, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e that penetrates in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protruding portion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while being connected to the tip portion 965a. It is formed from the portion 965b.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the opposite bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) at the end on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the direction of gravity.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. As a result, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in a top view. Further, the protrusion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). The width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion holes 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Is formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. Further, in FIGS. 96A and 96B, the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96A, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, a coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body 961a and the ring 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is extruded in a direction away from the main body 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is said that the inner surface of the solenoid is in contact with the inner surface of the solenoid. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96B, when electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is pulled into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a to form a circle. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 It is assumed that the solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side (upper side in FIG. 96B) in the direction of gravity about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963. Can be brought into contact. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. Therefore, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, and is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set with the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance of the rotating portion 965b is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 becomes large. The whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, whereby the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling portion 943a (ball throwing unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 to reduce the overall size. Can be planned.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 98 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (a) and As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is slid displacement to the other side in the gravity direction. Will be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98A, the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are brought into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is moved to one side in the direction of gravity. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is closed.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to a player's fraudulent act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being opened and the game ball from easily flowing into the second winning opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the displacement member between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When acted on, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and resistance when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated) is increased. It occurs and prevents the opening or closing of the wing members. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). It is set to be less than 3 times (see (a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 The posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted by making it easier to abut and changing the posture of the displacement member 966. By setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted. It is possible to prevent changes from being regulated. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. It is provided with a plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b formed in a cylindrical shape on both outer sides of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c projecting from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d projecting from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region side, so that the game ball that has flowed down into the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 951a. It is possible to suppress the fall from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a in a ring shape, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding portion 953 g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a protrusion 953h protruding from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951 side, and two locations penetrating the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a. It is formed with an inflow port of 953j.

The main body 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. It is formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of feather members 945 described above on the outer side in the opposite direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The shape of the inner edge of the opening 953a1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is opened, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by the erection wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated from the base end side by the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f from engaging with each other and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and allows the game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the wall portions 953d is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protruding dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the recessed 941h formed in the back surface base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are coaxially arranged and the protrusion The setting portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusions 953h are formed at substantially the same positions in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the ball entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entrance is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow ports 953j are formed in pairs (at two locations) at predetermined intervals, so that even if the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is enlarged, the inflow port 953j can be reached. The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at the connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. As a result, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of closed wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, it is located at a position where a large amount of game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953. The inflow port 953j can be approached. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the above-mentioned entry ball member 953. Further, the passage member 955 is a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and is located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b formed through the third opening 955b, a pair of third openings 955c formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. It is formed by including a rolling portion 955d to be provided and a second recessed portion 955f located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which the connecting member 957c and the transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that protrudes in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the gravity direction, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953 in a state where the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, in the rolling portion 955d, the end portion on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between a pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99 (c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and faces the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed at the position where it is. As a result, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed by including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a is a rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 957a1, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and a side opposite to the main body portion 957a1 of the shaft portion 957a2. It is provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end portion of the coil spring SP2 and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 due to the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body portion 957a1 and inserted. Will be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box shape that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. Further, the case member 957b is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99B) with a diameter larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and a first recessed portion thereof. A second recessed portion 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular lateral view. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from the end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), in a state where the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is a plate member due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of protruding toward the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951. As a result, the force is transmitted to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)) about the shaft hole 958b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. Is rotated to. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates the plate member 951 side to forcibly open the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body 957a1. It is said that it is in a state of being. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side in the same manner.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction of As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). Note that FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Further, in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that inclines unilaterally in the gravity direction from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (a)) of the main body 953a to the outside. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c projecting at a connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in succession.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls a game ball flowing in between a pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. .. As a result, the game ball flowing into the space opposite to the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (below FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the gaming ball and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, it is different before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of the game ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104B). As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the accepted game ball is shortened to the passage member 955. It can be guided (inflowed) in time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is set so that the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Is formed. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. 2 The guide surface 954d1 is provided.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and is formed with the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. As a result, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and are projecting toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). .. That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to a surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is opened 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (longitudinal outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. It is formed so as to be inclined to the side. As a result, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is increased, and the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation shaft of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (above the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Since there is a low risk of jumping out from the outside, by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent the vehicle from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before closing the opening 953a1 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c extends in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d extends in a direction in which the projecting portion 954c and the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface on the opposite side are substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the side edge portion 954c3 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d to ensure deceleration and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before the opening 953a1 is closed, and the over-winning can be suppressed.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the rolling ball is guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

In the projecting portion 954c, the distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the above.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a operating the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) are connected to the solenoid 610 operating. A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the illustrated state. Further, in FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83 (a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where the specific winning opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap with each other in the front view. Is formed in. As a result, a space can be formed on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a A gaming machine including a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a and a second driving means for driving the plate member 951 is known. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively, these pair of wing members 945 and the plate. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951 and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space can be secured on the back surface of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (evacuation), making it difficult for the player to see, and at the same time, the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), Which makes it easier for the player to see, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged near the central opening is a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By arranging the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, it is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (evacuation). As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of feather members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 provided with the two displacement members (plate member 951 and the pair of wing members 945), the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and the drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is arranged, each drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945). Space can be formed.

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105A, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 105A). It is installed side by side along. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) by the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of feather members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the back base. Since it is connected to 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) by the front base 943 at the same time as the action of fastening and fixing the back base 941 to the front base 943. As a result, when the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13), it is possible to prevent the drive unit 960 from being forgotten to be attached.

In the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960, the positions of the ends on the opposite side (rear side) of the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position, and the drive unit is set. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion of the specific winning opening unit 950 opposite to the plate member 951 side (rear side). This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the game board 13, and it is possible to prevent the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged in a posture in which the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are oriented in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the opposite sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 from the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. Thereby, the shape of the partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged can be simplified.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the direction of gravity. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is located at the tip thereof (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the wing member 966 is arranged, the second prize is compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the mouth 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in pairs with the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to detect the illegality. There was a risk of being done.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951 and the clerk cheats on the ball entry member 953. Is difficult to find.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, by closing the plate member 951, the drive unit 960 becomes the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1 because it is shielded from the screen and the location where fraud is applied becomes invisible.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls (off-the-shelf product), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's fraudulent activity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively vulnerable to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (broken wire) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easier. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an error is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Since the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws by setting the fastening position of the above, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound and arranged around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegal act is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such an illegal act can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shear direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction to detect it. A force in the shear direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position biased toward the end portion of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular protrusion 953c) of the screw, so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such fraud can be made more difficult to perform.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the above-mentioned winning port unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. A distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985 are mainly provided.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. Formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j protruding in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opened on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opened on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981 g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. The ball throwing passage TR0 is formed, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0 are provided. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has the inner edge portion in the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first thrown ball from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g are brought into contact with each other. It can be hard to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in the front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the two facing each other. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back surface base 985 side in an annular shape. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h and the recess 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erecting tip surface descends toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)). Be tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to guide them toward the openings 985e and 985f. It can be easily flowed into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily visually recognized even in the state of passing through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side toward the flow direction of the game ball, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while being guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state where the distribution portion 983 can be rotated. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the action portion 983a is set so that the connection position with the contact portion 983d is on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution portion 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis to extend the extending direction of the working portion 983a to one or the other. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion for accommodating the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above inside, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back surface base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. , The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113B, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular through holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. It is mainly provided with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 922 and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 is provided with an annular protrusion 992f projecting from the sixth passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular protrusion 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the erection wall 993e, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, the inside of the detection hole SE1a is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are formed. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, the game of flowing down the game area by exchanging the throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is a figure. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape that can be seen from the front is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in the present embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having the specification of arranging the distribution unit 980 and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having the specification of arranging the replacement unit 1980 are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification is used, so the color arrangements of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is used.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown into the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the rear base 1985 in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the distribution unit 980, and is communicated with the internal space of the opening 985d and the through hole 981c which are communicated with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982. It is formed with an opening of 985 g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, so that the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 1980 Can be easily replaced with (change of specifications).

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the aisle unit 990 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. No need. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the front surface of the game board 13 is used. Space can be used effectively.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light-transmitting material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate. , Attach the seal to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transparent material) resin material, it flows down the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the front unit 940. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless transparent (light transmitting material) resin material and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material. Through the unit 940, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, the distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 having one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the exchange unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Since it is installed, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the exchange unit 1980 is arranged in the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the exchange unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, by positioning the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a, the replacement unit 1980 Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which is communicated with the first passage of the first member. A game machine having two passages and a second member provided on the back side of the game board is known. The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are located between the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960 facing each other. The wall 942d is inserted. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located outside the pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposite direction. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. The position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since (the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (arm portion 962e), as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b, The occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced accordingly. , Product cost can be reduced.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged (formed so as to be able to hold) on the front unit 940 provided with the second throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the front unit 940 and the back surface of the game board 13 are arranged. When each of the throwing units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. To. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the work of engaging the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after simultaneously attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e, the wall portion 962f, and the front unit 940 The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the back base 941 and the rear base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is inserted and the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960 can block the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 from the outside, and prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the protruding portion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXX b of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in -CXXb line. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, there is a gap K1 in the space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion. The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from that of the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that is rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a linear shape has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. It is provided with a recess 8966a6 that is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941. 2 Winning openings 140 are arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) To the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122) with a bulging portion 966b.

The protrusion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 becomes the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced from the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside of. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be regulated that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with the protrusion 945b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 according to the eighth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) correspond to FIG. 96 (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engaged state during displacement to is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 9965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion 965b which is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a protrudes from the connecting side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a setting portion 965f.

The outer shape of the insertion portion 9965e in the front view is formed to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. It protrudes from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the connecting hole 966b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with a bulge portion 965e1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position where a slight gap is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other for transmission. The displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. .. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotation shaft 965c side. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is set to rotate before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are displaced. It is possible to suppress contact. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other to regulate the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and the displacement member 966 is displaced while the wing member 945 is closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the transmission member 10965 is inserted. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 10965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion that is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a is projected from the connecting side of the insertion portion 10965e inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a vertical portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved about the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 is provided with a contact surface 10965e4 on a side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966 described later with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in the front view. The second opening 966c has a state in which the shape of the inner edge in front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Placed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 is formed on the opposite surface of the protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the bulging portion 966b protruding from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and the bulging portion 966b. It mainly includes a recess 10966d to be recessed.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and the recessed portion 10966d1 is provided on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged so as to face each other. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inside the contacted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 axes the rotation shaft 965c. When rotated to, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state in which the contact surface 10966d1 is slightly separated from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member. By rotating the 10965, the insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced in the open state.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1. As a result, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d while the displacement member 10966 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contact surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contact portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 in the gravity direction (bulging portion). When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the transmission member 10965 is in contact with the 965e1), the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without being rotated. Sliding displacement of member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engaging portion 10965e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 according to the tenth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b is formed with the first tooth surface 11942b1 of the gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 is set between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with the first gear GY1 pivotally supported by the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. As a result, the displacement member 11966 can be slidably displaced to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 is axial to the first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, the second member 11968 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and the first member 11967. It is formed with a first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c in the gravity direction. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is projected from the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968 can be arranged on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 2 Sliding groove 11968b formed through the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) in a long hole shape in the plate thickness direction, and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on an end face that extends to the surface.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and the first gear is The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is closer to the inner surface of the second throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade portion, and 11968c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is opened, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, so that the second member 11968 is displaced. The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount twice as much as the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be allowed.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), The other end of the thread is operated (pulled out and pulled) to reciprocate the game ball, so that the detection device SE4 detects it a plurality of times. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 1966 (second member 11968) is slide-displaced and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c is inserted in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the blade portion 11968c The thread can be cut between the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged from the second winning opening 140 on the rolling passage of the game ball has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set to be short, and the protruding tip surface is set to a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. To.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting toward the displacement member 12966 are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into the shafts of the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposite direction on one end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the gravity direction. The distance dimension between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, a second member 12966 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 that is meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12868.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface is the first member 12967 and the second gear. It is geared to GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two-stage gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to mesh the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b. The surface is meshed with the second member 12868.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 129666c is formed through at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. Further, the first member 12967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c in the gravity direction, and the second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching the 12966c, and a third tooth surface 12966f of the gear tooth surface on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side, which will be described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of feather members 945 are closed, and the pair of feather members 945 are arranged. In the open state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12868. As a result, the second member 12966 can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, whereby the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12868 is formed from a metal material into a plate-like body having a substantially H-shape in front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is provided along the second tooth surface 12966a of the gear tooth surface and the extension direction of the second tooth surface 12966a (vertical direction in FIG. 128A) on the outer side of the pair of extension portions in the opposite direction. A sliding groove 12968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12966b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12966 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12966b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12966a. Therefore, the rotation of the second gear GY2 causes the second member 12868 to be slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12868 can be displaced with the displacement of the first member 12967.

The slide displacement directions of the first member 12967 and the second member 12868 are set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12868 is set to be larger by the small diameter of the second gear GY2.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 12868 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c cross the rolling passage of the game ball and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to move, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140. it can.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, and the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140 and passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. It can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the second member 12868, when the wing member 945 is open, the blade portion 6683 is on the other side in the gravity direction from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 has entered the second winning opening 140. Be placed. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of feather members 945 are open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 can block the rolling passage of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, so that the displacement distance of the second member 12966 is set to the tenth. It can be less than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 are closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The drive is transmitted from the solenoid to the wing member 945 by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of feather members 945 are closed and the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are set to open.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-driven. It is arranged in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 is erected from the base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side and from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position where it overlaps with the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the vertical dimension of the engaging portion 13965j is set to a length exceeding the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and the engaging portion 13965j is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, a support portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shaped side view is projected from the engaging portion 13965j at the erection tip thereof. The support portion 13965j1 is set so that the interfacing dimension inside the opening is larger than the maximum outer dimension of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposite direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) of the pair of engaging portions 13965j is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be arranged inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slidly displaced in the gravity direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slidly displaced in the gravity direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced according to the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, so that the pair A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the space for arranging the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices is reduced to the pair of wing members 945 (second prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Next, the displacement member 14966 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXB-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of.

In addition, in FIG. 130 (a) and FIG. 131 (a), the outer shape of a pair of feather members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The open state of the pair of feather members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is shown. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position in the front view. It is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130 (a)), and in the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge shape set to be substantially square in the front view, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))). It is provided with a contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball). Diameter). As a result, when the displacement member 14966 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the other side covering Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut, one side is contacted. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -Since the diameter of the game ball), the displacement member 14966 can be freely dropped, so that the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked by the edge portion of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are not communicated with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), the displacement member 14966 Is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a figure. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the 14th embodiment is formed in a box shape and is arranged so as to face the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, and the first accommodating portion 15962. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the second accommodating portions 963, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the connecting member 964 while being pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to the above.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 132 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 15962b that protrudes from the reference) is provided.

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 are mainly provided. Will be done.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 15962b that protrudes from the reference) is provided.

The guide portion 15962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a lateral view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. A projecting portion 962g projecting from 962f on the opposite side of the lining portion 962a (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e located on the other side in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f. It is mainly provided with a second arm portion 15962j to be formed and a third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f interposed therebetween.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of facing arms 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 and the opposite sides in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set so that the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b in the horizontal direction. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the second arm portion 15962j can be arranged inside the side wall portion 981b for positioning.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the third arm portion 15962h is formed with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back surface base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

In the projecting portion 15962h1, the projecting distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the back surface base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

Therefore, since the upstream end portions of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing and side surface of the game ball passing through the step on the bottom surface side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Will be. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the fifteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 mounted on the base plate, and the standing tip surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed so as to be in contact with the tip end portion of the second throwing portion 16942c of the 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface 981c1 in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the lateral view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the erection base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up and bouncing on the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is sent to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flowing down) of the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second ball throwing portion 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing unit 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall portion 16981b are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side. The timing of passing through the step can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly by that amount. be able to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to regulate the displacement of the distribution unit 980 to the upper side in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to regulate that the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is displaced upward in the direction of gravity from the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the protrusions 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the ends of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in side view. However, in the 16th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 16th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment is formed so that the tip surface 17981b3 of the erection tip thereof is inclined downward from the proximal end side to the distal end side. .. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed so as to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed so that the tip surface 17942c3 of the projecting tip surface is ascended and inclined along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (Sixth embodiment), the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Next, the displacement member 18966 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 according to the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 135 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

It should be noted that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a rear base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the 17th embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and extends from the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the gravity direction and the non-transmission portion 18966a6 from the lower end portion in the gravity direction. It is provided with a transmission unit 18966a7 that is bent and extended to the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, it is possible to regulate the flow of the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, the transmission member 18958 in the 17th embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip portion 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the 1st embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896 g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is made inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. The opening of the mouth 140 can be arranged.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. In the sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extension direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b is changed with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without being displaced. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are opened, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is arranged below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion. Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, the second prize is won between the blade portion 18966g and the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c due to the operation of displacing downward in the direction of gravity. It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of blade members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of blade members 945 are closed. Since it is provided with a blade portion of 18966 g that rubs against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is illegally inserted into the passage where the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140. You can cut the force.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the 17th embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slide-displaced and the blade portion 18966g crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced and rolled together with the blade portion 18966g. When 18966g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c The thread can be cut between the edges of the thread. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 is provided with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of feather members 945, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) to the solenoid 961 in a direction in which the tip portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 are forcibly released by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, the cheating of the player can be suppressed.

Next, the winning opening unit 19930 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 162. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

First, the winning opening unit 19930 arranged on the base plate 19060 of the game board 13 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13 according to the eighteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 19930 (for example, center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 19060 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, the base plate 19060 has a through hole 19060a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 19060 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 138) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 19060a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 19940, which will be described later, in the front view.

The base plate 19060 is provided with a front unit 19940, which will be described later, from the front (front) side, and a distribution unit 19980 and aisle unit 19990, which will be described later, from the rear (rear) side. The passage unit 19990 is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 19930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. 139 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 139 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 19930. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 19930. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 19930.

As shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the winning opening unit 19930 includes the front unit 19940, the distribution unit 19980 arranged on the back side of the front unit 19940 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)), and the front unit. It is formed mainly including a passage unit 19990 which is a back side of 19940 and is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 19980.

The front unit 19940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 19060a (see FIG. 138) of the base plate 19060. Therefore, by disposing the front unit 19940 on the base plate 19060, the opening of the through hole 19060a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 passes through the through hole 19060a from a space other than the passage path (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140) of the game ball formed in the front unit 19940. Can be suppressed.

The distribution unit 19980 is provided with an opening U8 that is connected to the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940, which will be described later, and the rear side of the game board 13 from the opening U8 via the first winning opening 64 (in front of the paper in FIG. 139 (b)). The game ball thrown to the side) can be received inside (see FIG. 138). A detailed description of the distribution unit 19980 will be described later.

The passage unit 19990 can internally receive a game ball thrown from the opening U9, which will be described later, to the back side of the game board 13 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) through the second winning opening 140 (FIG. 138). reference). A detailed description of the passage unit 19990 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 19940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. 143 (a) is a front view of the front unit 19940, FIG. 143 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 143 (c) is the CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front unit 19940. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective rear view of the front unit 19940. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 19940.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the front unit 19940 is arranged on the back base 19941 fastened to the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138) and the back base 19941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is mainly provided with a front base 19943 to be formed and two (pair) wing members 945 rotatably arranged between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 facing each other.

The back base 19941 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular outer shape in front view and a predetermined plate thickness. Further, the back base 19941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and in a state where the front unit 19940 is arranged on the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), the through hole of the base plate 19060 is passed through the back base 19941. The inside of 19060a (see FIG. 138) can be visually recognized.

The back base 19941 has a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and penetrating the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, which will be described later, and the first winning opening 64 thereof. An intermediate port 19941h formed through the lower part of the mouth 64 (lower side in FIG. 143 (b)) at a position connected to the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980 described later, and below the intermediate port 19941h, connected to the opening U9 described later. It mainly includes a second winning opening 140 formed through the position.

Further, the back surface base 19941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1 of the through hole 941a, a positioning projection 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back surface of the back surface base 19941 is formed.

Further, in the back base 19941, a plurality of fastening holes 19941i and fastening holes 19941j are formed on the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990 side (see FIG. 142) around the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. The fastening hole 19941i is a hole for screwing a screw through which the sorting unit 19980, which will be described later, is inserted, whereby the front unit 19940 and the sorting unit 19980 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 19941j is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 19990, which will be described later, is inserted, whereby the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed.

The first winning opening 64 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is open in the rear view. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front base 19943, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 via the first winning opening 64 (FIG. 138). reference).

The intermediate port 19941h is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view, and the size of the inner edge thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown through the opening U8 and the intermediate port 19941h, which will be described later, can be thrown to the front side (left side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138).

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape in a vertically long shape when viewed from the front, and its inner edge is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second winning opening 140 is arranged between the wing members 945 facing each other. As a result, the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 via the second winning opening 140 (see FIG. 138).

The second winning opening 140 has a first opening 19941e on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of each edge in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)), and a first axis described later. It is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the hole 19941d. Further, the first opening 19941e can be provided with the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 19941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The back base 19941 is formed with first shaft holes 19941d formed at two points in a circular shape on the outer side in the lateral direction (outer side in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)) in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

The front base 19943 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is substantially rectangular in the vertical direction. Further, the front base 19943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 19943 and the back base 19941.

The front base 19943 and the first receiving portion 19941 g projecting toward the back base 19941 side at positions corresponding to the first winning opening 64, the intermediate opening 19941h and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 19941 described above. It is formed mainly including an intermediate receiving portion 19943e and a second receiving portion 19943c.

The first receiving portion 19941 g is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the first winning opening 64 of the back base 19941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, the first receiving portion 19941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the first receiving portion is a game ball that flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the first receiving portion 19941 g (first winning opening 64) to the front side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13. It can flow inside 19941 g (see FIG. 138).

Further, the first receiving portion 19941g is formed with a protruding portion 19941g1 that is inclined downward and projected toward the back base 19941 side on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the front surface of the upper surface of the protruding portion 19941g1. The connecting portion with the base 19943 side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) is formed to be curved. The game ball that flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g with a velocity component on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the projecting portion 19941 g1 come into contact with each other, so that the game ball is on the back side (FIG. 143 (c)). ) It has a velocity component to the right side). As a result, the game ball is thrown through the first winning opening 64 into the opening U8 arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 161).

The opening surrounded by the front base 19943 and the ends of the pair of first receiving portions 19941 g on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is the entry port for inserting the game ball into the winning opening unit 19930.

The intermediate receiving portion 19943e is formed of a plate-like body protruding on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first receiving portion 19941g, and the lower surface 19943e1 of the intermediate receiving portion 19943e is the first. It is formed so as to be curved toward the receiving portion 19941 g side (upper side of FIG. 143 (b)). As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate port 19941h can be thrown to one side in the direction of gravity via the passage TR3.

The second receiving portion 19943c is formed in a substantially U-shape in rear view, and in a state where the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 are fastened (combined), the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the second receiving portion 19943c Is arranged inside the second winning opening 140 of the back base 19941 (on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) than the lower edge of the second winning opening 140). Further, a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the outer side of the pair of vertical walls 19943c1 in the opposite direction (outside in the left-right direction in FIG. Further, the distance between the outer surfaces of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface base 19941 side (right side in FIG. 143 (c)).

The distance from the edge of the second winning opening 140 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the back base 19941 to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the front base 19943 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball flowing down between the pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1, and the game ball is rolled on the upper surface 19943c2 to the back side of the back base 19941 (FIG. The ball can be thrown to 143 (c) on the right side).

Further, the front base 19943 is a ring that is annularly projected on the outside of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 in the opposite direction (outside in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)) at a position facing the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941. It is provided with a protrusion 943b. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941, and the other end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the second shaft hole 943b1 of the annular projection 943b of the front base 19943. .. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 facing each other.

Next, the distribution unit 19980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

First, the configuration of the distribution unit 19980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150.

FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 147 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 19980. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective front view of the sorting unit 19980, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective rear view of the sorting unit 19980. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 19980.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the distribution unit 19980 has a distribution member 19983, a first side surface base 19981, and a first side surface base 19981 described later in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. 1 A second side surface base 19985 arranged on the side opposite to the cover member 19987, and a distribution member 19983 rotatably arranged between the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985. The first cover member 1998 arranged on the side opposite to the second side surface base 1998 of the first side surface base 19981, and the second cover arranged on the side opposite to the first side surface base 19981 of the second side surface base 19985. The member 19988, the detection device SE5, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) magnetic bodies 988b are mainly provided.

The arrangement member on which the distribution member 19983 is arranged includes the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 (first member) itself, but the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base Not limited to 19985 (first member), directly or indirectly connected to the second member on which the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 (first member) are arranged, and the second member. A third member is also included. For example, as the second member, the winning opening unit 19930 is exemplified, and as the third member, the winning opening unit 19930 is directly or indirectly connected to the gaming board 13 in addition to the gaming board 13 in which the winning opening unit 19930 is arranged. Various members (for example, outer frame 11, inner frame 12, glass unit 16, etc.) are exemplified.

The distribution member 19983 includes an intermediate plate 19983b formed between the pair of acting portions 19983a and the pair of acting portions 19983a, a through hole 983c, an abutting portion 19983d, a wall portion 19983e, a magnetic body 988c, and the like. Is mainly formed.

In the distribution member 19983 of the present embodiment, the pair of acting portions 19983a and the intermediate plate 19983b are arranged at substantially right angles, pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and pass in the left-right direction (FIG. 147 (a). ) It is formed in a shape symmetric with respect to the plane of symmetry extending in the left-right direction).

Here, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 (a) is a side view of the first side surface base 19981 in the direction of arrow CLIa of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 (b) is a side view of the first side surface base 19981 in the direction of arrow CLIb of FIG. 149. FIG. 151 (c) is a side view of the second side surface base 19985 in the arrow CLIc direction view of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 (d) is a side view of the second side surface base 19985 in the arrow CLId direction view of FIG. 149. It is a figure.

The first side surface base 19981 is a game with a top plate 19981a formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a top view, and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) from the top plate 19981a. The lower surface plate 19981b, which is arranged so as to face each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere and is formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b (left side in FIG. 151 (a)). The front plate 19981c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, which is connected to the end portion of the above plate, and the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b on the opposite side to the player (right side in FIG. 151 (a)). The back plate 19981d formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the rear view, which is connected to the end portion of the distribution member 19983, and the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981a at substantially the center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 A central plate 19981e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular side view arranged by connecting the face plate 19981b, and a bulge arranged on the player side (left side of FIG. 151 (a)) of the front plate 19981c. It is formed mainly including a portion 19982.

The player side means the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the side opposite to the player means the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The same applies to the following.

The upper surface plate 19981a is formed by including circular fastening holes 19981f and 19981g on the upper surface side (upper side in FIG. 151 (a)) and a protruding portion 19981h formed so as to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19981a toward the upper surface side. Will be done. The fastening hole 19981f is a hole for screwing a screw through which a second side surface base 19985, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 19981g is a hole for screwing a screw through which the first cover member 19987, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the first side surface base 19981 and the first cover member 19987 can be fastened and fixed.

The protrusion 19981h is formed at substantially the center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d so as to be inclined toward the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). , A recess 19981h1 for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 is formed. A notch for arranging a wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE5 so as to be passable is formed on the upper surface of the protruding portion 19981h.

The lower surface plate 19981b is formed to include a recess 19981i that is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side of the lower surface plate 19981b. The recess 19981i is formed at substantially the center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d so as to be inclined toward the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , A part of the detection device SE5 is formed in a shape that can be arranged. Further, an opening U1 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (left side of FIG. 151 (b)) on the first cover member 19987 side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (b)) with respect to the central plate 19981e described later. The opening U1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and is formed at a position connected to the passage TR7 of the passage unit 19990, which will be described later.

The front plate 19981c is formed on the first cover member 19987 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (b)) with respect to the central plate 19981e.

The central plate 19981e is formed by connecting the rear end portion to the front surface of the back plate 19981d, and a part of the detection device SE5 is arranged from the protruding portion 19981h of the upper surface plate 19981a to the recess 19981i of the lower surface plate 19981b. A recess 19981j for this purpose is formed. Further, an opening U2 is formed on the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) with respect to the recess 19981j. The opening U2 is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, between the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b, the central plate 19981e and the back plate 19981d are connected and the overhanging portion 19981e1 projecting to the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) front side of the paper surface). Is formed. The overhanging portion 19981e1 is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape toward the top view, the center plate 19981e and the back plate 19981d (see FIG. 153).

The bulging portion 19982 is connected to a side plate 19982a formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in the side view and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the side plate 19982a, and is a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in the top view. The lower surface plate 19982b formed from, the game ball guide wall 19982c connected to the back plate 19981d side of the side plate 19982a (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and the second side surface base 19985 side from the side surface of the side plate 19982a (FIG. A front view of the projecting portion 19982d projecting toward 151 (a) the front side of the paper surface) and the first cover member 19987 side (FIG. 151 (b) the front side of the paper surface) protruding from the side surface of the side plate 19982a. It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19982e and an accommodating portion 986b formed from a vertically long substantially rectangular plate-like body.

The side plate 19982a has a fastening hole 19981f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and another side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a fastening hole 19981g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a first cover. It is mainly provided with a recess 19982f formed by being recessed toward the member 1998 side.

The recess 19982f is a portion for disposing the wall portion 19983e of the distribution member 19983 inside the recess 19982f, and projects in an annular shape toward the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) front side of the paper surface). A bearing portion 982c is provided.

The lower surface plate 19982b includes a front side contact portion 19982b1 and a back side contact portion 19982b2 for restricting the rotation of the distribution member 19983. The front side contact portion 19982b1 is formed so as to be inclined toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the back plate 19981d (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and the back side contact portion 19982b2 is formed on the back plate 19981d. It is formed so as to tilt toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

The game ball guide wall 19982c has a first curved wall 19982c1 arranged on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a first curved wall 19982c1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first curved wall 19982c1. The first curved wall 19982c1 is formed from the second curved wall 19982c2 which is arranged in connection with the player, and the first curved wall 19982c1 is formed so as to be curved toward the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 151 (a)). The curved wall 19982c2 is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

The lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

The overhanging portion 19982e is formed to include a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)). The guide wall 19982e1 is formed in an annular shape, and the inner edge shape thereof is formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941i of the back base 19941 described above (see FIG. 143 (b)).

The second side surface base 19985 is a game of a top plate 19985a formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a top view, and a game from the top plate 19985a to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The lower surface plate 19985b formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body viewed from the upper surface, which is arranged facing each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b (left side of FIG. 151 (d)). ), The front plate 19985c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b opposite to the player (left side in FIG. 151 (c)). ), And the back plate 19985d formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the rear view, and the end of the first side surface base 19981 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (c)). The side plate 19985e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular side view and the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b are arranged on the player side (right side of FIG. 151 (c)) of the front plate 19985c. It is mainly provided with a bulging portion 19986 to be provided.

The upper surface plate 19985a has a circular through hole 19985f and a fastening hole 19985g on the upper surface side (upper side in FIG. 151 (a)) and a protruding portion 19985h formed so as to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19985a toward the upper surface side. Formed in preparation. As described above, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19985f is inserted into the first side surface base 19981. Further, the fastening hole 19985g is a hole for screwing a screw through which the second cover member 19988, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the second side surface base 19985 and the second cover member 19988 can be fastened and fixed.

The protrusion 19985h is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 19981h of the first side surface base 19981, and is inclined toward the back plate 19985d side (left side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). It is formed. Further, the protruding portion 19985h is provided with a recess 19985h1 for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 described later.

The lower surface plate 19985b is formed to include a recess 19985i that is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side of the lower surface plate 19985b.

The recess 19985i is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 19981i of the first side surface base 19981, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Will be done. Further, the recess 19985i is formed in a shape in which a part of the detection device SE5 described later can be arranged. Further, an opening U3 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (d)). The opening U3 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and is formed at a position connected to the passage TR8 of the passage unit 19990, which will be described later.

The front plate 19985c is formed with a circular fastening hole 19985g on the front side (left side in FIG. 151 (d)).

The side plate 19985e is formed with a recess 19985k for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 at a position corresponding to the recess 19981j formed in the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981.

Further, an opening U4 is formed on the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) of the recess 19985k, and an opening U5 is formed on the back plate 19985d side (left side in FIG. 151 (c)) of the recess 19985k. The opening U4 and the opening U5 are each formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The bulging portion 19986 is a side plate 19986a formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and a front surface protruding from the side surface of the side plate 19986a toward the second cover member 19988 side (right side in FIG. 147 (a)). It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19986e formed from a vertically long substantially rectangular plate-like body.

The side plate 19986a has a through hole 19985f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and another side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and a fastening hole 19985g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is mainly provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape toward the base 19981 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (c)).

The overhanging portion 19986e is formed to include a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

It will be described back from FIG. 147 to FIG. 150. The first cover member 19987 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and has circular through holes 19987a around both ends in the longitudinal direction and the first side surface base 19981 side (1st side surface base 19981 side ( It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 1998b having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is arranged in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19981c of the first side surface base 19981 toward the right side of FIG. 147 (a). As described above, the first side surface base 19981 and the first cover member 19987 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19987a is inserted into the first side surface base 19981.

The overhanging portion 19987b on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 147 (b)) of the first side surface base 19981 is curved in an arc shape toward the side opposite to the first side surface base 19981 (left side of FIG. 147 (a)). It is formed.

The second cover member 19988 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and has circular through holes 19988a around both ends in the longitudinal direction and a second side surface base 19985 side ( It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19988b having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is arranged in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19985c of the second side surface base 19985 toward the left side of FIG. 147 (a). As described above, the second side surface base 19985 and the second cover member 19988 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19988a is inserted into the second side surface base 19985.

The overhanging portion 19988b on the back plate 19985d side (right side of FIG. 147 (b)) of the second side surface base 19985 is curved in an arc shape toward the side opposite to the second side surface base 19985 (right side of FIG. 147 (a)). It is formed.

Next, the configuration inside the distribution unit 19980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153.

152 (a) and 152 (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 19980 on the CLIIa-CLIIa line of FIG. 147 (a), and FIG. 153 is the sorting unit on the CLIII-CLIII line of FIG. 152 (a). It is sectional drawing of 19980. In FIG. 152 (a), the lower surface of the acting portion 19983a of the distribution member 19983 and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981, which will be described later, come into contact with each other. The state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the position (hereinafter referred to as "first position") is shown, and in FIG. 152 (b), the lower surface of the acting portion 19983a of the distribution member 19983 and the first side surface base 19981 described later. The state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the position where the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 19982 abuts (hereinafter referred to as "second position") is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a state where the distribution unit 19980 is assembled, the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b of the first side surface base 19981, the side plate 19982a of the bulging portion 19982, and the swelling of the second side surface base 19985. An opening U6 is formed from the side plate 19986a of the protruding portion 19986, and the side of the side plate 19982a, the lower surface plate 19982b, the protruding portion 19982d, and the bulging portion 19986 of the second side surface base 19982 of the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981. An opening U7 is formed from the face plate 19986a, and on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the opening U7 in the gravity direction, the side plate 19982a, the protrusion 19982d, the game ball guide wall 19982c and the first side plate 19982 of the bulging portion 19981 of the first side surface base 19981. 2 The opening U8 is formed from the side plate 19986a of the bulging portion 19986 of the side surface base 19985. As described above, the opening U7 is arranged at a position connected to the intermediate port 19941h of the back base 19941, and the opening U8 is arranged at a position connected with the first winning opening 64 of the back base 19941.

Further, on the back plate 19981d side of the first side surface base 19981 (right side in FIG. 152 (a)) of the opening U6, the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 19981b, the central plate 19981e, and the second side surface base 19985 of the first side surface base 19981. Passage TR4 surrounded by side plate 19985e, upper surface plate 19981a of first side surface base 19981, lower surface plate 19981b, central plate 19981e and passage T5 surrounded by first cover member 19987, upper surface plate 19985a of second side surface base 19985, lower surface plate. A passage T6 surrounded by the 19985b, the side plate 19985e, and the second cover member 19988 is formed, respectively. The passage TR4, the passage TR5, and the passage TR6 are formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Further, in the passage TR4, the passage TR5 and the passage TR6, the back plate 19981d side (opposite side to the player) of the first side surface base 19981 is inclined downward to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the player side. It is formed by extending from (the left side of FIG. 152 (a)) to the side opposite to the player.

Further, it is formed in the concave portion 19981h1 formed in the protruding portion 19981h of the first side surface base 19981, the concave portion 19981i formed in the lower surface plate 19981b, the concave portion 19981j formed in the central plate 19981e, and the protruding portion 19985h of the second side surface base 19985. The detection device SE5 is arranged in a region surrounded by the recesses 19985h1, the recesses 19985i formed in the lower surface plate 19985b, and the recesses 19985k formed in the side plates 19985e, with the detection holes SE1a arranged in the passage TR4. As described above, the arrangement region of the detection device SE5 is formed so that the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 152 (a)) is inclined downward to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The axis of the detection hole SE1a of the device SE5 is inclined so that the player side (left side in FIG. 152 (a)) rises to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the extension direction of the passage TR4 and the detection device SE5 are detected. The holes SE1a are arranged in the same direction as the axial direction.

The distribution member 19983 is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 152 (a)).

Further, in the distribution member 19983, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j with the shaft member 988a inserted into the through hole 983c, and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. As a result, the side plate 19982a (first side surface base 19981) of the bulging portion 19982 and the side plate 19986a (second side surface base 19985) of the bulging portion 19986 are rotatably supported by the shaft. Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can distribute the thrown game ball in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 152 (a)).

As described above, the wall portion 19983e of the distribution member 19983 is arranged inside the recess 19982f of the side plate 19982a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from coming into contact with the side surface of the wall portion 19983e, and it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being hindered.

In the accommodating portion 986b, the magnetic body 988b repels the magnetic body 988c of the distribution member 19983, and the magnetic body 988c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the recess 19982f with respect to the bearing portion 982c. It is placed on the movement trajectory.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the distance from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c. The distance dimension L44 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension L45 from the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U6, and the game ball is rotated by the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U7.

Further, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (first side surface base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 152 (a)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U6 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. The force to do works. Therefore, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the first position acts on the distribution member 19983. As a result, even when an external force that rotates toward the second position is applied to the distribution member 19983, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 19983 from rotating toward the second position.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the distance dimension L46 from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is a game. It is formed smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the distance dimension L47 from the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U7, and the game ball is rotated by the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U6.

Further, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (first side surface base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 152 (b)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U7 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. The force to do works. Therefore, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the second position acts on the distribution member 19983. As a result, even when an external force that rotates the distribution member 19983 toward the first position is applied, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 19983 from rotating toward the first position.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 19990 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 1990, FIG. 154 (b) is a top view of the passage unit 1990, and FIG. 154 (c) is a side view of the passage unit 1990, FIG. 154. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the passage unit 19990 in the CLIVd-CLIVd line of FIG. 154 (a). FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective front view of the passage unit 1990, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 19990, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, the passage unit 19990 is a solenoid holding member arranged on the side opposite to the player of the first passage member 19991 and the player of the first passage member 19991 (right side in FIG. 154 (d)). 1999, a second passage member 19993 arranged on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the solenoid holding member 19992, a solenoid 610 arranged inside the solenoid holding member 19992, and a ring portion of the solenoid 610. The transmission member 1996 connected to the 961c, the displacement member 19966 connected to the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965 described later, and the detection device SE6 are mainly provided. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 described above.

The first passage member 19991 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is connected to both ends of a bottom plate 19991a formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the top view and a substantially rectangular bottom plate 19991a in the longitudinal direction to form a substantially rectangular side view. A pair of side plates 19991b formed from a plate-like body and a spine formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view by connecting the bottom plate 19991a to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 154 (d)). The face plate 19991c, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d arranged on the other side of the bottom plate 19991a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) by a certain distance, and the back plate 19991c connected to the side opposite to the player on the side surface. It is mainly provided with a pair of guide plates 19991e formed from a substantially rectangular plate-like body.

A first fastening portion 19991b1 and a second fastening portion 19991b4 are formed on the outer surfaces of the pair of side plates 19991b. Further, on the back surface of the pair of side plates 19991b, protruding portions 19991b7 are formed so as to project to the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)).

The first fastening portion 19991b1 is formed to include a first guide wall 19991b2 and a circular first through hole 19991b3. The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 19991b2 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the back base 19941 described above. As described above, the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the first through hole 19991b3 is inserted into the fastening hole 19941j.

The second fastening portion 19991b4 is formed to include a second guide wall 19991b5 and a circular second through hole 19991b6. The inner edge shape of the second guide wall 19991b5 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992 described later. The second through hole 19991b6 is a hole for inserting a screw to be screwed into the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992 described later. As a result, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

The detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is recessed from the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) toward the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)). A unit 19991d1 is provided. A detection device SE6, which will be described later, is arranged in the recessed portion 19991d1.

The player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 154 (a)) of the detection device accommodating unit 19991d is formed with an opening so that the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be inserted. Further, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed so as to be inclined toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) toward the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)), and the upper surface 19991d2. A game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed so as to project from the edge portion in a substantially U shape in which the player side is open from the top view. The size of the inner edge of the game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, openings formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game ball are formed on the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d on the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) of the back plate 19991c. To. As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 can be sent to the pair of guide plates 19991e described later.

The pair of guide plates 19991e are formed so that the distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the opening formed on the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is placed on one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). The game ball can be discharged from the passage unit 19990 (winning opening unit 19300) by flowing down to the lower side).

The solenoid holding member 19992 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a housing portion 19992a having a substantially rectangular top view and a regulating portion 19992b formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view on the player side of the housing portion 19992a. , A pair of side plates 19992c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a lateral view are mainly provided.

The accommodating portion 19992a is a portion for arranging the solenoid 610 described later inside the accommodating portion 19992a, and the accommodating portion 19992a and the solenoid 610 are fastened and fixed by screws. Further, the player side (left side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the accommodating portion 19992a is formed with an opening, whereby the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be arranged on the player side of the accommodating portion 19992a.

The regulation unit 19992b is a portion for restricting the displacement of the transmission member 19965, which will be described later, and when the regulation unit 19992b and the transmission member 19965 come into contact with each other, the transmission member 19965 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. 154 (d)). Displacement to the right side) is regulated.

The side plate 19992c has a fastening hole 19992c1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), a fastening portion 19992c2 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and a notch on the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (c)). It is formed with a portion 19992c5.

The fastening hole 19992c1 is a hole for screwing the screw into which the first passage member 19991 is inserted, as described above. As a result, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

The fastening portion 19992c2 is formed to include a guide wall 19992c3 and a circular through hole 19992c4. The inner edge shape of the guide wall 19992c3 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993, which will be described later. The through hole 19992c4 is a hole through which a screw screwed into the second passage member 19993, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

The second passage member 19993 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The second passage member 19993 is formed by providing passages TR7 and TR8 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and providing fastening holes 19993a on the player side (lower side of FIG. 154 (b)) of the passages TR7 and TR8.

The passage TR7 and the passage TR8 are formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Further, the passage TR7 and the passage TR8 extend in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 154 (d)) and are formed at positions connected to the openings U1 and U3 formed in the distribution unit 19980 described above.

The fastening hole 19993a is a hole for screwing a screw through which the above-mentioned solenoid holding member 19992 is inserted. As a result, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

The transmission member 19965 has a substantially rectangular plate shape in the back view formed between a pair of first engaging portions 19965a formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in the lateral view and a pair of first engaging portions 19965a. It is mainly provided with a second engaging portion 19965b formed from the body and a pair of connecting portions 19965c connecting the pair of first engaging portions 19965a and the second engaging portion 1996b.

The distance between the inner facing surfaces of the pair of first engaging portions 19965a is formed to be larger than the distance between the outer sides of the pair of main body portions 19966g of the displacement member 19966 described later. Further, the pair of first engaging portions 19965a is provided with a substantially rectangular through hole 19965a1 in a horizontally long side view on the player side (lower side in FIG. 154 (b)). The inside of the through hole 19965a1 is formed so that the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 described later can be arranged, and the through hole 19965a1 is cut out on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) on the player side. The notch 19965a2 is formed.

The second engaging portion 19965b is a portion for connecting the transmission member 19965 and the solenoid 610, and has a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 from the end face on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). A second recessed portion larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b is recessed on the solenoid 610 side (right side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the first recessed portion 19965b1 to be recessed and the first recessed portion 19965b1. It is provided with a part 19965b2.

The first recessed portion 19965b1 is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is opened in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 19965b1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 19965b1.

The second recessed portion 19965b2 suppresses the interference between the shaft portion 961b and the second engaging portion 19965b when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 as described above. It is a notch and is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is open in the rear view, and the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) is opened.

The connecting portion 19965c is a portion that connects the first engaging portion 19965a and the second engaging portion 19965b, whereby the displacement of the second engaging portion 19965b can be transmitted to the first engaging portion 19965a. ..

The displacement member 19966 is a protruding portion formed by projecting a pair of main body portions 19966 g formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view and a pair of main body portions 19966 g toward the player side (lower side in FIG. 154 (b)). It is mainly provided with a 19966a, a rotating shaft 19966d, a transmission portion 19966e, and a connecting portion 19966f connecting a pair of main body portions 19966g.

The distance between the pair of main body portions 19966g and the inner facing surfaces of the protruding portions 19966a is formed to be larger than the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 154 (b)) of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d of the first passage member 19991 described above. Will be done.

The protrusion 19966a is formed with a recessed portion 19966a1 recessed on the solenoid 610 side (upper side of FIG. 154 (b)), and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is disposed on the recessed portion 19966a1 (FIG. 159 (b)). See) Formed as possible.

The rotating shaft 19966d is formed in an annular shape that projects outward from the side surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g in the opposite direction. The base portion 19966d1 is formed on the rotating shaft 19966d at the connecting portion with the main body portion 19966g with a size larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 19966d.

The transmission unit 19966e is a portion for transmitting the displacement of the transmission member 19965 to the displacement member 19966, and is a pair of main body portions 19966g on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis 19966d in a substantially rectangular shape in a lateral view. It is molded so as to project outward from the side surface in the opposite direction.

The connecting portion 19966f is a portion for connecting the pair of main body portions 19966g, and the side surface portion 19966f1 formed on the lower surface of the pair of main body portions 19966g from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body and the pair of side surface portions 19966f1. A lower surface portion 19966f2 formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above is provided, which is connected to an end portion on one side in the direction of gravity.

By connecting the pair of main body portions 19966g by the connecting portion 19966f, it is possible to prevent one main body portion 19966g from being displaced relative to the other main body portion 19966g.

In the situation of assembling the passage unit 1990, as described above, the inner edge shape of the second guide wall 19991b5 of the first passage member 19991 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992, and the solenoid is formed. Since the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19992c3 of the holding member 19992 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993, the positioning of the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 and the positioning of the solenoid holding member 19992 are performed. , The solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be easily positioned. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the passage unit 19990 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state of the passage unit 19990, the detection device SE6 is arranged inside the recessed portion 19991d1 of the first passage member 19991, and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6 is the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d. It is arranged at a position connected to the opening formed in. As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 of the first passage member 19991 can insert the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6.

Further, a passage TR9 surrounded by a back plate 19991c of the first passage member 19991, a pair of guide plates 19991e, and a regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 is formed. The passage TR9 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball.

As described above, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed so as to project outward from the side surface of the main body portion 19966g in the opposite direction, and the through hole 19965a1 formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Since it is arranged inside the passage TR9, the game ball thrown into the passage TR9 can flow down in the passage TR9.

Further, the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 of the transmission member 19965, and is a coil spring disposed between the solenoid 610 and the second engaging portion 19965b of the transmission member 19965. Due to the urging force (not shown), the transmission member 19965 is given an urging force that displaces to the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)). Here, the displacement of the transmission member 19965 to the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)) is restricted by the contact between the second engaging portion 19965b of the transmission member 19965 and the regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992. ..

Further, the rotating shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 is rotatably arranged in a region surrounded by the side plate 19991b and the protruding portion 19991b7 of the first passage member 19991 and the notch portion 19992c5 of the side plate 19992c of the solenoid holding member 19992. At the same time, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is arranged in the through hole 19965a1 of the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965.

Further, the solenoid holding member 19992 is arranged on the side opposite to the player (on the right side in FIG. 154 (d)) with respect to the first passage member 19991. Therefore, the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player with respect to the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991.

When electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 610a of the solenoid 610, the transmission member 19965 connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. It is displaced to the right side of 154 (d)), and as described above, the displacement of the transmission member 19965 is regulated by the contact between the regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 and the transmission member 199965. When the transmission member 19965 is displaced to the side opposite to the player, the inner surface of the through hole 19965a1 of the transmission member 19965 comes into contact with the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966, and a rotational force is applied to the displacement member 19966.

It will be described back from FIG. 139 to FIG. 142. In the situation of assembling the winning opening unit 19930, as described above, the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19982e1 of the distribution unit 19980 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941i of the front unit 19940, and the aisle unit 19990 first. 1 Since the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19991b2 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the front unit 19940, the front unit 19940 and the distribution unit 19980 are positioned, and the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990. Positioning with and can be easily performed. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the winning opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

In the state where the winning opening unit 19930 is assembled, the lower plate 19982b of the bulging portion 19982 formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, and the detection device accommodating portion formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. An opening U9 is formed from the upper surface 19991d2 of 19991d and the protruding portion 19966a formed on the displacement member 19966, and as described above, the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other. , The intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980 are arranged at a position where they are connected to each other, and the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 19940 and the opening U9 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other.

Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c of the front unit 19940 is formed on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. Will be done.

Further, it is surrounded by the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 1990, and the pair of game ball guide portions 19991d3. The passage TR10 is formed. The passage TR10 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and as described above, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d faces the side opposite to the player (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)). As it is formed, it is inclined to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, so that the passage TR10 can be moved from the player side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 139 (b)) to the side opposite to the player (FIG. 139 (b)). ) It is formed by extending to the front side of the paper. As a result, the game ball sent to the passage TR10 is flowed down to the side opposite to the player.

As described above, since the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) from the passage TR10 (detection device accommodating portion 19991d), the pair of first transmission members 19965. The passage TR10 formed inside the facing surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g of the engaging portion 19965a and the displacement member 19966 can be shortened.

Further, the openings U1 and U3 of the distribution unit 19980 and the passages TR7 and TR8 of the passage unit 19990 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other. As a result, a part of the passage TR5 (a part of the side opposite to the player (a part of the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) and gravity arranged on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) with the opening U1 in between) and gravity. The passage TR7 arranged on one side in the direction (lower side in the direction of gravity) forms the passage TR11 extending in the direction of gravity. Further, a part of the passage TR6 (a part on the side opposite to the player) arranged on the other side in the gravity direction across the opening U3 and the passage TR8 arranged on one side in the gravity direction extend in the gravity direction. The passage TR12 to be provided is formed. Therefore, the passage TR11 is formed on the first cover member 19987 side (right side of FIG. 139 (b)) of the distribution unit 19980 from the passage TR4, and the passage TR12 is formed on the second cover member 19988 side of the distribution unit 19980 from the passage TR4 (FIG. 139 (b) right side). It is formed on the left side of 139 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown into the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940 is thrown into the inside of the sorting unit 19980 by passing through the opening U8 of the sorting unit 19980. Further, inside the distribution unit 19980, the game ball thrown to the player side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (a)) due to the rotation of the distribution member 19983 passes through the opening U7, so that the front unit 19940 The ball is thrown to the intermediate port 19941h. Further, the game ball thrown into the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 19940 is thrown into the passage unit 19990 by passing through the opening U9.

Further, the game ball thrown into the openings U1 and U3 of the distribution unit 19980 is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 and the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

Here, the rotation operation of the wing member 945 due to the rotation operation of the displacement member 19966 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLVIII-CLVIII line of FIG. 139 (a), FIG. 158 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the wing member 945. Indicates the open state of. FIG. 159 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 159 (b) is a winning opening in the closed state of the wing member 945. It is a side view of the unit 19300. FIG. 160 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the open state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 160 (b) is a partial enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the open state of the wing member 945. It is a side view of the unit 19300. In addition, in FIG. 159 (a) and FIG. 160 (a), the front base 19943 of the front unit 19940 is omitted, and in FIGS. 159 (b) and 160 (b), the wing member 945, the solenoid 610, the transmission member 19965 and Only the displacement member 19966 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, when the winning opening unit 19300 is assembled, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 arranged on the front unit 19940 is a protrusion of the displacement member 19966 arranged on the passage unit 19990. It is arranged inside the recessed portion 19966a1 formed in the portion 19966a.

The closed state of the wing member 945 is a state in which the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is separated from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 connected to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the player side (left side in FIG. 159 (b)), and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Inside the through hole 19965a1, it is arranged on the side opposite to the player (on the right side in FIG. 159 (b)).

Next, the open state of the wing member 945 will be described. Electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 610a of the solenoid 610, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the main body 961a are in close proximity to each other. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 connected to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 160B), and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. It is arranged on the player side (left side in FIG. 160 (b)) inside the through hole 19965a1 formed in.

Here, the notch portion 19965a2 cut out on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is formed on the player side of the through hole 19965a1 formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. The transmission unit 19966e of the displacement member 19966 can rotate about the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as a rotation axis. As a result, the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is displaced in the axial direction of the shaft portion 961b, and the displacement member 19966 can rotate. That is, the displacement member 19966 can rotate due to the simple configuration of the solenoid 610 and the transmission member 19965, and the manufacturing cost of the winning opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 19966 rotates about the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as a rotation axis, the displacement (rotation) region of the displacement member 19966 in the passage unit 19990 can be reduced. As a result, the winning opening unit 19930 can be miniaturized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of the game ball thrown into the winning opening unit 19930 will be described.

FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position. FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line of FIG. 161 and FIG. 162 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line of FIG. 162 (a). Is.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is thrown to the distribution member 19983, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown to and from the acting portion 19983a on the side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)). As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 19983a with the contact portion 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 19983b with the contact portion 19983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When the position exceeds (a) vertical direction), the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the opening U7. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is tilted toward the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980 (left side in FIG. 161 (b)), and the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is said that. The rotation of the distribution member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the first side surface base. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction acting on the magnetic body 988c arranged on the distribution member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b arranged on the first side surface base 19981 is intermediate from the through hole 983c to the outer side in the radial direction. The plate 19983b is switched from a state in which it acts on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 161 (b)) to a state in which it acts on the opening U7 side.

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can be rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 161 (b)) of the distribution member 19983 and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the first side surface base are separated from each other. The state of contact can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is thrown to the distribution member 198993, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown to and from the acting portion 19983a on the side (right side in FIG. 161 (b)). As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 19983a with the contact portion 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 19983b with the contact portion 19983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When the position exceeds (a) vertical direction), the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the opening U6. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is tilted toward the opening U6 side of the distribution unit 19980 (right side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position. It is said that. The rotation of the distribution member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface base 19981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction acting on the magnetic body 988c arranged on the distribution member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b arranged on the first side surface base 19981 is intermediate from the through hole 983c to the outer side in the radial direction. The plate 19983b is switched from a state in which it acts on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) to a state in which it acts on the opening U6 side.

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can be rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution member 19983 and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface base 19981 Can be maintained in contact with each other. Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 19983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the opening U7 and the opening U6 one by one.

In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b and In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b is the same. Formed at an angle. Therefore, the first position and the second position of the distribution member 19983 are arranged at positions symmetrical in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 161 (a)) in the side view.

The game ball passing through the opening U7 passes through the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and is sent to the passage TR3. When the game ball thrown into the passage TR3 comes into contact with the intermediate receiving portion 19943e, the throwing direction of the game ball is changed from the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (b)) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , Flow down the passage TR3. The game ball flowing down the passage TR3 abuts on the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161). b) It is changed to (right side) and the ball is thrown to the second winning opening 140.

The game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 passes through the opening U9 formed from the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990, and is sent to the passage TR10. The game ball flowing down the passage TR10 on the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (b)) hits the game ball guide portion 19991d3 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 1990. By contacting, the throwing direction of the game ball is changed from the side opposite to the player to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and an opening formed on the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d, a detection hole of the detection device SE6. The ball is thrown into the opening formed on the lower surface of the SE1a and the detection device accommodating portion 19991d.

The game ball thrown into the opening formed on the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d passes through the passage TR9 and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930. Here, when the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, the number of balls of the game ball that has passed through the second winning opening 140 can be measured by the detection device SE6.

The passages TR3, TR7 and the passage TR9 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as a "fifth passage".

Here, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) and a large number of nails (not shown) or various members (roles) such as a windmill arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The game ball distributed by the contact of the distribution member 19983 or by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 has a velocity component in the axial direction (vertical direction with respect to the paper surface of FIG. 161 (b)) of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. It may flow down in preparation. If the flowing game ball does not have or has a slight velocity component in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983, the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 does not come into contact with the wing member 945. On the other hand, the velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is large, and the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 comes into contact with the wing member 945, is displaced to the outside of the passage of the passage TR3, and is second. Since it does not pass through the winning opening 140, the number of game balls is not measured by the detection device SE6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the flow of the game ball that has passed through the opening U6 will be described. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) and is distributed by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 is in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)). When the velocity component of the above is not provided or slightly provided, the flowing game ball does not come into contact with the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR4.

The velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is larger than the velocity component at which the game ball does not abut on the opening U2 or the opening end of the opening U4. When the game ball flows down with the velocity component, the game ball comes into contact with the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4. When the flowing game ball bounces back toward the passage TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4 due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the game ball flows down the passage TR4. On the other hand, due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the flowing game ball moves to the side opposite to the passage TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4, in other words, to the passage TR5 side or the passage TR6 side. When it bounces off, the flowing game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and is sent to the passage TR5 or the passage TR6.

When the game ball does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR4, the flowing game ball comes into contact with the overhanging portion 19981e1 formed on the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981, thereby causing the game ball to flow down. The throwing direction of the ball is changed from the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) to the side of the second cover member 19988 (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)), and the ball is thrown to the opening U5. The game ball that has passed through the opening U5 is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930. Here, the flowing game ball is a game ball that has passed through the opening U6 by inserting the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 arranged in the passage TR4, and does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U3. The number of game balls flowing down the passage TR4 can be measured by the detection device SE5.

The passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as a "fourth passage" below.

As shown in FIG. 161, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are abbreviated in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161 (a)). It is formed in the same position. In other words, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are formed at overlapping positions when viewed from above.

Therefore, the winning opening unit 19300 can be miniaturized in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161A), and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can recognize the detection device SE5 arranged in the distribution unit 19980. Further, in the detection device SE5, since the detection hole SE1a is arranged along the extending direction of the passage TR4, the player can visually recognize that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5, which is a hobby of the game. Can be enhanced. Further, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is inclined so as to the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Since it is arranged, the detection device SE5 arranged in the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the winning opening unit 19930 (see FIG. 138) is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the base plate 19060. The player can easily visually recognize that the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a.

Further, since the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is arranged in the passage TR4 forming the upstream side of the fourth passage, it can be brought close to the distribution member 19983. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball distributed to the distribution member 19983 passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The game ball that passes through the opening U2 and is thrown into the passage TR5 comes into contact with the curved portion formed in the overhanging portion 19987b of the first cover member 1998, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is on the first cover member 1998 side. (The upper side of FIG. 162 (a)) is changed to the side opposite to the player (right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and the passage TR5 flows down. The game ball flowing down the passage TR5 is thrown into the passage TR11 and comes into contact with the back plate 19981d of the first side surface base 19981, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from the side opposite to the player to the one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). It will be changed to (lower side). The game ball is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

The game ball that passes through the opening U4 and is thrown into the passage TR6 comes into contact with the curved portion formed in the overhanging portion 19988b of the second cover member 19988, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is on the second cover member 19988 side. (The lower side of FIG. 162 (a)) is changed to the side opposite to the player (the right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and the passage TR6 flows down. The game ball flowing down the passage TR6 is thrown into the passage TR12 and comes into contact with the back plate 19985d of the second side surface base 19985, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from the side opposite to the player to the one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). It will be changed to (lower side). The game ball is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

As described above, in the game ball flowing down the fourth passage, the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 on the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) from the detection device SE5 is thrown into the passage TR12. At the same time, the game ball flowing down the passage TR6 is sent to the passage TR12, which is a part of the fourth passage, and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930. In other words, the passage TR6 branched from the fourth passage upstream of the detection device SE5 joins the fourth passage on the downstream side of the detection device SE5. Therefore, the passage TR12 can serve as both a passage for throwing the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 and a passage for throwing the game ball flowing down the passage TR6.

As a result, in the distribution unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930) in which a plurality of flow passages are formed, the arrangement of the flow passages of the game balls can be suppressed, and the distribution unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930) can be miniaturized.

Further, as described above, since the passage TR12 is formed on the second cover member 19988 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) from the passage TR4, the passage TR10 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. 162 (a)). A space for arranging other members on one side (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the passage TR4 in the right side), and a space for arranging the solenoid 610 in the present embodiment can be secured, and the passage unit 19990 (winning prize). The mouth unit 19930) can be miniaturized.

Here, in the fourth passage and the fifth passage formed on both sides of the distribution direction (FIG. 162 (a) left-right direction) of the distribution member 19983, the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (FIG. 162 (FIG. 162). a) The passage in the vertical direction) is not formed, and therefore, the fourth passage and the fifth passage are formed at the same position with respect to the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. In the present embodiment, a part of the fifth passage is formed on one side of the fourth passage in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage are viewed from above. It is formed by overlapping. Further, as described above, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are from the player side (left side of FIG. 162 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. It is formed by extending to 162 (a) on the right side). Further, the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 formed on both sides of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 of the passage TR4 in the axial direction are formed so as to extend to the side opposite to the player side as in the passage TR4.

As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can throw the game ball into any of the passages TR4, passage TR5, and passage TR6. You can see the color of the game and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 (see FIG. 148) are formed from a vertically long and substantially rectangular plate-like body in the top view. Therefore, the passage TR5 formed in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) and communicated with the passage TR4 by the opening U2 and the other side (gravity) of the passage TR6 communicated with the passage TR4 by the opening U4. Information about the game, for example, "out port" can be displayed on the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 on the upper side in the direction).

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the distributed game balls pass is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passage is arranged along the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction of the base plate, and the space for arranging other members is correspondingly increased. There was a problem that it decreased.

On the other hand, in the distribution unit 19800 in the present embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), and as shown in FIG. The game balls distributed according to 19983 are thrown into the fifth passage formed on the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) or the fourth passage formed on the opposite side to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (a)). Will be done. As described above, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are from the player side (left side of FIG. 161 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161). a) Since it is formed so as to extend to the right side), it is distributed in the width direction of the base plate 19060 as compared with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 (see FIG. 112) formed in the distribution unit 980 described above. The unit 19980 can be miniaturized.

In particular, in the distribution unit 19800 of the present embodiment, since the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage are formed so as to overlap with each other in the upper view, the distribution unit 19980 in the width direction of the base plate 19060 can be further miniaturized.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the first winning opening 64 is opened. By passing through, the ball is thrown to the distribution unit 19980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 19980 has a velocity component to the side opposite to the player.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, a game in which a speed component is provided to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980 and flows down. The ball bounces off the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983, or flows down on the intermediate plate 19983b, so that the velocity component of the game ball changes from the opening U6 side to the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980 (left side of FIG. 161 (a)). ), And abuts on the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980. As a result, the distribution member 19983 rotates, and the game ball is sent to the fifth passage.

As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, it flows down with a velocity component to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980. The game ball comes into contact with the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side of the distribution unit 19980 while holding the velocity component on the side opposite to the player. As a result, the distribution member 19983 rotates, and the game ball is sent to the fourth passage.

Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position and the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL is formed at the same angle. The distribution member 19983 can throw the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 into the fourth passage faster than the ball thrown into the fifth passage. In other words, the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 can have different throwing times depending on the distribution direction. As a result, the player can be given a playability, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, conventionally, a game ball flowing down a passage formed larger than the outer shape of the game ball flows down the passage with a velocity component different from the axial direction of the detection hole of the detection device arranged in the passage. As a result, the game ball may collide with the side wall of the passage and the traveling direction of the game ball flowing down the passage may not be uniform (hereinafter referred to as "the game ball rampages"). When the detection hole of the detection device is inserted in a state where the game ball is violent, the detection device has a problem of erroneously recognizing that a plurality of game balls have inserted the detection hole (hereinafter referred to as "chattering").

On the other hand, in the distribution unit 19800 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162, an opening U2 and an opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4 on the distribution member 19983 side (left side in FIG. 162 (a)) of the detection device SE5. Will be done. When the game ball is thrown into the passage TR4 in a violent state, the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 in a state where the violence has converged by contacting the opening U2 or the opening end of the opening U4. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

Further, since a part of the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 can be inserted in a state where the rampage of the game ball has converged, and the occurrence of chattering is suppressed. it can. In other words, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4, the cross-sectional area of the passage TR4 in the front view can be increased. That is, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the winning opening unit 19930, the displacement region of the pachinko machine 10 of the game ball in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) can be expanded.

Therefore, the rampage of the game ball can be converged by expanding the area where the friction (resistance) generated by sliding or rolling the passage TR4 acts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering and dispose the detection device SE5 at a position close to the distribution member 19983 so that the player can easily see that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, conventionally, there is a problem that when an external force is applied to the disposing member by hitting by a player, the distribution member may be rotated due to the influence of the inertial force. That is, when the game ball distributed to one side is guided to the winning opening to which a higher game value is given than the game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting the game machine, the player enters the arrangement member. By applying an external force, there is a risk that the distribution member is rotated by the inertial force and the posture of the distribution member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6, in other words, is distributed without inserting the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering in the detection device SE5 by discharging from the unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930).

Further, the passage TR4 is provided with a detection device, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 are not provided with a detection device. Therefore, after passing through the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the game ball flows down the passage TR4 and the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5, and the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball is not detected by the detection device and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930.

As a result, the winning opening unit 19930 does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 after the game ball is distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, and the player detects the game ball by the detection device SE5. It has the playability of making people expect. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the destination of the game ball flowing down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 and being discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

Here, the game area in this embodiment will be described. The game area means an area through which the game ball can pass (flow down, roll) and may be detected by the detection device.

For example, in the downstream of the distribution member 19983 of the winning opening unit 99930, the area, the passage TR3, and the passage TR10 on the upstream side of the detection device SE5 in the passage TR4 are formed as a game area. That is, in the downstream of the distribution member 19983 of the winning opening unit 99930, the detection device SE5, the detection device SE6, the opening U2, and the opening U4 are formed as boundaries of the game area.

Further, as described above, since the first side surface base 19981 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, after the game balls are distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the first side surface base 19981 is passed through the opening U2 or the opening U4. Instead, the player can visually recognize that the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. Therefore, the winning opening unit 19930 has a game property that the player is expected to detect the game ball by the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the distribution unit 19980 has a magnetic body 988b disposed in the accommodating portion 986b formed in the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981 and a magnetism disposed in the distribution member 19983. Since the body 988c is arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position or the second position even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10. The state of being installed can be maintained.

As described above, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), so that the distribution member 19983 is the first. Displace from position to second position or from second position to first position.

Therefore, when an external force such as the player hitting the glass unit 16 is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 acts on the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)), so that the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the distribution member 19983 is improperly displaced from the first position to the second position.

As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6. Therefore, when the player hits the glass unit 16 and illegally displaces the distribution member 19983 from the first entry to the second position, the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position flows into the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown into the passage TR4, and the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. That is, the state in which the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 changes to the state in which the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is reduced.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the glass unit 16 and illicitly displaces the distribution member 19983 from the first position to the second position.

The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 may be set to the same number. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out by improperly displacement the distribution member 19983 does not change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the glass unit 16 and illicitly displaces the distribution member 19983.

Further, the case where the winning opening unit 19930 in the present embodiment is distributed by the distribution member 19983 and the detection devices are arranged in both the passages through which the game balls flow down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The detection device may be arranged only in one of the flow passages.

As a result, even after the game ball is thrown to the winning opening unit 19930, the player can be provided with playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, it is not necessary to dispose the detection device in both flow passages. In this case, the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 may be thrown to the out port or may not be sent to the out port.

As a result, the detection device is not arranged in the winning opening unit 19930, the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 is not sent to the out opening, and the passage TR9, the passage TR11 or the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930 is formed. Is formed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 is sent to the front side of the base plate 19060, so that the winning opening unit 19930 is set as the game area. be able to. That is, the gaming area formed in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased by the amount that the winning opening unit 19930 has a passage in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction), so that the player can have playability. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, although the case where the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged in the distribution unit 19980 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the distribution member 19983 may be arranged at any position in the game area described above. good.

As a result, the player can be given playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161 (a)), and the ball is thrown. Although the case where the game balls are distributed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where it is arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction), and the game ball to be thrown is placed in the left-right direction (FIG. 161 (a) on the paper surface). It may be distributed in the vertical direction).

As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 19980 can be distributed in various directions, and the player can be provided with playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 pass are collectively referred to as the fourth passage, but the passage TR6 and the passage TR6 formed on one side in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 The passage TR12 may be collectively used as the sixth passage. In this case, the passage TR4 joins the side of the sixth passage.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 is offset from the passage TR4 to the passage TR6 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) and is thrown to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the front view. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the solenoid 610 of the passage unit 19990 on one side of the passage TR4 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Next, the winning opening unit 20930 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) (see FIG. 112) has been described, but in the nineteenth embodiment, A part of the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 is formed with a depth passage extending from the front base 20981 side (left side of FIG. 163) to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 20980 according to the 19th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a). In FIG. 163, the second passage TR2 in the sixth embodiment is illustrated by a chain line. Further, since the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 are formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft member 988a of the distribution portion 983, only the second passage TR202 will be described, and the description of the first passage TR201 will be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 163, the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the 19th embodiment is located on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983 from the front base 20981 side (left side of FIG. 163) to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163). It is formed with a depth passage TR202a extending toward it. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the second passage TR2 is connected to the front base 981 side of the inflow passage 985f1 (see FIGS. 110 to 112), whereas the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the 19th embodiment. Is connected to the other side of the inflow passage 985f1 in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

Further, the second passage TR202 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the extension dimension of the depth passage TR202a toward the side opposite to the player is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and the other side. A game machine provided with a distribution unit having a second passage through which the distributed game balls pass is known.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and the space for arranging other members is correspondingly large. There was a problem that the number decreased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the depth passage TR202a is thrown to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163) from the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138) and then to the inflow passage 985f1. Will be done. Therefore, the depth passage TR202a can be arranged by utilizing the space in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 163), which has a relatively large space. Therefore, the distribution unit 20980 can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the winning opening unit 21930 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the passage TR4 (the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base of the distribution unit 19980) is formed on a flat surface has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the twentieth embodiment, , A protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage), and the flow speed of the game ball is reduced. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 21930 according to the twentieth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a).

As shown in FIG. 164, in the distribution unit 21980 of the winning opening unit 21930 in the 20th embodiment, the first side surface base 21981 is provided on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 164) of the first side surface base 21981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR214 surrounded by the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 21981b, the central plate 19981e, and the side plate 19985e (see FIG. 153) of the second side surface base 19985 is formed. The lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the formation range of the passage TR214 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a between the opening U6 and the detection device SE5 (2 in the present embodiment). Pieces) are formed.

The protrusions 21981b1 are formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and are uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164).

As a result, it is possible to ensure that the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other, and the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1 to allow the game ball to flow down. Becomes smaller.

Further, the protrusion 21981b1 arranged on the downstream side is arranged inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 164). Therefore, when the game ball and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other in a state where the game ball is violent, the protrusion 21981b1 is displaced from the game ball in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 164) or in the horizontal direction (vertical direction to the paper surface in FIG. 164). Can be granted.

As a result, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and even after passing through the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the player can play the game. Can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 21981b1 arranged on the downstream side is arranged inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. FIG. 164 It is possible to prevent the game ball to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) from coming into contact with the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985, and the first side surface base 21981 Damage to the central plate 19981e or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153).

Further, since the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 without contacting the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985, and can pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. (See FIG. 153), the passing speed of the game ball can be increased to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 toward the upper surface plate 19981a side (upper side of FIG. 164) is formed to be approximately 1/10 of the diameter of the game ball. .. As a result, the game ball flowing down the passage TR214 can get over the protrusion 21981b1 and flow down the passage TR214. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the protrusion 211981b1 and restricting the flow of the game ball in the passage TR214.

Further, the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 arranged on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has overcome the upstream protrusion 21981b1 having a protrusion dimension of about 1/10 of the diameter of the game ball on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 again hits the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b. It is possible to prevent the bottom plate 2181b1 from being touched and overcoming the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side without contacting the upper surface of the lower surface plate 2181b. Therefore, it is possible to surely reduce the flow speed of the game ball by the protrusion 21981b1.

Further, as described above, the distribution member 19983 throws the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 to the opening U6 (fourth passage) earlier than the ball to the opening U7 (fifth passage).

Therefore, the time when the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is distributed to the opening U6 and detected by the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and is arranged in the fifth passage. It is formed shorter than the time detected by the device SE6. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 are formed differently.

Further, the passing distance of the game ball from the opening U6 to the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage (passage TR214) is the detection arranged in the opening U7 to the fifth passage (between the passage TR9 and the passage TR10). It is formed to be smaller than the passing distance of the game ball to the device SE6.

Therefore, the time when the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is distributed to the opening U6 and detected by the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and is arranged in the fifth passage. The time detected by the device SE6 is formed to be shorter. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 are formed differently.

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to one side, and the other side. A game machine provided with a second detection means for detecting the game balls distributed to the ball is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in design was low.

That is, when the display means displays that the game balls have been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means to notify the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls). Case), the time required for the game ball to reach the distribution member and be distributed to one side to be detected by the first detection means, and the time required for the game ball distributed to the other side to be detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, the time from reaching the distribution member to being displayed will differ depending on the distribution direction, and the interest of the game will be impaired.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine described above, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the distribution member, and the first detection means and the first detection means and the first 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distribution member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

On the other hand, the lower surface of the passage TR214 in the present embodiment (lower surface plate 21981b formed on the first side surface base 21981 of the distribution unit 21980) is formed to include the protrusion 21981b1. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) is reduced, and the time from when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 21980 until it is detected by the detection device SE5 can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6.

Further, since the passage TR3 (a part of the fifth passage) is extended in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 164), the game ball freely falls down the passage TR3 and flows down. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be increased as compared with the form in which the game ball rolls down the passage and flows down. As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Therefore, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the damage and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Although the case where two protrusions 21981b1 are formed in the present embodiment has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or three or more protrusions 21981b1 may be formed.

When one protrusion 21981b1 is formed, the distribution member 19983 can give the player playability even after passing through the opening U6, and the game ball excessively passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4. , Passing through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153), and the entertainment of the game can be suppressed from being impaired.

When three or more protrusions 21981b1 are formed, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) can be further reduced, and the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 21980 are detected by the detection device SE5. By reducing the difference between the time until the ball is detected and the time until the ball is detected by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted by the number of formed protrusions 21981b1. Can enhance the interest of. Further, it can be achieved by the protrusion 21981b1 that the adjusting means can be easily formed, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the case where two protrusions 21981b1 having the same shape are formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the present embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and each protrusion 21981b1 is separately formed. It may be formed in the shape of.

For example, when the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side is larger than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side, the protrusion on the downstream side is compared with the contact between the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side and the game ball. The contact between the protrusion 21981b1 and the game ball increases the probability that the game ball will pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153). That is, as the game ball approaches the detection device SE5, the probability that the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, that is, does not pass through the detection device SE5 increases, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, when the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side is smaller than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side, it is possible to suppress the rampage of the game ball at a position close to the detection device SE5. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering, and reduce the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6, so that the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions 21981b1 may be formed intermittently in the left-right direction, and the protrusions 21981b1 may be formed so as to be inclined in the front-rear direction (FIG. 164 left-right direction).

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed intermittently in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), the game ball abuts on the end of the protrusion 21981b1 in the left-right direction, and the game ball is displaced in the left-right direction. To. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The protrusions 21981b1 are uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), and are rearward as they proceed to the left side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 164). When the game ball is formed so as to be inclined to the side (right side in FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1 to be displaced to the left and passes through the opening U2. It becomes easier to pass through the passage TR5.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the rear side (right side of FIG. 164) as it advances to the right side (front side of the paper in FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1. As a result, a displacement to the right is given, and it becomes easier to pass through the opening U4 and the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the rear side (right side in FIG. 164) as it advances from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (vertical direction to the paper surface of FIG. 164) of the bottom plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage is formed. When the game ball flowing down the (passage TR214) comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1, a lateral displacement is applied, the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, and easily passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (FIG. 153). reference).

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can give the player playability even after passing through the opening U6. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the front side (left side in FIG. 164) as it progresses from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (vertical direction to the paper surface of FIG. 164) of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage. The game ball flowing down the (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1 to give a displacement to the center in the left-right direction, and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 can be inserted in a state where the rampage has converged. , Chattering can be suppressed.

Further, although the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed in a semicircular shape in cross section. .. In this case, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 21981b1 from being damaged due to the contact with the game ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the recess is not always limited to this. It may be formed. As a result, even when the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIG. 164) of the passage TR214 is formed to be small, the game ball is clogged in the passage TR214, that is, the game ball is on the protrusion 21981b1 and the first side surface base 19981. It is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being suppressed by contacting the face plate 19981a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 22930 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165. In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR214 and the detection device SE5 has been described (see FIG. 164), but in the 21st embodiment, the passage TR224 (of the fourth passage) has been described. A protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the openings U2 and U4 of (part) and the detection device SE5. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 22930 according to the 21st embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 165, the distribution unit 22980 of the winning opening unit 22930 in the 21st embodiment has a first side surface base 22981 on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 165) of the first side surface base 22981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR224 surrounded by the upper surface plate 22981a, the lower surface plate 22981b, the central plate 22981e, and the side plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the openings U2 and U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR224 and the detection device SE5 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a. In the embodiment, two) are formed. Since the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 is the same as the distance between the arrangements in the twentieth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The protrusions 2181b1 are formed between the openings U2 and U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, that is, formed on the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) of the distribution unit 22980, and thus are related to the game. A protrusion 21981b1 without a protrusion can be formed at a position far from the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the protrusion 21981b1, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 10.

The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981b in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165). 21981b1 and the central plate 22981e are integrally molded.

As a result, the deflection of the central plate 22981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR224) and the central plate 22981e can be suppressed, and the damage of the central plate 22981e can be suppressed.

When the game ball flowing down the passage TR224 without passing through the opening U2 or the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) comes into contact with the protrusion 211981b1, the flow speed of the game ball is reduced, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 , The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths of the two are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed from being impaired, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, the game ball opens the opening U2 or the opening U4 by the contact between the game ball and the protrusion 21981b1. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through and being thrown into the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

Here, the passage TR224 in the present embodiment includes the detection device SE5, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153) do not include the detection device. Therefore, the game result differs depending on whether the game ball flows down the passage TR224 or the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball, which is distributed to the opening U6 side by the distribution member 19983, from coming into contact with the protrusion 21981b1 to cause a difference in the game result.

Further, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed so as to be inclined in the front-rear direction (FIG. 165 left-right direction) in the left-right direction.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to tilt to the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) as it advances to the left side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 165) or the right side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 165), a game of flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR224). When the ball abuts on the protrusion 21981b1, a displacement to the left or right is given, and the game ball abuts on the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base.

Therefore, due to the frictional force generated between the game ball and the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base, the flow speed of the game ball becomes small, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 , The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, the game ball is displaced to the left (backward on the paper surface in FIG. 165) or rightward (frontward on the paper surface in FIG. 165), and hits the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base. By touching it, it is possible to prevent the game ball from going wild. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 23930 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 166. In the 21st embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR224 (a part of the fourth passage) and the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 165) has been described, but the 22nd embodiment has been described. In the embodiment, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR234 (a part of the fourth passage) and the opening U2 and the opening U4. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 23930 according to the 22nd embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 166, the distribution unit 23980 of the winning opening unit 23930 in the 22nd embodiment has the first side surface base 23981 on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 166) of the first side surface base 23981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR234 surrounded by the upper surface plate 23981a, the lower surface plate 23981b, the central plate 23981e, and the side plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the opening U6 and the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR234 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 23981a (two in the present embodiment). It is formed. Since the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 is the same as the distance between the arrangements in the twentieth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 166). 21981b1 and the central plate 23981e are integrally molded.

As a result, the deflection of the central plate 23981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) and the central plate 23981e can be suppressed, and the damage of the central plate 23981e can be suppressed.

When the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) comes into contact with the protrusion 211981b1, the flow speed of the game ball decreases, and until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5. The difference between the time and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths of the balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed from being impaired, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, in a state where the flow speed of the game ball is reduced by the protrusion 21981b1, the game ball flows down toward the region where the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR234 are formed, so that the game ball flows down the passage. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball is flowing down the TR234 or being thrown into the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

Further, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 and the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR234, that is, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the detection device SE5, the opening U2 and the opening U4 and the distribution member 19983. Since the arrangement space for the game is formed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to see the game ball by the distribution member 19983, and the player can use the game ball in the passage TR234, the passage TR5, or the passage TR6. You can see which passage you are going through.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 2981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 24930 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the center of gravity is arranged on the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 23rd embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is one of the acting portions. It is unevenly arranged on the 24983a side, and the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 24930 in the 23rd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. In FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the acting portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 167 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is from the lower surface (the lower surface of FIG. 167 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the distribution member 24983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the working portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity of the above is located on the working portion 24983a side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount that the protruding portion 24983a protrudes.

Further, the front contact portion 24982b1 of the lower surface plate 24982b formed on the bulging portion 24982 of the first side surface base 24981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed so as to project from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983. It is provided with a recess 24982b3 formed in a shape. As a result, the protrusion 24983a1 projecting from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983 can be arranged inside the recess 24982b3, and the distribution member 24983 can be arranged at the second position.

That is, the distribution member 24983 can form an inclined state similar to the second position of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment, whereby the distribution member 24983 is arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)). The game ball arranged between the acting portion 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b is distributed from the distribution member 24983 to the front unit 19940 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)), passes through the opening U7 and the intermediate port 19941h. The ball can be thrown to the passage TR3.

The protrusion 24983a1 is formed sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the front-rear direction is located on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 167 (a)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. To do. As a result, the distribution member 24983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the first position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 24980, and is thrown to the distribution member 24983, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 side ( The ball is thrown between the acting portion 19983a arranged on the right side of FIG. 167 (a), and the load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position. ..

As described above, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the acting portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is closer to the acting portion 24983a than the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 167 (FIG. 167). a) Since it is located on the left side), the rotation speed of the distribution member 24983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 (see FIG. 161) in the 18th embodiment, and the first The rotation speed of the distribution member 24983 that is displaced from the position to the second position is larger than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 24980 are detected by the detection device SE5. The difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983. The structure of the distribution unit 24980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the 4th passage or the 5th passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction ( (See FIG. 1), when an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction (FIG. 167 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member 24983. The angle formed by the direction connecting the center of gravity (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 24983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)) is the 18th implementation. It is formed smaller than the distribution member 19983 in the form (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

The case where the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment includes an action portion 24983a on which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be arranged on the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983.

That is, in the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the protrusion portion 24983a1 is integrally molded with the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. Similar to the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, or may be embedded inside the acting portion 24983a.

By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to prevent the recess 24982b3 from being arranged in the front side contact portion 24982b1, and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the weight member from protruding from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, it is possible to suppress damage to the distribution member 24983 during assembly.

Further, the case where the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1 in the present embodiment is formed in a shape slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 protruding from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983 has been described. The shape is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed sufficiently larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1. Further, the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1 may be formed with a through hole having a width larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1.

As a result, even when dust or the like is accumulated in the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1, the lower surface of the working portion 24983a (lower side in FIG. 167 (a)) and the upper surface of the front side contact portion 24982b1 (FIG. 167 (FIG. 167). a) The upper side) can be brought into contact with the distribution member 24983, and the distribution member 24983 can be arranged at the second position.

Next, the winning opening unit 25930 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168. In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is biased toward one of the acting portions 24983a and the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently has been described (see FIG. 167). In the 24th embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is biased toward one of the acting portions 24983a, and when an external force acts on the distribution member 25983, the distribution member 25983 is suppressed from being rotated. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 168 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 25930 in the 24th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 168 (a), the distribution member 25983 is in the first position. In FIG. 168 (b), the state in which the distribution member 25983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 168 (a)) of the distribution member 25983 is in the direction of gravity from its lower surface (lower side of FIG. 168 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the distribution member 25983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the distribution member 25983 in the direction connecting the working portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity of the above is located on the working portion 24983a side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount that the protruding portion 24983a protrudes.

Further, the back surface contact portion 25982b2 of the lower surface plate 25982b formed on the bulging portion 25982 of the first side surface base 25981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed so as to project from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983. It is provided with a recess 24982b3 formed in a shape. As a result, the protrusion 24983a1 projecting from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983a can be arranged inside the recess 24982b3, and the distribution member 25983 can be arranged at the first position.

That is, the distribution member 25983 can form an inclined state similar to the first position of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment, whereby the distribution member 25983 is arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)). The game ball arranged between the acting portion 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b is distributed from the distribution member 25983 to the detection device SE5 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)), passes through the opening U6, and is sent to the passage TR4. Can be done.

Since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position, and the distribution member in the front-rear direction is formed. The center of gravity of 25983 is located on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 168 (b)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. As a result, the distribution member 25983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the second position.

Further, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is located on the opening U6 side (on the right side of FIG. 168 (a)) with respect to the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the distribution member 25983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 25983 in the front side direction (FIG. 168 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 168 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

Further, since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a (lower side in FIG. 168 (a)) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is the 18th. It is located on one side in the direction of gravity from the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the embodiment.

Therefore, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 (FIG. 168 (a). ) The angle formed with the arrow F1 direction) is formed smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. Further, the distance between the axis of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced, and the moment acting on the distribution member 25983 due to the inertial force can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 168 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 25983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 25983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, it is relatively easy to form the protrusion 24983a1 on the action portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983, and compared with a method of reducing the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 such as using anti-vibration rubber. Product cost can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, the fifth passage formed on the side where the distribution member 25983 distributes the game balls in two directions may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed faster. .. In this case, the rotation speed of the distribution member 25983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 (see FIG. 161) in the eighteenth embodiment, and is from the first position to the second position. The rotational speed of the displaced distribution member 25983 is higher than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced (see FIG. 161).

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 25983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 25980 are detected by the detection device SE5. By reducing the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and to secure the degree of freedom in design (see FIG. 161).

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted by the distribution member 25983, the structure of the distribution unit 25980 The product cost can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the fourth passage or the fifth passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ).

Next, the winning opening unit 26930 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is biased toward one acting portion 24983a has been described (see FIG. 167), but in the 25th embodiment, the magnetic force is applied to one acting portion 26983a. By disposing the body 26983a2, the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 169 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 26930 in the 25th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 169 (a), the distribution member 26983 is in the first position. In FIG. 169 (b), the state in which the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the working portion 26983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 169 (a)) of the distribution member 26983 in the 25th embodiment is a magnetic material from the lower surface to the inside. 26983a2 is buried.

Further, in the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed in the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981, the magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded from the upper surface to the inside. The magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged at a position facing the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the acting portion 26983a in a state where the distribution member 26983 is located at the first position. Further, the magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged in the acting portion 26983a.

Here, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a is the gravity acting on the distribution member 26983 located at the first position. It is formed to be smaller than the resultant force of the repulsive force between the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 26983 and the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (see FIG. 150). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the first position, the state in which the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the first position is maintained.

In the present embodiment, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a causes the acting portion 26983a and the first acting portion 26983a of the distribution member 26983. 1 The back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the side surface base 26981 does not abut, but the acting portion 26983a of the distribution member 26983 and the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The state in which the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the formed lower surface plate 26982b is brought close to each other and the forces acting on the distribution member 26983 are balanced is referred to as the first position.

In the state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, and the first 1 When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 26983 through the winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 26980, the ball is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position. It is said that it will be installed.

As described above, since the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a acts on the distribution member 26983, the first position to the first position. The rotation speed of the distribution member 26983 that is displaced to the two positions is larger than that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 26980, and is thrown to the distribution member 26983, it is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis. The distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position.

As described above, since the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the acting portion 26983a acts on the distribution member 26983, the second position to the second position. The rotation speed of the distribution member 26983 that is displaced to one position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 26983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 26980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

In the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is embedded from the lower surface of the working portion 26983a toward the inside, and the magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded from the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 toward the inside, that is, the magnetic material. The case where the exposed surface of 26983a2 and the lower surface of the working portion 26983a form the same surface and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 form the same surface has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done.

For example, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 may be formed inside the lower surface of the acting portion 26983a (upper side in FIG. 169 (a)), and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 may be formed from the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2. May also be formed on the inside (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 or the magnetic body 26982b4 from being damaged.

Further, due to variations in dimensional tolerances, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 is formed on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the lower surface of the working portion 26983a, or the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 is on the back side. It is possible to suppress the formation of the contact portion 26982b2 on the outer side (upper side in FIG. 169 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 from coming into contact with each other.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the magnetic material 26983a2 or the magnetic material 26982b4 from being damaged. Further, it can be prevented that the distribution member 26983 is not sufficiently rotated and is not arranged at the first position.

Further, the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position by inserting a spacer or the like between the magnetic body 26983a2 and the acting portion 26983a, or between the magnetic material 26982b4 and the back surface side contact portion 26982b2. In, the distance between the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 can be adjusted.

As a result, the magnitude of the force acting on the distribution member 26983 can be adjusted, and the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily made. Can be adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 26983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 are arranged in a repulsive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 may be arranged in an adsorbing state. ..

As a result, in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the distribution member 26983. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution member 26983 from the first position to the second position even when the inertial force in the front side direction of the above is applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is arranged on the acting portion 26983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the distribution member 26983, and the first side surface base 26981 expands. The case where the magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the protruding portion 26982 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening U7 side of the distribution member 26983 ( The magnetic body 26983a2 is arranged on the working portion 19983a arranged on the left side of FIG. 169 (a), and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The magnetic material 26982b4 may be arranged in a state of being adsorbed on the surface.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position. (See FIG. 1), when an inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 in the back side direction (FIG. 169 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member The angle formed by the direction connecting the center of gravity of 26983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 26983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)) is the 18th. It is formed smaller than the distribution member 19983 in the embodiment (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 26983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 26983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Next, the winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170. In the eighteenth embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage and the second position. The case where the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged in the above and the distribution member 19983 is rotated at the same angle in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage has been described. (See FIG. 161), in the 26th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage. The angle and the angle at which the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position and the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fourth passage are arranged at different angles. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 170 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 170 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 170 (b), the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 27930 according to the 26th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 27982b2 of the lower surface plate 27982b formed on the bulging portion 27982 of the first side surface base 27981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 170 (FIG. 170). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 27982b2 is formed so as to project above the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (upward direction in FIG. 170 (a)).

As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is sent to the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 170). (A) The distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position at the rotation angle at which the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the left side) is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In the state, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 170 (a)). Can be smaller than the rotation angle rotated to a position facing one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 19983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 27980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

The distribution unit 27980 in the present embodiment takes time to be detected by the detection device SE5 by adjusting the position of the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 projecting upward (upward in FIG. 170 (a)). The difference between the time and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be easily adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171. In the 26th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is the second position. The case where the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged in the above and the distribution member 19983 is arranged smaller than the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage has been described (FIG. 170), in the 27th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is , The game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position, and the distribution member 19983 is arranged larger than the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 171 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 171 (b), the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 28930 according to the 27th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 28982b2 of the lower surface plate 28982b formed on the bulging portion 28982 of the first side surface base 28981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 171 (FIG. 171). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 27982b2 is formed so as to be recessed below the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (downward in FIG. 170 (a)). To.

As a result, the angle θ5 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed smaller than the angle θ3.

Further, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the center of rotation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 1). ), When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the front side direction (FIG. 171 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 The angle formed by the direction connecting the two (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 19983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 19983 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 171 (a)) is the vibration in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than the component member 19983. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 19983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 171 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 28980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 29930 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the distribution member 19983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the symmetrical plane extending in the left-right direction through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b has been described (FIG. 147). (See), in the 28th embodiment, the distribution member 29983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the symmetrical plane extending in the left-right direction through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 29930 according to the 28th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 172 (a), the distribution member 29983 is in the first position. In FIG. 172 (b), the state in which the distribution member 29983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 29930 in the 28th embodiment, the angle θ6 formed by the action line SL connecting the pair of action portions 19983a of the distribution member 29983 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 172 (a)) and the intermediate line TL is an opening. It is formed smaller than the angle θ7 formed by the action line SL and the intermediate line TL on the U7 side (left side in FIG. 172 (a)). In other words, in the distribution member 29983, the intermediate plate 19983b is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the pair of acting portions 19983a, passes through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and is in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. It is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the plane of symmetry extending to.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 29983 is arranged at the first position, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 29983 is thrown into the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 172). (A) The distribution member 29983 is arranged at the second position at the rotation angle at which the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the left side) is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In the state, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 29983 is thrown to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 172 (a)). Can be smaller than the rotation angle rotated to a position facing one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 29983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 29980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 29983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 30930 in the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 173. In the 29th embodiment, the mode of the contact surface of the distribution member 30983 with the game ball differs between the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the first position and the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the second position. It is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 173 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 30930 in the 29th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is in the first position. In FIG. 173 (b), the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in a state where the distribution member 30983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 30980, and is thrown to the distribution member 30983, the game ball is on the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 side (FIG. 173). (B) The ball is thrown between the action unit 19983a on the right side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 30983 is placed in the first position. ..

Here, a rubber-like elastic body is formed on the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. A rubber sheet 30983f is arranged. Therefore, the game ball that comes into contact with the rubber sheet 30983f rebounds and is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

When the game ball displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) comes into contact with the distribution member 30983 again due to its own weight, the member 30983 is rotationally displaced from the second position to the first position by the load of the game ball, and the fourth position. A game ball is thrown into the passage (passage TR4). That is, it is possible to delay the sending of the game ball to the fourth passage (passage TR4) by displacing the game ball to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, even when the distribution member 30983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time and detection until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 30980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

By changing the thickness or shape of the rubber sheet 30983f, or by arranging the rubber sheets having different elastic moduli, the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the detection by the detection device SE6 are detected. You can easily adjust the difference from the time until.

Further, rubber formed from a rubber-like elastic body on the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Since the sheet 30983f is arranged, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 30983 is located on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) with respect to the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 30983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 30983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 30983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 30983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 30983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 173 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 30983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 30983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

In addition, although the case where the rubber sheet 30983f is disposed on the distribution member 30983 in the present embodiment and the game ball is displaced (rebounded) to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is described, but this is not necessarily the case. The speed component of the game ball may be reduced by the contact between the game ball and the rubber sheet 30983f without limitation.

For example, when the rubber sheet 30983f has viscosity, the game ball slides or rolls on the rubber sheet 30983f, so that the velocity component toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced.

Further, for example, when the rubber sheet 30983f is significantly deformed (the game ball sinks) due to the contact of the game balls, the frictional force acting between the game balls and the rubber sheet 30983f causes the opening U6 side (FIG. The velocity component to 173 (a) on the right side) is reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 30983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the rubber sheet 30983f is formed of a rubber-like elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, members having different materials (elastic modulus) such as a resin film, a gel-like sheet, or a metal plate are exemplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, rubber-like elasticity is applied to the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. The case where the rubber sheet 30983f formed from the body is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is formed on the surfaces of the intermediate plate 19983b, the contact portion 19983d, and the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Protrusions formed to smaller dimensions may be formed. As a result, the velocity component toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced by the frictional force acting between the game ball and the protrusion.

Next, the winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. The distribution member 31983 in the thirtieth embodiment is formed to have different rotational resistance depending on the rotational direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

Further, in the distribution member 31983 in the present embodiment, the shaft member 31988a extends in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 174 (a)) with respect to the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. Has the same configuration, a pair of working portions 19983a and an intermediate plate 19983b are arranged at substantially right angles, pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and extend in the left-right direction on a symmetrical plane. It is formed in a symmetrical shape (see FIG. 161).

FIG. 174 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 31930, and FIG. 174 (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit 31930. In the winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment, the side plate 31986a formed on the bulging portion 31986 of the second side surface base 31985 is formed in an annular shape toward the first side surface base 19981 side (left side in FIG. 174 (a)). A protruding bearing portion 31985j is provided, and the inside of the bearing portion 31985j is formed to penetrate in the axial direction.

One end of the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 penetrates the bearing portion 31985j and is disposed outside the second cover member 31988 (on the right side in FIG. 174 (a)), and the other end of the shaft member 31988a is It is inserted into the bearing portion 982c (see FIG. 151) of the side plate 19982a formed in the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981. Therefore, the shaft member 31988a is rotatably arranged by the bearing portion 31985j and the bearing portion 982c. Further, one end of the shaft member 31988a is formed in a substantially D shape in the axial direction, and a one-way gear WG described later is arranged.

The one-way gear WG is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear meshed with the third gear GY3 is engraved on the outer circumference of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. Further, the shaft hole of the one-way gear WG is formed in the same shape as a substantially D shape at one end of the axial viewing shaft member 31988a.

Further, the distribution member 31983 and the shaft member 31988a are fastened and fixed by a set screw (not shown). As a result, the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way gear WG.

When the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is not rotated. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is rotated.

The second cover member 31988 has a third gear GY3 at a position where it is meshed with the one-way gear WG, and a second cover member 31988 at a position where it is meshed with the fourth gear GY4 and the fourth gear GY4 at a position where it is meshed with the third gear GY3. It is equipped with a 5-gear GY5.

Therefore, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 are not transmitted. And the fifth gear GY5 does not rotate. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is rotated. As a result, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate.

Here, when the rotation of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the third gear GY3 and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 rotate, the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the gear teeth of the third gear GY3 mesh with each other. Friction occurs on the surface.

Similarly, when the rotation of the third gear GY3 is transmitted to the fourth gear GY4 and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 rotate, the meshing surface of the gear teeth between the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 When friction occurs, the rotation of the 4th gear GY4 is transmitted to the 5th gear GY5, and the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5 rotate, the meshing of the gear teeth between the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5 Friction occurs on the surface.

Therefore, the distribution member when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate, that is, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. The rotation of 31983 is the vibration when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5 do not rotate, that is, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. It is slower than the rotation of the component member 31983.

Therefore, the distribution when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161). The rotation of the member 31983 is when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161). It becomes slower than the rotation of the distribution member 31983, and the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 161) and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) is reduced. be able to.

Further, even when the degree of freedom in design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 By reducing the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and secure the degree of freedom in design. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction (FIG. 174 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, respectively. Friction (resistance) occurs on the meshing surface of the teeth.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 31983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 174 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch between transmission and non-transmission of rotation to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, it is possible to surely form a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction. it can.

Further, since the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are arranged outside the second cover member 31988, they can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time of the detection time difference can be reduced.

Further, since the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 can be driven by a relatively simple configuration, the product cost can be reduced by that amount, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can improve sex.

In particular, the rotational resistance of the distribution member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the driven of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and in the present invention in which the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small, the difference in the distribution time of the distribution member 31983 can be set. It is effective as a configuration to make it smaller.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of gears to be arranged is three has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see Figure 161).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG rotates due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position without transmitting to the three-gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, the one-way gear WG Described the case where the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 (see FIG. 161), but the one-way gear WG acts in the opposite direction. May be.

That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Then, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983 with the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the first gear. It may be configured not to transmit to the 5-gear GY5.

In this case, when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 31983 (see FIG. 1). (See FIG. 161), the distribution member 31983 is moved from the first position due to the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. It is possible to suppress the displacement (rotation) to the second position.

Next, the winning opening unit 32930 according to the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 175. In the 31st embodiment, the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 is formed at the same position as the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 32930 according to the 31st embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 175, the distribution member 32983 according to the 31st embodiment is on the side opposite to the pair of acting portions 19983a and the intermediate plate 19983b of the contact portion 19983d in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a (FIG. It is formed with a center of gravity adjusting portion 32983 g which is formed so as to project from the lower side of 175). The center of gravity adjusting portion 32983g is a portion for arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 at the same position as the axial center of the shaft member 988a, and is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 175, the distribution member 32983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 32983 When an inertial force acts on the pachinko machine 10 in the front side direction (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 175), the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 and the axial center position of the shaft member 988a are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the inertial force acting on the distribution member 32983 does not generate a moment.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 175 arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 32983, the distribution member 32983 The displacement from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, the distribution member 32983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 32983 is on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Even when an inertial force acts in the direction (direction opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow F1 in FIG. 175), the inertial force acting on the distribution member 32983 does not generate a moment.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 32983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction opposite to the direction of the arrow F1 in FIG. 175). The displacement of the distribution member 32983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, the distribution member 32983 is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, the shape of the distribution member 32983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the distribution member 32983 has no directionality, the assembling property can be improved.

Next, the winning opening unit 33930 according to the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In the 32nd embodiment, the shape of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution member 33983 is formed differently on the opening U6 side and the opening U7 side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 33930 according to the 32nd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 176 (a), the distribution member 33983 is in the first position. In FIG. 176 (b), the state in which the distribution member 33983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution member 33983 is formed by being curved in an arc shape protruding toward the opening U6 side. The protruding surface 33983b1 is formed, and the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape recessed toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 33983. A concave surface 33983b2 is formed. Further, the acting portion 33983a of the distribution member 33983 on the opening U7 side is formed so as to project toward the intermediate plate 33983b (upper side of FIG. 176 (a)) as it advances toward the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)) and acts. The upper surface of the portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 form a uniform surface. In other words, the boundary between the upper surface of the working portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 is formed on the same surface.

In the state where the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, and the first 1 When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 33983 through the winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980, the game ball is on the concave surface 33983b2 and the opening U7 side of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980 (FIG. 176 (a)). The ball is thrown to the acting portion 33983a (on the left side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the second position. ..

Here, the concave surface 33983b2 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape recessed toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 33983, and has a uniform surface with the upper surface of the working portion 33983a. In order to form the ball, the velocity component of the game ball sent to the distribution unit 33980 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)) is set to the opening U7 side (FIG. 176 (b)). The game ball can be thrown to the opening U7 by changing the velocity component to (left side). That is, since the velocity component to the opening U7 side can be imparted to the game ball, the ball can be thrown in a shorter time than the ball thrown to the opening U7 in the 18th embodiment.

Therefore, the throwing time of the game ball to the passage TR3 (fifth passage) by the distribution member 33983 can be shortened as compared with the throwing time in the eighteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in a state where the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980, and is thrown to the distribution member 33983, the game ball is a protrusion of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980. The ball is thrown to the acting portion 19983a on the 33983b1 and the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is placed in the first position. ..

Here, since the protruding surface 33983b1 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape protruding toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)), it is formed on a straight line in 18 embodiments. The sliding or rolling distance of the intermediate plate 33983b on the protruding surface 33983b1 can be increased as compared with the side surface of the intermediate plate 19883b (see FIG. 161).

Further, since the game ball approaches the axis of the shaft member 988a by sliding or rolling on the protrusion 33983b1, the moment acting on the distribution member 33983 can be reduced. As a result, the rotation time of the distribution member 33983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down.

Therefore, the throwing time of the game ball to the passage TR4 (fourth passage) by the distribution member 33983 can be made longer than the throwing time in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 33983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 33980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 33983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the distribution member 19983 is rotatably supported by the shaft (see FIG. 161) has been described, but in the 33rd embodiment, the distribution member 19983 is rotatably supported by the front and rear. It is arranged so as to be displaceable in the direction and the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 177 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 177 (b), the distribution member 19983 maintains the posture (angle) arranged at the first position inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j described later. The state displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)) is shown, and FIG. 177 (c) shows the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. For ease of understanding, in the enlarged view shown in FIG. 177, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are shown by solid lines, and the distribution member 19983 is shown by chain lines.

In the winning port unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j have an oval shape that is inclined and extended in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are directed toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. Is formed in. Here, the oval shape means a shape in which both ends are formed in an arc shape having a radius equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a, and the pair of both ends are connected by a pair of linear shapes. Further, the pair of linear shapes are arranged in parallel, and the distance between them is arranged to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 can be displaced in the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the distribution member 19983 is rotatably arranged in the distribution unit 34980, and is displaceable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 177 (a) left-right direction) and the up-down direction (FIG. 177 (a) up-down direction). It is arranged in the setting.

As shown in FIG. 177 (a), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 1), and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. When an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 is on the front side (FIG. 177 (a)). Acting on the left side), the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j as shown in FIG. 177 (b). That is, the distribution member 19983 is displaced forward due to the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983.

Further, due to the displacement of the distribution member 19983 to the front side, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. ..

Further, since the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as it is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement (rotation) of the component member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 177 (b), when the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the opening U6 side of the distribution member 19983 (FIG. 177 (b)). ) The contact between the acting portion 19983a on the right side) and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 34982 of the first side surface base 34981 can be maintained. As a result, the distribution member 19983 can maintain the posture (angle) arranged at the first position.

In the state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), that is, when the shaft member 988a is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), the shaft member The 988a is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j by gravity, that is, is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), so that FIG. As shown in, the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The state in which the branch member 19983 is arranged at the first position can be maintained.

Here, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the front surface. The distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h of the unit 19940 and the distribution member 19983 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 34980 in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), and the distribution member 19983 moves from the first position to the second position. In the case of displacement, there is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the distribution member 19983.

On the other hand, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment have an oval shape that extends inclined to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)), in other words. And, it is formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). Therefore, due to the weight of the distribution member 19983 and the force acting on the distribution member 19983 in the one side (lower side in the gravity direction) direction due to the contact between the distribution member 19983 and the game ball flowing down in the distribution unit 34980. The distribution member 19983 is displaced to the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the game ball whose bite state is released is the fifth passage (passage TR3). Can be thrown to.

As shown in FIG. 177 (b), in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980 and the front unit 19940. The distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h and the distribution member 19983 may be formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

A game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 34980, and passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 34980. When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 19983b and the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 177 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980.

Here, as described above, since the game ball thrown to the distribution unit 19980 has a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)), the throwing direction of the game ball and the extension of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. The installation direction has the same directional component in that it advances on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) toward the rear side.

Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). While maintaining the distribution member 19983, the distribution member 19983 is rotated around the axis of the shaft member 988a as a rotation axis, and is in a state of being arranged at the second position as shown in FIG. 177 (c).

An external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 19983 is directed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 177 (a) direction in arrow F1). ), The shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 has the inside of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j on the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)) as in the state of being arranged at the first position. That is, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 19983 from being illicitly rotated from the second position to the first position by being displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

As a result, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)). The distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the axis of rotation by the throwing of the game ball, and is arranged at the first position as shown in FIG. 177 (a). Will be done.

The bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). , Even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the distribution is performed. By displacing the inside of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, the shaft member 988a of the member 19983 can prevent the distribution member 19983 from being improperly rotated from the second position to the first position.

Further, gravity acts on the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 which is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)), that is, to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. As a result, since it is disposed at the first position, a driving means such as an actuator that displaces the distribution member 19983 to the first position becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the product cost can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 19983 from being maintained in a state of being displaced forward due to poor control of the drive means or the like.

Further, an external force is continuously applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 continuously acts on the distribution member 19983. Even in such a case, the distribution member 19983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the first position by the action of gravity.

The bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and it is formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends in the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). May be done.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. (See FIG. 1) When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the back side direction (FIG. 177 (c) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 is rearward. Acting on the side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)), the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the rear side by the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983.

Further, due to the displacement of the distribution member 19983 to the rear side, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. ..

Further, since the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as it is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 177 (c)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement (rotation) of the component member 19983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the portion connecting the pair of both ends may be formed in a curved shape, or may be formed from both a curved shape and a linear shape. As a result, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are formed in a shape corresponding to the external force (see FIG. 1) applied to the pachinko machine 10, so that the distribution member 19983 is illegally rotated from the second position to the first position. Can be suppressed.

Further, although the case where the pair of linear shapes are arranged in parallel has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of linear shapes may be arranged in a non-parallel manner.

For example, the distance between the facing surfaces may be increased from the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) to the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). As a result, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 displaced to the opening U7 side can rotate and be displaced inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 34980 in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), and the distribution member Even when the 19983 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the game ball is bitten between the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the distribution member 19983. It can suppress the squeeze.

In order for the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 to be displaceably arranged inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, it is preferable that the inner lower surface of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j is formed in a linear shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 34980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 35930 in the 34th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. In the 34th embodiment, the distribution member 31983 is arranged at a position biased in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 35930 according to the 34th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 178 (a), the distribution member 31983 is in the first position. In FIG. 178 (b), the state in which the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated. In FIG. 178, the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are shown by chain lines only in the outer shape for easy understanding.

In the winning opening unit 35930 according to the 34th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 35982b2 of the lower surface plate 35982b formed on the bulging portion 35982 of the first side surface base 35981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 178 (FIG. 178). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 35982b2 is formed so as to project above the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (upward direction in FIG. 178 (a)).

As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

Further, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the distribution member 31983 is moved from the second position. When the gear is displaced (rotated) to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

Here, conventionally, a game machine including a ball entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side has been known. ing. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the ball entry port is arranged above the distribution member in the vertical direction in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball entered into the ball entry port is distributed. There was a problem that the mode until reaching the member became monotonous and the interest of the game was insufficient.

On the other hand, in the winning opening unit 35930 in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 31983 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (a)) of the first winning opening 64, the ball enters the first winning opening 64. By the time the game ball reaches the distribution member 31983, the game ball is displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Therefore, the game in which the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 in the downward direction (FIG. 178 (a) downward direction) or in the left-right direction (FIG. 178 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) is visually recognized. It is possible for a person to visually recognize the displacement of the game ball in a direction different from the previous one (front-back direction). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 31983 has a velocity component direction (vertical direction (FIG. 178 (a) vertical direction) and a front-rear direction) provided by the game ball with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64. Since the game balls are arranged unevenly in substantially the same direction as (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction)), the game ball is brought into contact with the distribution member 31983 while maintaining the velocity component. Therefore, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the game ball can be displaced quickly, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 178 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Since the axial center position of the above is arranged, the game ball comes into contact with the intermediate plate 19983b on the axial center side of the axial member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position. .. Therefore, the moment acting on the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and the damage of the intermediate plate 19983b (distribution member 19983) can be suppressed.

Further, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be made slower than the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, even when the degree of freedom in design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled and designed. The degree of freedom can be secured.

Further, since the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are arranged outside the second cover member, they can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time of the detection time difference can be reduced.

In particular, the rotational resistance of the distribution member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the driven of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and in the present invention in which the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small, the difference in the distribution time of the distribution member 31983 can be set. It is effective as a configuration to make it smaller.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of gears to be arranged is three has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see Figure 161).

As shown in FIG. 178 (a), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 31983 having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (a)). When the game balls come into contact with each other, the game ball loses the velocity component to the rear side due to the contact between the game ball and the distribution member 31983. Next, the game ball is displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) due to the weight of the game ball, and abuts on the action portion on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 178 (a)) to position the first position to the second position. Displace (rotate) to.

Here, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)). When the member 31983 comes into contact with the member 3, the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied.

As a result, the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position are set. different. In the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) speed of the distribution member 31983 displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position of the distribution member 31983. ) Faster than the displacement (rotational) speed.

That is, the displacement (rotation) speed of the distribution member 31983 when the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position is the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 when the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position. ) Slower than speed.

Therefore, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 178 (b)) of the distribution member 31983 may come into contact with the back surface side contact portion 35982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 19983a (distribution member 31983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, so that the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 , Friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5.

As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down, so that damage to the working portion 19983a (distribution member 31983) can be suppressed.

Here, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, and the fourth gear Since friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the GY4 and the fifth gear GY5, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position is delayed. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) collides with the distribution member 31983, the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surface of each gear tooth causes the distribution member 31983. Cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position in a state where the game ball bounces (separates). Therefore, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated), and the distribution member 31983 is rebounded in the state of being arranged at the second position. If the (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 31983, the game ball may be thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, the one-way gear WG in the present embodiment has a configuration in which the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the one-way gear WG when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position. It is said that. Therefore, no friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, and the first from the second position of the distribution member 31983. The displacement (rotation) to the position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 31983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 31983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 31983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (rebounded) from the distribution member 31983, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 31983 comes into contact with the distribution member 31983, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction (FIG. 178 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are respectively. It is possible to suppress the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position due to the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surface of the teeth.

Further, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch the rotation to the gear formed on the outer ring between transmission and non-transmission, it is possible to surely form a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction. Further, since the configuration can be relatively simple as to whether or not the gears are driven, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability can be improved accordingly.

Further, since the distribution member 31983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, the shape of the distribution member 31983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the ease of assembly can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983 as the third gear. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG rotates due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position without transmitting to the GY3, the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5, the one-way gear WG changes. Although the case where the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 has been described, the one-way gear WG may act in the opposite direction.

That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Then, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. It may be configured not to.

In this case, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is directed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 178 (a) arrow F1 direction). When the inertial force of the above is applied, the distribution member 31983 is caused by the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Can be suppressed from being displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 31983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the 35th embodiment, the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position biased in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 179 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. In FIG. 179 (b), the state in which the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment, the distribution member 24983 is arranged. As described above, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the acting portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is the amount that the protrusion 24983a protrudes, so that the intermediate plate 19983b It is located on the side of the acting portion 24983a (on the left side in FIG. 179 (a)).

Therefore, when the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) against gravity, so that the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) by using gravity, so that the displacement (rotation) can be increased. it can.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 36980 are detected by the detection device SE5. The difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983. The structure of the distribution unit 36980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the 4th passage or the 5th passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 36980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 36980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the bias direction of the distribution member 24983 with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64 and the velocity component toward the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)). When the member 24983 comes into contact with the member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position in a state where the velocity component is applied to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)). Therefore, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 179 (b)) of the distribution member 24983 may abut on the back surface side contact portion 36982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 19983a (distribution member 24983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the working portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is from the lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). Since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down. It is possible to prevent the portion 19983a (distribution member 24983) from being damaged.

Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 24983 is arranged on the rear side (right side of FIG. 179 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 179).

Here, the acting portion 24983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is unilaterally in the gravity direction (gravity direction) from the lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). When the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project from the lower side), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the first position to the second position is delayed by the amount of the protrusion 24983a1. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) collides with the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 moves from the first position in a state where the game ball bounces (separates). Displace (rotate) to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 24983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated). With the distribution member 24983 placed in the second position, the bouncing (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 24983, so that the ball is thrown to the opening U6 opposite to the direction in which the game ball is originally distributed. There is a risk of being displaced.

On the other hand, the working portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment is in the direction of gravity from its lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). Therefore, when the displacement (rotation) is performed from the first position to the second position, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the first position to the second position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 24983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 24983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 24983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 24983 comes into contact with the distribution member 24983, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 24983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 (distribution member). The angle formed by the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of 24983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)), the pachinko machine is shaken. The displacement of the component member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

The case where the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment includes an action portion 24983a on which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be arranged on the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983.

That is, in the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the protrusion portion 24983a1 is integrally molded with the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. Similar to the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, or may be embedded inside the acting portion 24983a.

By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to prevent the recess 24982b3 from being arranged in the front side contact portion 36982b1, and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the weight member from protruding from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, it is possible to suppress damage to the distribution member 24983 during assembly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 24983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 37930 in the 36th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the 36th embodiment, the receiving surface of the distribution member 37983 that receives the game ball is formed as a curved surface 37983h that projects toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 180 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 37930 according to the 36th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 180 (a), the distribution member 37983 is in the first position. In FIG. 180 (b), the state in which the distribution member 37983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 37930 according to the 36th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 37983 is located on the rear side (right side of FIG. 180 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 180 (a) left-right direction). The axial center position is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 180A, both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b of the distribution member 37983 are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape so as to project toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a.

Further, the acting portion 37983a of the distribution member 37983 is formed so as to project toward the intermediate plate 37983b (upper side of FIG. 180 (a)) as it advances toward the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 180 (a)), and is formed so as to project from the upper surface of the acting portion 37983a. And both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b form a uniform curved surface 37983h.

Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 37983 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 180 (a)).

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 37980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 37980 has a velocity component toward the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 180 (b), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 37983 having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the game balls come into contact with each other, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the game ball maintains the velocity component to the rear side or the velocity component is increased to the opening U6. The ball is thrown. That is, among the forces acting on the distribution member 37983 when the game balls come into contact with each other, the force component that displaces (rotates) the distribution member 37983 can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the member 37983 comes into contact with the member 37983, the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied. Therefore, the acting portion 37983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 180 (b)) of the distribution member 37983 may abut on the back surface side abutting portion 37982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 37983a (distribution member 37983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, among the forces acting on the distribution member 37983 when the game ball comes into contact with the game ball. Since the force component that displaces (rotates) the distribution member 37983 can be reduced, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 37983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down, so that the acting portion 37983a (distribution member) It is possible to prevent the 37983) from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the first position, a game ball and a distribution member having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the game ball comes into contact with the 37983, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the speed component to the rear side of the game ball is on the front side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). It is converted into a velocity component to and thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 37983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 37983 to the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ), Even if the length of the throwing passage is different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled and to secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 37983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the 37th embodiment, the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the acting portions 38983a3 and 38983a4 is formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 181 (a), the distribution member 38983 is in the first position. In FIG. 181 (b), the state in which the distribution member 38983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 38983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 181 (a) left-right direction). The axis of is arranged.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 38980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 38980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the bias direction of the distribution member 24983 with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64 and the velocity component toward the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

Further, the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed toward the tip from the shaft member 988a side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) which is a connecting portion with the contact portion 19983d. , Is formed to a thickness smaller than the tip of the working portion 19983a in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the angle θ8 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed larger than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side (see FIG. 161).

Further, the acting portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed toward the tip from the shaft member 988a side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) which is a connecting portion with the contact portion 19983d. It is formed to a certain thickness dimension.

Therefore, the angle θ9 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed to be smaller than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (see FIG. 161).

Therefore, the tip of the working portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the working portion 19983a (see FIG. 161).

As a result, the distribution member 38983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and is arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) with the acting portion 38983a3 and the opening U6 side (FIG. 181 (a)). The center of gravity of the distribution member 38983 in the direction connecting the working portion 38983a4 arranged on the right side) (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is on the opening U6 side of the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 181 (a)). Located on the right side).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 38983 in the front side direction (FIG. 181 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 38983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 38983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 181 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 38983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 38983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), in a state where the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)). When the member 38983 comes into contact with the member 38983, the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied. Therefore, the acting portion 38983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (b)) of the distribution member 38983 may abut on the back surface side contact portion 38982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 38983a4 (distribution member 38983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball has an angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the acting portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (a)). θ9 is formed to be smaller than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (see FIG. 161), that is, Since the tip of the acting portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the acting portion 19983a (see FIG. 161), it is possible to prevent the acting portion 38983a4 (distribution member 38983) from being damaged.

Here, since the tip of the acting portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the acting portion 19983a (see FIG. 161), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 38983 from the first position to the second position is slow. Become.

Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)) collides with the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the game ball bounces off ( In the separated state, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated), and the distribution member 38983 is rebounded in the state of being arranged at the second position. If the (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 38983, the game ball may be thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, the angle θ8 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 in the present embodiment and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the 18th embodiment. Since the angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side in the embodiment (see FIG. 161), the distribution member 38983 is a game. It is possible to impart more velocity component toward the opening U7 to the sphere than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

That is, the distribution member 38983 can impart a large amount of velocity components in the same direction as the rotation direction of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 to the game ball. In other words, the distribution member 38983 can reduce the addition of the velocity component to the game ball in the direction deviating from the rotation region of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 38983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 38983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 38983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 38983 comes into contact with the distribution member 38983, and the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in the game ball, since the velocity component toward the opening U7 is given more than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. In this case, the distribution member 38983 can throw the game ball to the opening U7 in a shorter time than the throwing time to the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 38980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 38983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 38983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even when the lengths of the balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 38980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced (see FIG. 161). ), It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled and to secure the degree of freedom in design.

Next, the winning opening unit 39930 in the 38th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. In the 38th embodiment, the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c of the bulging portion 39982 formed on the first side surface base 39981 of the distribution unit 39980 is on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). It is formed so as to project to. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 39930 according to the 38th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 182 (a), the distribution member 39983 is in the first position. In FIG. 182 (b), the state in which the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 39930 in the 38th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 39983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left-right direction). The axis of is arranged.

Further, the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) and the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the distribution member 39983 are formed asymmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. , The acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side is formed longer than the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side.

Therefore, when the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 39983 is arranged on the rear side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left-right direction). Also, the acting portion 39983a3 of the distribution member 39983 arranged at the first position is arranged in the passing region of the game ball, and the game ball and the acting portion 39983a3 of the distribution member 39983 can come into contact with each other. As a result, the distribution member 39983 can be displaced from the first position to the second position.

Further, the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c is formed to be curved so as to project toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 is the first. It is formed with an overhanging portion 39982c3 that projects into the opening U10 from the first curved wall 19982c1 in the 18th embodiment (see FIG. 161).

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 39980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 39980 has a velocity component toward the rear side.

Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 39980 with the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) slides or rolls on the first curved wall 39982c1 and hits the overhanging portion 39982c3. By contacting the ball, the ball is thrown to the distribution member 39983 with a velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). Further, when gravity acts on the game ball, the ball is sent to the distribution member 39983 with a velocity component on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

That is, the game ball has a velocity component in the same direction as the rotational displacement of the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the distribution member 39983 whose rotation axis is the axis of the shaft member 988a. The ball is thrown to the component member 39983.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the first position, a game ball having a velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) is a distribution member. When the distribution member 39983 abuts on 39983 and is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, it is compared with the case where the game ball has a velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 39983 can be increased.

Further, since the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the sorting member 39983 is formed longer than the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)), the sorting member 39983 The center of gravity of the above is located on the acting portion 39983a3 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

Therefore, when the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) against its own weight, so that the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) by using its own weight, so that the displacement (rotation) can be increased. it can.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 39983 having a velocity component (left side in FIG. 182 (b)) toward the player side. When the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position due to contact with each other, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983 are different. Since it is formed in the opposite direction, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 39983 can be slowed down.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 39980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 39980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be secured.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 39983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 39983 (distribution member). The angle formed by the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of 39983 and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 39983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 39983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in the state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the first position, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983. Is formed in substantially the same direction, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from separating (rebounding) from the distribution member 39983 due to the collision between the game ball and the distribution member 39983.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 39983, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 39983 comes into contact with the distribution member 39983, and the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

In the distribution member 39983 of the present embodiment, the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) and the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) are asymmetric with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the acting portions 39983a3 and 39983a4 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

In this case, the configuration of the distribution member 39983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the winning opening unit 40930 in the 39th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection device SE6 is arranged between the passage TR10 and the passage TR9 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 39th embodiment, the detection device SE6 is arranged in the passage TR3. Will be set up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 183 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 40930 according to the 39th embodiment, in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position corresponding to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). Illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 40930 in the 39th embodiment, since the detection device SE6 is arranged in the passage TR3, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 The difference from the time until detection can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be secured.

Further, since the front base 40943 of the front unit 40940 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, which enhances the interest of the game. it can.

Here, in the winning port unit 19930 according to the 18th embodiment, since the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player of the detection device SE6, the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 is on the front side. (It is arranged on the left side of FIG. 183 (b)), and then needs to be folded back toward the rear side (left side of FIG. 183 (b)), and the wiring (not shown) of the detection device SE6 becomes long.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), so that the assembly of the winning opening unit 40930 is simplified. , Product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), that is, can be arranged at a position far from the player, the detection device SE6 is illegally arranged. It is possible to suppress the operation.

Next, the winning opening unit 41930 in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player in the passage TR10 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 40th embodiment, the solenoid 610 is on one side of the passage TR10 in the direction of gravity. It is arranged (lower side in the direction of gravity). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 184 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 41930 according to the 40th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). FIG. 185 (a) is a side view of the winning opening unit 41930, and FIG. 185 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 41930. In FIG. 185, only the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit 19940, the solenoid 610 arranged in the passage unit 41990, the transmission member 41965, and the displacement member 41966 are shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the solenoid 610, the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is along the direction of gravity (vertical direction of FIG. 184) on one side of the passage TR10 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Arranged. Therefore, the displacement direction of the protrusion 945b accompanying the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 and the displacement direction of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be made to coincide with each other.

Here, the displacement member 19966 in the eighteenth embodiment needs to be rotationally displaced (see FIG. 160) with the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as the rotation axis in order to open and close the wing member 945. That is, it is necessary to convert the displacement of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 in the linear direction into the displacement in the rotational direction.

On the other hand, the displacement member 41966 in the present embodiment can open and close the wing member 945 by displacing the displacement member 41966 in the linear direction in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 184). That is, since the displacement in the linear direction of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be matched and the displacement directions of the annular portion 961c and the displacement member 41966 can be matched, the configuration of the displacement member 41966 is simplified and the product cost is reduced. it can.

Further, the dimensions of the winning opening unit 41930 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 184) can be reduced, and the winning opening unit 41930 can be miniaturized.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation portion 175 and the upper regulation portion 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotation axis direction (the driven member 163 is displaced). It may be configured to be arranged to face the driven member 163 in the direction intersecting the plane to be driven). In this case, a frictional force is generated with the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 can be decelerated by the frictional force.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulation unit 175 or the upper regulation unit 176 is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is displaced at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated. It may be arranged so as to face the driven member 163 in the direction and retract out of the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other timings. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven member 163 may be arranged at an overlapping position in the displacement direction view, or the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis side of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating portion 175. Is also good.

Further, not only when the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged on the left and right sides of the rotation shaft of the driven member 163, one of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 is on the left side and the other. May be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 exerts an electromagnetic force in the direction of pulling up the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force that pushes it up. Further, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting means 181 is composed of LEDs has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a miniature bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-damping resin member may be filled in the region between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the arrangement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination substrate 180.

On the contrary, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 may be closed, and the filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect of oscillating the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 in accordance with the vibration of the illuminated substrate 180. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a punching metal may have a plurality of through holes.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is formed in the shape of a thin plate has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in the front view, it is possible to prevent the plate portion of the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized while exposing the light emitting means 181 in the front view. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or may be transmitted by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in the vertical direction with respect to the horizontal direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elongated hole portion 406 is an elongated hole long in the horizontal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends at an angle with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of pinnate members 460 abut against each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide a slight gap from the design stage. As a result, the fatigue accumulated due to the contact with the pinnate member 460 can be eliminated as compared with the case where the pinnate member 460 comes into contact with each other, so that the durability of the pinnate member 460 can be improved. It should be noted that, through this gap, the pattern formed on the back side of the gap and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adjusting the gear ratio so that the size of the arcuate gear 462 of the pinnate member 460 is different on the left and right, the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate member 460 may be different. As a result, the contact surface S1 can be displaced from the left-right center position even when the shape of the side where the pair of pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other is symmetrical.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate member 460 at the time of contact is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, most of the parts may be symmetrical, but may be partially different. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, the pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the pinnate member 460 has a symmetrical shape, the player can be made to think that the pinnate member 460 has a symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 that are in contact with each other are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of pinnate members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction and come into contact with each other. In this case, the left pinnate member 460 can be formed in a larger area than the right pinnate member 460 in comparison with the shape of the back case 310.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pinnate member 460 and an invariant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape in a front view. As a result, the player can visually recognize the shape completed only by the pinnate member 460 and the shape completed by the other predetermined member and the pinnate member 460, thereby improving the effect of the pinnate member 460. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 reminds us of the concept of "shellfish and pearls" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into the wall, and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be formed in a shape representing the momentum of a bullet. In this case, the shape of the pinnate member 460 can be diverted, and it can be realized by forming the light emitting effect member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 with separate members having different decorations or shapes. That is, since it is possible to newly configure another operation unit by diverting a part of the members, the development cost can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slidably displaced in the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable in an arc trajectory centered on this shaft.

Further, when the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, the elevating plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing an urging means or an electromagnetic solenoid that urges the relative displacement member 442 to the arc-shaped gear portion 444b side in the left-right direction, the tooth engagement between the arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

The arcuate gear portion 444b may not be made of a highly rigid resin material, but may be made of a flexible resin material used for a gear belt or the like. In this case, the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction can be absorbed by the deformation of the material.

In the first embodiment, the case where the window portion defined in the central portion of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape inside the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the pinnate member 460. As a result, the game board 13 can be provided with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illumination substrate 777 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmission hole 60c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination substrate 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, since the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow bottom component 91 can be brought close to each other, the outer portion 94 is formed to be thin so that the outer portion 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform a stirling (wavy) effect.

In other words, the portion displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 to be visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window portion defined in the center frame 86 but also outside the window portion. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the recessed portion of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the lower left and right sides of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of the game ball, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed of a resin material having less bending (high-rigidity resin material) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubber resin material. In this case, the partition member 708 can be brought into close contact with the illuminated substrate 705 and the thin film cover member 712 by the elastic deformation of the partition member 708, and light leakage can be prevented.

In the first embodiment, the position where the left and right load members 761 come into contact with the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance between the reference O1 are the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position where the load member 761 abuts on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance from the reference O1 may be different on the left and right, or the arrangement of the load member 761 on the reference O1 may be different on the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the load member 761 may be displaced to the front side so that the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 come into contact with each other. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced to the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the arrangement of the load member 761 can be returned to the back side by the load applied from the front lid member 770.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the flexibility of the load member 761 is changed by a method such as changing the density (locally), changing the thickness, or changing the material of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. As a result, when the left and right drive units 760 are in the one-sided excitation state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven. That is, it is possible to increase the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped.

Even if the left and right drive units 760 are left and right substantially symmetrical, the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is asymmetrical (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side). The same effect can be achieved by providing an extra wall thickness on the lower bottom side).

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be vertically displaced while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. As a result, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state in which the load member 761 is easily bent (posture) and a state in which the load member 761 is hard to bend (posture).

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d can be assembled to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c in an assembling manner such as fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, and sandwiching, so that the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be assembled. And may be composed separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c can be diverted and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced. In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are displaced in the rotation axis direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be orthogonal to the rotation axis. The change in the distance between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be used not for the change in the posture of the hollow member 740 but for the change in the holding force of the hollow member 740.

That is, the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed by increasing the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It can be used to sandwich from. Therefore, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, the clearance of the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be configured to be the same as the clearance of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear projecting columnar portions 743 also increases, the posture of the hollow member 740 is higher than that in the case where the side having a large clearance is allowed to rotate around the side having a small clearance. It is possible to easily suppress the change.

In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portion 735 supporting the pair of projecting columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 is arranged on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 separately before and after the reference O1 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to slide and displace in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove in a direction inclined with respect to the slide direction. In this case, by providing the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b on the opposite sides to the slide direction, the projecting columnar portion 743 and the protruding columnar portion 743 are provided with the slide displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is axially supported and displaced by the left-right direction axis has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a mode in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can rotate in the front-rear direction axis (for example, a support mode with a ball joint).

Further, the plate main body (long plate formed in the left-right direction) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported as a separate body on the upper side of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, depending on the drive mode of the drive unit 760, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation of the left-right axis and rotation of the front-rear axis.

Further, the shaft support portion may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is long in the vertical direction so as to allow the vertical displacement of the shaft-mounted support portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, not only the rotational operation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but also the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (centered on the axis in the front-rear direction) caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right shafted support portions 731 with respect to the other. (Corresponding to the rotational displacement) can also be generated, so that the displacement modes of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 due to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the core material extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes with the displacement of the load member 761. (It may be configured so that the core material comes off). In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes depending on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent along with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, the case where one of the portions for decelerating the driven member 163 is displaceable has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both parts for decelerating the driven member 163 may be displaceable. In this case, both of the decelerating portions (lower regulation portion 175 and upper regulation portion 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, the case where the urging spring SP21 does not directly hit the driven member 163 but applies an urging force via the contact member 2190 between them has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the urging spring SP21 may be configured to come into direct contact with the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the urging spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a plurality of contact points (s) between the urging spring SP21 and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points may be located on the rotation shaft side and the rotation tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment, the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 is extended in the displacement direction of the elevating plate 430 to form a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the elevating plate 430. The case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the section is cut off has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a section in which a sliding portion (an angle region where the gear teeth are not meshed) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441 so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. May be configured to block the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary gear 3441 with an arm is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed all around, but a partially overhanging portion is formed so that it can function as a cam, and the overhanging portion gives a load to the relative displacement member 442. This may be configured to displace the relative displacement member 442. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhanging portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured for detecting the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g which is a part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick overhanging portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjusting member 5782 projects upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjusting member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed inside the wall of the load member 761 and the adjusting member 5782 may enter the opening to function as a core. In this case, the flexibility of the load member 761 can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjusting member 5782.

In the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the case where the load member 761 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the load member 761 may be composed of a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to the instantaneous driving mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in the rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in a deformed shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved shape, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to cause the inner wall and the protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966 to form an inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945. The gap with the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 facing each other is formed so as to project in an annular shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction).

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited to this. A sticker displaying information consisting of characters or figures may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930). ), Even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized, the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member to increase the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The illegal object (thread) can be cut by using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. , The case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, a driving means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacement means to the predetermined direction side, and the displacement means. It is provided with a resistance means configured to be capable of generating resistance to the displacement in a predetermined direction, and the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Game machine A1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured to displace the displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the place where the load from the displacement member is received is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid receives an excessive load, so that the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail at an early stage. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the durability of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the resistance means is configured to generate resistance to the displacement of the displacement means to the predetermined direction side (drive means side), and to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from receiving an excessive load. Thereby, the durability of the game machine can be improved.

The mode for reducing the load applied to the driving means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be distributed by increasing the number of places where the load is received to suppress the load, or the load may be transmitted by providing a gap between the displacement means and the drive means by the resistance means. May be cut off, or the surface on which the resistance means acts on the displacement means may be enlarged to reduce the load per unit area.

The game machine A2 is characterized in that the game machine A1 includes a support means for supporting the displacement means, and the drive means is arranged on the support means side as compared with the resistance means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the load given to the resistance means is applied by suppressing the arm length (arm length of the moment of force) between the support means and the drive means to be short. It is possible to avoid becoming excessive.

In the game machine A2, the support means rotatably supports the displacement means on a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. ..

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from reversing in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left-right direction). Since it is possible to limit the side where the portion covering the rotation axis is rubbed to one side (avoid slight displacement to the left and right), it is possible to limit the portion that needs to be formed to be thick.

The game machine A3 includes a first resistance means for generating a load for displacement in the predetermined direction side and a second resistance means for generating a load for displacement in the opposite direction side on the predetermined direction side, and the first resistance means. And the second resistance means are provided with displacement portions arranged at different positions in the predetermined direction view, and the first resistance means is arranged away from the predetermined axis as compared with the second resistance means. A game machine A4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the load given to the displacement means from the first resistance means can be reduced. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by increasing the arm length of the moment of force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

Further, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated by separating the place where the load is generated between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the place where the load is generated between the second resistance means and the displacement means. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the displacement means includes a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means and an accessory portion extending in the outer diameter direction of the transmission portion, and the first resistor is provided. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the means is arranged so as to be in contact with the accessory portion.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, even if the accessory part is damaged, the driving force can be transmitted to the displacement means, so that the driving control can be performed during the period until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

The mode of the transmission unit is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be configured at a position close to the driving means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction of the side where the driving means is arranged with reference to the shaft member arranged along the predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, with reference to the shaft member, the mode on the side opposite to the axial direction on which the drive means is arranged is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the driving means and the transmission unit may be configured at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmitting portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

A6 of the game machines A1 to A5, wherein the displacement means is provided with a load applying means for applying a load in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

In the game machine A6, the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, it is possible to avoid an imbalance in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

In the game machine A8, the displacement means is configured to be able to receive an external force, and the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
The basic means, the intermediate means displaceably supported by the basic means, the tip-side means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and the intermediate means supported by the intermediate means with respect to the basic means. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement-constituting means configured to displace the tip-side means with respect to the intermediate means, the basic means can be displaced in a non-corresponding manner to the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A game machine B1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which a pinion is arranged so as to sandwich the pinion between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, since the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, the displacement speed of the other rack with respect to one rack can be increased, and a high-speed displacement effect body can be constructed. It is possible.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effect body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the basic means is configured to be displaceable, the basic means can be displaced by the tip side means or the intermediate means by displace the basic means according to the displacement of the tip side means or the intermediate means. Can be hidden. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the tip-side means can be improved.

In the game machine B1, the basic means is a game machine B2 characterized in that it is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both members (basic means and tip side means) sandwiching the pinion are racks that slide and displace in parallel, when the pinions and racks are arranged on the same plane, the racks are arranged in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed at a position that overlaps the rack in the displacement direction view, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that it was.

In addition, since it is necessary to arrange the support portions at a plurality of points in order to maintain the posture of the rack and optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk of complicating the member structure and increasing the assembly man-hours. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the overhanging portion on the basic means side and the recessed portion on the tip side means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the basic means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the basic means and the displacement constituent means can be arranged at overlapping positions in the slide displacement direction view of the intermediate means, which saves space. In addition to being able to achieve this, it is sufficient to have a configuration for supporting the basic means, so that the structure can be simplified.

Further, since the overhang on the foundation means side can be arranged on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In the game machine B2, a part of the basic means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the basic means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating the other part as a fulcrum. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, since a part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are both supported by the intermediate means, there is a gap between the part of the basic means and the displacement forming means. Load transmission can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in the direction intersecting the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of a part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the entire foundation means can be increased (up and down). It can be suppressed (both left and right).

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the end position on one side (overhang side) of the displacement range, the basic means is from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine B4 characterized by receiving a load for maintaining a posture.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the load required for the slide displacement is reduced as compared with the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. Can be done. Further, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the posture of the basic means is maintained in the state where the tip side means is arranged at the one-side terminal position.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the other side (retract side) end position of the displacement range, in the basic means, the load given by the intermediate means is applied to the basic means. A game machine B5 characterized in that it takes a posture facing a displaceable direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the start of the basic means, the intermediate means and the displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the other side (retract side) end position of the displacement range, the basic means overhangs the retract position side from the intermediate means. A game machine B6 characterized by having a protrusion.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B5, the intermediate means is provided by adopting a configuration in which the overhanging portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the end position on the other side (evacuation side) which is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to configure the basic means to be blindfolded by an intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while keeping the vertical dimension of the above to less than the dimension of the basic means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the basic means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means is electrically guided to the basic means. A game machine B7 characterized by being connected to.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the displacement of a part of the basic means is suppressed to easily secure the passage path of the electric wiring and the electric wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the wiring.

In the game machine B7, the tip-side means is configured to be slidable, and the electrical wiring is arranged outside the tip-side means.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the load applied to the electric wiring is reduced as compared with the case where the electric wiring is connected to the tip side means which is displaced by the slide displacement which easily puts a load on the electric wiring. It can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the tip-side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. For example, the drive means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the basic means and the drive means for driving the tip side means with reference to the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, the displacement forming means is characterized in that the tip side means is configured to be displaceable with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Amusement machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the tip-side means can be stably displaced at a high speed (higher-speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are asymmetrically configured>
A plurality of displacement means configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position arranged apart from the first relative position are provided, and the plurality of displacement means are the first relative position. Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visually recognized in a series of predetermined shapes, and the plurality of displacement means include a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means. A game machine C1 characterized by being provided.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of moving parts having substantially the same shape are arranged close to each other to form a series of shapes (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily construct a large production body by combining small moving parts, the structure of the moving parts themselves is almost the same, so that the difficulty of the assembly work can be reduced. it can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the shapes of the moving parts are configured to be substantially the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each moving part is common to each moving part, which is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in design so that the space could be used.

For example, when the moving unit is displaced on the right side of the display device exemplified by the liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from the player. Despite this, the space required for displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the amount that can be displaced on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem that it would be limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means visually recognized in a series of shapes are composed of different sizes, the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means. Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so that the limited space can be used satisfactorily and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are characterized in that their outer shapes are set according to the displaceable region at the second relative position.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are visually recognized at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the displaceable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

Further, it is possible to improve the decorativeness when the decoration of the region at the second relative position is substituted by the first displacement means and the second displacement means, as in the case where the game board is formed of the light transmissive resin.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a guide means arranged on the back side of the plurality of displacement means and guiding the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is provided, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is viewed in a predetermined direction. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from being visually recognized from the gaps between the plurality of displacement means. As a result, the gap can be effectively utilized, for example, the decorative portion other than the guide means can be visually recognized from the gap.

In the game machine C3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the plurality of displacement means is viewed in the predetermined direction from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is arranged at a displaced position.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the part (reference) that the player predicts that the guide means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged in consideration of the load balance and the like. By hiding (corresponding to a line) with a plurality of displacement means so that it is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the design.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the driving means for generating the driving force is provided, the first displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means is said. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path from a predetermined position.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the member is configured to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, so that the member becomes smaller locally in the driving force transmission path. It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

In the game machine C5, the driving means and the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left portion of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged in the upper left portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the one displacement means is larger than the second displacement means arranged at a position different from the upper left portion.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the drive means and the drive means arranged in the upper left part where it is easy to secure a large area as the internal area of the rear case as compared with the upper right part due to the configuration arrangement of the payout device. Since the transmission means can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged in the upper left portion, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive means and the transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to configure another cover for hiding the driving means and the transmitting means.

In the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means is in a posture in which gravity acts in the tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to be close to the second displacement means by the tilt displacement. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows contact, but the clearance for enabling the displacement ( When a gap is created without contact due to misalignment that fits in the play of the gear teeth that mesh with each other, the gap between the guide rail and the guided portion, etc., it is easy to fill the gap by the tilt displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being maintained in a state where a gap is formed, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and a series of series. It is possible to improve the design when forming the shape.

In any of the game machines C5 to C7, the game machine C8 is characterized in that an electric wiring passes through the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are excessive by passing the electric wiring to the second displacement means side where the over-displacement is unlikely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load generated on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the predetermined shape is formed of a symmetrical shape, and the split surface constituent portion forming the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is in the center of the game area. A game machine C9 characterized in that it is arranged on the side far from the position.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the asymmetrically shaped split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult for the player to see), whereby the first displacement means. And it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance of the second displacement means.

It should be noted that the appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape of the center position side (the side close to the field of view, the side that is easy for the player to see) on the opposite side of the game area to be a symmetrical shape.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged so that the side where the size of the displaceable region is limited at the second relative position faces each other at the first relative position. Machine C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means composed of asymmetrical shapes in a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, the plurality of displacement means have a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is composed of a downward displacement, and the first displacement thereof. The gaming machine C11 is composed of different second displacements, and is configured so that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the player's interest can be improved by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means.

Further, in relation to the shape of the dispensing device, when the upper inner surface of the rear case is displaced vertically on the left and right, a plurality of displacement means are not affected by the vertical displacement of the rear case (corresponding to a predetermined section). By starting the second displacement after only lowering, it is possible to form a region where the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is allowed evenly without being affected by the vertical displacement of the upper inner surface of the rear case. Even when the displacement modes of the displacement means are the same, it is possible to easily prevent a plurality of displacement means from colliding with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement depending on the arrangement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means are provided, and the first displacement means supports one of the second displacement means. The first support portion and the second support portion that supports the other second displacement means are provided, and the first support portion is supported by the first support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2 Displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means generated in the displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the displacement mode with respect to the above.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced as the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) are displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 231434 (see Gazette No. 231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of effect.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, whether the second displacement means, which is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced, is supported by the first support portion or the second support portion. Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be made different, the displacement mode between the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the gap between the first second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first one. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured such that the first support portion side has a larger displacement amount than the second support portion side.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the displacement of the first displacement means can be configured so that the gap of the first support portion is eliminated, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a load applying means configured to give a load to the first displacement means, and the first displacement means supports one side portion in a predetermined direction and can displace one side portion thereof. The amount and the displaceable amount of the other side portion are configured to be different, the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means, and the second displacement means is the said. The gaming machine D3 comprising one side second displacement means arranged on one side and the other side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where the load applying means applies the load to the first displacement means. It can be different depending on whether it is placed on the other side or on the other side.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the load applying means are arranged at a plurality of positions and each of the first displacement means is independently displaced. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, it is possible to eliminate the need for an auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface is provided, and the load applying means is at least attached to the light emitting substrate. A game machine D5 characterized in that a part of the game is shielded in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting substrate. That is, it is possible to prevent the load applying means from being visually recognized by the player by using the light emitting substrate which is necessary for the convenience of the light emitting effect. In this case, by irradiating the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate with strong light, the visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. However, it can be made difficult for the player to see.

When the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a driving device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since the electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to separately create a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

In the game machine D5, the light emitting board is arranged on the back surface side of the game board, and the game board includes a recessed portion in which the facing side is recessed at a position facing the light emitting board. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, an area for arranging the light emitting substrate can be secured between the game machine and the game board, and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the game board. It can be prevented from being done.

In the game machine D6, the recessed portion is arranged outward with respect to the outer shape in the front view of the game area.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, even if the film member formed in front of the recessed portion is displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement from affecting the game area. Can be done.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, and the guiding means is arranged on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine D8.

According to the game machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guide means, and the guide means is arranged closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced, the rubbing between the first displacement means and the guide means can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, a support plate that supports the guide means, a thin film member whose predetermined region is fixed to the support plate, and a light emitting substrate that is arranged on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and has a light emitting portion. The game machine D9 is characterized in that the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without a gap.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, by partitioning the guide means and the light emitting substrate with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent the rubbing powder of the guide means from entering the light emitting substrate side. it can.

In the game machine D9, the thin film member is configured to have dimensions that can avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, it is not necessary to secure the rigidity of the thin film member. Therefore, by forming the thin film member as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member. Can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. The point for communication ＞
The displacement means configured to be displaceable, the drive means for generating the driving force for displace the displacement means, and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means are provided, and the transmission means is driven. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the state can be changed so as to change the mode of transmitting force.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of the displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to displace the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed so as to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb a slight excess displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the deformed groove is configured to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means, the wall thickness and the dimensional length corresponding to the deformed groove are required extra. The restrictions on the shape of the displacement means are increased. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means by changing the state of the transmission means. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to add an extra configuration to the displacement means, so that the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

The change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rigidity of the transmission means may be changed, the direction of the load applied to the transmission means may be adjusted to change the transmission efficiency of the driving force, or the change may occur by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. ..

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source to change the state of the transmission means.

The mode of changing the state of the transmitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Further, examples of the deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, bending and twisting, and deformation in which boundaries such as bending and misalignment occur. Further, examples of the mode of changing the rigidity (strength) include a mode in which the wall thickness of the transmission means is changed, a mode in which the core inserted in the transmission means is removed, and the like.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means is configured to have a shape in which the flexibility is different in the direction, and the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position due to the displacement. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the angle formed by the bending direction changes.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the change in the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means during the displacement of the displacement means can be used to change the shape of the transmission means. With the reference position as a boundary, the range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and the range in which the transmitting means is mainly flexed and deformed by the driving force can be divided.

In the game machine E3, the displacement means is driven to stop in a predetermined intermediate posture, and the transmission means receives a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is in the intermediate posture. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the direction of the game is configured to be along a direction in which the surface is easily bent.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture by the bending of the transmission means, so that the amount of the driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly determined. Even if it is set, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture.

In the game machine E4, the driving force applies a driving force so that the pushing portion for pushing the displacement means of the transmitting means passes through the contact position in the intermediate posture of the displacement means in the state before bending. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the driving energy can be inherently contained even after the displacement means is in the intermediate posture, and the displacement means can be vibrated by using this.

That is, since the transmitting means is in a posture in which it is easy to bend, it is possible to generate vibration utilizing the bending in the transmitting means without generating the driving force of the driving means in a mode for generating vibration. As a result, vibration can be generated by a simple mechanism.

The game machine E6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E5 includes a range setting means configured to be able to set a range in which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E5, the range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set by the range setting means. It can be adjusted depending on the situation.

In the game machine E6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with reference to a predetermined position. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the driving means, so that the driving force is transmitted on the upstream side of the transmission path. It is possible to suppress a decrease in efficiency.

Further, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of the state change that occurs in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced. Therefore, even if the driving means cannot be controlled precisely, the displacement of the displacement means (for example, the displacement of the stop position) can be suppressed to be small.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatable and an electric supply means configured to be able to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means arranged along a line connecting a rotation shaft and an outside diameter. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes a portion to be arranged to be arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which electrical wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member that is rotatably supported, and the electrical wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electric wiring is only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and the electric wiring may expand and contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, which is given to the electric wiring. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arranged portion of the electric supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotary shaft portion of the rotational displacement means, so that the rotational displacement means occurs when the rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs. It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the arranged portion that occurs with respect to the electric wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

The game machine F1 includes displaceable displacement means that are displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means, and suppression means that suppresses displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction close to the displacement displacement means. A game machine F2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine F2, the disposition displacement means is configured so as to easily separate from the electricity supply means when an unplanned displacement occurs.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine F3, the disposition displacement means has a first displacement displacement means that displaces close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position that displaces and stops close to the electricity supply means of the first disposition displacement means. It is provided with a second arrangement displacement means set at a position farther from the electricity supply means than the stop position, and the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means to the electricity supply means. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is configured to come into contact with each other by being displaced close to each other and to apply a load in a direction away from each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, it is possible to avoid giving a load to the electricity supply means even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced too much. can do.

The game machine F4 is characterized in that the first arrangement displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first disposing means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

The mode that constitutes the magnitude of inertia is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first arrangement displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second arrangement displacement means, or the mode of the support portion may be different. The magnitude of the inertia may be configured by causing the magnitude of the displacement resistance.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a support means for supporting the rotational displacement means is provided, and the supporting means includes an opening portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means. The game machine F6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the open portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed as compared with the case where the electric supply means is passed through the inside of the predetermined rotation shaft. be able to.

The game machines F1 to F6 include displaceable displacement means arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means and a drive means for generating a driving force for driving the displacement displacement means. The gaming machine F7, characterized in that it is arranged on the side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F6, the arrangement efficiency can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F7, the game machine F8 is characterized in that the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, by providing the means for guiding the electrical wiring with a driving force transmission function, it is possible to combine the members. The number can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a vehicle and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. A rotating member that is rotated by a rotating member and a slide member that is slid and displaced as the rotating member rotates, and a projecting portion is projected from one of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion is projected. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that a sliding groove through which the installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed on the upper and lower sides, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is the same as the above), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. A protrusion portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protrusion portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not incline with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be the same as the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. .. As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted protruding portion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the feather member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A game machine G3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove and improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slid displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member in the stopped state by starting the driving.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

The game machine G4 is characterized in that when the slide member starts a slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened.

In the game machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

According to the game machine G6, in either the game machine G4 or G5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion comes into contact has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity, even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the direction of gravity of the axis of rotation of the wing member. , The projecting portion can be guided along the inclined direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member in the upward direction of the gravity direction can be smoothly started.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the game machines G1 to G6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding portion being accepted by the receiving portion.

In any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the slide displacement direction are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine G9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contacted portion on the other side, the other side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation occurs. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines G1 to G8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair. A protrusion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion that projects from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is provided. The slide member is disengaged from the slide member, and the slide member is slid and displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. Then, the gaming machine G10 characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contacted portion on the other side, the other side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the game machines G1 to G10, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine G11, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G10, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protruding portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine G12 is characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine G12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the ball, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the game machines G1 to G11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine G13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, the wing member crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of the wing members cross each other. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine G12 or G13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine G14 characterized by.

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effect of the game machine G12 or G13, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the slide member is said to be the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine G15.

According to the game machine G15, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. It is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidly displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

In the game machine G15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine G16, in addition to the effect of the game machine G15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. It is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is easier to achieve the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. In a gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means of the second opening / closing member. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the vehicle, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first input). It can be secured on the back of the ball mouth), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

The game machine H1 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first drive means and the second drive means.

According to the game machine H2 or H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. Since it is made larger than the total front projected area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the game machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, the drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A game machine H5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the game machine H5, in any of the game machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. A drive unit that drives the drive unit and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the game machine H5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are provided. The gaming machine H7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a sliding member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a slide member that slides and displaces as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the first passage member toward the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member. Therefore, the first entry port should be brought closer to the second entry port by that amount. Can be done.

In the game machine H7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. The gaming machine H8 is provided with a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by being bent in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and driven first. A second portion driven by the means is provided, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis, so that the first driving means can be used while securing the slide amount of the slide member. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide member can be slid and the slide member can be slid with the first driving means. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the game machine H8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion, which is opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the game machines H1 to H9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. The gaming machine H10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H9, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is arranged between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first driving means from the second entry port, a part of the detection sensor makes the first Since the driving means can be hidden, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such cheating.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention in which the first opening / closing member is arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and an illegality is applied to the first driving means from the second entry port. By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the location where the fraud is applied becomes invisible. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

The game machine H10 includes a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member, and the detection sensors are arranged in pairs and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect of the game machine H10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improperly apply the first drive means from the second entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult to perform.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used to fasten and fix the two members, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the game machine H11, the game machine H12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine H12, in addition to the effect of the game machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. When fraudulently applies to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively vulnerable to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

In the game machine H12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine H13, in addition to the effect of the game machine H12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to commit fraud to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the game machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. Game machine H14 to play.

According to the game machine H14, in addition to the effect of the game machine H12 or H13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the game machines H12 to H14, the game machine H15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the game machine H15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to commit fraud to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and having the above-mentioned In a game machine including a second member arranged on the back side of the game board, a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. A game machine I1 comprising a third member having and.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. There is known a game machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the third member includes a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine I1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine I2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the game board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space. Since the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, it is not necessary to separately provide the opening for arranging the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the third member engages the first engaging portion with the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion with the second passage of the second member. A game machine I3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine I3, in the game machine I1 or I2, the first engaging portion is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (the first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effective as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the game machine I3, the game machine I4 is characterized in that a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are dimensioned. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A game machine I5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the game board. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of the game machine I5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, it is not necessary to separately perform the work of engaging the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engaged with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A game machine I7 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the mounting operation. 2 The engaging portion can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member that is fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member. A game machine I8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed on the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from being forgotten to be attached when the first member and the second member are attached to the game board.

In any of the game machines I1 to I8, the first member is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port and the entry port communicating with the first passage. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the ball entrance, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the members, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine I9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member displaced by the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage as compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine I9, the slide member includes a projecting portion in which the pair of feather members project toward the slide member, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine I10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the side opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of the game machine I9, a pair of wing members are provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the sliding portion. Since the slide member has a moving groove and the third member has an lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member, the sliding member slides due to the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entry port, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the ball entry port is rolled, and its rolling A game machine J1 comprising a passage member into which a game ball that has rolled on a surface flows in, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the entry port are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entrance is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened by that amount, and the passage member can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J1 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J1 or J2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is provided at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. The gaming machine J3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball which is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arranged between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the ball entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member to prevent it from staying at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

The game machine J4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines J1 to J3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. ..

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to receive the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the game machine J4, the game machine J5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J4 or J5, the game machine J5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4 or J5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In any of the game machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is opposite to the first region where the first guiding means is arranged with the passage member sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine J7, wherein the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is arranged. Since the second region on the opposite side of the first region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region. Can be swiftly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward inclination of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J8 is characterized in that the game machine J7 includes a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of the game machine J7, a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, so that the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J7 or J8, a game that is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and rolls the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine J9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effect of the game machine J7 or J8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is set in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means is provided so that the game ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J9, the game machine J10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the game machine J9 in a state where the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine J10, in addition to the effect of the game machine J9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball. , The game ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. The gaming machine J11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side surface portion on the opposite side of the first guiding means.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effect of the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is separated from the entrance as the side edge portion opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. As it is tilted in the direction, its upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball quickly flows into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance. Can be made to.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member in the second region, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding the ball to the entrance side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the jumping out from the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J11, the second guide means has a side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The size of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is made larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine J12.

According to the game machine J12, in addition to the effect of the game machine J11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be surely decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the game machine J11 or J12, the game machine J13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the game machine J13, in addition to the effect of the game machine J11 or J12, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means, so that the upper surface of the second guide means is included. The game ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines J8 to J13, the game machine J14 is characterized in that the second guide means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction.

According to the game machine J14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J8 to J13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction, so that the first guide means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. , It is possible to decelerate and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The game machine J14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The gaming machine J15 is characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine J15, in addition to the effect of the game machine J14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated, can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines J1 to J15, a guide groove is provided which is recessed in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove which is downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine J16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine J16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. It is possible to easily change the rolling direction of the game ball toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and being arranged via an opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit are provided. A game machine K1 characterized by.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since it is provided with one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage as well as being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board, it is provided on the front surface of the game board. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting (combining) the game board, the game board You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the game machine K1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A game machine K2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board is formed from plywood or a sticker is attached to the game board. Since it is permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine K2, the game machine K3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that it flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball to be played, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in the front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the first unit is formed of a colorless light transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light transmitting material.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine K4, the game machine K5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines K1 to K5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of second upstream passages. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The game machine K6 is characterized in that detection sensors for detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the game machine K6, in any of the game machines K1 to K5, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. The second upstream unit and the second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and forming a plurality of second connecting passages are provided, and the passage of a game ball is detected in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensors are arranged, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a smaller number of second branch passages to manufacture a gaming machine having different specifications, the number of detection sensors arranged can be changed. It is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine K6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine K7 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entry port. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passage can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by combining the two units.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is relative to the first passage. Or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, so that even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (compared to the case of positioning other parts) ( The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any of the game machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit and is projected. The gaming machine K9, characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While making it possible to do this, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole.

In the game machines K1 to K6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine K10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of the game machines K1 to K9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the game machines K1 to K10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend at the bent portion. The game machine K11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the ground, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the game machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is moved along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide the bent portion to flow down smoothly, the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in the front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine including a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The game machine L1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ..

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

In the game machine L1, the game machine L2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the game ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed at the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes). ) Can be made.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side of the downstream ends of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine L3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the game machine L3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passage direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the game machine L3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Also, the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball is likely to be hindered as compared with the step) in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position. Therefore, as in the game machine L3, the upward displacement of the second aisle member with respect to the first aisle member can be regulated at a position where the upstream end of the second aisle member is higher than the downstream end of the first aisle member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the game machine L3, the game machine L4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the game ball is formed orthogonally to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In the game machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, as compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. You can make it harder to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the game machine L5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the second passage member is formed in a shape having protrusions or recesses (stepped shape), for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed and molding is performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

The game machine L6 is characterized in that, in the game machine L4 or L5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect of the game machine L4 or L5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pressed toward the bottom surface. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member and bouncing. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that when the pair of wing members are displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry port, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball. When the pair of wing members is released by the driving means to be driven and the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wings are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the ball entrance, and the pair of wings are arranged by the driving force of the driving means. There is known a game machine provided with a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for restricting the entry of a game ball into a ball entry port when a member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can be entered. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position. Therefore, when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate the entry of balls.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, for example, the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position after the pair of feather members are forcibly released from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, when a pair of feather members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state in which a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sling member when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine M2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slidably displaced to the position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. In the state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine M2 or M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2 or M3, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member is heavy. By using (own weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member is provided with a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contacted portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation occurs. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member is provided with a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine M6, wherein the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the game machines M2 to M6, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine M7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M2 to M6, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entry port. A game machine N1 comprising a passage member forming the passage of the above, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the game ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts caused by the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times.

In the game machine N1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member rubs against the edge of the passage member. A game machine N2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. A game machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, a pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine N2 or N3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine N4 characterized by.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2 or N3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 19930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the other side. In a game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, at least one of the first passage and the second passage is arranged along a direction intersecting the game board. A game machine O1 characterized by being played.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the ball passes is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that the space was reduced.

According to the game machine O1, at least a part of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is arranged along the direction intersecting the game board, so that there is a relatively large space in the front-rear direction (on the game board). At least a part of the passage can be arranged by utilizing the space in the direction of intersection). Therefore, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine O1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the rotation shaft is arranged along the width direction of the game board.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the distribution member, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. The distribution direction of the game balls can be the direction (front-back direction) that intersects the game board. Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine O2, the game machine O3 is characterized in that at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap in a top view.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap in the top view, so that the distribution unit is miniaturized in the width direction. Therefore, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

The game machine O2 or O3 includes a first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage is extended along a direction intersecting the game board and the distribution member. A first upstream passage extending from the first upstream passage to the rear and a first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage are provided, and the first detecting means is arranged in the first upstream passage. A game machine O4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2 or O3, the first passage extends along the direction intersecting the game board and extends backward from the distribution member, and the first upstream passage thereof. A first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage is provided, and the first detecting means is arranged in the first upstream passage. Therefore, the first detecting means is brought closer to the distribution member. The first detection means can be easily made visible to the player. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball from the time when the ball is distributed to one side by the sorting device until it is detected by the first detection means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The first passage and the second passage are preferably formed of a light-transmitting material that allows the passing game ball to be visually recognized from the outside.

In the game machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage includes an expanding means for expanding the displaceable region of the game ball, and the expanding means is arranged between the distribution member and the first detecting means. A game machine O5 characterized by being installed.

Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to run wild due to the impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, if the first detection means is brought close to the distribution member, chattering may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage is provided with an expansion means for expanding the displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means swings. Since it is arranged between the dividing member and the first detecting means, when the game ball is violent due to the impact during the sorting operation by the distributing member, the violence of the game ball is absorbed by the expanding means. can do. As a result, it is possible to bring the first detection means closer to the distribution member, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

As an example of the expanding means, a means for increasing the cross-sectional area of the passage in the first upstream passage of the first passage is exemplified.

The game machine O5 is characterized in that the game machine O5 includes a first branch passage branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, a first branch passage branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage is provided, and an expansion means is formed by the first branch passage. When the rampage of the ball is relatively small, the rampage of the game ball can be suppressed by the expansion means (internal space of the first branch passage) to suppress the occurrence of chattering, while the rampage of the game ball is relatively large. That is, in the case of a large rampage in which the occurrence of chattering cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be discharged by the first branch passage.

Further, the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, so that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member passes through the first upstream passage and is detected by the first detection means. It is possible to form a form in which the first detection means cannot be reached and the first branch passage is discharged. As a result, it is possible to give the player the game property that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is expected to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the guidance destination of the game ball by the first branch passage include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

In the game machine O6, at least the first upstream passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage. Game machine O7.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of the game machine O6, at least the first upstream passage of the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is lateral to the first upstream passage. Since it is branched from, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through the first upstream passage and enhance the interest of the game. That is, the game balls that are distributed to one side by the distribution member and pass through the first upstream passage are visible, so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to give the player the playability of expecting that. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, by branching the first branch passage from the side of the first upstream passage, an area of a display surface for displaying information related to the game is secured on the upper surface of the first upstream passage or the first branch passage. it can. Examples of the information regarding the game include information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the first branch passage. As the guidance destination, for example, an out port is exemplified.

The entire first passage may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the first branch passage may be formed of a light-transmitting material.

In the game machine O6 or O7, the game machine O8 is characterized in that the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of the game machine O6 or O7, the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means, so that the first The downstream passage can be used not only as a passage for a game ball that has passed through the first upstream passage, but also as a passage for a game ball that has passed through the first branch passage. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized.

In the game machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage and is juxtaposed with the first upstream passage, and the first upstream passage is the first branch passage. A game machine O9 characterized by being merged to the side of.

According to the game machine O9, in addition to the effect of the game machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage and juxtaposed with the first upstream passage, and the first upstream passage Is merged to the side of the first branch passage, so that the first downstream passage can be offset to the first branch passage side with respect to the first upstream passage. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members below the first upstream passage.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 20930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to the one side, and distribution to the other side. In a gaming machine provided with a second detection means for detecting the game ball, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection. The gaming machine P1 is provided with an adjusting means for adjusting so that the difference from the time required for detection by the means is small.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to one side, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A gaming machine including a second detecting means for detecting the above is known (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in design was low.

That is, when the display means displays that the game balls have been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means to notify the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls). Case), the time required for the game ball to reach the distribution member and be distributed to one side to be detected by the first detection means, and the time required for the game ball distributed to the other side to be detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, the time from reaching the distribution member to being displayed will differ depending on the distribution direction, and the interest of the game will be impaired.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine described above, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the distribution member, and the first detection means and the first detection means and the first 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distribution member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

According to the game machine P1, the difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the game ball to be detected by the second detection means is adjusted to be small. Since the adjusting means is provided, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detecting means or the second detecting means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the sorting member, and the first detecting means and the second detecting means are provided. It is not necessary to dispose the means at the same distance from the distribution member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passage and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P1, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member are said to be the first. 2. A second passage for guiding to the detecting means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion is used as the adjusting means. Game machine P2 to play.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is distributed to the other side by the distribution member and the first passage for guiding the game ball to the first detection means. A second passage for guiding the game ball to the second detecting means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion is used as an adjusting means. Therefore, the time required for the first detection means to detect the game ball that has reached the distribution member by utilizing the fact that the movement speed is reduced due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recess or the protrusion. It is possible to surely make an adjustment to reduce the difference between the time required for detection by the second detection means and the time required for detection by the second detection means. In addition, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

The adjusting means (recess or protrusion) may be arranged in only one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be arranged in both the first passage and the second passage. In addition, when a plurality of recesses or protrusions are arranged, the size of the recesses or protrusions (concave depth, protrusion height, width of the recess or protrusion, etc.) and the arrangement interval are the same. It may be present or different.

Further, the first passage and the second passage may be formed symmetrically (same shape) with respect to the distribution member, or may be formed asymmetrically. Even if they are formed symmetrically, the speed of the game ball can be reduced by the resistance when passing through the recess or the protrusion, so that the first detection means and the second detection means are the same from the distribution member. It can be unnecessary to dispose of them at a distance. That is, it is possible to secure a degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member. A second passage for guiding to the second detection means, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage includes a drop region in which the game ball is freely dropped, and the drop region is the adjusting means. A game machine P3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the distribution member to the other side. A second passage for guiding the distributed game ball to the second detection means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a drop area in which the game ball is freely dropped, and the drop area is adjusted. Since it is used as a means, it is less likely to receive frictional resistance than the form in which the game ball rolls due to frictional resistance from the rolling surface, and the movement speed is efficient because the gravitational acceleration is applied to the maximum. The difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the game ball to be detected by the second detection means is reduced. Adjustments can be made reliably. In addition, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

The adjusting means (falling region) may be arranged in only one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be arranged in both the first passage and the second passage. Further, when a plurality of falling regions are arranged, the lengths of the falling regions may be the same or different.

In the game machine P2 or P3, the first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the recess or the protrusion is arranged in the first passage downstream from the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A game machine P4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2 or P3, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the first branch passage is located in the first passage downstream from the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. Since the recess or the protrusion is arranged, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first branch passage under the influence of the recess or the protrusion.

In the game machine P2 or P3, the first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the recess or the protrusion is arranged in the first passage upstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A game machine P5 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2 or P3, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the first passage is located upstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. Since the recess or protrusion is arranged, whether or not the game is branched to the first branch passage by utilizing the fact that the moving speed is reduced due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recess or protrusion. The whereabouts of the game ball can be easily made visible to the player.

In any of the game machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means makes the time required for the distribution member to distribute the game ball to the one side different from the time required for the operation to distribute the game ball to the other side. A game machine P6 characterized by.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means includes the time required for the distribution member to distribute the game ball to one side and the time required for the operation to distribute the game ball to the other side. Therefore, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the second detection means to detect the game ball using the time difference are different. It is possible to surely make adjustments to reduce the difference between the two. Further, since it can be adjusted by the distribution member, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passage and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the center of gravity is biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the one side and the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side are different.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effect of the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the axis, and the center of gravity is biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis, and the adjusting means is Because the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to one side and the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side are different due to the bias of the center of gravity position, the structure of the adjusting means is simplified and the product cost is reduced. it can.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

In the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the shaft, and the adjusting means causes the game ball to be distributed to the one side by making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction. The gaming machine P8, characterized in that the time required and the time required for the operation of distributing to the other side are different.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the shaft, and the adjusting means makes the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction to make the game ball. Since the time required for the operation of distributing to one side and the time required for the operation of distributing to the other side are different, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second time. It is possible to surely make an adjustment to reduce the difference from the time required for detection by the detection means.

As a means for making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to one direction, and the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to the other rotation. Is transmitted to another gear, and the rotation resistance is increased by the amount of rotation of the other gear.

In any of the game machines P1 to P8, the distribution member is formed in a manner different from the one-side receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to the one side and the one-side receiving surface, and distributes to the other side. The gaming machine P9 comprising the other side receiving surface for receiving the game ball, and the one side receiving surface and the other side receiving surface are used as the adjusting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P8, the distribution member has a one-side receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to one side and a mode different from the one-side receiving surface. The other side receiving surface that is formed and receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side is provided, and since those one side receiving surface and the other side receiving surface are used as adjustment means, the behavior of the game ball received by the one side receiving surface. Using the difference between the behavior of the game ball received by the other side receiving surface and the behavior of the game ball received by the other side receiving surface, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection means are detected. It is possible to surely make adjustments to reduce the difference from the time required for the operation.

As the difference between the mode of the one-side receiving surface and the other-side receiving surface, for example, the difference in the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction and the difference in the material (elastic modulus) are exemplified, and the one-side receiving surface and the other-side receiving surface receive the difference. As the difference in the behavior of the game balls, the ease of bouncing of the game balls is exemplified. For example, if the bounce of the game ball received on one side receiving surface is larger than the bounce of the game ball received on the other side receiving surface, the flow of the game ball is delayed by the amount of the bounced period. Therefore, the time required for the first detection means to detect the ball can be gained.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 24930 as an example>
The arrangement in a game machine including a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and an arrangement member on which the distribution member is arranged. The gaming machine Q1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member when an external force is applied to the member.

A game machine is known that includes a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and an arrangement member on which the distribution member is arranged (). JP-A-2017-148189). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that when an external force is applied to the disposing member by hitting by a player, the distribution member may be rotated due to the influence of inertial force. It was.

That is, when the game ball distributed to one side is guided to a winning opening to which a higher game value is given than the game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting the game machine, the disposing member By applying an external force to the ball, the distribution member is rotated by the inertial force, and the posture of the distribution member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). It was.

According to the game machine Q1, since the distribution member is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member by the external force applied to the arrangement member, even when the external force is applied to the arrangement member, it is affected by the inertial force. , It is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in rotating the distribution member by the action of an external force.

The disposing member includes the first member itself on which the distribution member is axially supported, but is not limited to the first member, and the second member on which the first member is disposed and the second member. A third member that is directly or indirectly connected to the second member is also included. As the second member, a case member that rotatably supports the distribution member and forms the skeleton of the distribution unit is exemplified, and as the third member, in addition to the game board on which the distribution unit is arranged, Various members (for example, an outer frame, an inner frame, a front frame, a glass plate, etc.) that are directly or indirectly connected to the game board are exemplified.

Further, as the external force, a force input to the game machine due to an act of hitting or shaking by the player is exemplified.

In the game machine Q1, the distribution member is characterized in that its rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, the rotation axis of the distribution member is arranged along the width direction of the game board, so that the distribution direction of the game ball by the distribution member is changed. It can be the direction that intersects the board (front-back direction). Therefore, the passages for guiding the game balls distributed to one side or the other side by the distribution member can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit provided with the distribution member can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In this way, the configuration in which the rotation axis of the distribution member is arranged along the width direction of the game board is such that when the player hits the front surface (glass plate) of the game machine, the inertia due to the action of the external force is applied. Since the force acts on the distribution member as a force in the direction of rotating the distribution member, it was impossible to adopt it in the conventional product, but a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member is provided. This makes it possible to adopt it for the first time, and as a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members and prevent fraud.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position overlapping the rotation axis in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, so that an external force acts on the arrangement member. The gaming machine Q3, characterized in that the distribution member is suppressed from being rotated when the distribution member is rotated.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position overlapping the rotation axis in the direction of the rotation axis of the distribution member. Since the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, the influence of the inertial force applied to the distribution member (distribution) when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. The force component that tries to rotate the member) can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the suppressing means has an inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to one side with respect to the vertical direction and an inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to the other side with respect to the vertical direction. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the disposition member by making the arrangement member different from the above.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the suppressing means is the inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to one side with respect to the vertical direction and the distribution member rotated to the other side. By making the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical direction different from that of the above, it is possible to prevent the distribution member from rotating when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. One state can be made larger than the other. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

In the game machine Q3 or Q4, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetrical plane.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q3 or Q4, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape with the virtual plane including the rotation axis as the symmetrical plane, so that the shape of the distribution member is simplified. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position biased to the one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis, so that an external force is applied to the arrangement member. A game machine Q6 characterized in that the distribution member is suppressed from being rotated in some cases.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means is arranged by arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. Since the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the member, the force required to rotate the distribution member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means causes the distribution member to rotate when an external force is applied to the arrangement member by making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction. A game machine Q7 characterized by suppressing.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means makes the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, so that the distribution member is distributed when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. Since the rotation of the member is suppressed, the force required to rotate the distribution member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

As a means for making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to one direction, and the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to the other rotation. Is transmitted to another gear, and the rotation resistance is increased by the amount of rotation of the other gear.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means has a long hole shape for a shaft hole that pivotally supports the rotation axis of the distribution member, so that the distribution member is subjected to an external force when an external force is applied to the distribution member. A game machine Q8 characterized in that the rotation of the game machine is suppressed.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means acts on the disposing member by forming the shaft hole that supports the rotation axis of the distribution member into an elongated hole shape. Since it suppresses the rotation of the distribution member when it is performed, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force. That is, by setting the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape and the acting direction of the external force to be equal to or less than a predetermined angle, the distribution member can be rotated when the distribution member receives the game ball. On the other hand, when an external force (inertial force) is applied to the distribution member, the rotation axis of the distribution member can be slid along the longitudinal direction of the shaft hole to consume the applied energy. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force.

The direction of action of the external force is the direction orthogonal to the front surface (glass plate) of the game machine (direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction) when it is assumed that the player hits the front surface of the game machine. .. In this case, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape and the vertical direction (the direction in which the game ball falls toward the distribution member) is preferably set to about 45 degrees or more, and is preferably about 60 degrees or less. It is more preferable to set it, and the angle which is substantially orthogonal is most preferable. When the game ball is received, the weight of the game ball makes it easier to rotate the distribution member reliably, while when an external force is applied, the rotation axis of the distribution member is a shaft hole (long hole). This is because it can be easily slid reliably along the longitudinal direction of.

In the game machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one of the one side or the other side toward the other side.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one side or the other side toward the other side, so that energy consumption is increased and the distribution member is placed in the initial position. Can be returned to. That is, by setting the direction of the distribution member (inclination direction of the shaft hole) according to the direction in which the external force is applied, when the external force (inertial force) is applied to the distribution member, the distribution member The rotating shaft of the shaft can be slid in the direction of the ascending inclination of the shaft hole to increase the consumption of the applied energy, while it can be subsequently lowered by the descending inclination of the shaft hole to make the distribution member. It can be returned to the initial position.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to the one side wins a prize, and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize and the first winning opening is entered. It is provided with a second winning opening that gives a lower game value than the winning, and when the distribution member is rotated by an external force acting on the disposing member, the game ball is distributed to the other side. A game machine Q10 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to one side wins and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize. It also has a second winning opening that gives a lower game value than the winning opening to the first winning opening, and when the distribution member is rotated by an external force acting on the disposing member, the game ball is moved to the other side. Since the posture is set to distribute to, it is possible to suppress an act of changing the posture of the distribution member (rotating the distribution member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting the game machine or the like.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, a first winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to the one side and a second winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to the other side are provided. The gaming machine Q11, characterized in that the game value given to the winning of the first winning opening and the game value given to the winning of the second winning opening are equal to each other.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to one side wins and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize. It has a second winning opening, and the game value given to the winning of the first winning opening is equal to the game value given to the winning of the second winning opening. It is possible to suppress the action of changing the posture of the distribution member (rotating the distribution member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting or the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 34930 as an example>
In a game machine including a ball entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side, rotation of the distribution member. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side or the other side from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member in an axial view.

There is known a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017). -148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the ball entry port is arranged above the distribution member in the vertical direction in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball entered into the ball entry port is distributed. There is a problem that the mode until reaching the member becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side or the other side from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, so that the ball enters the ball entry port. It is possible to change the mode until the game ball reaches the distribution member. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the one side is distributed to the other side by the distribution member. The game ball that acts on the game ball and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in a state after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the other side is moved to the one side by the distribution member. The game machine R2 is characterized in that the configuration that acts on the game ball is different until it is sorted.

Here, when the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape. Even if it is, the ball is entered from the entrance and shaken depending on the posture of the distribution member (whether it is in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side or the state after it is distributed to the other side). The behavior of the game balls distributed by the dividing members is different, and there is a risk that a problem may occur.

For example, when the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to one side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball heading from the ball entry port to the distribution member is Since it has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball (absence of distribution) in the direction of rotating the distribution member with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side. A game ball that also has a velocity component in the direction of rotation) collides, while the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side is opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated. A game ball (a game ball having a velocity component in the direction opposite to the direction in which the absence of distribution is rotated) collides in the direction of. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball that is input from the ball entry port and distributed by the distribution member differs depending on the posture of the distribution member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to one side is caused by the distribution member. The configuration that acts on the game ball before it is distributed to the other side, and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the other side is moved to one side by the distribution member. Since the configuration that acts on the game ball before it is sorted is different, it is possible to correspond to the behavior of the game ball that is entered from the ball entrance and sorted by the sorting member according to the posture of the sorting member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

The game machine R2 is provided with a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port to the distribution member, and the distribution member is viewed from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member. A gaming machine characterized in that the entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side, and the distribution member is arranged at a position biased toward the other side from below in the vertical direction of the exit of the guidance passage. R3.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2, a guide passage for guiding the game ball entering the ball entry port to the distribution member is provided, and the distribution member is provided in the direction of the rotation axis of the distribution member. Since the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from above in the vertical direction to one side, and the distribution member is arranged at a position biased from below in the vertical direction to the other side of the exit of the guidance passage, the game ball can be placed on the other It is possible to bring the position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry port and flowed out from the exit of the guidance passage collides with the distribution member that is in the state after being distributed to the side closer to the rotation center of the distribution member. As a result, the rotational moment applied to the distribution member due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine R2 or R3, the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state after the game ball is distributed to the one side is the distribution in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it is made larger than the inclination angle of the member with respect to the vertical direction.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2 or R3, the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side is after the game ball is distributed to the other side. Since it is made larger than the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state of, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port and has flowed out from the exit of the guidance passage is in the state after the game ball has been distributed to the other side. When colliding with the distribution member, the component of the force received by the distribution member in the direction of passing through the rotation axis can be increased. As a result, the rotational moment applied to the distribution member due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine R3 or R4, the distribution member is characterized in that the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is larger than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the one side. Game machine R5 to play.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect of the game machine R3 or R4, the rotation resistance of the distribution member in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is larger than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game machine to one side. Therefore, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed, and the sorting operation can be reliably performed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When it is received, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the distribution member comes into contact with the distribution member after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It collides with the surface that regulates the displacement to) at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R5, since the rotation resistance of the distribution member in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is increased, the rotation resistance of the distribution member slows down the rotation of the distribution member to the other side. The impact when the distribution member that distributes the game ball to the other side collides with the stopper surface can be moderated. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

On the other hand, with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side, the speed is in the direction opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated to one side (direction from one side to the other side). Since the game balls having the components collide with each other, if the rotation resistance when rotating the distribution member to one side is increased, the distribution member that receives the game ball cannot rotate together with the game ball, and the game ball. Is easy to bounce off the sorting member. When the game ball bounces off the distribution member, the distribution member moves to one side while the game ball separates (bounces) from the distribution member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has rotated and is separated (bounced) falls, there is a risk that the game ball will be distributed to the other side opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R5, the distribution member makes the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game machine to one side smaller than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side. When it is received, the distribution member can be easily rotated toward one side together with the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the received game ball from bouncing off from the distribution member and reliably distribute the game ball to one side.

In the game machine R5, the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of being interposed between the gear and the distribution member and distributing the game ball to the other side is performed by one gear or a plurality of gears forming a gear train. The gaming machine R6 is provided with a one-way clutch that transmits the game ball to the gear and does not transmit the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to the one side.

According to the game machine R6, one gear or a plurality of gears forming a gear train are interposed between the gears and the distribution member, and the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side is transmitted to the gears. Moreover, since the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side is provided with a one-way clutch that does not transmit to the gear, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side. The rotation of the distribution member is transmitted to the gear via the one-way clutch, and the gear is driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is increased by the amount of the driven gear. On the other hand, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side, the rotation of the distribution member is blocked by the one-way clutch and is not transmitted to the gear. That is, the gear is not driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is reduced by the amount that the gear is not driven.

As described above, since the one-way clutch is configured to switch between transmission and non-transmission of rotation to the gears, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction can be reliably formed. Further, since the configuration can be relatively simple as to whether or not the gears are driven, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability can be improved accordingly.

In particular, since the inertial force of the gear when starting the driven state of the gear in the stopped state can be used as the rotational resistance of the distribution member, the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member can be used. In the present invention, which can be easily secured and the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member is relatively small, it is effective as a configuration for suppressing damage due to the collision of the distribution member with the stopper surface.

The method of the one-way clutch does not matter as long as it allows the transmission of rotation in one direction and blocks (regulates) the transmission of rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch method include a sprag type and a cam type. When the rotating shaft of the distribution member is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch, the gear is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch, and the rotating shaft of the distribution member is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch. A gear is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch.

In the game machine R5 or R6, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetrical plane.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of the game machine R5 or R6, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape with the virtual plane including the rotation axis as the symmetrical plane, so that the shape of the distribution member is simplified. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

In the game machine R5 or R6, the game machine R8 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the distribution member is arranged at a position biased to the one side with respect to the rotation axis.

According to the game machine R8, the center of gravity of the distribution member is arranged at a position biased to one side with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side, the distribution member is rotated. Since the center of gravity is raised, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is increased accordingly. On the other hand, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side, the center of gravity is lowered, so that the rotational resistance of the distribution member is reduced accordingly.

In this way, since the position of the center of gravity is set to a predetermined position, in addition to the effect of the game machine R5 or R6, the simplification can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced by that amount, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can be improved.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of mounting a weight and a method of forming an asymmetrical shape with respect to the rotation axis.

In any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is characterized in that at least a receiving surface for receiving a game ball to be distributed to the other side is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward a rotation axis. Machine R9.

According to the game machine R9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is a curved surface in which the receiving surface for receiving the game ball to be distributed to at least the other side is convex toward the rotation axis. Since it is formed, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When it is received, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the distribution member comes into contact with the distribution member after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It collides with the surface that regulates the displacement to) at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R9, in the distribution member, the receiving surface for receiving the game ball is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the rotation axis, so that the receiving game ball is placed along the curved surface. It can be slid or rolled. Therefore, the impact when the distribution member that distributes the game ball to the other side collides with the stopper surface can be moderated by the amount of sliding or rolling. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is characterized in that the receiving surface for receiving the game ball distributed to the other side has a smaller inclination than the receiving surface for the game ball distributed to the other side. Game machine R10 to play.

According to the game machine R10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball to be distributed to the other side, which is more inclined than the receiving surface for the game ball to be distributed to one side. Is reduced, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed, and the sorting operation can be reliably performed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side ( That is, when it is received by the receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It abuts on the distribution member and collides with the surface that regulates the displacement of the distribution member to the other side at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R10, since the inclination angle of the receiving surface of the distribution member that receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side is small, the wall thickness of the portion that collides with the stopper surface is small due to the small inclination. Can be increased. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

On the other hand, with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side, the speed is in the direction opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated to one side (direction from one side to the other side). Since the game balls having the components collide with each other, if the inclination of the receiving surface of the game balls to be distributed to one side is small, the game balls are likely to bounce off the distribution member. When the game ball bounces off the distribution member, the distribution member moves to one side while the game ball separates (bounces) from the distribution member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has rotated and is separated (bounced) falls, there is a risk that the game ball will be distributed to the other side opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R10, the distribution member has a large inclination angle of the receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to one side, so that the large inclination causes the game ball that collides with the receiving surface. More velocity components can be added in the direction toward the distribution direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the received game ball from bouncing back from the distribution member, and it is possible to easily rotate the distribution member that has received the game ball toward one side together with the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to reliably distribute the game ball to one side.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 19930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the other side. In a game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. A game machine S1 characterized by being played.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the ball passes is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that the space was reduced.

According to the game machine S1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. Therefore, the distribution direction of the game ball by the distribution member is set to the game board. It can be the direction of intersection (front-back direction). Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine S1, the game machine S1 includes a first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage includes an expansion means for expanding a displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means is the expansion means. The gaming machine S2, which is disposed between the distribution member and the first detecting means.

Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to run wild due to the impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, if the first detection means is brought close to the distribution member, chattering may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1, the first passage is provided with an expansion means for expanding the displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means is a distribution member and the first detection. Since it is arranged between the means and the means, when the game ball is violent due to the impact during the sorting operation by the distribution member, the violence of the game ball can be absorbed by the expanding means. As a result, it is possible to bring the first detection means closer to the distribution member, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

As an example of the expanding means, a means for increasing the cross-sectional area of the passage in the first upstream passage of the first passage is exemplified.

The game machine S3 is characterized in that the game machine S2 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effect of the game machine S2, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and an expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, so that the rampage of the game ball is relatively low. If it is small, the expansion means (internal space of the first branch passage) can suppress the rampage of the game ball to suppress the occurrence of chattering, while the rampage of the game ball is relatively large, that is, the occurrence of chattering. In the case of a large rampage that cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be discharged by the first branch passage.

Further, a form in which the expanding means is formed by the first branch passage, and the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member pass through the first passage and are detected by the first detection means, and the first It is possible to form a form in which the detection means cannot be reached and is discharged to the first passage. As a result, it is possible to give the player the game property that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is expected to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the guidance destination of the game ball by the first branch passage include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

In the game machine S3, the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3, the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage, so that the first passage It is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through the game and enhance the interest of the game. That is, the game balls that are distributed to one side by the distribution member and pass through the first upstream passage are visible, so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to give the player the playability of expecting that. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage, the area of the display surface for displaying the information related to the game can be secured on the upper surface of the first passage or the first branch passage. Examples of the information regarding the game include information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the first branch passage. As the guidance destination, for example, an out port is exemplified.

In addition, only a part of the first passage may be formed from a light-transmitting material, or the first branch passage may be formed from a light-transmitting material.

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A game machine X1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine X2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, In any of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine X3 characterized by this. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 60, 19060 Base plate (game board)
60a, 19060a Through hole (opening)
60c light transmission hole (concave part)
64 1st winning opening (1st passage, entry opening)
140 2nd winning opening (entrance entrance, 1st entrance, 2nd passage)
65a Specified winning opening (second entry opening)
162 Transmission shaft rod (supporting means)
163 Driven member (displacement means)
175 Lower regulation part (second resistance means)
176 Upper regulation part (resistance means, first resistance means)
310 Rear case 405 Metal rail (guidance means)
410,3410 Transmission unit (transmission means)
411 Drive gear (transmission means)
412 Transmission gear (transmission means)
413 Termination gear (transmission means)
414 Arm member (transmission means)
425 Storage plate (support means)
425b Omitted part (open part)
427 Through hole (suppressing means)
428 Blocking plate (supporting means, suppressing means)
430 Lifting plate (basic means, intermediate means)
433 Cylindrical part (suppressing means)
441 Rotating gear (displacement forming means)
442 Relative displacement member (intermediate means, tip side means)
444 Auxiliary arm member (basic means, rotational displacement means)
444a Base end side (partly, rotating shaft)
444b Arc-shaped gear part (overhanging part)
444d Cylindrical part (other part, rotating shaft part)
460 pinnate member (tip side means, displacement means, first displacement means, second displacement means, arrangement displacement means)
464L forming part (first displacement means, first arrangement displacement means)
464R forming part (second displacement means, second arrangement displacement means)
490 Fixed transmission plate (displacement forming means)
708 Partition member (support plate)
712 Thin film cover member (thin film member)
714 Light guide member (guidance means)
730 Plate-shaped displacement member (displacement means, first displacement means)
735 Small receiving part (1st support part, 2nd support part)
736 Large receiving part (1st support part, 2nd support part)
740 Hollow member (second displacement means)
743 Protruding columnar part (second displacement means)
750 variable decorative member (second displacement means)
761,4761 Load member (displacement means, load applying means, transmitting means)
761c Vertical bar-shaped extension (pushing part)
761d Overhang (attachment, range setting means)
762 Shaft rod (support means)
764 Lower regulation part (second resistance means)
765 Upper regulation part (resistance means, first resistance means, range setting means)
777 Illuminations board (light emitting board)
DH1 electrical wiring (electrical supply means)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
S1 contact surface (split surface)
SOL1 electromagnetic solenoid (driving means)
SOL2 electromagnetic solenoid (driving means, load applying means, range setting means)
SP21 urging spring (load applying means)
3441 Rotating gear with arm (displacement forming means)
930, 19930, 20930, 21930, 22930, 23930, 24930, 25930, 26930, 27930, 28930, 29930, 30930, 31930, 32930, 33930, 34930, 35930, 36930, 37930, 38930, 39930, 40930, 41930 (Distribution member)
940 Front unit (1st member, 1st unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
941g, 19941g 1st receiving part (ball entrance)
942c 2nd throwing part (1st passage member)
943,19943 Front base (main body member, ball entrance)
943a Rolling part (1st passage, 1st passage member)
945 wing member (first opening / closing member)
945b protrusion (protruding part)
951 Plate member (second opening / closing member, opening / closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Circular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Protruding part (second guiding means)
954c2 Side side 954c3 Side edge 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 2nd guide surface (1st inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed part (passage member)
957a1 Main body 957a2 Shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm (2nd engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g protruding part (first engaging part)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 2nd entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (1st part)
965b rotating part (first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966,8966,11966,12966,14966,18966 Displacement member (slide member, first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (reception part)
966b2 One side contacted part 966b3 Other side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade (cutting member)
6683 Blade (cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide section (standing section)
985e1,985f1 Inflow passage (second connecting passage)
988b Magnetic material (adjusting means, suppressing means)
988c Magnetic material (adjusting means, suppressing means)
900 aisle unit (second downstream unit)
991c1,991d1 Recessed part (accepting part)
19941h Intermediate exit (second passage)
19980, 20980, 21980, 22980, 23980, 24980, 25980, 26980, 27980, 28980, 29980, 30980, 31980, 32980, 33980, 34980, 35980, 36980, 37980, 38980, 39980, 40980, 4980a , 31986a Side plate (guidance passage)
19982c, 39982c Game ball guide wall (guidance passage)
19982d Protruding part (guidance passage)
19983, 24983, 25983, 29983, 30983, 31983, 32983, 33983, 37983, 38993 Distribution member 21981b1 Protrusion (adjustment means, protrusion)
24983a1 Protrusion (adjustment means, suppression means)
26983a2 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
26982a4 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
27982b2 Back side contact part (adjustment means)
28982b2 Back side contact part (suppressing means)
30983f Rubber sheet (adjustment means, one side receiving surface, other side receiving surface)
32983g Center of gravity adjustment unit 32983g (suppressing means)
33983b1 Protrusion surface (adjustment means)
33983b2 concave surface (adjustment means)
34982c, 34985j Bearing part (suppressing means, shaft hole)
37983h Curved surface (receiving surface)
38983a3, 38983a4 Acting part (receiving surface)
TR0 throwing passage (second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1, TR201 1st passage (2nd passage, 2nd branch passage, 1st passage)
TR2, TR202 2nd passage (2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR3 passage (second passage, adjustment means, drop area)
TR4, TR214, TR224, TR234 passages (first passage, first upstream passage)
TR5 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR6 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR7 passage (first branch passage)
TR8 passage (1st passage, 1st branch passage, 1st downstream passage)
TR9 passage (second passage)
TR10 passage (second passage)
TR11 passage (first branch passage)
TR12 passage (1st passage, 1st downstream passage, 1st branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detector (detection sensor)
SE5 detection device (first detection means, second detection means)
SE6 detection device (second detection means, first detection means)
HS1 wiring HS2 wiring HS3 wiring SP urging spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support wheel)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center side range)
U1 opening (first branch passage)
U2 opening (expansion means, first branch passage)
U3 opening (1st passage, 1st downstream passage, 1st branch passage)
U4 opening (expansion means, first branch passage)
U5 opening (1st passage, 1st upstream passage, 1st downstream passage)
U6 opening (1st passage, 1st upstream passage, 1st winning opening, 2nd winning opening)
U7 opening (2nd passage, 2nd winning opening, 1st winning opening)
U8 opening (entrance)
U9 opening (second passage)
GY3 3rd gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gear)
GY4 4th gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gear)
GY5 5th gear (adjusting means, suppressing means, gear)
WG one-way gear (adjustment means, suppression means, one-way clutch)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is known a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side (Patent Document 1). ).

JP-A-2017-148189

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is insufficient.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 distributes the ball entry port into which the game ball is inserted and the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side. A member is provided, and the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an auxiliary device. It is sectional drawing of the window part movable unit in line XX of FIG. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. (A) is a rear view of the window movable unit, and (b) is a front view of the window movable unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member and a metal plate-like member. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a partial front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member showing the toothed state of the pinnate member and the auxiliary member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a top view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. It is a rear view of a support plate part, a pinnate member, an auxiliary member, and a fixed transmission plate. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base member. It is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of a light guide member, a plate-shaped displacement member, and a hollow member in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member. It is a top view of the 2nd operation unit. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along the line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rotational displacement of a large receiving part. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of the second operating unit in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd operation unit in the LXXII-LXXII line of FIG. 58. (A) and (b) are rear views of the window movable unit in the second embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically illustrating the displacement relationship of the first operating unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the drive unit of the second operation unit in the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operation unit of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). It is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). (A) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the specific winning opening unit in line CII-CII of FIG. 99 (c). (A) and (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). (A) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and (b) is the specific winning opening unit and the specific winning opening unit in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the drive unit. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the sorting unit in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. (A) is a front view of the replacement unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). (A) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the range CXXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board in the CXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 120 (a). It is a rear view of the front unit and the displacement member in 7th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the drive unit according to the eighth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the drive unit and the displacement member in the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the back base and the displacement member in eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the front unit and the displacement member. (A) is a rear view of the front unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXXIb-CXXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). (A) is a side view of the drive unit according to the fourteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a game board, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit in the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 135 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). (A) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a sectional schematic view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the game board in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the front unit on the CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line of FIG. 143 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the front unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. (A) is a perspective front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a side view of the first side surface base in the arrow CLIa direction view of FIG. 149, (b) is a side view of the first side surface base in the arrow CLIb direction view of FIG. 149, and (c) is a side view of the first side surface base. , FIG. 149 is a side view of the second side surface base in the arrow CLIc direction view of FIG. 149, and FIG. 149 is a side view of the second side surface base in the arrow CLId direction view of FIG. 149. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CLIIIa-CLIIa line of FIG. 147 (a). It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in line CLIII-CLIII of FIG. 152 (a). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, (b) is a top view of the passage unit, (c) is a side view of the passage unit, and (d) is a view of FIG. 154 (a). It is sectional drawing of the passage unit in the CLIVd-CLIVd line. (A) is a perspective front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLVIII-CLVIII line of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the closed state of a wing member, and (b) shows the open state of a wing member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the closed state of the wing member, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit in the closed state of the wing member. (A) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the open state of the wing member, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit in the open state of the wing member. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), (a) shows the state which the distribution member was arranged in the 1st position, (b) is the distribution member. Is illustrated in the second position. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line of FIG. 161 and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line of FIG. 162 (a). It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in 19th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 20th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 21st Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 22nd Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 23rd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 24th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in (a), the state which the distribution member was arranged at the 1st position is illustrated. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 25th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 26th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 27th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 28th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 29th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 31st Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 32nd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 33rd Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), a state in which the distribution member is displaced forward while maintaining the posture (angle) arranged at the first position inside the bearing portion described later is illustrated, (c). Shows a state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 34th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 35th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 36th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 37th Embodiment, which corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and (a) shows the state which the distribution member is arranged in the 1st position. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 38th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in (a), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the 1st position is illustrated. In (b), the state in which the distribution member is arranged at the second position is illustrated. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit according to the 39th embodiment, and shows a state in which the distribution member is arranged at the first position corresponding to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit in 40th Embodiment, and corresponds to the sectional view in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). (A) is a side view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 44, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side.

The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. The base plate 60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the wing member 945 (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. Long time is set. When the wing member 945 is in the open state (open state), the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the wing member 945 is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the wing member is hit once. A change may be made to increase the number of times the 945 is opened than during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit. At least one may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times the wing member 945 is opened per hit is not performed, only the hit probability of the second symbol. May be changed so as to increase compared to normal.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in operation (open).

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the feather member 945 of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball to the second winning opening 140 may be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 for each hit. If the player is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the wing member 945 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 140 may be configured to be five.

A wing member 945 is attached to the second winning opening 140. The wing member 945 is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the wing member 945 is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state). ), And the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times the wing member 945 is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the wing member 945 is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a feather member as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the wing member attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the wing member, Launch the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, you will get many chances of a big hit lottery and become a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the wing member 945 attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. , A ball is launched so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called "right-handed"), and the wing member is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the wing member is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor MT1 and electromagnetic solenoids SOL1 and SOL2.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate. Further, in FIG. 6, the illustration of the third symbol display device 81 is omitted.

As described above, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and rails 61 and 62. , General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, variable display device unit 80, pair of left and right window movable units 150, balls ejected from the game area It is configured by assembling a ball flow unit 290 or the like that can flow down, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

As described above, the base plate 60 is formed of plywood in which veneer plates are overlapped, and the base plate 60 is arranged so that the player does not see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. It is formed so as to be shieldable at 60.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 60 is drilled for passing electrical wiring connected to the through gate 67, in addition to a through hole for disposing the variable display device unit 80 at a substantially central position. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) small through holes 60a to be provided, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) fitting recesses 60b recessed so as to be recessed with the front end portion of the operation unit 300. The lower left and right sides are provided with a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) light transmission holes 60c formed in the front-rear direction.

The light transmission hole 60c is formed at a position where the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side can pass through, and the effect of the game board 13 is improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. This will be explained in detail.

On the front side of the light passing hole 60c, the flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 formed of a light transmissive resin material are arranged, and the outer side 94 of the flowing bottom constituent members 91 and 92 is the light passing hole. The flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 are fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 in a manner of lining the 60c.

The left and right flow bottom constituent members 91 and 92 have a substantially symmetrical shape except that the covering plate FB is arranged on the front side of the right flow bottom constituent member 92. The member 91 will be described in detail, and the description of the flow bottom component member 92 on the right side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the flow bottom component member 91, a plate-shaped portion arranged along the front surface of the base plate 60 is formed in a strip-shaped portion having a width equivalent to that of the inner rail 61, and the game area Is partitioned, and the game is partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, the outer portion 94 which is the outer portion (front view outer portion) of the game area partitioned by the strip-shaped portion 93, and the strip-shaped portion 93. It includes an inner portion 95 which is an inner portion (inner portion in front view) of the region.

As described above, the outer portion 94 is outside the gaming area, and is therefore configured as a portion that does not easily affect the flow of the ball. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consider the influence on the sphere due to the displacement of the outer plate portion 94, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin.

Further, as a result of designing the outer portion 94 to be thin, even if the wall thickness of the inner portion 95 is reduced, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95, so that the rigidity of the base plate 60 is increased. Can be used to suppress the displacement (deformation in the thickness direction) of the inner portion 95 in the front-rear direction. Further, by designing the outer portion 94 and the inner portion 95 to be thin, the front-rear width of the game area can be sufficiently secured.

In this way, the wall thickness of the outer portion 94 can be designed to be thin without impairing the function required for the inner portion 95, and as a result, the light emitted from the operation unit 300 side and passing through the light transmission hole 60c can be transmitted. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to see through the outer portion 94.

In the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the light emitted from the back surface side through the wall thickness of the base plate 60. On the other hand, by forming the light transmission hole 60c (see FIG. 6) as in the present embodiment and arranging the light emitting means on the back side thereof, the base plate 60 is composed of a wooden plate member, and the base plate 60 is formed. The brightness visually recognizable through the can be easily changed.

For example, when forming a decorative pattern that is visually recognized so as to be continuously connected to the outer portion 94 and other portions in a front view, it is arranged on an illuminated substrate 777 arranged on the back side of the outer portion 94. By changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 with a plurality of types and changing the brightness of the outer portion 94, the appearance of the same decorative pattern can be changed with a plurality of types.

Further, for example, a decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778 may be attached to the outer portion 94. In this case, the appearance (image) of the game board 13 can be greatly changed depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting means 778.

The mode of the decorative member that changes the visible pattern depending on the light emitting mode is not limited at all. For example, a member typified by an illumination plate, which is designed so that different patterns can be visually recognized depending on the angle of light irradiation, may be used. Further, for example, a member designed to change the visually recognized pattern by changing the emission color may be used on the premise that the pattern is drawn in a plurality of colors and a plurality of colors of the emitted light are prepared. ..

The inner portion 95 is arranged inside the game area as described above. If the inner portion 95 is displaced (deformed), it may affect the ball flowing down the game area. However, in the present embodiment, the meat portion of the pace plate 60 is arranged on the back side of the inner portion 95. (Because the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side with respect to the strip 93 in the front view), the rigidity of the base plate 60 is used to displace the inner part 95 (because the light transmission hole 60c is configured to fit on the outer side 94 side). Deformation) can be prevented. As a result, the flow of the sphere can be stabilized.

A general winning opening 63 is arranged in the inner portion 95, the general winning opening 63 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the flow bottom component member 91 is the front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed by fixing it from the side with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, and the window movable unit 150 is arranged at the left and right upper corners of the center frame 86. Are arranged.

FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 7, the lower part of the game board 13 is not shown, and the auxiliary device 160 is disassembled and shown in a front perspective.

The window movable unit 150 is a displacement member 151 that is rotatable and displaceable and is configured to be visible to the player in the window inside the center frame 86, and is disposed on the back side of the displacement member 151. It is provided with an auxiliary device 160 that generates a driving force for driving 151 and irradiates light toward the displacement member 151.

The displacement member 151 is formed in a bifurcated shape in the front-rear direction, and is arranged at both tip portions of a bifurcated portion 152 that is pivotally supported at a base end portion formed near a bent portion and the bifurcated portion 152, and the back surface side is opened. It is provided with a tip portion 153 formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) and an overhanging portion 154 protruding in the radial direction from the base end portion of the bifurcated portion 152.

The tip portion 153 is fastened to an effect portion 153a formed in a box shape (bag shape, cup shape) with the bottom side facing the front side and arranged so that the player can see it, and to the open portion side of the effect portion 153a. It is provided with a ring-shaped portion 153b which is a fixed ring-shaped portion and has a shape in which the opposite side of the directing portion 153a is narrower than that of the directing portion 153a side.

The effect portion 153a has a light diffusion shape (jagged shape) formed on the inner side surface, and can diffuse the light emitted from the back surface side to the inside of the open portion, so that the light actually emitted is in a narrow range. Even if it is irradiated to the light, the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a from the front side can visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale).

The overhanging portion 154 is defined by a pair of claw portions 86a projecting from the center frame 86 side in a displaceable range in both directions in the rotational direction. That is, the displacement member 151 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable at an angle (an angle of less than 360 degrees) defined by the relationship between the arrangement of the claw portion 86a and the overhanging portion 154.

FIG. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary device 160, and FIG. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary device 160. The auxiliary device 160 is a metal whose contact member 161 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the displacement member 151 (see FIG. 7) and one end (front end) is connected to the contact member 161 so as not to rotate relative to each other. A transmission shaft rod portion 162 made of metal (made of brass in this embodiment), a driven member 163 connected to the other end (rear side end) of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as not to rotate relative to each other, and a transmission shaft rod portion. A known E-ring 164 fitted to both ends of 162 from the radial direction and a transmission shaft rod portion 162 are configured to be axially supportable, and the entire support case 170 is arranged in a case shape and inside the support case 170. It is provided with an illuminated substrate 180 to be installed.

The transmission shaft rod portion 162 is a columnar member having a perfect circular outer shape in the axial direction (front-back direction) of the middle abdomen, and is cut into a plane shape from a predetermined radial direction at both ends. The tip has a substantially D-shaped cross section. By fitting the both end portions with the insertion hole 161b of the contact member 161 and the insertion hole 163b of the driven member 163, the contact member 161, the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and the driven member 163 are relative to each other. It is connected so that it cannot rotate (integrally).

The abutting member 161 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 161a through which an insertion hole 161b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. The arm portion 161c extending outward from the base end portion 161a and having a substantially U-shaped front view is provided.

The driven member 163 is formed of a resin material, and is a through hole through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and has a base end portion 163a through which the inserted hole 163b having a D-shaped cross section is formed. The arm portion 163c, which extends straight toward the outside of the base end portion 161a and is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, is provided.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB1 is disposed on the upper surface of the driven member 163. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is fixed to the driven member 163 by engaging with the elastic claw 163d.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB1 are provided at both ends of the arm portion 163c in the radial direction, and the rail portions can guide the metal plate member MB1 only from the front side. It is formed (only the front side is fully open). When the metal plate member MB1 is slid along the rail portion, the elastic claw 163d is pushed down by the metal plate member MB1, and when the metal plate member MB1 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB1 is placed on the back side wall of the rail portion. The slide is restricted by hitting, and at that position, the elastic claw 163d is released from being pushed down by the metal plate member MB1 (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw 163d is made of metal. Engage so as to restrict the withdrawal of the plate member MB1 to the front side.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB1 to the driven member 163 is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB1 may be fastened and fixed to the driven member 163, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The support case 170 is arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B, the middle member 170M which is arranged on the front side of the rear member 170B and has a support hole 174 through which the transmission shaft rod portion 162 is inserted, and the middle member 170M thereof. It is provided with a front member 170F which is provided and has a decorative shape (wave pattern) formed on the front side, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) plate-shaped members are laminated in the front-rear direction and fastened and fixed.

The illumination board 180 is formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape in front view according to the shape of the front member 170F, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect. It includes a light emitting means 181, a connector 182 arranged as a portion to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of through holes 183 formed in an illuminated substrate 180 for assembly.

The light emitting means 181 is a strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 and a weak light emitting means arranged outside the light transmitting hole 177 (arranged to face the back surface of the plate of the front member 170F) in a front view. 181b and the like.

The through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction of inclination. As a result, it is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172 whose outer shape is formed in a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front.

That is, while the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is tilted (see FIG. 10), the protruding direction of the protruding cylindrical portion 172 is not tilted (in the front-rear direction), so that it is compared with the case of assembling in the same direction. Assembling defects (not assembled or loosened) are likely to occur, but in the present embodiment, the through hole 183 is formed in a long oval shape along the direction in which the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined. It is possible to take a large margin of the through hole 183 along the direction of inclination, and it is possible to easily assemble the through hole 183 to the projecting columnar portion 172.

The illuminated substrate 180 is housed between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M. At this time, the illuminated substrate 180 is in a posture in which the front surface of the plate faces diagonally downward (the normal line is inclined downward on the front side). Will be done. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the window movable unit 150 in line XX of FIG. For ease of understanding, the rear member 170B is not shown, and the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is shown by an imaginary line. The XX rays are arranged so as to pass through the center of the upper protruding cylindrical portion 172. In the following description, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

The mode of the wall-shaped portion on the front side of the middle member 170M differs between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. That is, the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is configured as a non-sloping wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces the horizontal direction), and the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD is an inclined wall-shaped portion (the normal line faces downward on the front side). Is configured as.

With respect to the wall-shaped portions having different normals, the illuminated substrate 180 is supported so that the back surface of the plate is in a posture along the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD (a posture in which the normals are inclined downward on the front side). That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the direction of the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 of the illuminated substrate 180 is inclined downward on the front side.

The middle member 170M includes a projecting frame portion 171 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of projecting columnar portions projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side inside the projecting frame portion. It is provided with 172 and a wiring through hole 173 drilled in the front-rear direction in an arrangement surrounding the connector 182 at the left and right outer (left) corners.

The projecting frame portion 171 comes into contact with the outer frame portion of the front member 170F in the front-rear direction to seal the periphery of the illuminated substrate 180. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized from between the front member 170F and the middle member 170M, and it is possible to prevent light leakage from occurring from the same position.

The projecting columnar portion 172 includes a large-diameter seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion, and is assembled so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 183 of the illuminated substrate 180. The back surface of the illuminated substrate 180 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be stabilized.

Here, the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 arranged in the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU is higher than the seating portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 arranged in the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD. As a result, the illuminated substrate 180 assembled in the above-mentioned inclined posture can be stably supported, and a gap can be secured between the upper side wall-shaped portion 170MU and the illuminated substrate 180.

The protruding tip of the seat portion of the protruding columnar portion 172 is formed as an inclined surface (an inclined surface configured so that the protrusion length becomes shorter toward the lower side) according to the posture of the illuminated substrate 180. .. As a result, it is possible to impart not only the function of stabilizing the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180 but also the function of stabilizing the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 to the projecting cylindrical portion 172.

The wiring through hole 173 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring connected to the connector 182 of the illumination board 180. Since the posture of the lighting board 180 can be maintained by the load applied to the lighting board 180 via the electrical wiring, the posture of the lighting board 180 can be stably supported without fastening and fixing the lighting board 180. can do.

The front member 170F is formed of a colored (white in the present embodiment) and light-transmitting resin material so that the back side surface is substantially parallel to the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction. A left-right view L that connects a plurality of light transmission holes 177, a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 projecting in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the back surface side, and a frame portion forming the back surface of the plate and the outer periphery. It is provided with a character-shaped L-shaped support portion 179.

The light transmission hole 177 is formed so as to surround any of the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 181 in a front view. As a result, the mode in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the back surface side of the light transmitting hole 177 and the other light emitting means 181 are visually recognized from the front side of the front member 170F changes. That is, the inside of the light transmitting hole 177 can be visually recognized as if it emits stronger light than the other parts.

A plurality of the projecting columnar portions 178 are formed with substantially the same projecting length. As a result, the illumination substrate 180 in the inclined posture is surface-supported at a plurality of positions while making the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illumination substrate 180 uniform over the entire arrangement range of the illumination substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

That is, since the illuminated substrate 180 is in an inclined posture in which the front surface of the board faces downward on the front side, it is preferable to support the illuminated substrate 180 from the front side in order to maintain that posture, but a large-area support portion is provided at one place. When the illuminated substrate 180 is supported, the area in which the light emitting means 181 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged tends to be limited. When the area of the support portion is reduced by giving priority to the distributable area of the light emitting means 181, the posture of the illuminated substrate 180 collapses and the distance between the main body plate portion of the front member 170F and the illuminated substrate 180 is the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 180. There was a risk that variations would easily occur in the range, and unevenness in the light emission mode would easily occur.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small-diameter projecting columnar portions 178 having the same projecting height are provided so that the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 can be supported at a plurality of points at the same time. Therefore, a plurality of projecting columnar portions 178 for supporting the illuminated substrate 180 can be arranged at a plurality of small gap positions generated between the adjacent light emitting means 181. As a result, it is possible to improve the stability of the support of the illuminated substrate 180 while maintaining the degree of freedom in arranging the light emitting means 181 and suppressing unevenness in the light emitting mode.

The L-shaped support portion 179 is arranged to face the upper surface and the front surface of the illuminated substrate 180 in the assembled state, and functions to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180. That is, the lower portion of the L-shaped support portion 179, which is arranged to face the front surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 180, supports and prevents the illuminated substrate 180 from tipping forward due to its own weight.

Further, the rear portion of the L-shaped support portion 179 and the illumination substrate 180 which are arranged to face the upper surface of the plate of the illumination substrate 180 are usually arranged with a gap, so that the illumination substrate 180 is loosely supported while being loosely supported. The vertical displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 can be minimized.

A support portion having the same shape as the L-shaped support portion 179 is also formed on the front side of the lower side wall-shaped portion 170MD of the middle member 170M (formed at two positions on the left and right), and is formed on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 180. And, it is arranged to face the back surface and functions to suppress the displacement of the illumination substrate 180. That is, in the present embodiment, the L-shaped support portions arranged above and below the illuminated substrate 180 are configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the illuminated substrate 180 in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 180 is not directly fastened and fixed, but is stably supported by being sandwiched and supported by the front member 170F and the middle member 170M from the front and back. There is. This is because, for example, if the middle member 170M and the illuminated substrate 180 are fastened and fixed to form a single rigid body, the illuminated substrate 180 may vibrate under the influence of the vibration generated in the middle member 170M. , It is a measure in consideration of it.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the illumination board 180 is not fastened and fixed to the middle member 170M or the front member 170F, even if the middle member 170M or the front member 170F vibrates, It is possible to independently maintain the arrangement of the illumination substrate 180.

Here, it is considered that the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 arranged on the back side of the middle member 170M is likely to cause the vibration of the middle member 170M, but in the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 has an upper side wall shape. It is arranged on the opposite side (back side) of the illuminated substrate 180 with a gap generated on the front side of the portion 170MU.

With this configuration, the vibration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is transmitted to the illuminated substrate 180 via the small-diameter projecting columnar portion 172, so that the vibration of the vibration solenoid SOL1 is alleviated by the deformation of the projecting columnar portion 172. It is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the illuminated substrate 180. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being directly transmitted from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 as the vibration source to the illuminated substrate 180.

The middle member 170M has a support hole 174 formed in the front-rear direction with a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission shaft rod portion 162 so as to be able to rotatably support the transmission shaft rod portion 162, and below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. It includes a lower regulating portion 175 that is disposed and an upper regulating portion 176 that is disposed on the opposite side of the support hole 174 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1.

The driven member 163 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 11A), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the magnetic force (electromagnetic force). The metal plate member MB1 is attracted and upwardly displaced. That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB1 is displaced between the ascending position where the metal plate member MB1 is arranged as a result of being increased by the electromagnetic force and the descending position where the metal plate member MB1 is arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and being lowered by its own weight. The contact member 161 and the driven member 163 are rotationally displaced. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12.

FIG. 11A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 11B is a front view of the window movable unit 150. Further, FIG. 12A is a rear view of the window movable unit 150, and FIG. 12B is a front view of the window movable unit 150.

In addition, in FIG. 11A and FIG. 11B, a state in which electricity is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the driven member 163 is tilted by its own weight (state in the lowered position) is shown in FIG. In (a) and 12 (b), a state (a state of an ascending position) in which the metal plate member MB1 and the driven member 163 are raised by an electromagnetic force generated by supplying electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 11 (a) and 12 (a), the rear member 170B is omitted for ease of understanding, and in FIGS. 11 (b) and 12 (b), the outer shape of the displacement member 151 is omitted. The shape of the open portion on the back side is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 12A, the driven member 163 abuts on the cushion portion 175a attached to the upper surface of the lower regulating portion 175 at the descending position, and the descending displacement is regulated to ascend. At the position, it comes into contact with the cushion portion 176a attached to the lower surface of the upper regulating portion 176, and the ascending displacement is regulated.

The materials of the cushion portions 175a and 176a are not limited in any way. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as a melamine resin, a polyurethane or an epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the cushion portions 175a and 176a may be made of the same material or may be made of different materials.

Here, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the transmission shaft rod portion 162) with reference to the transmission shaft rod portion 162. explain.

First, since the load applied to the lower regulating portion 175 via the driven member 163 is a load generated mainly by the own weight of the driven member 163, the driven member 163 is supported by supporting the center of gravity of the driven member 163. Can be stably supported. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 175 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the driven member 163 (the position substantially at the center of the arm length).

On the other hand, since the load applied to the upper regulating portion 176 via the driven member 163 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the arrangement of the upper regulating member 176 is arranged as the driven member 163. There are few advantages related to the position of the center of gravity of. In the present embodiment, the upper regulation member 176 is arranged to face the rotational tip of the driven member 163 to reduce the load transmitted to the upper regulation member 176 via the driven member 163.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the position away from the rotation axis of the driven member 163 (the position where the arm related to the moment is long) is transmitted via the driven member 163. Since the load is reduced, the load transmitted to the upper regulating member 176 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulation member 176 occurs at the rotational tip portion of the driven member 163. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 176a is shortened (cushion). It is made shorter than the width dimension of the portion 175a). As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the driven member 163 and stably generate the load transmission at the rotating tip.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the driven member 163 bounces after colliding with the cushion portion 176a.

On the other hand, by increasing the width dimension (radial width) of the cushion portion 175a of the lower regulation portion 175 (longer than the width dimension of the cushion portion 176a), the area of the surface receiving the load can be increased, and the cover can be covered. The pressure (stress) generated in the cushion portion 175a due to the load due to the weight of the driving member 163 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the driven member 163 after colliding with the cushion portion 175a.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the driven member 163 while reducing the load transmitted to the cushion portions 175a and 176a via the driven member 163 when the displacement is performed in both the upper and lower directions.

Below the upper regulating portion 176, a protruding portion 176b is formed so as to project in a curved shape on the back surface side of the middle member 170M. The projecting portion 176b is arranged so as to face the rotating tip portion of the driven member 163, and when the driven member 163 is displaced to the front side, the driven member 163 is suppressed in contact with the driven member 163 in a small area. Guide the rotation of.

As shown in FIGS. 11B and 12B, the tip portion 153 of the displacement member 151 is arranged on the front side of the strong light emitting means 181a arranged inside the light transmitting hole 177 in front view. Therefore, the light emitted from the strong light emitting means 181a is visually recognized by the player via the tip portion 153.

As described above, the internal shape of the effect unit 153a allows the player who visually recognizes the effect unit 153a to visually recognize the entire effect unit 153a as if it is shining (pale). While the actual arrangement of the means 181a does not change, the change in the light emitting mode of the effect unit 153a can be suppressed even in a situation where the displacement member 151 is displaced.

In other words, the light visually recognized through the production unit 153a can be visually recognized by the player as if it is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the production unit 153a, so that the LED or the like can be seen inside the production unit 153a. The light emitting means of the above is arranged, and it is possible to give the illusion that the light emitting means is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the effect unit 153a.

On the other hand, since the weak light emitting means 181b can be made to appear to emit light at a fixed position, the weak light emitting means 181b arranged on the illuminated substrate 180 is arranged while adopting the illuminated substrate 180 having a fixed arrangement. It can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light at a fixed position, and the strong light emitting means 181a also arranged on the illumination substrate 180 can be visually recognized as if it is emitting light while being displaced.

As a result, a single electric circuit with a fixed arrangement can be used to create a light-emitting effect that tends to be achieved by adopting multiple illuminated substrates, with the first substrate in a fixed arrangement and the second substrate being displaceable. It can be realized by using a decorative substrate. As a result, the number of illuminated substrates can be reduced while achieving the same effect.

It will be described back to FIG. The operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 300. The operation unit 300 includes a bottom wall portion 311 and a box-shaped back case 310 whose front side is open from the outer wall portion 312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 311.

The back case 310 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 311a in the center of the bottom wall portion 311. The opening 311a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The operation unit 300 is arranged in the internal space of the rear case 310 with the first operation unit 400 in which the movable device is displaceably arranged in a path including the upper side of the opening 311a, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 311a to produce light emission. The left and right effect unit 600 for performing the above and the like and the second operation unit 700 arranged under the opening 311a are respectively housed, and this is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operating unit 400 is arranged at a position above the opening 311a, and the second operating unit 700 is arranged at a position below the opening 311a on the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310, respectively. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which the first operating unit 400 and the second operating unit 700 are mounted on the rear case 310.

The back case 310 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 312, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 313 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 313 is fastened to the base plate 60 with a positioning convex portion 313a that is projected toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with the fitting recess 60b formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The rear case 310 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 313a into the fitting recess 60b (see FIG. 6), and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 313b and screwed into the base plate 60. As a result, the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting recess 60b may be used, or the fitting gap may be increased in consideration of workability during assembly. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape). Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess 60b is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 313a is also rectangular correspondingly.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 13, in the present embodiment, many support plate portions 313 are densely arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310, and the formation of the support plate portion 313 is reduced on the right side and the lower side. However, this is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement of the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 as a whole and the space efficiency.

That is, when the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of plywood on which veneer boards are overlapped as in the present embodiment, the movable member arranged on the back side of the game board 13 passes through the meat portion of the base plate 60. Is invisible, so that the entire back surface side of the area where the base plate 60 of the game board 13 can be opened (concave from the side surface) is effective as an effect area for arranging the movable members so as to be visible.

On the other hand, at the portion where the support plate portion 313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case 310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion 313 in the front view. The area that can be arranged is narrowed. Therefore, if it is possible to maintain the strength problem even if the support plate portion 313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the arrangement range of the movable member by omitting the support plate portion 313. That is.

In the present embodiment, the fact that many support plate portions 313 are arranged on the left side and the upper side of the back case 310 is related to the range of the area where the player can see the ball fired in the game area or the like. That is, the support plate portion 313 is formed at a position other than the range where the launched ball can be visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (FIG. 4) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball preventing member 68 in the gaming area. Introduced in, and thereafter configured to flow down the game area. In the ball game, the part that is considered to attract the most attention is the part through which the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area opposite to the third symbol display device 81 with the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 sandwiched between them). ) Is usually low in attention.

Therefore, as a range that the sphere cannot reach, the lower left and upper left parts based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right parts based on the upward convex arc. It is thought that the player's attention to the game will be low.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member 73 and the surfaces of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left are formed in a shape along the outer rail 62 and arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The block-shaped member 74 is made of a light-impermeable resin material, and the game board 13 is made of a veneer board that does not easily transmit light in the first place. In addition, the outer edge member 73 is formed from the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the game board 13 cannot be visually recognized via the block-shaped member 74 or the block-shaped member 74.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion 313 is preferentially arranged in the places where the attention is low or invisible. In fact, even in the left side portion and the upper portion where many support plate portions 313 are formed, the support plate portion 313 is formed near the corner portion of the back case 310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62. Will be done.

In other words, by selecting the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion 313 from the locations with low visibility (low production ability) in the first place, the rigidity of the operation unit 300 and the game board 13 as a whole is increased. While achieving the effect of securing, it is possible to secure a high degree of freedom in designing the area within the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

From this point of view, since there is a common configuration in pachinko machines in which the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, the range in which the ball does not flow down is the lower left and upper left. It can be easily arranged in the portion and the upper right portion.

The substantially lower half of the outer wall portion 312 on the right side is provided with a notch portion 312a that is notched (notched is formed) toward the back surface side. The cutout portion 312a is cut out below the strip-shaped portion 93 (see FIG. 5) of the game board 13 in the front view, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), a gap is provided between the cutout portion 312a and the game board 13. Form.

By forming the notch portion 312a in this way, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the gap formed by the notch 312a can function as a wiring thread through which the electrical wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 passes to the outside of the rear case 310. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the electrical wiring interferes with other components as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

Further, the gap formed by the notch portion 312a can be used as an arrangement space having a configuration required for the variable winning device 65. The configuration required for the variable winning device 65 includes, for example, a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path through which a sphere flows, a substrate that accompanies a light emitting effect, a detection sensor that detects a sphere, and other structures. Is exemplified.

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily made visible to the player as light having a blurred outline. In other words, as compared with the case where the entire circumference of the back case 310 is connected to the game board 13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board 13 is formed along the shape of the back case 310). Therefore, the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board 13 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of the light visually recognized through the game board 13 depends on the shape of the back case 310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect.

Further, as compared with the case where the electric wiring connected to the light emitting means such as the LED is arranged so as to be exposed to the outside of the operation unit 300 along the back surface of the game board 13, the electric wiring is operated through the notch 312a. A configuration like the present embodiment in which the unit 300 is exposed to the outside can reduce the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED.

That is, by configuring the electric wiring so that it can be taken out of the operation unit 300 without turning it to the front side of the LED, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring blocks the light emitted from the LED. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the effect of the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED.

The formation length (vertical length) of the notch portion 312a is not limited at all. For example, the cutout portion 312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions 313.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening and fixing with the game board 13 is omitted on the right side portion of the rear case 310. Therefore, when considering the rigidity on the right side portion of the game board 13, the rigidity of the operating unit 300 is relied on. Can't.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate-shaped member 75 made of metal is arranged on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board 13. Hereinafter, the metal plate-shaped member 75 will be described.

FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75, and FIG. 15 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13, the outer edge member 73, and the metal plate-shaped member 75. In addition, in FIGS. 14 and 15, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown as a single unit, and the other members arranged on the game board 13 are not shown.

The outer edge member 73 is formed of a resin material, has an arc wall portion 73a forming an upper portion and has an arc shape on the inner side surface, and a thin wall shape extending downward from the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. A vertical wall portion 73b and an inclined wall portion 73c formed having an upper surface that is inclined downward from the lower end portion of the vertical wall portion 73b to the left are provided. In this way, by forming the outer edge member 73 with a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member 73 is compared with the case where the outer edge member 73 is formed of a plurality of members that are vertically divided. The man-hours for assembling to the game board 13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b is formed by bending a plurality of plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 projecting in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion and bending in a U-shape in the vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion. A columnar projecting portion 73b3 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back side at a joint portion between the plurality of bent portions 73b2 and the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and being attached to and fastened to the columnar projecting portion 73b3. A fastening portion 73b4, which is formed so that a screw can be screwed in, is provided.

The bent portion 73b2 is arranged at an intermediate position of the arrangement interval of the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1. As a result, in relation to the metal plate-shaped member 75 described later, the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is suppressed while suppressing the number of seam penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75. Can be improved.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate-shaped member 75, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 form the metal plate-shaped member 75. Since resistance to bending can be generated, the load generated at one location can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-shaped projecting portions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed, so that the load generated when the metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being generated.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 is bent back to the left at the main body plate portion 75a formed without creases in the longitudinal direction and the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a while being folded back in the lateral direction. A plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the joint portion between the bent portion 75b and the main body plate portion 75a and the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of seam penetrating portions 75c formed through the upper and lower ends of the bent portion 75b in the front-rear direction. A through hole 75d and an insertion hole 75e in which a fastening screw is inserted into a plate portion provided on the plate portion on which the through hole 75d is formed and stepped toward the front side are provided.

The metal plate-shaped member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the long direction because the bent portion 75b is formed in the vertical direction in addition to the way in which the main body plate portion 75a is folded. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b which is easily curved in the long direction.

The seam penetrating portion 75c is formed in a size capable of inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 through the seam penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate-shaped member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and a columnar protrusion is provided. The portion 73b3 is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this way, the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e into the fastening portion 73b4.

From the above configuration, since the metal plate-shaped member 75 is arranged above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the columnar projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate-shaped member 75 and extend to the back surface side, and the tip portion thereof engages with the game board 13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate-shaped member 75 and the game board 13 will be described.

The game board 13 accepts a plurality of recessed portions 13e recessed so as to accept the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 on the right edge of the front surface, and a cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 on the upper side and the lower side of the recessed portion 13e. A plurality of positioning holes 13f, which are formed as recesses as possible recesses, are provided.

When the outer edge member 73 and the metal plate-shaped member 75 are assembled to the game board 13 in an integrated state, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 is received in the recessed portion 13e and the circular projecting portion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, respectively. And positioned. That is, the plate-shaped projecting portion 73b1 and the circular projecting portion 73b3 are used not only for positioning with the metal plate-shaped member 75 but also for positioning with the game board 13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the bending of the vertical wall portion 73b, it is not necessary to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b by itself, and the vertical wall portion 73b does not need to be sufficiently rigid. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Further, since the deformation of the game board 13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, even if there is a gap between the game board 13 and the back case 310, the game board 13 The shape can be maintained.

It will be described back to FIG. 5 and FIG. The first operation unit 400 is arranged on the upper side of the third symbol display device 81 of the operation unit 300. The first operation unit 400 includes a light emitting effect device LA1 that can be displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 5 and 13 to the position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, and displays the display of the third symbol display device 81. It is a device that visually entertains the player by controlling the displacement in synchronization with the operation of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. The details of the first operation unit 400 will be described below.

16 and 17 are partial front views of the operating unit 300. FIG. 16 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 17 shows a retracted state in which each component of the first operation unit 400 retracts to the upper side of the third symbol display device 81. 3 The overhanging state of overhanging (descending) toward the symbol display device 81 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal shape of the back case 310 is not symmetrically formed. In particular, regarding the upper side wall (ceiling surface), the right side of the front view is lower than the left side of the front view due to the relationship with the shape of the tank 130 of the payout unit 93 (see FIG. 3). That is, where the tank 130 is arranged on the upper right side of the operating unit 300, the upper side wall of the back case 310 is arranged at a position where the right side is lower than the left side in order to secure the arrangement area. It is installed (arranged along the wall model line UL).

As described above, inside the rear case 310, it is easier to secure a larger area on the left side than on the right side (there is a margin in the ceiling height). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring An auxiliary device that does not directly affect the appearance of the production such as SP1 (not intended to be visually recognized by the player) is arranged on the left side.

As a result, the drive motor MT1 and the coil spring SP1 can be arranged by effectively utilizing the recess (gap portion) generated by the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310, and the lower edge of the first operation unit 400 has a symmetrical shape. However, since it can be moved to the upper side as much as possible, it is possible to easily secure a large vertical dimension of the visible area of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the shapes of the pinnate member 460 (see FIG. 16) of the first operating unit 400, in the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, in accordance with the left-right asymmetrical shape of the upper wall of the rear case 310. The shape of the side that faces the upper wall of the rear case 310 is designed. That is, the pinnate member 460 on the left side is designed to project toward the upper wall side of the back case 310 as compared with the pinnate member 460 on the right side.

The pinnate member 460 is configured to be united by changing the state of the first operation unit 400 from the retracted state to the overhanging state and to be visually recognized integrally, and is designed to have a symmetrical shape in this state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the left and right pinnate members 460 are formed in an asymmetrical shape.

In the present embodiment, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the asymmetrical portion of the pinnate member 460 (the upper side that abuts when united) is hidden by the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), so that the left and right wings It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the shape member 460 is formed in an asymmetrical shape.

18 and 19 are front perspective views of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 20 and 21 are rear perspective views of the first operating unit 400. 18 and 20 show the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIGS. 19 and 21 show the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

In the first operation unit 400, when the drive motor MT1 is rotationally driven, the arm member 414 rotates and moves via a plurality of gears interposed between the drive motor MT1, and the elevating plate 430 moves up and down in synchronization with the rotational movement.

The elevating plate 430 is supported by a metal rail 405 made of metal that is arranged at substantially the center position on the left and right and is vertically expandable and contractable, and an auxiliary arm member 444 that is arranged on the left and right opposite sides of the arm member 414. Rail.

The elevating plate 430 is provided with a relative displacement member 442 that is relatively displaced in the vertical direction in synchronization with the posture change of the auxiliary arm member 444, and rotates symmetrically in synchronization with the displacement of the relative displacement member 442. A plurality of displaced pinnate members 460 are displaced.

Therefore, the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 are displaced between the retracted state and the extended state in a displacement mode in which raising and lowering and rotation are combined with the driving of the drive motor MT1. As a result, although the single drive motor MT1 is used, the constituent members can be displaced in a plurality of directions, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper end position portion of the arcuate gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to project upward from the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430. To. In the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 is shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and is difficult to see. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the gear portion 444b is overhanging.

On the other hand, since the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 to the overhanging state, the auxiliary arm member 444 rotates from the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state. The arcuate gear portion 444b (see FIG. 27), which overhangs upward, is displaced downward with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 and is hidden below the upper edge of the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 28).

In this way, the position where the arcuate gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 is allowed to protrude (protrude) from the elevating plate 430 at a position shielded by the base plate 60 in terms of arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 is not shielded by the base plate 60. By configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be displaced so as to hide the overhanging portion on the back side of the elevating plate 430 until it is displaced to, the auxiliary arm member 444 is always concealed on the back side of the elevating plate 430. The degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 and the elevating plate 430 can be improved as compared with the case.

For example, since the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 can be arranged on the lower side, it is possible to easily avoid interference between the upper edge portion of the elevating plate 430 and the outer wall portion 312 on the upper part of the back case 310 (FIG. 16).

Further, by configuring the auxiliary arm member 444 to be rotationally displaced, a rack gear-like portion (a portion having gear teeth formed along a straight line) is maintained on the third symbol display device 81 side while being overhanging. It is possible to secure a sufficient overhang length of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side while avoiding the above.

That is, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the elevating plate 430 side of the main body plate portion 401 and is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441, the elevating plate 430 is displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430. The relative displacement member 442 can be displaced vertically, but in this case, it is necessary to always dispose the fixed rack gear-shaped portion along the position where the elevating plate 430 is arranged. Therefore, if a configuration in which most of the elevating plate 430 projects downward from the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401 like the elevating plate 430 of the present embodiment is diverted, the fixed rack gear-shaped portion is used as the lower edge of the main body plate portion 401. It was necessary to form the third symbol display device 81 so as to project from the side.

Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by a fixed rack gear-like portion, which causes a problem that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates, and the rack gear on the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400. For the purpose of hiding the shaped portion, there is a possibility that the design freedom of the evacuation plate 430 may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the variable auxiliary arm member 444 is adopted instead of the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, it is hidden on the back side thereof according to the displacement of the elevating plate 430. ) Auxiliary arm member 444 can be arranged. Therefore, while avoiding the situation where the rack gear-shaped portion is maintained overhanging on the third symbol display device 81 side, the overhang length (displacement amount) of the elevating plate 430 toward the third symbol display device 81 side is sufficiently sufficient. Can be secured.

22 (a) and 23 are exploded front perspective views of the first operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 (b) shows the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 460 showing the meshing state of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. It is a front perspective view of the member 470, and FIGS. 24 and 25 are an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 400.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a), 23, 24 and 25, the first operating unit 400 is formed of a resin material in the shape of a long plate on the left and right, and the bottom of the back case 310 (see FIG. 16). A transmission unit 410 composed of a main body plate 401 fastened and fixed to the wall 311 and a plurality of members rotatably supported by the main body plate 401, and connected to the tip of an arm member 414 of the transmission unit 410. A back arrangement plate 420 composed of a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged on the same plane including the connecting plate portion 421 to be formed, and the back arrangement plate 420 arranged on the front side of the back arrangement plate 420, and the back arrangement plate 420 is fastened and fixed. The elevating plate 430 and the synchronous operation unit 440 supported between the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 of the rear arrangement plate 420 are provided (see FIGS. 23 and 25).

In addition, the first operation unit 400 is rotatably supported by a plate-shaped support plate portion 450 that is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the support plate portion 450, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the synchronous operation unit 440. A pair of left and right pinnate members 460 that are rotationally displaced by a load given by the displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and an auxiliary member 470 that rotates synchronously with the pinnate member 460 are provided (FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (FIG. 22). b) and FIG. 24).

The main body plate portion 401 includes a shaft strut portion 402 that pivotally supports the transmission gear 412, a terminal support portion 403 that is arranged at the lower right portion thereof and supports the terminal gear 413, and an arm support portion that is a columnar portion that supports the arm member 414. 404, a metal rail 405 arranged in the center of the left and right and fixed on the back side so that the front side can be displaced vertically, and a long opening on the right side of the metal rail 405. The elongated hole portion 406, the lid portion 407 that covers the region formed from the light-transmitting resin material into a plate shape and formed the elongated hole portion 406 from the back surface side, and the detection sensor SC1 for detecting the state. To be equipped.

The end support portion 403 includes a shaft strut portion 403a formed in the same shape as the shaft strut portion 402, an annular protrusion 403b projecting along a circle centered on the shaft strut portion 403a, and an annular protrusion thereof. A stopper portion 403c is provided so as to project to the front side in a fan shape at a position between the protrusion portion 403b and the shaft support portion 403a. The stopper portion 403c is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion.

The lid portion 407 closes the region where the elongated hole portion 406 is formed. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the electrical wiring DH1 that passes through the wiring through hole 401a formed through the main body plate portion 401 from the front side of the main body plate portion 401 and reaches the back side of the elongated hole portion 406 is the elongated hole. It is guided to the front side through the part 406. Therefore, in a situation where there is no lid portion 407 and the back surface side is open, the electrical wiring DH1 projects to the back surface side, and during the assembly work, between the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 13) of the rear case 310 and the main body plate portion 401. There is a risk of being pinched by. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the area where the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is partitioned by the lid portion 407, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from being sandwiched between the bottom wall portion 311 and the main body plate portion 401. Can be done.

As a result, the first operation unit 400 can be assembled to the rear case 310 without checking the arrangement of the electrical wiring DH1, so that the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

The transmission unit 410 includes a drive gear 411 that is non-rotatably connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MT1, a transmission gear 412 that is meshed with the drive gear 411 and rotatably supported by a shaft strut portion 402. The terminal gear 413 that is meshed with the transmission gear 412 and rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 403a, and the arm member 414 that is pivotally supported by the arm support portion 404 so that the posture can be changed with the rotation of the terminal gear 413. Be prepared.

The end gear 413 has a gap between the annular protrusion 413a, which is projected toward the back side in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 403b, and the inner surface of the annular protrusion 413a. A stoppered portion 413b that is projected in a fan shape like the stopper portion 403c, a cylindrical overhanging portion 413c that projects cylindrically to the front side at an eccentric position away from the shaft strut portion 403a, and the front surface of the gear portion. It is provided with a detected portion 413d extending in a fan shape in the outer diameter direction from a flange portion formed in a flange shape on the side.

The annular protrusion 413a is arranged so that the side surface on the shaft side faces the annular protrusion 403b, and the annular protrusion 403b is sandwiched between the annular protrusion 403b and the stoppered portion 413b. That is, the annular protrusion 403b serves as a guide rail for guiding the rotation of the terminal gear 413.

The stoppered portion 413b is formed by general compression molding, and the opposite side of the protruding portion is formed as a recessed portion. The stoppered portion 413b interferes with the stopper portion 403c in the direction of rotation thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is limited by the size of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b in the circumferential direction. That is, the end gear 413 is rotationally displaced at a rotational angle of less than 360 degrees.

When designing the shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b, the rotation angle required for the terminal gear 413 is calculated, and the remaining angle (the angle obtained by subtracting the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 from 360 degrees) is calculated. The shapes of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b may be designed at bisected angles. As a result, it is possible to prevent one of the stopper portion 403c and the stoppered portion 413b from becoming weak in strength, so that the useful life of the first operating unit 400 can be extended.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 413c is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to a resin end gear 413. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip portion, and the arm member 414 is connected and supported to the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c so as not to fall off.

The detected unit 413d is formed with a thickness that allows it to pass through the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. When the detected unit 413d is detected by the detection sensor SC1, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the first operation unit. It can be determined that 400 is in the retracted state.

The arm member 414 includes an annular portion 414a rotatably supported by the arm support portion 404, a plate-shaped portion 414b extending radially from the front side portion of the annular portion 414a, and a plate-shaped portion 414b thereof. An intermediate plate portion 414c that is arranged in parallel with respect to the portion 414b and is connected to an extended end portion of the plate-shaped portion 414b, and an elongated hole portion that is bored in the intermediate plate portion 414c in an elongated hole shape. The tip plate portion 414e which is arranged by translating the 414d and the intermediate plate portion 414c toward the back side and is connected to the extended end portion of the intermediate plate portion 414c, and the front side from the extended tip of the tip plate portion 414e. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 414f that projects into a columnar shape.

The elongated hole portion 414d is formed in a size that allows the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 to be inserted, and the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the elongated hole portion 414d.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is a brass metal rod, and is fitted and fixed to the resin tip plate portion 414e. A ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction and a known E-ring E1 are arranged at the overhanging tip of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f, and the connecting plate portion 421 of the back arrangement plate 420 cannot be removed. It is connected and supported by the overhanging portion 414f.

FIG. 26 is a top view of the first operation unit 400. In FIG. 26, the second intermediate position of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and for easy understanding, the coil spring SP1, the fixed pulley to which the coil spring SP1 is guided, the drive motor MT1, and the drive motor MT1 thereof. The illustration of the base plate to which is fastened and fixed is omitted.

According to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is designed so that a large area on the front side of the arm member 414 can be secured. That is, by forming the arm member 414 in a shape that is bent back and forth, interference with other members can be functionally avoided. This will be described below.

The plate-shaped portion 414b is arranged on the front side of the detection sensor SC1 in order to avoid interference with the detection sensor SC1. That is, since the limitation of the front-rear position of the plate-shaped portion 414b is due to the relationship with the detection sensor SC1, the portion not related to the detection sensor SC1 (the portion opposite to the rotation axis (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1). Then, the front-rear position can be arbitrarily designed.

In the present embodiment, the intermediate plate portion 414c arranged at a position opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the detection sensor SC1 is arranged on the back side as compared with the plate-shaped portion 414b. As a result, the front-rear distance between the plate front surface of the terminal gear 413 and the arm member 414 can be narrowed, and the load can be transmitted to the arm member 414 on the root side of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. It is possible to prevent the load transmission efficiency from being lowered due to the deformation of the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c.

Further, since it is due to the relationship with the terminal gear 413 at the front-rear position of the intermediate plate portion 414c, the portion not related to the termination gear 413 (the portion opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the termination gear 413) The front-rear position can be designed arbitrarily.

In the present embodiment, the tip plate portion 414e arranged at a position opposite to the rotation shaft (arm support portion 404) with respect to the end gear 413 is arranged on the back side as compared with the intermediate plate portion 414c. As a result, a large space on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e can be secured. Therefore, the back arrangement plate 420 and the rear arrangement plate 420 arranged at a position on the front side of the tip plate portion 414e and the back side of the elevating plate 430. It is possible to easily secure the front-rear dimensions of the constituent members such as the synchronous operation unit 440.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the shape of the arm member 414 is set for the purpose of avoiding interference with other members, but there are other structural effects. For example, by forming the arm member 414 in a stepwise bending manner, it is possible to prevent the load generated on the arm member 414 from being locally (one point) concentrated (the stress concentration can be relaxed), and the arm member can be relaxed. The durability of 414 can be improved.

Further, by forming the minimum necessary gap to avoid interference with other members, it is possible to form a cohesive gap on the opposite side of the arm member 414 with respect to the other member for securing the gap. Therefore, it is possible to crawl the electric wiring (electrical wiring different from the electric wiring DH1) or dispose of an additional effect member (illumination board or the like) by utilizing the gap.

Further, according to FIG. 26, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 arranged so as to reach the light emitting effect device LA1 from the main body plate portion 401 side is unintentionally sandwiched or rotated by the pinnate member 460. It is configured to be able to prevent being bitten into the gear tooth portion of the gear 441 or the relative displacement member 442. This will be described below. In this description, FIG. 25 will be referred to as appropriate.

The electrical wiring DH1 is first guided from the main body plate portion 401 side through the elongated hole portion 406 to the auxiliary arm member 444. At this time, the electric wiring DH1 is passed through the extension portion 444c by being inserted into the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448.

Inside the extension portion 444c, the electric wiring DH1 is guided to the base end side portion 444a while being prevented from falling off by the retaining portion 444c1. After that, the electrical wiring DH1 is guided from the base end side portion 444a to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, and is an L-shaped region partitioned by a frame portion and a closing plate 428 projecting to the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425. To reach the through hole 427.

The frame portion projecting to the back surface side of the accommodating plate portion 425 is provided with an abbreviated portion 425b in which the protrusion is omitted over substantially half a circumference centering on the insertion hole 425a. The omitted portion 425b can provide an angle at which the electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the block plate 428 at 180 degrees. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is bent in the vicinity of the insertion hole 425a when the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotated.

The electrical wiring DH1 is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430 through the tubular portion 433 formed at a position overlapping the through hole 427 in the front-rear direction by passing through the through hole 427 to the front side, and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430. It is temporarily fastened to the fastening portion 451 of the 450 with a binding band or the like, and is connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board of the light emitting effect device LA1.

As described above, since the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the constituent members (auxiliary arm member 444 and the back surface arrangement plate 420) in most of the path, the electric wiring is the path as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 collides with other movable members and receives a load as compared with the case where it is exposed (exposed) in most cases.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 and the relative displacement member 442 that is slidably displaced are separated. That is, it is limited to the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 (rotational displacement accompanied by the sliding displacement of the rotating shaft) that can cause deformation such as bending or bending of the electric wiring DH1.

As a result, even when the displacement speed of the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 are configured to be significantly different, the relationship between the deformation of the electric wiring DH1 and the displacement speed of the relative displacement member 442 can be determined. By disconnecting, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from becoming large.

It will be described back to FIG. 22A, FIG. 23, FIG. 24 and FIG. The rear arrangement plate 420 is provided on the plate-shaped connecting plate portion 421 that is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 and fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430, and the elevating plate 430 that is arranged on the right side of the connecting plate portion 421. An L-shaped plate that is fastened and fixed and the front side member of the metal rail 405 is fastened and fixed to the accommodating plate portion 425 and the accommodating plate portion 425 that is fastened and fixed to partially close the back side portion of the accommodating plate portion 425. It is provided with a closed plate 428 having a shape.

The connecting plate portion 421 has an insertion elongated hole 422 formed in the main body plate portion in a long hole shape long in the left-right direction so that the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f can be inserted, and the front side and below the insertion elongated hole 422. A support box portion 423 formed in a box shape with an open upper side is provided.

Since the support box portion 423 is formed long downward with respect to the insertion slot 422, the rigidity of the accommodating plate portion 425 can be reinforced by using the support box portion 423. That is, the support box portion 423 is arranged to face the support wall portion 426 on the left and right, and when the support wall portion 426 is greatly bent to the left and deformed and comes into contact with the support box portion 423, the deformation is caused by the support box. It can be suppressed by the rigidity of the portion 423.

The accommodating plate portion 425 has a support wall portion 426 projecting to the front side in a straight plate shape along the vertical direction at the left edge portion of the main body plate portion, and a penetration formed on the front side of the closing plate 428. It is provided with a hole 427.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring DH1 is inserted into the through hole 427. That is, the through hole 427 is formed with an inner diameter through which a connector arranged at the end of the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted.

The closing plate 428 is formed so that the front surface of the plate abuts on the frame portion projecting in a frame shape on the back side of the accommodating plate portion 425, and partitions the area between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. It is composed. In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 is arranged only inside the frame portion of the accommodating plate portion 425 (front side of the closing plate 428). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from entering the metal rail 405 side (left side of the frame portion).

A deformed hole 428a is formed through the closing plate 428 so that the temporary fastening portion 425c, which is a portion protruding in a U shape on the back surface side at the position on the through hole 427 side of the omitted portion 425b, can be visually recognized from the rear view. To.

The deformed hole 428a is composed of a horizontally long shape portion having a left-right width slightly longer than the width of the temporary fastening portion 425c and a vertically long shape portion provided intersecting the horizontally long shape portion in order to secure an area through which a binding band can pass. It is formed.

The temporary fastening portion 425c serves as a fastening portion for the binding band. By temporarily fixing the electric wiring DH1 with a binding band, the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized. In this case, by tightening the binding band, the path of the electric wiring DH1 guided from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the closing plate 428 side can be brought closer to the closing plate 428 side, so that the insertion hole 425a of the accommodating plate portion 425 is centered. A gap can be provided between the edge portion of the semicircular plate portion and the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring DH1 from rubbing against the edge portion of the accommodating plate portion 425, so that the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be extended.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the binding band for temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 26) guided between the omitted portions 425b can be exposed from the deformed hole 428a of the closing plate 428, so that the binding band can be exposed. Replacement and assembly can be performed without removing the closing plate 428.

As a result, the position of the electrical wiring DH1 with respect to the constituent members of the first operation unit 400 is fixed (that is, the electrical wiring), that is, the temporary fastening position of the electrical wiring DH1 is the position between the accommodating plate portion 425 and the closing plate 428. The base end side portion of the auxiliary arm member 444, which is the first part to displace the electric wiring DH1 with respect to the elevating plate 430 when traveling along the path of the electric wiring DH1 from the light emitting effect device LA1 to which one end of the DH1 is connected. The binding band can be replaced without removing the closing plate 428 while temporarily fastening the electric wiring DH1 at the location overlapping the path to 444a). Therefore, the useful life of the electric wiring DH1 can be improved, and the maintainability of the binding band related to the electric wiring DH1 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, where the electric wiring DH1 crawls on the front side of the closing plate 428 along the shape of the closing plate 428, the closing plate 428 has an L-shaped rear view, so that the electric wiring DH1 is closed. The front side of the plate 428 is curved along a first plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, while it is curved along a second plane orthogonal to the left-right direction (a plane orthogonal to the first plane) near the through hole 427. become. As a result, the holding force for holding the electric wiring DH1 on the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate 425 can be improved, and the position of the electric wiring DH1 can be stabilized.

The elevating plate 430 includes a fastening portion 431 composed of a plurality of parts related to fastening and fixing the rear arrangement plate 420, a support portion 432 composed of a plurality of parts related to the support of the synchronous operation unit 440, and an electric wiring DH1. A tubular portion 433 formed so as to be insertable, a fastening portion 434 composed of a plurality of portions related to fastening and fixing of the support plate portion 450, and a plurality of fastening portions formed on the main body plate portion in order to avoid interference between the members. A coping portion 435 and a decorative portion 436 having a substantially symmetrical pattern on the front surface of the plate are provided.

The fastening portion 431 includes at least a pair of gourd-shaped protrusions 431a arranged at the lower end of the elevating plate 430 and supporting the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 (slide rack). Although the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is a portion that supports the relative displacement member 442, a female screw shape is formed from the tip thereof, and a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the accommodating plate portion 425 to the elevating plate 430 is screwed in. To. That is, it is also used as a portion related to fastening and fixing the back surface arrangement plate 420 and a portion related to supporting the synchronous operation unit 440.

The tubular portion 433 extends to the back surface side through a gap between the constituent members of the synchronous operation unit 440, and its rear end side abuts on the front surface of the accommodating plate portion 425. The inside of the tubular portion 433 is continuously connected. The electrical wiring DH1 is inserted back and forth through this continuously connected portion.

As the coping unit 435, for example, in order to avoid interference with the connecting portion between the fixed transmission plate 490 and the relative displacement member 442 (in this embodiment, the raised fastening portions arranged vertically), the main body plate portion is used. An arc-shaped gear portion recessed in a wall portion formed in a wall shape so as to protect the notch portion 435a cut out from the lower edge upward and the arc-shaped gear portion 444b of the auxiliary arm member 444 above the axis. An example is a recessed portion 435b or the like formed so as to avoid interference with the 444b.

The decorative portion 436 is arranged on the back side of the pinnate member 460 so that a series of patterns can be visually recognized in cooperation with the pinnate member 460 as the pinnate member 460 is displaced. It will be described later.

The synchronous operation unit 440 has a pair of rotary gears 441 that mesh with each other, a relative displacement member 442 that meshes with one of the rotary gears 441 and is formed so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction, and an elongated hole in the relative displacement member 442. An auxiliary arm member 444 having a pair of elongated holes 443 drilled in a shape, a rotary gear tooth that meshes with the other of the rotary gear 441, and an end that is fastened and fixed to the rotary tip of the auxiliary arm member 444 from the back side. A part side plate 448 is provided.

A gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is inserted through the elongated hole 443. By arranging the longitudinal direction of the gourd shape and the elongated direction of the elongated hole 443 substantially in parallel, the posture of the relative displacement member 442 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the area in contact with the elongated hole 443 can be reduced as compared with the case where the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a is formed in an oval shape, the gourd-shaped protrusion 431a and the relative displacement member 442 can be combined with each other. The frictional resistance generated between them can be reduced.

The auxiliary arm member 444 is an arc in which gear teeth are formed concentrically with the ring shape of the ring-shaped base end side portion 444a pivotally supported by the large-diameter protrusion 432a of the support portion 432 and the base end side portion 444a. It is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape arranged at the gear portion 444b, the extension portion 444c extending in the radial direction of the ring shape from the base end side portion 444a, and the extension tip portion of the extension portion 444c. It is provided with a tubular member 444d which is a portion and is configured such that the open portion inside the cylinder is continuously connected to the open portion of the extension portion 444c.

The base end side portion 444a has an insertion hole 425a into which a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip of the large diameter protrusion 432a is inserted in a state of being inserted into the large diameter protrusion 432a. Movement to the back side is restricted by the accommodating plate portion 425. That is, the base end side portion 444a is pivotally supported so as to face the elevating plate 430 and the accommodating plate portion 425 from the front and rear so as not to fall off.

The extension portion 444c is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and extends from one side in the lateral direction to the other side on the back side portion, and the short side of the electric wiring DH1 with the other side. A retaining portion 444c1 formed with a gap slightly longer than the directional dimension (width dimension) is provided. The retaining portion 444c1 has a role of preventing the electric wiring DH1 disposed inside the extension portion 444c from coming off after the electric wiring DH1 is passed between the extension portion 444c and the other side in the lateral direction. have.

The mode of the retaining portion 444c1 is not limited to this. For example, the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1 may be configured to be shorter than the lateral dimension (width dimension) of the electric wiring DH1. In this case, when assembling (inserting) the electric wiring DH1 into the gap between the extension portion 444c and the retaining portion 444c1, it is necessary to bend the retaining portion 444c1 to widen the gap. The effect of preventing the electric wiring DH1 from falling off can be improved.

As long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the vertical displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be minimized. It will be described later with reference to 30.

The tubular member 444d is designed so that its outer diameter is slightly shorter than the lateral dimension of the elongated hole portion 406, and is inserted through the elongated hole portion 406 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the elongated hole portion 406. It enables the sliding movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 and the rotational movement of the auxiliary arm member 444 along the above.

A through hole 448a through which the electric wiring DH1 can be inserted is formed in the end side plate 448, and the electric wiring DH1 inserted through the through hole 448a is a tubular portion 444d inserted through the elongated hole portion 406. It passes through the inside, passes through the inside of the extension portion 444c, is guided to the back side of the base end side portion 444a, and enters between the closing plate 428 and the accommodating plate portion 425. Then, it is guided to the front side through the through hole 427 and the tubular portion 433.

Since the electric wiring DH1 is passed through in this way, the inner shape of the through hole 448a is formed larger than the outer shape of the connector connected to the end portion of the electric wiring DH1. In other words, the through hole 448a is formed in a size that allows the connector to be inserted.

The through hole 448a is formed not only in the central portion of the end side plate 448 but also in a deformed shape including a region eccentric to the outside of the diameter, and in particular, a large opening is formed on the extension portion 444c side. Therefore, regardless of the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444, the electric wiring DH1 can be moved toward the extension portion 444c side, so that the electric wiring DH1 is largely arranged with respect to the auxiliary arm member 444 as the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes. It is possible to avoid changing (rambling).

In addition, the through hole 448a is extended counterclockwise in the rear view with respect to the extension portion 444c side on the outer diameter side portion of the end side plate 448. With this extension, the opening range of the through hole 448a in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 can be expanded to the right side, so that the lateral displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be suppressed.

In this case, even in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the end side plate 448 is displaced to the left and right when the elevating plate 430 is displaced up and down, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is caused by changing the direction of the through hole 448a. It can function to be mitigated. Therefore, the displacement width required for the electric wiring DH1 can be shortened as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448, so that the extra length of the wiring set in consideration of the displacement of the electric wiring DH1 is shortened. At the same time, the load applied to the electric wiring DH1 from the end side plate 448 can be reduced.

A fixed transmission plate 490 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442. That is, in the same way that the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced, the support plate portion 450 that is fastened and fixed to the elevating plate 430 and the fixed transmission plate 490 that is fastened and fixed to the relative displacement member 442 are relatively displaced. To do.

The support plate portion 450 is a plate-shaped member in which the light emitting effect device LA1 which is formed in a disk shape and has a light emitting substrate arranged on the back side is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a fastening screw inserted into the elevating plate 430. A pair of left and right fastening shaft support portions 452 into which the fastening screws 451 that are screwed in and the fastening screws that are internally fitted into the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460 and inserted into the elevating plate 430 are screwed in. A pair of left and right through holes 453 are formed on the lower side of the fastening shaft support portion 452, and a support portion 454 that hooks and supports the upper projecting piece LA1b of the light emitting effect device LA1.

The light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a pair of fastening portions LA1a into which fastening screws to be inserted into the support plate portion 450 are screwed in at the lower portion, and a pair of projecting pieces projecting from the upper portion so as to be inserted into the support portion 454. It is provided with LA1b. In this way, the lower part of the light emitting effect device LA1 is supported by fastening and fixing, and the upper part is supported by engagement, so that sufficient support strength is secured and the shadow of the fastening screw is cast on the upper back side of the illuminated substrate. It can be avoided to occur.

The front surface of the light emitting effect device LA1 is provided with a three-dimensional or two-dimensional decorative pattern so as to be visible to the player. This decorative pattern is configured so that it can be visually recognized as an integral decoration with the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 in a situation where it is visually recognized without being hidden by the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 (FIG. 34). reference).

In the present embodiment, the shape of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is a shape imitating a shellfish (for example, a scallop), and the shape of the light emitting effect device LA1 arranged between them is like a pearl. It is formed from a visible front view substantially circular shape. That is, by integrally visualizing the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470, it is possible to construct an appearance reminiscent of a series of concepts of "pearls arranged inside an open shell". ..

The pinnate member 460 is composed of a plurality of members supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452, and is centered on a tubular portion 461 rotatably supported by the fastening shaft support portion 452 and the tubular portion 461 thereof. An arc-shaped gear 462 formed in an arc shape and meshed with each other, an extension portion 463 extending in a plate shape from the cylindrical portion 461 to the opposite side of the arc-shaped gear 462, and an extension portion 463 thereof. Forming parts 464L, 464R formed on the extended end side and formed so that light can be strongly reflected by applying a plating to the front part of the plate, and an arc-shaped gear along an arc having a diameter smaller than that of the arc-shaped gear 462. A downstream gear 465 formed on the front side of the 462, a flange portion 466 formed in a flange shape covering the back side of the arcuate gear 462, and an extended end portion in which the flange portion 466 extends in the external direction. It is provided with a columnar overhanging portion 467 that projects from the to the back side in a columnar shape.

The arcuate gear 462 is formed as a gear tooth formed in an arc having the same diameter that meshes with each other at an intermediate position between the pair of tubular portions 461. That is, the rotation angles of the plurality of (left and right) pinnate members 460 that rotate due to the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 are the same (symmetrical).

The extension portion 463 includes a recessed portion 463a that is recessed only on the right side. The recessed portion 463a is a shaped portion for facilitating interference with the electrical wiring that passes through the tubular portion 433 and is guided to the front side of the elevating plate 430, and the details will be described later.

The forming portions 464L and 464R are united in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 and are configured as a series of substantially semicircular (approximately semi-elliptical) decorative bodies (see FIG. 17), while the first operation. In the retracted state of the unit 400, it is arranged separately on the left and right, and its size is asymmetrical (see FIG. 16).

More specifically, while the lower side is formed symmetrically, the left forming portion 464L is formed so as to project in the rotational direction as compared with the right forming portion 464R in the shape of the upper side that abuts at the time of coalescence. By being done, it is formed large. In other words, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the contact surface S1 of the forming portions 464L and 464R is arranged on the right side (see FIG. 17).

The shapes of the upper end portions of the pinnate members 464L and 464R, which are arranged to face each other, differ depending on the distance from the tubular portion 461. That is, the side close to the tubular portion 461 (the side close to the rotation axis, the inner diameter side) is the pinnate member 464L, 464R so that the pinnate members 464L, 464R can overlap each other in the front view when they are closest to each other. The shape is such that the interference portion 464a is provided so as to be displaced in the rotation axis direction.

In the present embodiment, the side close to the tubular portion 461 corresponds to a portion where a decorative pattern that is visually recognized as a series of patterns is formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. Since the above-mentioned interference portion 464a can prevent a cut in the contact surface S1 of the pinnate members 464L and 464R when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other, the decorative pattern can be provided to the player. It can be visually recognized without any discomfort.

On the other hand, on the side far from the tubular portion 461 (the side far from the rotation axis, the outer diameter side), the rotation shafts of the pinnate members 464L and 464R can be stopped by abutting. The shape is such that the contact surface is arranged at a position that matches in the direction.

By providing the portion where the load generated by the contact of the pinnate members 464L and 464R at the time of stopping is provided at the outermost diameter portion where the arm length in the calculation of the moment of force is the longest, the pinnate members 464L and 464R are provided by the contact. The load generated in can be minimized.

In this way, by changing the shape of the pinnate members 464L and 464R with the distance from the tubular portion 461, the player feels uncomfortable with a series of decorative patterns formed when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other. It is possible to minimize the load that may occur on the pinnate members 464L and 464R when the pinnate members 464L and 464R are closest to each other.

The flange portion 466 is also used for suppressing the positional deviation of the arcuate gear 462 in the front-rear direction and for partitioning the arcuate gear 462 and the fixed transmission plate 490. As a result, it is possible to optimize the meshing state of the arcuate gear 462 and prevent the arcuate gear 462 from coming into contact with the fixed transmission plate 490 and being caught, resulting in excessive resistance.

The cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted through the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, and the ring-shaped collar C1 for reducing friction is inserted through the overhanging tip portion. In addition, a female screw is formed at the overhanging tip portion, and a fastening screw having an umbrella portion larger than the inner diameter of the collar C1 is screwed in while being inserted into the collar C1. As a result, the fixed transmission plate 490 is connected to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 so as not to fall off.

The auxiliary member 470 is composed of a pair of left and right plate-shaped members that are rotatably supported, and has a supported portion 471 formed in a bottomed tubular shape and a through hole 453 that is inserted through the supported portion 471 and cannot rotate. A metal insertion metal rod 472 fitted to the metal rod 472 and a gear portion 473 having gear teeth formed on an arc centered on the insertion metal rod 472 which is non-rotatably fitted to the end of the insertion metal rod 472. And.

A female screw is formed in the radial direction on the front side portion of the insertion metal rod 472, and a through hole through which a screwing portion of a fastening screw screwed into the female screw can be inserted at a corresponding position of the supported portion 471. Is formed. By inserting the insertion metal rod 472 into the supported portion 471 and then screwing the fastening screw into the female screw through the through hole, it is possible to prevent the insertion metal rod 472 from falling off from the supported portion 471.

The gear portion 473 is rotatably supported around the through hole 453 as the insertion metal rod 472 is supported by the through hole 453. Since the gear portion 473 meshes with the downstream gear 465 (see FIG. 22B), the gear portion 473 rotates in synchronization with the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460.

The fixed transmission plate 490 is provided at a plate-shaped portion to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the relative displacement member 442, a long hole portion 491 formed as a long hole curved in the plate-shaped portion, and a lower end portion of the plate-shaped portion. It includes a metal rod 492 that is a metal rod-shaped member that is non-rotatably supported and projects to the front side, and a decorative portion 493 that is non-rotatably fixed to the projecting tip of the metal rod 492.

The elongated hole portion 491 includes a vertical direction portion 491a formed along the vertical direction and a bending changing portion 491b formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the vertical direction portion 491a. By partitioning the elongated hole portion 491 in this way, the vertical displacement of the fixed transmission plate 490 and the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 that accompanies it are not completely synchronized, but a deviation is provided in the synchronization mode. However, the details will be described later.

The connection and fixing of the metal rod 492 and the decorative portion 493 is the same as the connection mode of the insertion metal rod 472 and the supported portion 471 described above. This makes it possible to prevent the metal rod 492 from falling off from the decorative portion 493.

Next, the operation mode of the first operation unit 400 will be described. 27, 28, 29 and 30 are rear views of the first operating unit 400. 27 to 30 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. In FIG. 27, the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 28, the wall schematic line UL ( The first intermediate state of the first operation unit 400 in which the elevating plate 430 is lowered from the retracted state by a distance slightly longer than the vertical displacement dimension (see FIG. 16) is shown in FIG. The second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 facing the vehicle and the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 are shown in FIG. 30, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the posture of the terminal gear 413 is determined by the detected unit 413d entering the detection gap of the detection sensor SC1. In the present embodiment, the state detected by the detection sensor SC1 is only the retracted state, and the other states (first intermediate state, second intermediate state, overhanging state) are only the displacement amount preset from the retracted state. It is a state after displacement and is not detected by the detection sensor SC1.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414 (arm member). The radial direction of rotation of 414) is orthogonal. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The tip plate portion 414e of the arm member 414 is arranged outside the arc MXS circumscribing the disk portion of the terminal gear 413 with the rotation axis of the arm member 414 as the center. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 from interfering with each other during the rotational displacement of the arm member 414.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from descending. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so that the elongated hole portion 406 can be slidably moved, it is not non-resistive and is caused by the contact friction generated between the tubular portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, by the action of this operation resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

As shown in FIG. 28, the elevating plate 430 is downwardly displaced due to the rotational displacement of the arm member 414, and the relative displacement member 442 is moved up and down with the rotation of the rotary gear 441 that meshes with the auxiliary arm member 444 that is displaced accordingly. The plate is displaced downward by a displacement amount exceeding the displacement amount of the plate 430.

Although it has a complicated shape, the transmission of the driving force from the auxiliary arm member 444 to the relative displacement member 442 is due to the meshing of the gears, so the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 and the auxiliary arm member 444 There is a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation angle of.

As shown in FIG. 28, while the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 are displaced as described above, the pinnate member 460 has the same posture as the posture in the retracted state. maintain.

That is, according to the present embodiment, there is a time lag between the timing at which the elevating plate 430 starts descending from the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 and the timing at which the pinnate member 460 starts rotating. The cause of this time lag will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL (see FIG. 16) until the pinnate member 460 starts rotating, so that the pinnate member 460 rotates. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a defect that collides with the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 when it is displaced.

In other words, the displacement mode in which the pinnate member 460 is rotationally displaced after being lowered by the vertical dimension of the wall schematic line UL is formed so that the upper wall portion of the rear case 310 does not deviate in height from side to side. This is the same condition as the displacement mode (conventional displacement mode) in which the pinnate member 460 is rotated at the same time as the elevating plate 430 is lowered. Therefore, the operation of the first operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can be realized by diverting the operation conditions (parameters such as gear ratio and displacement amount) of the conventional displacement mode. As a result, the cost required for the design can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 27, the arm member 414 hidden on the back side of the elevating plate 430 in the retracted state projects above the elevating plate 430 as the elevating plate 430 descends, as shown in FIG. 28. Displace like.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pinnate member 460 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the elevating plate 430 so as to hide the arm member 414 (see FIG. 29). That is, the pinnate member 460 is not only as an effect means for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern formed on the surface side to execute the effect of enlivening the game, but also the arm member 414 for drive transmission is referred to as the elevating plate 430. It also functions as a joint concealment means.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the wing-shaped member 460 on the side on which the arm member 414 having the function of transmitting the driving force is arranged is compared with the forming portion 464R of the wing-shaped member 460 on the opposite side. Since the shape is large, the arm member 414 can be easily hidden from the player's field of view.

Similarly to this, the forming portion 464R is configured to hide the auxiliary arm member 444 (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, from the configuration, the arm member 414 projects above the elevating plate 430 in the second intermediate state, while the auxiliary arm member 444 is still hidden behind the elevating plate 430. That is, after the arm member 414 projects above the elevating plate 430, the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to project above the elevating plate 430 (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, even when the forming portion 464R having a shape smaller than that of the forming portion 464L (the amount of protrusion of the elevating plate 430 upward at the same point is smaller than that of the forming portion 464L) is used, there is no problem in using the auxiliary arm member. 444 can be hidden from the player's field of view.

As shown in FIG. 29, at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the auxiliary arm member 444 is in a posture in which the elongated direction faces the left-right direction. Become. When the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, the load applied to the elevating plate 430 from the arm member 414 to the right tends to be large, but in opposition to this, at the same timing. When the auxiliary arm member 444 applies a leftward load to the elevating plate 430, the displacement resistance of the elevating plate 430 becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is tilted at a position slightly past the state where the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f is farthest to the left from the rotation axis of the arm member 414, and the tubular portion 444d (FIG. 25) is arranged at the right end of the elongated hole portion 406 so that a leftward load can be applied to the elevating plate 430 via the auxiliary arm member 444, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430. While suppressing it, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction due to the load applied to the elevating plate 430 in the left-right direction.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c of the terminal gear 413 is arranged outside the arc MXS, but the tip plate portion 414e has already gone too far below the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c. Interference between the tip plate portion 414e and the end gear 413 can be avoided.

That is, the arc MXS is defined only as a guideline position, and the design of the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 is whether or not interference occurs when the end gear 413 and the arm member 414 are actually interlocked. It is done by dynamically examining whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the termination gear 413 rotates with the position where the stoppered portion 413b of the termination gear 413 comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c of the main body plate portion 401 as the end point. As a control, the drive motor MT1 is driven so that the end gear 413 stops at a position slightly before the position where the stoppered portion 413b comes into contact with the stopper portion 403c. As a result, it is possible to structurally prevent the end gear 413 from over-rotating while preventing the stoppered portion 413b and the stopper portion 403c from being damaged at an early stage.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413 and the cylindrical overhanging portion 413c and the elongated direction (arm) of the elongated hole portion 414d of the arm member 414. The radial direction of rotation of the member 414) is orthogonal to it. As a result, the load applied from the arm member 414 to the terminal gear 413 is generated along the linear direction passing through the rotation axis of the terminal gear 413. Therefore, even when the power of the drive motor MT1 is cut off, the arm member 414 Can maintain the posture of (use of dead center).

The posture is maintained in both directions along the rotation direction of the arm member 414. That is, it is possible to prevent not only the displacement in the gravity direction but also the upward displacement of the first operating unit 400 from the overhanging state to the retracted state side.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the elevating plate 430 connected to the arm member 414 from bouncing up and being displaced after reaching the overhanging state, so that the elevating plate 430 on the downstream side as a driving force transmission path can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the members (synchronous operation unit 440, pinnate member 460, auxiliary member 470, etc.) from being displaced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the contact state of the pinnate member 460.

The auxiliary arm member 444 functions to prevent the right side portion of the elevating plate 430 from rising. Although the auxiliary arm member 444 is supported so that the elongated hole portion 406 can be slidably moved, it is not non-resistive and is caused by the contact friction generated between the tubular portion 444d (see FIG. 25) and the elongated hole portion 406. Operating resistance is generated. That is, by the action of this operation resistance, the right side portion of the elevating portion 430 can be supported by the auxiliary arm member 444.

In addition, the auxiliary arm member 444 suspends and supports the elevating plate 430. As a result, the posture of the elevating plate 430 becomes unstable on the left and right sides of the metal rail 405, even though the driving force by the drive motor MT1 and the urging force by the coil spring SP1 are generated only on the left and right sides (left side). Can be avoided.

Here, as described above, as long as the electric wiring DH1 is arranged inside the extension portion 444c, the expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 in the elevating displacement of the elevating plate 430 of the first operation unit 400 is minimized. Explain what you can do.

When the path of the electric wiring DH1 is traced from the light emitting effect device LA1 side, the path is fixed to the elevating plate 430 until it reaches the auxiliary arm member 444, and the path becomes variable for the first time with the auxiliary arm member 444. On the other hand, since the shape of the extension portion 444c in which the electric wiring DH1 is arranged is fixed while the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 is displaced by expansion and contraction. it can.

At the position protruding from the through hole 448a to the back surface side, the electric wiring DH1 is displaced in the left-right direction due to the displacement of the end side plate 448 in the left-right direction. As described above, the displacement that may cause expansion and contraction of the electric wiring DH1 is limited to the displacement of the end side plate 448. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral displacement of the end side plate 448 is measured and the necessary amount is required. After calculating the extra length of the electric wiring DH1 and adding the extra length to the electric wiring DH1 in the path from the fixed position of the electric wiring DH1 to the end side plate 448 (with the electric wiring DH1 loosened), the electric wiring DH1 Is fixed to the main body plate portion 401.

In other words, the location where the electrical wiring DH1 may expand or contract due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 can be limited to the vicinity of the end side plate 448, and in addition, the amount of displacement that causes expansion and contraction can be limited to the elevating plate 430. It can be suppressed to less than half of the amount of vertical displacement of.

Further, as described above, the shape of the through hole 448a of the end side plate 448 makes it possible to reduce the displacement width of the electric wiring DH1 as compared with the displacement width of the end side plate 448. The length can be shortened.

31, FIG. 32, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are front views of the first operation unit 400. 31 to 34 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 31 shows the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 32 shows the first operating unit 400. 33 shows the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 34 shows the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 31, the lower edge portion of the pinnate member 460 is formed symmetrically. Therefore, in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, the first operation unit 400 that enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the elevating plate 430 is slightly downwardly displaced, the posture of the pinnate member 460 is maintained. Therefore, even in the state shown in FIG. 32, the player can visually recognize the first operation unit 400, which enters the field of view for visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, as a movable member having a symmetrical shape.

In the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the pinnate member 460 does not change as compared with the retracted state shown in FIG. 31, while the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 are the same as the elevating plate 430 descends. The decorative portion 493 is displaced downward with a displacement amount exceeding the downward displacement amount.

Therefore, when the first operation unit 400 is changed from the retracted state to the first intermediate state, not only the single elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced with respect to the player who visually recognizes the elevating plate 430, but also the elevating plate. Since it is possible to visually recognize how the decorative portion 493, which is displaced by a vertical displacement amount different from the vertical displacement amount of 430, is vertically displaced, the effect of effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the second intermediate state, the difference between the displacement amount of the elevating plate 430 and the displacement amount of the decorative portion 493 increases as compared with the first intermediate state, and in addition, the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 changes posture.

In FIG. 34, a state in which the pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other at opposite positions is shown. The pinnate member 460 is visually recognized as if it is a single substantially semicircular (semi-elliptical) decorative member by combining a pair of left and right members, and the contact surface S1 is made of metal. The rail 405 is formed at a position shifted to the right from the left-right center position where the rail 405 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the upper edge side of the forming portion 464L is formed in advance on the forming portion 464R side as compared with the upper edge side of the forming portion 464R so that the contact surface S1 in the overhanging state is displaced from the left and right center. It is configured in.

Since the upper edges of the forming portions 464L and 464R are arranged at positions shielded by the base plate 60 of the game board 13 in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 2), the forming portions 464L, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the 464R has a left-right asymmetrical shape. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the left-right asymmetry of the shapes of the forming portions 464L and 464R.

Further, since the contact surface S1 is deviated from the metal rail 405 in the front view, even if the pinnate member 460 bounces off due to the impact at the time of contact and a gap is generated again, the rail member is formed from the gap. It is possible to prevent the 405 from being visually recognized, and the decorative shape formed on the front surface of the main body plate portion 401 can be visually recognized.

As a result, the inorganic metal rail 405 (in other words, a member that is indispensable for realizing the displacement of the movable accessory and is not intended for decoration) is visually recognized from the gap. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, the contact surface S1 is arranged at a position deviated from the left-right center position generally assumed by the player as a break between the pair of movable members that abut and separate from each other on the left and right. That is, the contact surface S1 that does not create a gap at the position (center position on the left and right) that the player visually recognizes while anticipating that a gap will occur, and that may generate a gap at a position deviated from that location. By arranging the gaps, even if a gap is generated, the gap can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the visibility of the decorative portion 436 changes depending on the arrangement of the pinnate member 460. That is, from the retracted state (see FIG. 31) to the second intermediate state (see FIG. 33) of the first operation unit 400, the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 is shielded by the pinnate member 460, and the player can see the whole picture. The structure is difficult to grasp.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 (see FIG. 34), the outer shape of the decorative portion 436 arranged under the pinnate member 460 is visible, and the outer shape is the pinnate member 460. It is formed so as to be continuous with the outer shape of.

That is, a series of decorative shapes (shape of "shell" in this embodiment) that the pair of pinnate members 460 visually recognize in the overhanged state of the first operation unit 400 are further extended downward from the lower edge portion. A decorative portion 436 is formed. Therefore, it is possible to form a series of decorative shapes larger than the series of decorative shapes (see FIG. 38) formed by combining the pair of feather-shaped members 460, and the player can visually recognize them.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement process until a series of decorative shapes are formed by the displacement of the pinnate member 460 is not a single process. That is, as the first displacement process, there is a process in which the pair of pinnate members 460 as one configuration of the series of decorative shapes are displaced and coalesced in a manner close to each other to form a series of decorative shapes.

On the other hand, as a process of the second displacement, the pinnate member 460 and the decorative portion 436 as one configuration of a series of decorative shapes overlap each other in the front-rear view in the retracted state of the first operation unit 400, and overhang. A process of forming a series of decorative shapes can be mentioned by displacing the pinnate member 460 in the direction in which the overlapping allowance becomes smaller as the state approaches (the direction in which the pinnate member 460 separates from the decorative portion 436).

By these different processes, while the displacement of the pinnate member 460 itself is a simple displacement mode of proximity displacement, the shapes can be connected at both end edges along the displacement direction of the pinnate member 460, and a series of decorative shapes can be formed. Can be configured. Therefore, while suppressing the shape of the pinnate member 460 that is individually displaced to a small size, a series of decorative shapes formed by being united in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400 is largely configured in comparison with the size thereof. can do.

35, 36, 37 and 38 are rear views of the support plate portion 450, the pinnate member 460, the auxiliary member 470 and the fixed transmission plate 490. 35 to 38 show how each component is displaced as the drive motor MT1 rotates. FIG. 35 shows the retracted state of the first operating unit 400, and FIG. 36 shows the first operating unit 400. The first intermediate state of the above is illustrated in FIG. 37, the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 400 is shown, and in FIG. 38, the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of through holes LA1c dispersedly arranged along an arc shape are formed on the back side of the light emitting effect device LA1, and light leaks to the back side through the through holes LA1c. It is configured as follows. In the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the pinnate member 460 is arranged so as to cover the back surface side of the through hole LA1c. Can be reflected to the front side with.

The rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. Since the rotational displacement of the pinnate member 460 is caused by the relationship between the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 and the elongated hole portion 491 of the fixed transmission plate 490, this portion will be described in particular detail.

From the retracted state shown in FIG. 35 to the first intermediate state shown in FIG. 36, the vertical direction portion 491a of the elongated hole portion 491 through which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is inserted is opened (vertical direction). Since the displacement direction of the fixed transmission plate 490 is the same, it is possible to prevent the pinnate member 460 from being rotationally displaced by the load applied to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

In the present embodiment, individual members for urging the pinnate member 460 to the retracted state side are not prepared, but the center of gravity is arranged on the left and right outside the rotation axis due to the shape of the forming portions 464L and 464R. It is maintained in a retracted position due to its own weight.

In the second intermediate state shown in FIG. 37, when the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 enters the curvature changing portion 491b, a load is generated in the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the left-right direction, and the pinnate member 460 starts rotational displacement. Explaining from the viewpoint of the transmission path of the driving force, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the pinnate member 460 on the left side via the cylindrical overhanging portion 467, and then to the pinnate member 460 on the right side. Be transmitted. That is, the left pinnate member 460 is on the upstream side in the driving force transmission path as compared with the right pinnate member 460.

In the present embodiment, the forming portion 464L of the left pinnate member 460, which is considered to be the upstream side in the driving force transmission path, is formed slightly larger (heavier) than the forming portion 464R. Therefore, the movable members can be sequentially arranged so as to be lighter toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path. As a result, good transmission of the driving force can be achieved, and it is possible to prevent each component member from rebounding and being displaced after being displaced to the terminal position.

One of the reasons why the tubular portion 433 as the guide path of the electric wiring DH1 is arranged on the forming portion 464R side is also the difference in the weight of the forming portions 464L and 464R. More specifically, the positions of the forming portions 464L and 464R after displacement are determined by the meshing of the arcuate gear 462 and the contact of the opposing surfaces of the forming portions 464L and 464R. The positions of the formed portions 464L and 464R after displacement may change slightly due to an error, aged deformation of the elongated hole portion 491 that defines the rotation angle of the pinnate member 460, and the like.

In this case, the change in the position after the displacement largely depends on the weight balance of the forming portions 464L and 464R. That is, there is a high possibility that the forming portion 464L is pushed down so that the forming portion 464L rides on the forming portion 464R.

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the extension portion 463 of the pinnate member 460 is arranged below the tubular portion 433 through which the electric wiring DH1 passes. In addition, the recessed portion 463a is provided so that the tubular portion 433 and the extending portion 463 do not overlap with each other. As a result, even if a displacement that is unintentionally pushed down occurs in the forming portion 464L, the possibility that the electric wiring DH1 and the forming portion 464L interfere with each other can be reduced.

Further, since it is assumed that the forming portion 464L is likely to be displaced, the design can be made at a position where the tubular portion 433 and the recessed portion 463 partially interfere with each other in the rear view (see FIG. 38). As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the forming range of the recessed portion 463a is set to a range in which the lower portion of the tubular portion 433 can be particularly opened. As a result, it is possible to minimize the difference in shape between the pair of left and right extension portions 463 while avoiding contact between the electric wiring DH1 that tends to hang down due to its own weight and the extension portion 463 inside the tubular portion 433.

That is, it is possible to prevent the recessed portion 463 from getting too close to the forming portion 464 side, whereby the recessed portion 463a is placed on the back side of the auxiliary member 470 in the retracted state or the first intermediate state of the first operating unit 400. The recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially concealed by the auxiliary member 470 (see FIG. 31).

Thereby, in any state from the retracted state to the overhanging state of the first operation unit 400, the recessed portion 463a can be configured to be partially hidden by the auxiliary member 470. Therefore, the extending portion 463 of the pair of left and right pinnate members 460 and the lower edge portions of the forming portions 464L and 464R can be easily visually recognized symmetrically. It is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The transmission of the driving force from the fixed transmission plate 490 to the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 occurs when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced downward from the tubular portion 461 of the pinnate member 460. Along with the transmission of the driving force, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is hung on the fixed transmission plate 490 and rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 461. However, assuming that the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 It is configured so that it does not displace at a constant velocity (it is configured so that the angular velocity changes).

More specifically, since the initial position of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is set near the left and right sides of the tubular portion 461 (see FIG. 35), it is assumed that the curvature changing portion 491b is an elongated hole extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). In this case, the downward displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 increases the angle of rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 with respect to the displacement width in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the fixed transmission plate 490 is displaced at a constant velocity, the velocity (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 gradually increases.

Therefore, it is possible to configure a powerful effect of displacing and coalescing at a high speed as compared with a configuration in which a pair of pinnate members 460 decelerate during displacement.

On the other hand, the gradual increase in the angular velocity of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 leads to an increase in the speed of the pinnate member 460 immediately before the pair of pinnate members 460 are brought into close proximity to each other. There is a possibility that the pair of pinnate members 460 will rebound greatly due to the impact of the impact, and the effect of the present embodiment of combining the pair of pinnate members 460 to visually recognize a series of decorative patterns may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curvature changing portion 491b is directed toward the rotation axis side of the pinnate member 460 (the pinnate member 460 on the left side) provided with the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). It is formed as an elongated hole extending in the upwardly sloping direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the speed (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467.

The degree of suppression is the amount of upward displacement of the curvature changing portion 491b with respect to the elongated hole parallel to the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) at the location where the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is arranged (hereinafter, also referred to as "upward correction amount"). It corresponds to.

When the curvature changing portion 491b is configured as an elongated hole extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the rotation axis side as in the present embodiment, the degree to which the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 is displaced downward (a pair of pinnate members 460 are formed). The closer to the coalesced state), the larger the above upward correction amount. Therefore, the degree (decrease width) of suppressing the increase in the rotational displacement speed (angular velocity) of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 can be gradually increased as the arrangement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 467 changes downward.

Therefore, the speed increase can be moderately suppressed as compared with the configuration exemplified in the brake structure that maintains the same friction state. The actual displacement speed of the pinnate member 460 will be described later.

39 (a) to 39 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operation unit 400. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the rotation angle of the end gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 39 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 39 (c), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the pinnate member 460 is shown on the vertical axis.

Here, it is assumed that the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant speed. In this case, while the terminal gear 413 rotates at a constant velocity, the rotational movement of the arm member 414 does not result in a constant velocity rotation, and the elevation displacement of the elevating plate 430 does not become a constant velocity displacement.

That is, a deviation occurs between the control mode of the drive motor MT1 (for example, constant velocity rotation) and the control mode of the elevating plate 430 (non-constant velocity displacement), and the elevating plate 430 in the driving force transmission path. The displacement mode on the downstream side is affected by this displacement. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT1 is rotated at a constant velocity, it is difficult to displace the constituent members arranged on the downstream side in the transmission path at a constant velocity.

For example, even if a fixed rack gear-shaped portion is formed on the main body plate portion 401 and the rack gear-shaped portion is configured to mesh with the rotary gear 441 of the synchronous operation unit 440, the vertical displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is still large. Since it depends on the elevating displacement mode of the elevating plate 430, the displacement is not constant velocity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating displacement of the relative displacement member 442 is not defined in the fixed rack gear-shaped portion, and the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 is the elevating displacement (vertical displacement) of the elevating plate 430. The configuration is adopted in which the rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 is converted into the vertical displacement (vertical displacement) of the relative displacement member 442 in the same manner as the conversion to.

That is, a predetermined rule for converting the rotational displacement of the terminal gear 413 to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 due to the vertical displacement of the cylindrical overhanging portion 414f of the arm member 414 (for example, the horizontal axis of FIG. 39 (a)). (Conversion formula for converting numerical values to numerical values on the vertical axis) is applied in reverse to convert the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 due to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate 430 to the rotational displacement of the rotary gear 441. By doing so, the displacement of the displacement mode can be partially offset, and the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 and the displacement mode of the rotary gear 441 can be approximated.

In other words, the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 begins to deviate from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 when the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is around 90 degrees and 140 degrees (see FIG. 39 (a)). The rotation angle of the auxiliary arm member 444 is suppressed from the displacement mode of the terminal gear 413 over the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 from 30 degrees to 170 degrees (see FIG. 39 (b)).

As a result, for example, the auxiliary arm member 444 can be rotated at a constant speed by rotating the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413 at a constant speed (see FIG. 39B), so that the relative displacement member 442 can be rotated at a constant speed. Can be vertically displaced with respect to the elevating plate 430 at a substantially constant speed.

As a result, the speed control of the drive motor MT1 can be easily linked to the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442, so that the displacement mode that the first operation unit 400 wants to execute as a drive effect to be visually recognized by the player can be calculated backward. The speed of the drive motor MT1 can be easily set.

Further, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the influence of the configuration in which the advantageous effect is generated only on the driving device side in the driving force transmission path on the tip side of the transmission path. Here, with reference to the elevating plate 430, the drive motor MT1 side will be described as the drive device side of the transmission path, and the opposite side will be described as the tip end side of the transmission path.

On the drive device side of the transmission path, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 with respect to the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is suppressed in the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 400, so that the arm member 414 can be started and stopped quickly. However, on the tip side of the transmission path, the speed of the arm member 414 immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state becomes extremely small, so that the displacement tends to be slow. was there.

From this point of view, in order to configure the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path so as not to be affected by the deceleration of the arm member 414, the operating speed of the drive motor MT1 is set before the arm member 414 reaches the displacement end. It can be dealt with by changing the speed to or controlling the arm member 414 to stop before the deceleration of the arm member 414 occurs (sufficiently before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state).

However, according to the former, complicated control is required, and according to the latter, the rotation angle of the arm member 414 that can be used for the displacement of the tip side of the transmission path becomes small, and the width of the displacement mode is narrowed. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode on the tip side of the transmission path can be approximated to the displacement mode of the drive motor MT1 and the end gear 413, so that the same period occurs immediately before reaching the retracted state or the overhanging state. The degree to which the relative displacement member 442 of the operation unit 440 decelerates can be easily reduced. Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 (and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 arranged on the downstream side thereof) arranged on the tip end side of the transmission path while maximizing the rotation angle of the arm member 414). It is possible to avoid slowing down the displacement of.

What is visible to the player is the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the rotational angular velocities of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 when the end gear 413 is rotated at a constant velocity tend to increase (constant velocity or higher) until immediately before the stop, and immediately before the stop. , The speed is reduced according to the shape of the curvature changing portion 491b of the elongated hole portion 491 described above.

As a result, the displacement of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be made more rapid than in the case where the displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 is determined depending on the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430. Therefore, a powerful displacement can be realized and the effect of the effect can be improved.

On the other hand, instead of stopping the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 while the rotational angular velocities tend to increase (the pinnate members 460 are united), the pinnate member 460 is provided with a section for decelerating immediately before the pinnate member 460. It is possible to suppress the rebound displacement after coalescence.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430 that is continuously displaced by the driving force of the drive motor MT1, the relative displacement member 442 of the synchronous operation unit 440 that is displaced on the downstream side thereof, and the fixed transmission plate 490. , The displacement mode of the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 can be different.

In particular, the displacement mode once changed can be changed to the return side again while going downstream along the transmission path of the driving force. Thereby, in a configuration in which a plurality of members are displaced in synchronization, a unique displacement mode can be configured.

The case of displacement from the retracted state to the overhanging state has been described as a control mode of the drive motor MT1, but the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to invert at an intermediate position. That is, for example, the rotation direction of the drive motor MT1 may be reverse-controlled so that the first operation unit 400 reciprocates (repeatedly reciprocates) between the retracted state and the first intermediate state.

In this case, after the elevating plate 430 starts descending, the elevating plate 430 is raised and returned to the retracted state before the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 start rotating, so that the player can visually recognize the evacuation plate 430. The displacement of the first operation unit 400 can be limited to the vertical displacement, and the rotational displacement can be eliminated.

Even if the displacement is up to the first intermediate state, the fixed transmission plate 490 and the decorative portion 493 are displaced relative to the elevating plate 430 in the vertical direction, so that the appearance of the first operation unit 400 is likely to change. can do.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 300. In FIG. 40, a state in which the game board 13 is removed from the operation unit 300 and arranged on the front side is shown, and the upper part of the action unit 300 and the game board 13 is not shown. Further, in FIG. 40, the outer shape of the transparent cover member 790 arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the configuration below the transparent cover member 790. Is visually illustrated.

When the game board 13 and the operation unit 300 are fastened and fixed and used for the game, the lower front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is passed through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). The upper surfaces of the light guide member 714 and the second operation unit 700 are visibly arranged in the light guide member 714. Further, since the light emitted to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777 passes through the light transmission hole 60c, it can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 60.

FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the second operation unit 700 includes a light guide member 714 in which a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and an illumination member arranged in the left-right direction. It includes a substrate 777.

Each of the light guide members 714 is configured to be able to guide the irradiation light emitted from below, and the irradiation light is transmitted from the upper end portion. The illumination substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 such as an LED that can irradiate the front side with light. In this way, the second operation unit 700 can emit light upward through the light guide member 714, and can emit light to the front side by the illuminated substrate 777.

43 and 44 are an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit 700. In FIG. 43, it is shown in a directional view looking down from above, and in FIGS. 44 and 45, it is shown in a directional view looking up from below. Further, in FIG. 45, the projecting holding portion 724 is enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 43, 44 and 45, the second operation unit 700 is a base member 701 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 311 of the rear case 310 (see FIG. 40) and from above the base member 701. A plate-shaped displacement member that is sandwiched between a cover member 720 that is covered and fastened and fixed to the base member 701, and the cover member 720 and the base member 701, and is pivotally supported so that it can be rotationally displaced (rotatably displaced at a rotational angle of about 6 degrees). 730 and a plurality of (8 in this embodiment) hollow members 740, which are hollow members placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and are configured to be vertically displaceable, and more than the hollow members 740. A plurality of variable decorative members 750 (three in this embodiment) placed on the upper surface of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 on the front side and capable of being displaced up and down at least, and arranged on the lower left and right sides of the base member 701, respectively. However, a pair of drive units 760 and a transparent cover member 790 (see FIG. 40), which have a structure substantially line-symmetrical with respect to a straight line along the vertical direction and are configured to be able to apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Be prepared.

The transparent cover member 790 is a colorless and transparent resin member having a shape that covers the upper surface and the front surface of the cover member 720 of the second operation unit 700, and prevents dust and fine particles from reaching the cover member 720. Even if any of the constituent members of the operating unit 400 malfunctions, it acts to prevent the first operating unit 400 from colliding with the cover member 720 and the light guide member 714.

Since the upper surface of the transparent cover 790 is inclined downward toward the back surface side, a part of the light emitted directly above from the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 can be refracted toward the back surface side. As a result, the light emitted from the light guide member 714 can be easily reflected on the third symbol display device 81, so that even when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the light is guided. Changes in the lighting state of the optical member 714 (including changes in light and darkness, vibration of light, and displacement of the hollow member 740) can be easily noticed.

In addition, in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, and FIG. 45, the illustration of the transparent cover member 790 is omitted. First, the base member 701 forming the skeleton of the second operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the base member 701. As shown in FIG. 46, the base member 701 includes a plate-shaped member 702 formed so as to have sufficient strength, an illuminated substrate 705 to be fastened and fixed to face the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 702, and the like. A partition member 708 that is arranged to face the upper surface of the plate of the illuminated substrate 705 and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702, and a member that covers the partition member 708 and is formed in a thin film shape from resin. A plurality of (8 in this embodiment) light guide members 714 mounted on the member 712 and the thin film cover member 712 in contact with each other, and a plate-shaped member covered from above the light guide member 714. The light guide member 714 is provided with a displacement regulating member 716 that regulates the ascending and horizontal displacement of the light guide member 714.

The plate-shaped member 702 is formed in pairs on the left and right side portions of the plate-shaped member 702 and the engaging portion 702a formed so as to be engaged with the hook-shaped portion 721c of the cover member 720. A fastening screw can be screwed into a receiving recess 702b that is recessed so that the 731 can be pivotally supported, a regulating protrusion 702c that is projected upward from the front side edge and is formed so that the rotation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be regulated. A plurality of fastening portions 703a formed in the above, and a plurality of columnar protruding portions 703b formed in a columnar shape extending upward beyond the fastening portion 703a so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the protruding tip portion. , A plurality of through holes 704 bored in the vertical direction are provided.

The plurality of fastening portions 703a are for fastening and fixing fastening screws to be inserted into the illuminated substrate 705, and are formed at three locations, the center on the left and right and both ends on the left and right. A protruding pin for positioning is installed side by side.

By arranging the illumination board 705 so that the protrusion pin is inserted into the through hole formed in the illumination board 705 corresponding to the protrusion pin for positioning, the fastening screw is inserted into the illumination board 705. Since the through hole to be bored and the fastening portion 703a are continuously connected to each other, the illuminated substrate 705 can be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702 by screwing the fastening screw through the through hole.

The columnar projecting portion 703b is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted in the order of the displacement regulating member 716, the thin film cover member 712, and the partition member 708 is screwed in, and the base end side is formed to be inclined in a trapezoidal shape. This makes it easier to place the illumination board 705 in an appropriate position.

The through hole 704 is formed with a size capable of passing a connector (not shown) arranged on the lower surface of the illuminated substrate 705 and electrical wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged on the lower surface side of the illuminated substrate 705, and does not project above the illuminated substrate 705. As a result, the entire upper surface of the illuminated substrate 705 can be utilized as a dispositionable region of the light emitting means 706 such as an LED.

The illuminated substrate 705 is an open portion formed so as to leave a slight gap between the plurality of light emitting means 706 composed of LEDs and the like and the columnar projecting portion 703b in the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43). It is equipped with 707.

The light emitting means 706 includes a plurality of individual light emitting means 706a (eight in the present embodiment) arranged along a straight line facing the left-right direction, and a plurality of overall light emitting means 706 arranged at positions different from the individual light emitting means 706a. The means 706b is provided.

The opening portion 707 is formed at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b, and the projecting end position of the columnar projecting portion 703b is set above the position where the illuminated substrate 705 is arranged in the assembled state. Therefore, when the illuminated substrate 705 is downwardly displaced to the position where it is arranged in the assembled state, the open portion 707 advances along the columnar projecting portion 703b.

In the present embodiment, since the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed in a circular shape with a top view and a front view table shape that narrows toward the upper side, the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b is formed. The sides are tilted in the vertical direction. When the illuminated substrate 705 is displaced downward, if the position is largely displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the position arranged in the assembled state, the position is along the inclination of the side surface of the base end side portion of the columnar projecting portion 703b. Since the misalignment of the illuminated substrate 705 can be corrected, the illuminated substrate 705 can be easily arranged at a target position.

The partition member 708 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and has a plurality of light-transmitting holes 709 bored at positions corresponding to the individual light emitting means 706a and a columnar protrusion. A plurality of through holes 710a formed with an inner diameter capable of inserting the tip portion of the installation portion 703b, and a plurality of fastening portions 710b formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the displacement regulating member 716 can be screwed in, and fastening thereof. A plurality of receiving portions 710c are provided so as to be recessed (or drilled) so as to be able to receive the protrusion pin 716b projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 at a position deviated from the portion 710b in the front-rear direction.

The translucent hole 709 is formed in the front and rear with a long crystal-shaped (substantially elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) cross section, and the long direction thereof faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. That is, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light-transmitting hole 709 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the elongated direction is toward the front and toward the center of the left and right. It is said to be in the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the translucent hole 709 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The thin film cover member 712 is a colorless and transparent resin member in the form of a thin film having low rigidity, is formed so that the central portion is raised, the lower surface side is open, and the thin film cover member 712 is vertically bored at the left and right end portions of the upper bottom portion. A pair of large through holes 712a, a plurality of medium through holes 712b bored up and down inside the outer through holes 712a in the left-right direction, and vertically displaced with respect to the inner through holes 712b. It is provided with a plurality of small through holes 712c to be drilled.

The large through hole 712a is formed to have a diameter longer than the diameter of the projecting portion 716e (see FIG. 72) that protrudes in an annular shape from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 to surround the insertion hole 716a. Since the projecting portion 716e projecting from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 projects with a projecting length exceeding the thickness of the thin film cover member 712, a load (fastening) at the time of assembly is applied to the edge portion of the large through hole 712a. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of load).

One of the middle through holes 712b is arranged at a position corresponding to the columnar projecting portion 703b at the center position on the front side, and the other is arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b.

The small through hole 712c is arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction with respect to the middle through hole 712b arranged at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 710b, and is projected from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 and is a partition member. The protrusion pin 716b received by the receiving portion 710c of the 708 is formed to have a size that allows it to be inserted.

Therefore, the partition member 708 is covered with the thin film cover member 712, the displacement regulating member 716 is placed on the partition member 708, and then the fastening screws are screwed into various places to fasten and fix the members. Since the projecting pin 716b is inserted into the small through hole 712c and the receiving portion 710c, the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716 are aligned with the partition member 708 in the state before the fastening screw is screwed in. It can be easily (simultaneously) performed, and then the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

The light guide member 714 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material into a bottomed tubular shape having a bottom at the top, and the outer shape of the top view is formed into a long crystal shape (approximately elliptical shape, substantially hexagonal shape) in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 714a is provided, an overhanging edge portion 714b projecting from the lower edge thereof to the left and right and forward, and an inclined surface portion 714c at the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a that inclines downward toward the front side.

Since the upper outer surface of the main body 714a is textured, when the light emitted from the single individual light emitting means 706a, traveling inside the light guide member 714 and reaching the upper end is visually recognized by the player. , It is possible to visually recognize that the light is emitted on the surface instead of the point light emission.

On the other hand, in the main body portion 714a, a smooth surface is formed without embossing on a portion (intermediate portion or the like) other than the upper outer surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent diffuse reflection from occurring when light traveling inside the light guide member 714 is incident on the inner wall surface of the main body 714a, and the light is totally reflected by the smooth surface to be totally reflected on the main body 714a. Since it can be easily directed to the upper end portion of the main body portion 714a, the energy loss of light at the intermediate position of the main body portion 714a can be reduced.

The long direction in the top view of the main body 714a of each light guide member 714 follows the setting in the long direction of the translucent hole 709 described above. That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide member 714 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front side toward the left and right center. It is said to be the direction of inclination.

That is, the long direction of the light guide member 714 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

With this configuration, the front end portion in the long direction (the portion close to the player as the portion that irradiates the light to the player side) in the top view of the light guide member 714 is the center in the long direction. It is possible to face the player side (front side, left and right center) as compared with the position. That is, it is possible to make the player feel that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 to the player side is gathered toward the player.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed with a constant vertical thickness and functions as a portion for stabilizing the position and orientation of the light guide member 714, and the inclined surface portion 714c frontally receives light incident from below the light guide member 714. It functions to emit light toward the side, but details will be described later.

The displacement regulating member 716 is formed of a colored (black in this embodiment) hard resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is provided from a plurality of insertion holes 716a through which fastening screws can be inserted and projecting from the lower surface. A plurality of protruding pins 716b, a plurality of receiving cylinders 716c formed in a tubular shape penetrating vertically at positions corresponding to the light guide member 714, and an enlarged inner shape of the lower edge of the receiving cylinder 716c. It is provided with a plurality of recessed portions 716d which are recessed in a stepped manner so as to allow the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714 to be received.

The inner shape of the receiving cylinder portion 716c is substantially the same as the inner shape of the light transmitting hole 709 when viewed from above, and the light guide member 714 is inserted inside. Further, since the recessed depth of the recessed portion 716d is the same as the thickness dimension of the overhanging edge portion 714b of the light guide member 714, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), The overhanging edge portion 714b can be stably supported by the upper surface of the thin film cover member 712 and the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716 (the lower surface of the recessed portion 716d) so as to sandwich the overhanging edge portion 714b.

The overhanging edge portion 714b is formed overhanging on the left and right and the front side, and the formation on the back side is omitted. Correspondingly, the recessed portion 716d of the displacement regulating member 716 is also recessed on the left and right and the front side, and the recessing on the back surface side is omitted. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from being assembled in the opposite directions.

That is, even if the light guide member 714 is arranged in the opposite direction in the front-rear direction and the displacement regulating member 716 is to be assembled, the concave portion 716d and the overhanging edge portion 714b are misaligned, so that the overhanging edge is provided on the concave portion 716d. The portion 714b cannot be inserted, and the overhanging edge portion 714b projects from the lower surface of the displacement regulating member 716. A gap corresponding to the thickness of the overhanging edge 714b is created between the thin film cover member 712 and the displacement regulating member 716, making it difficult to fasten and fix the thin film cover member (or an automatic machine for assembly). Can be noticed that the light guide member 714 is oriented upside down.

In the assembled state of the base member 701 (see FIG. 43), the overhanging edge portion 714b is sandwiched between the recessed portion 716d and the thin film cover member 712 in the vertical direction, whereby the position and orientation of the light guide member 714 are stable. Is fixed.

The procedure for assembling the base member 701 will be described. First, the illuminated substrate 705 is passed through the columnar projecting portion 703b, placed at the fastening position, and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member 702. Next, each constituent member is arranged in the order of the partition member 708, the thin film cover member 712, the light guide member 714, and the displacement regulating member 716 above the illuminated substrate 705.

At that time, the partition member 708 is positioned on the plate-shaped member 702 by passing the tip of the columnar protrusion 703b through the through hole 710a of the partition member 708, and the protrusion pin 716b is passed through the receiving portion 710c and the small through hole 712c. The displacement regulating member 716 and the thin film cover member 712 are positioned on the partition member 708. Further, by passing the main body portion 714a through the receiving cylinder portion 716c, the light guide member 714 is positioned on the displacement regulating member 716. In this way, since the constituent members are relatively positioned before the fastening screw is screwed in, the efficiency of the work of screwing the fastening screw can be improved.

Finally, each component can be fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 716a and screwing it into the fastening portion 710b and the columnar projecting portion 703b. According to the present embodiment, after each component arranged above the illumination board 705 is placed at an appropriate position, a plurality of fastening screws can be screwed together, thereby simplifying the work process. be able to. In addition, it is possible to automate the screwing process of the fastening screw (use of an automatic machine for screw turning).

In the present embodiment, the partition member 708 cannot be pulled out at the stage where the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the columnar protrusion 703b, but the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 716a is screwed into the fastening portion 710b. By doing so, the partition member 708 can be brought closer to the displacement regulating member 716 side.

As a result, although the light guide member 714 is mounted on the thin film cover member 712, it can be substantially identified with the configuration in which the light guide member 714 is mounted on the partition member 708, and the rigidity of the partition member 708 makes the light guide member 714. By supporting the light guide member 714, the support of the light guide member 714 can be stabilized.

In addition, since the vertical separation dimension between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708 can be reduced by sandwiching the thin film cover member 712, it is possible to prevent light leakage from between the displacement regulating member 716 and the partition member 708. Can be planned.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The cover member 720 is a member formed of a colored (blue in the present embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base member 701. The cover member 720 is arranged on the peripheral edge of the lower surface and is connected to the base member 701. A plurality of coupling portions 721 used for coupling, a plurality of rear through holes 722 drilled in a shape larger than the light guide member 714 corresponding to the position of the light guide member 714 of the base member 701, and a rear side thereof. A plurality of front through holes 723 drilled at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) as a set of left and right through holes on the front side of the through hole 722, and rear left and right outer portions of the rear through hole 722. It is provided with a plurality of projecting holding portions 724 projecting downward from the left and right inner portions on the front side.

The joint portion 721 includes a plurality of insertion holes 721a in which fastening screws are inserted from above, and a plurality of fastening portions 721b into which fastening screws inserted from below are screwed into the base member 701. A plurality of hook-shaped portions 721c formed in a hook shape on the back surface portion and engaged with the base member 701 are provided.

The vertical and vertical positions of the lower edge of the rear through hole 722 are different between the four locations closer to the center and the four locations closer to the left and right. In this embodiment, the one closer to the center is formed higher. This is due to the design of the upper surface shape of the cover member 720. That is, in order to give the upper surface shape of the cover member 720 a three-dimensional effect, the upper and lower edges of the rear through hole 722 are vertically curved so that the portion near the center appears to be raised. Has been adjusted.

The protrusion length of the protrusion holding portion 724 is adjusted so as to partially cancel the difference in the vertical position of the lower edge portion of the rear through hole 722. That is, the protrusion holding portion 724 arranged closer to the center adjusts the vertical displacement width of the hollow member 740 equally on the left and right by making the protrusion length longer. Since the protruding pressing portion 724 on the front side and the protruding pressing portion 724 on the back side are both arranged at positions where they overlap with the protruding columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 in the vertical direction, the hollow member 740 Even if the posture is lost, it is possible to prevent the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 from falling off from the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In the present embodiment, the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding pressing portion 724 on the back side is arranged lower than the vertical position of the lower end of the protruding pressing portion 724 on the front side. As a result, even when the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the projecting pressing portion 724, the posture of the hollow member 740 can be brought to the backward tilted posture. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player who sees the hollow member 740 when looking down from the front side to see the shape and pattern of the tubular main body 741 of the hollow member 740 on the front side.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and is rotatably supported by a pair of receiving recesses 702b formed on the left and right sides of the plate-shaped member 702 and the lower surface of the cover member 720. A pair of shafted support parts 731 that project coaxially from both left and right ends in a circular cross section, light transmission holes 732 that are bored in the vertical direction at a plurality of locations, and shafted support parts 731. A pair of loaded portions 733 that extend to the front side in a plate shape and receive a push-up load from below, and a plurality of light guides that are bored in the vertical direction with a size that allows the light guide member 714 of the base member 701 to be inserted. The insertion hole 734, a plurality of small receiving portions 735 arranged in pairs on the diagonal line of the light guide insertion hole 734 and projecting in a ring shape in the top view, and the center of the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 in the top view. It is provided with a plurality of large receiving portions 736 that are arranged at positions and project from the top view ring shape.

FIG. 47 is a top view of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The load-bearing portion 733 is arranged on the front side of the rotation shaft passing through the center of the shaft-bearing support portion 731, and separate drive units 760 correspond to each of the left and right, and a load is applied from below.

The plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs in the mode of load applied to the loaded portion 733 (for example, whether the load is applied to only one side or both sides, or the load at short time intervals. Is given or a continuous load is given, etc.), and the axial displacement is rotationally displaced around the shafted branch 731 in a different manner, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734 is formed following the shape of the light transmission hole 709 described above. That is, the light guide insertion hole 734 is bored in the front and rear in a long crystal shape (substantially elliptical shape, substantially turtle shell shape), and the long direction faces different directions corresponding to the positions from the left and right centers. ..

That is, the deviation between the long direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the light guide insertion hole 734 is closer to the center (in the present embodiment, they are matched), and the closer to the left and right ends, the longer the long direction is toward the front side toward the center of the left and right. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The small receiving portion 735 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the hollow member 740, and is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line CL1 passing through the center position in the left-right direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to guide the light guide. The relationship of the insertion hole 734 with respect to the long direction (the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the angle formed by the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 and the long direction of the light guide insertion hole 734) is maintained.

As a result, while the plurality of hollow members 740 arranged on one side of the center line CL1 have the same shape (while having a symmetrical shape with the hollow members 740 arranged on the other side), the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 The posture of the hollow member 740 in (see FIG. 40) can be changed.

That is, similar to the shape of the light guide insertion hole 734, the deviation between the elongated direction and the front-rear direction is smaller as the hollow member 740 is closer to the center, and the longer direction is closer to the left-right center toward the front side as it is closer to the left and right ends. It is said that the direction is inclined to.

That is, the elongated direction of the hollow member 740 is set so as to incline toward the center of the left and right toward the front side, and the inclination angle is designed to increase toward the left and right ends. In the present embodiment, the increment of the tilt angle is configured to be constant (about 5 degrees).

The pair of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the front side with respect to the reference O1 and formed in a bottomed tubular shape having a circular cross section, and the front small receiving portion 735a is arranged on the back side with respect to the reference O1 and has a circular cross section. It is provided with a rear small receiving portion 735b formed in a bottomed tubular shape.

In the present embodiment, the diameter of the inner cylinder of the rear small receiving portion 735b is designed to be longer than the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a. Specifically, the diameter of the cross section of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is designed to be 3 [mm], the diameter of the inner cylinder of the front small receiving portion 735a is designed to be 4.8 [mm], and the rear small is designed. The diameter of the inner cylinder of the receiving portion 735b is designed to be 5.0 [mm].

That is, as for the gap size generated in the opposite direction between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743, the gap size between the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 is larger than that of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. It is smaller than the clearance dimension with the portion 743.

As a result, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 that is supported by allowing rattling can be ordered. That is, in the present embodiment, the rotational displacement about the front small receiving portion 735a can be more likely to occur than the rotational displacement about the rear small receiving portion 735b.

In other words, the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily maintained in the vicinity of the front small receiving portion 735a, while the arrangement of the hollow member 740 can be easily displaced in the vicinity of the rear small receiving portion 735b. The direction of displacement of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which will be described later, can be adjusted so as to spread outward to the left and right toward the back surface side.

The large receiving portion 736 is a portion that allows rattling and supports the variable decorative member 750, and is arranged on both the left and right sides as compared with the large receiving portion 736 arranged on the center line CL1. The portion 736 is formed so that the distance from the rotation axis passing through the center of the shafted support portion 731 is longer and the vertical position is different, but the details will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The hollow member 740 is arranged on the right side because four members having the same shape arranged side by side on the left side and four members having the same shape arranged side by side on the right side are symmetrically formed. The hollow member 740 will be described in detail, and the hollow member 740 arranged on the left side will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is a front perspective view of the hollow member 740. As shown in FIG. 48, the hollow member 740 is arranged so as to surround the front, rear, left and right of the light guide member 714, so that the light leaking from the front, back, left and right of the light guide member 714 is not visually recognized (difficult) by the player. However, it is a member configured so that the player's line of sight can be gathered at the upper tip of the light guide member 714, which makes it easy to visually recognize the light. A tubular main body portion 741 in which a frame is designed and formed in a tubular shape that is open vertically, and a flat plate extending portion 742 that extends in a flat plate shape in the front-rear and left-right directions from the lower edge portion of the tubular main body portion 741. A pair of projecting columnar portions 743 projecting downward from the lower surface of the plate extending portion 742 of the flat plate extending portion 742.

The outer shape of the tubular main body 741 in the upper view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner shape of the rear through hole 722 of the cover member 720 in the upper view, while the outer shape of the flat plate extending portion 742 in the upper view is the cover member. It is formed so as to be larger than the top view inside shape of the rear through hole 722 of the 720. That is, in the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the hollow member 740 is pulled out upward of the cover member 720 while being vertically displaceable while being inserted through the rear through hole 722. Is regulated.

The upper edge of the tubular main body 741 is lowered toward the front side. As a result, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be intensively radiated upward on the front side. On the other hand, most of the light going upward on the back side is blocked by the tubular main body portion 741. Therefore, the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 can be satisfactorily delivered to the eyes of the player, and a large amount of the light that has reached the upper end of the light guide member 714 is transferred to the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the display from being deteriorated due to the loss.

The flat plate extending portion 742 also functions as a portion where the ascending displacement is restricted by the projecting holding portion 724 (see FIG. 45). That is, the projecting holding portion 724 is formed at a position corresponding to the projecting columnar portion 743 on the back surface side, and restricts the hollow member 740 from being displaced ascending. By forming the projecting holding portion 724 and the projecting columnar portion 743 at corresponding positions in this way, even when the hollow member 740 changes its posture, the projecting columnar portion 743 is a plate-shaped displacement member. Since it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 from coming off from the small receiving portion 735, the hollow member 740 can be stably supported.

The projecting columnar portion 743 has a projecting tip formed in a hemispherical shape and is arranged in accordance with the arrangement interval of the small receiving portions 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43). (See FIG. 40), it is accepted by the small receiving portion 735.

The pair of projecting columnar portions 743 and the tubular main body portion 741 are configured so as not to be rotationally symmetric. This makes it possible to change the positional relationship with the light guide member 714 when assembled upside down. , It is possible to prevent erroneous installation. Since the four hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right sides are formed in a symmetrical shape, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 assembled on the left side from the center position on the left and right sides from being assembled on the right side. (It is possible to prevent erroneous installation).

Here, the small receiving portion 735 is rotationally displaced about the center of the rotation axis facing the left-right direction in the same manner as the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the protruding columnar portion 743 is mainly displaced vertically by the hollow member 740. Since the protruding tip of the protruding columnar portion 743 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the hollow member 740 can be displaced with less resistance. Here, the displacement mode of the hollow member 740 due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

49 (a), 49 (b) and 49 (c) are cross-sectional views of the light guide member 714, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 in the XLIX-XLIX line of FIG. 47. FIG. 49 (a) shows the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, FIG. 49 (b) shows the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and FIG. 49 (c) shows. The upper end posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown in the figure. The horizontal posture corresponds to a posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 2.1 degrees about the reference O1 from the lower terminal posture, and the upper terminal posture is a plate-shaped displacement member from the horizontal posture. The 730 corresponds to a posture in which the reference O1 is rotated (raised and displaced) by about 4 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the drive unit 760 is not operating, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is tilted forward by about 2.1 degrees from the horizontal posture (lower end posture (initial posture)). ), The plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stably supported. In the present embodiment, by recessing the rear small receiving portion 735b deeper than the front small receiving portion 735a, the support position of the front small receiving portion 735a in the lower end posture (initial posture) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 ( The vertical displacement between the support position (bottom) and the rear small receiving portion 735b (bottom) is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the posture of the hollow member 740 supported by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the lower end posture (initial posture) from becoming a forward leaning posture. Further, the hollow member 740 is configured so that the surfaces of the support positions (bottoms) of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are inclined downward toward the front side in the same manner as the inclination of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Even when is displaced to the back side, the hollow member 740 can be returned to the front side by sliding the hollow member 740 using the inclination of the support position (bottom).

Therefore, for example, even if the hollow member 740 is displaced due to the load generated when opening and closing the front frame 14, the position of the hollow member 740 is set closer to the front (initial position) before the operation of the drive unit 760. Can be maintained stably.

As shown in FIG. 49B, in the horizontal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 can sufficiently secure a gap with the small receiving portion 735 both in the front and rear directions. .. Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly in a posture near the horizontal posture, the mode of vibration inside the small receiving portion 735 of the protruding columnar portion 743 is large in the front and rear protruding columnar portions 743. There is no difference, and the hollow member 740 tends to be randomly displaced back and forth and left and right.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the process of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 being displaced to the upper end posture, the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side of the hollow member 740 comes into contact with the front small receiving portion 735a and is pushed toward the back side. Be advanced.

Therefore, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 vibrates slightly with respect to the upper end posture (near the upper end posture), the hollow member 740 is centered on the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a. Is easy to rotate and displace. That is, the displacement mode that tends to occur in the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, which is a reference for small vibration.

A light guide member 714 is inserted into the hollow member 740 inside the tubular main body portion 741, and a pair of projecting columnar portions 743 are supported by being received by the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, since the displacement of the hollow member 740 corresponds to the displacement of the small receiving portion 735, first, the displacement mode of the small receiving portion 735 will be described.

Since the small receiving portion 735 is a part of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced following the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Since the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced about the reference O1 which is a straight line (straight line facing the left-right direction) connecting the shaft-bearing support portions 731, the small receiving portion 735 is displaced in the reference O1 direction (left-right direction). Instead, it will be displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1. Along with this, the degree of inclination of the straight line connecting the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 changes. Therefore, the hollow member 740 is also promoted to change the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1.

The hollow member 740 supported by the pair of small receiving portions 735 is not only displaced on a plane orthogonal to the reference O1 but also displaced in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) as the degree of inclination changes. Posture changes are allowed.

Since the arrangement of the small receiving portion 735 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1, the above-mentioned change in the degree of inclination is also symmetrical with respect to the center line CL1. The displacement or posture change of the 740 in the front-back and left-right directions (horizontal direction) can be caused symmetrically.

Further, since the change in the degree of inclination with respect to the center line CL1 corresponds to the arrangement of the pair of small receiving portions 735 in the state before the change, the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side (center side) close to the center line CL1. The change in the degree of inclination is different from the change in the degree of inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the side far from the center line CL1 (left and right outside). In the present embodiment, since the displacement in the direction parallel to the center line CL1 is maintained, the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the left and right sides having a large inclination angle with respect to the center line CL1 in the state before the change. Is larger than the degree of change in the inclination of the pair of small receiving portions 735 on the center side (see FIG. 47). As a result, the amount of change in posture of the hollow member 740 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced in a certain manner can be changed depending on whether it is near or far from the center line CL1.

The relationship between the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 when displacement occurs will be described. In order to suppress the resistance of the hollow member 740 at the time of displacement, there is a gap between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714. The shape and the shape of the light guide member 714 are designed.

Here, the design gap is different between the long direction of the light guide member 714 in the top view and the direction orthogonal to the long direction. That is, the gap in the long direction is larger than the gap in the direction orthogonal to the long direction.

Therefore, as the inclination angle of the light guide member 714 with respect to the center line CL1 in the long direction becomes larger (the one arranged on the left and right outer sides), the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 become larger. The gap in the front-rear direction between them will be narrowed.

Therefore, when the hollow member 740 is displaced by the same amount in the front-rear direction due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides are pressed against the light guide member 714, causing rubbing or large damage. It may be easily loaded and damaged. On the other hand, as a countermeasure, if the gap in the front-rear direction between the inner surface of the hollow member 740 and the outer surface of the light guide member 714 is set large in advance, the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 are too far apart. Therefore, the effect of shielding the portion other than the tip portion of the light guide member 714 by the hollow member 740 and gathering the line of sight of the player at the tip portion of the light guide member 714 is diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right outer sides is made smaller than the displacement amount in the front-rear direction of the hollow members 740 arranged on the left and right center sides. It is configured as follows.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which a plurality of small receiving portions 735 are arranged on the same plane parallel to the reference O1, the small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right outer sides are located on the left and right center sides. It is arranged so that the distance between the front side small receiving portion 735 and the reference O1 in the front-rear direction is shorter than that of the arranged small receiving portion 735.

As a result, the small receiving portion 735 on the front side is displaced rearward due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, so that the amount of front-rear displacement of the hollow member 740 that is pushed and displaced rearward is arranged on the left and right center sides. It can be geometrically defined so that the members arranged on the left and right outer sides are slightly smaller than the members arranged on the left and right sides.

In the initial posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the projecting columnar portion 743 of the hollow member 740 is formed substantially evenly in the front-rear and left-right directions, and the hollow member 740 is parallel in the horizontal direction. It is provided so as not to fill the gap between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 even if it moves.

Therefore, in the state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture (non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2), the player hits or tries to shake the pachinko machine 10, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the hollow member 740 is displaced, the displacement is suppressed to be less than the clearance dimension between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740. Therefore, the load transmitted between the light guide member 714 and the hollow member 740 can be reduced.

Since the distance between the pair of small receiving portions 735 arranged on the left and right of the light guide insertion hole 734 changes with the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the top view, the center of the small receiving portion 735 and the hollow It is unlikely that the hollow member 740 will be displaced in the front-rear direction while being aligned with the center of the projecting columnar portion 743 of the member 740.

At least, the arrangement of the protruding columnar portion 743 with respect to the small receiving portion 735 changes in the gap between the small receiving portion 735 and the protruding columnar portion 743. Changes can occur.

A mode for pushing the hollow member 740 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, during the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front side portion of the inner surface of the front small receiving portion 735a (the small receiving portion 735 on the side where the displacement in the front-rear direction is large) is the protruding columnar portion 743. It starts to come into contact with the front side surface and is pushed toward the back side.

At this time, due to the above-mentioned dimensional relationship, a gap is maintained between the front portion of the inner surface of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the front portion of the protruding columnar portion 743. Therefore, rattling in the rotation direction about the projecting columnar portion 743 supported by the front small receiving portion 735a is allowed. It is configured to be able to cope with a change in the distance between the small receiving portions 735 in the top view due to the displacement using this rattling.

In this way, the small receiving portion 735 is configured to displace the hollow member 740 to the back surface side, and the rear small receiving portion receives a rattling that allows rotational displacement around the protruding columnar portion 743 on the front side. It is configured to be provided between the portion 735b and the projecting columnar portion 743. Therefore, even if the hollow member 740 and the light guide member 714 collide with each other during the displacement of the hollow member 740 based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the hollow member 740 and the light guide member Since the load generated with the 714 can be suppressed to a small value, it is possible to prevent the hollow member 740 or the light guide member 714 from being cracked or chipped.

It will be described back to FIG. 43, FIG. 44 and FIG. 45. The variable decorative member 750 is a bifurcated support member 751 supported between the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and a decorative member 756 fastened and fixed to the bifurcated support member 751 and arranged above the cover member 720. And.

The bifurcated support member 751 includes a columnar projecting portion 752 projecting downward from the lower surface of the central portion of the plate-shaped body portion formed in the shape of a long left and right plate, and both left and right end portions of the plate-shaped body portion. A pair of tubular protrusions 753 (different lengths) that are projected upward from the center, and a plate-shaped extension that extends from the center of the plate-shaped main body to the back side. It is equipped with 754.

The protruding tip of the columnar protruding portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and is received by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed so as to be inserted into the front through hole 723, and the bifurcated support member 751 is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction by the front through hole 723, while the large receiving portion 736 is a shafted support portion. Rotationally displaced about an axis passing through the center of 731. Therefore, although the directions of displacement are different from each other, the projecting tip of the columnar projecting portion 752 is formed in a hemispherical shape, so that the variable decorative member 750 can be displaced with less resistance as the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced. it can.

The plate-shaped extending portion 754 acts to arrange the position of the center of gravity of the variable decorative member 750 on the back side of the center of the columnar projecting portion 752. That is, the posture in which the variable decorative member 750 is stable by its own weight can be set as the backward leaning posture. As a result, the contact position between the columnar projecting portion 752 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the initial posture is compared with the case where the variable decorative member 750 stands upright without tilting. Since it can be moved toward the front side, the amount of displacement of the variable decorative member 750 near the start of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be increased.

The decorative member 756 includes a pair of projecting leg portions 757 that project downward corresponding to the tubular projecting portion 753, and a female screw is formed at the tip of the projecting leg portion 757. The projecting leg portion 757 is inserted inside the tubular projecting portion 753.

The plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted along the center position of the tubular projecting portion 753. The bifurcated support member 751 and the decorative member 757 are fastened and fixed by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole and screwing the fastening screw into the female screw at the tip of the protruding leg portion 757.

The assembly process of the second operation unit 700 will be described. First, the variable decorative member 750 is assembled to the cover member 720. That is, the tubular projecting portion 753 of the bifurcated support member 751 is passed through the front through hole 723 of the cover member 720 from below, and the projecting leg portion 757 of the decorative member 756 is inserted into the tubular projecting portion 753 to project. The fastening screw is screwed into the female screw at the tip of the leg 757.

Next, the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the hollow member 740, and the cover member 720 are placed on the base member 701 in this order, and the cover member 720 is fastened and fixed to the base member 701. When assembling the cover member 720 to the base member 701, a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 721a from above with the hook-shaped portion 721c engaged with the engaging portion 702a formed on the back surface side of the plate-shaped member 702. After fastening and fixing the insertion cover member 720 and the base member 701, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 721b by turning it upside down.

As a result, a plurality of members are non-fixedly arranged between the base member 701 and the cover member 720, and fastening screws are screwed into a plurality of locations from the lower surface, but each component member is in the middle of assembly. Can be prevented from falling off from between the base member 701 and the cover member 720.

Finally, the drive unit 760 is arranged below the base member 701, and the fastening screw is screwed in from below to fasten and fix the drive unit 760. In the assembled state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 40), the traveling direction of the fastening screw screwed in from below interferes with the outer wall portion 312 of the rear case 310, so that the second operating unit 700 is attached to the rear case 310. It is difficult to pull out the fastening screw in the housed state. Therefore, when the front side of the operating unit 300 is illegally opened, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being independently taken out from the rear case 310.

Further, on the back side of the drive unit 760, a fastening portion 766 is formed in which a fastening screw inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 of the back case 310 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, when the second operating unit 700 is assembled to the rear case 310 without the drive unit 760 being assembled, the fastening screw is inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 to fasten and fix the second operating unit 700. Since there are places where the fastening screws cannot be fastened at the stage, the operator can be made aware that the drive unit 760 is insufficient. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive unit 760 from being forgotten to be assembled.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 760. In FIG. 50, the drive unit 760 arranged on the right side in the front view is shown. Although the drive unit 760 has a slightly different appearance, the components are symmetrical. Therefore, the drive unit 760 on the right side will be described in detail, and the drive unit 760 on the left side will be omitted.

The drive unit 760 is made of a load member 761 that can apply a load to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and a metal (brass in this embodiment) that rotatably supports the base end side of the load member 761. A shaft rod portion 762 formed in a cylindrical shape, a support case 763 to which the shaft rod portion 762 is fixed and the entire structure is formed in a case shape, an electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 arranged inside the support case 763, and a support. It includes a front lid member 770 arranged on the front side of the case 763 and fastened and fixed to the support case 763, and an illuminated substrate 777 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 770.

The load member 761 is formed of a resin material, and extends outward from a base end portion 761a in which a through hole through which a shaft rod portion 762 is inserted is formed and the base end portion 761a, and is abbreviated. A rod-shaped extension portion 761b that is bent and formed in a U-shape, a vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c that is formed in a rod shape that bends upward from the extension tip of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b, and a rod-shaped extension portion 761c. Centering on the shaft rod portion 762 at the boundary between the overhanging portion 761d protruding from the extending tip of the extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the overhanging portion 761d and the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 of the front lid member 770 formed in an arc shape and an opposed curved portion 761e arranged to face each other.

A metal (magnetic material) metal plate member MB2 is disposed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b by engaging with the elastic claw, similarly to the metal plate member MB1 described above.

More specifically, rail portions for guiding the front-rear slide of the metal plate member MB2 are provided on both sides of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b in the longitudinal direction, and this rail portion can guide the metal plate member MB2 only from the back side. (Only the back side is fully open). When sliding the metal plate member MB2 along the rail portion, the elastic claw is pushed down by the metal plate member MB2, and when the metal plate member MB2 is slid as it is, the metal plate member MB2 hits the front side wall of the rail portion. As a result, the slide is restricted, and at that position, the push-down of the elastic claw by the metal plate member MB2 is released (it has risen to a position facing the side surface of the metal plate member MB1), and the elastic claw is the metal plate member MB2. Engage to regulate the retreat to the back side of the.

The method of fixing the metal plate member MB2 to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b is not limited to this. For example, the metal plate member MB2 may be fastened and fixed to the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, may be tied with a binding band, or may be attached with an adhesive tape or the like.

The front lid member 770 has a projecting frame portion 771 projecting in a frame shape toward the front side, and a plurality of protrusions projecting inside the projecting frame portion 771 in a small-diameter columnar shape toward the front side. From the cylindrical portion 772, the wiring through recess 773 recessed so that the electrical wiring connected to the illuminated substrate 777 at the lower edge portion or the connector connected to the end of the electrical wiring can be passed, and the back surface of the plate. It is provided with a curved projecting portion 774 projecting in a curved plate shape along an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762.

The projecting frame portion 771 is formed so as to face the periphery of the illuminated substrate 777, and is a portion that prevents the illuminated substrate 777 from being loaded from the vertical and horizontal directions.

The projecting columnar portion 772 includes a front-view gourd-shaped seat portion and a small-diameter insertion portion that is further projected from the seat portion so that the insertion portion can be inserted into the through hole 779 of the illuminated substrate 777. By assembling, the back surface of the illuminated substrate 777 is supported by the seat portion, and the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 777 can be stabilized. A female screw portion into which a fastening screw can be screwed is provided in the seat portion, and the illuminated substrate 777 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770 by the fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion.

The illuminated substrate 777 includes a light emitting means 778 composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like arranged at positions designed in consideration of the effect, and a plurality of through holes 779 formed in the illuminated substrate 777 for assembly. And.

The through holes 779 are formed at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment) as a pair of circular through holes corresponding to the insertion portion and the female screw portion of the projecting cylindrical portion 772.

In the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 777 is directly fastened and fixed to the front lid member 770. That is, it corresponds to the case where the front lid member 770 arranged close to the front side of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the illuminated substrate 777 are configured as a single rigid body. Therefore, the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can easily vibrate the illuminated substrate 777, and the vibration generated by the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 vibrates the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778. Can be configured.

In this embodiment, a curved projecting portion 774 is arranged between the load member 761 displaced by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the plate back surface portion of the front lid member 770. That is, since the load member 761 on the vibration source side and the front lid member 770 are separated by at least the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774, it is possible to prevent excessive transmission of vibration.

The width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be arbitrarily set. Therefore, the setting of the width dimension of the curved protrusion 774 can be changed depending on whether the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means 778 is to be vibrated or the light axis is maintained without being vibrated. In the former case, the width dimension may be shortened, and in the latter case, the width dimension may be lengthened.

The support case 763 includes a lower regulation portion 764 arranged below the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, an upper regulation portion 765 arranged on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 762 with respect to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, and a rear case 310. It is provided with a fastening portion 766 (see FIG. 45) into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the bottom wall portion 311 (see FIG. 6) is screwed.

The load member 761 is normally tilted by its own weight (see FIG. 51 (a)), but when electricity is supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, a magnetic force (electromagnetic force) is generated, and the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) causes the metal. The plate member MB2 is attracted and upwardly displaced.

That is, in the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 is displaced between the ascending position arranged as a result of rising by the electromagnetic force and the descending position arranged as a result of the electromagnetic force disappearing and descending by its own weight. , The plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 43) that receives the load from the load member 761 is displaced in the rotation direction about the shafted support portion 731. Hereinafter, the rotational displacement will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are front views of the drive unit 760. In addition, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are omitted except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which a current is not passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 761 is arranged in a descending position by its own weight. In FIG. 51 (b), a current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current and the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the load member 761 abuts on the lower regulating portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

Here, the lower regulation portion 764 and the upper regulation portion 765 are configured so as to have different arrangements (distance from the shaft rod portion 762) with respect to the shaft rod portion 762, and the effect caused by this will be described. ..

First, since the load applied to the lower regulation portion 764 via the load member 761 is a load generated mainly by the own weight of the load member 761, the load member 761 is stably supported by supporting the center of gravity of the load member 761. can do. For this reason, the lower regulating portion 764 is arranged at the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761.

In the above description of the window movable unit 150, since the driven member 163 is formed in a straight rod shape, the position of the center of gravity is substantially the center position of the member, but the load member 761 is a rod-shaped extension portion. Since the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c and the overhanging portion 761d extend bifurcated from the extension tip side of the 761b, the center of gravity is located closer to the extension tip side than the substantially central position of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. ..

In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the lower regulation portion 764 is arranged on the extension tip side of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b as a position corresponding to the position of the center of gravity of the load member 761. ..

On the other hand, the load applied to the upper regulating portion 765 via the load member 761 is mainly due to the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. Therefore, the arrangement of the upper regulating portion 765 is arranged at the center of gravity of the load member 761. There are few advantages associated with location. In the present embodiment, the load transmitted to the upper regulation portion 765 via the load member 761 is reduced by arranging the upper regulation portion 765 facing the rotating tip of the load member 761.

That is, when moments of the same magnitude are generated, the load transmitted through the load member 761 is more distant from the rotation axis of the load member 761 (the position where the arm related to the moment is longer). Since it becomes smaller, the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 can be reduced.

As described above, it is desirable that the load transmission to the upper regulation member 765 occurs at the rotating tip portion of the load member 761, so in the present embodiment, the overhanging portion 761d is further extended from the extending tip portion of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. It is configured to project toward the outer diameter side of a circle centered on the shaft rod portion 762, and the overhanging portion 761d abuts on the upper regulation member 765. As a result, it is possible to avoid the load transmission at the intermediate portion of the load member 761 and stably generate the load transmission on the rotation tip side.

In the present embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is not configured to push the load member 761 but is configured to be pulled up by an attractive force. That is, the magnetic force generated in the iron core arranged in the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is configured to pull up the load member 761 by attracting the metal plate member MB2.

According to this configuration, as compared with the configuration in which the load member 761 is pushed by a member that moves by electromagnetic force, the load member 761 is overloaded (locally) even when the load member 761 is displaced by the load applied to the load member 761. Since the load is unlikely to occur, it is possible to easily prevent the configuration of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being damaged. As a result, the useful life of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be extended even if the load member 761 is configured to receive a fluctuating load as in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), in the load member 761, the upper surface of the metal plate member MB2 is in surface contact (predetermined on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2) in a state of receiving an attractive force from the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (rising position). While making contact at a plurality of points on a flat surface), a gap is provided between the metal plate member MB2 and the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (the part containing the coil), and the above-mentioned surface contact surface is provided. The upper regulating portion 765 and the overhanging portion 761d are configured to come into contact with each other on a surface parallel to the surface.

As a result, the load generated by the electromagnetic force is applied to the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 while avoiding the load member 761 from colliding with the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 to prevent the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 from being overloaded. It can be dispersed and received on the lower edge portion or the lower surface (contact surface) of the upper regulating portion 765. It is possible to avoid a large local load.

At the raised position of the load member 761, there is a gap not only between the main body of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2, but also between the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the metal plate member MB2. It may be configured to be provided so that the load from the load member 761 is received only by the upper regulating portion 765. In this case, since the physical load transmission between the load member 761 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be blocked, the durability of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 can be improved.

In this case, since the load is likely to be concentrated on the overhanging portion 761d of the load member 761, the overhanging portion 761d is preferentially damaged (broken), but the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken). Even in this case, since the metal plate member MB2 is configured to abut on the lower edge of the metal case of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 at a plurality of points on a predetermined plane, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one point. ..

Further, in this case, if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged (broken), the metal plate member MB2 contacts the lower edge of the metal case at a plurality of points, so that a detection sensor is separately configured so that this contact can be detected. Therefore, the breakage (breakage) of the overhanging portion 761d can be easily determined.

Further, since the magnetic force (electromagnetic force) generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 continues to be generated at the ascending position, it is unlikely that the load member 761 rebounds after colliding with the upper regulating portion 765. Therefore, the arrangement and orientation of the upper regulation unit 765 can be designed only in consideration of the efficiency of reducing the load transmitted to the upper regulation unit 765 (the straight line passing through the center of the shaft rod portion 762 and the width of the upper regulation unit 765). The angle with the straight line along the direction can be designed to be small).

On the other hand, since the straight line along the width direction of the lower regulation portion 764 is inclined with respect to the straight line rL1 passing through the lower regulation portion 764 and the center of the shaft rod portion 762, the lower regulation portion 764 has a lower regulation portion 764. The direction in which the repulsive force is generated can be dispersed as compared with the case where the straight line along the width direction and the straight line rL1 are parallel or on the same straight line (force decomposition). As a result, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the load member 761 after colliding with the lower regulating portion 764.

Moreover, since the lower regulating portion 764 is formed to have a long width dimension (width along the radial direction), a wide area of the surface receiving the load can be secured, and the load due to the load of the load member 761 causes the load member 761 to have a large area. The pressure (stress) generated in the lower regulation portion 764 can be reduced.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the rebound (bound) of the load member 761 is reduced while reducing the load transmitted to the lower regulation unit 764 and the upper regulation unit 765 via the load member 761 at the time of displacement in both the upper and lower directions. It can be suppressed.

The materials of the upper regulation unit 765 and the lower regulation unit 764 are not limited in any way. For example, it may be a general-purpose plastic such as polypropylene or polystyrene, an engineering plastic such as polycarbonate, a thermosetting resin such as a melamine resin, a polyurethane or an epoxy resin, or a rubber material. Further, the materials of the upper regulation portion 765 and the lower regulation portion 764 may be made of the same material or may be different.

For example, when the upper regulating portion 765 is provided with a function of suppressing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction that may occur in the load member 761 due to the load that the load member 761 can receive from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the ascending position. As the material of the upper regulating portion 765, a material or structure having excellent frictional resistance as well as damping property may be adopted.

In this case, the load member 761 is displaced in the front-rear direction (axial direction) by the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761, only in a state where the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765 are in contact with each other. It can be easily prevented.

When the load member 761 is displaced, the opposed curved portion 761e is displaced on the back surface side of the curved projecting portion 774. Since both the opposing curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 have an arc shape centered on the shaft rod portion 762, the load member 761 is displaced to the front side and the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 come into contact with each other. Even if the load member 761 is rotationally displaced in this state, the opposed curved portion 761e and the curved projecting portion 774 only slide along the rotational direction, so that the resistance to the rotational displacement can be reduced.

Further, by forming the opposed curved portion 761e at the lower end portion of the load member 761, a sufficient space can be secured above the portion. In the present embodiment, the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is arranged in the secured space.

The vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c extends above the opposing curved portion 761e, but unlike the opposed curved portion 761e that is formed to be curved, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is extended straight in front view. That is, the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in the vertical direction in the front view in a state where the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from bending and deforming to the left and right due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the tip of the load member 761 is displaced upward and displaced while being slightly displaced to the left and right. Even with the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be pushed up stably. The load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the support mode will be described later.

The vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c is formed in a rod shape that extends straight in the vertical direction in the front view, but is in the middle position (axis) so that the upper end portion is arranged on the front side rather than the lower end portion in the side view. It is bent (bent at an obtuse angle) at the left position of the rod portion 762).

As a result, the area occupied by the load member 761 can be moved toward the back side below the vicinity of the shaft rod portion 762, and the arrangement area of the members arranged on the front side thereof can be secured. That is, since the arrangement position of the illumination board 777 can be moved to the back side, by separating the game board 13 (see FIG. 40) and the illumination board 777, the light emitting means 778 irradiates the bottom surface of the flow. The light visually recognized through the members 91 and 92 can be easily recognized as a wide light. In other words, instead of the point emission that is visually recognized by the size of the outer shape of the LED, the surface emission that the light reaches in a circle around the optical axis and shines in a plane can be easily recognized.

Further, since the load member 761 can be easily deformed by bending back and forth due to the load received from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, an overload is locally generated when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by a single load member 761. Even if it occurs, the load can be released by bending and deforming the load member 761. Thereby, the durability of the load member 761 can be improved.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by making the flexibility of the load member 761 different in the front-rear and left-right directions, it is possible to improve the stability of pushing up the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the durability of the load member 761. The effect of being able to do it can be achieved.

When the load member 761 is arranged in the ascending position, the upward electromagnetic force generated by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the downward load generated between the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 at both left and right ends of the load member 761. Is supported more stably.

Therefore, as will be described later, even when a load is applied to the load member 761 from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the base end portion 761a to the overhanging portion 761d are still stably supported. The range in which the deflection occurs can be limited to the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and coming into contact with the support case 763 and the front lid member 770. In other words, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from rubbing against other members to damage the member or to require an extra driving force for driving the load member 761.

<Action of the second operation unit 700>
The operation mode of the second operation unit 700 will be described. In the second operation unit 700, since the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 differs depending on the drive mode of the drive units 760 arranged on the left and right, the hollow member 740 supported on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 accordingly. And the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 are also configured to be different. In the following, the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described first, and then the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 and the hollow member 740 will be described.

52, 53 and 54 are front views of the second operating unit 700. FIG. 52 shows a state in which both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are arranged in the lowered position, and in FIG. 53, only the load member 761 of the left drive unit 760 is arranged in the lowered position, and the right drive is driven. The load member 761 of the unit 760 is shown in a state of being displaced upward from the lowering position to the rising position, and FIG. 54 is shown in a state of both the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 being arranged in the rising position. ..

The state shown in FIG. 52 corresponds to a state (non-excited state) in which no current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the load member 761 are not in contact with each other, and the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained by the contact with the base member 701. Posture).

The state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to a state in which a current is controlled to flow through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the drive unit 760 on one side (right side) (one-side excitation state). In this state, the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is pushed up by the load member 761 on the right side, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in an intermediate posture. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced by about 1.3 degrees from the horizontal posture in the intermediate posture.

In the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is concentrated on the load member 761 on the right side. In the present embodiment, the load member 761 is formed in the shape of a small-diameter rod and bent in the front-rear direction, and is easily bent in the lateral direction (front-back direction), and is formed on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and above the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is formed with strength (rigidity) that allows it to bend and deform due to its own weight of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on which it is mounted.

In the present embodiment, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is applied in the direction including the front-rear component at the contact position with the load member 761. (See FIG. 55), the load member 761 is configured to be easily bent and deformed, and the load can be released by this bending deformation. That is, the state shown in FIG. 53 corresponds to the state in which the load member 761 is bent and deformed.

The difference in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the rising direction between the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 described below can be explained as being due to the degree of bending of the load member 761. That is, by appropriately setting the elastic modulus of the load member 761, the difference in posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be designed. The elastic modulus of the load member 761 may be designed to be the same on the left and right, or may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are symmetrical, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the left drive unit 760 (FIG. 50) is in the state opposite to that shown in FIG. 53. Even if a current is passed through (see) and no current is passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the drive unit 760 on the right side, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the same as the posture shown in FIG. 53. Therefore, in the following, the state shown in FIG. 53 is referred to as a one-sided excitation state, and the description of the state in which the excitation relationship of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is symmetrical will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 54, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by both the left and right drive units 760. Therefore, the load of its own weight applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reduced to half, so that the deflection displacement of the load member 761 can be reduced.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the load member 761 on the left side being arranged in the raised position as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load member due to the load applied via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is used. The difference is that the degree of deflection of 761 is about half.

FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the LVb-LVb line of FIG. 54. is there.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in the excited state, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into two, so that the load member The plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be raised and displaced in a state where the deflection deformation of the 761 is small (a state in which the deflection deformation is about half).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), when one side of the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 is excited, the load applied to the load member 761 via the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is the load member 761 on one side. Focus on. Since the deflection deformation generated in the load member 761 is increased by this load, the amount of rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed by the amount of the deflection deformation even if the rotation angle of the load member 761 is the same.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the reference O1. In the state where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is supported by the regulation protrusion 702c (initial posture, shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 55 (a)), from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The extending normal line abuts on the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending downward in the rear direction.

That is, since the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 is generated along the extending direction of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, the bending deformation generated in the load member 761 can be suppressed to a small extent. .. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is mainly used for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

On the other hand, in the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)), the normal extending from the contact surface (lower surface) of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the lower side in the front direction on the lower side in the front direction than the reference O1. It comes into contact with the load member 761 of the drive unit 760 in a state of extending to.

That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate posture (see FIG. 55 (a)) where the amount of deflection deformation of the load member 761 tends to increase due to the large displacement of the load member 761, the load member 761 is directed toward the load member 761 via the lower surface of the loaded portion 733. The applied load comprises a frontal component and a downward component. In the present embodiment, since the load member 761 is formed in a rod shape extending in a direction of ascending and tilting toward the front, the load including the front component and the downward component acts as a load that bends and deforms the load member 761. To do. Therefore, in this state, the driving force transmitted through the load member 761 is used not only for the rising displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 but also for the deflection deformation of the load member 761 (used for the deflection deformation of the load member 761). The rate of being done gradually increases).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the easiness of bending and deforming of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 changes with the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. That is, in the posture in which the load starts to be applied from the load member 761 to the loaded portion 733 (lower end posture (initial posture)), the load member 761 is subjected to a rear load in a direction in which bending and deformation are unlikely to occur, and from the horizontal posture, the load is generated. A load in a direction in which the load member 761 is more likely to bend and deform than in the direction of the rear load (a downward load or a front load) is generated.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the drive unit 760, the displacement width of the load member 761 and the generated force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are the same, the shape of the load member 761 (particularly the shape of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c) and the load are applied. Depending on the design of the part 733, the timing at which the load member 761 is likely to bend (the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730) and the amount of bending deformation can be adjusted, so that the second operation when the drive unit 760 is driven. The operation mode of the unit 700 can be designed differently.

In the present embodiment, since the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is formed to extend upward while projecting to the front side, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be bent and deformed from an early stage. That is, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture and a vertically downward load is applied to the load member 761, the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is flexed and deformed (deformed in the forward tilting direction) by the load. be able to. In other words, the load of its own weight transmitted through the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be started to be used for the bending deformation of the load member 761 from the stage before the plate-shaped displacement member 730 reaches the horizontal posture.

In this way, the load is configured so that the usage of the driving force transmitted to the plate-shaped displacement member 730 via the load member 761 is balanced between the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the deformation of the load member 761. Even if the member 761 is over-displaced or under-displaced, the fluctuation that occurs in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be reduced.

For example, when the load member 761 hardly bends and deforms, the difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the difference in the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 directly affect the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, unless the displacement amount of the load member 761 and the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761 are precisely designed so as not to cause a deviation, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 cannot be stabilized. In this case, high precision is required at both the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage of the member, so that the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, when the load member 761 is flexed and deformed, even if there is a slight difference in the displacement amount of the load member 761 or the height of the upper end portion of the load member 761, it is designed to be offset by the flexure deformation of the load member 761. By doing so, it is possible to stabilize the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Therefore, the accuracy of the manufacturing stage and the assembling stage required for stabilizing the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be suppressed to a low level, so that the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

This is not limited to the load member 761 alone, but the same can be said for the displacement of the left and right load members 761 combined. That is, when the load members 761 of the left and right drive units 760 are formed to have symmetrical shapes as in the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the load members 761 and the upper end portion of the load member 761 are formed by the left and right drive units 760. Even if there is a slight difference in height, the difference can be used for bending deformation of the load member 761.

As a result, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 in the one-sided excitation state can be stabilized in the intermediate posture regardless of which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven to cause the one-sided excitation state.

Further, the direction of bending caused in the load member 761 by the load applied to the load member 761 via the loaded portion 733 can be limited to the front side. This direction coincides with the direction of the displacement in the front-rear direction set in the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c with respect to the rod-shaped extension portion 761b. As a result, the load that causes the load member 761 to bend and deform can be configured to face in a direction away from the rod-shaped extending portion 761b.

Therefore, most of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 toward the load member 761 can be absorbed by the bending deformation of the load member 761, and the influence of the load applied from the loaded portion 733 on the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. Can be made smaller. In other words, the influence on the load member 761 can be suppressed in the vicinity of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c.

That is, rubbing or deformation that occurs in other contact portions of the load member 761 (for example, the base end portion 761a and the shaft rod portion 762, the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the curved protrusion portion 774 and the opposed curved portion 761e, etc.). Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily predict the mode of bending deformation of the load member 761. Therefore, the structure of the load member 761 and the design of the displacement mode of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are designed on the premise that the load member 761 is bent and deformed. Can be easy.

In addition, the direction of bending of the load member 761 can be limited to the front side (the same portion can be prevented from bending toward the front side or bending toward the back side depending on the situation. ) Therefore, the position of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the amount of deflection of the load member 761 can be related one-to-one, and the durability of the load member 761 is compared with the case where the load member 761 can be bent in both front and rear directions. The sex can be improved.

In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes depending on the degree of deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c, and the load member 761 is both in the raised position. (See FIG. 51 (b)).

Therefore, as described above, the front-rear displacement of the load member 761 due to the load applied to the load member 761 due to the bending deformation of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c occurs between the overhanging portion 761d and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed by friction.

Therefore, even when controlling so that the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is repeatedly bent and released (for example, one electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is maintained in the excited state and the other electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is in the excited state). A control mode in which the load member 761 is repeatedly switched between the non-excited state) and the load member 761 can be suppressed from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole.

This can be satisfactorily realized by a configuration in which the load member 761 is supported not only by the shaft rod portion 762 but also by the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765 as in the present embodiment. More specifically, it is not a mode in which the load member 761 is placed between the descending position and the ascending position to receive the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but the plate-shaped displacement with the load member 761 fixed in the ascending position. It is satisfactorily feasible because it is in a mode of receiving a load from the member 730.

That is, when the load member 761 is supported only by the shaft rod portion 762, the base end portion 761a and the rod-shaped extension portion 761b on the shaft rod portion 762 side are provided with respect to the front-rear component of the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730. However, if the rod-shaped extension portion 761b is twisted or misaligned in the front-rear direction due to the load from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a gap is created between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. there is a possibility.

When the gap between the metal plate member MB2 and the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 exceeds the distance for effectively generating the electromagnetic force, the electromagnetic force suddenly weakens, and it becomes difficult to maintain the load member 761 in the raised position. As a countermeasure, it is possible to increase the rigidity of the rod-shaped extension portion 761b or increase the resistance between the shaft rod portion 762 and the load member 761, but in the former case, the load member 761 becomes heavier. The size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased, and in the latter case, the driving force for rotating the load member 761 is excessively required, which is not preferable because the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 is increased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is bent, the load member 761 is stably placed not only at the shaft rod portion 762 but also at the left and right ends of the shaft rod portion 762 and the upper regulation portion 765. I support it. As a result, in addition to being able to suppress the torsional deformation of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b as compared with the case where it is supported on one of the left and right sides, the axial displacement of the load member 761 is caused by the frictional resistance generated between the rod-shaped extending portion 761b and the upper regulating portion 765. It can be suppressed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load member 761 from being displaced in the front-rear direction as a whole when controlling the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c to repeatedly bend and release without causing an increase in the size of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the metal plate member MB2 functions as a reinforcing material for the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from the support mode of the metal plate member MB2 (see FIG. 51). That is, the rigidity of the metal plate member MB2 can prevent the rod-shaped extending portion 761b from being twisted and deformed.

It will be described back to FIG. 54. The state shown in FIG. 54 corresponds to a state (excitation state) in which a current is flowing through the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the left and right drive units 760. In this state, the load members 733 on both the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are pushed up by the load members 761 on both the left and right sides, so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes its posture in the rising direction and is in the upper terminal posture. .. In the present embodiment, in the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced from the intermediate posture by about 2.7 degrees (about 6.1 degrees from the lower terminal posture and about 4 degrees from the horizontal posture).

In the state shown in FIG. 54, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 53, the load due to the weight of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is divided into the load members 761 on both the left and right sides. By doing so, the deflection generated in the load member 761 is alleviated.

In FIG. 54, for convenience, the deflection of the left and right load members 761 is shown as being so small that it cannot be discriminated. That is, it is shown in the same shape as the load member 761 shown in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in the present embodiment, by switching the conduction state to the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 (see FIG. 50), the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed in a plurality of ways (at least three ways). You can switch with.

In order to switch the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 from FIG. 53 to FIG. 54, the electromagnetic solenoid of the left drive unit 760 is maintained while the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (see FIG. 50) of the right drive unit 760 is maintained. Since the SOL2 may be excited, the posture can be easily switched smoothly.

56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b) show an example of the timekeeping change of the conduction of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 and the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It is a figure. In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a) and 57 (b), the upper timing chart shows the conduction state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on the left side, and the middle timing chart shows the electromagnetic solenoid on the right side. The conduction state of the SOL2 is shown, and the lower timing chart shows the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In addition, due to the configuration, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is not displaced at the same time as the timing of conducting electricity to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 (a slight time difference occurs), but in FIGS. 56 and 57, for the purpose of facilitating understanding. For convenience, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown to be displaced at the same time as the conduction of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 56B is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 53 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (a) is the same as the mode in which the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched.

The conduction mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 shown in FIG. 57 (b) is such that the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 53 are alternately switched, and the state shown in FIG. 52 and the state shown in FIG. 54 are alternately switched. The switching mode is the same as the repeating mode.

As described above, the patterns of switching the states described above in FIGS. 52 to 54 are not one, but are generated in a plurality of patterns by different combinations of the conduction modes of the left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2.

Therefore, since the posture switching pattern of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 occurs in a plurality of ways, the displacement pattern of the hollow member 740 that rides on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the variable decorative member 750 (see FIG. 43). Can be configured in a plurality of ways, but the details will be described later.

In FIGS. 56 (a), 56 (b), 57 (a), and 57 (b), for convenience, the short-term conduction length and conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 are shown to be constant. , This is just an example. For example, the short-time conduction interval may be set separately, or may be configured to be gradually lengthened or gradually shortened, and can be set arbitrarily.

Further, by shortening the short-time conduction length of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be generated instantaneously (pulse-like), while the conduction length is lengthened. , The posture change can be maintained with sufficient length. Further, by shortening the conduction interval of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be changed so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is vibrating.

FIG. 58 is a top view of the second operating unit 700. As shown in FIG. 58, the second operation unit 700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape in a top view. In the following, the portion on the right side from the axis of symmetry will be described in detail, and the description of the portion on the left side will be omitted.

59, 60, 61 and 62 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on the LIX-LIX line of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 59, 60, 61 and 62, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 59, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). Is illustrated, FIG. 60 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in a horizontal posture, FIG. 61 shows a state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in an intermediate position, and FIG. 62 shows a plate-shaped displacement member 730 in an intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 59 to 62, as the rotation axis of the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of shafted support portions 731 (see FIG. 43) is shown as the reference O1. Reference O1 is shown in the following drawings with the same meaning. In FIGS. 59 to 62, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right at the center in the left and right direction is shown.

The variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 59, 60 and 61, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 61 and 62, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced (backward) to a position where it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750, and the load in the front-rear direction is applied. Transmission occurs. That is, the variable decorative member 750 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center in the left-right direction) due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is a small change in the posture from the initial posture of the first stage (the plate-shaped displacement member 730) mainly occurring in the vertical direction. Stage, FIG. 59, FIG. 60, FIG. 61, FIG. 61, FIG. 62) and. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction).

Here, the state shown in FIG. 61 corresponds to the one-sided excitation state, and the state shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the excitation state. Therefore, by switching the driving mode of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2, the variable decorative member 750 (center in the left-right direction) 750. The displacement mode of can be switched with a plurality of variations.

As shown in FIG. 62, a gap is maintained between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion forming the front through hole 723. Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 are not in a relationship of sandwiching the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, the generation of a load is suppressed and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is maintained in an unstable state. Can be done.

63, 64, 65 and 66 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 on line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 63, 64, 65 and 66, the displacement of the second operation unit 700 is shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 63, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 64, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 65, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 66, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown. In FIGS. 63 to 66, a cross section of the variable decorative member 750 on the right side at the center in the left-right direction is shown.

The variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are allowed to be displaced in the vertical direction in the front through hole 723 (see FIG. 43), and the front-back and left-right displacement is the gap between the front through hole 723 and the tubular protrusion 753. The portion is allowed, and it is supported by the large receiving portion 736 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, and is displaced as the large receiving portion 736 is displaced due to a change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

The large receiving portions 736 on both the left and right sides are arranged at positions closer to the reference O1 in the vertical direction and away from the reference O1 in the front-rear direction as compared with the large receiving portions 736a in the center of the left and right.

Hereinafter, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (on both the left and right sides) due to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described. For ease of understanding, the change in posture of the variable decorative member 750 in the direction of gravity is omitted.

In the state changes of FIGS. 63, 64 and 65, the front surface of the large receiving portion 736 is not displaced (not retracted) to a position where it abuts on the side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750. .. That is, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 is limited to the displacement in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, in the state change between FIGS. 65 and 66, the front side surface of the large receiving portion 736 is displaced to the extent that it comes into contact with the front side surface of the columnar projecting portion 752 of the variable decorative member 750 (although it is retracted). ), The load transmission in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of the relationship of pushing further.

That is, the load applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the large receiving portion 736 is mainly composed of the load in the vertical direction, and when comparing only the vertical components of the displacement, the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the horizontal direction is used. The displacement amount of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is configured to be larger than the displacement amount of.

In this way, the displacement of the variable decorative member 750 (in the center of the left-right direction) due to the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is configured so that the direction is different for each step, whereas the displacement on both sides in the left-right direction is variable. The displacement of the decorative member 750 occurs mainly in the vertical direction. Thereby, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction and the variable decorative member 750 on both sides in the left-right direction can be changed depending on the degree of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

As described above, since the vertical displacement of the variable decorative members 750 on both sides in the left-right direction is largely secured, as shown in FIG. 66, the bifurcated support that occurred when paying attention to the variable decorative member 750 in the center in the left-right direction. The gap between the upper surface of the plate-shaped main body of the member 751 and the lower end of the tubular portion forming the front through hole 723 disappears, and the plate-shaped main body of the bifurcated support member 751 forms the front through hole 723 at the front and rear positions as it is. It has a dimensional relationship that cuts into the tubular part.

In FIG. 66, on the premise that the plate-shaped main body portion of the bifurcated support member 751 is not deformed, the state after the bifurcated support member 751 is translated to the back side by contacting the lower end of the tubular portion constituting the front side through hole 723 is shown. It is illustrated.

Therefore, since the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 sandwich the variable decorative member 750 from above and below, a load in the vertical compression direction is applied to the variable decorative member 750 from the cover member 720 and the plate-shaped displacement member 730. Given. As a result, the holding force of the posture of the variable decorative member 750 is increased, and the posture of the variable decorative member 750 can be stabilized.

Therefore, when the drive units 760 on both the left and right sides are in the excited state and the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is supported in an unstable state (see FIG. 62). Therefore, the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are stably supported. Therefore, the appearance of the plurality of variable decorative members 750 after the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the upper terminal posture can be changed.

That is, the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right is configured to allow a slight displacement (loosely supported) as a remnant of the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, while the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides are By being configured (firmly supported) to suppress displacement, the player's attention can be attracted to the variable decorative member 750 at the center of the left and right.

As described above, the vertical displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 due to the change in posture is larger in the variable decorative members 750 on the left and right sides than in the variable decorative member 750 in the center of the left and right. While it is easy for the player's attention to be focused on the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is maintained in the upper terminal position, the player's attention is focused on the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right. It can be made easier to collect.

Therefore, when the drive state of the drive unit 760 is set so that the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not reach the upper end posture or the posture change is repeated so as not to hold (stop) in the upper end posture. It is possible to easily attract the player's line of sight to the variable decorative members 750 on both the left and right sides, and when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is set to be slightly held in the upper end posture, the player is placed on the variable decorative members 750 in the center of the left and right. It is possible to easily gather the line of sight of.

As a result, when there is a specific light guide member 714 that the player wants to pay particular attention to among the plurality of light guide members 714, the variable decorative member 750 near the light guide member 714 can easily attract the player's line of sight. By controlling the drive unit 760 to be driven by (controlling the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714 in relation to the drive mode of the drive unit 760), the line of sight of the player can be changed to the specific light guide member 714. Can be collected in.

FIG. 67 is a schematic view schematically showing the rotational displacement of the large receiving portion 736. In FIG. 67, the directional view of the reference O1 is shown, and the arrangement of the central large receiving portion 736a and the left and right outer left and right large receiving portions 736b in the horizontal posture and the upper terminal posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is shown.

Since the central large receiving portion 736a is arranged above the front side of the reference O1, the displacement in the front-rear direction is larger than the displacement in the vertical direction at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. growing.

Since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are farther from the reference O1 than the central large receiving portion 736a, the displacement itself due to the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is larger than that of the central large receiving portion 736a. On the other hand, since the left and right large receiving portions 736b are arranged directly in front of the reference O1 (because they are arranged on the horizontal line), at a slight angle (about 4 degrees) in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced. , The vertical displacement is larger than the front-back displacement.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by rotationally displacing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 with respect to the center of the reference O1, the displacement mode of the central large receiving portion 736a and the displacement mode of the left and right large receiving portions 736b are different. Can be done. Therefore, the displacement mode of the variable decorative member 750 displaceably supported by the large receiving portion 736 can be different between the members arranged in the center on the left and right and the members arranged on the left and right outside.

68, 69, 70 and 71 are partial cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 700 in line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 58. In FIGS. 68, 69, 70 and 71, the displacements of the second operation unit 700 are shown in chronological order, and in FIG. 68, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture). In FIG. 69, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the horizontal posture is shown, in FIG. 70, the state in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position is shown, and in FIG. 71, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the intermediate position. The state in which the displacement member 730 is in the upper end posture is shown.

In FIGS. 68 to 71, a cross section of the light guide member 714 at the center in the left-right direction is shown. As described above, until the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (see FIG. 70), the front portion of the inner surface of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 do not come into contact with each other, and the hollow member 740 The displacement of is mainly the vertical displacement.

On the other hand, the inner side surface front portion of the front small receiving portion 735a and the front side portion of the projecting columnar portion 743 abut between the midway posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper end posture, and the hollow member 740 after the abutment. Is pushed toward the back surface side with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this way, it is possible to provide a time difference between the vertical displacement of the hollow member 740 caused by being pushed along with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the horizontal displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 71, the action of changing the width of the light refracted through the upper end portion of the light guide member 714 with the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 will be described.

When the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower end posture (initial posture), the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side is the width LH1a, whereas the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is on the upper side. The width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side in the terminal posture changes to the width LH1b (LH1a> LH1b).

On the other hand, even if the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is displaced, the width of the light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the third symbol display device 81 side (back surface side) is maintained at the width LH2. Therefore, it is possible to change the balance between the amount of light radiated from the light guide member 714 to the player side and the amount of light radiated to the back surface side as the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 changes.

That is, by driving the drive unit 760 and changing the plate-shaped displacement member 730 to the upper terminal posture, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is directed toward the player as compared with the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is in the lower terminal posture (initial posture). Since the light is weakened, the light guide member 714 can be easily viewed (easily seen), and the light directed to the third symbol display device 81 becomes stronger in the same comparison, so that the light emitted from the light guide member 714 is increased. Can be easily transferred to the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the player is paying attention to the third symbol display device 81, the line of sight can be drawn to the light guide member 714.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 on the line LXXII-LXXII of FIG. 58. A gap is formed between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705 as described above, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the light emitted from the light emitting means 706 leaks through this gap. It is configured to suppress this.

That is, in the present embodiment, there is a slight gap between the partition member 708 and the illuminated substrate 705, and the dimension of the gap is the emission surface (upper end surface) of the LED constituting the light emitting means 706 of the illuminated substrate 705. Since it is shorter than the height dimension, the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a can be directed toward the light guide member 714 side with almost no leakage (see the enlarged view of FIG. 72).

Further, the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a is emitted toward a separate light guide member 714, but the other light guide member 714 (when focusing on one individual light emitting means 706a, the true light is true. It is configured to prevent heading toward the light guide member 714) other than the light guide member 714 arranged above. That is, since the base end side of the light guide members 714 is separated by the displacement regulating member 716, it is possible to prevent light from passing through the inside of the light guide member 714 and heading toward another light guide member 714 (FIG. 72). See enlarged view).

Further, although the light guide members 714 are indirectly connected to each other via the thin film cover member 712, the thin film cover member 712 is formed to be thin along the optical axis direction (vertical direction) of the individual light emitting means 706a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a from reaching the other light guide member 714.

Therefore, when the color and intensity of the light emitted from each individual light emitting means 706a are different from each other, the light reaches the other light guide member 714 and the appearance of the other light guide member 714 is changed. It is possible to avoid affecting it. In other words, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 714 from emitting light unintentionally or being visually recognized through the light guide member 714 in a state where the light emitted from the separate individual light emitting means 706a is mixed. ..

When the light emitted from the individual light emitting means 706a leaks from the gap between the illumination substrate 705 and the partition member 708, the light is mixed with the light of the entire light emitting means 706b and visually recognized by the player. Can be done.

As described above, the second operation unit 700 is displaced in a different manner by differently driving the drive units 760 (see FIGS. 56 and 57) arranged below the left and right sides of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. To do.

For example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is repeatedly displaced, as the first displacement mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is reciprocally displaced between the lower end posture and the intermediate posture by repeatedly operating one drive unit 760. Can be made to. Further, as a second displacement mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state, and the other drive unit 760 is repeatedly operated to move the plate-shaped displacement member 730 between the intermediate posture and the upper terminal posture. Can be reciprocally displaced with.

Further, for example, when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in a posture different from the lower end posture (initial posture), as the first stopping mode, one drive unit 760 is maintained in an excited state to cause the plate-shaped displacement. The member 730 can be stopped in an intermediate posture. Further, as a second stopping mode, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is stopped in the upper terminal posture by maintaining one drive unit 760 in an excited state and then maintaining the other drive unit 760 in an excited state. Can be done.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the left and right drive units 760 are not structurally different, and the load applied to the load member 761 by the plate-shaped displacement member 730 when only one drive unit 760 is excited. The posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is adjusted by the influence of the bending caused by the load member 761 (see FIG. 55 (a)).

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first displacement mode (stop mode) or second displacement mode (stop mode), one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760. Instead, it can be replaced depending on the situation.

Therefore, unlike the case where one drive unit 760 and the other drive unit 760 are fixed as either the left or right drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 on the side that maintains the excited state and the drive unit 760 on the side that repeatedly operates are used. The degree of fatigue of the constituent materials of the pair of left and right drive units 760 can be adjusted (adjusted) by alternately switching according to the number of operations or switching every period. As a result, the replacement timing of the left and right drive units 760 can be adjusted, and as a result, the useful life of the second operating unit 700 can be maintained for a long time.

The degree of bending of the load member 761 is only an example and can be set arbitrarily, and it is sufficient that the load member 761 is bent regardless of the magnitude of the bending. That is, a configuration that can make a slight difference between driving and controlling one of the drive units 760 and driving and controlling both of them is sufficient.

The second operation unit 700 is visibly arranged at a position between the third symbol display device 81 and the first winning opening 64 from the player's point of view through the window portion partitioned by the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). ). The control mode of the second operation unit 700 is arbitrarily set. For example, the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a, and the driving unit 760. It may be controlled so as to correspond with the control mode and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination substrate 705.

For example, as an association with the control mode of the lighting state, a plurality of game balls enter the first winning opening 64, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the left side is lit according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. It may be controlled so that a plurality of game balls enter the second winning opening 140, and the individual light emitting means 706a arranged on the right side is turned on according to the number of holdings holding the fluctuation. ..

In this case, by confirming the light emitting mode of the light guide member 714, the player can be configured to be able to grasp the number of reserved balls. Then, by associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the light guide member second operation unit 700.

For example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the first displacement mode described above, while being more advantageous to the player than entering the first winning opening 64. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 140, which is often the case, the drive unit 760 is driven and controlled in the second displacement mode described above, so that the game can be played due to the difference in the displacement mode of the second operation unit 700. It is possible to easily make the player know whether the ball has entered the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760, the drive unit 760 may be drive-controlled in relation to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is the upper limit value, the winning ball is obtained, but the player cannot obtain the opportunity of fluctuation. If the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit, it is desirable to notify the player.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760, the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 of the second operation unit 700 can be displaced, and the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed. Because it can be done, it can attract the attention of the player. Therefore, by driving and controlling the drive unit 760 when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value), the number of reserved balls is close to the upper limit (or the upper limit value) for the player. ) Can be easily noticed.

Further, as another example of associating the entry of the game ball with the control mode of the drive unit 760 and the control mode of the lighting state of the light emitting means 706 of the illumination board 705, the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a You may associate it.

In this case, for example, the number of balls expected to be entered when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (maximum count number per jackpot round) may be associated with the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. It may be associated with the fact that a game ball having a larger number of balls enters the specific winning opening 65a (so-called over winning).

As a result, by visually recognizing the state of the second operation unit 700, it is possible that a game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a and that a game ball having an unexpected number of balls has entered the specific winning opening 65a. It can be grasped by the player.

A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the attractive force of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 acts in the vertical direction has been described, but the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 of the window movable unit 2150 of the second embodiment is configured so that the attractive force acts in the horizontal direction. Will be done. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are rear views of the window movable unit 2150 in the second embodiment. FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is energized and an electromagnetic force is generated, and FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the energization is released and the electromagnetic force disappears.

The window movable unit 2150 has a contact member 2190 that is coaxially supported with the auxiliary device 160 and is arranged so as to be able to contact the driven member 163 in the rotational direction, and an urging spring SP21 that urges the contact member 2190. And.

A weight portion W21 for adjusting the position of the center of gravity is formed at the upper end portion of the arm portion 163c of the driven member 163 so that the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight in a non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1. (See FIG. 73 (b)).

The contact member 2190 includes a cushion portion 175a that is arranged so as to be in contact with the driven member 163, and a rotating member 2191 that supports the cushion portion 175a.

The rotating member 2191 is arranged to face the urging spring SP21, and the urging force of the urging spring SP21 is generated in a direction of pushing the rotating member 2191 back to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 side.

Displacement modes of the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 will be described. In the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is maintained in a state of being attracted to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 by an electromagnetic force.

On the other hand, in the non-excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, the driven member 163 is rotationally displaced by its own weight, and via the state shown in FIG. 73B, the rotating member 2191 opposes the urging force of the urging spring SP21. Is rotationally displaced. That is, the driven member 163 is displaced by itself until the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), and the driven member 163 and the rotating member 2191 are integrally displaced from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). That is, the displacement speed of the driven member 163 can be changed with the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) as a boundary.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 73B, the driven member 163 can be oscillated and displaced by a fluctuating urging force. Thereby, the variation of the displacement of the driven member 163 can be increased.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78. In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotational displacement of the arm member 414 has been described, but in the first operation unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced at a constant velocity. It is provided with a transmission means 3410 (for example, a rack and pinion transmission mechanism (not shown)) that transmits the driving force so as to perform the displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 to 77 are front views of the first operating unit 3400 according to the third embodiment. In FIGS. 74 to 77, the state in which the elevating plate 430 is displaced downward is illustrated in chronological order.

78 (a) to 78 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the displacement relationship of the first operation unit 3400. In FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the rotation angle of the terminal gear 413 is shown on the horizontal axis, and in FIG. 78 (a), the amount of downward displacement of the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. In b), the amount of rotation (angle change) of the auxiliary arm member 444 is shown on the vertical axis, and in FIG. 78 (c), the amount of displacement of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 is shown on the vertical axis. ..

In the first operation unit 3400, an L-shaped elongated hole portion 3406 (a shape in which rectangles whose long sides are orthogonal to each other are integrated) is formed through the main body plate portion 401. The elongated hole portion 3406 is formed with an opening having a size such that the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In FIG. 74, the tubular portion 444d is arranged at the upper end position of the long opening in the vertical direction of the elongated hole portion 3406, and the long opening is displaced downward in the vertical direction by the displacement up to FIG. 75. To do. That is, since the left-right position of the tubular portion 444d does not change in the displacements from FIGS. 74 to 75, the auxiliary arm member 444 does not rotate.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 75 to 77, the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced in conjunction with the downward displacement of the elevating plate 430. That is, according to the present embodiment, a section in which the auxiliary arm member 444 is rotationally displaced due to the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 and a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is vertically displaced. And can be configured.

By forming a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even if the elevating plate 430 is displaced in the vertical direction, the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 is blocked. However, this role is the same as that of the vertical portion 491a of the fixed transmission plate 490 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). According to this embodiment, since the vertical portion 491a can be omitted from the fixed transmission plate 490, the vertical dimension of the fixed transmission plate 490 can be reduced (the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 is improved). be able to).

Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the fixed transmission plate 490 can be improved while maintaining the effect that the operation start timings of the elevating plate 430 and the pinnate member 460 can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, the transmission means 3410 facilitates the vertical displacement of the elevating plate 430 by a constant velocity linear motion (see FIG. 78 (a)). In this case, the synchronization described above in the first embodiment is performed. If the configuration of the operation unit 440 is diverted as it is, the speed of rotational displacement of the auxiliary arm member 444 changes significantly during the displacement.

More specifically, the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the second intermediate state of the first operating unit 4300 is lower than the angular velocity of the rotational displacement near the retracted state or the overhanging state of the first operating unit 3400. (The amount of change in angle with respect to the amount of displacement of the base end side portion 444a becomes small).

Therefore, the relative displacement member 442 cannot be displaced at a substantially constant velocity with respect to the elevating plate 430. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a substitute for the lower left rotary gear 441, a gear having the same gear ratio as the arcuate gear portion 444d is provided, meshes with the upper right rotary gear 441, and is connected to the relative displacement member 442. An armed rotary gear 3441 with an extension is provided. Thereby, the change in the angular velocity of the auxiliary arm member 444 can be partially canceled, and the difference in the displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be eliminated.

That is, it is not the configuration of the first embodiment in which the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in response to (proportional to) the amount of angular change with respect to the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a, but the amount of vertical displacement of the proximal end side portion 444a. By converting the amount of change in angle with respect to the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm into the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion, the relative displacement member 442 is vertically displaced in accordance with the vertical displacement amount of the arm tip portion. , The difference in displacement mode between the elevating plate 430 and the relative displacement member 442 can be partially eliminated (offset).

Therefore, the displacement mode of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be brought closer to the displacement mode of the elevating plate 430.

In the present embodiment, the electric wiring DH1 may be configured to pass through the rotation axis of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and be guided to the relative displacement member 442. That is, by continuously forming the path of the electric wiring DH1 in the order of the auxiliary arm member 444, the elevating plate 430, the rotary gear 3441 with the arm, and the relative displacement member 442, the electric wiring accompanying the displacement of the first operation unit 3400. It is possible to avoid a large fluctuation in the path length of the DH1.

In this case, since the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to the decorative portion 493, it is easy to dispose an illuminated substrate in the decorative portion 493 and execute a light emitting effect by a light emitting means such as an LED. Can be done.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensor for detecting the state of the second operation unit 700 is not arranged has been described, but the second operation unit 4700 of the fourth embodiment detects the state of the drive unit 4760. The detection device 4780 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the drive unit 4760 of the second operation unit 4700 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the front lid member 770 and the illuminated substrate 777 are not shown except for the curved protrusion 774, and the outer shape of the curved protrusion 774 is an imaginary line. Illuminated.

Further, FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which a current is not passed through the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the load member 4761 is arranged in a descending position by its own weight. In FIG. 79 (b), a current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. The state in which the metal plate member MB2 is attracted by the electromagnetic force generated by the current and the load member 4761 is arranged in the ascending position is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the load member 4761 abuts on the lower regulating portion 764 in the descending position to regulate the descending displacement, and abuts on the upper regulating portion 765 in the ascending position. Ascending displacement is regulated.

The load member 4761 is different from the load member 761 described in the first embodiment, except that the overhanging portion 761d is changed to the thick overhanging portion 4761f and the thin overhanging portion 4761g. The configuration is the same.

The thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f is a portion that projects from the extending tip of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b with a wall thickness (front-rear width) equivalent to that of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b. In the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the ascending position, it comes into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 and corresponds to the portion that receives and stops the load.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g projects from the overhanging tip of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f along the extending direction of the rod-shaped extending portion 761b, which is a plate-shaped thin-walled (shorter front-rear width) than the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. It is a part. The upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are formed flush with each other.

The thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is configured to come into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 in the same way as the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f in the process of arranging the load member 4761 in the raised position, and is compared with the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f. Since it is thin, it is preferentially damaged as compared with the thick overhanging portion 4761f due to the accumulation of fatigue caused by repeatedly exciting the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2.

From this point of view, the upper and lower surfaces of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) and the upper and lower surfaces of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f (upper and lower surfaces parallel to the overhanging direction) are It is not necessary that they are formed flush with each other, and it is sufficient that at least the upper surface is flush with each other, and the position of the lower surface can be arbitrarily set. For example, by shortening the vertical width of the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g as compared with the vertical width of the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f, the number of times of repeated excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged can be reduced. The period until the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged can be adjusted.

The drive unit 4760 includes a detection device 4780. The detection device 4780 includes a printed circuit board 4781 fixed to the lower part of the support case 763, and a detection sensor 4782 arranged in the printed circuit board 4781 so that the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g can be inserted and removed in the detection groove.

The detection sensor 4782 is a photocoupler type detection device, and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g blocks the detection light at the lowered position of the load member 4761 (see FIG. 79 (a)), and the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 is thin-walled at the raised position of the load member 4761. The protrusion 4761 g is arranged above so as not to block the detection light (see FIG. 79 (b)).

The function of the detection sensor 4782 will be described. Normally, the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 corresponds to the position of the load member 4761, so that it is possible to confirm whether the load member 4761 is operating properly based on the detection result of the detection sensor 4782. This confirmation is performed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4), and when it is determined that the malfunction is occurring, an alarm is generated or an error is displayed on the display device, thereby causing the player or the player to perform the malfunction of the second operation unit 4700. It can be made easier for the hall clerk to notice.

In addition, if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged (broken) and dropped, the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g and the load member 4761 do not operate synchronously, so that the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection of the detection sensor 4782 are detected. The result does not correspond. When the position change of the load member 4761 and the detection result of the detection sensor 4782 do not correspond to each other, an alarm is generated on the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) or an error is displayed on the display device to overhang the wall. It is possible to make it easier for the player or the hall clerk to notice that the portion 4761 g is damaged (broken).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 4782 can be used by both the position detecting means for detecting the position of the load member 4761 and the damage detecting means for detecting the breakage (breakage) of the load member 4761. ..

According to the present embodiment, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761g is damaged, the thick-walled overhanging portion 4761f can be brought into contact with the upper regulating portion 765 to stop the load member 4761 at the raised position. Therefore, the load member 4761 can be displaced in the same manner as before the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged. Therefore, even if the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g is damaged, it is not necessary to immediately stop the game and put it in the maintenance state, and the game can be continued for a while, which gives the player an unexpected disadvantage. It can be avoided.

In this way, among the parts that come into contact with the upper regulation portion 765, a portion that is preferentially damaged (broken) is provided, and the breakage (break) is detected by the detection sensor 4782, whereby the thick overhanging portion 4761f is damaged. The load member can be replaced before the fatigue accumulates to the extent that it breaks.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the first embodiment, the case of bending and deforming in relation to the rigidity of the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c itself has been described, but the second operation unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment applies a load to the vertical rod-shaped extension portion 761c. The deflection adjusting device 5780 for adjusting the deflection deformation is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

80 (a) and 80 (b) are cross-sectional views of the second operating unit 5700 of the fifth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LVa-LVa line of FIG. 53. The deflection adjusting device 5780 is a box-shaped foundation member 5781 having a built-in metal coil and an iron rod supported by the foundation member 5781 so as to be able to move forward and backward in the vertical direction, and is arranged so as to project above the foundation member 5781. It is provided with an adjusting member 5782 to be formed.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), even when the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 are in a one-sided excitation state, the load member 761 is less flexed and deformed by driving the deflection adjusting device 5780 (deflection deformation is about half). State changes to). In other words, in the first embodiment, the deflection adjusting device 5780 is adopted as an alternative to the configuration in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is changed to the upper terminal posture by putting the pair of left and right electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 in an excited state (both). ing.

That is, with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 in a one-sided excitation state (see FIG. 80 (a)), a metal coil (not shown) built in the base member 5781 of the deflection adjusting device 5780 moves around the adjusting member 5782. By energizing the metal coil in a winding state to form an electromagnet and driving the adjusting member 5782 upward, the load in the direction of returning (recovering) the bending of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c is applied. It can be applied to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c (see FIG. 80 (b)).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 on either the left or right side and the adjusting device 5780 arranged on the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 side in a coordinated manner. The displacement member 730 can be maintained in the lower end posture (initial posture), the middle posture, and the upper end posture.

As a result, the arrangement of the drive means can be solidified as compared with the case where the electromagnetic solenoids SOL2 need to be arranged in pairs on the left and right. For example, since the arrangement of the electrical wiring connected to each device of the drive means can be fixed, it is possible to avoid that the area required as the path for passing the wiring is dispersed in various places (for example, left and right).

Next, the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. In the sixth embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in the winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the following, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is the gravity direction, the left-right rear side of the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is the left-right direction, and the pachinko machine shown in FIG. The front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the back side (or the rear side).

First, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that in FIG. 82, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 82) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86. FIG. 83A is a front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 83B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 84 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the winning opening unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning opening unit 950 arranged on the back surface (front of the paper surface of FIG. 83B) of the front unit 940, and a specific winning opening unit 950 thereof. Mainly, the drive unit 960 arranged on the back surface side (in front of the paper surface in FIG. 83B) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the displacement member 966 arranged between the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940. Formed in preparation for.

As described above, the front unit 940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Therefore, by disposing the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 is other than the passage path of the game ball formed in the front unit 940 described later (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and specific winning opening 65a). It is possible to prevent the space from passing through the through hole 60a.

A part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown inside the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. Will be done. A detailed description of the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965) is arranged on the wing member 945 via the displacement member 966. Be connected. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the wing member 945. A detailed description of the operation of the wing member 945 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. In addition, in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. 87 (b), the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 is arranged on the back base 941 fastened to the base plate 60 and the back base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball 943. And two (pair) wing members 945 that are rotatably arranged between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back surface base 941 is formed from a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness while being formed in a substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is upside down. Further, the back base 941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and penetrates the base plate 60 through the back base 941 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) is arranged on the base plate 60. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The rear base 941 has a first out port 71 formed by notching on the flow side (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87 (b))) of the game ball, and above the first out port 71 (FIG. 87 (FIG. 87 (b)). b) Opposite to the specific winning opening 65a, which is located above) and is formed through a long rectangular shape in the horizontal direction, the second winning opening 140, which is formed through above the specific winning opening 65a, and the first out opening 71. It mainly includes a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the side edge.

Further, the back surface base 941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. The through hole 941a has a first through hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) toward the back side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) and the through hole 941a1 from the back side toward the front side. It is formed from a second through hole 941a2 that is reduced in diameter.

The first through hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) to the base plate 60 is inserted, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion of the tapping screw. Will be done. Further, since the first through hole 941a1 is formed by reducing the diameter from the front side to the back side as described above, the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1, a positioning projection 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back surface of the back surface base 941 is formed.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. To. As a result, the back base 941 (winning opening unit 930) can be positioned and arranged with respect to the base plate 60.

The second through hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the back base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the back base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the screwed portion. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the back side of the back base 941. In this case, the work of removing the front base 943 from the back base 941 needs to be in a state where the winning opening unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from fraudulently removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13.

Further, since the second through hole 941a2 is formed by reducing the diameter from the back surface side to the front surface side as described above, the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941. As a result, when the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from coming into contact with the specific winning opening unit 950.

The outer shape of the lower end (lower side in FIG. 87 (b)) of the back base 941 in the direction of gravity is formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 81) of the game board 13. The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge portion of the notch bottom portion (the upper edge portion in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the game ball or more. As a result, among the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () A game ball that has not flowed into any of them can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87B)) through the first out port 71.

The first winning opening 64 is formed by cutting out the end portion on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B) opposite to the first out opening 71 in a semicircular shape. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the first winning opening 64.

At the edge of the first winning opening 64, a first receiving portion 941 g that protrudes toward the game area side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (a)) and is formed in a cup shape, and a side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 (Fig. 87)). b) A first throwing portion 942 g projecting in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941 g is formed in a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area from the upper side in the gravity direction of the first receiving portion 941 g (first winning opening 64) can flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back surface side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941 g can be thrown to the back side (first throwing portion 942 g side) via the first winning opening 64.

Further, the first receiving portion 941 g faces the second winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87 (a))) from the upper ends of both ends in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be erected so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The guide portion 941g1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface on the side opposite to the game area (rear side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941. As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down the flowing region from colliding with the first receiving portion 941g and damaging the first receiving portion 941g.

Further, if the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the specific winning opening 65 are integrally formed on the back base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game ball flowing down the game area becomes insufficient, so that the game ball It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of. Therefore, where there is a risk that the player's interest may be impaired, by colliding the game ball with the guide unit 941g1, it is possible to change the flow direction of the game ball, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. ..

Further, since the guide portion 941 g1 is formed so as to be inclined outward in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 87 (a)) of the base plate 60 toward the second winning opening 140 side, the game that collides with the guide portion 941 g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally to the outside of the back base 941. As a result, the game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60 can be re-collised, and the flow direction of the game ball can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

The first throwing portion 942g is formed in a U shape in which the upper side in the direction of gravity is open, and the distance dimension between the opposing inner edges thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first throwing portion 942g is formed so that the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b))), and the protruding tip side is the throwing unit described later. It comes into contact with the edge of the inflow port 982d of the 970. As a result, the game ball thrown from the inside of the first receiving portion 941 g to the first throwing portion 942 g via the first winning opening 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the throwing unit 970.

The first throwing portion 942g includes a first recessed portion 942g1 in which the upper end portion of the protruding tip is cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a notch on which the second protrusion 982d1 of the ball throwing unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have substantially the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first throwing unit 942 g and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially D shape with the upper part curved in the front view, and the inner edge is formed larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball to be thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)) via the second winning opening 140).

The second winning opening 140 has a front side wall portion 941b projecting to the front side (game area side (FIG. 87 (a) front side of the paper surface)) and a back side (opposite side to the game area (FIG. 87)) at the edge portion thereof. (B) A second throwing portion 942c protruding from the paper surface front side)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. The size of the front side wall portion 941b is set so that the protruding tip surface of the front side wall portion 941b comes into contact with the throwing guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second throwing portion 942c is formed by bending at both ends of the lower edge portion of the second winning opening 140 in a substantially L-shape in the rear view. The size of the second throwing unit 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87B) is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

In the pair of second throwing portions 942c, the distance dimension between the opposing surfaces in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) is the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. It is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in (FIG. 87 (b) left-right direction), and the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c, a second recessed portion 942c1 is formed by notching the protruding tip portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87B)). The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion on which the protrusion 981b1 of the passage unit described later is placed inside, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

The rear base 941 faces the other side in the direction of gravity near the second winning opening 140 (the first winning opening 64 side (upper side of FIG. 87 (b))) from the gaming area side of the rear base 941 to the opposite side to the gaming area. The first shaft hole 941d which is recessed in two places in a circular shape, and the two first openings 941e which are curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and are formed through the back base 941. The protruding portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b, which is located on the outer side of the two first openings 941e in the opposite direction and protrudes to the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. Formed with and.

The first shaft hole 941d can support the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945, which will be described later, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. As a result, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e is opened in an arc shape about the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e is capable of inserting the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The protrusion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape in front view, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portions are located on a plane substantially the same as the central position between the facing portions of the wing members 945, which will be described later. Further, the unequal sides of the protruding portion 941c are formed so as to extend in parallel with the facing direction of the wing member 945, and the length dimension thereof is set to be slightly larger than the facing distance dimension of the wing member 945 in the closed state. To. Further, the protruding portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the closed wing member 945 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of wing members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the wing member 945 will be described later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 described later is displaced, and the distance dimension between the pair of first guide walls 942b facing each other is the displacement member. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of 966.

Further, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape in the rear view, and are extended in a direction in which the bent portions approach each other. Thereby, the protruding portion 966a of the displacement member 966 can be brought into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b, and the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated.

The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a long rectangular opening in the opposite direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87B) of the pair of wing members 945, and the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 described later is formed inside the opening. Can be inserted. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 via the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the back base 941 has an upright portion 942f that surrounds the circumference of the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite the game area), and recesses from the back side at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided with a recess 941h to be provided.

The shape of the inner edge of the standing portion 942f is set to be substantially the same as the front view shape of the specific winning opening unit 950, which will be described later. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 can be easily positioned and arranged inside the standing portion 942f.

The recess 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952, which is the rotation axis of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950, is inserted in the state where the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the back base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction of coming out of the plate member 951, the end surface of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, and the rod member 952 can be prevented from coming out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 has a bulging portion 942h that bulges between the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c, and the first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (FIG. 87 (b). ) A second guide wall 942d projecting upward) is provided.

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the back surface side of the back surface base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, when the displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the back side of the back base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)), the displacement member 966 and the back surface of the back base 941 are separated from each other. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is arranged between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 at the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The back base 941 is half toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) at the edges of the specified winning opening 65a in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 87 (b)) on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) in the gravity direction. A second out port 941f formed by cutting out in a circular shape is provided. The second out port 941f is a notch for sending the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a formed on the front base 943 to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the base plate 60, and is a game ball. It is formed in a shape larger than the diameter of.

Further, at the edge of the second out port 941f, a third throwing portion 942e formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view and projecting to the back surface side is formed. As a result, the game ball thrown to the back side via the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third throwing portion 942e.

The third throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape in the rear view protrudes toward the back side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f. Can be rolled to the back side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third throwing unit 942e will be described later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside-down substantially T-shape whose outer shape in front view is smaller than that of the back base. Further, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the back base 941.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a projecting at positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side (U-shaped open side) of the second receiving portion 943c. Further, the protrusion distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the back base 941 side is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can be thrown between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other, and the game ball is suppressed from flowing into the second winning opening 140 from the outside between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other, which will be described later. it can.

Further, the second receiving portion 943c is a first concave portion recessed in a circular shape from the throwing guide portion 943d projecting inward from the inner edge thereof and the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). It includes 943ca and a rolling portion 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the back base side.

A pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87B) of the pair of feather members 945. Further, the pair of throwing guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the back base 941, and when the back base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, their end faces are brought into contact with each other. .. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the facing space of the pair of feather members 945 can be thrown between the facing surfaces of the ball throwing guide unit 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d facing each other, and the end surface 943a1 on the upper side in the gravity direction is inclined downward toward the back base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling portion 943a is arranged inside the recess 941j in a state where the back base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip is the back surface of the back base 941. It is projected to the side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of throwing guide portions 943d can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to the back side of the back base 941. You can throw the ball to.

Further, the front base 943 is provided with an annular protrusion 943b projecting in an annular shape at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the back base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b includes a second shaft hole 943b1 on the inner edge thereof, and the other end of the shaft member 945a that pivotally supports the wing member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941d of the back surface base 941. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 941 and the front base 943.

The third receiving portion 944a is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the second out port 941f of the rear base 941 is arranged inside the third receiving portion 944a. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game ball flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can flow into the back surface through the second out port 941f. The ball can be thrown to the side (opposite to the game area).

Further, in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a, the first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are recessed in a circular shape from the back base 941 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87 (b)). The first recess 943ca and the second recess 944a1 are fastened portions into which the screws inserted in the second through hole 941a2 described above are screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the back base 941. Will be done. As a result, the back base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

The wing members 945 are arranged in pairs with the second winning opening 140 formed in the back base 941 in between in the front view. The wing member 945 is made of a colored translucent material and is visible to the player via the front base 943.

The wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in front view, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than that between the back base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The wing member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c formed through the thickness direction (from the back base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a protrusion 945b protruding from the surface (back surface) on the back base 941 side.

The insertion hole 945c is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the back surface base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c so that the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can rotate in a state where the wing member 945 can rotate. Can be placed between facing each other. As a result, the wing member 945 can be displaced in a closed state in which the facing side surfaces are parallel to the gravity direction and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the facing direction.

The protrusion 945b is a transmission portion that is connected to the displacement member 966 described later and transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the wing member 945, and the displacement member 966 is arranged at the tip thereof via the first opening 941e of the rear base 941. The size is set so as to project to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the back base 941. A detailed description of the connection state between the protrusion 945b and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the displacement member 966 will be described in detail. 90 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90 (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 is formed from a vertically elongated rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 90B) at a substantially central position in the front view. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

The displacement member 966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 90 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90 (a)), and in the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90B) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. To be equipped.

The sliding groove 966a2 is a long hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in a long hole long in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set to be larger than the width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, when the wing member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the sliding groove 966a2 facing in the width direction and restricting the operation of the wing member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed so as to bulge on the front side (front base 943 side (see FIG. 85)) and the back side (back base 941 side), respectively. As a result, the area in which the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the drive unit 960, which will be described later, come into contact with each other can be reduced. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a long rectangular shape in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 90 (a))). It is provided with a contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

The one-side contacted portion 966b2 is a surface on which the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, comes into contact. In the displacement member 966, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state (see FIG. 92) by the bulging portion 965e1 being brought into contact with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and being slidably displaced.

The other side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface on which the side surface of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is in contact with the bulging portion 965e1. The displacement member 966 displaces the wing member 945 in a closed state (see FIG. 91) by abutting the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 against the other side contacted portion 966b3 and sliding displacement. Can be done.

Next, the connection state of the displacement member 966 and the wing member 945 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87 (b). In FIGS. 91 and 92, the outer shape of the wing member 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, FIG. 91 shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 92 shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state. Mainly a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (specific winning opening 65a side), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 is located on one side in the direction of gravity (connecting hole 966b1 side) and abuts on the protrusion 945b to displace the wing member 945 in an open state. The upper inner surface 966a3 that abuts on the 945b and displaces the wing member 945 in the closed state, and the lateral side of the displacement member 966 from the lateral side (left-right direction in FIG. 91) to the lower inner surface 966a4 side of the displacement member 966. It is provided with an inclined surface 966a5 which is inclined to.

The displacement member 966 is displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the back surface base 941 by the transmission member 965 described later. The wing member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the specific winning opening 65a side (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (upper side in FIG. 91). It is in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the wing member 945 is closed, the protrusion 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 hits the third surface 945b3 of the protrusion 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed vertically, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions of the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. If this is the case, the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions, and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism consists of a transmission member 965 that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means (drive unit 960) and a displacement member 966 that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the transmission member 965. The sliding groove 966a2 is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the protrusion 945b is projected from the pair of wing members 945 and the sliding groove 966a2 through which the protrusion 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966. The groove width can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 966 is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove 966a2 does not tilt with respect to the protrusion 945b, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member 945. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 does not displace in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945, so that the space required for arranging the displacement members in the rotation axis direction of the pair of wing members 945 is suppressed. it can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of wing members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the wing member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is placed in the direction of gravity. When operating in the direction of sliding displacement to the upper side (the other side in the direction of gravity), the inertial force increases by the amount of the weight of the displacement member 966 being added, and the driving force required for the driving means (the solenoid 610 described later) increases. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state is started to be driven and displaced to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the protrusions 945b are located on the lower side (one side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing members 945. Be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (the other side in the gravity direction) is set below the rotation axis of the wing member 945 along the gravity direction. As a result, the displacement component of the protrusion 945b that pushes up the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

Further, the center of gravity of the wing member 945 is set on the opposite side of the protrusion 945b with the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) interposed therebetween. As a result, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the wing member 945 can be displaced to the open state by utilizing the weight of the wing member 945. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts the slide displacement toward the upper side in the gravity direction (one side in the gravity direction), the wing member 945 is rotated in the opening direction, so that the wing member 945 is rotated by its weight (own weight). Can be made to. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when the wing member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) is started to be driven and opened can be smoothly performed.

Further, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, even when the position of the protrusion 945b is set downward along the gravity direction of the rotation axis of the wing member 945, the protrusion 945b is guided along the inclination direction of the inclined surface 966a5 to guide the displacement member. The slide displacement of the 966 toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) can be smoothly started.

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion 945b on the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced accordingly. In addition to the displacement of the protrusion 945b in the gravitational direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction can also be regulated by the contact of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member 945 when it is in the closed state. That is, the wing member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture even when affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the wing member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 is moved from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower part of FIG. 92). It is displaced to the side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, and the protrusion 945b is displaced. As a result, the wing member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side is set to the gravity direction (downward direction in FIG. 92). As a result, when the wing member 945 is closed, the wing member 945 can be displaced by utilizing the own weight of the displacement member 966. As a result, the wing member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the drive unit 960 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. 93 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of the drive unit 960.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 has a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion 963 formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first accommodating portion 962 and a second accommodating portion. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the 963s, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are pivotally supported and connected to the connecting member 964. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 962b protruding from the reference) is provided.

The lining portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape in which the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93A) and the guide portion 962b side are opened. Further, the lining portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the facing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d protruding in the direction facing the outside of the facing wall surface.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch for engaging the engaging portion 963c of the second accommodating portion 963, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the engaging portion 963c in a side view. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened, so that the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be engaged. The workability of fastening with can be improved.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 in a state where the drive unit 960 is assembled, and is formed on the second accommodating portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93 (a)). It is provided with a through hole 962 da that penetrates toward it.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second accommodating portion 963 is inserted, is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 963b1, and has an inner diameter larger than that of the fastening hole 963b1. Is formed in. As a result, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a side view connected to the facing wall surface of the lining portion 962a and the pair of arm portions 962e, and has a front view gate type. It is formed to include a wall portion 962f to be formed and a projecting portion 962 g projecting from the wall portion 962f to the side opposite to the lining portion 962a (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portion 962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the dimension between the facing portions is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the side wall portion 981b (see FIG. 109 (a)) of the distribution unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portion 962e on the tip end side (bending side), respectively, and the shape in the front view thereof is formed to be larger than the shape in the front view of the displacement member 966 described above. Further, in the wall portion 962f, the outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93 (b)) is the opposite direction of the pair of first guide walls 942 b of the back base 941 described above. It is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3 = L4). Further, the wall portion 962f has a distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93 (a)) in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93A) from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the back base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 to the outer surface (see FIG. 91) (L5 = L6). As a result, the displacement member 966 can be arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the facing surfaces of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 arranged between the wall portion 962f and the back surface base 941 can be arranged between the facing portions.

The projecting portion 962g is formed so as to project from the outside of the pair of arm portions 962e of the wall portion 962f in the opposite direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e, and the protruding dimension thereof is the rear base 941. It is set to be substantially the same as the protruding dimension of the first guide wall 942b. Further, the inner dimension L7 in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the projecting portion 962g is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) in the facing direction of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the back base 941. It is set large. Further, the dimension of the projecting portion 962g in the direction of gravity is set to be substantially the same as the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the erecting portion 942f facing each other.

As a result, when arranging the drive unit 960 in the assembled state on the back base 941 (front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the protruding portions 962g and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b. By inserting the projecting portion 962g between the standing portions 942f facing each other, the drive unit 960 can be positioned and arranged with respect to the rear base 941.

The second accommodating portion 963 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed in a box shape covering the other side (lower side in FIG. 93A) of the solenoid 610. The second accommodating portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the driving direction (left-right direction in FIG. 93B) of the solenoid 610, which will be described later in the top view. Further, the second accommodating portion 963 is located on the side of the first accommodating portion 962 from between the recessed portions 963e recessed in a plurality of locations on both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction and the recessed portions 963e at the plurality of locations. The engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, the protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85)). ) Is formed with a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion.

The protruding portion 963b is formed so as to project outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962. As a result, the screw inserted through the through hole 962da side of the first accommodating portion 962 can be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 to fasten and fix the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in a space formed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c is formed in a hook shape that protrudes from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side toward the first accommodating portion 962 and the tip thereof bends inward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963. To. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, the engaging portion 963c is formed. The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962.

Further, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the base end to the tip end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess for accommodating the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. Further, the end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the first accommodating portion 962 side is covered on the side surface of the first accommodating portion 962 on one side in the gravity direction, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c housed in the bearing portion 963d from coming off to the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 has a main body 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped, a shaft 961b that is inserted inside the main body 961a and is displaceable with respect to the main body 961a, and a side opposite to the main body 961a of the shaft 961b. A ring portion 961c arranged at the end of the ring portion 961c and a coil spring SP1 arranged between the ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are provided.

The main body 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body 961a can be pulled inward and inserted by the magnetism.

The shaft portion 961b is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the back surface base 941 side, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the main body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. As a result, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member wound spirally a plurality of times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 961a. Further, when the power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a and then the power is cut off, the annular portion 961c can be quickly separated from the main body 961a.

The connecting member 964 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and the back base 941 side from the other side in the gravity direction of the base portion 964a (FIG. 85). (See) Formed with an upright portion 964b that bends to the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 93B) with a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. It includes a first recessed portion 964c to be formed, and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 964c is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which the lower side is open in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 964c side to the solenoid 610 side.

The upright portion 964b is provided with an insertion hole 964e that penetrates in the direction of gravity, and a protrusion 965d of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. As a result, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protruding portion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e, and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be described later.

The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a tip portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and a rotation extending to the connecting member 964 side while being connected to the tip portion 965a. It is formed from the portion 965b.

The rotating portion 965b is formed so that the width dimension of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) is smaller than the dimension between the opposite bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. Will be done. Further, the rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c protruding in a columnar shape on both sides of the second accommodating portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) at the end on the 964 side, and the radial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. It is provided with a protruding portion 965d that protrudes to one end side in the direction of gravity.

As described above, the rotating shaft 965c is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d. Further, in the pair of rotating shafts 965c, the distance between the protruding tips is set to be larger than the distance between the facing portions of the bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. As a result, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and arranged inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a state of being rotatable around the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the protrusion 965d is a protrusion that is inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e in a top view. Further, the protrusion 965d has a width dimension in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). The width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in the present embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the protrusion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the protrusions 965d on both end faces in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b come into contact with the insertion holes 964e, and the rotation of the transmission member 965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension of the rotating shaft 965c in the axial direction becomes smaller as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. Further, the tip portion 965a includes an insertion portion 965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 described above at the tip thereof, and an upright portion 965f projecting from the connecting side with the rotating portion 965b to one side in the direction of gravity. Is formed with.

The insertion portion 965e is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement between the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be described later.

Next, the displacement operation of the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 93 (b). Note that FIG. 96 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 96 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610. Further, in FIGS. 96A and 96B, the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96A, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, a coil spring SP1 disposed between the main body 961a and the ring 961c is attached. The ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a by the force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is extruded in the direction away from the main body portion 961a (left side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is extruded in a direction away from the main body 961a, the surface of the protruding portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 96A) and the solenoid 610 side of the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964. It is said that the inner surface of the solenoid is in contact with the inner surface of the solenoid. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 96A) about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the gravity direction is regulated by the contact portion 965 g in contact with the second accommodating portion 963.

As shown in FIG. 96B, when electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft 961b is pulled into the main body 961a by the magnetic force generated in the main body 961a to form a circle. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer to each other (rather than in a state where power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction close to the main body portion 961a (on the right side in FIG. 96A).

When the connecting member 964 is displaced in a direction close to the main body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 on the opposite side (left side of FIG. 96B) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 It is assumed that the solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 96B) are in contact with each other. As a result, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side (upper side in FIG. 96B) in the direction of gravity about the rotation shaft 965c. Further, the displacement of the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the gravity direction is regulated by the connecting portion between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b of the transmission member 965 coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962.

Therefore, when the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to either the other side in the gravity direction or one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963. Can be brought into contact. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cheating of the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first accommodating portion 962 or the second accommodating portion 963 from the player side (game area side) to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is thick. Therefore, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since the displacement operation of the wing member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965 becomes abnormal, it is possible to make it easier for the store operator to detect the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966 with the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b, and is extended from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 is secured. , The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is set with the tip portion 965a of the present embodiment. When the distance of the rotating portion 965b is set to be substantially the same as the combined distance, the slide displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made the same as that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 becomes large. The whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly in the axial view of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimensional distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the amount of displacement of the displacement member 966 becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, whereby the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while ensuring the amount. Further, the protruding portion 965d is formed on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 96A) of the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b on the opposite side to the displacement member 966. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the tip portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently arranged in the space between the rolling portion 943a (ball throwing unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 to reduce the overall size. Can be planned.

Next, the connection between the drive unit 960 and the displacement member 966 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVII-XCVII line of FIG. 98 (a) and 98 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 in the XCVIII-XCVIII line of FIG. 97. Note that FIG. 98 (a) shows the state before the operation of the solenoid 610, and FIG. 98 (b) shows the state after the operation of the solenoid 610.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (above FIG. 98 (a)), FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (a) and As shown in FIG. 98 (b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are in contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is slid displacement to the other side in the gravity direction. Will be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the direction of gravity (the second winning opening 140 side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is opened. That is, the wing member 945 is opened by applying electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the direction of gravity by the urging force of the coil spring SP1 arranged in the solenoid 610 as described above. It is displaced to the side (lower side in FIG. 98 (a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98A, the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 are brought into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is moved to one side in the direction of gravity. The slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (the specific winning opening 65a side), the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced, and the wing member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body 961a of the solenoid 610, the wing member 945 is closed.

In this case, since the wing member 945 can be closed while the power supply (supply) to the main body 961a is cut off, the main body 961a can be closed if the wiring of the main body 961a is broken or due to a player's fraudulent act. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being opened and the game ball from easily flowing into the second winning opening 140.

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 by the connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As a result, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the displacement member between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid and displaced as the transmission member rotates. As a result, the wing member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, during the operation of sliding displacement the displacement member 966 and opening or closing the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the transmission member 965, the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members 945. When acted on, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and also to the transmission member 965 at two places. If this is the case, it is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, and resistance when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated) is increased. It occurs and prevents the opening or closing of the wing members. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of wing members 945 at two places and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one place, so that the pair of wing members is connected. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the 945s, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Further, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98 (a)) of the contact surface with the one-side contacted portion 966b2 and the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b (FIG. 98). It is set to be less than 3 times (see (a)). This makes it easier to tolerate a change in attitude of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965. That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of wing members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 The posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted by making it easier to abut and changing the posture of the displacement member 966. By setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b, the posture of the displacement member 966 is restricted. It is possible to prevent changes from being regulated. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

The width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set to be smaller than twice the maximum external dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily prevent the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 from coming into contact with each other. As a result, the attitude change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily tolerated.

Next, the specific winning opening unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. 99 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 99 (c) is an upper surface of the specific winning opening unit 950. It is a figure. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning opening unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning opening unit 950 has a ball-entry member 953 formed in a box-like body opened by the player side (front side of the paper in FIG. 99) and the opening of the ball-entry member 953. It is provided with a plate member 951 arranged so as to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball entry member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is formed of a colored translucent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the ball entry member 953 side via the plate member 951. The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a front view, a shaft hole 951b formed in a cylindrical shape on both outer sides of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. It is formed to include a protrusion 951c projecting from one end toward the ball entry member 953, and an engaging portion 951d projecting from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body 951a toward the ball entry member 953.

The main body 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later in front view, and is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning opening 65a of the front unit 940 described above. ..

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the main body portion 951a, and both ends in the longitudinal direction are set coaxially. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, by supporting the rod member 952 with the ball entry member 953 in a state of being inserted into the shaft hole 951b, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball entry member 953.

The protrusion 951c is formed so as to protrude to one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the drive of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the gravity direction is inclined toward the game area side, the main body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from falling from one side of the main body portion 951a in the longitudinal direction.

The engaging portion 951d includes a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the protruding tip. The recessed portion 951d1 is connected to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. Further, in the engaging portion 951d, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, a part of the engaging portion 951d protrudes toward the flow-down region side, so that the game ball that has flowed down into the main body portion 951a is the main body portion 951a. It is possible to suppress the fall from the other side in the longitudinal direction of the.

The ball entry member 953 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball entry member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front, an erection wall 953b erected on a surface opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and an opening of the main body portion 953a. An engaging portion 953f projecting from the surface opposite to the side, an annular protrusion 953c projecting from the surface opposite to the open side of the main body 953a in a ring shape, and an open side of the main body 953a. A wall portion 953d projecting from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the edge portion to the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the main body. A protruding portion 953 g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, a protrusion 953h protruding from the open side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951 side, and two locations penetrating the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a. It is formed with an inflow port of 953j.

The main body 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion having a size capable of inserting a game ball, and has an opening 953a1 that opens to the plate member 951 side and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball that flows in from the opening 953a1. It is formed with 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in front view is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body 953a will be described later.

Further, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set to be larger than the distance between the pair of feather members 945 described above on the outer side in the opposite direction. As a result, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning opening 65a.

The shape of the inner edge of the opening 953a1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is opened, the game ball can flow into the inside of the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. it can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is an inner edge of the main body 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape in a top view. Further, the dimension in the direction (short direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the opening 953a1 to the inside of the main body 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The erection wall 953b is a wall for holding the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and surrounds the outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view in three directions. Formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 other than the three directions surrounded by the erection wall 953b. Thereby, the detection device SE1 can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by the erection wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. Further, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the erection wall 953b side at the tip portion separated from the base end side by the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f from engaging with each other and the detection device SE1 disposed on the main body portion 953a from falling off.

The detection device SE1 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE1 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is arranged on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to the inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and allows the game ball flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass through.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed so as to project from a plurality of locations in an annular shape on the side opposite to the open side of the main body 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the ball entry member 953 is screwed into the inner edge portion thereof.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both outer sides of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the distance dimension between the wall portions 953d is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be arranged between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed with a shaft hole 953d1 that penetrates in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the main body portion 953a. The shaft hole 953d1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951b of the plate member 951. Therefore, after arranging the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 is inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from both outer sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported by the ball entry member 953.

Further, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a protruding dimension smaller than the recessed distance of the recessed 941h formed in the back surface base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the recess 941h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming off.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955, which will be described later, is inserted into the plate member 951 side, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. Will be done.

The projecting portion 953 g is formed so as to project on the axis of the connecting protrusion 942j of the front unit 940. Further, in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting protrusion 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 formed through the protrusion 953g are coaxially arranged and the protrusion The setting portion 953g and the connecting protrusion 942j are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted into the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed so as to project toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by the drive unit 957 described later, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the plate member 951 and the edge portion of the main body portion 953a.

Further, the protrusions 953h are formed at substantially the same positions in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 99A) of the protrusion 951c of the plate member 951 and the plate member 951 of the engaging portion 951d. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to roll on the protruding side of the protrusion 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball can be less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole for sending the game ball flowing into the inside of the main body portion 953a to the passage member 955, and is formed in pairs in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the ball entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the ball entry port. The machine is known. The entrance is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inflow ports 953j are formed in pairs (at two locations) at predetermined intervals, so that even if the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a is enlarged, the inflow port 953j can be reached. The length of the rolling distance (the length of the rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inflow port 953j can be shortened by that amount, and the water can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the ball entry member 953 is arranged at the connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 described later. As a result, the game ball that has entered the opening 953a1 of the main body 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where the front unit 940 and the specific winning port unit 950 are fastened and do not overlap with the pair of closed wing members 945 in the direction of gravity. That is, a pair of wing members 945 in a closed state are arranged between the pair of inflow ports 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the lower side in the gravity direction of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945). Further, since the pair of wing members 945 are arranged in the game area, it is difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to flow down to the lower side in the gravity direction of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is biased. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the inflow port 953j is formed at a position where it does not overlap with the pair of wing members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, it is located at a position where a large amount of game balls flowing into the ball entry member 953. The inflow port 953j can be approached. As a result, the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 can flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress over-winning of the game ball to the ball entry member 953.

The passage member 955 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and its outer shape in front view is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape in front view of the above-mentioned entry ball member 953. Further, the passage member 955 is a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of each detection device SE1, and is located on the other side in the longitudinal direction from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. A second opening 955b formed through the third opening 955b, a pair of third openings 955c formed through the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction, and a concave portion of the third opening 955c on the other side in the gravity direction. It is formed by including a rolling portion 955d to be provided and a second recessed portion 955f located between the pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball through which the detection hole SE1a is inserted, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which the connecting member 957c and the transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b, a shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102A) that protrudes in a columnar shape in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 is formed. The shaft portion 955b1 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be pivotally supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 into the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the insertion direction of the detection hole SE1a is arranged parallel to the gravity direction, and is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE2 in the front view. .. As a result, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. Further, in the detection device SE2, the detection hole SE1 is projected toward the ball entry member 953 in a state where the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c.

Further, an engaging portion 955e projects toward the drive unit 957 side at the edge portion of the third opening 955c. The protruding tip of the engaging portion 955e is bent inward of the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from coming out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling portion 955d is formed by being curved in an arc shape. Further, in the rolling portion 955d, the end portion on the plate member 951 side is connected to the third throwing portion 942e of the front unit 940 in a state where the front unit 940 and the specific winning opening unit 950 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Further, the other end side of the rolling portion 955d is located on the other side in the gravity direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between a pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as a passage for the game ball as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the above-mentioned drive unit 960 is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction (FIG. 99 (c) left-right direction) of the passage member 955 is the second of the above-mentioned drive unit 960. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93B) of the accommodating portion 963.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h formed through the passage member 955 at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction and a protrusion 955g protruding toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole through which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955 g is formed in a columnar shape, and the fastening hole 955 g1 is recessed in a circular shape at the center. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole for screwing a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950), and faces the elongated hole 963f formed in the second accommodating portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed at the position where it is. As a result, the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed by including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a is a rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 957a1, a shaft portion 957a2 that is inserted inside the main body portion 957a1 and is displaceable with respect to the main body portion 957a1, and a side opposite to the main body portion 957a1 of the shaft portion 957a2. It is provided with an annular portion 957a3 disposed at the end portion of the coil spring SP2 and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1.

The main body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the main body portion 957a1 due to the magnetism can be pulled inside the main body portion 957a1 and inserted. Will be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is formed of a magnetic metal material and is formed in a columnar shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction is toward the passage member 955, and a part of the back surface base 941 side is arranged so as to project from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the main body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. As a result, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, and the connecting member 957c can be displaced.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound a plurality of times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular portion 957a3 and the main body portion 957a1. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be urged in a direction away from the main body portion 957a1. Therefore, in a state where electric power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be maintained in a state of being separated from the main body portion 957a1. Further, when the power supply (supply) is cut off after the power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box shape that covers the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side where the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is opened. Further, the case member 957b is formed to include an insertion hole 957b1 penetrating the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction and an opening 957b2 penetrating the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole through which a screw for fastening the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957) is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the tip portion of the screw. Further, the screw inserted through the insertion hole 957b1 is screwed into the passage member 955.

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the main body portion 957a1 via the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c is a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from an end surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 99B) with a diameter larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and a first recessed portion thereof. A second recessed portion 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a size larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the ball entry member 953 are provided.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is arranged inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape in which one side in the direction of gravity opens in the rear view, and is formed by opening from the first recessed portion 957c1 side to the solenoid 957a side.

The engaging portion 957c3 is formed by bending in a substantially L-shape in a side view. In the engaging portion 957c3, a connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is arranged inside the bent portion. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be described later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially triangular lateral view. The transmission member 958 includes a shaft hole 958b that penetrates in a circular shape in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a that projects in a columnar shape in the plate thickness direction from the end portion on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion that projects toward the plate member 951 side. Formed with 958c.

As described above, the shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102 (a)) is inserted. Further, the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is pivotally supported by the passage member 955 in a rotatable state.

As described above, the connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a comes into contact with the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The tip portion 958c is arranged by being inserted into the recessed portion 951d1 of the plate member 951. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the tip portion 958c is displaced so that the engaging portion 951d can be pushed up. As a result, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, the displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit 950 in the CII-CII line of FIG. 99 (c). 103 (a) and 103 (b) are perspective front views of the specific winning opening unit 950.

Note that FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the open state of the plate member 951. Further, the closed state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a covers the opening portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953, and the open state of the plate member 951 is a state in which the main body portion 951a is the main body of the ball entry member 953. It is in a state of being separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 103 (a), in a state where the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a is cut off, the shaft portion 957a2 is a plate member due to the urging force of the coil spring SP2. It is in a state of protruding toward the 951 side (left side in FIG. 102 (a)). As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side separated from the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951. As a result, the force is transmitted to the tip portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation about one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 102 (a)) about the shaft hole 958b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. Is rotated to. As a result, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side are in contact with each other. As a result, when the player illegally operates the plate member 951 side to forcibly open the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the plate member 951 side is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the solenoid 957a side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation force from being applied to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 102 (b) and 103 (b), when power is applied (supplied) to the main body 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft 957a2 is pulled (adsorbed) inside the main body 957a1. It is said that it is in a state of being. As a result, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is also arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side in the same manner.

In this case, as described above, since the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, the main body portion 958a1 side is arranged with the displacement of the connecting member 957c. It is displaced to (right side in FIG. 102 (b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in the direction in which the tip portion 958c is rotated around the shaft hole 958b on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 102 (b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the recessed portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953. It is rotated in the direction of As a result, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the plate member 951 can be displaced in the opening direction by utilizing the own weight of the plate member 951, so that the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be displaced. It is possible to suppress the force applied to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). Note that FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. Further, in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), the closed state of the plate member 951 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that inclines unilaterally in the gravity direction from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104 (a)) of the main body 953a to the outside. A recess 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a protruding portion 954c projecting at a connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recess 954b, and each surface at both ends in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the passage member 955 side. It is formed with an erection wall 954d erected in succession.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls a game ball flowing in between a pair of inflow ports 953j toward the inflow port 953j side, and is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. .. As a result, the game ball flowing into the space opposite to the inflow port 953j can be rolled to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inflow port 953j (below FIG. 104 (b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the recess 954b is formed so that the recessed tip surface is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j, and receives a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a to receive the gaming ball and the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball that has entered through the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short time, and as a result, it is different before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951. It is possible to suppress over-winning by suppressing the entry of the game ball.

Further, the recess 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104B). As a result, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) can be easily received in the recess 954b, and the accepted game ball is shortened to the passage member 955. It can be guided (inflowed) in time. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the recess 954b is set so that the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly flowed into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

Further, the width dimension of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (plate member 951 side). As a result, when the game ball that rolls the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the recess 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the above-mentioned inclined surface 954a with the recess 954b sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, and is inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j (passage member 955). Is formed. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second inclined surface 954e side is rolled toward the inflow port 953j by utilizing the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and is swiftly rolled toward the passage member 955. Can be made to. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The erection wall 954d is formed at a position separated from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e is set to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. 2 The guide surface 954d1 is provided.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the opening 953a1 side, and is formed so as to be inclined from the opening 953a1 side toward the inflow port 953j toward the recess 954b side in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball that is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and rolls on the rolling surface 953a2, and is formed with the longitudinal end portion of the rolling surface 953a2. It is arranged between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955. As a result, the game ball flowing into the main body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

The projecting portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a, and are projecting toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 104 (b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). .. That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, one surface is connected to a surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one surface of the remaining two surfaces is a side edge portion 954c3 on the recess 954b side. Is formed by being connected to the side surface of the recess 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is opened 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball (longitudinal outward direction of the rolling surface 953a2) of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball. It is formed so as to be inclined to the side. As a result, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is increased, and the rolling speed of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball in the longitudinal direction is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation shaft of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a in the lateral direction. The end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on one end (above the gravity direction) side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Further, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball that rolls the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. Can be decelerated in front of the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball is increased, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (immediately before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b. 2 It is possible to suppress rolling up to the inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time by that amount. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connecting portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inflow port 953j toward the side side portion 954c2 of the connecting portion with the inclined surface 954a. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is prevented from jumping out from the opening 953a1, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. Can be done.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a toward the passage member 955, the opening 933a1 is provided for the game ball having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed. Since there is a low risk of jumping out from the outside, by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1, it is possible to prevent the vehicle from rolling from the inclined surface 954a through the recess 954b to the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, it can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, the guide surface 954c1 can be overcome and guided to the erection wall 954d formed on the second inclined surface 954e side. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly flowed into the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the opening 953a1. As a result, the plate member 951 can suppress the entry of another game ball before closing the opening 953a1 and suppress the over-winning.

Further, the projecting portion 954c extends in a direction in which the side edge portion 954c3 of the end surface facing the standing wall 954d is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The erection wall 954d extends in a direction in which the projecting portion 954c and the second side edge portion 954d2 of the end surface on the opposite side are substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104 (b)) of the side edge portion 954c3 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction of As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d to ensure deceleration and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Further, the erection wall 954d is set so that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104 (a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has passed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the erection wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is located on the extension line of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d in the inclination direction, and the rolling ball is guided toward the recess 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1. Even when the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c to decelerate. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

In the projecting portion 954c, the distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104 (a)) from the recessed surface of the recess 954b to the protruding tip is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. Further, as described above, since the projecting portion 954c is formed so as to be continuous with the side surface of the recess 954b, the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the erection wall 954d is rolled. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated and can flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. As a result, the plate member 951 can prevent another game ball from being inserted before closing the opening 953a1, and can suppress over-winning.

Next, the assembled state of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960, and FIG. 105 (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960. 106 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the CVIa-CVIa line of FIG. 105 (a), and FIG. 106 (b) is the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in the above.

In addition, in FIGS. 105A and 105B, the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a operating the plate member 951 and the pair of wing members (see FIG. 83A) are connected to the solenoid 610 operating. A part of the wiring HS2 is shown in the illustrated state. Further, in FIG. 106 (b), a part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls flowing into the specific winning opening 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 (see FIG. 83 (a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where the specific winning opening unit 950 and a part thereof overlap with each other in the front view. Is formed in. As a result, a space can be formed on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the second winning opening 140 (a pair of feather members 945).

Here, conventionally, a second winning opening 140, a pair of wing members 945 that open or close the second winning opening 140, a first driving means for driving the pair of wing members 945, and a specific winning opening 65a A gaming machine including a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a and a second driving means for driving the plate member 951 is known. However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the pair of wing members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively, these pair of wing members 945 and the plate. There is a problem that it is difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951 and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, a space can be formed on the back side of the pair of wing members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, by consolidating the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening 65a), other members and devices are arranged. Space can be secured on the back surface of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Further, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged in the vicinity of the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is far from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) arranged in the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visually recognized by the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) is the base plate. It can be retracted to the back side (opposite side of the game area) of the 60 to make it difficult for the player to see.

That is, the movable body of the operation unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 during normal (evacuation), making it difficult for the player to see, and at the same time, the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60 during movement (extension). ), Which makes it easier for the player to see, the operating means (drive unit 960) of the wing member 945 arranged near the central opening is a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By arranging the movable body at a position horizontally overlapping with the unit 950, it is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of evacuation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the operating unit during normal (evacuation). As a result, when the movable body is operated to bring it into an overhanging state, it is possible to easily give the player an interest.

Further, the projected area of the plate member 951 in the front view is set to be larger than the projected area of the pair of feather members 945. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 provided with the two displacement members (plate member 951 and the pair of wing members 945), the respective drive means (drive unit 957 and the drive unit 957 and Since the drive unit 960) is arranged, each drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and on the back surface side of the other displacement members (pair of wing members 945). Space can be formed.

Further, the plate member 951 is specified because the projected area in the front view is larger than the projected area in the front view of the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951. The dead space on the back surface of the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105A, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (left-right direction in FIG. 105A). It is installed side by side along. Therefore, the dead space on the back surface of the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 81) by the pair of feather members 945, and the plate member 951 (specific winning opening unit 950) is arranged at a position separated from the pair of feather members 945. The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separation direction. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is arranged via the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941, and the drive unit 960 is the back base. Since it is connected to 941, the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) by the front base 943 at the same time as the action of fastening and fixing the back base 941 to the front base 943. As a result, when the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 (game board 13), it is possible to prevent the drive unit 960 from being forgotten to be attached.

In the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960, the positions of the ends on the opposite side (rear side) of the plate member 951 side of the specific winning opening unit 950 are set to substantially the same position, and the drive unit is set. The wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of the 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end portion of the specific winning opening unit 950 opposite to the plate member 951 side (rear side). This makes it easier to organize the wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being separated on the side (rear side) opposite to the game area of the game board 13, and it is possible to prevent the wiring HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 for driving the wing member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged in a posture in which the axial directions of the shaft portion 961b and the shaft portion 957a2 are oriented in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the opposite sides of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 from the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. As a result, the wiring HS1 of the drive unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the drive unit 957 can be easily combined.

The drive unit 960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush with each other. Thereby, the shape of the partition member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the flow of the electromagnetic field to the region where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged can be simplified.

That is, the side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or both sides of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 in the direction of gravity. When the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the direction of gravity, both side surfaces of the main body 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step in the direction of gravity. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 are substantially flush with each other in the direction of gravity, and the outer surfaces form a step. Therefore, the partition member can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partition member is a barrier of a conductor for partitioning an arrangement region of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 and another region and limiting the flow of electromagnetic waves between the two regions. It is formed from a metal plate.

Further, the transmission member 965 is arranged between the passage member 955 of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 is located at the tip thereof (insertion portion 965e). Since the displacement member 966 that slides and displaces to open and close the pair of wing members 945 with the rotation of the wing member 966 is arranged, the second prize is compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members 945 are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling portion 943a on the back side of the mouth 140. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950 in order to avoid interference with the rotating member. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in pairs with the specific winning opening unit 950 in the front view. Will be set up. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is fraudulently applied from the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1. It can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the drive means (drive unit 960) for driving the wing member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted through the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole is formed in the ball entry member 953 from the game area side to the drive unit 960 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine, it is difficult for the clerk to detect the illegality. There was a risk of being done.

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entry member 953, the ball entry member 953 is hidden in the plate member 951 and the clerk cheats on the ball entry member 953. Is difficult to find.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, it is detected. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and an illegality is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, by closing the plate member 951, the drive unit 960 becomes the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to be able to detect fraudulent activity by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1 because it is shielded from the screen and the location where fraud is applied becomes invisible.

Further, since the detection device SE1 is the same as the detection device (for example, the detection device SE2 and the detection device SE3) that detects other game balls (off-the-shelf product), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is secured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing devices SE1. Therefore, when the player drills a hole in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a risk that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's fraudulent activity.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposite side of the pair of detection devices SE1. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be disconnected by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively vulnerable to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 is damaged (broken wire) due to the fraudulent act. ) Can be made easier. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Further, an annular protrusion 953c for screwing a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and an error is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side (lower side of E10 (a)) of the ball entry member 953, the drive unit is screwed into the annular protrusion 953c. Since the 960 can be hidden, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Since the unshielded area in the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be supplemented with screws by setting the fastening position of the above, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraudulent acts.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the wiring HS3 is wound and arranged around the annular projection 953c of the ball entry member 953. As a result, the wiring HS3 can be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and an illegal act is applied to the drive unit 960 from the open side of the ball entry member 953, such an illegal act can be made more difficult to perform. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the drill or the like aiming at the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other, the wiring HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can easily detect the fraud by notifying the error.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c and arranged. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a force in the shear direction to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged to the outside of the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction to detect it. A force in the shear direction acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by a force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c and arranged, the wiring HS3 is connected to the detection device SE1 when the wiring HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning opening unit 950. The direction of the force acting on the wiring HS3 can be made to act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Further, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position biased toward the end portion of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side of the wiring HS3. Therefore, the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the side opposite to the screwing position (annular protrusion 953c) of the screw, so that the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and fraud is applied to the drive unit 960 from the specific winning opening 65a, such fraud can be made more difficult to perform.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the above-mentioned winning port unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on the other end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980 in the gravity direction. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. FIG. 109 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 109 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 112 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIa-CXIIa line of FIG. 109 (a), and FIG. 112 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. A distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985 are mainly provided.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. Formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109 (b)) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j protruding in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 109 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 109 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opened on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opened on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981 g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (a)) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and the back base 985. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. The ball throwing passage TR0 is formed, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0 are provided. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has the inner edge portion in the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109 (a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first thrown ball from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g are brought into contact with each other. It can be hard to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in the front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L36 (see FIG. 112 (b)) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the two facing each other. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back surface base 985 side in an annular shape. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recess 982h and the recess 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erecting tip surface descends toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109 (b)). Be tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are brought into contact with the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 to guide them toward the openings 985e and 985f. It can be easily flowed into the opening 985e and the opening 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily visually recognized even in the state of passing through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side toward the flow direction of the game ball, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while being guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state where the distribution portion 983 can be rotated. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L37 to the inside (see FIG. 112 (b)) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the action portion 983a is set so that the connection position with the contact portion 983d is on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution portion 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis to extend the extending direction of the working portion 983a to one or the other. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion for accommodating the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above inside, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back surface base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113 (a) and 113 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) than the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. , The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113B, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. 114 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular through holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 114A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. It is mainly provided with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 922 and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922.

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 922 can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 114 (b)).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 is provided with an annular protrusion 992f projecting from the sixth passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 114 (a)). The annular protrusion 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 992g can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 114B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 114 (b)) of the erection wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the third passage member 993 is opened on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114 (b)), the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the erection wall 993e, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, the inside of the detection hole SE1a is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are formed. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, the game of flowing down the game area by exchanging the throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the distribution unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 (a) is a front view of the replacement unit 1980, and FIG. 117 (b) is a rear view of the replacement unit 1980. 118 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa line of FIG. 117 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the exchange unit 1980 on the CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb line of FIG. 118 (a). It is a figure. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the exchange unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a back base 1985 arranged on the side opposite to the game area side of the front base 1981. Formed in preparation for.

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Further, the front base 1981 is formed so that the outer shape that can be seen from the front is substantially the same as the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980. The front base 1981 is mainly provided with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player side (opposite the back base 1985).

Further, the front base 1981 is formed of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 (yellow in the present embodiment). This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether the distribution unit 980 is arranged or the exchange unit 1980 is arranged on the game board 13.

That is, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having the specification of arranging the distribution unit 980 and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) having the specification of arranging the replacement unit 1980 are introduced in the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (front surface of the game board 13) is the same in both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification is used, so the color arrangements of the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 are different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specification of the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) is used.

The outer shape of the base plate 1981a in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (specifications are changed), the front base 1981 (replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. Can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 due to the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size in which a game ball can be inserted. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and is provided with an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out an upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension of the bulging portion 1982 in the horizontal direction is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inside thereof and flow down. .. Further, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is set at a position in the gravity direction substantially the same as the inner surface on the one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d formed in the back surface base 1985. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inflow port 982d can be thrown into the opening 985d in the order of flowing into the inflow port 982d.

The outer shape of the rear base 1985 in front view is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the back base 985 of the distribution unit 980, and is communicated with the internal space of the opening 985d and the through hole 981c which are communicated with the internal space of the bulging portion 1982. It is formed with an opening of 985 g.

According to the exchange unit 1980 configured as described above, as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a in the front view is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, so that the distribution unit 980 to the exchange unit 1980 Can be easily replaced with (change of specifications).

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known. According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the distribution unit 980 (ball entry unit) has the inflow port 982d and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d, and also has the game board 13. The winning opening unit 930 arranged on the front side and the winning opening unit 930 are arranged on the back side of the winning opening unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the aisle unit 990 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the winning opening unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. No need. Therefore, by replacing the distribution unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, when changing the specifications of the game board 13 while diverting (combining) the game board 13 (base plate 60 and front unit 940), the front surface of the game board 13 is used. Space can be used effectively.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material as described above, and the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the winning opening unit. At the same time, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 in the front view, the distribution unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light-transmitting material. For example, the base plate 60 may be formed from a veneer plate. , Attach the seal to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since it is permissible to paint the base plate 60, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light-transparent material) resin material, it flows down the inside (passage) of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 through the front unit 940. The game ball can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless transparent (light transmitting material) resin material and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed of a colored translucent (light transmitting material) resin material, the front unit 940 is formed of a colorless and transparent (light transmitting material) resin material. Through the unit 940, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the passage of the game ball of the distribution unit 980 is formed by including a throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the throwing passage TR0. Further, the distribution unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting a game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when the distribution unit 980 having many passage paths for the game balls is changed to the exchange unit 1980 having few passage paths to manufacture a game machine having different specifications, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of detection devices SE3.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the distribution unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the distribution unit 980, but the flow passage. When changing from the distribution unit 980 in which two are formed to the exchange unit 1980 having one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980. There is a possibility that the detection device SE3 will be arranged by the amount. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage branched from the throwing passage TR0, when the distribution unit 980 is changed to the exchange unit 1980, the number of detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Since it is installed, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of the game ball into the second winning opening 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices arranged in the distribution unit 980 and the exchange unit 1980 can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passages can be increased accordingly.

Further, the exchange unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for sending a game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 at the same position as the distribution unit 980. Therefore, similarly to the distribution unit 980, when the exchange unit 1980 is arranged in the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930), the exchange unit 1980 can be positioned by using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same. Therefore, by positioning the side wall portion 981b with respect to the rolling portion 943a, the replacement unit 1980 Even so, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940.

Further, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b, as in the distribution unit 980. Since the target portion can be positioned, the occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the CXIXa-CXIXa line of FIG. 81.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 119), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c.

Further, the second throwing portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960.

Here, conventionally, a game board, a first member having a first passage which is arranged on the front side of the game board and through which a game ball passes, and a first member which is communicated with the first passage of the first member. A game machine having two passages and a second member provided on the back side of the game board is known. The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are located between the projecting portions 962 g of the drive unit 960 facing each other. The wall 942d is inserted. When the throwing unit 970 is arranged on the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e on which the projecting portion 962 g is projected.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a protruding portion 962 g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940 and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. And. Thereby, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned by using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is located outside the pair of second throwing portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the opposite direction. As a result, in the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b, the protruding portion 962g is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970. The position of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the 940 can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) at the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. Since (the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (arm portion 962e), as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the guide portion 962b, The occurrence of misalignment (step) can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 in a state of being arranged in the front unit 940. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening portion for arranging the drive unit 960. That is, since the through hole 60a for arranging the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can also be used as the arranging space, the processing man-hours can be reduced accordingly. , Product cost can be reduced.

As described above, since the drive unit 960 provided with the guide portion 962b is arranged (formed so as to be able to hold) on the front unit 940 provided with the second throwing portion 942c, the front unit 940 and the front unit 940 and the back surface of the game board 13 are arranged. When each of the throwing units 970 is attached, it is not necessary to attach the drive unit 960 separately, and by attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of mounting can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. To. Therefore, after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 to the base plate 60, the work of engaging the projecting portion 962 g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 with the second guide wall 942d and the second throwing portion 942c, respectively. There is no need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Further, in the state where the drive unit 960 is arranged on the front unit 940, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed so as to be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 from the side opposite to the front unit 940, so that the base plate 60 can be engaged. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the back surface of the base plate 60 after simultaneously attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. it can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other, and in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are combined, the arm portion 962e, the wall portion 962f, and the front unit 940 The displacement member 966 described above is arranged between the back base 941 and the rear base 941. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966. Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is inserted and the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960 can block the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 from the outside, and prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the protruding portion 966a from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state of the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b will be described as a representative example. 120 (a) and 121 (a) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120 (b) and 121 (b) are CXX b of FIG. 120 (a). It is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in -CXXb line. Note that FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) show a state in which the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120 (a) and 120 (b). To.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second recessed portion 942c1 are set so that the distance L38 from the rolling surface 981c1 is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball.

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known. However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Further, as described above, the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60, respectively. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may be separated from each other in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (left-right direction in FIG. 120 (a)). There is. In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the protrusion 981b1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, there is a gap K1 in the space formed between the rolling portion 943a of the game ball of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling surface 981c1 of the gaming ball of the side wall portion 981b, and the second throwing portion. The gap K2 in the space formed between the second recessed portion 942c1 of the 942c and the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is formed at a position different from that of the rolling direction of the game ball (left-right direction in FIG. 121 (a)). .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that is rolled from the second throwing portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the maximum value of the resistance received by the game ball can be reduced by the gap formed in the connecting portion between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a linear shape has been described, but the sliding groove 8966a2 of the displacement member 8966 of the seventh embodiment is formed on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction. It is provided with a recess 8966a6 that is recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape in rear view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 according to the seventh embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular plate in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. The shape of the inner edge of the second opening 966c in the front view is formed to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941. 2 Winning openings 140 are arranged.

Further, the displacement member 8966 has a protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) To the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122) with a bulging portion 966b.

The protrusion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 formed so as to penetrate the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and a contact portion 966a1 located on both outer sides of the displacement member 8966 in the lateral direction and extending in the longitudinal direction. Be prepared.

The sliding groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and the recess 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction to the other side in the gravity direction (gravity). It is recessed toward the upper side in the direction (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension of the recess 8966a6 in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b facing each other. Further, the side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side is extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction is the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the wing member 945 is closed, at least a part of the protrusion 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the wing member 945 side is rotated, the first surface 945b1 becomes the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. The displacement of the protrusion 945b can be regulated by abutting.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slidably displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), so that the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is displaced from the recess 8966a6. Can be extracted from the inside of. As a result, the protrusion 945b and the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 can be brought into contact with each other to displace the protrusion 945b.

That is, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945, it can be regulated that the drive is transmitted to the transmission member 965 side, and when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 side, the protrusion 945b and the recess 8966a6 The protrusion 945b can be displaced by disengaging the engagement with the protrusion 945b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Further, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid and displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, since the recess 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side (gravity direction) upper side in the gravity direction, the protrusion 945b can be received with the slide displacement of the displacement member 8966. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is accepted in the recess 8966a6 by utilizing the weight (own weight) of the displacement member 8966.

Next, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 has been described. The tip of the is projected from the connecting hole 966b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

123 (a) and 123 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 according to the eighth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) correspond to FIG. 96 (a). Further, in FIG. 123 (a), the closed state of the wing member 945 is illustrated, and in FIG. 123 (b), the wing member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forced open) by the player to open from the closed state. The engaged state during displacement to is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 9965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion 965b which is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 9965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 9965a protrudes from the connecting side of the insertion portion 9965e inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a setting portion 965f.

The outer shape of the insertion portion 9965e in the front view is formed to be smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. It protrudes from 966b1. Further, the insertion portion 9966e bulges from the engaging portion 9965e3 protruding from the connecting hole 966b1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with a bulge portion 965e1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to project in the displacement direction (gravity direction) of the displacement member 966, and the contact surface 9965e4 on the side surface on the rotation shaft 965c side is formed at a position where a slight gap is separated from the front surface of the displacement member 966. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side in the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other for transmission. The displacement of member 9965 can be regulated.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the one-sided contact portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 abuts on the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. .. In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y due to the rotational displacement, and is also displaced toward the rotation shaft 965c side. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by the displacement of the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotation shaft 965c. As a result, the displacement of the transmission member 9965 is regulated, so that the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is also regulated.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 is set to rotate before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are displaced. It is possible to suppress contact. Therefore, the transmission member 965 can be rotationally displaced to displace the displacement member 966.

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the protrusions 945b of the pair of wing members 945. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the wing member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 come into contact with each other to regulate the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the eighth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engagement portion 9965e3 protruding from the tip of the insertion portion 9965e, and the displacement member 966 is displaced while the wing member 945 is closed. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. Therefore, when the wing member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

Next, the transmission member 10965 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the tip of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is only arranged inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the ninth embodiment, the transmission member 10965 is inserted. The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

124 (a) and 124 (b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 124 (a) corresponds to FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 124 (b) corresponds to FIG. 96 (b). Further, FIG. 124 (a) shows a closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 124 (b) shows an open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment is formed by bending in a side view, and extends to a tip portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 and the tip portion 10965a thereof. It is formed from a rotating portion that is connected and extends to the connecting member 964 side.

Similar to the sixth embodiment, the tip portion 10965a has a smaller width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c as it is separated from the solenoid 610. Further, the tip portion 10965a is projected from the connecting side of the insertion portion 10965e inserted into the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966 described later and the rotating shaft 965c to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is formed with a vertical portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted and arranged inside the connecting hole 10966b. Further, the insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and a bulging portion protruding from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1. It is formed with 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate shape curved about the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 described later in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 is provided with a contact surface 10965e4 on a side surface (inner surface) on the rotation shaft 965c side. The contact surface 10966d4 is disposed so as to face the contact surface 10966dc of the displacement member 10966 described later with a predetermined gap in a state where the wing member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the front view, and a second opening 966c is formed through the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 124 (a)) at a substantially central position in the front view. The second opening 966c has a state in which the shape of the inner edge in front view is formed to be larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 and the second throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. Placed in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning opening 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966.

Further, the displacement member 10966 is formed on the opposite surface of the protruding portion 966a protruding from one end side in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the bulging portion 966b protruding from the other end side in the longitudinal direction to the back surface side, and the bulging portion 966b. It mainly includes a recess 10966d to be recessed.

The recess 10966d is recessed so as to be connected to the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1, and the recessed portion 10966d1 is provided on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The contacted surface 10966d1 is formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above in a state where the wing member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged so as to face each other. Further, the contacted surface 10966d1 is provided with an inclined surface 10966d2 at an end portion connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2 side. Further, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inside the contacted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is the insertion portion in the front view in the state where the wing member 945 is closed. It is set to be larger than the width dimension L39 in the gravity direction of 10965e (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced to the back surface side, so that the contact surface 10965e4 and the contacted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other and the rotation of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. Can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the solenoid 610 is driven when the wing member 945 is displaced to the open state, the drive is transmitted from the connecting member 964 to the transmission member 10965. Will be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated around the rotation shaft 965c. As described above, the contact surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the contact surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are formed so as to be curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c, so that the transmission member 10965 axes the rotation shaft 965c. When rotated to, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a state in which the contact surface 10966d1 is slightly separated from the contact surface 10966d1. That is, the contact surface 10965e4 and the contact surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, since the distance dimension between the facing portions from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 of the connecting hole 966b1 is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965, the transmission member. By rotating the 10965, the insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of the recess 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 can be brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 10966b3, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced in the open state.

Further, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is slid along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contact surface 10966d1. As a result, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inward of the recess 10966d while the displacement member 10966 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction).

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 are displaced in the open state and the drive is transmitted from the pair of wing members 945, the drive is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965. In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slidably displaced while the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966. Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced with the slide displacement of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is displaced to the back surface side due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 is brought into contact with the contact surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly released from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engagement portion 10965e3 projecting from the tip of the insertion portion 10965e, and when the wing member 945 is closed, the one-side contact portion One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the gravity direction is brought into contact with the 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 in the gravity direction (bulging portion). When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the direction of gravity to the position where the transmission member 10965 is in contact with the 965e1), the engagement portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966, so that the transmission member 10965 is displaced without being rotated. Sliding displacement of member 10966 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member 945 from being forcibly coast guarded from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated from the inside to the outside of the recess 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engaging portion 10965e3 is disengaged from the displacement member 10966 of the engaging portion 10965e3. By further rotating the member 10965 to the other side in the gravity direction, the displacement member 10966 can be slid and displaced toward the other side in the gravity direction, and the wing member 945 can be opened.

Next, the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 11966 in the tenth embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 11966 according to the tenth embodiment. 126 (a) and 126 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 11966. Note that FIG. 126 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 126 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, in the front unit 940 according to the tenth embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 11942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to be substantially the same as the protruding tip position of the second throwing portion 942c.

The pair of second guide walls 11942b is formed with the first tooth surface 11942b1 of the gear tooth surface on the opposite side surface thereof. Further, the pair of second guide walls 11942b is set so that the separation distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126 (a)), and the displacement member 11966 is set between the facing surfaces. Is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with the first gear GY1 pivotally supported by the displacement member 11966, which will be described later. As a result, the displacement member 11966 can be slidably displaced to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 is axial to the first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view, the second member 11968 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 11967, and the first member 11967. It is formed with a first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 is formed with a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in the front view. Further, the first member 11967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and a second opening 966c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c in the gravity direction. It is formed with a support portion 11966d and a sliding protrusion 11966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction.

The support portion 11966d is projected from the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be rotatably supported by the first member 11967.

The sliding protrusion 11966e is projected toward the first member 11967 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968. As a result, the second member 11968 can be arranged on the first member 11967.

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a plate-like body having a substantially gate shape in the front view, and has a second tooth surface 11968a1 of a gear tooth surface on both end surfaces in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 2 Sliding groove 11968b formed through the tooth surface 11968a1 (vertical direction in FIG. 126 (a)) in a long hole shape in the plate thickness direction, and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the portal shape. A blade portion 11968c that is inclined in the plate thickness direction is provided on an end face that extends to the surface.

The pair of second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both side surfaces in the horizontal direction of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surface 11968a1 is formed.

As described above, the sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding protrusion 11966e.

Therefore, as described above, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced due to the displacement of the first member 11967, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, and the first gear is The two members 11968 are displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion thereof is closer to the inner surface of the second throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the gravity direction in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. , Arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. As a result, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the gravity direction with respect to the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140.

Further, the projecting distance of the second throwing portion 942c is set to a length that abuts on the back surface side of the second member 11968. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the tip position of the rolling portion 943a arranged between the second throwing portions 942c facing each other is set to substantially the same position as the tip position of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the foreign matter inserted into the inside of the second winning opening 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface flowing from the second winning opening 140, the blade portion, and 11968c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), when the wing member 945 is in the closed state, the blade portion 11968c of the second member 11968 is changed to the rolling portion 943a. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and protruded by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When the 945b is forcibly opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 11966.

On the other hand, when the wing member 945 is opened, the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 is displaced upward by the transmission member 965, so that the second member 11968 is displaced. The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, as described above, the second member 11968 has a displacement amount twice as much as the displacement amount of the first member 11967 with respect to the back base 941, so that the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140. It can be separated from the rolling portion 943a, which is the rolling surface of the game ball, by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when the wing member 945 is opened, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be allowed.

That is, the second member 11968 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 1966 is slidably displaced from the position where the wing member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed, and the edge of the passage. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end portion of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning opening 140. Can be done.

For example, a detection device SE4 (see FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), The other end of the thread is operated (pulled out and pulled) to reciprocate the game ball, so that the detection device SE4 detects it a plurality of times. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the tenth embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 1966 (second member 11968) is slide-displaced and the blade portion 11968c crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c is inserted in the middle of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball. When the blade portion 11968c is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being displaced together with the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c and the blade portion 11968c The thread can be cut between the rolling portion 943a or the edge portion of the second throwing portion 942c. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged from the second winning opening 140 on the rolling passage of the game ball has been described, but the displacement member 12966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. It is placed on the rolling passage of the game ball. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and the displacement member 12966 according to the eleventh embodiment. 128 (a) and 128 (b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and the displacement member 12966. Note that FIG. 128 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the open state of the wing member 945.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment, a pair of second guide walls 12942b are extended in the direction of gravity on both lateral sides of the second winning opening 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the protruding distances of the second throwing portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set to be short, and the protruding tip surface is set to a position where it comes into contact with the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966 described later. To.

Further, on both outer sides of the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 940 in the horizontal direction, a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 projecting toward the displacement member 12966 are provided. The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are inserted into the shafts of the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2, which will be described later, respectively, and can support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 projecting in the opposite direction on one end side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the opposite side surface in the gravity direction. The distance dimension between the pair of abutting portions 12942b2 facing each other is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension in the lateral direction of the first member 12967, which will be described later. As a result, the first member 12967 can be arranged between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the slide displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 includes a first member 12967 formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, a second member 12966 arranged in a displaceable state on the first member 12967, and a shaft support on the back base 941. It is mainly provided with a first gear GY1 that is meshed with the first member 12967 and a second gear GY2 that is pivotally supported by the back base 941 and meshed with the second member 12868.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having a tooth surface on the outer peripheral surface, and is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface is the first member 12967 and the second gear. It is geared to GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two-stage gears having different sizes, and is formed by including a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. Further, the second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the back base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small diameter gear GY2a is meshed with the first gear GY1 to mesh the teeth of the large diameter gear GY2b. The surface is meshed with the second member 12868.

The first member 12967 is formed of a metal material, and a second opening 129666c is formed through at a substantially central position in the front view in the plate thickness direction. Further, the first member 12967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the second opening 12966c in the gravity direction, and the second opening. It is formed with sliding protrusions 12966e projecting in an annular shape on both sides in the lateral direction sandwiching the 12966c, and a third tooth surface 12966f of the gear tooth surface on both side surfaces extending in the longitudinal direction.

The shape of the inner edge in the front view of the second opening 12966c is set to be larger than the shape of the inner edge of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 941 described above. Further, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed so as to be inclined downward from the back surface base 941 side toward the second member 12868 side, which will be described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 in a state where the pair of feather members 945 are closed, and the pair of feather members 945 are arranged. In the open state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140.

The sliding protrusion 12966e is projected from the second member 12966 side, and the tip is inserted inside the sliding groove 12966b of the second member 12868. As a result, the second member 12966 can be arranged on the first member 12967.

The pair of third tooth surfaces 12966f are respectively meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slidably displaced with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, so that the first gear GY1 can be rotated. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, whereby the second gear GY2 can be rotated.

The second member 12868 is formed from a metal material into a plate-like body having a substantially H-shape in front view, and is arranged in a posture in which a pair of extending portions are directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128A). Further, the second member 12868 is provided along the second tooth surface 12966a of the gear tooth surface and the extension direction of the second tooth surface 12966a (vertical direction in FIG. 128A) on the outer side of the pair of extension portions in the opposite direction. A sliding groove 12968b formed through a long hole in the plate thickness direction and a blade portion 6683 on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extending portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Will be done.

As described above, the sliding groove 12966b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12966a, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12966 can be slid and displaced in the gravity direction by the amount of the gap between the sliding groove 12966b and the sliding protrusion 12966e with respect to the first member 12967.

The large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2 is meshed with each of the pair of second tooth surfaces 12966a. Therefore, the rotation of the second gear GY2 causes the second member 12868 to be slidably displaced. As described above, the second gear GY2 is rotated by the slide displacement of the first member 12967 by the transmission member 965. Therefore, the second member 12868 can be displaced with the displacement of the first member 12967.

The slide displacement directions of the first member 12967 and the second member 12868 are set to be opposite to each other, and the displacement amount of the second member 12868 is set to be larger by the small diameter of the second gear GY2.

The blade portion 6683 is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and the upper end portion thereof is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the second throwing portion 942c in a state where the wing member 945 is closed. ) Is placed on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) than the inner surface. That is, the second member 12868 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps with the first member 12967 in the front view with the wing member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c cross the rolling passage of the game ball and rub the edges of each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 to be made to move, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second winning opening 140. it can.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, and the game ball is entered from the second winning opening 140 and passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling section 943a and the second throwing section 942c, and the detection device SE4 There is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the pair of blade members 945 open, the pair of blade members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is placed between the pair of second blade portions 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. It can be pinched and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the second member 12868, when the wing member 945 is open, the blade portion 6683 is on the other side in the gravity direction from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball in which the blade portion 6683 has entered the second winning opening 140. Be placed. As described above, in the state where the wing member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140. Therefore, in a state where the pair of feather members 945 are open, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be passed between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12966 can block the rolling passage of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, so that the displacement distance of the second member 12966 is set to the tenth. It can be less than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game ball flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 are closed flows into the rolling passage. Can be suppressed.

Next, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 129. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive transmission from the solenoid 610 to the wing member 945 is transmitted via the three members of the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The drive is transmitted from the solenoid to the wing member 945 by one member. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

129 (a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXIXb-CXXXIXb line of FIG. 129 (a). In FIG. 129 (b), only the outer shape of the specific winning opening unit 950 is shown by a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of feather members 945 are closed and the shaft portion 961b is projected from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of wing members 945 are set to open.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 according to the twelfth embodiment is arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 129 (b)) of the specific winning opening unit 950, and the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is gravity-driven. It is arranged in a direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (b)). Further, a transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610.

The transmission member 13965 is erected from the base 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side and from the end of the base 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the protrusion 945b side of the wing member 945. It is formed with an engaging portion 13965j.

An annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at an end portion on the opposite side of the engaging portion 13965j side. As a result, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in the axial direction thereof.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position where it overlaps with the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129 (a)) in the rear view (or front view). Further, the vertical dimension of the engaging portion 13965j is set to a length exceeding the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and the engaging portion 13965j is in a state of overlapping with the protrusion 945b in the front view.

Further, a support portion 13965j1 having a substantially C-shaped side view is projected from the engaging portion 13965j at the erection tip thereof. The support portion 13965j1 is set so that the interfacing dimension inside the opening is larger than the maximum outer dimension of the protrusion 945b. Further, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the opposite direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 129 (a)) of the pair of engaging portions 13965j is set to be larger than the displacement distance of the protrusion 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be arranged inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slidly displaced in the gravity direction as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slidly displaced in the gravity direction, and the protrusion 945b is displaced according to the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the wing member 945 can be displaced in the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of wing members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are arranged on the back surface side of the plate member 951, so that the pair A space can be formed on the back side of the wing member 945 (second winning opening 140). That is, by consolidating the space for arranging the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of wing members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices is reduced to the pair of wing members 945 (second prize). It can be secured on the back side of the mouth 140), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

Next, the displacement member 14966 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 in the front view has been described, but in the thirteenth embodiment, the displacement A case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

130 (a) and 131 (a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the thirteenth embodiment. 130 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXb-CXXXb line of FIG. 130 (a), and FIG. 131 (b) is a winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXB-CXXXIb line of FIG. 131 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of.

In addition, in FIG. 130 (a) and FIG. 131 (a), the outer shape of a pair of feather members 945 is shown by a chain line. Further, in FIGS. 130 (a) and 130 (b), the closed state of the pair of wing members 945 is shown, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the protrusions 945 b of the pair of wing members 945 are cut. The open state of the pair of feather members 945 in the case where the blade member 945 is opened is shown. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the displacement member 14966 in the thirteenth embodiment is formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular plate in the front view, and has a second opening 966c at a substantially central position in the front view. It is formed through in the plate thickness direction (left-right direction in FIG. 130 (b)).

The displacement member 14966 includes a protruding portion 966a projecting from one end side (upper side in FIG. 130 (a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130 (a)) to the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130 (a)), and in the longitudinal direction and the like. It is provided with a bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130 (b)) to the back side (back surface base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The bulging portion 14966b is formed by bulging toward the back surface side (back surface base 941 side), and a horizontally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed at the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shape of the inner edge is set to be larger than the outer shape of the tip of the transmission member 965.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge shape set to be substantially square in the front view, and has a contact portion 966b2 on one side of the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 130 (a))). It is provided with a contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90 (a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed so that the distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e. When the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3.

Further, the connecting hole 14966b1 has a dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposing portions in the gravity direction (the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 14966b2). The distance from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42-game ball). Diameter). As a result, when the displacement member 14966 falls on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked at the edge of the displacement member 14966.

Next, a case where the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b). As described above, when the separation distance L40 of the connecting hole 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 in the gravity direction of the insertion portion 965e and the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the other side covering Since the insertion portion 965e is brought into contact with the contact portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), when the protrusion 945b of the pair of wing members 945 is cut, one side is contacted. The displacement member 14966 is freely dropped to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)> (L42). -Since the diameter of the game ball), the displacement member 14966 can be freely dropped, so that the rolling passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 can be blocked by the edge portion of the displacement member 14966.

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the state where the pair of wing members 945 are not communicated with the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (the state shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b)), the displacement member 14966 Is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is cut and the wing member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second The flow of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 14966.

Next, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is arranged and positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 has been described, but in the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j is the side wall. It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

132 (a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment, FIG. 132 (b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132 (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a figure. FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133 (a). Note that FIG. 133 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a).

First, the drive unit 15960 according to the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the 14th embodiment is formed in a box shape and is arranged so as to face the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963, and the first accommodating portion 15962. The solenoid 610 arranged in the space between the second accommodating portions 963, the connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and the connecting member 964 while being pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 15962 and the second accommodating portion 963. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 965 connected to the above.

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 132 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 15962b that protrudes from the reference) is provided.

The drive unit 15960 is arranged in the space between the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other, and the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963. A solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964 are mainly provided. Will be done.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and covers one side (upper side of FIG. 93 (a)) of the solenoid 610 as an lining portion 962a, and the lining portion 962a to the back base 941 side (FIG. 85). A guide portion 15962b that protrudes from the reference) is provided.

The guide portion 15962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape in a lateral view and the pair of arm portions 15962e, and a wall portion 962f formed in a front view gate shape and the wall portion thereof. A projecting portion 962g projecting from 962f on the opposite side of the lining portion 962a (rear base 941 side (see FIG. 125)) and a pair of arm portions 15962e located on the other side in the gravity direction and projecting from the wall portion 962f. It is mainly provided with a second arm portion 15962j to be formed and a third arm portion 15962h projecting from the opposite side of the second arm portion 15962j with the wall portion 962f interposed therebetween.

The arm portion 15962e protrudes from each of the facing wall surfaces of the lining portion 962a toward the back base 941 side (see FIG. 85), and the protruding tip side bends to the other side in the gravity direction (opposite side to the solenoid 610 side). It is formed in a substantially L shape. Further, the arm portion 15962e is set at a protruding position in the gravity direction below the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 in a state where the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed by being connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance dimension L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of facing arms 962e. At the same time, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j is set so that the distance dimension in the gravity direction is smaller than the dimension between the side wall portions 981b of the distribution unit 980 and the opposite sides in the gravity direction, and the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 980 are combined. It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

Further, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set so that the distance dimension on the outer side in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the side wall portions 981b in the horizontal direction. As a result, when the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is arranged in the winning opening unit 930, the second arm portion 15962j can be arranged inside the side wall portion 981b for positioning.

The distance dimension between the facing portions of the third arm portion 15962h is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the facing portions of the arm portions 15962e. Further, the third arm portion 15962h is formed with a projecting portion 15962h1 connected to the back surface base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

In the projecting portion 15962h1, the projecting distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the back surface base 941 (see FIG. 85) side is set to be substantially the same as the recessed dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. Further, the projecting portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second recessed portion 942c1 in a state where the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, and is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1.

Therefore, since the upstream end portions of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing and side surface of the game ball passing through the step on the bottom surface side. The timing of passing through the step on the side can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both the positioning of the front unit 940 and the positioning of the distribution unit 980, and is a part of the passage path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140. Will be. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily tolerate the dimensional effect or the mounting intersection.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the second throwing portion 16942c The protrusion 16942c2 is arranged inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the fifteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (a) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (a), the side wall portion 16981b of the distribution unit 980 in the fifteenth embodiment has the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 mounted on the base plate, and the standing tip surface is the winning opening unit. It is formed so as to be in contact with the tip end portion of the second throwing portion 16942c of the 930.

Further, the side wall portion 16981b includes a recessed portion 16981b2 that is recessed on the erection base end side on the erection tip surface. The recessed portion 16981b2 is formed at a position where the radius of the game ball is separated from the rolling surface 981c1 in the direction of gravity, and the concave shape thereof is the lateral view shape of the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing portion 16942c described later in the side view. Is set to be almost the same as.

As a result, when the game ball is sent from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

Further, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the erection base end side is formed so as to be inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game ball, so that the gaming ball colliding with the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. Can be pressed toward the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface) side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up and bouncing on the recessed tip surface of the recessed portion 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

The protrusion 16942c2 is formed so as to project from the projecting tip surface of the second throwing portion 16942c, and the outer shape in the side view is set to be substantially the same as the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball that rolls on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is sent to the rolling surface 981c1 of the sorting unit 980, the game ball is sent to the recessed portion 16981b2 of the sorting unit 980. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched inside. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flowing down) of the game ball from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is on the bottom surface side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the step on the side surface different from the timing of passing through the step on the side surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the recess 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side. The downstream end of the bottom surface of the moving portion 943a can be brought close to the upstream end of the side surface and the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second ball throwing portion 942c is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the side surface upstream of the side wall portion 16981b. Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the protrusion 16942c2 of the second throwing unit 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protrusion 16942c2 has a relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the fifteenth embodiment, the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the protrusion 16942c2 is broken. Even so, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the side wall portion 16981b are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the timing at which the game ball passes the step on the bottom surface side and the side surface side. The timing of passing through the step can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and to disperse the influence of the ball, so that the game ball flows down (passes) smoothly by that amount. be able to.

Further, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the winning opening unit 930 side and the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the distribution unit 980 side, the side surface of the recessed portion 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, so that the rolling portion 943a It is possible to regulate the displacement of the distribution unit 980 to the upper side in the direction of gravity. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it. Compared to the opposite step, it tends to hinder the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, it is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball to be able to regulate that the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b is displaced upward in the direction of gravity from the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 and the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, when the protrusions 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the ends of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second throwing portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the rolling direction of the game ball in side view. However, in the 16th embodiment, the ends of the second throwing portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed so as to be inclined in the side view. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 according to the 16th embodiment. Note that FIG. 134 (b) corresponds to FIG. 120 (a). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the side wall portion 17981b of the distribution unit 980 in the 16th embodiment is formed so that the tip surface 17981b3 of the erection tip thereof is inclined downward from the proximal end side to the distal end side. .. In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed so as to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second throwing portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed so that the tip surface 17942c3 of the projecting tip surface is ascended and inclined along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. Further, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b described above in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate. Arranged.

Therefore, since the side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side surface upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game ball. (Sixth embodiment), the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

Further, since the entire side surface upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having a recessed portion 16981b2 as in the fifteenth embodiment, for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. Further, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve moldability. It can be improved.

Next, the displacement member 18966 according to the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 has been described, but the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is the second. It is arranged on the rolling passage of the game ball entered from the winning opening 140. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a) are schematic views of the winning opening unit 930 according to the 17th embodiment as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 135 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 135 (a). It is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. FIG. 136 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb line of FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 137 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 in the line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137 (a).

It should be noted that FIG. 135 shows the closed state of the pair of wing members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of wing members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of wing members 945 forcibly opened. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 135 (a), 136 (a) and 137 (a), only the pair of wing members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are shown. In FIGS. 135 (b), 136 (b) and 137 (b), only a pair of wing members 945, a rear base 941, a front base 943, a displacement member 18966, a transmission member 19958 and a solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. Displacement.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the 17th embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravity direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135A) than the displacement member 966 in the sixth embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a shape that bends in a substantially L shape in the rear view, and extends from the non-transmission portion 18966a6 extending in the gravity direction and the non-transmission portion 18966a6 from the lower end portion in the gravity direction. It is provided with a transmission unit 18966a7 that is bent and extended to the center side in the left-right direction.

Further, in the displacement member 18966, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the through hole 966c1 is arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, it is possible to regulate the flow of the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

Further, the displacement member 18966 includes a blade portion 1896 g that inclines toward the front side toward the inner peripheral edge on the upper side in the gravity direction of the through hole 966c1. The front side of the blade portion 1896g is in contact with the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion of the second ball throwing portion 942c. That is, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed in the rear view, the blade portion 1896 g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second throwing portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, the transmission member 18958 in the 17th embodiment has a larger rotation range on the tip portion 965a side when the solenoid 961 is driven than in the 1st embodiment. That is, the displacement dimension of the tip portion 965a side in the gravity direction is set to be large, and the displacement dimension is set to be larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravity direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896 g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning is made inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 in the rear view. The opening of the mouth 140 can be arranged.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, so that the protrusion 945b is slid inside the sliding groove 18966a. In the sliding inside the sliding groove 18966a of the protrusion 945b, the protrusion 945b first slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6, and then slides inside the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, since the extension direction of the non-transmission portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same, the position of the protrusion 945b is changed with respect to the back surface base 942 when sliding the non-transmission portion 18966a6. It slides inside the non-transmission portion 18966a6 without being displaced. On the other hand, when the protrusion 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, the protrusion 945b is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of wing members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are opened, it is possible to allow the game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 to flow from the rolling portion 943a into the through hole 981c of the throwing unit 970.

On the other hand, when the pair of wing members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the wing members 945 are rotated by the protrusions 945b of the wing members 945 sliding on the transmission portion 18966a7. In this case, as described above, in the displacement member 18966, the blade portion 18966 g is arranged below the inner peripheral edge of the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity, and the front side surface is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip portion. Since it comes into contact with the protruding tip of the second throwing portion 942c, the second prize is won between the blade portion 18966g and the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c due to the operation of displacing downward in the direction of gravity. It is possible to cut the urging object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140.

That is, the displacement member 18966 crosses the passage of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 140 when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position where the pair of blade members 945 are opened to the position where the pair of blade members 945 are closed. Since it is provided with a blade portion of 18966 g that rubs against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c), it is illegally inserted into the passage where the game ball is placed from the second winning opening 140. You can cut the force.

For example, a detection device SE4 (FIG. 114) that adheres the tip of a thread to a game ball, allows the game ball to enter through the second winning opening 140, and passes the rolling portion 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. With the game ball reaching (see), there is a fraudulent act in which the detection device SE4 detects the game ball a plurality of times by operating (feeding and pulling) the other end of the thread to reciprocate the game ball. In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the 17th embodiment, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the blade member 945 opened, the displacement member is moved from the position where the blade member 945 is opened to the position where the blade member 945 is closed. When 18966 is slide-displaced and the blade portion 18966g crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced and rolled together with the blade portion 18966g. When 18966g is rubbed against the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c while being pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c, 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second throwing portion 942c The thread can be cut between the edges of the thread. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 137, when the protrusion 945b of the pair of feather members 945 is cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 is provided with respect to the second winning opening 140. 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of feather members 945, the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning opening 140 can be regulated by the displacement member 18966.

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) to the solenoid 961 in a direction in which the tip portion 18965a side is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction of closing the second winning opening 140. Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 are forcibly released by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly released as well. As a result, the cheating of the player can be suppressed.

Next, the winning opening unit 19930 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 162. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The front side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

First, the winning opening unit 19930 arranged on the base plate 19060 of the game board 13 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13 according to the eighteenth embodiment. It should be noted that the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 19930 (for example, center frame 86 (see FIG. 81)) arranged on the base plate 19060 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, the base plate 19060 has a through hole 19060a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 19060 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 138) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 19060a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 19940, which will be described later, in the front view.

The base plate 19060 is provided with a front unit 19940, which will be described later, from the front (front) side, and a distribution unit 19980 and aisle unit 19990, which will be described later, from the rear (rear) side. The passage unit 19990 is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw or the like.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning opening unit 19930 will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. 139 (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 139 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 19930. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 19930. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 19930, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 19930.

As shown in FIGS. 139 to 142, the winning opening unit 19930 includes the front unit 19940, the distribution unit 19980 arranged on the back side of the front unit 19940 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)), and the front unit. It is formed mainly including a passage unit 19990 which is a back side of 19940 and is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 19980.

The front unit 19940 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is larger than the through hole 19060a (see FIG. 138) of the base plate 19060. Therefore, by disposing the front unit 19940 on the base plate 19060, the opening of the through hole 19060a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 passes through the through hole 19060a from a space other than the passage path (first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140) of the game ball formed in the front unit 19940. Can be suppressed.

The distribution unit 19980 is provided with an opening U8 that is connected to the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940, which will be described later, and the rear side of the game board 13 from the opening U8 via the first winning opening 64 (in front of the paper in FIG. 139 (b)). The game ball thrown to the side) can be received inside (see FIG. 138). A detailed description of the distribution unit 19980 will be described later.

The passage unit 19990 can internally receive a game ball thrown from the opening U9, which will be described later, to the back side of the game board 13 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) through the second winning opening 140 (FIG. 138). reference). A detailed description of the passage unit 19990 will be described later.

Next, the front unit 19940 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. 143 (a) is a front view of the front unit 19940, FIG. 143 (b) is a rear view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 143 (c) is the CXLIIIc-CXLIIIc line of FIG. 143 (a). It is sectional drawing of the front unit 19940. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective rear view of the front unit 19940. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 19940, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 19940.

As shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the front unit 19940 is arranged on the back base 19941 fastened to the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138) and the back base 19941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is mainly provided with a front base 19943 to be formed and two (pair) wing members 945 rotatably arranged between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 facing each other.

The back base 19941 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular outer shape in front view and a predetermined plate thickness. Further, the back base 19941 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and in a state where the front unit 19940 is arranged on the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), the through hole of the base plate 19060 is passed through the back base 19941. The inside of 19060a (see FIG. 138) can be visually recognized.

The back base 19941 has a first winning opening 64 formed by notching at the edge on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and penetrating the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, which will be described later, and the first winning opening 64 thereof. An intermediate port 19941h formed through the lower part of the mouth 64 (lower side in FIG. 143 (b)) at a position connected to the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980 described later, and below the intermediate port 19941h, connected to the opening U9 described later. It mainly includes a second winning opening 140 formed through the position.

Further, the back surface base 19941 is provided with a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction at the outer edge portion. Further, in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1 of the through hole 941a, a positioning projection 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the back surface of the back surface base 19941 is formed.

Further, in the back base 19941, a plurality of fastening holes 19941i and fastening holes 19941j are formed on the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990 side (see FIG. 142) around the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. The fastening hole 19941i is a hole for screwing a screw through which the sorting unit 19980, which will be described later, is inserted, whereby the front unit 19940 and the sorting unit 19980 can be fastened and fixed. The fastening hole 19941j is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 19990, which will be described later, is inserted, whereby the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed.

The first winning opening 64 is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is open in the rear view. Further, the first winning opening 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front base 19943, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 via the first winning opening 64 (FIG. 138). reference).

The intermediate port 19941h is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view, and the size of the inner edge thereof is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown through the opening U8 and the intermediate port 19941h, which will be described later, can be thrown to the front side (left side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138).

The second winning opening 140 is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape in a vertically long shape when viewed from the front, and its inner edge is formed to have a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second winning opening 140 is arranged between the wing members 945 facing each other. As a result, the game ball thrown between the facing portions of the wing member 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13 via the second winning opening 140 (see FIG. 138).

The second winning opening 140 has a first opening 19941e on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of each edge in the lateral direction (both sides in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)), and a first axis described later. It is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the hole 19941d. Further, the first opening 19941e can be provided with the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945, and is set to be larger than the maximum width dimension of the protrusion 945b in the radial direction of the rotation axis (insertion hole 945c) of the wing member 945. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with the inner surface of the first opening 19941e when the wing member 945 rotates.

The back base 19941 is formed with first shaft holes 19941d formed at two points in a circular shape on the outer side in the lateral direction (outer side in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)) in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

The front base 19943 is formed so that the outer shape in the front view is substantially rectangular in the vertical direction. Further, the front base 19943 is formed from a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the front base 19943 and the back base 19941.

The front base 19943 and the first receiving portion 19941 g projecting toward the back base 19941 side at positions corresponding to the first winning opening 64, the intermediate opening 19941h and the second winning opening 140 of the back base 19941 described above. It is formed mainly including an intermediate receiving portion 19943e and a second receiving portion 19943c.

The first receiving portion 19941 g is formed in a substantially U shape in the rear view, and the first winning opening 64 of the back base 19941 is arranged inside in the front view. Further, the first receiving portion 19941 g is formed in a size capable of accepting one game ball inside. As a result, the first receiving portion is a game ball that flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the first receiving portion 19941 g (first winning opening 64) to the front side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) of the game board 13. It can flow inside 19941 g (see FIG. 138).

Further, the first receiving portion 19941g is formed with a protruding portion 19941g1 that is inclined downward and projected toward the back base 19941 side on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the front surface of the upper surface of the protruding portion 19941g1. The connecting portion with the base 19943 side (left side in FIG. 143 (c)) is formed to be curved. The game ball that flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g with a velocity component on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the projecting portion 19941 g1 come into contact with each other, so that the game ball is on the back side (FIG. 143 (c)). ) It has a velocity component to the right side). As a result, the game ball is thrown through the first winning opening 64 into the opening U8 arranged on the back side (right side of FIG. 143 (c)) of the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 161).

The opening surrounded by the front base 19943 and the ends of the pair of first receiving portions 19941 g on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is the entry port for inserting the game ball into the winning opening unit 19930.

The intermediate receiving portion 19943e is formed of a plate-like body protruding on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first receiving portion 19941g, and the lower surface 19943e1 of the intermediate receiving portion 19943e is the first. It is formed so as to be curved toward the receiving portion 19941 g side (upper side of FIG. 143 (b)). As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate port 19941h can be thrown to one side in the direction of gravity via the passage TR3.

The second receiving portion 19943c is formed in a substantially U-shape in rear view, and in a state where the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 are fastened (combined), the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the second receiving portion 19943c Is arranged inside the second winning opening 140 of the back base 19941 (on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) than the lower edge of the second winning opening 140). Further, a pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the outer side of the pair of vertical walls 19943c1 in the opposite direction (outside in the left-right direction in FIG. Further, the distance between the outer surfaces of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface base 19941 side (right side in FIG. 143 (c)).

The distance from the edge of the second winning opening 140 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the back base 19941 to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 of the front base 19943 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball flowing down between the pair of wing members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the upper surface 19943c2 of the pair of standing walls 19943c1, and the game ball is rolled on the upper surface 19943c2 to the back side of the back base 19941 (FIG. The ball can be thrown to 143 (c) on the right side).

Further, the front base 19943 is a ring that is annularly projected on the outside of the pair of standing walls 19943c1 in the opposite direction (outside in the left-right direction in FIG. 143 (b)) at a position facing the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941. It is provided with a protrusion 943b. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the first shaft hole 19941d of the back base 19941, and the other end of the shaft member 945a is inserted into the second shaft hole 943b1 of the annular projection 943b of the front base 19943. .. Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the back base 19941 and the front base 19943 facing each other.

Next, the distribution unit 19980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

First, the configuration of the distribution unit 19980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 150.

FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 147 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 19980. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective front view of the sorting unit 19980, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective rear view of the sorting unit 19980. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 19980, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 19980.

As shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, the distribution unit 19980 has a distribution member 19983, a first side surface base 19981, and a first side surface base 19981 described later in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. 1 A second side surface base 19985 arranged on the side opposite to the cover member 19987, and a distribution member 19983 rotatably arranged between the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985. The first cover member 1998 arranged on the side opposite to the second side surface base 1998 of the first side surface base 19981, and the second cover arranged on the side opposite to the first side surface base 19981 of the second side surface base 19985. The member 19988, the detection device SE5, and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) magnetic bodies 988b are mainly provided.

The arrangement member on which the distribution member 19983 is arranged includes the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 (first member) itself, but the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base Not limited to 19985 (first member), directly or indirectly connected to the second member on which the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 (first member) are arranged, and the second member. A third member is also included. For example, as the second member, the winning opening unit 19930 is exemplified, and as the third member, the winning opening unit 19930 is directly or indirectly connected to the gaming board 13 in addition to the gaming board 13 in which the winning opening unit 19930 is arranged. Various members (for example, outer frame 11, inner frame 12, glass unit 16, etc.) are exemplified.

The distribution member 19983 includes an intermediate plate 19983b formed between the pair of acting portions 19983a and the pair of acting portions 19983a, a through hole 983c, an abutting portion 19983d, a wall portion 19983e, a magnetic body 988c, and the like. Is mainly formed.

In the distribution member 19983 of the present embodiment, the pair of acting portions 19983a and the intermediate plate 19983b are arranged at substantially right angles, pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and pass in the left-right direction (FIG. 147 (a). ) It is formed in a shape symmetric with respect to the plane of symmetry extending in the left-right direction).

Here, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 (a) is a side view of the first side surface base 19981 in the direction of arrow CLIa of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 (b) is a side view of the first side surface base 19981 in the direction of arrow CLIb of FIG. 149. FIG. 151 (c) is a side view of the second side surface base 19985 in the arrow CLIc direction view of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 (d) is a side view of the second side surface base 19985 in the arrow CLId direction view of FIG. 149. It is a figure.

The first side surface base 19981 is a game with a top plate 19981a formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a top view, and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) from the top plate 19981a. The lower surface plate 19981b, which is arranged so as to face each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere and is formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b (left side in FIG. 151 (a)). The front plate 19981c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, which is connected to the end portion of the above plate, and the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b on the opposite side to the player (right side in FIG. 151 (a)). The back plate 19981d formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the rear view, which is connected to the end portion of the distribution member 19983, and the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981a at substantially the center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 A central plate 19981e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular side view arranged by connecting the face plate 19981b, and a bulge arranged on the player side (left side of FIG. 151 (a)) of the front plate 19981c. It is formed mainly including a portion 19982.

The player side means the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the side opposite to the player means the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The same applies to the following.

The upper surface plate 19981a is formed by including circular fastening holes 19981f and 19981g on the upper surface side (upper side in FIG. 151 (a)) and a protruding portion 19981h formed so as to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19981a toward the upper surface side. Will be done. The fastening hole 19981f is a hole for screwing a screw through which a second side surface base 19985, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 19981g is a hole for screwing a screw through which the first cover member 19987, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the first side surface base 19981 and the first cover member 19987 can be fastened and fixed.

The protrusion 19981h is formed at substantially the center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d so as to be inclined toward the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). , A recess 19981h1 for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 is formed. A notch for arranging a wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE5 so as to be passable is formed on the upper surface of the protruding portion 19981h.

The lower surface plate 19981b is formed to include a recess 19981i that is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side of the lower surface plate 19981b. The recess 19981i is formed at substantially the center between the front plate 19981c and the back plate 19981d so as to be inclined toward the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , A part of the detection device SE5 is formed in a shape that can be arranged. Further, an opening U1 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (left side of FIG. 151 (b)) on the first cover member 19987 side (front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (b)) with respect to the central plate 19981e described later. The opening U1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and is formed at a position connected to the passage TR7 of the passage unit 19990, which will be described later.

The front plate 19981c is formed on the first cover member 19987 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (b)) with respect to the central plate 19981e.

The central plate 19981e is formed by connecting the rear end portion to the front surface of the back plate 19981d, and a part of the detection device SE5 is arranged from the protruding portion 19981h of the upper surface plate 19981a to the recess 19981i of the lower surface plate 19981b. A recess 19981j for this purpose is formed. Further, an opening U2 is formed on the front plate 19981c side (left side in FIG. 151 (a)) with respect to the recess 19981j. The opening U2 is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, between the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b, the central plate 19981e and the back plate 19981d are connected and the overhanging portion 19981e1 projecting to the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) front side of the paper surface). Is formed. The overhanging portion 19981e1 is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape toward the top view, the center plate 19981e and the back plate 19981d (see FIG. 153).

The bulging portion 19982 is connected to a side plate 19982a formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in the side view and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the side plate 19982a, and is a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in the top view. The lower surface plate 19982b formed from, the game ball guide wall 19982c connected to the back plate 19981d side of the side plate 19982a (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and the second side surface base 19985 side from the side surface of the side plate 19982a (FIG. A front view of the projecting portion 19982d projecting toward 151 (a) the front side of the paper surface) and the first cover member 19987 side (FIG. 151 (b) the front side of the paper surface) protruding from the side surface of the side plate 19982a. It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19982e and an accommodating portion 986b formed from a vertically long substantially rectangular plate-like body.

The side plate 19982a has a fastening hole 19981f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and another side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a fastening hole 19981g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and a first cover. It is mainly provided with a recess 19982f formed by being recessed toward the member 1998 side.

The recess 19982f is a portion for disposing the wall portion 19983e of the distribution member 19983 inside the recess 19982f, and projects in an annular shape toward the second side surface base 19985 side (FIG. 151 (a) front side of the paper surface). A bearing portion 982c is provided.

The lower surface plate 19982b includes a front side contact portion 19982b1 and a back side contact portion 19982b2 for restricting the rotation of the distribution member 19983. The front side contact portion 19982b1 is formed so as to be inclined toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the back plate 19981d (right side in FIG. 151 (a)), and the back side contact portion 19982b2 is formed on the back plate 19981d. It is formed so as to tilt toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

The game ball guide wall 19982c has a first curved wall 19982c1 arranged on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a first curved wall 19982c1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the first curved wall 19982c1. The first curved wall 19982c1 is formed from the second curved wall 19982c2 which is arranged in connection with the player, and the first curved wall 19982c1 is formed so as to be curved toward the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 151 (a)). The curved wall 19982c2 is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

The lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the bearing portion 982c.

The overhanging portion 19982e is formed to include a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)). The guide wall 19982e1 is formed in an annular shape, and the inner edge shape thereof is formed substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941i of the back base 19941 described above (see FIG. 143 (b)).

The second side surface base 19985 is a game of a top plate 19985a formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a top view, and a game from the top plate 19985a to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The lower surface plate 19985b formed from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body viewed from the upper surface, which is arranged facing each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the player side of the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b (left side of FIG. 151 (d)). ), The front plate 19985c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b opposite to the player (left side in FIG. 151 (c)). ), And the back plate 19985d formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the rear view, and the end of the first side surface base 19981 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (c)). The side plate 19985e formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular side view and the upper surface plate 19985a and the lower surface plate 19985b are arranged on the player side (right side of FIG. 151 (c)) of the front plate 19985c. It is mainly provided with a bulging portion 19986 to be provided.

The upper surface plate 19985a has a circular through hole 19985f and a fastening hole 19985g on the upper surface side (upper side in FIG. 151 (a)) and a protruding portion 19985h formed so as to project from the lower surface of the upper surface plate 19985a toward the upper surface side. Formed in preparation. As described above, the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19985f is inserted into the first side surface base 19981. Further, the fastening hole 19985g is a hole for screwing a screw through which the second cover member 19988, which will be described later, is inserted. Thereby, the second side surface base 19985 and the second cover member 19988 can be fastened and fixed.

The protrusion 19985h is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 19981h of the first side surface base 19981, and is inclined toward the back plate 19985d side (left side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). It is formed. Further, the protruding portion 19985h is provided with a recess 19985h1 for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 described later.

The lower surface plate 19985b is formed to include a recess 19985i that is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side of the lower surface plate 19985b.

The recess 19985i is formed at a position corresponding to the recess 19981i of the first side surface base 19981, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Will be done. Further, the recess 19985i is formed in a shape in which a part of the detection device SE5 described later can be arranged. Further, an opening U3 is formed on the back plate 19981d side (right side in FIG. 151 (d)). The opening U3 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and is formed at a position connected to the passage TR8 of the passage unit 19990, which will be described later.

The front plate 19985c is formed with a circular fastening hole 19985g on the front side (left side in FIG. 151 (d)).

The side plate 19985e is formed with a recess 19985k for disposing a part of the detection device SE5 at a position corresponding to the recess 19981j formed in the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981.

Further, an opening U4 is formed on the front plate 19985c side (right side in FIG. 151 (c)) of the recess 19985k, and an opening U5 is formed on the back plate 19985d side (left side in FIG. 151 (c)) of the recess 19985k. The opening U4 and the opening U5 are each formed larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The bulging portion 19986 is a side plate 19986a formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and a front surface protruding from the side surface of the side plate 19986a toward the second cover member 19988 side (right side in FIG. 147 (a)). It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19986e formed from a vertically long substantially rectangular plate-like body.

The side plate 19986a has a through hole 19985f on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and another side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and a fastening hole 19985g on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). It is mainly provided with a bearing portion 985j projecting in an annular shape toward the base 19981 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 151 (c)).

The overhanging portion 19986e is formed to include a guide wall 19982e1 and a fastening hole 19982e2 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

It will be described back from FIG. 147 to FIG. 150. The first cover member 19987 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and has circular through holes 19987a around both ends in the longitudinal direction and the first side surface base 19981 side (1st side surface base 19981 side ( It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 1998b having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is arranged in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19981c of the first side surface base 19981 toward the right side of FIG. 147 (a). As described above, the first side surface base 19981 and the first cover member 19987 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19987a is inserted into the first side surface base 19981.

The overhanging portion 19987b on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 147 (b)) of the first side surface base 19981 is curved in an arc shape toward the side opposite to the first side surface base 19981 (left side of FIG. 147 (a)). It is formed.

The second cover member 19988 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view, and has circular through holes 19988a around both ends in the longitudinal direction and a second side surface base 19985 side ( It is mainly provided with an overhanging portion 19988b having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, which is arranged in contact with the back surface of the front plate 19985c of the second side surface base 19985 toward the left side of FIG. 147 (a). As described above, the second side surface base 19985 and the second cover member 19988 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the through hole 19988a is inserted into the second side surface base 19985.

The overhanging portion 19988b on the back plate 19985d side (right side of FIG. 147 (b)) of the second side surface base 19985 is curved in an arc shape toward the side opposite to the second side surface base 19985 (right side of FIG. 147 (a)). It is formed.

Next, the configuration inside the distribution unit 19980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153.

152 (a) and 152 (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 19980 on the CLIIa-CLIIa line of FIG. 147 (a), and FIG. 153 is the sorting unit on the CLIII-CLIII line of FIG. 152 (a). It is sectional drawing of 19980. In FIG. 152 (a), the lower surface of the acting portion 19983a of the distribution member 19983 and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981, which will be described later, come into contact with each other. The state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the position (hereinafter referred to as "first position") is shown, and in FIG. 152 (b), the lower surface of the acting portion 19983a of the distribution member 19983 and the first side surface base 19981 described later. The state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the position where the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 19982 abuts (hereinafter referred to as "second position") is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, in a state where the distribution unit 19980 is assembled, the upper surface plate 19981a and the lower surface plate 19981b of the first side surface base 19981, the side plate 19982a of the bulging portion 19982, and the swelling of the second side surface base 19985. An opening U6 is formed from the side plate 19986a of the protruding portion 19986, and the side of the side plate 19982a, the lower surface plate 19982b, the protruding portion 19982d, and the bulging portion 19986 of the second side surface base 19982 of the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981. An opening U7 is formed from the face plate 19986a, and on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the opening U7 in the gravity direction, the side plate 19982a, the protrusion 19982d, the game ball guide wall 19982c and the first side plate 19982 of the bulging portion 19981 of the first side surface base 19981. 2 The opening U8 is formed from the side plate 19986a of the bulging portion 19986 of the side surface base 19985. As described above, the opening U7 is arranged at a position connected to the intermediate port 19941h of the back base 19941, and the opening U8 is arranged at a position connected with the first winning opening 64 of the back base 19941.

Further, on the back plate 19981d side of the first side surface base 19981 (right side in FIG. 152 (a)) of the opening U6, the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 19981b, the central plate 19981e, and the second side surface base 19985 of the first side surface base 19981. Passage TR4 surrounded by side plate 19985e, upper surface plate 19981a of first side surface base 19981, lower surface plate 19981b, central plate 19981e and passage T5 surrounded by first cover member 19987, upper surface plate 19985a of second side surface base 19985, lower surface plate. A passage T6 surrounded by the 19985b, the side plate 19985e, and the second cover member 19988 is formed, respectively. The passage TR4, the passage TR5, and the passage TR6 are formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Further, in the passage TR4, the passage TR5 and the passage TR6, the back plate 19981d side (opposite side to the player) of the first side surface base 19981 is inclined downward to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the player side. It is formed by extending from (the left side of FIG. 152 (a)) to the side opposite to the player.

Further, it is formed in the concave portion 19981h1 formed in the protruding portion 19981h of the first side surface base 19981, the concave portion 19981i formed in the lower surface plate 19981b, the concave portion 19981j formed in the central plate 19981e, and the protruding portion 19985h of the second side surface base 19985. The detection device SE5 is arranged in a region surrounded by the recesses 19985h1, the recesses 19985i formed in the lower surface plate 19985b, and the recesses 19985k formed in the side plates 19985e, with the detection holes SE1a arranged in the passage TR4. As described above, the arrangement region of the detection device SE5 is formed so that the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 152 (a)) is inclined downward to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). The axis of the detection hole SE1a of the device SE5 is inclined so that the player side (left side in FIG. 152 (a)) rises to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and the extension direction of the passage TR4 and the detection device SE5 are detected. The holes SE1a are arranged in the same direction as the axial direction.

The distribution member 19983 is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 152 (a)).

Further, in the distribution member 19983, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j with the shaft member 988a inserted into the through hole 983c, and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 982c. As a result, the side plate 19982a (first side surface base 19981) of the bulging portion 19982 and the side plate 19986a (second side surface base 19985) of the bulging portion 19986 are rotatably supported by the shaft. Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can distribute the thrown game ball in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 152 (a)).

As described above, the wall portion 19983e of the distribution member 19983 is arranged inside the recess 19982f of the side plate 19982a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from coming into contact with the side surface of the wall portion 19983e, and it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being hindered.

In the accommodating portion 986b, the magnetic body 988b repels the magnetic body 988c of the distribution member 19983, and the magnetic body 988c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the recess 19982f with respect to the bearing portion 982c. It is placed on the movement trajectory.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the distance from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c. The distance dimension L44 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the distance dimension L45 from the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U6, and the game ball is rotated by the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U7.

Further, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (first side surface base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 152 (a)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U6 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. The force to do works. Therefore, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the first position acts on the distribution member 19983. As a result, even when an external force that rotates toward the second position is applied to the distribution member 19983, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 19983 from rotating toward the second position.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the distance dimension L46 from the tip of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 to the lower surface of the projecting portion 19982d is a game. It is formed smaller than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the distance dimension L47 from the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 19983 to the second curved wall 19982c2 of the game ball guide wall 19982c is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 from passing through the opening U7, and the game ball is rotated by the distribution member 19983. It can pass through the opening U6.

Further, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 19983 is more than the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (first side surface base 19981). Is also arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 152 (b)). As described above, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 rotates from the magnetic body 988b side to the opening U7 side with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis. The force to do works. Therefore, a force for maintaining the state of being arranged at the second position acts on the distribution member 19983. As a result, even when an external force that rotates the distribution member 19983 toward the first position is applied, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 19983 from rotating toward the first position.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 19990 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157.

154 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 1990, FIG. 154 (b) is a top view of the passage unit 1990, and FIG. 154 (c) is a side view of the passage unit 1990, FIG. 154. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the passage unit 19990 in the CLIVd-CLIVd line of FIG. 154 (a). FIG. 155 (a) is a perspective front view of the passage unit 1990, and FIG. 155 (b) is a perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 19990, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 19990.

As shown in FIGS. 154 to 157, the passage unit 19990 is a solenoid holding member arranged on the side opposite to the player of the first passage member 19991 and the player of the first passage member 19991 (right side in FIG. 154 (d)). 1999, a second passage member 19993 arranged on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the solenoid holding member 19992, a solenoid 610 arranged inside the solenoid holding member 19992, and a ring portion of the solenoid 610. The transmission member 1996 connected to the 961c, the displacement member 19966 connected to the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965 described later, and the detection device SE6 are mainly provided. The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 described above.

The first passage member 19991 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is connected to both ends of a bottom plate 19991a formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in the top view and a substantially rectangular bottom plate 19991a in the longitudinal direction to form a substantially rectangular side view. A pair of side plates 19991b formed from a plate-like body and a spine formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view by connecting the bottom plate 19991a to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 154 (d)). The face plate 19991c, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d arranged on the other side of the bottom plate 19991a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) by a certain distance, and the back plate 19991c connected to the side opposite to the player on the side surface. It is mainly provided with a pair of guide plates 19991e formed from a substantially rectangular plate-like body.

A first fastening portion 19991b1 and a second fastening portion 19991b4 are formed on the outer surfaces of the pair of side plates 19991b. Further, on the back surface of the pair of side plates 19991b, protruding portions 19991b7 are formed so as to project to the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)).

The first fastening portion 19991b1 is formed to include a first guide wall 19991b2 and a circular first through hole 19991b3. The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 19991b2 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the back base 19941 described above. As described above, the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw through which the first through hole 19991b3 is inserted into the fastening hole 19941j.

The second fastening portion 19991b4 is formed to include a second guide wall 19991b5 and a circular second through hole 19991b6. The inner edge shape of the second guide wall 19991b5 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992 described later. The second through hole 19991b6 is a hole for inserting a screw to be screwed into the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992 described later. As a result, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

The detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is recessed from the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) toward the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)). A unit 19991d1 is provided. A detection device SE6, which will be described later, is arranged in the recessed portion 19991d1.

The player side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 154 (a)) of the detection device accommodating unit 19991d is formed with an opening so that the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be inserted. Further, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed so as to be inclined toward one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) toward the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)), and the upper surface 19991d2. A game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed so as to project from the edge portion in a substantially U shape in which the player side is open from the top view. The size of the inner edge of the game ball guide portion 19991d3 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

Further, openings formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game ball are formed on the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d on the solenoid holding member 19992 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) of the back plate 19991c. To. As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 can be sent to the pair of guide plates 19991e described later.

The pair of guide plates 19991e are formed so that the distance between the facing surfaces is larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the opening formed on the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is placed on one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). The game ball can be discharged from the passage unit 19990 (winning opening unit 19300) by flowing down to the lower side).

The solenoid holding member 19992 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a housing portion 19992a having a substantially rectangular top view and a regulating portion 19992b formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view on the player side of the housing portion 19992a. , A pair of side plates 19992c formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a lateral view are mainly provided.

The accommodating portion 19992a is a portion for arranging the solenoid 610 described later inside the accommodating portion 19992a, and the accommodating portion 19992a and the solenoid 610 are fastened and fixed by screws. Further, the player side (left side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the accommodating portion 19992a is formed with an opening, whereby the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be arranged on the player side of the accommodating portion 19992a.

The regulation unit 19992b is a portion for restricting the displacement of the transmission member 19965, which will be described later, and when the regulation unit 19992b and the transmission member 19965 come into contact with each other, the transmission member 19965 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. 154 (d)). Displacement to the right side) is regulated.

The side plate 19992c has a fastening hole 19992c1 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), a fastening portion 19992c2 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), and a notch on the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (c)). It is formed with a portion 19992c5.

The fastening hole 19992c1 is a hole for screwing the screw into which the first passage member 19991 is inserted, as described above. As a result, the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 can be fastened and fixed.

The fastening portion 19992c2 is formed to include a guide wall 19992c3 and a circular through hole 19992c4. The inner edge shape of the guide wall 19992c3 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993, which will be described later. The through hole 19992c4 is a hole through which a screw screwed into the second passage member 19993, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

The second passage member 19993 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above. The second passage member 19993 is formed by providing passages TR7 and TR8 at both ends in the longitudinal direction and providing fastening holes 19993a on the player side (lower side of FIG. 154 (b)) of the passages TR7 and TR8.

The passage TR7 and the passage TR8 are formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. Further, the passage TR7 and the passage TR8 extend in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 154 (d)) and are formed at positions connected to the openings U1 and U3 formed in the distribution unit 19980 described above.

The fastening hole 19993a is a hole for screwing a screw through which the above-mentioned solenoid holding member 19992 is inserted. As a result, the solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be fastened and fixed.

The transmission member 19965 has a substantially rectangular plate shape in the back view formed between a pair of first engaging portions 19965a formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in the lateral view and a pair of first engaging portions 19965a. It is mainly provided with a second engaging portion 19965b formed from the body and a pair of connecting portions 19965c connecting the pair of first engaging portions 19965a and the second engaging portion 1996b.

The distance between the inner facing surfaces of the pair of first engaging portions 19965a is formed to be larger than the distance between the outer sides of the pair of main body portions 19966g of the displacement member 19966 described later. Further, the pair of first engaging portions 19965a is provided with a substantially rectangular through hole 19965a1 in a horizontally long side view on the player side (lower side in FIG. 154 (b)). The inside of the through hole 19965a1 is formed so that the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 described later can be arranged, and the through hole 19965a1 is cut out on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) on the player side. The notch 19965a2 is formed.

The second engaging portion 19965b is a portion for connecting the transmission member 19965 and the solenoid 610, and has a size larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 from the end face on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). A second recessed portion larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b is recessed on the solenoid 610 side (right side of FIG. 154 (d)) of the first recessed portion 19965b1 to be recessed and the first recessed portion 19965b1. It is provided with a part 19965b2.

The first recessed portion 19965b1 is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is opened in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 19965b1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first recessed portion 19965b1.

The second recessed portion 19965b2 suppresses the interference between the shaft portion 961b and the second engaging portion 19965b when the annular portion 961c is arranged inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 as described above. It is a notch and is formed in a substantially U shape in which the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is open in the rear view, and the solenoid 610 side (right side in FIG. 154 (d)) is opened.

The connecting portion 19965c is a portion that connects the first engaging portion 19965a and the second engaging portion 19965b, whereby the displacement of the second engaging portion 19965b can be transmitted to the first engaging portion 19965a. ..

The displacement member 19966 is a protruding portion formed by projecting a pair of main body portions 19966 g formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in a side view and a pair of main body portions 19966 g toward the player side (lower side in FIG. 154 (b)). It is mainly provided with a 19966a, a rotating shaft 19966d, a transmission portion 19966e, and a connecting portion 19966f connecting a pair of main body portions 19966g.

The distance between the pair of main body portions 19966g and the inner facing surfaces of the protruding portions 19966a is formed to be larger than the lateral direction (left-right direction in FIG. 154 (b)) of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d of the first passage member 19991 described above. Will be done.

The protrusion 19966a is formed with a recessed portion 19966a1 recessed on the solenoid 610 side (upper side of FIG. 154 (b)), and the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 is disposed on the recessed portion 19966a1 (FIG. 159 (b)). See) Formed as possible.

The rotating shaft 19966d is formed in an annular shape that projects outward from the side surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g in the opposite direction. The base portion 19966d1 is formed on the rotating shaft 19966d at the connecting portion with the main body portion 19966g with a size larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 19966d.

The transmission unit 19966e is a portion for transmitting the displacement of the transmission member 19965 to the displacement member 19966, and is a pair of main body portions 19966g on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the rotation axis 19966d in a substantially rectangular shape in a lateral view. It is molded so as to project outward from the side surface in the opposite direction.

The connecting portion 19966f is a portion for connecting the pair of main body portions 19966g, and the side surface portion 19966f1 formed on the lower surface of the pair of main body portions 19966g from a vertically long rectangular plate-like body and the pair of side surface portions 19966f1. A lower surface portion 19966f2 formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above is provided, which is connected to an end portion on one side in the direction of gravity.

By connecting the pair of main body portions 19966g by the connecting portion 19966f, it is possible to prevent one main body portion 19966g from being displaced relative to the other main body portion 19966g.

In the situation of assembling the passage unit 1990, as described above, the inner edge shape of the second guide wall 19991b5 of the first passage member 19991 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19992c1 of the solenoid holding member 19992, and the solenoid is formed. Since the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19992c3 of the holding member 19992 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19993a of the second passage member 19993, the positioning of the first passage member 19991 and the solenoid holding member 19992 and the positioning of the solenoid holding member 19992 are performed. , The solenoid holding member 19992 and the second passage member 19993 can be easily positioned. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the passage unit 19990 can be suppressed.

In the assembled state of the passage unit 19990, the detection device SE6 is arranged inside the recessed portion 19991d1 of the first passage member 19991, and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6 is the upper surface 19991d2 and the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d. It is arranged at a position connected to the opening formed in. As a result, the game ball flowing down the upper surface 19991d2 of the first passage member 19991 can insert the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6.

Further, a passage TR9 surrounded by a back plate 19991c of the first passage member 19991, a pair of guide plates 19991e, and a regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 is formed. The passage TR9 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball.

As described above, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed so as to project outward from the side surface of the main body portion 19966g in the opposite direction, and the through hole 19965a1 formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Since it is arranged inside the passage TR9, the game ball thrown into the passage TR9 can flow down in the passage TR9.

Further, the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 19965b1 of the transmission member 19965, and is a coil spring disposed between the solenoid 610 and the second engaging portion 19965b of the transmission member 19965. Due to the urging force (not shown), the transmission member 19965 is given an urging force that displaces to the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)). Here, the displacement of the transmission member 19965 to the player side (left side in FIG. 154 (d)) is restricted by the contact between the second engaging portion 19965b of the transmission member 19965 and the regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992. ..

Further, the rotating shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 is rotatably arranged in a region surrounded by the side plate 19991b and the protruding portion 19991b7 of the first passage member 19991 and the notch portion 19992c5 of the side plate 19992c of the solenoid holding member 19992. At the same time, the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is arranged in the through hole 19965a1 of the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965.

Further, the solenoid holding member 19992 is arranged on the side opposite to the player (on the right side in FIG. 154 (d)) with respect to the first passage member 19991. Therefore, the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player with respect to the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991.

When electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 610a of the solenoid 610, the transmission member 19965 connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. It is displaced to the right side of 154 (d)), and as described above, the displacement of the transmission member 19965 is regulated by the contact between the regulation portion 19992b of the solenoid holding member 19992 and the transmission member 199965. When the transmission member 19965 is displaced to the side opposite to the player, the inner surface of the through hole 19965a1 of the transmission member 19965 comes into contact with the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966, and a rotational force is applied to the displacement member 19966.

It will be described back from FIG. 139 to FIG. 142. In the situation of assembling the winning opening unit 19930, as described above, the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19982e1 of the distribution unit 19980 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941i of the front unit 19940, and the aisle unit 19990 first. 1 Since the inner edge shape of the guide wall 19991b2 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 19941j of the front unit 19940, the front unit 19940 and the distribution unit 19980 are positioned, and the front unit 19940 and the passage unit 19990. Positioning with and can be easily performed. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the winning opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

In the state where the winning opening unit 19930 is assembled, the lower plate 19982b of the bulging portion 19982 formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, and the detection device accommodating portion formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. An opening U9 is formed from the upper surface 19991d2 of 19991d and the protruding portion 19966a formed on the displacement member 19966, and as described above, the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other. , The intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980 are arranged at a position where they are connected to each other, and the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 19940 and the opening U9 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other.

Further, the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c of the front unit 19940 is formed on the other side (upper side in the gravitational direction) of the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 19990. Will be done.

Further, it is surrounded by the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base 19981 of the distribution unit 19800, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed on the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 1990, and the pair of game ball guide portions 19991d3. The passage TR10 is formed. The passage TR10 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and as described above, the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d faces the side opposite to the player (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)). As it is formed, it is inclined to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the detection device accommodating portion 19991d is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from above, so that the passage TR10 can be moved from the player side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 139 (b)) to the side opposite to the player (FIG. 139 (b)). ) It is formed by extending to the front side of the paper. As a result, the game ball sent to the passage TR10 is flowed down to the side opposite to the player.

As described above, since the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) from the passage TR10 (detection device accommodating portion 19991d), the pair of first transmission members 19965. The passage TR10 formed inside the facing surfaces of the pair of main body portions 19966g of the engaging portion 19965a and the displacement member 19966 can be shortened.

Further, the openings U1 and U3 of the distribution unit 19980 and the passages TR7 and TR8 of the passage unit 19990 are formed at a position where they are connected to each other. As a result, a part of the passage TR5 (a part of the side opposite to the player (a part of the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (b)) and gravity arranged on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) with the opening U1 in between) and gravity. The passage TR7 arranged on one side in the direction (lower side in the direction of gravity) forms the passage TR11 extending in the direction of gravity. Further, a part of the passage TR6 (a part on the side opposite to the player) arranged on the other side in the gravity direction across the opening U3 and the passage TR8 arranged on one side in the gravity direction extend in the gravity direction. The passage TR12 to be provided is formed. Therefore, the passage TR11 is formed on the first cover member 19987 side (right side of FIG. 139 (b)) of the distribution unit 19980 from the passage TR4, and the passage TR12 is formed on the second cover member 19988 side of the distribution unit 19980 from the passage TR4 (FIG. 139 (b) right side). It is formed on the left side of 139 (b)).

As a result, the game ball thrown into the first winning opening 64 of the front unit 19940 is thrown into the inside of the sorting unit 19980 by passing through the opening U8 of the sorting unit 19980. Further, inside the distribution unit 19980, the game ball thrown to the player side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 139 (a)) due to the rotation of the distribution member 19983 passes through the opening U7, so that the front unit 19940 The ball is thrown to the intermediate port 19941h. Further, the game ball thrown into the second winning opening 140 of the front unit 19940 is thrown into the passage unit 19990 by passing through the opening U9.

Further, the game ball thrown into the openings U1 and U3 of the distribution unit 19980 is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 and the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

Here, the rotation operation of the wing member 945 due to the rotation operation of the displacement member 19966 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

FIG. 158 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLVIII-CLVIII line of FIG. 139 (a), FIG. 158 (a) shows the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 158 (b) shows the wing member 945. Indicates the open state of. FIG. 159 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the closed state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 159 (b) is a winning opening in the closed state of the wing member 945. It is a side view of the unit 19300. FIG. 160 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the range CLIXa of FIG. 139 (a) in the open state of the wing member 945, and FIG. 160 (b) is a partial enlarged view of the winning opening unit 19300 in the open state of the wing member 945. It is a side view of the unit 19300. In addition, in FIG. 159 (a) and FIG. 160 (a), the front base 19943 of the front unit 19940 is omitted, and in FIGS. 159 (b) and 160 (b), the wing member 945, the solenoid 610, the transmission member 19965 and Only the displacement member 19966 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, when the winning opening unit 19300 is assembled, the protrusion 945b of the wing member 945 arranged on the front unit 19940 is a protrusion of the displacement member 19966 arranged on the passage unit 19990. It is arranged inside the recessed portion 19966a1 formed in the portion 19966a.

The closed state of the wing member 945 is a state in which the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is separated from the main body portion 961a. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 connected to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the player side (left side in FIG. 159 (b)), and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. Inside the through hole 19965a1, it is arranged on the side opposite to the player (on the right side in FIG. 159 (b)).

Next, the open state of the wing member 945 will be described. Electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body 610a of the solenoid 610, and the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 and the main body 961a are in close proximity to each other. Therefore, the transmission member 19965 connected to the solenoid 610 is displaced to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 160B), and the transmission portion 19966e of the displacement member 19966 is the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. It is arranged on the player side (left side in FIG. 160 (b)) inside the through hole 19965a1 formed in.

Here, the notch portion 19965a2 cut out on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is formed on the player side of the through hole 19965a1 formed in the first engaging portion 19965a of the transmission member 19965. The transmission unit 19966e of the displacement member 19966 can rotate about the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as a rotation axis. As a result, the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is displaced in the axial direction of the shaft portion 961b, and the displacement member 19966 can rotate. That is, the displacement member 19966 can rotate due to the simple configuration of the solenoid 610 and the transmission member 19965, and the manufacturing cost of the winning opening unit 19930 can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 19966 rotates about the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as a rotation axis, the displacement (rotation) region of the displacement member 19966 in the passage unit 19990 can be reduced. As a result, the winning opening unit 19930 can be miniaturized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of the game ball thrown into the winning opening unit 19930 will be described.

FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position. FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. 162 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXIIa-CLXIIa line of FIG. 161 and FIG. 162 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 19930 in the CLXIIb-CLXIIb line of FIG. 162 (a). Is.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is thrown to the distribution member 19983, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U7 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown to and from the acting portion 19983a on the side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)). As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 19983a with the contact portion 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 19983b with the contact portion 19983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When the position exceeds (a) vertical direction), the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the opening U7. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is tilted toward the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980 (left side in FIG. 161 (b)), and the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is said that. The rotation of the distribution member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the first side surface base. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction acting on the magnetic body 988c arranged on the distribution member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b arranged on the first side surface base 19981 is intermediate from the through hole 983c to the outer side in the radial direction. The plate 19983b is switched from a state in which it acts on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 161 (b)) to a state in which it acts on the opening U7 side.

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can be rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 161 (b)) of the distribution member 19983 and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the first side surface base are separated from each other. The state of contact can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 19980, and is thrown to the distribution member 198993, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 of the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown to and from the acting portion 19983a on the side (right side in FIG. 161 (b)). As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 19983a with the contact portion 19983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 19983b with the contact portion 19983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis, and the intermediate plate 19983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in the vertical direction (FIG. 161). When the position exceeds (a) vertical direction), the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the opening U6. Further, the distribution member 19983 continues to be rotationally displaced, the intermediate plate 19983b is tilted toward the opening U6 side of the distribution unit 19980 (right side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position. It is said that. The rotation of the distribution member 19983 is restricted by the contact between the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface base 19981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction acting on the magnetic body 988c arranged on the distribution member 19983 by the magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b arranged on the first side surface base 19981 is intermediate from the through hole 983c to the outer side in the radial direction. The plate 19983b is switched from a state in which it acts on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) to a state in which it acts on the opening U6 side.

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can be rotationally displaced with the axis of the through hole 983c as the rotation axis by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force acting on the magnetic body 988c is switched, the action portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution member 19983 and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the first side surface base 19981 Can be maintained in contact with each other. Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 19983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the opening U7 and the opening U6 one by one.

In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b and In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b is the same. Formed at an angle. Therefore, the first position and the second position of the distribution member 19983 are arranged at positions symmetrical in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 161 (a)) in the side view.

The game ball passing through the opening U7 passes through the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940 and is sent to the passage TR3. When the game ball thrown into the passage TR3 comes into contact with the intermediate receiving portion 19943e, the throwing direction of the game ball is changed from the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (b)) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). , Flow down the passage TR3. The game ball flowing down the passage TR3 abuts on the upper surface 19943c2 of the second receiving portion 19943c, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161). b) It is changed to (right side) and the ball is thrown to the second winning opening 140.

The game ball passing through the second winning opening 140 passes through the opening U9 formed from the distribution unit 19980 and the passage unit 19990, and is sent to the passage TR10. The game ball flowing down the passage TR10 on the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (b)) hits the game ball guide portion 19991d3 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d formed in the first passage member 19991 of the passage unit 1990. By contacting, the throwing direction of the game ball is changed from the side opposite to the player to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and an opening formed on the upper surface 19991d2 of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d, a detection hole of the detection device SE6. The ball is thrown into the opening formed on the lower surface of the SE1a and the detection device accommodating portion 19991d.

The game ball thrown into the opening formed on the lower surface of the detection device accommodating portion 19991d passes through the passage TR9 and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930. Here, when the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, the number of balls of the game ball that has passed through the second winning opening 140 can be measured by the detection device SE6.

The passages TR3, TR7 and the passage TR9 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as a "fifth passage".

Here, a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) and a large number of nails (not shown) or various members (roles) such as a windmill arranged on the front side of the game board 13. The game ball distributed by the contact of the distribution member 19983 or by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 has a velocity component in the axial direction (vertical direction with respect to the paper surface of FIG. 161 (b)) of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. It may flow down in preparation. If the flowing game ball does not have or has a slight velocity component in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983, the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 does not come into contact with the wing member 945. On the other hand, the velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is large, and the game ball flowing down the passage TR3 comes into contact with the wing member 945, is displaced to the outside of the passage of the passage TR3, and is second. Since it does not pass through the winning opening 140, the number of game balls is not measured by the detection device SE6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the flow of the game ball that has passed through the opening U6 will be described. The game ball that flows down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) and is distributed by the distribution operation of the distribution member 19983 is in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)). When the velocity component of the above is not provided or slightly provided, the flowing game ball does not come into contact with the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR4.

The velocity component of the game ball in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is larger than the velocity component at which the game ball does not abut on the opening U2 or the opening end of the opening U4. When the game ball flows down with the velocity component, the game ball comes into contact with the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4. When the flowing game ball bounces back toward the passage TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4 due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the game ball flows down the passage TR4. On the other hand, due to the contact between the game ball and the opening end of the opening U2 or the opening U4, the flowing game ball moves to the side opposite to the passage TR4 with respect to the opening U2 or the opening U4, in other words, to the passage TR5 side or the passage TR6 side. When it bounces off, the flowing game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and is sent to the passage TR5 or the passage TR6.

When the game ball does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR4, the flowing game ball comes into contact with the overhanging portion 19981e1 formed on the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 19981, thereby causing the game ball to flow down. The throwing direction of the ball is changed from the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) to the side of the second cover member 19988 (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)), and the ball is thrown to the opening U5. The game ball that has passed through the opening U5 is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930. Here, the flowing game ball is a game ball that has passed through the opening U6 by inserting the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 arranged in the passage TR4, and does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U3. The number of game balls flowing down the passage TR4 can be measured by the detection device SE5.

The passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 described above pass are collectively referred to as a "fourth passage" below.

As shown in FIG. 161, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are abbreviated in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161 (a)). It is formed in the same position. In other words, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are formed at overlapping positions when viewed from above.

Therefore, the winning opening unit 19300 can be miniaturized in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161A), and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can recognize the detection device SE5 arranged in the distribution unit 19980. Further, in the detection device SE5, since the detection hole SE1a is arranged along the extending direction of the passage TR4, the player can visually recognize that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5, which is a hobby of the game. Can be enhanced. Further, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is inclined so as to the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). Since it is arranged, the detection device SE5 arranged in the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the winning opening unit 19930 (see FIG. 138) is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the base plate 19060. The player can easily visually recognize that the game ball passes through the detection hole SE1a.

Further, since the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 is arranged in the passage TR4 forming the upstream side of the fourth passage, it can be brought close to the distribution member 19983. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball distributed to the distribution member 19983 passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The game ball that passes through the opening U2 and is thrown into the passage TR5 comes into contact with the curved portion formed in the overhanging portion 19987b of the first cover member 1998, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is on the first cover member 1998 side. (The upper side of FIG. 162 (a)) is changed to the side opposite to the player (right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and the passage TR5 flows down. The game ball flowing down the passage TR5 is thrown into the passage TR11 and comes into contact with the back plate 19981d of the first side surface base 19981, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from the side opposite to the player to the one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). It will be changed to (lower side). The game ball is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR11 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

The game ball that passes through the opening U4 and is thrown into the passage TR6 comes into contact with the curved portion formed in the overhanging portion 19988b of the second cover member 19988, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is on the second cover member 19988 side. (The lower side of FIG. 162 (a)) is changed to the side opposite to the player (the right side of FIG. 162 (a)), and the passage TR6 flows down. The game ball flowing down the passage TR6 is thrown into the passage TR12 and comes into contact with the back plate 19985d of the second side surface base 19985, so that the throwing direction of the game ball is from the side opposite to the player to the one side in the gravity direction (gravity direction). It will be changed to (lower side). The game ball is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 by flowing down the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930.

As described above, in the game ball flowing down the fourth passage, the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 on the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 162 (a)) from the detection device SE5 is thrown into the passage TR12. At the same time, the game ball flowing down the passage TR6 is sent to the passage TR12, which is a part of the fourth passage, and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930. In other words, the passage TR6 branched from the fourth passage upstream of the detection device SE5 joins the fourth passage on the downstream side of the detection device SE5. Therefore, the passage TR12 can serve as both a passage for throwing the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 and a passage for throwing the game ball flowing down the passage TR6.

As a result, in the distribution unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930) in which a plurality of flow passages are formed, the arrangement of the flow passages of the game balls can be suppressed, and the distribution unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930) can be miniaturized.

Further, as described above, since the passage TR12 is formed on the second cover member 19988 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) from the passage TR4, the passage TR10 is on the opposite side to the player (FIG. 162 (a)). A space for arranging other members on one side (lower side in the gravitational direction) of the passage TR4 in the right side), and a space for arranging the solenoid 610 in the present embodiment can be secured, and the passage unit 19990 (winning prize). The mouth unit 19930) can be miniaturized.

Here, in the fourth passage and the fifth passage formed on both sides of the distribution direction (FIG. 162 (a) left-right direction) of the distribution member 19983, the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 (FIG. 162 (FIG. 162). a) The passage in the vertical direction) is not formed, and therefore, the fourth passage and the fifth passage are formed at the same position with respect to the axial direction of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983. In the present embodiment, a part of the fifth passage is formed on one side of the fourth passage in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage are viewed from above. It is formed by overlapping. Further, as described above, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are from the player side (left side of FIG. 162 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. It is formed by extending to 162 (a) on the right side). Further, the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 formed on both sides of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 of the passage TR4 in the axial direction are formed so as to extend to the side opposite to the player side as in the passage TR4.

As described above, since the first side surface base 19981 and the second side surface base 19985 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can throw the game ball into any of the passages TR4, passage TR5, and passage TR6. You can see the color of the game and enhance the fun of the game.

Further, the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 (see FIG. 148) are formed from a vertically long and substantially rectangular plate-like body in the top view. Therefore, the passage TR5 formed in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) and communicated with the passage TR4 by the opening U2 and the other side (gravity) of the passage TR6 communicated with the passage TR4 by the opening U4. Information about the game, for example, "out port" can be displayed on the upper surface plate 19981a of the first side surface base 19981 and the upper surface plate 19985a of the second side surface base 19985 on the upper side in the direction).

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the distributed game balls pass is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passage is arranged along the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction of the base plate, and the space for arranging other members is correspondingly increased. There was a problem that it decreased.

On the other hand, in the distribution unit 19800 in the present embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), and as shown in FIG. The game balls distributed according to 19983 are thrown into the fifth passage formed on the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)) or the fourth passage formed on the opposite side to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (a)). Will be done. As described above, the passage TR4 (a part of the fourth passage) and the passage TR10 (a part of the fifth passage) are from the player side (left side of FIG. 161 (a)) to the opposite side to the player (FIG. 161 (FIG. 161). a) Since it is formed so as to extend to the right side), it is distributed in the width direction of the base plate 19060 as compared with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 (see FIG. 112) formed in the distribution unit 980 described above. The unit 19980 can be miniaturized.

In particular, in the distribution unit 19800 of the present embodiment, since the fourth passage and a part of the fifth passage are formed so as to overlap with each other in the upper view, the distribution unit 19980 in the width direction of the base plate 19060 can be further miniaturized.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the side opposite to the player (right side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the first winning opening 64 is opened. By passing through, the ball is thrown to the distribution unit 19980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 19980 has a velocity component to the side opposite to the player.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, a game in which a speed component is provided to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980 and flows down. The ball bounces off the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983, or flows down on the intermediate plate 19983b, so that the velocity component of the game ball changes from the opening U6 side to the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980 (left side of FIG. 161 (a)). ), And abuts on the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side of the distribution unit 19980. As a result, the distribution member 19983 rotates, and the game ball is sent to the fifth passage.

As shown in FIG. 161 (b), when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, it flows down with a velocity component to the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 161 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980. The game ball comes into contact with the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side of the distribution unit 19980 while holding the velocity component on the side opposite to the player. As a result, the distribution member 19983 rotates, and the game ball is sent to the fourth passage.

Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position and the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position, the angle θ3 formed by the intermediate line TL and the horizontal line HL is formed at the same angle. The distribution member 19983 can throw the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 19980 into the fourth passage faster than the ball thrown into the fifth passage. In other words, the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 can have different throwing times depending on the distribution direction. As a result, the player can be given a playability, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, conventionally, a game ball flowing down a passage formed larger than the outer shape of the game ball flows down the passage with a velocity component different from the axial direction of the detection hole of the detection device arranged in the passage. As a result, the game ball may collide with the side wall of the passage and the traveling direction of the game ball flowing down the passage may not be uniform (hereinafter referred to as "the game ball rampages"). When the detection hole of the detection device is inserted in a state where the game ball is violent, the detection device has a problem of erroneously recognizing that a plurality of game balls have inserted the detection hole (hereinafter referred to as "chattering").

On the other hand, in the distribution unit 19800 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162, an opening U2 and an opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4 on the distribution member 19983 side (left side in FIG. 162 (a)) of the detection device SE5. Will be done. When the game ball is thrown into the passage TR4 in a violent state, the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 in a state where the violence has converged by contacting the opening U2 or the opening end of the opening U4. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

Further, since a part of the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 can be inserted in a state where the rampage of the game ball has converged, and the occurrence of chattering is suppressed. it can. In other words, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the passage TR4, the cross-sectional area of the passage TR4 in the front view can be increased. That is, since the opening U2 and the opening U4 are formed in the winning opening unit 19930, the displacement region of the pachinko machine 10 of the game ball in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 162 (a)) can be expanded.

Therefore, the rampage of the game ball can be converged by expanding the area where the friction (resistance) generated by sliding or rolling the passage TR4 acts. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering and dispose the detection device SE5 at a position close to the distribution member 19983 so that the player can easily see that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, conventionally, there is a problem that when an external force is applied to the disposing member by hitting by a player, the distribution member may be rotated due to the influence of the inertial force. That is, when the game ball distributed to one side is guided to the winning opening to which a higher game value is given than the game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting the game machine, the player enters the arrangement member. By applying an external force, there is a risk that the distribution member is rotated by the inertial force and the posture of the distribution member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6, in other words, is distributed without inserting the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering in the detection device SE5 by discharging from the unit 19980 (winning opening unit 19930).

Further, the passage TR4 is provided with a detection device, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 are not provided with a detection device. Therefore, after passing through the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the game ball flows down the passage TR4 and the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5, and the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and flows down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball is not detected by the detection device and is discharged from the winning opening unit 19930.

As a result, the winning opening unit 19930 does not pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 after the game ball is distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, and the player detects the game ball by the detection device SE5. It has the playability of making people expect. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the destination of the game ball flowing down the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 and being discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

Here, the game area in this embodiment will be described. The game area means an area through which the game ball can pass (flow down, roll) and may be detected by the detection device.

For example, in the downstream of the distribution member 19983 of the winning opening unit 99930, the area, the passage TR3, and the passage TR10 on the upstream side of the detection device SE5 in the passage TR4 are formed as a game area. That is, in the downstream of the distribution member 19983 of the winning opening unit 99930, the detection device SE5, the detection device SE6, the opening U2, and the opening U4 are formed as boundaries of the game area.

Further, as described above, since the first side surface base 19981 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, after the game balls are distributed to the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the first side surface base 19981 is passed through the opening U2 or the opening U4. Instead, the player can visually recognize that the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. Therefore, the winning opening unit 19930 has a game property that the player is expected to detect the game ball by the detection device SE5. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, the distribution unit 19980 has a magnetic body 988b disposed in the accommodating portion 986b formed in the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981 and a magnetism disposed in the distribution member 19983. Since the body 988c is arranged in a repulsive state, the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position or the second position even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10. The state of being installed can be maintained.

As described above, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged in the width direction of the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138), so that the distribution member 19983 is the first. Displace from position to second position or from second position to first position.

Therefore, when an external force such as the player hitting the glass unit 16 is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 acts on the player side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)), so that the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. In the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the distribution member 19983 is improperly displaced from the first position to the second position.

As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6. Therefore, when the player hits the glass unit 16 and illegally displaces the distribution member 19983 from the first entry to the second position, the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position flows into the distribution unit 19980. The ball is thrown into the passage TR4, and the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5. That is, the state in which the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 changes to the state in which the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is reduced.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the glass unit 16 and illicitly displaces the distribution member 19983 from the first position to the second position.

The number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball is detected by the detection device SE5 may be set to the same number. In this case, the number of prize balls paid out by improperly displacement the distribution member 19983 does not change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the glass unit 16 and illicitly displaces the distribution member 19983.

Further, the case where the winning opening unit 19930 in the present embodiment is distributed by the distribution member 19983 and the detection devices are arranged in both the passages through which the game balls flow down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The detection device may be arranged only in one of the flow passages.

As a result, even after the game ball is thrown to the winning opening unit 19930, the player can be provided with playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, it is not necessary to dispose the detection device in both flow passages. In this case, the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 may be thrown to the out port or may not be sent to the out port.

As a result, the detection device is not arranged in the winning opening unit 19930, the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 is not sent to the out opening, and the passage TR9, the passage TR11 or the passage TR12 formed in the winning opening unit 19930 is formed. Is formed toward the front side (left side in FIG. 161 (a)), and the game ball discharged from the winning opening unit 19930 is sent to the front side of the base plate 19060, so that the winning opening unit 19930 is set as the game area. be able to. That is, the gaming area formed in the pachinko machine 10 can be increased by the amount that the winning opening unit 19930 has a passage in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction), so that the player can have playability. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, although the case where the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged in the distribution unit 19980 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the distribution member 19983 may be arranged at any position in the game area described above. good.

As a result, the player can be given playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the distribution member 19983 in the present embodiment is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where the axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 161 (a)), and the ball is thrown. Although the case where the game balls are distributed in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The axis of the shaft member 988a is arranged inside the distribution unit 19980 in a state where it is arranged in the front-rear direction (FIG. 161 (a) left-right direction), and the game ball to be thrown is placed in the left-right direction (FIG. 161 (a) on the paper surface). It may be distributed in the vertical direction).

As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 19980 can be distributed in various directions, and the player can be provided with playability. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passage TR4 and the passage TR12 through which the game balls distributed by the distribution member 19983 pass are collectively referred to as the fourth passage, but the passage TR6 and the passage TR6 formed on one side in the left-right direction of the passage TR4 The passage TR12 may be collectively used as the sixth passage. In this case, the passage TR4 joins the side of the sixth passage.

As a result, the game ball flowing down the passage TR4 is offset from the passage TR4 to the passage TR6 side (lower side in FIG. 162 (a)) and is thrown to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the front view. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the solenoid 610 of the passage unit 19990 on one side of the passage TR4 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Next, the winning opening unit 20930 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed toward one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) (see FIG. 112) has been described, but in the nineteenth embodiment, A part of the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 is formed with a depth passage extending from the front base 20981 side (left side of FIG. 163) to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 20980 according to the 19th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CXIIa-CXIIa of FIG. 109 (a). In FIG. 163, the second passage TR2 in the sixth embodiment is illustrated by a chain line. Further, since the first passage TR201 and the second passage TR202 are formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft member 988a of the distribution portion 983, only the second passage TR202 will be described, and the description of the first passage TR201 will be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 163, the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the 19th embodiment is located on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983 from the front base 20981 side (left side of FIG. 163) to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163). It is formed with a depth passage TR202a extending toward it. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the second passage TR2 is connected to the front base 981 side of the inflow passage 985f1 (see FIGS. 110 to 112), whereas the second passage TR202 of the distribution unit 20980 in the 19th embodiment. Is connected to the other side of the inflow passage 985f1 in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

Further, the second passage TR202 is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the extension dimension of the depth passage TR202a toward the side opposite to the player is more than twice the diameter of the game ball. It is formed.

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and the other side. A game machine provided with a distribution unit having a second passage through which the distributed game balls pass is known.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and the space for arranging other members is correspondingly large. There was a problem that the number decreased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the depth passage TR202a is thrown to the back base 20985 side (right side of FIG. 163) from the base plate 19060 (see FIG. 138) and then to the inflow passage 985f1. Will be done. Therefore, the depth passage TR202a can be arranged by utilizing the space in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 163), which has a relatively large space. Therefore, the distribution unit 20980 can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

Next, the winning opening unit 21930 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the lower surface of the passage TR4 (the lower surface plate 19981b formed on the first side surface base of the distribution unit 19980) is formed on a flat surface has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the twentieth embodiment, , A protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage), and the flow speed of the game ball is reduced. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 164 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 21930 according to the twentieth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a).

As shown in FIG. 164, in the distribution unit 21980 of the winning opening unit 21930 in the 20th embodiment, the first side surface base 21981 is provided on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 164) of the first side surface base 21981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR214 surrounded by the upper surface plate 19981a, the lower surface plate 21981b, the central plate 19981e, and the side plate 19985e (see FIG. 153) of the second side surface base 19985 is formed. The lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the formation range of the passage TR214 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a between the opening U6 and the detection device SE5 (2 in the present embodiment). Pieces) are formed.

The protrusions 21981b1 are formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and are uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164).

As a result, it is possible to ensure that the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other, and the game ball comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1 to allow the game ball to flow down. Becomes smaller.

Further, the protrusion 21981b1 arranged on the downstream side is arranged inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 164). Therefore, when the game ball and the protrusion 21981b1 come into contact with each other in a state where the game ball is violent, the protrusion 21981b1 is displaced from the game ball in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 164) or in the horizontal direction (vertical direction to the paper surface in FIG. 164). Can be granted.

As a result, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and even after passing through the opening U6 by the distribution member 19983, the player can play the game. Can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 21981b1 arranged on the downstream side is arranged inside the opening U2 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. FIG. 164 It is possible to prevent the game ball to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) from coming into contact with the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985, and the first side surface base 21981 Damage to the central plate 19981e or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153).

Further, since the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 without contacting the central plate 19981e of the first side surface base 21981 or the side plate 19985e of the second side surface base 19985, and can pass through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. (See FIG. 153), the passing speed of the game ball can be increased to enhance the interest of the game.

Here, the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 toward the upper surface plate 19981a side (upper side of FIG. 164) is formed to be approximately 1/10 of the diameter of the game ball. .. As a result, the game ball flowing down the passage TR214 can get over the protrusion 21981b1 and flow down the passage TR214. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the protrusion 211981b1 and restricting the flow of the game ball in the passage TR214.

Further, the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 arranged on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 is formed to be substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has overcome the upstream protrusion 21981b1 having a protrusion dimension of about 1/10 of the diameter of the game ball on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 again hits the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b. It is possible to prevent the bottom plate 2181b1 from being touched and overcoming the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side without contacting the upper surface of the lower surface plate 2181b. Therefore, it is possible to surely reduce the flow speed of the game ball by the protrusion 21981b1.

Further, as described above, the distribution member 19983 throws the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 to the opening U6 (fourth passage) earlier than the ball to the opening U7 (fifth passage).

Therefore, the time when the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is distributed to the opening U6 and detected by the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and is arranged in the fifth passage. It is formed shorter than the time detected by the device SE6. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 are formed differently.

Further, the passing distance of the game ball from the opening U6 to the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage (passage TR214) is the detection arranged in the opening U7 to the fifth passage (between the passage TR9 and the passage TR10). It is formed to be smaller than the passing distance of the game ball to the device SE6.

Therefore, the time when the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is distributed to the opening U6 and detected by the detection device SE5 arranged in the fourth passage is distributed to the opening U7 and is arranged in the fifth passage. The time detected by the device SE6 is formed to be shorter. That is, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 are formed differently.

Here, conventionally, a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to one side, and the other side. A game machine provided with a second detection means for detecting the game balls distributed to the ball is known. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in design was low.

That is, when the display means displays that the game balls have been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means to notify the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls). Case), the time required for the game ball to reach the distribution member and be distributed to one side to be detected by the first detection means, and the time required for the game ball distributed to the other side to be detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, the time from reaching the distribution member to being displayed will differ depending on the distribution direction, and the interest of the game will be impaired.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine described above, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the distribution member, and the first detection means and the first detection means and the first 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distribution member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

On the other hand, the lower surface of the passage TR214 in the present embodiment (lower surface plate 21981b formed on the first side surface base 21981 of the distribution unit 21980) is formed to include the protrusion 21981b1. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) is reduced, and the time from when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 21980 until it is detected by the detection device SE5 can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6.

Further, since the passage TR3 (a part of the fifth passage) is extended in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 164), the game ball freely falls down the passage TR3 and flows down. Therefore, the flow speed of the game ball can be increased as compared with the form in which the game ball rolls down the passage and flows down. As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Therefore, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the game is enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the damage and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Although the case where two protrusions 21981b1 are formed in the present embodiment has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or three or more protrusions 21981b1 may be formed.

When one protrusion 21981b1 is formed, the distribution member 19983 can give the player playability even after passing through the opening U6, and the game ball excessively passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4. , Passing through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 can be suppressed (see FIG. 153), and the entertainment of the game can be suppressed from being impaired.

When three or more protrusions 21981b1 are formed, the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) can be further reduced, and the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 21980 are detected by the detection device SE5. By reducing the difference between the time until the ball is detected and the time until the ball is detected by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted by the number of formed protrusions 21981b1. Can enhance the interest of. Further, it can be achieved by the protrusion 21981b1 that the adjusting means can be easily formed, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, the case where two protrusions 21981b1 having the same shape are formed on the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the present embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and each protrusion 21981b1 is separately formed. It may be formed in the shape of.

For example, when the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side is larger than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side, the protrusion on the downstream side is compared with the contact between the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side and the game ball. The contact between the protrusion 21981b1 and the game ball increases the probability that the game ball will pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153). That is, as the game ball approaches the detection device SE5, the probability that the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, that is, does not pass through the detection device SE5 increases, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, when the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the downstream side is smaller than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion 21981b1 on the upstream side, it is possible to suppress the rampage of the game ball at a position close to the detection device SE5. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering, and reduce the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6, so that the game can be played. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusions 21981b1 may be formed intermittently in the left-right direction, and the protrusions 21981b1 may be formed so as to be inclined in the front-rear direction (FIG. 164 left-right direction).

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed intermittently in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), the game ball abuts on the end of the protrusion 21981b1 in the left-right direction, and the game ball is displaced in the left-right direction. To. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the opening U2 or the opening U4 and the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The protrusions 21981b1 are uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 164), and are rearward as they proceed to the left side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 164). When the game ball is formed so as to be inclined to the side (right side in FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1 to be displaced to the left and passes through the opening U2. It becomes easier to pass through the passage TR5.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the rear side (right side of FIG. 164) as it advances to the right side (front side of the paper in FIG. 164), the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1. As a result, a displacement to the right is given, and it becomes easier to pass through the opening U4 and the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the rear side (right side in FIG. 164) as it advances from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (vertical direction to the paper surface of FIG. 164) of the bottom plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage is formed. When the game ball flowing down the (passage TR214) comes into contact with the protrusion 21981b1, a lateral displacement is applied, the game ball passes through the opening U2 or the opening U4, and easily passes through the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (FIG. 153). reference).

Therefore, the distribution member 19983 can give the player playability even after passing through the opening U6. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to be inclined to the front side (left side in FIG. 164) as it progresses from the center to both ends in the left-right direction (vertical direction to the paper surface of FIG. 164) of the lower surface plate 21981b of the first side surface base 21981, the fourth passage. The game ball flowing down the (passage TR214) abuts on the protrusion 21981b1 to give a displacement to the center in the left-right direction, and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE5 can be inserted in a state where the rampage has converged. , Chattering can be suppressed.

Further, although the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross section has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed in a semicircular shape in cross section. .. In this case, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 21981b1 from being damaged due to the contact with the game ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the recess is not always limited to this. It may be formed. As a result, even when the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIG. 164) of the passage TR214 is formed to be small, the game ball is clogged in the passage TR214, that is, the game ball is on the protrusion 21981b1 and the first side surface base 19981. It is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being suppressed by contacting the face plate 19981a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 21980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 22930 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 165. In the twentieth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR214 and the detection device SE5 has been described (see FIG. 164), but in the 21st embodiment, the passage TR224 (of the fourth passage) has been described. A protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the openings U2 and U4 of (part) and the detection device SE5. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 165 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 22930 according to the 21st embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 165, the distribution unit 22980 of the winning opening unit 22930 in the 21st embodiment has a first side surface base 22981 on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 165) of the first side surface base 22981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR224 surrounded by the upper surface plate 22981a, the lower surface plate 22981b, the central plate 22981e, and the side plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the openings U2 and U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR224 and the detection device SE5 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 19981a. In the embodiment, two) are formed. Since the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 is the same as the distance between the arrangements in the twentieth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The protrusions 2181b1 are formed between the openings U2 and U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, that is, formed on the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) of the distribution unit 22980, and thus are related to the game. A protrusion 21981b1 without a protrusion can be formed at a position far from the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the protrusion 21981b1, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 10.

The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981b in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165). 21981b1 and the central plate 22981e are integrally molded.

As a result, the deflection of the central plate 22981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR224) and the central plate 22981e can be suppressed, and the damage of the central plate 22981e can be suppressed.

When the game ball flowing down the passage TR224 without passing through the opening U2 or the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) comes into contact with the protrusion 211981b1, the flow speed of the game ball is reduced, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 , The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths of the two are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed from being impaired, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) and the detection device SE5, the game ball opens the opening U2 or the opening U4 by the contact between the game ball and the protrusion 21981b1. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through and being thrown into the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

Here, the passage TR224 in the present embodiment includes the detection device SE5, whereas the passage TR5 and the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153) do not include the detection device. Therefore, the game result differs depending on whether the game ball flows down the passage TR224 or the passage TR5 or the passage TR6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball, which is distributed to the opening U6 side by the distribution member 19983, from coming into contact with the protrusion 21981b1 to cause a difference in the game result.

Further, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 in the present embodiment is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 22981b of the first side surface base 22981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 165) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 21981b1 may be formed so as to be inclined in the front-rear direction (FIG. 165 left-right direction) in the left-right direction.

When the protrusion 21981b1 is formed so as to tilt to the rear side (right side of FIG. 165) as it advances to the left side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 165) or the right side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 165), a game of flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR224). When the ball abuts on the protrusion 21981b1, a displacement to the left or right is given, and the game ball abuts on the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base.

Therefore, due to the frictional force generated between the game ball and the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base, the flow speed of the game ball becomes small, and the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 , The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, the game ball is displaced to the left (backward on the paper surface in FIG. 165) or rightward (frontward on the paper surface in FIG. 165), and hits the central plate 22981e of the first side surface base 22981 or the side plate of the second side surface base. By touching it, it is possible to prevent the game ball from going wild. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 2181b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 22980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 23930 according to the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 166. In the 21st embodiment, the case where the protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR224 (a part of the fourth passage) and the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 165) has been described, but the 22nd embodiment has been described. In the embodiment, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 of the passage TR234 (a part of the fourth passage) and the opening U2 and the opening U4. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 166 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 23930 according to the 22nd embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 166, the distribution unit 23980 of the winning opening unit 23930 in the 22nd embodiment has the first side surface base 23981 on the back plate 19981d side (right side of FIG. 166) of the first side surface base 23981 with respect to the opening U6. A passage TR234 surrounded by the upper surface plate 23981a, the lower surface plate 23981b, the central plate 23981e, and the side plate of the second side surface base is formed. The lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 between the opening U6 and the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR234 has a plurality of protrusions 21981b1 projecting toward the upper surface plate 23981a (two in the present embodiment). It is formed. Since the distance between the arrangements of the plurality of protrusions 21981b1 is the same as the distance between the arrangements in the twentieth embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The protrusion 21981b1 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in cross-sectional view, and is uniformly and continuously formed on the upper surface of the lower surface plate 23981b of the first side surface base 23981 in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 166). 21981b1 and the central plate 23981e are integrally molded.

As a result, the deflection of the central plate 23981e due to the contact between the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) and the central plate 23981e can be suppressed, and the damage of the central plate 23981e can be suppressed.

When the game ball flowing down the fourth passage (passage TR234) comes into contact with the protrusion 211981b1, the flow speed of the game ball decreases, and until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5. The difference between the time and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 19983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 19983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even if the lengths of the balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed from being impaired, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, in a state where the flow speed of the game ball is reduced by the protrusion 21981b1, the game ball flows down toward the region where the opening U2 and the opening U4 (see FIG. 153) of the passage TR234 are formed, so that the game ball flows down the passage. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the ball is flowing down the TR234 or being thrown into the passage TR5 or the passage TR6 (see FIG. 153).

Further, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the opening U6 and the opening U2 and the opening U4 of the passage TR234, that is, a protrusion 21981b1 is formed between the detection device SE5, the opening U2 and the opening U4 and the distribution member 19983. Since the arrangement space for the game is formed, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to see the game ball by the distribution member 19983, and the player can use the game ball in the passage TR234, the passage TR5, or the passage TR6. You can see which passage you are going through.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the protrusion 2981b1 is formed on the lower surface (lower surface plate 21981b) of the passage TR214 (a part of the fourth passage) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the passage TR3 A protrusion 21981b1 may be formed on the lower surface (second receiving portion 19943c) of (a part of the fifth passage). In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 23980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be further made different (see FIG. 161). As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the winning opening unit 24930 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 167. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the center of gravity is arranged on the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 23rd embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is one of the acting portions. It is unevenly arranged on the 24983a side, and the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 167 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 24930 in the 23rd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. In FIG. 167 (b), the state in which the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the acting portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 167 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is from the lower surface (the lower surface of FIG. 167 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the distribution member 24983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the working portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity of the above is located on the working portion 24983a side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount that the protruding portion 24983a protrudes.

Further, the front contact portion 24982b1 of the lower surface plate 24982b formed on the bulging portion 24982 of the first side surface base 24981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed so as to project from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983. It is provided with a recess 24982b3 formed in a shape. As a result, the protrusion 24983a1 projecting from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983 can be arranged inside the recess 24982b3, and the distribution member 24983 can be arranged at the second position.

That is, the distribution member 24983 can form an inclined state similar to the second position of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment, whereby the distribution member 24983 is arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)). The game ball arranged between the acting portion 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b is distributed from the distribution member 24983 to the front unit 19940 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)), passes through the opening U7 and the intermediate port 19941h. The ball can be thrown to the passage TR3.

The protrusion 24983a1 is formed sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the front-rear direction is located on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 167 (a)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. To do. As a result, the distribution member 24983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the first position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 24980, and is thrown to the distribution member 24983, the game ball is sent to the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 side ( The ball is thrown between the acting portion 19983a arranged on the right side of FIG. 167 (a), and the load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 167 (a), the distribution member 24983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position. ..

As described above, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the acting portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is closer to the acting portion 24983a than the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 167 (FIG. 167). a) Since it is located on the left side), the rotation speed of the distribution member 24983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 (see FIG. 161) in the 18th embodiment, and the first The rotation speed of the distribution member 24983 that is displaced from the position to the second position is larger than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 24980 are detected by the detection device SE5. The difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 24980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983. The structure of the distribution unit 24980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the 4th passage or the 5th passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction ( (See FIG. 1), when an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction (FIG. 167 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member 24983. The angle formed by the direction connecting the center of gravity (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 24983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)) is the 18th implementation. It is formed smaller than the distribution member 19983 in the form (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 167 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

The case where the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment includes an action portion 24983a on which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be arranged on the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983.

That is, in the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the protrusion portion 24983a1 is integrally molded with the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 167 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. Similar to the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, or may be embedded inside the acting portion 24983a.

By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to prevent the recess 24982b3 from being arranged in the front side contact portion 24982b1, and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the weight member from protruding from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, it is possible to suppress damage to the distribution member 24983 during assembly.

Further, the case where the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1 in the present embodiment is formed in a shape slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 protruding from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983 has been described. The shape is not necessarily limited to this, and may be formed sufficiently larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1. Further, the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1 may be formed with a through hole having a width larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1.

As a result, even when dust or the like is accumulated in the recess 24982b3 of the front side contact portion 24982b1, the lower surface of the working portion 24983a (lower side in FIG. 167 (a)) and the upper surface of the front side contact portion 24982b1 (FIG. 167 (FIG. 167). a) The upper side) can be brought into contact with the distribution member 24983, and the distribution member 24983 can be arranged at the second position.

Next, the winning opening unit 25930 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 168. In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is biased toward one of the acting portions 24983a and the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently has been described (see FIG. 167). In the 24th embodiment, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is biased toward one of the acting portions 24983a, and when an external force acts on the distribution member 25983, the distribution member 25983 is suppressed from being rotated. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 168 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 25930 in the 24th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 168 (a), the distribution member 25983 is in the first position. In FIG. 168 (b), the state in which the distribution member 25983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 168 (a)) of the distribution member 25983 is in the direction of gravity from its lower surface (lower side of FIG. 168 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). In other words, the distribution member 25983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and the distribution member 25983 in the direction connecting the working portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b). The center of gravity of the above is located on the working portion 24983a side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b by the amount that the protruding portion 24983a protrudes.

Further, the back surface contact portion 25982b2 of the lower surface plate 25982b formed on the bulging portion 25982 of the first side surface base 25981 is slightly larger than the shape of the protrusion 24983a1 formed so as to project from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983. It is provided with a recess 24982b3 formed in a shape. As a result, the protrusion 24983a1 projecting from the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983a can be arranged inside the recess 24982b3, and the distribution member 25983 can be arranged at the first position.

That is, the distribution member 25983 can form an inclined state similar to the first position of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment, whereby the distribution member 25983 is arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)). The game ball arranged between the acting portion 24983a and the intermediate plate 19983b is distributed from the distribution member 25983 to the detection device SE5 side (right side in FIG. 168 (a)), passes through the opening U6, and is sent to the passage TR4. Can be done.

Since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed sufficiently smaller than the intermediate plate 19983b, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position, and the distribution member in the front-rear direction is formed. The center of gravity of 25983 is located on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 168 (b)) with respect to the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. As a result, the distribution member 25983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the second position.

Further, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is located on the opening U6 side (on the right side of FIG. 168 (a)) with respect to the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), the distribution member 25983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 25983 in the front side direction (FIG. 168 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 168 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

Further, since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a (lower side in FIG. 168 (a)) to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 is the 18th. It is located on one side in the direction of gravity from the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the embodiment.

Therefore, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 25983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 (FIG. 168 (a). ) The angle formed with the arrow F1 direction) is formed smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. Further, the distance between the axis of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced, and the moment acting on the distribution member 25983 due to the inertial force can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 168 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 25983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 25983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, it is relatively easy to form the protrusion 24983a1 on the action portion 24983a of the distribution member 25983, and compared with a method of reducing the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 such as using anti-vibration rubber. Product cost can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, the fifth passage formed on the side where the distribution member 25983 distributes the game balls in two directions may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side where the game balls are distributed faster. .. In this case, the rotation speed of the distribution member 25983 that is displaced from the second position to the first position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 (see FIG. 161) in the eighteenth embodiment, and is from the first position to the second position. The rotational speed of the displaced distribution member 25983 is higher than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment. Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced (see FIG. 161).

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 25983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 25980 are detected by the detection device SE5. By reducing the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and to secure the degree of freedom in design (see FIG. 161).

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 25980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted by the distribution member 25983, the structure of the distribution unit 25980 The product cost can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the fourth passage or the fifth passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ).

Next, the winning opening unit 26930 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. In the 23rd embodiment, the case where the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 is biased toward one acting portion 24983a has been described (see FIG. 167), but in the 25th embodiment, the magnetic force is applied to one acting portion 26983a. By disposing the body 26983a2, the rotation speeds of the distribution members 24983 are formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 169 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 26930 in the 25th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 169 (a), the distribution member 26983 is in the first position. In FIG. 169 (b), the state in which the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 169 (a), the working portion 26983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 169 (a)) of the distribution member 26983 in the 25th embodiment is a magnetic material from the lower surface to the inside. 26983a2 is buried.

Further, in the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed in the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981, the magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded from the upper surface to the inside. The magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged at a position facing the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the acting portion 26983a in a state where the distribution member 26983 is located at the first position. Further, the magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged in the acting portion 26983a.

Here, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a is the gravity acting on the distribution member 26983 located at the first position. It is formed to be smaller than the resultant force of the repulsive force between the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution member 26983 and the magnetic body 988b arranged in the accommodating portion 986b (see FIG. 150). Therefore, in the state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the first position, the state in which the distribution member 26983 is arranged in the first position is maintained.

In the present embodiment, the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a causes the acting portion 26983a and the first acting portion 26983a of the distribution member 26983. 1 The back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the side surface base 26981 does not abut, but the acting portion 26983a of the distribution member 26983 and the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The state in which the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the formed lower surface plate 26982b is brought close to each other and the forces acting on the distribution member 26983 are balanced is referred to as the first position.

In the state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, and the first 1 When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 26983 through the winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 26980, the ball is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position. It is said that it will be installed.

As described above, since the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 arranged on the acting portion 26983a acts on the distribution member 26983, the first position to the first position. The rotation speed of the distribution member 26983 that is displaced to the two positions is larger than that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 169 (b), in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 26980, and is thrown to the distribution member 26983, it is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis. The distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position.

As described above, since the repulsive force between the magnetic body 26982b4 disposed on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 and the magnetic body 26983a2 disposed on the acting portion 26983a acts on the distribution member 26983, the second position to the second position. The rotation speed of the distribution member 26983 that is displaced to one position is smaller than that of the distribution member 19983 in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 26983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 26980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

In the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is embedded from the lower surface of the working portion 26983a toward the inside, and the magnetic body 26982b4 is embedded from the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 toward the inside, that is, the magnetic material. The case where the exposed surface of 26983a2 and the lower surface of the working portion 26983a form the same surface and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 form the same surface has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done.

For example, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 may be formed inside the lower surface of the acting portion 26983a (upper side in FIG. 169 (a)), and the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 may be formed from the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 26982b2. May also be formed on the inside (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 from coming into contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 or the magnetic body 26982b4 from being damaged.

Further, due to variations in dimensional tolerances, the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26983a2 is formed on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the lower surface of the working portion 26983a, or the exposed surface of the magnetic body 26982b4 is on the back side. It is possible to suppress the formation of the contact portion 26982b2 on the outer side (upper side in FIG. 169 (a)), and it is possible to prevent the magnetic body 26983a2 and the magnetic body 26982b4 from coming into contact with each other.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the magnetic material 26983a2 or the magnetic material 26982b4 from being damaged. Further, it can be prevented that the distribution member 26983 is not sufficiently rotated and is not arranged at the first position.

Further, the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position by inserting a spacer or the like between the magnetic body 26983a2 and the acting portion 26983a, or between the magnetic material 26982b4 and the back surface side contact portion 26982b2. In, the distance between the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 can be adjusted.

As a result, the magnitude of the force acting on the distribution member 26983 can be adjusted, and the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily made. Can be adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 26983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 26980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 are arranged in a repulsive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the magnetic material 26983a2 and the magnetic material 26982b4 may be arranged in an adsorbing state. ..

As a result, in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the first position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the pachinko machine 10 is applied to the distribution member 26983. It is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution member 26983 from the first position to the second position even when the inertial force in the front side direction of the above is applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, the magnetic body 26983a2 is arranged on the acting portion 26983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 169 (a)) of the distribution member 26983, and the first side surface base 26981 expands. The case where the magnetic body 26982b4 is arranged on the back surface side contact portion 26982b2 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the protruding portion 26982 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening U7 side of the distribution member 26983 ( The magnetic body 26983a2 is arranged on the working portion 19983a arranged on the left side of FIG. 169 (a), and the front side contact portion 19982b1 of the lower surface plate 26982b formed on the bulging portion 26982 of the first side surface base 26981. The magnetic material 26982b4 may be arranged in a state of being adsorbed on the surface.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the distribution member 26983 is arranged at the second position. (See FIG. 1), when an inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 in the back side direction (FIG. 169 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the distribution member The angle formed by the direction connecting the center of gravity of 26983 (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 26983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)) is the 18th. It is formed smaller than the distribution member 19983 in the embodiment (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 26983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 26983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 169 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 26983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Next, the winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 170. In the eighteenth embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage and the second position. The case where the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged in the above and the distribution member 19983 is rotated at the same angle in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage has been described. (See FIG. 161), in the 26th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage. The angle and the angle at which the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position and the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fourth passage are arranged at different angles. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 170 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 27930 in the 26th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 170 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 170 (b), the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 27930 according to the 26th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 27982b2 of the lower surface plate 27982b formed on the bulging portion 27982 of the first side surface base 27981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 170 (FIG. 170). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 27982b2 is formed so as to project above the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (upward direction in FIG. 170 (a)).

As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is sent to the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 170). (A) The distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position at the rotation angle at which the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the left side) is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In the state, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 19983 is thrown to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 170 (a)). Can be smaller than the rotation angle rotated to a position facing one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 19983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 27980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

The distribution unit 27980 in the present embodiment takes time to be detected by the detection device SE5 by adjusting the position of the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 projecting upward (upward in FIG. 170 (a)). The difference between the time and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 can be easily adjusted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 27980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 171. In the 26th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is the second position. The case where the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged in the above and the distribution member 19983 is arranged smaller than the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage has been described (FIG. 170), in the 27th embodiment, the game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the first position, and the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated to send the game ball to the fifth passage is , The game ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983 arranged at the second position, and the distribution member 19983 is arranged larger than the angle at which the distribution member 19983 is rotated in order to send the game ball to the fourth passage. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 171 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 28930 in the 27th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 171 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 171 (b), the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 28930 according to the 27th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 28982b2 of the lower surface plate 28982b formed on the bulging portion 28982 of the first side surface base 28981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 171 (FIG. 171). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 27982b2 is formed so as to be recessed below the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (downward in FIG. 170 (a)). To.

As a result, the angle θ5 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed smaller than the angle θ3.

Further, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the center of rotation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 1). ), When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the front side direction (FIG. 171 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 The angle formed by the direction connecting the two (direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 19983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 19983 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 171 (a)) is the vibration in the eighteenth embodiment. It is formed smaller than the component member 19983. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 19983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 171 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 28980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 29930 in the 28th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the distribution member 19983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the symmetrical plane extending in the left-right direction through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b has been described (FIG. 147). (See), in the 28th embodiment, the distribution member 29983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the symmetrical plane extending in the left-right direction through the center in the thickness direction of the intermediate plate 19983b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 172 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 29930 according to the 28th embodiment, corresponding to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 172 (a), the distribution member 29983 is in the first position. In FIG. 172 (b), the state in which the distribution member 29983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 29930 in the 28th embodiment, the angle θ6 formed by the action line SL connecting the pair of action portions 19983a of the distribution member 29983 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 172 (a)) and the intermediate line TL is an opening. It is formed smaller than the angle θ7 formed by the action line SL and the intermediate line TL on the U7 side (left side in FIG. 172 (a)). In other words, in the distribution member 29983, the intermediate plate 19983b is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the pair of acting portions 19983a, passes through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and is in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. It is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the plane of symmetry extending to.

Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 29983 is arranged at the first position, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 29983 is thrown into the fifth passage (opening U7), that is, the opening U7 side (FIG. 172). (A) The distribution member 29983 is arranged at the second position at the rotation angle at which the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the left side) is rotated to a position facing one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). In the state, the position where the game ball thrown to the distribution member 29983 is thrown to the fourth passage (opening U6), that is, the tip of the acting portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 172 (a)). Can be smaller than the rotation angle rotated to a position facing one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 29983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 29980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 29983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 29980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 30930 in the 29th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 173. In the 29th embodiment, the mode of the contact surface of the distribution member 30983 with the game ball differs between the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the first position and the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the second position. It is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 173 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 30930 in the 29th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is in the first position. In FIG. 173 (b), the state in which the distribution member 30983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in a state where the distribution member 30983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 30980, and is thrown to the distribution member 30983, the game ball is on the intermediate plate 19983b and the opening U6 side (FIG. 173). (B) The ball is thrown between the action unit 19983a on the right side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 30983 is placed in the first position. ..

Here, a rubber-like elastic body is formed on the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. A rubber sheet 30983f is arranged. Therefore, the game ball that comes into contact with the rubber sheet 30983f rebounds and is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

When the game ball displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) comes into contact with the distribution member 30983 again due to its own weight, the member 30983 is rotationally displaced from the second position to the first position by the load of the game ball, and the fourth position. A game ball is thrown into the passage (passage TR4). That is, it is possible to delay the sending of the game ball to the fourth passage (passage TR4) by displacing the game ball to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, even when the distribution member 30983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time and detection until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 30980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

By changing the thickness or shape of the rubber sheet 30983f, or by arranging the rubber sheets having different elastic moduli, the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the detection by the detection device SE6 are detected. You can easily adjust the difference from the time until.

Further, rubber formed from a rubber-like elastic body on the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Since the sheet 30983f is arranged, the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 30983 is located on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) with respect to the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173 (a), the distribution member 30983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 30983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 30983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 30983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 30983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 173 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 30983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 173 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 30983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 30983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

In addition, although the case where the rubber sheet 30983f is disposed on the distribution member 30983 in the present embodiment and the game ball is displaced (rebounded) to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is described, but this is not necessarily the case. The speed component of the game ball may be reduced by the contact between the game ball and the rubber sheet 30983f without limitation.

For example, when the rubber sheet 30983f has viscosity, the game ball slides or rolls on the rubber sheet 30983f, so that the velocity component toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced.

Further, for example, when the rubber sheet 30983f is significantly deformed (the game ball sinks) due to the contact of the game balls, the frictional force acting between the game balls and the rubber sheet 30983f causes the opening U6 side (FIG. The velocity component to 173 (a) on the right side) is reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 30983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 30980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the rubber sheet 30983f is formed of a rubber-like elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, members having different materials (elastic modulus) such as a resin film, a gel-like sheet, or a metal plate are exemplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, rubber-like elasticity is applied to the side surface of the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 173 (a)) of the intermediate plate 19983b and the contact portion 19983d of the distribution member 30983 and the upper surface of the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. The case where the rubber sheet 30983f formed from the body is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is formed on the surfaces of the intermediate plate 19983b, the contact portion 19983d, and the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side. Protrusions formed to smaller dimensions may be formed. As a result, the velocity component toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 173 (a)) is reduced by the frictional force acting between the game ball and the protrusion.

Next, the winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174. The distribution member 31983 in the thirtieth embodiment is formed to have different rotational resistance depending on the rotational direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

Further, in the distribution member 31983 in the present embodiment, the shaft member 31988a extends in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 174 (a)) with respect to the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. Has the same configuration, a pair of working portions 19983a and an intermediate plate 19983b are arranged at substantially right angles, pass through the center of the intermediate plate 19983b in the thickness direction, and extend in the left-right direction on a symmetrical plane. It is formed in a symmetrical shape (see FIG. 161).

FIG. 174 (a) is a top view of the winning opening unit 31930, and FIG. 174 (b) is a side view of the winning opening unit 31930. In the winning opening unit 31930 in the thirtieth embodiment, the side plate 31986a formed on the bulging portion 31986 of the second side surface base 31985 is formed in an annular shape toward the first side surface base 19981 side (left side in FIG. 174 (a)). A protruding bearing portion 31985j is provided, and the inside of the bearing portion 31985j is formed to penetrate in the axial direction.

One end of the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 penetrates the bearing portion 31985j and is disposed outside the second cover member 31988 (on the right side in FIG. 174 (a)), and the other end of the shaft member 31988a is It is inserted into the bearing portion 982c (see FIG. 151) of the side plate 19982a formed in the bulging portion 19982 of the first side surface base 19981. Therefore, the shaft member 31988a is rotatably arranged by the bearing portion 31985j and the bearing portion 982c. Further, one end of the shaft member 31988a is formed in a substantially D shape in the axial direction, and a one-way gear WG described later is arranged.

The one-way gear WG is formed as a cam-type one-way clutch in which a roller and a spring are interposed between the inner ring and the outer ring. A gear meshed with the third gear GY3 is engraved on the outer circumference of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. Further, the shaft hole of the one-way gear WG is formed in the same shape as a substantially D shape at one end of the axial viewing shaft member 31988a.

Further, the distribution member 31983 and the shaft member 31988a are fastened and fixed by a set screw (not shown). As a result, the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the inner ring of the one-way gear WG.

When the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is not rotated. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 is rotated.

The second cover member 31988 has a third gear GY3 at a position where it is meshed with the one-way gear WG, and a second cover member 31988 at a position where it is meshed with the fourth gear GY4 and the fourth gear GY4 at a position where it is meshed with the third gear GY3. It is equipped with a 5-gear GY5.

Therefore, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 are not transmitted. And the fifth gear GY5 does not rotate. On the other hand, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring, and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is rotated. As a result, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate.

Here, when the rotation of the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the third gear GY3 and the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 rotate, the outer ring of the one-way gear WG and the gear teeth of the third gear GY3 mesh with each other. Friction occurs on the surface.

Similarly, when the rotation of the third gear GY3 is transmitted to the fourth gear GY4 and the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 rotate, the meshing surface of the gear teeth between the third gear GY3 and the fourth gear GY4 When friction occurs, the rotation of the 4th gear GY4 is transmitted to the 5th gear GY5, and the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5 rotate, the meshing of the gear teeth between the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5 Friction occurs on the surface.

Therefore, the distribution member when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 rotate, that is, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. The rotation of 31983 is the vibration when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5 do not rotate, that is, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG. It is slower than the rotation of the component member 31983.

Therefore, the distribution when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161). The rotation of the member 31983 is when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way gear WG, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161). It becomes slower than the rotation of the distribution member 31983, and the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 (see FIG. 161) and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) is reduced. be able to.

Further, even when the degree of freedom in design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 By reducing the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game and secure the degree of freedom in design. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction (FIG. 174 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, respectively. Friction (resistance) occurs on the meshing surface of the teeth.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 31983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 174 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch between transmission and non-transmission of rotation to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, it is possible to surely form a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction. it can.

Further, since the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are arranged outside the second cover member 31988, they can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time of the detection time difference can be reduced.

Further, since the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 can be driven by a relatively simple configuration, the product cost can be reduced by that amount, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can improve sex.

In particular, the rotational resistance of the distribution member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the driven of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and in the present invention in which the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small, the difference in the distribution time of the distribution member 31983 can be set. It is effective as a configuration to make it smaller.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of gears to be arranged is three has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see Figure 161).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG rotates due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position without transmitting to the three-gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, the one-way gear WG Described the case where the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 (see FIG. 161), but the one-way gear WG acts in the opposite direction. May be.

That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Then, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 161), the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983 with the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the first gear. It may be configured not to transmit to the 5-gear GY5.

In this case, when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 31983 (see FIG. 1). (See FIG. 161), the distribution member 31983 is moved from the first position due to the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. It is possible to suppress the displacement (rotation) to the second position.

Next, the winning opening unit 32930 according to the 31st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 175. In the 31st embodiment, the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 is formed at the same position as the axial center position of the shaft member 988a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 32930 according to the 31st embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). As shown in FIG. 175, the distribution member 32983 according to the 31st embodiment is on the side opposite to the pair of acting portions 19983a and the intermediate plate 19983b of the contact portion 19983d in the axial direction of the shaft member 988a (FIG. It is formed with a center of gravity adjusting portion 32983 g which is formed so as to project from the lower side of 175). The center of gravity adjusting portion 32983g is a portion for arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 at the same position as the axial center of the shaft member 988a, and is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 175, the distribution member 32983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 32983 When an inertial force acts on the pachinko machine 10 in the front side direction (direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 175), the center of gravity of the distribution member 32983 and the axial center position of the shaft member 988a are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the inertial force acting on the distribution member 32983 does not generate a moment.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 175 arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 32983, the distribution member 32983 The displacement from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Further, the distribution member 32983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 32983 is on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Even when an inertial force acts in the direction (direction opposite to the direction indicated by the arrow F1 in FIG. 175), the inertial force acting on the distribution member 32983 does not generate a moment.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 32983 in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction opposite to the direction of the arrow F1 in FIG. 175). The displacement of the distribution member 32983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, the distribution member 32983 is formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. Therefore, the shape of the distribution member 32983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since the distribution member 32983 has no directionality, the assembling property can be improved.

Next, the winning opening unit 33930 according to the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In the 32nd embodiment, the shape of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution member 33983 is formed differently on the opening U6 side and the opening U7 side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 176 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 33930 according to the 32nd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 176 (a), the distribution member 33983 is in the first position. In FIG. 176 (b), the state in which the distribution member 33983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution member 33983 is formed by being curved in an arc shape protruding toward the opening U6 side. The protruding surface 33983b1 is formed, and the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 176 (a)) of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape recessed toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 33983. A concave surface 33983b2 is formed. Further, the acting portion 33983a of the distribution member 33983 on the opening U7 side is formed so as to project toward the intermediate plate 33983b (upper side of FIG. 176 (a)) as it advances toward the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 176 (a)) and acts. The upper surface of the portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 form a uniform surface. In other words, the boundary between the upper surface of the working portion 33983a and the concave surface 33983b2 is formed on the same surface.

In the state where the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the first position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, and the first 1 When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 33983 through the winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980, the game ball is on the concave surface 33983b2 and the opening U7 side of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980 (FIG. 176 (a)). The ball is thrown to the acting portion 33983a (on the left side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the second position. ..

Here, the concave surface 33983b2 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape recessed toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 33983, and has a uniform surface with the upper surface of the working portion 33983a. In order to form the ball, the velocity component of the game ball sent to the distribution unit 33980 to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)) is set to the opening U7 side (FIG. 176 (b)). The game ball can be thrown to the opening U7 by changing the velocity component to (left side). That is, since the velocity component to the opening U7 side can be imparted to the game ball, the ball can be thrown in a shorter time than the ball thrown to the opening U7 in the 18th embodiment.

Therefore, the throwing time of the game ball to the passage TR3 (fifth passage) by the distribution member 33983 can be shortened as compared with the throwing time in the eighteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in a state where the distribution member 33983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 is the first of the front unit 19940. When the ball flows into the inside of the receiving portion 19941 g, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 33980, and is thrown to the distribution member 33983, the game ball is a protrusion of the intermediate plate 33983b of the distribution unit 33980. The ball is thrown to the acting portion 19983a on the 33983b1 and the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 176 (a), the distribution member 33983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the rotation axis, and the distribution member 33983 is placed in the first position. ..

Here, since the protruding surface 33983b1 of the intermediate plate 33983b is formed by being curved in an arc shape protruding toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 176 (b)), it is formed on a straight line in 18 embodiments. The sliding or rolling distance of the intermediate plate 33983b on the protruding surface 33983b1 can be increased as compared with the side surface of the intermediate plate 19883b (see FIG. 161).

Further, since the game ball approaches the axis of the shaft member 988a by sliding or rolling on the protrusion 33983b1, the moment acting on the distribution member 33983 can be reduced. As a result, the rotation time of the distribution member 33983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down.

Therefore, the throwing time of the game ball to the passage TR4 (fourth passage) by the distribution member 33983 can be made longer than the throwing time in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 33983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 33980 are detected by the detection device SE5. It is possible to reduce the difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6, suppress the loss of interest in the game, and secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 33983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 33980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the distribution member 19983 is rotatably supported by the shaft (see FIG. 161) has been described, but in the 33rd embodiment, the distribution member 19983 is rotatably supported by the front and rear. It is arranged so as to be displaceable in the direction and the vertical direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 177 (a), the distribution member 19983 is in the first position. In FIG. 177 (b), the distribution member 19983 maintains the posture (angle) arranged at the first position inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j described later. The state displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)) is shown, and FIG. 177 (c) shows the state in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. For ease of understanding, in the enlarged view shown in FIG. 177, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are shown by solid lines, and the distribution member 19983 is shown by chain lines.

In the winning port unit 34930 in the 33rd embodiment, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j have an oval shape that is inclined and extended in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are directed toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. Is formed in. Here, the oval shape means a shape in which both ends are formed in an arc shape having a radius equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a, and the pair of both ends are connected by a pair of linear shapes. Further, the pair of linear shapes are arranged in parallel, and the distance between them is arranged to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 can be displaced in the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the distribution member 19983 is rotatably arranged in the distribution unit 34980, and is displaceable in the front-rear direction (FIG. 177 (a) left-right direction) and the up-down direction (FIG. 177 (a) up-down direction). It is arranged in the setting.

As shown in FIG. 177 (a), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as by hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 1), and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. When an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 is on the front side (FIG. 177 (a)). Acting on the left side), the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j as shown in FIG. 177 (b). That is, the distribution member 19983 is displaced forward due to the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983.

Further, due to the displacement of the distribution member 19983 to the front side, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. ..

Further, since the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as it is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement (rotation) of the component member 19983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 177 (b), when the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the opening U6 side of the distribution member 19983 (FIG. 177 (b)). ) The contact between the acting portion 19983a on the right side) and the back surface side contact portion 19982b2 of the lower surface plate 19982b formed on the bulging portion 34982 of the first side surface base 34981 can be maintained. As a result, the distribution member 19983 can maintain the posture (angle) arranged at the first position.

In the state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), that is, when the shaft member 988a is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), the shaft member The 988a is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j by gravity, that is, is displaced to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), so that FIG. As shown in, the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The state in which the branch member 19983 is arranged at the first position can be maintained.

Here, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the front surface. The distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h of the unit 19940 and the distribution member 19983 is formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 34980 in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), and the distribution member 19983 moves from the first position to the second position. In the case of displacement, there is a possibility that the game ball may be caught between the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the distribution member 19983.

On the other hand, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment have an oval shape that extends inclined to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)), in other words. And, it is formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). Therefore, due to the weight of the distribution member 19983 and the force acting on the distribution member 19983 in the one side (lower side in the gravity direction) direction due to the contact between the distribution member 19983 and the game ball flowing down in the distribution unit 34980. The distribution member 19983 is displaced to the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) and one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), and the game ball whose bite state is released is the fifth passage (passage TR3). Can be thrown to.

As shown in FIG. 177 (b), in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side of FIG. 177 (b)), the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980 and the front unit 19940. The distance between the intermediate receiving portion 19943e and the intermediate port 19941h and the distribution member 19983 may be formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

A game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 138) flows into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941 g of the front unit 19940, passes through the first winning opening 64 and the opening U8 of the distribution unit 34980, and passes through the opening U8 of the first winning opening 64 and the distribution unit 34980. When the ball is thrown to the distribution member 19983, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 19983b and the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 177 (a)) of the distribution unit 19980.

Here, as described above, since the game ball thrown to the distribution unit 19980 has a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)), the throwing direction of the game ball and the extension of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. The installation direction has the same directional component in that it advances on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) toward the rear side.

Therefore, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). While maintaining the distribution member 19983, the distribution member 19983 is rotated around the axis of the shaft member 988a as a rotation axis, and is in a state of being arranged at the second position as shown in FIG. 177 (c).

An external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 19983 is directed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 177 (a) direction in arrow F1). ), The shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 has the inside of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j on the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)) as in the state of being arranged at the first position. That is, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 19983 from being illicitly rotated from the second position to the first position by being displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction).

As a result, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, that is, on the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)). The distribution member 19983 is rotationally displaced with the axis of the shaft member 988a as the axis of rotation by the throwing of the game ball, and is arranged at the first position as shown in FIG. 177 (a). Will be done.

The bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). , Even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 19983, the distribution is performed. By displacing the inside of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, the shaft member 988a of the member 19983 can prevent the distribution member 19983 from being improperly rotated from the second position to the first position.

Further, gravity acts on the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 which is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)), that is, to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. As a result, since it is disposed at the first position, a driving means such as an actuator that displaces the distribution member 19983 to the first position becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the product cost can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 19983 from being maintained in a state of being displaced forward due to poor control of the drive means or the like.

Further, an external force is continuously applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 177 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 continuously acts on the distribution member 19983. Even in such a case, the distribution member 19983 can maintain the state of being arranged at the first position by the action of gravity.

The bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and it is formed in an oval shape that inclines and extends in the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)). May be done.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction in a state where the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the second position. (See FIG. 1) When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the back side direction (FIG. 177 (c) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983 is rearward. Acting on the side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)), the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (c)) inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j. That is, the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the rear side by the inertial force generated in the distribution member 19983.

Further, due to the displacement of the distribution member 19983 to the rear side, friction is generated between the shaft member 988a and the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, and the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force can be consumed. ..

Further, since the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) as it is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 177 (b)), the kinetic energy applied to the distribution member 19983 by the external force is the potential energy. Can be converted to.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 19983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 177 (c)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement (rotation) of the component member 19983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j in the present embodiment are formed in an oval shape that is inclined and extends in the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the portion connecting the pair of both ends may be formed in a curved shape, or may be formed from both a curved shape and a linear shape. As a result, the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j are formed in a shape corresponding to the external force (see FIG. 1) applied to the pachinko machine 10, so that the distribution member 19983 is illegally rotated from the second position to the first position. Can be suppressed.

Further, although the case where the pair of linear shapes are arranged in parallel has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of linear shapes may be arranged in a non-parallel manner.

For example, the distance between the facing surfaces may be increased from the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 177 (a)) to the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 177 (a)). As a result, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 displaced to the opening U7 side can rotate and be displaced inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 34980 in a state where the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 is displaced to the front side (left side in FIG. 177 (b)), and the distribution member Even when the 19983 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the game ball is bitten between the projecting portion 19982d of the distribution unit 34980, the intermediate receiving portion 19943e or the intermediate port 19941h of the front unit 19940, and the distribution member 19983. It can suppress the squeeze.

In order for the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 19983 to be displaceably arranged inside the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j, it is preferable that the inner lower surface of the bearing portions 34982c and 34985j is formed in a linear shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 19983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 34980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 35930 in the 34th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. In the 34th embodiment, the distribution member 31983 is arranged at a position biased in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 35930 according to the 34th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 178 (a), the distribution member 31983 is in the first position. In FIG. 178 (b), the state in which the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated. In FIG. 178, the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are shown by chain lines only in the outer shape for easy understanding.

In the winning opening unit 35930 according to the 34th embodiment, the front side contact portion 19982b1 and the back side contact portion 35982b2 of the lower surface plate 35982b formed on the bulging portion 35982 of the first side surface base 35981 are in the vertical direction (FIG. 178 (FIG. 178). a) It is formed asymmetrically with respect to (vertical direction), and the upper surface of the back surface side contact portion 35982b2 is formed so as to project above the upper surface of the front side contact portion 19982b1 (upward direction in FIG. 178 (a)).

As a result, the angle θ4 formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position is formed by the horizontal line HL and the intermediate line TL in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position. It is formed larger than the angle θ3.

Further, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is not transmitted to the outer ring, and the distribution member 31983 is moved from the second position. When the gear is displaced (rotated) to the first position (see FIG. 161), the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

Here, conventionally, a game machine including a ball entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side has been known. ing. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the ball entry port is arranged above the distribution member in the vertical direction in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball entered into the ball entry port is distributed. There was a problem that the mode until reaching the member became monotonous and the interest of the game was insufficient.

On the other hand, in the winning opening unit 35930 in the present embodiment, since the distribution member 31983 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (a)) of the first winning opening 64, the ball enters the first winning opening 64. By the time the game ball reaches the distribution member 31983, the game ball is displaced in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Therefore, the game in which the game ball flowing down the front side (see FIG. 138) of the game board 13 in the downward direction (FIG. 178 (a) downward direction) or in the left-right direction (FIG. 178 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) is visually recognized. It is possible for a person to visually recognize the displacement of the game ball in a direction different from the previous one (front-back direction). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the distribution member 31983 has a velocity component direction (vertical direction (FIG. 178 (a) vertical direction) and a front-rear direction) provided by the game ball with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64. Since the game balls are arranged unevenly in substantially the same direction as (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction)), the game ball is brought into contact with the distribution member 31983 while maintaining the velocity component. Therefore, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the game ball can be displaced quickly, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the shaft member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 178 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 178 (a) left-right direction). Since the axial center position of the above is arranged, the game ball comes into contact with the intermediate plate 19983b on the axial center side of the axial member 31988a of the distribution member 31983 in the state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position. .. Therefore, the moment acting on the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and the damage of the intermediate plate 19983b (distribution member 19983) can be suppressed.

Further, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the rotation of the inner ring of the one-way gear WG is transmitted to the outer ring.

Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be made slower than the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, even when the degree of freedom in design is secured, that is, when the distribution member 31983 is arranged in a state where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 The difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled and designed. The degree of freedom can be secured.

Further, since the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are arranged outside the second cover member, they can be easily removed. Therefore, the adjustment time of the detection time difference can be reduced.

In particular, the rotational resistance of the distribution member 31983 can be obtained by utilizing the inertial force when starting the driven of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 in the stopped state. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member 31983, and in the present invention in which the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member 31983 is relatively small, the difference in the distribution time of the distribution member 31983 can be set. It is effective as a configuration to make it smaller.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of gears to be arranged is three has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of gears may be two or less or two or more. good. By increasing or decreasing the number of gears, it is possible to easily adjust the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6. Yes (see Figure 161).

As shown in FIG. 178 (a), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 31983 having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (a)). When the game balls come into contact with each other, the game ball loses the velocity component to the rear side due to the contact between the game ball and the distribution member 31983. Next, the game ball is displaced to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) due to the weight of the game ball, and abuts on the action portion on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 178 (a)) to position the first position to the second position. Displace (rotate) to.

Here, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)). When the member 31983 comes into contact with the member 3, the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied.

As a result, the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and the displacement (rotation) speed at which the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position are set. different. In the present embodiment, the displacement (rotation) speed of the distribution member 31983 displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position of the distribution member 31983. ) Faster than the displacement (rotational) speed.

That is, the displacement (rotation) speed of the distribution member 31983 when the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the first position is the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 when the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position. ) Slower than speed.

Therefore, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 178 (b)) of the distribution member 31983 may come into contact with the back surface side contact portion 35982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 19983a (distribution member 31983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, so that the one-way gear WG and the third gear GY3 , Friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the 4th gear GY4 and the 5th gear GY5.

As a result, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down, so that damage to the working portion 19983a (distribution member 31983) can be suppressed.

Here, when the rotation of the distribution member 31983 due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position is transmitted to the one-way gear WG, the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, and the fourth gear Since friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the GY4 and the fifth gear GY5, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position is delayed. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) collides with the distribution member 31983, the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surface of each gear tooth causes the distribution member 31983. Cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position in a state where the game ball bounces (separates). Therefore, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated), and the distribution member 31983 is rebounded in the state of being arranged at the second position. If the (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 31983, the game ball may be thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, the one-way gear WG in the present embodiment has a configuration in which the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 is not transmitted to the one-way gear WG when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position. It is said that. Therefore, no friction (resistance) is generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5, and the first from the second position of the distribution member 31983. The displacement (rotation) to the position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 178 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 31983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 31983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 31983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (rebounded) from the distribution member 31983, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 31983 comes into contact with the distribution member 31983, and the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 31983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction (FIG. 178 (b) arrow F2 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the gears of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 are respectively. It is possible to suppress the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position due to the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surface of the teeth.

Further, since the one-way gear WG is configured to switch the rotation to the gear formed on the outer ring between transmission and non-transmission, it is possible to surely form a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction. Further, since the configuration can be relatively simple as to whether or not the gears are driven, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability can be improved accordingly.

Further, since the distribution member 31983 is formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, the shape of the distribution member 31983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, the ease of assembly can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the outer ring of the one-way gear WG is not rotated due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG rotates the distribution member 31983 as the third gear. When the outer ring of the one-way gear WG rotates due to the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 31983 from the second position to the first position without transmitting to the GY3, the fourth gear GY4 and the fifth gear GY5, the one-way gear WG changes. Although the case where the rotation of the distribution member 31983 is transmitted to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5 has been described, the one-way gear WG may act in the opposite direction.

That is, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Then, when the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the one-way gear WG transmits the rotation of the distribution member 31983 to the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. It may be configured not to.

In this case, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 31983 is directed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 178 (a) arrow F1 direction). When the inertial force of the above is applied, the distribution member 31983 is caused by the friction (resistance) generated on the meshing surfaces of the gear teeth of the one-way gear WG, the third gear GY3, the fourth gear GY4, and the fifth gear GY5. Can be suppressed from being displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 31983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 31980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In the 35th embodiment, the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position biased in the front-rear direction with respect to the arrangement position of the opening U10. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 179 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 179 (a), the distribution member 24983 is in the first position. In FIG. 179 (b), the state in which the distribution member 24983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 36930 in the 35th embodiment, the distribution member 24983 is arranged. As described above, the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 in the direction connecting the acting portion 19983a and the acting portion 24983a (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is the amount that the protrusion 24983a protrudes, so that the intermediate plate 19983b It is located on the side of the acting portion 24983a (on the left side in FIG. 179 (a)).

Therefore, when the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) against gravity, so that the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) by using gravity, so that the displacement (rotation) can be increased. it can.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced.

Further, as a result, even when the distribution member 24983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game balls differs depending on the distribution direction, the time until the game balls flowing into the distribution unit 36980 are detected by the detection device SE5. The difference from the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be reduced to prevent the game from being spoiled, and the degree of freedom in design can be ensured.

Further, since the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 36980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be adjusted by the distribution member 24983. The structure of the distribution unit 36980 can be simplified to reduce the product cost, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the 4th passage or the 5th passage and the arrangement position of the detection device SE5 or the detection device SE6. it can.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 36980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 36980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the bias direction of the distribution member 24983 with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64 and the velocity component toward the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

Here, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)). When the member 24983 comes into contact with the member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the first position in a state where the velocity component is applied to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)). Therefore, the acting portion 19983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 179 (b)) of the distribution member 24983 may abut on the back surface side contact portion 36982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 19983a (distribution member 24983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the working portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is from the lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). Since the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down. It is possible to prevent the portion 19983a (distribution member 24983) from being damaged.

Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 24983 is arranged on the rear side (right side of FIG. 179 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 179).

Here, the acting portion 24983a arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 is unilaterally in the gravity direction (gravity direction) from the lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). When the protrusion 24983a1 is formed so as to project from the lower side), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the first position to the second position is delayed by the amount of the protrusion 24983a1. Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) collides with the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 moves from the first position in a state where the game ball bounces (separates). Displace (rotate) to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 24983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated). With the distribution member 24983 placed in the second position, the bouncing (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 24983, so that the ball is thrown to the opening U6 opposite to the direction in which the game ball is originally distributed. There is a risk of being displaced.

On the other hand, the working portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)) of the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment is in the direction of gravity from its lower surface (lower surface in FIG. 179 (a)). It is formed with a protrusion 24983a1 that is formed so as to project on one side (lower side in the direction of gravity). Therefore, when the displacement (rotation) is performed from the first position to the second position, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 24983 from the first position to the second position can be performed quickly.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 24983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 24983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 24983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 24983, the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 24983 comes into contact with the distribution member 24983, and the distribution member 24983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 24983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 24983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 24983 (distribution member). The angle formed by the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of 24983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 24983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 24983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 179 (b)), the pachinko machine is shaken. The displacement of the component member 24983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

The case where the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment includes an action portion 24983a on which the protrusion 24983a1 is formed and is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a weight member may be arranged on the acting portion 24983a of the distribution member 24983.

That is, in the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the protrusion portion 24983a1 is integrally molded with the action portion 24983a arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 179 (a)), whereas the weight member can be removed. It may be arranged. Similar to the distribution member 24983 in the present embodiment, the weight member to be disposed may be disposed so as to project from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, or may be embedded inside the acting portion 24983a.

By exchanging the weight member, the difference between the time until detection by the detection device SE5 and the time until detection by the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161) can be easily adjusted.

When the weight member is embedded, it is possible to prevent the recess 24982b3 from being arranged in the front side contact portion 36982b1, and the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the weight member from protruding from the lower surface of the acting portion 24983a, it is possible to suppress damage to the distribution member 24983 during assembly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 24983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 37930 in the 36th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. In the 36th embodiment, the receiving surface of the distribution member 37983 that receives the game ball is formed as a curved surface 37983h that projects toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 180 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 37930 according to the 36th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section of the CLXI-CLXI line in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 180 (a), the distribution member 37983 is in the first position. In FIG. 180 (b), the state in which the distribution member 37983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 37930 according to the 36th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 37983 is located on the rear side (right side of FIG. 180 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 180 (a) left-right direction). The axial center position is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 180A, both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b of the distribution member 37983 are formed so as to be curved in an arc shape so as to project toward the axial center of the shaft member 988a.

Further, the acting portion 37983a of the distribution member 37983 is formed so as to project toward the intermediate plate 37983b (upper side of FIG. 180 (a)) as it advances toward the shaft member 988a side (right side of FIG. 180 (a)), and is formed so as to project from the upper surface of the acting portion 37983a. And both side surfaces of the intermediate plate 37983b form a uniform curved surface 37983h.

Further, the axial center position of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 37983 is arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 180 (a)).

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 37980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 37980 has a velocity component toward the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 180 (b), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 37983 having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the game balls come into contact with each other, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the game ball maintains the velocity component to the rear side or the velocity component is increased to the opening U6. The ball is thrown. That is, among the forces acting on the distribution member 37983 when the game balls come into contact with each other, the force component that displaces (rotates) the distribution member 37983 can be reduced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the member 37983 comes into contact with the member 37983, the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied. Therefore, the acting portion 37983a on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 180 (b)) of the distribution member 37983 may abut on the back surface side abutting portion 37982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 37983a (distribution member 37983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, among the forces acting on the distribution member 37983 when the game ball comes into contact with the game ball. Since the force component that displaces (rotates) the distribution member 37983 can be reduced, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 37983 from the second position to the first position can be slowed down, so that the acting portion 37983a (distribution member) It is possible to prevent the 37983) from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), in a state where the distribution member 37983 is arranged at the first position, a game ball and a distribution member having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). When the game ball comes into contact with the 37983, the game ball slides or rolls on the curved surface 37983h of the distribution member 37983, so that the speed component to the rear side of the game ball is on the front side (right side in FIG. 180 (b)). It is converted into a velocity component to and thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 37983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 37983 to the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 (see FIG. 161). ), Even if the length of the throwing passage is different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled and to secure the degree of freedom in design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the fifth passage is formed longer than the fourth passage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and even if the fifth passage is formed shorter than the fourth passage. good. That is, in the distribution of the distribution member 37983 in the two directions, the fifth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball slowly may be formed shorter than the fourth passage formed on the side that distributes the game ball faster. .. In this case, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 37980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 can be adjusted (see FIG. 161), and the game can be adjusted. It can enhance the interest.

Next, the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. In the 37th embodiment, the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the acting portions 38983a3 and 38983a4 is formed differently. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 181 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a), and in FIG. 181 (a), the distribution member 38983 is in the first position. In FIG. 181 (b), the state in which the distribution member 38983 is arranged in the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 38930 in the 37th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 38983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 181 (a) left-right direction). The axis of is arranged.

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 38980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 38980 has a velocity component toward the rear side. Further, the bias direction of the distribution member 24983 with respect to the first receiving portion 19941 g and the first winning opening 64 and the velocity component toward the rear side of the game ball are formed in substantially the same direction.

Further, the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed toward the tip from the shaft member 988a side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) which is a connecting portion with the contact portion 19983d. , Is formed to a thickness smaller than the tip of the working portion 19983a in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the angle θ8 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed larger than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side (see FIG. 161).

Further, the acting portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 181 (a)) is directed toward the tip from the shaft member 988a side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) which is a connecting portion with the contact portion 19983d. It is formed to a certain thickness dimension.

Therefore, the angle θ9 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed to be smaller than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (see FIG. 161).

Therefore, the tip of the working portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the working portion 19983a (see FIG. 161).

As a result, the distribution member 38983 is formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b, and is arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) with the acting portion 38983a3 and the opening U6 side (FIG. 181 (a)). The center of gravity of the distribution member 38983 in the direction connecting the working portion 38983a4 arranged on the right side) (the direction orthogonal to the erection direction of the intermediate plate 19983b) is on the opening U6 side of the intermediate plate 19983b (FIG. 181 (a)). Located on the right side).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the first position, and an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as hitting the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) to shake the pachinko machine 10. When an inertial force acts on the distribution member 38983 in the front side direction (FIG. 181 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 38983. The angle formed by (the direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the distribution member 38983) and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 38983 (the direction of arrow F1 in FIG. 181 (a)) is the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed smaller than the above. As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 25983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force in the front side direction (FIG. 181 (a) arrow F1 direction) of the pachinko machine 10 acts on the distribution member 38983, the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 38983 from the first position to the second position can be suppressed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), in a state where the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the second position, a game ball and distribution having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)). When the member 38983 comes into contact with the member 38983, the distribution member 38983 is arranged at the first position in a state where a velocity component to the rear side is applied. Therefore, the acting portion 38983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (b)) of the distribution member 38983 may abut on the back surface side contact portion 38982b2 at high speed, and the acting portion 38983a4 (distribution member 38983) may be damaged. is there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball has an angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 and the upper surface of the acting portion 38983a4 arranged on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 181 (a)). θ9 is formed to be smaller than the angle formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U6 side (see FIG. 161), that is, Since the tip of the acting portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the acting portion 19983a (see FIG. 161), it is possible to prevent the acting portion 38983a4 (distribution member 38983) from being damaged.

Here, since the tip of the acting portion 38983a4 is formed to be thicker than the tip of the acting portion 19983a (see FIG. 161), the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 38983 from the first position to the second position is slow. Become.

Therefore, when a game ball having a velocity component toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 181 (b)) collides with the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 cannot be displaced (rotated) together with the game ball, and the game ball bounces off ( In the separated state, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position while the game ball is rebounding (separated), and the distribution member 38983 is rebounded in the state of being arranged at the second position. If the (separated) game ball falls and comes into contact with the distribution member 38983, the game ball may be thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, the angle θ8 formed by the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 in the present embodiment and the upper surface of the working portion 38983a3 arranged on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 181 (a)) is the 18th embodiment. Since the angle formed between the side surface of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 19983 and the upper surface of the working portion 19983a arranged on the opening U7 side in the embodiment (see FIG. 161), the distribution member 38983 is a game. It is possible to impart more velocity component toward the opening U7 to the sphere than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

That is, the distribution member 38983 can impart a large amount of velocity components in the same direction as the rotation direction of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983 to the game ball. In other words, the distribution member 38983 can reduce the addition of the velocity component to the game ball in the direction deviating from the rotation region of the intermediate plate 19983b of the distribution member 38983.

Therefore, even when the game ball having the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 179 (b)) comes into contact with the distribution member 38983 and the game ball bounces off the distribution member 38983, it is distributed together with the game ball. The member 38983 can be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and the game ball can be thrown to the opening U7.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 38983, the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 38983 comes into contact with the distribution member 38983, and the distribution member 38983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

Further, in the game ball, since the velocity component toward the opening U7 is given more than the velocity component toward the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment, the distribution member 31983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. In this case, the distribution member 38983 can throw the game ball to the opening U7 in a shorter time than the throwing time to the opening U7 in the eighteenth embodiment.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 38980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, when the distribution member 38983 is arranged at a position where the distribution time of the game ball differs depending on the distribution direction, or the length of the throwing passage from the distribution member 38983 to the detection device SE5 and the throwing passage to the detection device SE6. Even when the lengths of the balls are different, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 38980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until the game ball is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced (see FIG. 161). ), It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled and to secure the degree of freedom in design.

Next, the winning opening unit 39930 in the 38th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. In the 38th embodiment, the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c of the bulging portion 39982 formed on the first side surface base 39981 of the distribution unit 39980 is on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). It is formed so as to project to. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 39930 according to the 38th embodiment, which corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). In FIG. 182 (a), the distribution member 39983 is in the first position. In FIG. 182 (b), the state in which the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position is illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 39930 in the 38th embodiment, the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 39983 is located rearward (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) from the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left-right direction). The axis of is arranged.

Further, the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) and the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the distribution member 39983 are formed asymmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. , The acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side is formed longer than the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side.

Therefore, when the axial center of the shaft member 988a of the distribution member 39983 is arranged on the rear side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the center position of the opening U10 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 182 (a) left-right direction). Also, the acting portion 39983a3 of the distribution member 39983 arranged at the first position is arranged in the passing region of the game ball, and the game ball and the acting portion 39983a3 of the distribution member 39983 can come into contact with each other. As a result, the distribution member 39983 can be displaced from the first position to the second position.

Further, the first curved wall 39982c1 of the game ball guide wall 39982c is formed to be curved so as to project toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)), and the lower end of the first curved wall 39982c1 is the first. It is formed with an overhanging portion 39982c3 that projects into the opening U10 from the first curved wall 19982c1 in the 18th embodiment (see FIG. 161).

Further, as described above, the game ball flowing into the inside of the first receiving portion 19941g by the projecting portion 19941g1 is thrown to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) and passes through the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown to the distribution unit 39980. Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 39980 has a velocity component toward the rear side.

Therefore, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 39980 with the velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) slides or rolls on the first curved wall 39982c1 and hits the overhanging portion 39982c3. By contacting the ball, the ball is thrown to the distribution member 39983 with a velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)). Further, when gravity acts on the game ball, the ball is sent to the distribution member 39983 with a velocity component on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity).

That is, the game ball has a velocity component in the same direction as the rotational displacement of the acting portion 19983a on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the distribution member 39983 whose rotation axis is the axis of the shaft member 988a. The ball is thrown to the component member 39983.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the first position, a game ball having a velocity component toward the front side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) is a distribution member. When the distribution member 39983 abuts on 39983 and is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, it is compared with the case where the game ball has a velocity component to the rear side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)). Therefore, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 39983 can be increased.

Further, since the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side of FIG. 182 (a)) of the sorting member 39983 is formed longer than the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side of FIG. 182 (a)), the sorting member 39983 The center of gravity of the above is located on the acting portion 39983a3 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

Therefore, when the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) against its own weight, so that the displacement can be delayed. On the other hand, when the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) by using its own weight, so that the displacement (rotation) can be increased. it can.

As shown in FIG. 182 (b), in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position, the game ball and the distribution member 39983 having a velocity component (left side in FIG. 182 (b)) toward the player side. When the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position due to contact with each other, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983 are different. Since it is formed in the opposite direction, the displacement (rotation) of the distribution member 39983 can be slowed down.

Therefore, the difference between the distribution time of the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 39980 to the fourth passage and the distribution time to the fifth passage can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 39980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be secured.

Further, in a state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the second position, an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 such as shaking the glass unit 16 of the pachinko machine 10 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 1), and the distribution member 39983 is subjected to an external force. When an inertial force acts in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)), the direction connecting the axial center position of the shaft member 988a and the center of gravity of the distribution member 39983 (distribution member). The angle formed by the direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of 39983 and the direction of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 (direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)) is compared with that of the distribution member 19983 in the 18th embodiment. It is formed small (see FIG. 161). As a result, the rotational component of the inertial force acting on the distribution member 39983 can be reduced.

Therefore, even when an external force is applied to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) and an inertial force acts on the distribution member 39983 in the back side direction of the pachinko machine 10 (in the direction of arrow F2 in FIG. 182 (b)), the pachinko machine 10 is shaken. The displacement of the component member 39983 from the second position to the first position can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), in the state where the distribution member 39983 is arranged at the first position, the velocity component of the game ball toward the player and the displacement (rotation) direction of the distribution member 39983. Is formed in substantially the same direction, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from separating (rebounding) from the distribution member 39983 due to the collision between the game ball and the distribution member 39983.

Therefore, while the game ball is separated (bounced) from the distribution member 39983, the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position and is placed at the game ball and the second position. The distribution member 39983 comes into contact with the distribution member 39983, and the distribution member 39983 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position together with the game ball to prevent the game ball from being thrown into the opening U6 opposite to the original distribution direction. it can.

In the distribution member 39983 of the present embodiment, the acting portion 39983a3 on the opening U7 side (left side in FIG. 182 (a)) and the acting portion 39983a4 on the opening U6 side (right side in FIG. 182 (a)) are asymmetric with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the acting portions 39983a3 and 39983a4 may be formed symmetrically with respect to the intermediate plate 19983b.

In this case, the configuration of the distribution member 39983 can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the winning opening unit 40930 in the 39th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the detection device SE6 is arranged between the passage TR10 and the passage TR9 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 39th embodiment, the detection device SE6 is arranged in the passage TR3. Will be set up. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 183 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 40930 according to the 39th embodiment, in which the distribution member 19983 is arranged at the first position corresponding to the cross section in the CLXI-CLXI line of FIG. 139 (a). Illustrated.

In the winning opening unit 40930 in the 39th embodiment, since the detection device SE6 is arranged in the passage TR3, the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the detection device SE6 The difference from the time until detection can be reduced.

As a result, the difference between the time until the game ball flowing into the distribution unit 40980 is detected by the detection device SE5 and the time until it is detected by the detection device SE6 is reduced, and the interest of the game is impaired. It can be suppressed and the degree of freedom in design can be secured.

Further, since the front base 40943 of the front unit 40940 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, the player can visually recognize that the game ball inserts the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE6, which enhances the interest of the game. it can.

Here, in the winning port unit 19930 according to the 18th embodiment, since the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player of the detection device SE6, the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 is on the front side. (It is arranged on the left side of FIG. 183 (b)), and then needs to be folded back toward the rear side (left side of FIG. 183 (b)), and the wiring (not shown) of the detection device SE6 becomes long.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), so that the assembly of the winning opening unit 40930 is simplified. , Product cost can be reduced.

Further, since the wiring (not shown) connected to the detection device SE6 can be arranged on the rear side (right side in FIG. 183 (a)), that is, can be arranged at a position far from the player, the detection device SE6 is illegally arranged. It is possible to suppress the operation.

Next, the winning opening unit 41930 in the 40th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. In the eighteenth embodiment, the case where the solenoid 610 is arranged on the side opposite to the player in the passage TR10 has been described (see FIG. 161), but in the 40th embodiment, the solenoid 610 is on one side of the passage TR10 in the direction of gravity. It is arranged (lower side in the direction of gravity). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the front side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the front side (or the front side), and the back side of the paper surface of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is referred to as the back side (or the rear side). Further, the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 1) is referred to as the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 1) in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 is referred to as the horizontal direction.

FIG. 184 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 41930 according to the 40th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line CLXI-CLXI in FIG. 139 (a). FIG. 185 (a) is a side view of the winning opening unit 41930, and FIG. 185 (b) is a rear view of the winning opening unit 41930. In FIG. 185, only the wing member 945 arranged in the front unit 19940, the solenoid 610 arranged in the passage unit 41990, the transmission member 41965, and the displacement member 41966 are shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the solenoid 610, the axis of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is along the direction of gravity (vertical direction of FIG. 184) on one side of the passage TR10 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Arranged. Therefore, the displacement direction of the protrusion 945b accompanying the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 and the displacement direction of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be made to coincide with each other.

Here, the displacement member 19966 in the eighteenth embodiment needs to be rotationally displaced (see FIG. 160) with the axis of the rotation shaft 19966d of the displacement member 19966 as the rotation axis in order to open and close the wing member 945. That is, it is necessary to convert the displacement of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 in the linear direction into the displacement in the rotational direction.

On the other hand, the displacement member 41966 in the present embodiment can open and close the wing member 945 by displacing the displacement member 41966 in the linear direction in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 184). That is, since the displacement in the linear direction of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 can be matched and the displacement directions of the annular portion 961c and the displacement member 41966 can be matched, the configuration of the displacement member 41966 is simplified and the product cost is reduced. it can.

Further, the dimensions of the winning opening unit 41930 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 184) can be reduced, and the winning opening unit 41930 can be miniaturized.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation portion 175 and the upper regulation portion 176 are arranged to face each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotational displacement radial direction of the driven member 163, or may be configured to face the driven member 163 in the rotation axis direction (the driven member 163 is displaced). It may be configured to be arranged to face the driven member 163 in the direction intersecting the plane to be driven). In this case, a frictional force is generated with the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 can be decelerated by the frictional force.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are always opposed to each other in the displacement direction of the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of the lower regulation unit 175 or the upper regulation unit 176 is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the driven member 163, and the driven member 163 is displaced at the timing when the driven member 163 is desired to be decelerated. It may be arranged so as to face the driven member 163 in the direction and retract out of the displacement locus of the driven member 163 at other timings. Thereby, a plurality of types of displacement modes of the driven member 163 can be configured.

In the first embodiment, an example of the arrangement of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driven member 163 may be arranged at an overlapping position in the displacement direction view, or the upper regulating portion 176 may be arranged closer to the rotation axis side of the driven member 163 than the lower regulating portion 175. Is also good.

Further, not only when the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 are arranged on the left and right sides of the rotation shaft of the driven member 163, one of the lower regulation unit 175 and the upper regulation unit 176 is on the left side and the other. May be arranged on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 exerts an electromagnetic force in the direction of pulling up the driven member 163 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 may be arranged below the driven member 163 to generate an electromagnetic force that pushes it up. Further, instead of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1, a rotary motor may be used to drive the driven member 163.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting means 181 is composed of LEDs has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a miniature bulb, a laser, an illumination plate, or a small liquid crystal display surface.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 is suppressed by forming a gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, instead of closing the gap, a high-damping resin member may be filled in the region between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180. In this case, vibration transmission can be suppressed while narrowing the arrangement space of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illumination substrate 180.

On the contrary, the gap between the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 and the illuminated substrate 180 may be closed, and the filling of the resin member may be omitted. In this case, since it is possible to promote vibration transmission to the illuminated substrate 180 when the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 is driven, it is possible to perform an effect of oscillating the light emitted from the light emitting means 181 in accordance with the vibration of the illuminated substrate 180. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light transmission hole 60c is composed of one large opening has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a punching metal may have a plurality of through holes.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outer portion 94 is formed in the shape of a thin plate has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a partial opening may be formed. In this case, by forming an opening at a position that matches the arrangement of the light emitting means 181 in the front view, it is possible to prevent the plate portion of the illuminated substrate 180 from being visually recognized while exposing the light emitting means 181 in the front view. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted to the elevating plate 430 by the arm member 414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be transmitted by an endless gear belt or may be transmitted by a cam mechanism.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation angle width of the auxiliary arm member 444 is vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be asymmetrical in the vertical direction, or it may be configured to have a rotation angle width only in the vertical direction with respect to the horizontal direction.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elongated hole portion 406 is an elongated hole long in the horizontal direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a long hole that extends at an angle with respect to the horizontal direction, a long hole that has a curved shape, or a long hole that has a portion that extends in the vertical direction. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary arm member 444 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of pinnate members 460 abut against each other to form a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide a slight gap from the design stage. As a result, the fatigue accumulated due to the contact with the pinnate member 460 can be eliminated as compared with the case where the pinnate member 460 comes into contact with each other, so that the durability of the pinnate member 460 can be improved. It should be noted that, through this gap, the pattern formed on the back side of the gap and the light emitted from the light emitting means may be configured to be visible to the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate members 460 are the same has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adjusting the gear ratio so that the size of the arcuate gear 462 of the pinnate member 460 is different on the left and right, the displacement amount and the displacement speed of the pair of pinnate member 460 may be different. As a result, the contact surface S1 can be displaced from the left-right center position even when the shape of the side where the pair of pinnate members 460 are in contact with each other is symmetrical.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate member 460 at the time of contact is visually recognized in a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, most of the parts may be symmetrical, but may be partially different. For example, a part of the shape may be asymmetrical, the pattern drawn on the front side may be asymmetrical, or the color may be asymmetrical. Even in this case, since most of the pinnate member 460 has a symmetrical shape, the player can be made to think that the pinnate member 460 has a symmetrical shape.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 that are in contact with each other are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of pinnate members 460 may be configured to move in parallel in the left-right direction and come into contact with each other. In this case, the left pinnate member 460 can be formed in a larger area than the right pinnate member 460 in comparison with the shape of the back case 310.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pinnate members 460 supported and displaced by the elevating plate 430 form a series of shapes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pinnate member 460 and an invariant predetermined member (for example, the center frame 86 of the game board 13) may be combined to form a symmetrical shape in a front view. As a result, the player can visually recognize the shape completed only by the pinnate member 460 and the shape completed by the other predetermined member and the pinnate member 460, thereby improving the effect of the pinnate member 460. Can be done.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light emitting effect member LA1, the pinnate member 460, and the auxiliary member 470 reminds us of the concept of "shellfish and pearls" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting effect member LA1 may be provided with a decorative pattern representing a bullet hole driven into the wall, and the pinnate member 460 and the auxiliary member 470 may be formed in a shape representing the momentum of a bullet. In this case, the shape of the pinnate member 460 can be diverted, and it can be realized by forming the light emitting effect member LA1 and the auxiliary member 470 with separate members having different decorations or shapes. That is, since it is possible to newly configure another operation unit by diverting a part of the members, the development cost can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elevating plate 430 is slidably displaced in the linear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 may be configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, and the elevating plate 430 may be configured to be displaceable in an arc trajectory centered on this shaft.

Further, when the tubular portion 444d of the auxiliary arm member 444 is configured to be pivotally supported in a fixed arrangement, the elevating plate 430 may still be configured to be displaced in one direction. In this case, the relative displacement member 442 may be configured to be slidable in the left-right direction so that the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction can be absorbed by the relative displacement member 442 side. For example, by providing an urging means or an electromagnetic solenoid that urges the relative displacement member 442 to the arc-shaped gear portion 444b side in the left-right direction, the tooth engagement between the arc-shaped gear portion 444b and the relative displacement member 442 is stabilized. be able to.

The arcuate gear portion 444b may not be made of a highly rigid resin material, but may be made of a flexible resin material used for a gear belt or the like. In this case, the displacement of the arcuate gear portion 444b in the left-right direction can be absorbed by the deformation of the material.

In the first embodiment, the case where the window portion defined in the central portion of the game board 13 by the center frame 86 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape inside the center frame 86 may be asymmetrical depending on the size of the pinnate member 460. As a result, the game board 13 can be provided with a function of hiding the back side by shielding and a function of improving the degree of freedom in the shape of the game area.

In the first embodiment, the case where the illumination substrate 777 is arranged on the back surface side of the light transmission hole 60c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination substrate 777 may be arranged inside the light transmission hole 60c. In this case, since the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 and the outer portion 94 of the flow bottom component 91 can be brought close to each other, the outer portion 94 is formed to be thin so that the outer portion 94 vibrates in response to the excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2. It is possible to perform a stirling (wavy) effect.

In other words, the portion displaced by the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 of the second operating unit 700 to be visually recognized by the player is arranged not only inside the window portion defined in the center frame 86 but also outside the window portion. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the case where the recessed portion of the base plate 60 arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 777 is arranged on the lower left and right sides of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a range that does not affect the flow of the game ball, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86, below the outer rail 62, or inside the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. You may.

In the first embodiment, the case where the partition member 708 is formed of a resin material having less bending (high-rigidity resin material) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 708 may be formed from a rubber resin material. In this case, the partition member 708 can be brought into close contact with the illuminated substrate 705 and the thin film cover member 712 by the elastic deformation of the partition member 708, and light leakage can be prevented.

In the first embodiment, the position where the left and right load members 761 come into contact with the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance between the reference O1 are the same, and the left and right load members 761 are arranged on the front side of the reference O1. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position where the load member 761 abuts on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 and the distance from the reference O1 may be different on the left and right, or the arrangement of the load member 761 on the reference O1 may be different on the left and right.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front inclined portion of the load member 761 is configured so as not to collide with the front lid member 770 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the load member 761 may be displaced to the front side so that the upper wall of the front lid member 770 and the front surface of the load member 761 come into contact with each other. In this case, even if the load member 761 is displaced to the front side due to the load applied from the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the arrangement of the load member 761 can be returned to the back side by the load applied from the front lid member 770.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right drive units 760 have a substantially symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the flexibility of the load member 761 is changed by a method such as changing the density (locally), changing the thickness, or changing the material of the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c of the left and right load members 761. good. As a result, when the left and right drive units 760 are in the one-sided excitation state, the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 stops can be changed depending on which of the left and right drive units 760 is driven. That is, it is possible to increase the posture in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be stopped.

Even if the left and right drive units 760 are left and right substantially symmetrical, the shape of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is asymmetrical (for example, the loaded portion 733 on one side). The same effect can be achieved by providing an extra wall thickness on the lower bottom side).

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to be vertically displaced while maintaining its posture, while the load member 761 may be configured to change its posture. As a result, even when the plate-shaped displacement member 730 does not change its posture, it is possible to configure a state in which the load member 761 is easily bent (posture) and a state in which the load member 761 is hard to bend (posture).

In the first embodiment, the case where the overhanging portion 761d is integrally formed with the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging portion 761d can be assembled to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c in an assembling manner such as fastening, engaging, fitting, fitting, and sandwiching, so that the overhanging portion 761d and the vertical rod-shaped extending portion 761c can be assembled. And may be composed separately. In this case, even if the overhanging portion 761d is damaged, the load member 761 up to the vertical bar-shaped extending portion 761c can be diverted and only the overhanging portion 761d needs to be replaced. In comparison, the size of the maintenance member can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b are displaced in the rotation axis direction of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the centers of the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b may be arranged at positions overlapping the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, since the direction of change in the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b based on the rotational displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be made orthogonal to the rotation axis of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be orthogonal to the rotation axis. The change in the distance between the small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b can be used not for the change in the posture of the hollow member 740 but for the change in the holding force of the hollow member 740.

That is, the distance between the front small receiving portion 735a and the rear small receiving portion 735b is mechanically narrowed by increasing the inclination angle of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. It can be used to sandwich from. Therefore, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed according to the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730.

In this case, the clearance of the front small receiving portion 735a and the protruding columnar portion 743 may be configured to be the same as the clearance of the rear small receiving portion 735b and the protruding columnar portion 743. In this case, since the holding force of the front and rear projecting columnar portions 743 also increases, the posture of the hollow member 740 is higher than that in the case where the side having a large clearance is allowed to rotate around the side having a small clearance. It is possible to easily suppress the change.

In the first embodiment, the case where the small receiving portion 735 supporting the pair of projecting columnar portions 743 of the hollow member 740 is arranged on the plate-shaped displacement member 730 separately before and after the reference O1 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair may be arranged together on the front side or the rear side of the reference O1.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be configured to slide and displace in the left-right direction, and the small receiving portion 735 may be configured as a long groove in a direction inclined with respect to the slide direction. In this case, by providing the inclination of the front small receiving portion 735a and the inclination of the rear small receiving portion 735b on the opposite sides to the slide direction, the projecting columnar portion 743 and the protruding columnar portion 743 are provided with the slide displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. The clearance with the small receiving portion 735 can be changed. Thereby, the holding mode (easiness of vibration) of the hollow member 740 can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the plate-shaped displacement member 730 is axially supported and displaced by the left-right direction axis has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported in a mode in which the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can rotate in the front-rear direction axis (for example, a support mode with a ball joint).

Further, the plate main body (long plate formed in the left-right direction) of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 may be supported as a separate body on the upper side of the loaded portion 733 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, depending on the drive mode of the drive unit 760, the plate body of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be displaced by a combination of rotation of the left-right axis and rotation of the front-rear axis.

Further, the shaft support portion may be configured to have an elongated hole shape that is long in the vertical direction so as to allow the vertical displacement of the shaft-mounted support portion 731 of the plate-shaped displacement member 730. In this case, not only the rotational operation of the plate-shaped displacement member 730, but also the posture change of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 (centered on the axis in the front-rear direction) caused by the vertical displacement of one of the left and right shafted support portions 731 with respect to the other. (Corresponding to the rotational displacement) can also be generated, so that the displacement modes of the hollow member 740 and the variable decorative member 750 due to the displacement of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 can be further diversified.

In the first embodiment, the case where the bending of the load member 761 is caused by the change in the load direction based on the change in the posture of the plate-shaped displacement member 730 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the core material extending along the displacement direction of the load member 761 is configured to be passed through the load member 761, and the length of the core entering the load member 761 changes with the displacement of the load member 761. (It may be configured so that the core material comes off). In this case, since the rigidity of the load member 761 changes depending on the presence or absence of the core material, the load member 761 may be bent along with this change in rigidity.

In the second embodiment, the case where one of the portions for decelerating the driven member 163 is displaceable has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both parts for decelerating the driven member 163 may be displaceable. In this case, both of the decelerating portions (lower regulation portion 175 and upper regulation portion 176) may be made of the same member.

In the second embodiment, the case where the urging spring SP21 does not directly hit the driven member 163 but applies an urging force via the contact member 2190 between them has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the urging spring SP21 may be configured to come into direct contact with the driven member 163.

Further, in this case, the arrangement (contact point) of the urging spring SP21 with respect to the driven member 163 can be arbitrarily set. For example, a plurality of contact points (s) between the urging spring SP21 and the driven member 163 may be provided, and the contact points may be located on the rotation shaft side and the rotation tip side with the electromagnetic solenoid SOL1 interposed therebetween. It may be configured separately.

In the third embodiment, the shape of the elongated hole portion 3406 is extended in the displacement direction of the elevating plate 430 to form a section in which the posture of the auxiliary arm member 444 is maintained even during the displacement of the elevating plate 430. The case where the driving force transmission to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444 in the section is cut off has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a section in which a sliding portion (an angle region where the gear teeth are not meshed) is provided between the arcuate gear portion 444b and the rotary gear 441 so that the rotary gear 441 does not rotate even if the arcuate gear portion 444b rotates. May be configured to block the transmission of the driving force to the downstream side of the auxiliary arm member 444.

In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement width of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 corresponds to the vertical position of the arm tip of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary gear 3441 with an arm is not a gear in which gear teeth are formed all around, but a partially overhanging portion is formed so that it can function as a cam, and the overhanging portion gives a load to the relative displacement member 442. This may be configured to displace the relative displacement member 442. In this case, the displacement mode (displacement speed, displacement width) of the relative displacement member 442 with respect to the elevating plate 430 can be arbitrarily designed depending on the design of the overhanging portion of the rotary gear 3441 with an arm and the relative displacement member 442.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 4782 is configured for detecting the thin-walled overhanging portion 4761 g which is a part of the load member 4761 and is easily damaged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect the thick overhanging portion 4761f.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the adjusting member 5782 projects upward from the lower side of the load member 761 and pushes the front side surface of the load member 761 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the adjusting member 5782 may be configured to project forward from the rear side of the load member 761.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed inside the wall of the load member 761 and the adjusting member 5782 may enter the opening to function as a core. In this case, the flexibility of the load member 761 can be changed depending on the degree of entry of the adjusting member 5782.

In the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the case where the load member 761 is driven by the electromagnetic solenoid SOL2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for driving the load member 761 may be composed of a motor such as a DC motor. Thereby, the load member 761 can be driven without being limited to the instantaneous driving mode.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 945b is formed into a substantially triangular shape in the back view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape in the rear view. In this case, rattling of the wing member 945 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed in a deformed shape in the rear view or the sliding groove 966a2 is formed in a curved shape, the protrusion 945b slides on the sliding groove 966a2 to cause the inner wall and the protrusion of the sliding groove 966a2. The gap between the 945b and the 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b becomes easier to move by the gap, and the wing member 945 becomes easier to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended to the displacement member 966 to form an inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 during the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945. The gap with the protrusion 945b can always be a constant size. Therefore, the rattling of the wing member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member 945 can be stabilized.

Further, since the sliding groove 966a2 is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extending length of the sliding groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2 can be suppressed, and the rigidity of the displacement member 966 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 facing each other is formed so as to project in an annular shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the ball entry member 953 toward the passage member 955.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. The wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (broken) by laterally shifting (side-sliding) the surface (outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) in the lateral direction (the direction away from the axis of the annular protrusion 953c in the radial direction).

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized by the player has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the game area (front) of the distribution unit 980 is not necessarily limited to this. A sticker displaying information consisting of characters or figures may be attached to the side.

In this case, since information consisting of characters or figures is displayed on the game area (front) side of the throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980, the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930). ), Even when the distribution unit 980 is visually recognized, the position of the distribution unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). The form of information display is not limited to the attachment of a sticker, and may be printing with ink or forming two colors.

In the tenth embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed of two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed on the second member 11968 having a displacement larger than that of the first member 11967. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member to increase the amount of displacement of the one member (displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is brought out from the main body portion 961a by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of wing members 945 are closed, electric power may be applied to the main body 961a so that the shaft 961b of the drive unit 960 is pulled inside the main body.

In this case, the displacement member 11966, 12966 is inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. The illegal object (thread) can be cut by using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, the driving force thereof can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. , The case where the annular portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing a spring in an extended state between the main body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. It may be displaced in the direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2 are displaced in the cutting direction (pinching direction) by using an electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Prevention of banging with solenoid. Use of cushions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, a driving means arranged on a predetermined direction side of the displacement means and configured to be able to generate a driving force for driving the displacement means to the predetermined direction side, and the displacement means. It is provided with a resistance means configured to be capable of generating resistance to the displacement in a predetermined direction, and the resistance means is configured to be able to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Game machine A1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured to displace the displacement member by an electromagnetic solenoid (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the place where the load from the displacement member is received is limited to the electromagnetic solenoid, and the electromagnetic solenoid receives an excessive load, so that the electromagnetic solenoid is likely to fail at an early stage. There was a problem. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the durability of the game machine.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the resistance means is configured to generate resistance to the displacement of the displacement means to the predetermined direction side (drive means side), and to reduce the load applied from the displacement means to the drive means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from receiving an excessive load. Thereby, the durability of the game machine can be improved.

The mode for reducing the load applied to the driving means is not limited at all. For example, the load may be distributed by increasing the number of places where the load is received to suppress the load, or the load may be transmitted by providing a gap between the displacement means and the drive means by the resistance means. May be cut off, or the surface on which the resistance means acts on the displacement means may be enlarged to reduce the load per unit area.

The game machine A2 is characterized in that the game machine A1 includes a support means for supporting the displacement means, and the drive means is arranged on the support means side as compared with the resistance means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the load given to the resistance means is applied by suppressing the arm length (arm length of the moment of force) between the support means and the drive means to be short. It is possible to avoid becoming excessive.

In the game machine A2, the support means rotatably supports the displacement means on a predetermined axis, and the predetermined axis is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the resistance means. ..

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, it is possible to prevent the load generated between the predetermined axis and the displacement means from reversing in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction (left-right direction). Since it is possible to limit the side where the portion covering the rotation axis is rubbed to one side (avoid slight displacement to the left and right), it is possible to limit the portion that needs to be formed to be thick.

The game machine A3 includes a first resistance means for generating a load for displacement in the predetermined direction side and a second resistance means for generating a load for displacement in the opposite direction side on the predetermined direction side, and the first resistance means. And the second resistance means are provided with displacement portions arranged at different positions in the predetermined direction view, and the first resistance means is arranged away from the predetermined axis as compared with the second resistance means. A game machine A4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the load given to the displacement means from the first resistance means can be reduced. In other words, the magnitude of the load can be reduced by increasing the arm length of the moment of force generated in the displacement means by the load from the first resistance means.

Further, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated by separating the place where the load is generated between the first resistance means and the displacement means and the place where the load is generated between the second resistance means and the displacement means. Therefore, the durability of the displacement means can be improved.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the displacement means includes a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined displacement means and an accessory portion extending in the outer diameter direction of the transmission portion, and the first resistor is provided. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the means is arranged so as to be in contact with the accessory portion.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, even if the accessory part is damaged, the driving force can be transmitted to the displacement means, so that the driving control can be performed during the period until maintenance. The displacement of the displacement means can be continued.

The mode of the transmission unit is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be configured at a position close to the driving means, or it may be configured on the opposite side in the axial direction of the side where the driving means is arranged with reference to the shaft member arranged along the predetermined axis. But it's okay.

Further, with reference to the shaft member, the mode on the side opposite to the axial direction on which the drive means is arranged is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the driving means and the transmission unit may be configured at positions opposite to each other with respect to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined portion of the shaft member, and even if the positions with respect to the plane are not opposite to each other, the shaft In the transmission path of the driving force via the member, the transmitting portion may be configured on the opposite side of the driving means with the shaft member interposed therebetween.

A6 of the game machines A1 to A5, wherein the displacement means is provided with a load applying means for applying a load in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, the displacement means can be quickly returned and displaced from the drive displacement side.

In the game machine A6, the load applying means is arranged on both sides of the driving means along a direction intersecting with the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, it is possible to avoid an imbalance in the posture of the load applying means and the generated load due to the influence of the driving force.

A8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the resistance means is configured to be able to apply a reaction force in a state of being in contact with the displacement means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A7, a frictional force can be generated at the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced in a direction other than the predetermined direction.

In the game machine A8, the displacement means is configured to be able to receive an external force, and the contact surface between the displacement means and the resistance means is arranged parallel to at least one directional component of the external force. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to an external force by frictional resistance.

<Rack, pinion, gear arm (irregular double rack)>
The basic means, the intermediate means displaceably supported by the basic means, the tip-side means displaceably supported by the intermediate means, and the intermediate means supported by the intermediate means with respect to the basic means. In a gaming machine provided with a displacement-constituting means configured to displace the tip-side means with respect to the intermediate means, the basic means can be displaced in a non-corresponding manner to the displacement mode of the intermediate means. A game machine B1 characterized by being configured in.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which a pinion is arranged so as to sandwich the pinion between a plurality of racks (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, since the rack is displaced in the opposite direction as the pinion rotates, the displacement speed of the other rack with respect to one rack can be increased, and a high-speed displacement effect body can be constructed. It is possible.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, it is necessary to separately prepare a shielding member in order to hide the fixed rack, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the effect body may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the basic means is configured to be displaceable, the basic means can be displaced by the tip side means or the intermediate means by displace the basic means according to the displacement of the tip side means or the intermediate means. Can be hidden. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a shielding member, and the degree of freedom in designing the tip-side means can be improved.

In the game machine B1, the basic means is a game machine B2 characterized in that it is configured to be rotatable.

Here, when both members (basic means and tip side means) sandwiching the pinion are racks that slide and displace in parallel, when the pinions and racks are arranged on the same plane, the racks are arranged in order to avoid interference between the members. Since the pinion cannot be placed at a position that overlaps the rack in the displacement direction view, the space for placing the rack increases in the direction intersecting the rotation axis of the pinion, making it difficult to design compactly. There was a problem that it was.

In addition, since it is necessary to arrange the support portions at a plurality of points in order to maintain the posture of the rack and optimize the meshing with the pinion, there is a risk of complicating the member structure and increasing the assembly man-hours. There was a problem. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of space saving and structural simplification.

At the retracted position, the overhanging portion on the basic means side and the recessed portion on the tip side means overlapped in the slide displacement direction, so that the shielding width at the retracted position was bulky.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, since the basic means is configured to be rotationally displaced, the basic means and the displacement constituent means can be arranged at overlapping positions in the slide displacement direction view of the intermediate means, which saves space. In addition to being able to achieve this, it is sufficient to have a configuration for supporting the basic means, so that the structure can be simplified.

Further, since the overhang on the foundation means side can be arranged on the back side by utilizing the curvature, the shielding width at the retracted position can be narrowed.

In the game machine B2, a part of the basic means is rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and the posture of the basic means is reversed along the slide displacement direction of the intermediate means by rotating the other part as a fulcrum. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the other portion is configured to be displaceable in a direction intersecting the slide displacement direction.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, since a part of the basic means and the displacement forming means are both supported by the intermediate means, there is a gap between the part of the basic means and the displacement forming means. Load transmission can be stabilized.

In addition, by displacing the other part of the foundation means in the direction intersecting the slide displacement direction, the displacement can be balanced by the displacement of a part of the foundation means and the other part, and the displacement amount of the entire foundation means can be increased (up and down). It can be suppressed (both left and right).

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the end position on one side (overhang side) of the displacement range, the basic means is from a direction intersecting the direction of the slide displacement. A game machine B4 characterized by receiving a load for maintaining a posture.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the load required for the slide displacement is reduced as compared with the case where the load for maintaining the posture is applied in the direction of the slide displacement. Can be done. Further, the arrangement of the intermediate means and the tip side means can be stabilized by utilizing the fact that the posture of the basic means is maintained in the state where the tip side means is arranged at the one-side terminal position.

In any of the game machines B1 to B4, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the other side (retract side) end position of the displacement range, in the basic means, the load given by the intermediate means is applied to the basic means. A game machine B5 characterized in that it takes a posture facing a displaceable direction.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the start of the basic means, the intermediate means and the displaceable means can be smoothed.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, in a state where the tip side means is arranged at the other side (retract side) end position of the displacement range, the basic means overhangs the retract position side from the intermediate means. A game machine B6 characterized by having a protrusion.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B1 to B5, the intermediate means is provided by adopting a configuration in which the overhanging portion protrudes from the intermediate means at the end position on the other side (evacuation side) which is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to configure the basic means to be blindfolded by an intermediate means at the end position on one side (overhanging side) while keeping the vertical dimension of the above to less than the dimension of the basic means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B6, the basic means is partially rotatably supported by the intermediate means, and at least one of the intermediate means or the tip side means is electrically guided to the basic means. A game machine B7 characterized by being connected to.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B6, the displacement of a part of the basic means is suppressed to easily secure the passage path of the electric wiring and the electric wiring. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the wiring.

In the game machine B7, the tip-side means is configured to be slidable, and the electrical wiring is arranged outside the tip-side means.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the load applied to the electric wiring is reduced as compared with the case where the electric wiring is connected to the tip side means which is displaced by the slide displacement which easily puts a load on the electric wiring. It can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of deviation (positional deviation, speed difference, etc.) that occurs in the operation of the tip-side means and the intermediate means while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small. For example, the drive means for driving the intermediate means with reference to the basic means and the drive means for driving the tip side means with reference to the intermediate means can be separately configured while keeping the load applied to the electrical wiring small.

In any of the game machines B1 to B8, the displacement forming means is characterized in that the tip side means is configured to be displaceable with respect to the intermediate means by a predetermined amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the intermediate means. Amusement machine B9.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B8, the tip-side means can be stably displaced at a high speed (higher-speed displacement than the intermediate means).

<A pair of left and right members are asymmetrically configured>
A plurality of displacement means configured to be able to displace a first relative position and a second relative position arranged apart from the first relative position are provided, and the plurality of displacement means are the first relative position. Alternatively, at least one of the second relative positions is configured to be visually recognized in a series of predetermined shapes, and the plurality of displacement means include a first displacement means and a second displacement means smaller than the first displacement means. A game machine C1 characterized by being provided.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of moving parts having substantially the same shape are arranged close to each other to form a series of shapes (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-153095). According to this structure, in addition to being able to easily construct a large production body by combining small moving parts, the structure of the moving parts themselves is almost the same, so that the difficulty of the assembly work can be reduced. it can.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the shapes of the moving parts are configured to be substantially the same, the space required to realize the displacement of each moving part is common to each moving part, which is limited. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in design so that the space could be used.

For example, when the moving unit is displaced on the right side of the display device exemplified by the liquid crystal display device arranged in the center of the game area, the side closer to the display device attracts more attention from the player. Despite this, the space required for displacement of the moving part is symmetrical with respect to the moving part, so the amount that can be displaced on the left side of the moving part (the side where the player's attention is high) is the displacement on the right side of the moving part. There was a problem that it would be limited by the allowable amount.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the first displacement means and the second displacement means visually recognized in a series of shapes are composed of different sizes, the displacement amounts of the first displacement means and the second displacement means. Even if they are the same, the space required to realize the displacement can be different, so that the limited space can be used satisfactorily and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are characterized in that their outer shapes are set according to the displaceable region at the second relative position.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are visually recognized at the first relative position regardless of the difference in the size of the displaceable area at the second relative position. The degree of freedom in shape design can be improved.

Further, it is possible to improve the decorativeness when the decoration of the region at the second relative position is substituted by the first displacement means and the second displacement means, as in the case where the game board is formed of the light transmissive resin.

In the game machine C1 or C2, a guide means arranged on the back side of the plurality of displacement means and guiding the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is provided, and the position between the guide means and the displacement means is viewed in a predetermined direction. A game machine C3 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, it is possible to prevent the guiding means from being visually recognized from the gaps between the plurality of displacement means. As a result, the gap can be effectively utilized, for example, the decorative portion other than the guide means can be visually recognized from the gap.

In the game machine C3, the guide means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the position between the plurality of displacement means is viewed in the predetermined direction from a reference line passing through the center of the guide means and along the predetermined direction. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is arranged at a displaced position.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the part (reference) that the player predicts that the guide means for guiding the plurality of displacement means will be arranged in consideration of the load balance and the like. By hiding (corresponding to a line) with a plurality of displacement means so that it is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the design.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the driving means for generating the driving force is provided, the first displacement means is arranged at a predetermined position in the driving force transmission path of the driving means, and the second displacement means is said. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it is arranged on the downstream side of the driving force transmission path from a predetermined position.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the member is configured to become smaller toward the downstream side in the driving force transmission path, so that the member becomes smaller locally in the driving force transmission path. It is possible to prevent an excessive burden from occurring.

In the game machine C5, the driving means and the transmitting means for transmitting the driving force are arranged in the upper left portion of the rear case, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are arranged in the upper left portion. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the one displacement means is larger than the second displacement means arranged at a position different from the upper left portion.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5, the drive means and the drive means arranged in the upper left part where it is easy to secure a large area as the internal area of the rear case as compared with the upper right part due to the configuration arrangement of the payout device. Since the transmission means can be easily hidden by the first displacement means similarly arranged in the upper left portion, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive means and the transmission means. This makes it unnecessary to configure another cover for hiding the driving means and the transmitting means.

In the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means is in a posture in which gravity acts in the tilting direction on the first relative position side, and is configured to be close to the second displacement means by the tilt displacement. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C5 or C6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are set in a dimensional relationship that allows contact, but the clearance for enabling the displacement ( When a gap is created without contact due to misalignment that fits in the play of the gear teeth that mesh with each other, the gap between the guide rail and the guided portion, etc., it is easy to fill the gap by the tilt displacement of the first displacement means due to gravity. can do.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first displacement means and the second displacement means from being maintained in a state where a gap is formed, so that the first displacement means and the second displacement means come into contact with each other and a series of series. It is possible to improve the design when forming the shape.

In any of the game machines C5 to C7, the game machine C8 is characterized in that an electric wiring passes through the second displacement means side between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C5 to C7, the first displacement means and the second displacement means are excessive by passing the electric wiring to the second displacement means side where the over-displacement is unlikely to occur. It is possible to reduce the load generated on the electrical wiring when displacement occurs.

In any of the game machines C1 to C8, the predetermined shape is formed of a symmetrical shape, and the split surface constituent portion forming the split surface that separates the first displacement means and the second displacement means is in the center of the game area. A game machine C9 characterized in that it is arranged on the side far from the position.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C8, the asymmetrically shaped split surface is arranged on the side far from the field of view (the side that is difficult for the player to see), whereby the first displacement means. And it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance of the second displacement means.

It should be noted that the appearance of the plurality of displacement means can be improved by making the shape of the center position side (the side close to the field of view, the side that is easy for the player to see) on the opposite side of the game area to be a symmetrical shape.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, the plurality of displacement means are arranged so that the side where the size of the displaceable region is limited at the second relative position faces each other at the first relative position. Machine C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C9, it is easy to visually recognize a plurality of displacement means composed of asymmetrical shapes in a series of symmetrical shapes at the first relative position. can do.

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, the plurality of displacement means have a first displacement in which the displacement from the second relative position to the first relative position is composed of a downward displacement, and the first displacement thereof. The gaming machine C11 is composed of different second displacements, and is configured so that the second displacement does not occur in a predetermined section from the start of the displacement.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the player's interest can be improved by complicating the displacement mode of the plurality of displacement means.

Further, in relation to the shape of the dispensing device, when the upper inner surface of the rear case is displaced vertically on the left and right, a plurality of displacement means are not affected by the vertical displacement of the rear case (corresponding to a predetermined section). By starting the second displacement after only lowering, it is possible to form a region where the displacement of the plurality of displacement means is allowed evenly without being affected by the vertical displacement of the upper inner surface of the rear case. Even when the displacement modes of the displacement means are the same, it is possible to easily prevent a plurality of displacement means from colliding with the rear case.

<Movable accessory that changes relative displacement depending on the arrangement>
A first displacement means configured to be displaceable and a plurality of second displacement means displaceably supported by the first displacement means are provided, and the first displacement means supports one of the second displacement means. The first support portion and the second support portion that supports the other second displacement means are provided, and the first support portion is supported by the first support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. 2 Displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means generated in the displacement means, and the first displacement means generated in the second displacement means supported by the second support portion as a predetermined displacement occurs in the first displacement means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be different from the displacement mode with respect to the above.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured so that the second displacement means (353) is displaced as the predetermined first displacement means (351 and 352) are displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-). 231434 (see Gazette No. 231434). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the displacement between the first displacement means and the second displacement means is monotonous, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of effect.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, whether the second displacement means, which is displaced as the first displacement means is displaced, is supported by the first support portion or the second support portion. Since the displacement mode with respect to the first displacement means can be made different, the displacement mode between the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be complicated, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the gap between the first second displacement means and the first support portion is configured to be smaller than the gap between the other second displacement means and the second support portion, and the first one. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured such that the first support portion side has a larger displacement amount than the second support portion side.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the displacement of the first displacement means can be configured so that the gap of the first support portion is eliminated, so that the difference in the displacement mode can be increased.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a load applying means configured to give a load to the first displacement means, and the first displacement means supports one side portion in a predetermined direction and can displace one side portion thereof. The amount and the displaceable amount of the other side portion are configured to be different, the load applying means is configured to apply a load to the other side portion of the first displacement means, and the second displacement means is the said. The gaming machine D3 comprising one side second displacement means arranged on one side and the other side second displacement means arranged on the other side.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the second displacement means is arranged on one side regardless of where the load applying means applies the load to the first displacement means. It can be different depending on whether it is placed on the other side or on the other side.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, and the load applying means are arranged at a plurality of positions and each of the first displacement means is independently displaced. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that a load can be applied to the means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, it is possible to eliminate the need for an auxiliary driving means for displacing the load applying means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, a load applying means configured to be able to apply a load to the first displacement means is provided, a light emitting substrate having a light emitting surface is provided, and the load applying means is at least attached to the light emitting substrate. A game machine D5 characterized in that a part of the game is shielded in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the load applying means can be hidden by the light emitting substrate. That is, it is possible to prevent the load applying means from being visually recognized by the player by using the light emitting substrate which is necessary for the convenience of the light emitting effect. In this case, by irradiating the light emitting surface of the light emitting substrate with strong light, the visibility in the vicinity of the light emitting substrate can be reduced. However, it can be made difficult for the player to see.

When the light emitting board and the load applying means are arranged close to each other, electricity is supplied to a driving device (for example, an electromagnetic solenoid) that drives the load applying means by using the path of the electric wiring connected to the light emitting board. Since the electrical wiring can be passed through, it is not necessary to separately create a gap for passing the electrical wiring.

In the game machine D5, the light emitting board is arranged on the back surface side of the game board, and the game board includes a recessed portion in which the facing side is recessed at a position facing the light emitting board. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, an area for arranging the light emitting substrate can be secured between the game machine and the game board, and the load from the load applying means is transmitted to the game board. It can be prevented from being done.

In the game machine D6, the recessed portion is arranged outward with respect to the outer shape in the front view of the game area.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, even if the film member formed in front of the recessed portion is displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement from affecting the game area. Can be done.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the second displacement means, and the guiding means is arranged on the one side of the first displacement means. Machine D8.

According to the game machine 8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D7, the displacement of the second displacement means can be regulated by the guide means, and the guide means is arranged closer to the other side. Since the amount of displacement of the first displacement means in the vicinity of the guide means can be reduced, the rubbing between the first displacement means and the guide means can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, a support plate that supports the guide means, a thin film member whose predetermined region is fixed to the support plate, and a light emitting substrate that is arranged on the opposite side of the support plate with respect to the thin film member and has a light emitting portion. The game machine D9 is characterized in that the thin film member is configured to partition the guide means and the light emitting substrate without a gap.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, by partitioning the guide means and the light emitting substrate with a thin film member, it is possible to prevent the rubbing powder of the guide means from entering the light emitting substrate side. it can.

In the game machine D9, the thin film member is configured to have dimensions that can avoid contact with other displacement means.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D9, it is not necessary to secure the rigidity of the thin film member. Therefore, by forming the thin film member as thin as possible, the light from the light emitting substrate is weakened by the thin film member. Can be minimized.

<Use of deflection. The point for communication ＞
The displacement means configured to be displaceable, the drive means for generating the driving force for displace the displacement means, and the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means are provided, and the transmission means is driven. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the state can be changed so as to change the mode of transmitting force.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a transmission means for transmitting a driving force is inserted into a deformation groove of the displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to displace the displacement means by displacing the deformation groove ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152). According to this gaming machine, since the deformation groove is formed so as to extend along the displacement locus of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb a slight excess displacement of the transmission means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the deformed groove is configured to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means, the wall thickness and the dimensional length corresponding to the deformed groove are required extra. The restrictions on the shape of the displacement means are increased. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the configuration of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the transmission mode of the driving force can be changed by changing the state of the transmission means, it is possible to absorb the excessive displacement of the transmission means by changing the state of the transmission means. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to add an extra configuration to the displacement means, so that the configuration of the displacement means can be improved.

The change in the transmission mode is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rigidity of the transmission means may be changed, the direction of the load applied to the transmission means may be adjusted to change the transmission efficiency of the driving force, or the change may occur by increasing or decreasing the transmission means. ..

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the change in the state of the transmission means occurs during the displacement of the displacement means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, a load for changing the state of the transmission means can be generated from the displacement means. This eliminates the need for a separate load source to change the state of the transmission means.

The mode of changing the state of the transmitting means is not limited at all. For example, it may be due to deformation of the transmission means, or may be due to a change in the rigidity (strength) of the transmission means.

Further, examples of the deformation of the transmission means include elastic (continuous) deformation such as bending, bending and twisting, and deformation in which boundaries such as bending and misalignment occur. Further, examples of the mode of changing the rigidity (strength) include a mode in which the wall thickness of the transmission means is changed, a mode in which the core inserted in the transmission means is removed, and the like.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means is configured to have a shape in which the flexibility is different in the direction, and the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means before and after the displacement means passes a predetermined reference position due to the displacement. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the angle formed by the bending direction changes.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the change in the direction of the reaction force received from the displacement means during the displacement of the displacement means can be used to change the shape of the transmission means. With the reference position as a boundary, the range in which the driving force mainly displaces the displacement means and the range in which the transmitting means is mainly flexed and deformed by the driving force can be divided.

In the game machine E3, the displacement means is driven to stop in a predetermined intermediate posture, and the transmission means receives a reaction force from the displacement means when the displacement means is in the intermediate posture. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the direction of the game is configured to be along a direction in which the surface is easily bent.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture by the bending of the transmission means, so that the amount of the driving force generated by the driving means and the generation period can be roughly determined. Even if it is set, the displacement means can be easily kept in the intermediate posture.

In the game machine E4, the driving force applies a driving force so that the pushing portion for pushing the displacement means of the transmitting means passes through the contact position in the intermediate posture of the displacement means in the state before bending. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is controlled to generate.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the driving energy can be inherently contained even after the displacement means is in the intermediate posture, and the displacement means can be vibrated by using this.

That is, since the transmitting means is in a posture in which it is easy to bend, it is possible to generate vibration utilizing the bending in the transmitting means without generating the driving force of the driving means in a mode for generating vibration. As a result, vibration can be generated by a simple mechanism.

The game machine E6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines E1 to E5 includes a range setting means configured to be able to set a range in which the state of the transmission means changes.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E5, the range in which the state of the transmission means changes can be set by the range setting means. It can be adjusted depending on the situation.

In the game machine E6, the range setting means is configured to limit the range in which the state of the transmission means changes to the downstream side of the driving force transmission path with reference to a predetermined position. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, the range in which the state of the transmission path changes can be limited to the range on the opposite side of the driving means, so that the driving force is transmitted on the upstream side of the transmission path. It is possible to suppress a decrease in efficiency.

Further, by narrowing the range in which the state changes, the degree of the state change that occurs in the transmission means can be reduced, so that the influence on the displacement mode of the displacement means can be reduced. Therefore, even if the driving means cannot be controlled precisely, the displacement of the displacement means (for example, the displacement of the stop position) can be suppressed to be small.

<Wiring route for movable accessories>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotational displacement means configured to be rotatable and an electric supply means configured to be able to supply electricity to the rotational displacement means arranged along a line connecting a rotation shaft and an outside diameter. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the electricity supply means includes a portion to be arranged to be arranged on the rotation shaft portion of the rotational displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which electrical wiring is fixed to an arm-shaped member that is rotatably supported, and the electrical wiring is connected to a displacement member that is connected to the arm-shaped member (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2012-157474). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the electric wiring is only loosely held by the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, and the electric wiring may expand and contract with the rotational displacement of the arm-shaped member, which is given to the electric wiring. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the load.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arranged portion of the electric supply means (electrical wiring) is arranged on the rotary shaft portion of the rotational displacement means, so that the rotational displacement means occurs when the rotational displacement of the rotational displacement means occurs. It is possible to suppress the relative displacement of the arranged portion that occurs with respect to the electric wiring, and it is possible to suppress the load applied to the electrical wiring.

The game machine F1 includes displaceable displacement means that are displaceably arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means, and suppression means that suppresses displacement of the electricity supply means in a direction close to the displacement displacement means. A game machine F2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine F2, the disposition displacement means is configured so as to easily separate from the electricity supply means when an unplanned displacement occurs.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the degree of freedom of placement of the arrangement displacement means can be improved, so that the distance between the arrangement displacement means and the electrical wiring can be shortened. ..

In the game machine F3, the disposition displacement means has a first displacement displacement means that displaces close to the electricity supply means and stops, and a position that displaces and stops close to the electricity supply means of the first disposition displacement means. It is provided with a second arrangement displacement means set at a position farther from the electricity supply means than the stop position, and the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means to the electricity supply means. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it is configured to come into contact with each other by being displaced close to each other and to apply a load in a direction away from each other.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, it is possible to avoid giving a load to the electricity supply means even when the first arrangement displacement means and the second arrangement displacement means are displaced too much. can do.

The game machine F4 is characterized in that the first arrangement displacement means is configured to have a smaller inertia than the second arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electricity supply means when the first disposing means unintentionally comes into contact with the electricity supply means.

The mode that constitutes the magnitude of inertia is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inertia may be configured by configuring the first arrangement displacement means to be lighter and smaller than the second arrangement displacement means, or the mode of the support portion may be different. The magnitude of the inertia may be configured by causing the magnitude of the displacement resistance.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a support means for supporting the rotational displacement means is provided, and the supporting means includes an opening portion that is opened along the circumferential direction of a predetermined rotation axis of the rotational displacement means. The game machine F6, wherein the electricity supply means passes through the open portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the axial width occupied by the rotational displacement means is suppressed as compared with the case where the electric supply means is passed through the inside of the predetermined rotation shaft. be able to.

The game machines F1 to F6 include displaceable displacement means arranged in the vicinity of the electricity supply means and a drive means for generating a driving force for driving the displacement displacement means. The gaming machine F7, characterized in that it is arranged on the side where the rotational displacement means is not arranged.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F2 to F6, the arrangement efficiency can be improved.

In any of the game machines F1 to F7, the game machine F8 is characterized in that the rotational displacement means is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the arrangement displacement means.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, by providing the means for guiding the electrical wiring with a driving force transmission function, it is possible to combine the members. The number can be reduced.

<Concept of the invention using the drive unit 600 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a vehicle and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism is the driving force of the driving means. It is provided with a rotating member that is rotated by a sliding member and a slide member that is slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that a sliding groove through which the installation portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end side of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of feather members. More specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, facing portions facing each other at a predetermined interval are formed on the upper and lower sides, and a projecting portion of the wing member is inserted between the facing portions. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated, the protruding portion of the wing member is pushed up or down by the facing portion of the rotating member, so that the wing member is opened or closed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable. That is, when the rotating member is rotated due to the opening / closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is the outer shape of the protruding portion (thick). If it is the same as the above), the projecting portion interferes between the facing portions and the rotating member cannot rotate. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing portions so that the protruding portions do not interfere with each other, and the gap between the facing portions and the protruding portions is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing member tends to rattle, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member is not stable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and is a slide member or a pair. A protrusion portion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protrusion portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, since the displacement of the slide member is the slide displacement and the posture of the sliding groove does not incline with respect to the projecting portion, it is not necessary to avoid interference with the projecting portion when rotating as in the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set to be the same as the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. .. As a result, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a concave groove (recess) or a through groove (opening). That is, the sliding groove may be formed so that the inserted protruding portion can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

In the game machine G1, the game machine G2 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members, so that the slide member is omitted with respect to the feather member. It can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and a straight line is formed along a direction orthogonal to the slide displacement direction of the slide member. A game machine G3 characterized in that it is extended in a shape.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extends linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion during the opening / closing operation of the wing member can always be set to a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the wing member can be suppressed, and the opening / closing operation of the wing member can be stabilized. Further, since the sliding groove is linearly extended along the direction orthogonal to the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member, the extending length of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening due to the recessing of the sliding groove and improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slid displacement upward in the direction of gravity. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the position of the projecting portion at the time of starting is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the wing member, in the present invention, the slide member is interposed between the wing member and the rotating member, so that the slide member is slid and displaced upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation to, the inertial force increases by the amount that the weight of the slide member is added, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when opening or closing the wing member in the stopped state by starting the driving.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protrusion when the member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotation axis of the wing member, the protrusion is pushed up by the inner wall of the sliding groove. As for the displacement component of the portion, the horizontal component can be increased and the gravity direction component can be reduced (minimized). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state is started to be opened or closed can be smoothly performed.

The game machine G4 is characterized in that when the slide member starts a slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in a direction in which the wing member is released.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the opening direction, so that the weight of the wing member is increased. It can be rotated by (self-weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when the wing member in the stopped state (closed position) is started to be driven and opened.

In the game machine G4 or G5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotation axis of the wing member and gravity. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the direction is formed.

According to the game machine G6, in either the game machine G4 or G5, when the slide member starts the slide displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion comes into contact has a wing member. Since an inclined surface is formed that includes the axis of rotation and is inclined with respect to the plane perpendicular to the direction of gravity, even when the position of the protrusion is set downward along the direction of gravity of the axis of rotation of the wing member. , The projecting portion can be guided along the inclined direction of the inclined surface, and the slide displacement of the slide member in the upward direction of the gravity direction can be smoothly started.

Further, since the inclined surface is formed on the inner wall of the sliding groove, not only the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion can be reduced by that amount, but also the protrusion due to the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface. In addition to the gravitational displacement of the installation, horizontal displacement can also be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the rattling of the wing member in the stopped state of being opened or closed. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open posture or the closed posture even when it is affected by the vibration caused by the flow of the game ball.

In any of the game machines G1 to G6, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted in a state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G6, the inner wall of the sliding groove accepts the projecting portion when the slide member is slid and displaced to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state where the receiving portion is recessed and the protruding portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member (own weight). ) Can be used to facilitate the maintenance of the protruding portion being accepted by the receiving portion.

In any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contact portion, and the one-side contact portion and the slide displacement direction are separated by a predetermined interval. The wing member is provided with a contact portion on the other side to which the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member. In the closed state, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion, and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that at least the other side contact portion is in contact with the other side. The gaming machine G9 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contacted portion on the other side, the other side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation occurs. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machines G1 to G8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair. A protrusion is projected from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protrusion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotation The member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion that projects from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. In order to open the wing member, the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the other side to be contacted, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is provided. The slide member is disengaged from the slide member, and the slide member is slid and displaced from the state in which the wing member is closed to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. Then, the gaming machine G10 characterized in that the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G8, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is a slide member. One-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member, and the one-sided contacted portion and the direction of slide displacement. Since it is provided with a contacted portion on the other side, the other side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with the rotating member when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing members, which are arranged opposite to each other at a predetermined interval. When the rotating member is rotated to one side, the contacted portion on one side is pushed by one side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wings are winged. While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the game machines G1 to G10, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine G11, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G10, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the protruding portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the entry port is provided, and the slide member slides from a position where the wing member is opened to a position where the wing member is closed. The gaming machine G12 is characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that crosses the passage of the passage member and rubs against the edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine G12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the passage member. Since the slide member is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion of the ball, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the slide member is slid and displaced from the position where the wing member is opened to the position where the wing member is closed. When the rubbing part crosses the passage of the passage member, the middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing part and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the rubbing part is the passage member. When rubbed against the edge portion, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge portion of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In any of the game machines G1 to G11, a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position where the wing member opens to a position where the wing member closes. The gaming machine G13 is provided with a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges against each other.

According to the game machine G13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G11, when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position, the wing member crosses the passage of the passage member and the edges of the wing members cross each other. Since the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members to be rubbed against each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

For example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the other end of the thread is reached with the game ball reaching the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by reciprocating the game ball by operating (feeding and pulling). In response to such fraudulent activity, according to the present invention, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and a pair of cutting members. When crossing the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine G12 or G13, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine G14 characterized by.

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effect of the game machine G12 or G13, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any of the game machines G1 to G14, the rotating member includes a contact portion, and the slide member is said to be the same when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted and the one-sided contacted portion. A game characterized in that the other side contacted portion is provided with the other side contacted portion, and the one side contacted portion and the other side contacted portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. Machine G15.

According to the game machine G15, in addition to the effects of the game machines G1 to G14, when the rotating member is provided with a contact portion and the sliding member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, which is arranged to face the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is brought into contact with. A pair of wing members and rotation are provided because the other side of the contact portion is provided with the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially in the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid and displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when a load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of wing members during the operation of sliding the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member to open or close the pair of wing members. When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and also to the rotating member at two places, it rotates with the pair of wing members. It is difficult to tolerate a change in the posture of the slide member with the member, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidly displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. .. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since the slide member is connected to the pair of wing members at two places and to the rotating member at one place, it is one of the pair of wing members. Even if a load from the game ball is applied to only one of them, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotating member.

It should be noted that the substantially center in the width direction in which the one-side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed passes through the substantially center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of wing members are opened or closed. And, it means a position on a virtual line along the direction of slide displacement.

In the game machine G15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the projecting portion.

According to the game machine G16, in addition to the effect of the game machine G15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion, so that a pair. It is possible to easily tolerate a change in the attitude of the slide member between the wing member and the rotating member. It is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to twice or less the maximum external dimension of the protruding portion. This is because it is easier to achieve the above-mentioned tolerance for posture change.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
The first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the second ball entry port. In a gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a mouth and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means of the second opening / closing member. A game machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

Here, the first ball entry port, the first opening / closing member that opens or closes the first ball entry port, the first driving means for driving the first opening / closing member, the second ball entry port, and the first (2) A gaming machine including a second opening / closing member that opens or closes a ball entrance and a second driving means that drives the second opening / closing member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member, respectively, the first opening / closing member and the second opening / closing member are arranged. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the vehicle, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, they are placed on the back side of the first opening / closing member (first ball entry port). Space can be formed. That is, by consolidating the arrangement space of the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening / closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices is made into the first opening / closing member (first input). It can be secured on the back of the ball mouth), and the space can be effectively used accordingly.

The game machine H1 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the total front projection area of the first drive means and the second drive means.

According to the game machine H2 or H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1 or H2, the front projection area of the second opening / closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening / closing member, or the first driving means. Since it is made larger than the total front projected area of the second driving means, the dead space on the back surface of the second entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the game machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are on the back side of the second entry port. The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that it is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening / closing member.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the second opening / closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means enter the second ball. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening / closing member on the back surface side of the mouth, the dead space on the back surface of the second ball entry port (second opening / closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any of the game machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means drive the main body, the drive shaft disposed on one side of the main body, and the drive shaft, and the main body. The drive unit accommodated in the unit and the wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main body unit are provided, and the first drive means and the second drive means use the drive shaft as the second drive shaft. A game machine H5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture toward an opening / closing member.

According to the game machine H5, in any of the game machines H1 to H4, the first drive means and the second drive means are a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft thereof. A drive unit that drives the drive unit and is housed in the main body unit, and a wiring that supplies electric power to the drive unit unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit unit. Since the two are arranged in a posture toward the opening / closing member, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the game machine H5, the main body of the first drive means and the main body of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and wiring on the outer surface of the main body are arranged. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where one outer surface excluding the outer surface is substantially flush with each other.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are each formed into a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving of the outer surface of the main body is performed. Since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces other than the outer surface on which the shaft and the wiring are arranged are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged. Is different in output, and even when the sizes of the main bodies of the two are different, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other regions can be simplified.

That is, when the main body of the first driving means and the main body of the second driving means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one main body and the other main body form a step. It becomes necessary to bend along the step to form a shield plate, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged at positions where the outer surfaces of the main body are substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step. Can have a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means and another area (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and is between the two areas. It is a barrier made of a conductor for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed as, for example, a metal plate material.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the first passage member forming the passage of the game ball entered into the first entrance and the passage of the game ball entered into the second entrance are provided. A second passage member to be formed and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening / closing member are provided, and the first opening / closing member rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are provided. The gaming machine H7 includes a rotating member arranged between the members and a sliding member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means and between the first passage member and the second passage member. Since it is provided with a rotating member arranged in the above and a slide member that slides and displaces as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of wing members, it is compared with a conventional product that opens and closes the pair of wing members only by the rotating member. Therefore, space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entry port. Further, unlike the conventional product, it is not necessary to bend the first passage member toward the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member. Therefore, the first entry port should be brought closer to the second entry port by that amount. Can be done.

In the game machine H7, the rotating member extends from the rotating shaft and is connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. The gaming machine H8 is provided with a portion, wherein the first portion is formed by being bent in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of the game machine H7, the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and the rotating member is extended from the rotating shaft and driven first. A second portion driven by the means is provided, and the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of rotation axis, so that the first driving means can be used while securing the slide amount of the slide member. The distance between the slide member and the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed in a straight line, and the length dimension (distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) of the first portion is connected from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. When the linear distance to the portion is set to be equal to that of the present invention, the slide amount of the slide member can be made equal to that of the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the whole becomes large. .. On the other hand, when the first portion is formed in a straight line and the length dimension of the first portion is shorter than the linear distance from the rotation axis to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first portion is used. The distance between the drive means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, but the slide amount of the slide member becomes smaller.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed by bending in an abbreviated shape in the direction of the rotation axis, so that the slide member can be slid and the slide member can be slid with the first driving means. The distance between the members can be suppressed.

In the game machine H8, the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back surface side of the first portion, which is opposite to the slide member.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8, the second part of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first part opposite to the slide member, so that the first part is bent. The space created by this can be effectively utilized to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, the rotating member can be efficiently arranged in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member to reduce the size as a whole.

In any of the game machines H1 to H9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the second entry port is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor includes the second opening / closing member and the first driving means. The gaming machine H10, characterized in that it is arranged between the two.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H9, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the second entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor opens and closes the second. Since it is arranged between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improper the first driving means from the second entry port, a part of the detection sensor makes the first Since the driving means can be hidden, it is possible to make it difficult to perform such cheating.

In this case, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of the detection sensor, fraudulent activity can be detected. In the present invention in which the first opening / closing member is arranged on the back side of the second opening / closing member, even if the second opening / closing member is opened and an illegality is applied to the first driving means from the second entry port. By closing the second opening / closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening / closing member, and the location where the fraud is applied becomes invisible. Therefore, the fraudulent activity can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. Is particularly effective.

The game machine H10 includes a case member accommodating the detection sensor and a screw member fastened to the case member, and the detection sensors are arranged in pairs and at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors. Is disposed between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the game machine H11, in addition to the effect of the game machine H10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening / closing member and the first driving means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is located between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening / closing member is opened to improperly apply the first drive means from the second entry port, the first drive means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such cheating more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with a pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. By setting the screw member at the fastening position, the unshielded area in front of the first driving means can be supplemented by the screw member, so that fraudulent acts can be made more difficult to perform.

The screw member may be a case member composed of two members and may be used to fasten and fix the two members, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Further, the screw member is preferably made of metal.

In the game machine H11, the game machine H12 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the game machine H12, in addition to the effect of the game machine H11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is located between the pair of detection sensors facing each other. When fraudulently applies to the first driving means from the ball mouth, such fraudulent activity can be made more difficult to perform.

That is, the wiring is relatively vulnerable to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the wiring is damaged due to the fraudulent act. It can be easily (broken). Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to perform fraudulent activity without damaging (breaking) the wiring, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent activity.

In the game machine H12, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the game machine H13, in addition to the effect of the game machine H12, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion. , Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to commit fraud to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

In the game machine H12 or H13, the case member includes a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the distance from the second opening / closing member increases. Game machine H14 to play.

According to the game machine H14, in addition to the effect of the game machine H12 or H13, the case member is provided with a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape whose diameter increases so as to be separated from the second opening / closing member. Since it is formed, in order to secure a path from the second entry port to the first drive means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. It is possible to easily damage (break) the wiring by shifting the position (side slip) in the lateral direction on the outer peripheral surface of the.

In any of the game machines H12 to H14, the game machine H15 is characterized in that the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member.

According to the game machine H15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H12 to H14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. Can be routed (positioned) over a wider area in front of the. That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening / closing member is opened to commit fraud to the first driving means from the second entrance, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform such fraudulent acts.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
The game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and having the above-mentioned In a game machine including a second member arranged on the back side of the game board, a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. A game machine I1 comprising a third member having and.

Here, a game board, a first member arranged on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which the game ball passes, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member are provided. There is known a game machine having a second member and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). The game ball that has flowed down the front side of the game board and has flowed into the first passage of the first member has passed through the first passage and then has flowed into the second passage of the second member. 2 Pass through the passage. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, which can give the player an interest.

In this case, if there is a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, the smooth flow of the game ball is hindered, so that the position accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. Is required to do. However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having a passage and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, the game board is provided with positioning holes for positioning each of these members. In the process of forming the first member, a positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed, while in order to form a positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back surface of the game board, the game board is inverted. It is not realistic because a separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required above.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, the third member includes a first engaging portion that engages with the first member and a second engaging portion that engages with the second member. Can be used to position the second member with respect to the first member.

In the game machine I1, the game board is provided with an opening in which an opening is formed and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in an internal space. The gaming machine I2, characterized in that the third member is arranged in the internal space of the portion.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the game board is formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space. Since the third member is arranged in the internal space of the opening, it is not necessary to separately provide the opening for arranging the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as the arranging space for the third member, the processing man-hours can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the third member engages the first engaging portion with the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion with the second passage of the second member. A game machine I3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine I3, in the game machine I1 or I2, the first engaging portion is in the first passage of the first member, and the second engaging portion is in the second passage of the second member. Since they are engaged, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member can be effectively performed. That is, the positioning of the second member with respect to the first member is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, and the target portion (the first). Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, the occurrence of misalignment (step) is effective as compared with the case where the other portion is positioned by the third portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In the game machine I3, the game machine I4 is characterized in that a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, a part of the inner wall in at least one of the first passage or the second passage is formed by the third member, so that the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are dimensioned. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be made easier to tolerate.

A game machine I5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member, so that the first member and the second member are formed on the front and back surfaces of the game board. When each member is attached, it is not necessary to attach the third member separately, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. ..

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of the game machine I5, in the state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After attaching the first member and the third member to the game board, it is not necessary to separately perform the work of engaging the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed so as to be engaged with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A game machine I7 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time and then attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board, the third member can be attached at the same time as the mounting operation. 2 The engaging portion can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any of the game machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member that is fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the third member is attached to the fixing member. A game machine I8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I5 to I7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. Since the third member is fixed or integrally formed on the fixing member, the first member can hold (arrange) the third member at the same time as the work of fastening and fixing the fixing member to the main body member. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the third member from being forgotten to be attached when the first member and the second member are attached to the game board.

In any of the game machines I1 to I8, the first member is formed so that the game ball can enter the ball, and rotates at a position sandwiching the entry port and the entry port communicating with the first passage. A pair of wing members that are pivotally supported to open or close the ball entrance, a driving means that generates a driving force for rotating the pair of wing members, and the driving force of the driving means are the pair of wings. The transmission mechanism includes a transmission mechanism that transmits to the members, and the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member to open and close the pair of wing members. The gaming machine I9 is characterized in that the third member is formed so as to be able to guide the slide displacement of the slide member.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I8, the transmission mechanism is a pair of a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a sliding member displaced by the rotation of the rotating member. Since it is equipped with a slide member that opens and closes the wing member, it is on the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage as compared with the conventional product in which the pair of wing members are opened and closed only by the rotating member. Space can be secured. In this case, since the third member is formed so that the slide displacement of the slide member can be guided, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the slide displacement of the slide member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine I9, the slide member includes a projecting portion in which the pair of feather members project toward the slide member, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted. The gaming machine I10 is characterized in that the third member includes a concealed surface portion facing an opening on the side opposite to the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effect of the game machine I9, a pair of wing members are provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portion is slidably inserted into the sliding portion. Since the slide member has a moving groove and the third member has an lining surface portion facing the opening on the opposite side of the wing member in the sliding groove of the slide member, the sliding member slides due to the lining surface portion of the third member. The opening of the groove can be shielded from the outside to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sliding of the projecting portion from being hindered by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove, and to stably open or close the pair of feather members.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 950 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, an opening / closing member that opens and closes the ball entry port, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered in the ball entry port is rolled, and its rolling A game machine J1 comprising a passage member into which a game ball that has rolled on a surface flows in, wherein a plurality of the passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

Here, a ball entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, an opening / closing member for opening and closing the entry port, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered in the entry port are provided. A game machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-3092). The entrance is formed to a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls that have entered the entrance are collected by the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and the passage member. One ball is flowed into. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the size of the ball entry port is increased, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entry port to the passage member is increased accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is inserted from the entrance before the opening and closing member closes the entrance, which causes a problem that over-winning is likely to occur. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member even when the entrance is enlarged. Length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened by that amount, and the passage member can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J1 includes a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry port, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, a detection sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be detected earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J1 or J2 includes a first guiding means having a first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with a game ball that is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guide means is provided at one end of the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction. The gaming machine J3, which is disposed between the passage member and the passage member.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the first inclined surface formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball which is inclined from the entrance to the passage member and rolls on the rolling surface. The ball entry port is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface is extended along the longitudinal direction of the ball entry port, and the first guiding means is provided in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is arranged between the side end portion and the passage member, when the game ball enters from the vicinity of the longitudinal end portion of the ball entry port, the game ball is moved by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. It can be guided to the passage member to prevent it from staying at the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

The game machine J4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines J1 to J3 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. ..

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J3, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to receive the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered from the ball entry port can be quickly flowed into the passage member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering before the ball entry port is closed by the opening / closing member. Therefore, over-winning can be suppressed.

In the game machine J4, the game machine J5 is characterized in that the guide groove is linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4, the guide groove is extended linearly in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, so that the rolling surface is the length of the rolling surface. The game ball that rolls in the direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be quickly guided (flowed) to the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J4 or J5, the game machine J5 is characterized in that the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J4 or J5, the groove width of the guide groove is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so that when a plurality of game balls are accepted in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In any of the game machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is opposite to the first region where the first guiding means is arranged with the passage member sandwiched in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine J7, wherein the second region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J3 to J6, the rolling surface is a passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is arranged. Since the second region on the opposite side of the first region is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the first region, a game ball that has entered the second region or a game ball that has rolled from the first region to the second region. Can be swiftly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward inclination of the second region. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

The game machine J8 is characterized in that the game machine J7 includes a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effect of the game machine J7, a second guide means projecting from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, so that the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. The game ball can be decelerated in front of the passage member. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J7 or J8, a game that is arranged in a second region of the rolling surface and rolls the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The gaming machine J9 is provided with a second guiding means formed so as to guide the ball to the entrance side.

According to the game machine J9, in addition to the effect of the game machine J7 or J8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and the second region of the rolling surface is set in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member. Since the second guiding means is provided so that the game ball rolled along the ball can be guided to the entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region is placed in front of the passage member. It can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to increase the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerate in front of (immediately before) the passage member to prevent the game ball from rolling from the second region through the passage member to the first region. .. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J9, the game machine J10 is characterized in that the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the game machine J9 in a state where the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine J10, in addition to the effect of the game machine J9, when the ball entrance is open, the opening / closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact with the ball. , The game ball guided to the entrance side by the second guiding means can be brought into contact with the opening / closing member and bounced toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member faster by that amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entry port as the side edge portion on the opposite side of the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. The gaming machine J11 is characterized in that its upper surface is inclined downward toward a side surface portion on the opposite side of the first guiding means.

According to the game machine J11, in addition to the effect of the game machine J9 or J10, the second guide means is separated from the entrance as the side edge portion opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. As it is tilted in the direction, its upper surface is tilted downward toward the side edge opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball quickly flows into the passage member while suppressing the game ball from jumping out from the entrance. Can be made to.

That is, among the game balls that are rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member in the second region, the game balls having a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are from the entrance. Since the risk of jumping out to the outside is low, by contacting the side edge of the second guiding means and guiding the ball to the entrance side, it is possible to roll from the second region through the passage member to the first region. It can be suppressed and flowed into the passage member faster by that amount. On the other hand, for a game ball having a relatively high (fast) rolling speed, it is possible to get over the upper surface of the second guiding means and guide it to the first region (first guiding means). Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball can be consumed by overcoming the second guide means and colliding with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow into the passage member while suppressing the jumping out from the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent another game ball from being inserted before the opening / closing member closes the entrance, and it is possible to suppress over-winning.

In the game machine J11, the second guide means has a side edge portion on the side facing the first guide means extended in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The size of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is made larger than the dimension of the side edge portion of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine J12.

According to the game machine J12, in addition to the effect of the game machine J11, the dimension of the side edge portion of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since it is made larger than the size of the side edge portion of the second guide means, the game ball that has passed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be surely decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In the game machine J11 or J12, the game machine J13 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the game machine J13, in addition to the effect of the game machine J11 or J12, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the rolling surface is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means, so that the upper surface of the second guide means is included. The game ball that has overcome the above can be brought into contact (collision) with the side edge portion of the first guide means to reliably decelerate, and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines J8 to J13, the game machine J14 is characterized in that the second guide means is located on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction.

According to the game machine J14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J8 to J13, the second guide means is located on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the inclination direction, so that the first guide means is located. Even when the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the above is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact (collision) with the second guide means. , It is possible to decelerate and it is possible to easily position it in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

The game machine J14 is provided with a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member, and the second guide means is provided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. The gaming machine J15 is characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine J15, in addition to the effect of the game machine J14, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. Since the height dimension from to the top of the second guide means is made larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is increased. When it is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact (collision) with the second guide means. Therefore, the game ball can be decelerated, can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

In any of the game machines J1 to J15, a guide groove is provided which is recessed in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove which is downwardly inclined from the entrance to the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove is widened. The gaming machine J16, which is characterized in that it becomes smaller toward the passage member.

According to the game machine J16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J15, a guide groove formed as a concave groove recessed in the rolling surface and inclined downward from the entrance to the passage member is provided. Since the groove width of the guide groove is reduced toward the passage member, the game ball that rolls the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface abuts (collides) with the side wall of the guide groove. It is possible to easily change the rolling direction of the game ball toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be quickly flowed into the passage member.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. An opening is formed in the game board in the plate thickness direction, and the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. A first unit to be provided and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and being arranged via an opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit are provided. A game machine K1 characterized by.

Here, a game including a ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a ball entry unit having a passage connected to the ball entry port, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to such a game machine, by replacing the ball entry unit with another ball entry unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the game machine while diverting (combining) the game board. it can. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the ball entry unit is arranged on the front surface of the game board, for example, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance on the front surface of the game board. Therefore, when a ball entry unit having a small number of passages is used, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the ball entry unit has a ball entry port and a first passage connected to the ball entry port, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. Since it is provided with one unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage as well as being arranged on the back side of the first unit via an opening of the game board, it is provided on the front surface of the game board. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and it is not necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passage) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), when changing the specifications of the game board while diverting (combining) the game board, the game board You can effectively use the space in front of.

In the game machine K1, at least a part of the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is viewed from the front. A game machine K2 characterized in that it is arranged at overlapping positions.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, the first unit is formed of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed in an outer shape smaller than that of the first unit, and the first unit is formed in a front view. Since it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. For example, the game board is formed from plywood or a sticker is attached to the game board. Since it is permissible to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine K2, the game machine K3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light transmitting material.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K2, at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, so that it flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball to be played, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The first unit may be entirely made of a light-transmitting material. When only a part of the first unit is made of a light transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion overlapping the second passage of the second unit is formed of the light transmitting material in the front view. This is because the flow of the game ball can be visually recognized to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the first unit is formed of a colorless light transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light transmitting material.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, the first unit is formed of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is formed of a colored light-transmitting material, so that through the first unit. When the second unit is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the positional relationship between the first unit and the second unit in the front-rear direction. That is, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the mode in which the game ball changes its position in the front-rear direction and flows down, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game machine K4, the game machine K5 is characterized in that information composed of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second passage of the second unit, so that the second unit is visually recognized through the first unit. Even in this case, the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) can be easily recognized by the player by using the display as a mark (reference position). Examples of display modes include printing with ink, sticking of stickers, and two-color molding.

In any of the game machines K1 to K5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage into a plurality of second upstream passages. And a plurality of second connecting passages connected to each of the plurality of second branch passages, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit and the second upstream passage. A second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connecting passages are formed are provided. The game machine K6 is characterized in that detection sensors for detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the game machine K6, in any of the game machines K1 to K5, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. The second upstream unit and the second downstream unit arranged in the second upstream unit and forming a plurality of second connecting passages are provided, and the passage of a game ball is detected in the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensors are arranged, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a smaller number of second branch passages to manufacture a gaming machine having different specifications, the number of detection sensors arranged can be changed. It is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passage, the detection sensors can be arranged as many as the number of the second connecting passages. For example, the second upstream unit in which two second branch passages are formed is provided. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to arrange one detection sensor, but only for the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that the detection sensor will be arranged. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of arrangements.

In the game machine K6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. A detection sensor is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and detects a game ball in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. A game machine K7 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the first unit is provided with a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the ball is entered into the second entry port. A third passage through which the game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit, and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is placed in a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are arranged, the detection sensors arranged in the second unit can be dispersed, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the passage can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the first unit and the third passage of the second unit are directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by combining the two units.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effect of the game machine K7, the second passage directly or indirectly engages with the first passage, or the third passages of the first unit and the second unit are connected to each other. Is directly or indirectly engaged to position the second unit with respect to the first unit, so that positioning is possible even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passages are connected is the same, so that the second passage is relative to the first passage. Or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, so that even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is aimed at suppressing the occurrence of misalignment (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages. Since the target portion (the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned, the misalignment (compared to the case of positioning other parts) ( The occurrence of steps) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any of the game machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage is projected toward the second downstream unit and is projected. The gaming machine K9, characterized in that a receiving portion for receiving a part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine K9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K6 to K8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. At the same time, a receiving portion for receiving a part of the protruding detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, so that the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit can be positioned by engaging the detection sensor with the receiving portion. While making it possible to do this, it is possible to suppress the part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside, and to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole.

In the game machines K1 to K6, the first unit includes a second entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes. However, in the second unit, the gaming machine K10 is formed at least between the second branch passages.

According to the game machine K10, in addition to the effects of the game machines K1 to K9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second entry port passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. Since it is formed in, the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any of the game machines K1 to K10, the second passage is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend at the bent portion. The game machine K11 is characterized in that an upright portion is erected from the ground, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down.

According to the game machine K11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K10, a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit is formed in the second passage, and the bending portion is formed. An upright portion is erected from the inner surface of the bent outer wall portion in the portion, and the bent outer wall portion is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the bent portion of the passage. That is, by erecting the erecting portion from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bending of the bent portion, the rigidity of the passage is increased to improve the durability, and the game ball is moved along the erecting tip of the erecting portion. While it is possible to guide the bent portion to flow down smoothly, the standing portion is located in front of the game ball in the front view, so that the game ball is hidden in the standing portion and the visibility of the game ball is visible. Decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as the game ball flows down, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while standing. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 as examples>
In a game machine including a first passage member through which a game ball passes and a second passage member in which an upstream end is connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and a game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The game machine L1 is characterized in that at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. ..

Here, a game including a first passage member through which the game ball passes and a second passage member in which the upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and the game ball flowing down from the first passage member passes through. The machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5783). However, in the structure connecting the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, a positional deviation between the two is unavoidable, so that the downstream end of the first passage member and the upstream end of the second passage member There is a problem that a step is formed in the connecting portion of the game ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine L1, at least the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side of the upstream ends of the second passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , The timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface (upstream end of the bottom surface) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

In the game machine L1, the game machine L2 is characterized in that a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, a position separated by the radius of the game ball from the bottom surface upstream end is included in the side surface upstream end, so that the game ball moves from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), the game ball can be inscribed at the upstream end of the side surface. That is, the position of the step on the bottom surface side and the position of the step on the side surface side on which the game ball is affected can be surely made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influence, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes). ) Can be made.

In the game machine L1 or L2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side of the downstream ends of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the first The passage member is provided with a protruding piece that protrudes from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member and whose protruding tip is the downstream end of the side surface, and the second passage member is the upstream end thereof. The gaming machine L3 is provided with a recess that is recessed in the wall and receives the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, the first passage member is projected from the downstream end thereof toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip is the side downstream end. The second passage member is provided with a recess that is recessed in the upstream end thereof to receive the protruding piece, and the portion facing the protruding tip of the protruding piece is the upstream end of the side wall. The side surface downstream end and the bottom surface downstream end of the member can be brought close to the side surface upstream end and the side surface downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed at a different position on the downstream side in the passing direction of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface upstream end, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the protruding piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the protruding piece has relatively weak rigidity and may be broken. However, according to the game machine L3, the protruding piece is formed on the first passage member (that is, on the upstream side in the passage direction of the game ball). Even if the protruding piece is broken, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member are displaced in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball has a step on the bottom surface side (bottom surface). The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the step on the bottom surface side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and to disperse the influence, so that the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly by that amount. it can.

Further, according to the game machine L3, since the game machine protruding piece is formed in the first passage member and the recess is formed in the second passage member, the side surface of the recess is brought into contact with the protruding piece, so that the first The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be regulated. That is, at a step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be flipped up when riding on it, so that the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member). Also, the smooth flow (passage) of the game ball is likely to be hindered as compared with the step) in which the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position. Therefore, as in the game machine L3, the upward displacement of the second aisle member with respect to the first aisle member can be regulated at a position where the upstream end of the second aisle member is higher than the downstream end of the first aisle member. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of the game ball.

In the game machine L3, the game machine L4 is characterized in that the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of the game machine L3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed. Compared with the case where the game ball is formed orthogonally to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be slid along the inclination to be less likely to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In the game machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1 or L2, at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. The upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, as compared with the case where the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed orthogonal to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball colliding with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member is slid along the inclination. You can make it harder to be bounced off. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

In this case, according to the game machine L5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed in an inclined manner, as compared with the case where the second passage member is formed in a shape having protrusions or recesses (stepped shape), for example. , The occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. Further, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity (cavity portion) of the injection molding die can be changed slowly, so that bubble accumulation (air biting) and poor filling can be suppressed and molding is performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

The game machine L6 is characterized in that, in the game machine L4 or L5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passing direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effect of the game machine L4 or L5, the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member is formed. The game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pressed toward the bottom surface. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being flipped up at the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member and bouncing. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the smooth passage (flow down) of the game ball.

<Concept of the invention using the specific winning opening unit 550 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry port, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair of wing members. In a gaming machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to the pair of wing members, the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that when the pair of wing members are displaced, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members arranged across the entry port, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close the ball. When the pair of wing members is released by the driving means to be driven and the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wings are arranged at an allowable position to allow the game ball to enter the ball entrance, and the pair of wings are arranged by the driving force of the driving means. There is known a game machine provided with a regulating means arranged at a regulating position for restricting the entry of a game ball into a ball entry port when a member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this game machine, when a pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at an allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of wing members can be entered. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the regulating means is arranged at the regulated position. Therefore, when the pair of wing members are forcibly released from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate the entry of balls.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the regulating means is not regulated, for example, the regulating means can be displaced from the regulated position to the allowable position after the pair of feather members are forcibly released from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating the illegal entry of the game ball into the entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, when a pair of feather members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction, the transmission mechanism can regulate the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction. It is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released. Therefore, it is possible to easily regulate that the game ball is illegally entered into the entrance.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the sliding groove is formed. In a state in which a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion is recessed in the inner wall of the sling member when the sliding member is slidably displaced to a position where the wing member is closed, and the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. , The gaming machine M2 characterized in that the rotation of the wing member is restricted.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slidably displaced to the position where the wing member is closed is recessed in the inner wall of the sliding groove. In the state where the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

In the game machine M2, the game machine M3 is characterized in that the direction of slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2, the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so that the wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even when the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a slide displacement component of the slide member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released.

Further, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the wing member. As a result, the space required for arranging the wing member and the slide member can be suppressed, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine M2 or M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion by sliding displacement of the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M2 or M3, the slide member is slid and displaced downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion, so that the weight of the slide member is heavy. By using (own weight), it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is accepted by the receiving portion.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member is provided with a contact portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the one side contacted portion is provided. One side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the slide member, the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least until the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contact portion. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the wing member is closed, one side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the one-side contact portion and the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member, so that the rotating member is not rotated. Sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to the position where the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion on the other side, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the rotation occurs. By further rotating the member to the other side, the slide member can be slid and displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the game machine M1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotating member, and the slide member or the pair of wings. A projecting portion is projected from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of wing members, and the rotating member is formed. The slide member is provided with a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member is said when the rotating member is rotated toward one side in order to close the wing member. The one-sided contacted portion with which one side of the contacted portion is contacted, and the one-sided contacted portion are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the wing member. When the member is rotated toward the other side, the other side of the contact portion is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion, and when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion slides. When the slide member is disengaged from the member and the slide member is slidably displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion abuts on one side of the contact portion. The gaming machine M6, wherein the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the rotating member includes a contact portion and an overhanging portion protruding from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the wing member. Therefore, when the rotating member is rotated toward one side, one side of the contacting portion is brought into contact with the one-sided contacted portion, and the one-sided contacted portion and the one-sided contacted portion are separated by a predetermined interval in the direction of slide displacement. Since the rotating member is provided with the other side contacted portion that is brought into contact with the other side of the contacting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the wing member, the rotating member is on one side. When it is rotated to, the one-sided contact portion is pushed by one side of the abutting portion, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward one side, so that the wing member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the contacted portion on the other side is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. , The wing member is released.

In this case, when the slide member is slid and displaced from the closed state of the wing member to the position where the one-side contact portion is brought into contact with one side of the contact portion, the overhanging portion engages with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide and displace the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member. Therefore, by further rotating the rotating member to the other side, the slide member is slid and displaced toward the other side. The wing member can be opened. Here, when the overhanging portion is engaged with the slide member in the state where the wing member is closed, the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be allowed to rotate to the other side of the rotating member. It is necessary to form the shape into a simple shape, which complicates the shape. Therefore, not only the strength is lowered, but also the engagement may be easily disengaged. On the other hand, as in the present invention, in the state where the wing member is closed, the overhanging portion is not engaged with the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion can be rotated. It is not necessary to form the member in a shape that allows rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only the shape can be simplified and the strength can be secured, but also a shape that can easily hold the engagement can be adopted, and the engagement can be difficult to be disengaged.

In any of the game machines M2 to M6, when a passage member for forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entry port is provided and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the said The gaming machine M7, characterized in that a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M2 to M6, a passage member for forming a passage of the game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not in the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. Therefore, for example, even if the projecting portion is cut and the wing member is forcibly opened from the outside, the ball enters from the entrance. The flow of the game ball can be regulated by the slide member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 930 as an example>
A ball entry port formed so that a game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the ball entry port to open or close the ball entry port, and a pair of wing members. In a game machine provided with a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a ball and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, a game ball inserted into the ball entry port. A game machine N1 comprising a passage member forming the passage of the above, wherein a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member when the wing member is displaced from an open position to a closed position.

Here, an entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, a pair of wing members rotatably supported at a position sandwiching the entry opening, and a pair of wing members that open or close the entry opening, and a pair thereof. A game machine including a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating a wing member and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving force to a pair of wing members is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-). No. 23409). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the wing member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entry port and passed through the passage of the passage member, and the thread is in a state where the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor. There is a fraudulent act in which the detection sensor detects the game ball multiple times by operating (drawing and pulling) the other end of the game ball to reciprocate the game ball. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress fraudulent acts in which the tip of a thread is adhered to a game ball and the detection sensor detects it a plurality of times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, a part of the transmission mechanism crosses the passage of the passage member, so that the tip of the thread is adhered to the game ball. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the portion. As a result, by reciprocating the game ball, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts caused by the detection sensor to detect a plurality of times.

In the game machine N1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member and the slide member rubs against the edge of the passage member. A game machine N2 characterized by having a rubbing portion.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, in the transmission mechanism, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, and the slide member is the passage member. Since it is provided with a rubbing portion that rubs against the edge portion, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the rubbing portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, The middle part of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the rubbing portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the rubbing portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the rubbing portion The thread can be cut between the and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The rubbing portion of the slide member is preferably formed of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part (rubbing portion) of the slide member may be formed of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the passage member (the portion where the rubbing portion is rubbed) may be formed of the metal material. Further, the rubbing portion and the portion (edge portion of the passage member) to which the rubbing portion is rubbed are preferably formed as a blade (cutting blade).

In the game machine N1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. A game machine N3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, a pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub each other's edges when the wing member is displaced from the opening position to the closing position. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a cutting member, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the entrance.

That is, even if the above-mentioned game ball is inserted with the wing member open, the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and when the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, The middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball can be sandwiched between a pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

The pair of cutting members is preferably formed from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be formed of a metal material, or only a part of the slide member (edges that are rubbed against each other) may be formed of a metal material. Further, the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in contact with each other are preferably formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine N2 or N3, the drive means is displaced in the first direction of the drive shaft by an electromagnetic force, and the drive shaft is displaced in a second direction opposite to the first direction. It is formed as a solenoid actuator performed by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine N4 characterized by.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2 or N3, the displacement from the opening position to the closing position of the wing member is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut an illegal object (for example, a thread) between the rubbing portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 19930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the other side. In a game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, at least one of the first passage and the second passage is arranged along a direction intersecting the game board. A game machine O1 characterized by being played.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the ball passes is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that the space was reduced.

According to the game machine O1, at least a part of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is arranged along the direction intersecting the game board, so that there is a relatively large space in the front-rear direction (on the game board). At least a part of the passage can be arranged by utilizing the space in the direction of intersection). Therefore, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine O1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by a shaft, and the rotation shaft is arranged along the width direction of the game board.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the distribution member, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. The distribution direction of the game balls can be the direction (front-back direction) that intersects the game board. Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine O2, the game machine O3 is characterized in that at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap in a top view.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2, at least a part of the first passage and at least a part of the second passage overlap in the top view, so that the distribution unit is miniaturized in the width direction. Therefore, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

The game machine O2 or O3 includes a first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage is extended along a direction intersecting the game board and the distribution member. A first upstream passage extending from the first upstream passage to the rear and a first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage are provided, and the first detecting means is arranged in the first upstream passage. A game machine O4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of the game machine O2 or O3, the first passage extends along the direction intersecting the game board and extends backward from the distribution member, and the first upstream passage thereof. A first downstream passage extending downward from the first upstream passage is provided, and the first detecting means is arranged in the first upstream passage. Therefore, the first detecting means is brought closer to the distribution member. The first detection means can be easily made visible to the player. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the whereabouts of the game ball from the time when the ball is distributed to one side by the sorting device until it is detected by the first detection means, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The first passage and the second passage are preferably formed of a light-transmitting material that allows the passing game ball to be visually recognized from the outside.

In the game machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage includes an expanding means for expanding the displaceable region of the game ball, and the expanding means is arranged between the distribution member and the first detecting means. A game machine O5 characterized by being installed.

Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to run wild due to the impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, if the first detection means is brought close to the distribution member, chattering may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of the game machine O4, the first upstream passage of the first passage is provided with an expansion means for expanding the displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means swings. Since it is arranged between the dividing member and the first detecting means, when the game ball is violent due to the impact during the sorting operation by the distributing member, the violence of the game ball is absorbed by the expanding means. can do. As a result, it is possible to bring the first detection means closer to the distribution member, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

As an example of the expanding means, a means for increasing the cross-sectional area of the passage in the first upstream passage of the first passage is exemplified.

The game machine O5 is characterized in that the game machine O5 includes a first branch passage branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

According to the game machine O6, in addition to the effect of the game machine O5, a first branch passage branched from the first upstream passage of the first passage is provided, and an expansion means is formed by the first branch passage. When the rampage of the ball is relatively small, the rampage of the game ball can be suppressed by the expansion means (internal space of the first branch passage) to suppress the occurrence of chattering, while the rampage of the game ball is relatively large. That is, in the case of a large rampage in which the occurrence of chattering cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be discharged by the first branch passage.

Further, the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, so that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member passes through the first upstream passage and is detected by the first detection means. It is possible to form a form in which the first detection means cannot be reached and the first branch passage is discharged. As a result, it is possible to give the player the game property that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is expected to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the guidance destination of the game ball by the first branch passage include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

In the game machine O6, at least the first upstream passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage. Game machine O7.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effect of the game machine O6, at least the first upstream passage of the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is lateral to the first upstream passage. Since it is branched from, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through the first upstream passage and enhance the interest of the game. That is, the game balls that are distributed to one side by the distribution member and pass through the first upstream passage are visible, so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to give the player the playability of expecting that. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, by branching the first branch passage from the side of the first upstream passage, an area of a display surface for displaying information related to the game is secured on the upper surface of the first upstream passage or the first branch passage. it can. Examples of the information regarding the game include information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the first branch passage. As the guidance destination, for example, an out port is exemplified.

The entire first passage may be formed of a light-transmitting material, or the first branch passage may be formed of a light-transmitting material.

In the game machine O6 or O7, the game machine O8 is characterized in that the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means.

According to the game machine O8, in addition to the effect of the game machine O6 or O7, the first upstream passage and the first branch passage are merged on the downstream side of the arrangement position of the first detection means, so that the first The downstream passage can be used not only as a passage for a game ball that has passed through the first upstream passage, but also as a passage for a game ball that has passed through the first branch passage. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized.

In the game machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage and is juxtaposed with the first upstream passage, and the first upstream passage is the first branch passage. A game machine O9 characterized by being merged to the side of.

According to the game machine O9, in addition to the effect of the game machine O8, the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first upstream passage and juxtaposed with the first upstream passage, and the first upstream passage Is merged to the side of the first branch passage, so that the first downstream passage can be offset to the first branch passage side with respect to the first upstream passage. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members below the first upstream passage.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 20930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to the one side, and distribution to the other side. In a gaming machine provided with a second detection means for detecting the game ball, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection. The gaming machine P1 is provided with an adjusting means for adjusting so that the difference from the time required for detection by the means is small.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first detection means for detecting the game ball distributed to one side, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A gaming machine including a second detecting means for detecting the above is known (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there are restrictions on the layout of the passage for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in design was low.

That is, when the display means displays that the game balls have been detected by the first detection means and the second detection means to notify the player (for example, the number of detected game balls is displayed as the number of reserved balls). Case), the time required for the game ball to reach the distribution member and be distributed to one side to be detected by the first detection means, and the time required for the game ball distributed to the other side to be detected by the second detection means. If the time required is different, the time from reaching the distribution member to being displayed will differ depending on the distribution direction, and the interest of the game will be impaired.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine described above, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detection means or the second detection means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the distribution member, and the first detection means and the first detection means and the first 2 It is necessary to dispose the detection means at the same distance from the distribution member, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design is low.

According to the game machine P1, the difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the game ball to be detected by the second detection means is adjusted to be small. Since the adjusting means is provided, the passages for guiding the distributed game balls to the first detecting means or the second detecting means are arranged symmetrically with respect to the sorting member, and the first detecting means and the second detecting means are provided. It is not necessary to dispose the means at the same distance from the distribution member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passage and the arrangement positions of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P1, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member are said to be the first. 2. A second passage for guiding to the detecting means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion is used as the adjusting means. Game machine P2 to play.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1, the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is distributed to the other side by the distribution member and the first passage for guiding the game ball to the first detection means. A second passage for guiding the game ball to the second detecting means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a recess or a protrusion, and the recess or the protrusion is used as an adjusting means. Therefore, the time required for the first detection means to detect the game ball that has reached the distribution member by utilizing the fact that the movement speed is reduced due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recess or the protrusion. It is possible to surely make an adjustment to reduce the difference between the time required for detection by the second detection means and the time required for detection by the second detection means. In addition, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

The adjusting means (recess or protrusion) may be arranged in only one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be arranged in both the first passage and the second passage. In addition, when a plurality of recesses or protrusions are arranged, the size of the recesses or protrusions (concave depth, protrusion height, width of the recess or protrusion, etc.) and the arrangement interval are the same. It may be present or different.

Further, the first passage and the second passage may be formed symmetrically (same shape) with respect to the distribution member, or may be formed asymmetrically. Even if they are formed symmetrically, the speed of the game ball can be reduced by the resistance when passing through the recess or the protrusion, so that the first detection means and the second detection means are the same from the distribution member. It can be unnecessary to dispose of them at a distance. That is, it is possible to secure a degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P1 or P2, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to the one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the game ball distributed to the other side by the distribution member. A second passage for guiding to the second detection means, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage includes a drop region in which the game ball is freely dropped, and the drop region is the adjusting means. A game machine P3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect of the game machine P1 or P2, the first passage for guiding the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member to the first detection means, and the distribution member to the other side. A second passage for guiding the distributed game ball to the second detection means is provided, and at least one of the first passage or the second passage is provided with a drop area in which the game ball is freely dropped, and the drop area is adjusted. Since it is used as a means, it is less likely to receive frictional resistance than the form in which the game ball rolls due to frictional resistance from the rolling surface, and the movement speed is efficient because the gravitational acceleration is applied to the maximum. The difference between the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the game ball to be detected by the second detection means is reduced. Adjustments can be made reliably. In addition, the structure of the adjusting means can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

The adjusting means (falling region) may be arranged in only one of the first passage and the second passage, or may be arranged in both the first passage and the second passage. Further, when a plurality of falling regions are arranged, the lengths of the falling regions may be the same or different.

In the game machine P2 or P3, the first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the recess or the protrusion is arranged in the first passage downstream from the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A game machine P4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2 or P3, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the first branch passage is located in the first passage downstream from the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. Since the recess or the protrusion is arranged, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first branch passage under the influence of the recess or the protrusion.

In the game machine P2 or P3, the first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the recess or the protrusion is arranged in the first passage upstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. A game machine P5 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effect of the game machine P2 or P3, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and the first passage is located upstream of the branch position where the first branch passage is branched. Since the recess or protrusion is arranged, whether or not the game is branched to the first branch passage by utilizing the fact that the moving speed is reduced due to resistance when the game ball passes through the recess or protrusion. The whereabouts of the game ball can be easily made visible to the player.

In any of the game machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means makes the time required for the distribution member to distribute the game ball to the one side different from the time required for the operation to distribute the game ball to the other side. A game machine P6 characterized by.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P5, the adjusting means includes the time required for the distribution member to distribute the game ball to one side and the time required for the operation to distribute the game ball to the other side. Therefore, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the time required for the second detection means to detect the game ball using the time difference are different. It is possible to surely make adjustments to reduce the difference between the two. Further, since it can be adjusted by the distribution member, the degree of freedom in design can be increased with respect to the layout of the passage and the arrangement position of the first detection means and the second detection means.

In the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the center of gravity is biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the one side and the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side are different.

According to the game machine P7, in addition to the effect of the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the axis, and the center of gravity is biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis, and the adjusting means is Because the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to one side and the time required for the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side are different due to the bias of the center of gravity position, the structure of the adjusting means is simplified and the product cost is reduced. it can.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

In the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the shaft, and the adjusting means causes the game ball to be distributed to the one side by making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction. The gaming machine P8, characterized in that the time required and the time required for the operation of distributing to the other side are different.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of the game machine P6, the distribution member is rotatably supported by the shaft, and the adjusting means makes the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction to make the game ball. Since the time required for the operation of distributing to one side and the time required for the operation of distributing to the other side are different, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second time. It is possible to surely make an adjustment to reduce the difference from the time required for detection by the detection means.

As a means for making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to one direction, and the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to the other rotation. Is transmitted to another gear, and the rotation resistance is increased by the amount of rotation of the other gear.

In any of the game machines P1 to P8, the distribution member is formed in a manner different from the one-side receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to the one side and the one-side receiving surface, and distributes to the other side. The gaming machine P9 comprising the other side receiving surface for receiving the game ball, and the one side receiving surface and the other side receiving surface are used as the adjusting means.

According to the game machine P9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P8, the distribution member has a one-side receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to one side and a mode different from the one-side receiving surface. The other side receiving surface that is formed and receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side is provided, and since those one side receiving surface and the other side receiving surface are used as adjustment means, the behavior of the game ball received by the one side receiving surface. Using the difference between the behavior of the game ball received by the other side receiving surface and the behavior of the game ball received by the other side receiving surface, the time required for the game ball reaching the distribution member to be detected by the first detection means and the second detection means are detected. It is possible to surely make adjustments to reduce the difference from the time required for the operation.

As the difference between the mode of the one-side receiving surface and the other-side receiving surface, for example, the difference in the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction and the difference in the material (elastic modulus) are exemplified, and the one-side receiving surface and the other-side receiving surface receive the difference. As the difference in the behavior of the game balls, the ease of bouncing of the game balls is exemplified. For example, if the bounce of the game ball received on one side receiving surface is larger than the bounce of the game ball received on the other side receiving surface, the flow of the game ball is delayed by the amount of the bounced period. Therefore, the time required for the first detection means to detect the ball can be gained.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 24930 as an example>
The arrangement in a game machine including a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and an arrangement member on which the distribution member is arranged. The gaming machine Q1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member when an external force is applied to the member.

A game machine is known that includes a distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, and an arrangement member on which the distribution member is arranged (). JP-A-2017-148189). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that when an external force is applied to the disposing member by hitting by a player, the distribution member may be rotated due to the influence of inertial force. It was.

That is, when the game ball distributed to one side is guided to a winning opening to which a higher game value is given than the game ball distributed to the other side, for example, by hitting the game machine, the disposing member By applying an external force to the ball, the distribution member is rotated by the inertial force, and the posture of the distribution member is changed (the game ball is rotated to a posture that can be distributed to one side). It was.

According to the game machine Q1, since the distribution member is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member by the external force applied to the arrangement member, even when the external force is applied to the arrangement member, it is affected by the inertial force. , It is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraud in rotating the distribution member by the action of an external force.

The disposing member includes the first member itself on which the distribution member is axially supported, but is not limited to the first member, and the second member on which the first member is disposed and the second member. A third member that is directly or indirectly connected to the second member is also included. As the second member, a case member that rotatably supports the distribution member and forms the skeleton of the distribution unit is exemplified, and as the third member, in addition to the game board on which the distribution unit is arranged, Various members (for example, an outer frame, an inner frame, a front frame, a glass plate, etc.) that are directly or indirectly connected to the game board are exemplified.

Further, as the external force, a force input to the game machine due to an act of hitting or shaking by the player is exemplified.

In the game machine Q1, the distribution member is characterized in that its rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, the rotation axis of the distribution member is arranged along the width direction of the game board, so that the distribution direction of the game ball by the distribution member is changed. It can be the direction that intersects the board (front-back direction). Therefore, the passages for guiding the game balls distributed to one side or the other side by the distribution member can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit provided with the distribution member can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In this way, the configuration in which the rotation axis of the distribution member is arranged along the width direction of the game board is such that when the player hits the front surface (glass plate) of the game machine, the inertia due to the action of the external force is applied. Since the force acts on the distribution member as a force in the direction of rotating the distribution member, it was impossible to adopt it in the conventional product, but a suppressing means for suppressing the rotation of the distribution member is provided. This makes it possible to adopt it for the first time, and as a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members and prevent fraud.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the position of the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position overlapping the rotation axis in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, so that an external force acts on the arrangement member. The gaming machine Q3, characterized in that the distribution member is suppressed from being rotated when the distribution member is rotated.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position overlapping the rotation axis in the direction of the rotation axis of the distribution member. Since the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the arrangement member, the influence of the inertial force applied to the distribution member (distribution) when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. The force component that tries to rotate the member) can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the suppressing means has an inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to one side with respect to the vertical direction and an inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to the other side with respect to the vertical direction. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the disposition member by making the arrangement member different from the above.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the suppressing means is the inclination angle of the distribution member rotated to one side with respect to the vertical direction and the distribution member rotated to the other side. By making the angle of inclination with respect to the vertical direction different from that of the above, it is possible to prevent the distribution member from rotating when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. One state can be made larger than the other. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

In the game machine Q3 or Q4, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetrical plane.

According to the game machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q3 or Q4, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape with the virtual plane including the rotation axis as the symmetrical plane, so that the shape of the distribution member is simplified. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means arranges the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position biased to the one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis, so that an external force is applied to the arrangement member. A game machine Q6 characterized in that the distribution member is suppressed from being rotated in some cases.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means is arranged by arranging the center of gravity of the distribution member at a position biased to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis. Since the rotation of the distribution member is suppressed when an external force is applied to the member, the force required to rotate the distribution member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side or the other side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of attaching a weight and a method of making the shape asymmetric with respect to the rotation axis.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means causes the distribution member to rotate when an external force is applied to the arrangement member by making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction. A game machine Q7 characterized by suppressing.

According to the game machine Q7, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means makes the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, so that the distribution member is distributed when an external force is applied to the arrangement member. Since the rotation of the member is suppressed, the force required to rotate the distribution member can be made larger in one state than in the other state. Therefore, by setting the direction (distribution direction) of the distribution member according to the direction in which the external force is applied, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of the external force.

As a means for making the rotation resistance of the distribution member different depending on the rotation direction, for example, a one-way gear is interposed, the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to one direction, and the rotation of the distribution member is not transmitted to the other rotation. Is transmitted to another gear, and the rotation resistance is increased by the amount of rotation of the other gear.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means has a long hole shape for a shaft hole that pivotally supports the rotation axis of the distribution member, so that the distribution member is subjected to an external force when an external force is applied to the distribution member. A game machine Q8 characterized in that the rotation of the game machine is suppressed.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the suppressing means acts on the disposing member by forming the shaft hole that supports the rotation axis of the distribution member into an elongated hole shape. Since it suppresses the rotation of the distribution member when it is performed, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force. That is, by setting the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape and the acting direction of the external force to be equal to or less than a predetermined angle, the distribution member can be rotated when the distribution member receives the game ball. On the other hand, when an external force (inertial force) is applied to the distribution member, the rotation axis of the distribution member can be slid along the longitudinal direction of the shaft hole to consume the applied energy. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the distribution member due to the action of an external force.

The direction of action of the external force is the direction orthogonal to the front surface (glass plate) of the game machine (direction substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction) when it is assumed that the player hits the front surface of the game machine. .. In this case, the angle formed by the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole shape and the vertical direction (the direction in which the game ball falls toward the distribution member) is preferably set to about 45 degrees or more, and is preferably about 60 degrees or less. It is more preferable to set it, and the angle which is substantially orthogonal is most preferable. When the game ball is received, the weight of the game ball makes it easier to rotate the distribution member reliably, while when an external force is applied, the rotation axis of the distribution member is a shaft hole (long hole). This is because it can be easily slid reliably along the longitudinal direction of.

In the game machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one of the one side or the other side toward the other side.

According to the game machine Q9, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q8, the shaft hole is inclined downward from one side or the other side toward the other side, so that energy consumption is increased and the distribution member is placed in the initial position. Can be returned to. That is, by setting the direction of the distribution member (inclination direction of the shaft hole) according to the direction in which the external force is applied, when the external force (inertial force) is applied to the distribution member, the distribution member The rotating shaft of the shaft can be slid in the direction of the ascending inclination of the shaft hole to increase the consumption of the applied energy, while it can be subsequently lowered by the descending inclination of the shaft hole to make the distribution member. It can be returned to the initial position.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to the one side wins a prize, and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize and the first winning opening is entered. It is provided with a second winning opening that gives a lower game value than the winning, and when the distribution member is rotated by an external force acting on the disposing member, the game ball is distributed to the other side. A game machine Q10 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine Q10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to one side wins and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize. It also has a second winning opening that gives a lower game value than the winning opening to the first winning opening, and when the distribution member is rotated by an external force acting on the disposing member, the game ball is moved to the other side. Since the posture is set to distribute to, it is possible to suppress an act of changing the posture of the distribution member (rotating the distribution member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting the game machine or the like.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, a first winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to the one side and a second winning opening for winning the game ball distributed to the other side are provided. The gaming machine Q11, characterized in that the game value given to the winning of the first winning opening and the game value given to the winning of the second winning opening are equal to each other.

According to the game machine Q11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines Q1 to Q9, the first winning opening in which the game ball distributed to one side wins and the game ball distributed to the other side wins a prize. It has a second winning opening, and the game value given to the winning of the first winning opening is equal to the game value given to the winning of the second winning opening. It is possible to suppress the action of changing the posture of the distribution member (rotating the distribution member) by applying an external force to the arrangement member by hitting or the like.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 34930 as an example>
In a game machine including a ball entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the ball entry port to one side or the other side, rotation of the distribution member. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side or the other side from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member in an axial view.

There is known a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017). -148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the ball entry port is arranged above the distribution member in the vertical direction in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball entered into the ball entry port is distributed. There is a problem that the mode until reaching the member becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is insufficient.

According to the game machine R1, the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side or the other side from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, so that the ball enters the ball entry port. It is possible to change the mode until the game ball reaches the distribution member. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine R1, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the one side is distributed to the other side by the distribution member. The game ball that acts on the game ball and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance in a state after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the other side is moved to the one side by the distribution member. The game machine R2 is characterized in that the configuration that acts on the game ball is different until it is sorted.

Here, when the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape. Even if it is, the ball is entered from the entrance and shaken depending on the posture of the distribution member (whether it is in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side or the state after it is distributed to the other side). The behavior of the game balls distributed by the dividing members is different, and there is a risk that a problem may occur.

For example, when the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to one side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member, the game ball heading from the ball entry port to the distribution member is Since it has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball (absence of distribution) in the direction of rotating the distribution member with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side. A game ball that also has a velocity component in the direction of rotation) collides, while the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side is opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated. A game ball (a game ball having a velocity component in the direction opposite to the direction in which the absence of distribution is rotated) collides in the direction of. Therefore, the behavior of the game ball that is input from the ball entry port and distributed by the distribution member differs depending on the posture of the distribution member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to one side is caused by the distribution member. The configuration that acts on the game ball before it is distributed to the other side, and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance after the distribution member has distributed the game ball to the other side is moved to one side by the distribution member. Since the configuration that acts on the game ball before it is sorted is different, it is possible to correspond to the behavior of the game ball that is entered from the ball entrance and sorted by the sorting member according to the posture of the sorting member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects.

The game machine R2 is provided with a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port to the distribution member, and the distribution member is viewed from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member. A gaming machine characterized in that the entry port is arranged at a position biased to one side, and the distribution member is arranged at a position biased toward the other side from below in the vertical direction of the exit of the guidance passage. R3.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2, a guide passage for guiding the game ball entering the ball entry port to the distribution member is provided, and the distribution member is provided in the direction of the rotation axis of the distribution member. Since the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from above in the vertical direction to one side, and the distribution member is arranged at a position biased from below in the vertical direction to the other side of the exit of the guidance passage, the game ball can be placed on the other It is possible to bring the position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry port and flowed out from the exit of the guidance passage collides with the distribution member that is in the state after being distributed to the side closer to the rotation center of the distribution member. As a result, the rotational moment applied to the distribution member due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine R2 or R3, the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state after the game ball is distributed to the one side is the distribution in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it is made larger than the inclination angle of the member with respect to the vertical direction.

According to the game machine R4, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2 or R3, the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state after the game ball is distributed to one side is after the game ball is distributed to the other side. Since it is made larger than the inclination angle of the distribution member with respect to the vertical direction in the state of, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port and has flowed out from the exit of the guidance passage is in the state after the game ball has been distributed to the other side. When colliding with the distribution member, the component of the force received by the distribution member in the direction of passing through the rotation axis can be increased. As a result, the rotational moment applied to the distribution member due to the collision of the game balls can be reduced, and damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine R3 or R4, the distribution member is characterized in that the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is larger than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the one side. Game machine R5 to play.

According to the game machine R5, in addition to the effect of the game machine R3 or R4, the rotation resistance of the distribution member in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is larger than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game machine to one side. Therefore, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed, and the sorting operation can be reliably performed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When it is received, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the distribution member comes into contact with the distribution member after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It collides with the surface that regulates the displacement to) at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R5, since the rotation resistance of the distribution member in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side is increased, the rotation resistance of the distribution member slows down the rotation of the distribution member to the other side. The impact when the distribution member that distributes the game ball to the other side collides with the stopper surface can be moderated. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

On the other hand, with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side, the speed is in the direction opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated to one side (direction from one side to the other side). Since the game balls having the components collide with each other, if the rotation resistance when rotating the distribution member to one side is increased, the distribution member that receives the game ball cannot rotate together with the game ball, and the game ball. Is easy to bounce off the sorting member. When the game ball bounces off the distribution member, the distribution member moves to one side while the game ball separates (bounces) from the distribution member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has rotated and is separated (bounced) falls, there is a risk that the game ball will be distributed to the other side opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R5, the distribution member makes the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game machine to one side smaller than the rotation resistance in the operation of distributing the game ball to the other side. When it is received, the distribution member can be easily rotated toward one side together with the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the received game ball from bouncing off from the distribution member and reliably distribute the game ball to one side.

In the game machine R5, the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of being interposed between the gear and the distribution member and distributing the game ball to the other side is performed by one gear or a plurality of gears forming a gear train. The gaming machine R6 is provided with a one-way clutch that transmits the game ball to the gear and does not transmit the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to the one side.

According to the game machine R6, one gear or a plurality of gears forming a gear train are interposed between the gears and the distribution member, and the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side is transmitted to the gears. Moreover, since the rotation of the distribution member in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side is provided with a one-way clutch that does not transmit to the gear, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side. The rotation of the distribution member is transmitted to the gear via the one-way clutch, and the gear is driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is increased by the amount of the driven gear. On the other hand, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side, the rotation of the distribution member is blocked by the one-way clutch and is not transmitted to the gear. That is, the gear is not driven. Therefore, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is reduced by the amount that the gear is not driven.

As described above, since the one-way clutch is configured to switch between transmission and non-transmission of rotation to the gears, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, a difference in rotational resistance with respect to the rotation direction can be reliably formed. Further, since the configuration can be relatively simple as to whether or not the gears are driven, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability can be improved accordingly.

In particular, since the inertial force of the gear when starting the driven state of the gear in the stopped state can be used as the rotational resistance of the distribution member, the rotational resistance immediately after the game ball collides with the distribution member can be used. In the present invention, which can be easily secured and the displacement amount in the distribution operation of the distribution member is relatively small, it is effective as a configuration for suppressing damage due to the collision of the distribution member with the stopper surface.

The method of the one-way clutch does not matter as long as it allows the transmission of rotation in one direction and blocks (regulates) the transmission of rotation in the other direction. Examples of the one-way clutch method include a sprag type and a cam type. When the rotating shaft of the distribution member is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch, the gear is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch, and the rotating shaft of the distribution member is connected to the outer ring side of the one-way clutch. A gear is connected to the inner ring side of the one-way clutch.

In the game machine R5 or R6, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape having a virtual plane including a rotation axis as a symmetrical plane.

According to the game machine R7, in addition to the effect of the game machine R5 or R6, the distribution member is formed in a symmetrical shape with the virtual plane including the rotation axis as the symmetrical plane, so that the shape of the distribution member is simplified. Therefore, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the directionality can be eliminated, the assembling property can be improved.

In the game machine R5 or R6, the game machine R8 is characterized in that the center of gravity of the distribution member is arranged at a position biased to the one side with respect to the rotation axis.

According to the game machine R8, the center of gravity of the distribution member is arranged at a position biased to one side with respect to the rotation axis. Therefore, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to the other side, the distribution member is rotated. Since the center of gravity is raised, the rotational resistance of the distribution member is increased accordingly. On the other hand, when the distribution member is rotated in the direction of distributing the game ball to one side, the center of gravity is lowered, so that the rotational resistance of the distribution member is reduced accordingly.

In this way, since the position of the center of gravity is set to a predetermined position, in addition to the effect of the game machine R5 or R6, the simplification can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced by that amount, and the reliability and durability can be reduced. Can be improved.

Examples of means for biasing the center of gravity of the distribution member to one side with respect to the rotation axis include a method of mounting a weight and a method of forming an asymmetrical shape with respect to the rotation axis.

In any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is characterized in that at least a receiving surface for receiving a game ball to be distributed to the other side is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward a rotation axis. Machine R9.

According to the game machine R9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is a curved surface in which the receiving surface for receiving the game ball to be distributed to at least the other side is convex toward the rotation axis. Since it is formed, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the game ball becomes a distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side. When it is received, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (the other side of the distribution member comes into contact with the distribution member after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It collides with the surface that regulates the displacement to) at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R9, in the distribution member, the receiving surface for receiving the game ball is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the rotation axis, so that the receiving game ball is placed along the curved surface. It can be slid or rolled. Therefore, the impact when the distribution member that distributes the game ball to the other side collides with the stopper surface can be moderated by the amount of sliding or rolling. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member is characterized in that the receiving surface for receiving the game ball distributed to the other side has a smaller inclination than the receiving surface for the game ball distributed to the other side. Game machine R10 to play.

According to the game machine R10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines R2 to R8, the distribution member has a receiving surface for receiving the game ball to be distributed to the other side, which is more inclined than the receiving surface for the game ball to be distributed to one side. Is reduced, damage to the sorting member can be suppressed, and the sorting operation can be reliably performed.

That is, since the game ball flowing down toward the distribution member has a velocity component in the direction from one side to the other side, the distribution member in a state after the game ball is distributed to one side ( That is, when it is received by the receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side, the distribution member is rotated toward the other side together with the received game ball, and the stopper surface (after the game ball is distributed to the other side). It abuts on the distribution member and collides with the surface that regulates the displacement of the distribution member to the other side at high speed. As a result, the distribution member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R10, since the inclination angle of the receiving surface of the distribution member that receives the game ball to be distributed to the other side is small, the wall thickness of the portion that collides with the stopper surface is small due to the small inclination. Can be increased. As a result, damage to the distribution member can be suppressed.

On the other hand, with respect to the distribution member in the state after the game ball is distributed to the other side, the speed is in the direction opposite to the direction in which the distribution member is rotated to one side (direction from one side to the other side). Since the game balls having the components collide with each other, if the inclination of the receiving surface of the game balls to be distributed to one side is small, the game balls are likely to bounce off the distribution member. When the game ball bounces off the distribution member, the distribution member moves to one side while the game ball separates (bounces) from the distribution member due to the impact of the collision of the game ball and the reaction when it bounces off. If a game ball that has rotated and is separated (bounced) falls, there is a risk that the game ball will be distributed to the other side opposite to the original distribution direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine R10, the distribution member has a large inclination angle of the receiving surface that receives the game ball to be distributed to one side, so that the large inclination causes the game ball that collides with the receiving surface. More velocity components can be added in the direction toward the distribution direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the received game ball from bouncing back from the distribution member, and it is possible to easily rotate the distribution member that has received the game ball toward one side together with the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to reliably distribute the game ball to one side.

<About the concept of the invention using the winning opening unit 19930 as an example>
A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to the one side passes, and the other side. In a game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the game ball passes, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. A game machine S1 characterized by being played.

A distribution member that operates by the weight of the game ball and distributes the game ball to one side or the other side, a first passage through which the game ball distributed to one side passes, and a game ball distributed to the other side. A game machine including a distribution unit having a second passage through which the ball passes is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the passages are arranged along the direction parallel to the game board, the distribution unit is enlarged in the width direction, and other members are arranged accordingly. There was a problem that the space was reduced.

According to the game machine S1, the distribution member is rotatably supported by an axis, and the rotation axis is arranged along the width direction of the game board. Therefore, the distribution direction of the game ball by the distribution member is set to the game board. It can be the direction of intersection (front-back direction). Therefore, the first passage and the second passage can also be arranged along the direction (front-back direction) intersecting the game board. As a result, the distribution unit can be miniaturized in the width direction, and a space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine S1, the game machine S1 includes a first detection means for detecting the game ball passing through the first passage, and the first passage includes an expansion means for expanding a displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means is the expansion means. The gaming machine S2, which is disposed between the distribution member and the first detecting means.

Here, when the game balls are distributed by the distribution member, the game balls are likely to run wild due to the impact during the distribution operation. Therefore, if the first detection means is brought close to the distribution member, chattering may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect of the game machine S1, the first passage is provided with an expansion means for expanding the displaceable area of the game ball, and the expansion means is a distribution member and the first detection. Since it is arranged between the means and the means, when the game ball is violent due to the impact during the sorting operation by the distribution member, the violence of the game ball can be absorbed by the expanding means. As a result, it is possible to bring the first detection means closer to the distribution member, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of chattering.

As an example of the expanding means, a means for increasing the cross-sectional area of the passage in the first upstream passage of the first passage is exemplified.

The game machine S3 is characterized in that the game machine S2 includes a first branch passage branched from the first passage, and the expansion means is formed by the first branch passage.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effect of the game machine S2, a first branch passage branched from the first passage is provided, and an expansion means is formed by the first branch passage, so that the rampage of the game ball is relatively low. If it is small, the expansion means (internal space of the first branch passage) can suppress the rampage of the game ball to suppress the occurrence of chattering, while the rampage of the game ball is relatively large, that is, the occurrence of chattering. In the case of a large rampage that cannot be suppressed, the game ball can be discharged by the first branch passage.

Further, a form in which the expanding means is formed by the first branch passage, and the game balls distributed to one side by the distribution member pass through the first passage and are detected by the first detection means, and the first It is possible to form a form in which the detection means cannot be reached and is discharged to the first passage. As a result, it is possible to give the player the game property that the game ball distributed to one side by the distribution member is expected to reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Examples of the guidance destination of the game ball by the first branch passage include an out opening, a winning opening, and a game area.

In the game machine S3, the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect of the game machine S3, the first passage is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage, so that the first passage It is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through the game and enhance the interest of the game. That is, the game balls that are distributed to one side by the distribution member and pass through the first upstream passage are visible, so that the game balls reach the first detection means without flowing out to the first branch passage. It is possible to give the player the playability of expecting that. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, since the first branch passage is branched from the side of the first passage, the area of the display surface for displaying the information related to the game can be secured on the upper surface of the first passage or the first branch passage. Examples of the information regarding the game include information regarding the guidance destination of the game ball guided by the first branch passage. As the guidance destination, for example, an out port is exemplified.

In addition, only a part of the first passage may be formed from a light-transmitting material, or the first branch passage may be formed from a light-transmitting material.

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A game machine X1 characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, A gaming machine X2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A9, B1 to B9, C1 to C11, D1 to D10, E1 to E7, F1 to F8, G1 to G16, H1 to H15, I1 to I10, J1 to J16, K1 to K11, L1 to L6, In any of M1 to M7, N1 to N4, O1 to O9, P1 to P9, Q1 to Q11, R1 to R10, and S1 to S4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A game machine X3 characterized by this. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
There is known a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017). -148189 (Ab.).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is insufficient.
The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 distributes the entry port into which the game ball is inserted and the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side. A member is provided, and the ball entry port is arranged at a position biased from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the game ball entered into the ball entrance in a state after the distribution member distributes the game ball to the one side. A configuration that acts on the game ball before it is distributed to the other side by the distribution member, and a ball that enters the ball entry port in a state after the distribution member distributes the game ball to the other side. The configuration is different from the configuration in which the game ball acts on the game ball until it is distributed to the one side by the distribution member.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine described in the technical idea 2, and includes a guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port to the distribution member, and a rotation shaft of the distribution member. In the directional view, the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from the upper side in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side, and the ball entrance is located at a position deviated from the lower side in the vertical direction of the exit of the guidance passage to the other side. Distribution members are arranged.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Thought 1, the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, damage can be suppressed in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 60, 19060 Base plate (game board)
60a, 19060a Through hole (opening)
60c light transmission hole (concave part)
64 1st winning opening (1st passage, entry opening)
140 2nd winning opening (entrance entrance, 1st entrance, 2nd passage)
65a Specified winning opening (second entry opening)
162 Transmission shaft rod (supporting means)
163 Driven member (displacement means)
175 Lower regulation part (second resistance means)
176 Upper regulation part (resistance means, first resistance means)
310 Rear case 405 Metal rail (guidance means)
410,3410 Transmission unit (transmission means)
411 Drive gear (transmission means)
412 Transmission gear (transmission means)
413 Termination gear (transmission means)
414 Arm member (transmission means)
425 Storage plate (support means)
425b Omitted part (open part)
427 Through hole (suppressing means)
428 Blocking plate (supporting means, suppressing means)
430 Lifting plate (basic means, intermediate means)
433 Cylindrical part (suppressing means)
441 Rotating gear (displacement forming means)
442 Relative displacement member (intermediate means, tip side means)
444 Auxiliary arm member (basic means, rotational displacement means)
444a Base end side (partly, rotating shaft)
444b Arc-shaped gear part (overhanging part)
444d Cylindrical part (other part, rotating shaft part)
460 pinnate member (tip side means, displacement means, first displacement means, second displacement means, arrangement displacement means)
464L forming part (first displacement means, first arrangement displacement means)
464R forming part (second displacement means, second arrangement displacement means)
490 Fixed transmission plate (displacement forming means)
708 Partition member (support plate)
712 Thin film cover member (thin film member)
714 Light guide member (guidance means)
730 Plate-shaped displacement member (displacement means, first displacement means)
735 Small receiving part (1st support part, 2nd support part)
736 Large receiving part (1st support part, 2nd support part)
740 Hollow member (second displacement means)
743 Protruding columnar part (second displacement means)
750 variable decorative member (second displacement means)
761,4761 Load member (displacement means, load applying means, transmitting means)
761c Vertical bar-shaped extension (pushing part)
761d Overhang (attachment, range setting means)
762 Shaft rod (support means)
764 Lower regulation part (second resistance means)
765 Upper regulation part (resistance means, first resistance means, range setting means)
777 Illuminations board (light emitting board)
DH1 electrical wiring (electrical supply means)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
S1 contact surface (split surface)
SOL1 electromagnetic solenoid (driving means)
SOL2 electromagnetic solenoid (driving means, load applying means, range setting means)
SP21 urging spring (load applying means)
3441 Rotating gear with arm (displacement forming means)
930, 19930, 20930, 21930, 22930, 23930, 24930, 25930, 26930, 27930, 28930, 29930, 30930, 31930, 32930, 33930, 34930, 35930, 36930, 37930, 38930, 39930, 40930, 41930 (Distribution member)
940 Front unit (1st member, 1st unit)
941 Back base (fixing member)
941g, 19941g 1st receiving part (ball entrance)
942c 2nd throwing part (1st passage member)
943,19943 Front base (main body member, ball entrance)
943a Rolling part (1st passage, 1st passage member)
945 wing member (first opening / closing member)
945b protrusion (protruding part)
951 Plate member (second opening / closing member, opening / closing member)
953a1 opening (ball entrance)
953a2 Rolling surface 953c Circular projection (seat)
954b Recess (guide groove)
954c Protruding part (second guiding means)
954c2 Side side 954c3 Side edge 954d Standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 2nd guide surface (1st inclined surface)
954d2 Second side edge (side edge)
955 Passage member (case member)
955a Recessed part (passage member)
957a1 Main body 957a2 Shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a Main body 961b Shaft (drive shaft)
962e Arm (2nd engaging part)
962f Wall part (covered surface part)
962g protruding part (first engaging part)
140 2nd winning opening (entry entrance, 2nd entrance)
965, 18965 Transmission member (rotating member, first transmission mechanism)
965a Tip (1st part)
965b rotating part (first part)
965c Rotating shaft 965d Protruding part (second part)
965e Insertion part (contact part)
966,8966,11966,12966,14966,18966 Displacement member (slide member, first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 Sliding groove 966a5 Inclined surface 8966a6 Recess (reception part)
966b2 One side contacted part 966b3 Other side contacted part 11968c, 18996g Blade part (rubbing part)
12966c2 2nd blade (cutting member)
6683 Blade (cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b Side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b Inclined part (bent part)
982h1, 982j1 Guide section (standing section)
985e1,985f1 Inflow passage (second connecting passage)
988b Magnetic material (adjusting means, suppressing means)
988c Magnetic material (adjusting means, suppressing means)
900 aisle unit (second downstream unit)
991c1,991d1 Recessed part (accepting part)
19941h Intermediate exit (second passage)
19980, 20980, 21980, 22980, 23980, 24980, 25980, 26980, 27980, 28980, 29980, 30980, 31980, 32980, 33980, 34980, 35980, 36980, 37980, 38980, 39980, 40980, 4980a , 31986a Side plate (guidance passage)
19982c, 39982c Game ball guide wall (guidance passage)
19982d Protruding part (guidance passage)
19983, 24983, 25983, 29983, 30983, 31983, 32983, 33983, 37983, 38993 Distribution member 21981b1 Protrusion (adjustment means, protrusion)
24983a1 Protrusion (adjustment means, suppression means)
26983a2 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
26982a4 Magnetic material (adjustment means)
27982b2 Back side contact part (adjustment means)
28982b2 Back side contact part (suppressing means)
30983f Rubber sheet (adjustment means, one side receiving surface, other side receiving surface)
32983g Center of gravity adjustment unit 32983g (suppressing means)
33983b1 Protrusion surface (adjustment means)
33983b2 concave surface (adjustment means)
34982c, 34985j Bearing part (suppressing means, shaft hole)
37983h Curved surface (receiving surface)
38983a3, 38983a4 Acting part (receiving surface)
TR0 throwing passage (second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1, TR201 1st passage (2nd passage, 2nd branch passage, 1st passage)
TR2, TR202 2nd passage (2nd passage, 2nd branch passage)
TR3 passage (second passage, adjustment means, drop area)
TR4, TR214, TR224, TR234 passages (first passage, first upstream passage)
TR5 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR6 passage (expansion means, first branch passage)
TR7 passage (first branch passage)
TR8 passage (1st passage, 1st branch passage, 1st downstream passage)
TR9 passage (second passage)
TR10 passage (second passage)
TR11 passage (first branch passage)
TR12 passage (1st passage, 1st downstream passage, 1st branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detector (detection sensor)
SE5 detection device (first detection means, second detection means)
SE6 detection device (second detection means, first detection means)
HS1 wiring HS2 wiring HS3 wiring SP urging spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screw C collar (support wheel)
θ1 1st drive range (outer range)
θ2 2nd drive range (center side range)
U1 opening (first branch passage)
U2 opening (expansion means, first branch passage)
U3 opening (1st passage, 1st downstream passage, 1st branch passage)
U4 opening (expansion means, first branch passage)
U5 opening (1st passage, 1st upstream passage, 1st downstream passage)
U6 opening (1st passage, 1st upstream passage, 1st winning opening, 2nd winning opening)
U7 opening (2nd passage, 2nd winning opening, 1st winning opening)
U8 opening (entrance)
U9 opening (second passage)
GY3 3rd gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gear)
GY4 4th gear (adjustment means, suppression means, gear)
GY5 5th gear (adjusting means, suppressing means, gear)
WG one-way gear (adjustment means, suppression means, one-way clutch)

Claims (3)

In a game machine provided with an entry port into which a game ball is inserted and a distribution member for distributing the game ball inserted into the entry port to one side or the other side.
A gaming machine characterized in that the ball entry port is arranged at a position deviated from above in the vertical direction of the distribution member to the one side or the other side in the rotation axis direction view of the distribution member. After the distribution member distributes the game ball to the one side, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port is distributed to the game ball by the distribution member until the game ball is distributed to the other side. Between the configuration that acts and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the game ball has been distributed to the other side by the distribution member until the game ball is distributed to the one side by the distribution member. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the structure that acts on the game ball is different from the above. A guide passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port to the distribution member is provided, and the distribution member is biased from above in the vertical direction to one side in the direction of rotation of the distribution member. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the ball entry port is arranged at a position, and the distribution member is arranged at a position deviated from the lower side in the vertical direction of the exit of the guide passage to the other side. ..

Images